Você está na página 1de 876

SERVICE

MANUAL
REVISION 0

JAN. 1999 FY8-13FD-000


COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/GP605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
IMPORTANT

THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS PUBLISHED BY CANON, INC., JAPAN.


SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY DIFFER SLIGHTLY FROM
ACTUAL MACHINE VALUES OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER PRINTED MATTER.

ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO


THE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE COMPANY.

COPYRIGHT 1999 CANON INC.


Printed in Japan
Imprimé au Japon

Use of this manual should be strictly


supervised to avoid disclosure of confi-
dential information.

Prepared by

OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 3


OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISION

CANON INC.

5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride, Ibaraki, 302-8501 Japan

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/GP605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
INTRODUCTION

This Service Manual contains basic data and figures on the GP605/605V needed to
service the machine in the field. The copier is a multifunction machine designed to provide
printer functions as an option.

This Service Manual consists of the following chapters; refer to the Copier Basic
Series as necessary for common technologies:

CHAPTER 1 General Description introduces the copier’s features and specifications,


shows how to operate the printer unit, and explains how copies are made.

CHAPTER 2 Basic Operation provides outlines of the steps used to generate copies.

CHAPTER 3 Exposure System discusses the principles of operation used for the
mechanical/electrical operations of the copier’s exposure system. It also explains the
timing at which the various units involved are operated, and shows how they may be
disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

CHAPTER 4 Image Processing System discusses the principles of operation used for
the mechanical/electrical operations of the copier’s image processing system. It also
explains the timing at which the various units involved are operated, and shows how they
may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

CHAPTER 5 Laser Exposure System discusses the principles of operation used for
the mechanical/electrical operations of the copier’s laser exposure system. It also
explains the timing at which the various units involved are operated, and shows how they
may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

CHAPTER 6 Image Formation System discusses the principles of how images are
formed. It also explains the timing at which the various units involved in image formation
are operated, and shows how they may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

CHAPTER 7 Pick-Up/Feeding System discusses the principles of how the printer unit
picks up and moves paper inside it. It also explains the timing at which the various units
involved are operated, and shows how they may be disassembled/assembled and
adjusted.

CHAPTER 8 Fixing System discusses the principles of how the printer unit fuses toner
images to paper. It also explains the timing at which the various units involved are
operated, and shows how they may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

CHAPTER 9 Externals/Auxiliary Mechanisms shows the copier’s external parts, and


explains the principles used for the copier’s various control mechanisms in view of the
functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation. It
also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

CHAPTER 10 Side Paper Deck discusses the principles of operation used for the
series of operations between pickup and delivery performed by the paper deck. It also
explains the timing at which the various units involved are operated, and shows how they
may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

CHAPTER 11 Installation introduces requirements for the site of installation, and


shows how the printer unit may be installed using step-by-step instructions.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) i
CHAPTER 12 Maintenance and Servicing provides tables of periodically replaced
parts and consumables/durables and scheduled servicing charts.

CHAPTER 13 Troubleshooting provides tables of maintenance/inspection, standards/


adjustments, and problem identification (image fault/malfunction).

APPENDIX contains a general timing chart and general circuit diagrams.

The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for
product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the
form of Service Information bulletins.

All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this
Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and
isolate faults in the machine.

This Service Manual is prepared so that a full understanding may be attained when it
is used side by side with the separately available Copier Basic Series. Refer to the
appropriate section of the document when prompted as follows:

EX.
Volume 3>Chapter 6>VI.A.2. "Cleaning the Charging Wire"
The Copier Basic Series is a combination of descriptions on the existing technologies
used in Canon copiers. It consists of the following seven volumes, and is intended to
supplement the contents of Service Manuals:

Volume I Introduction Fundamental Technology


Volume II Applied Technology Analog Copiers
Volume III Applied Technology Digital Copiers
Volume IV Applied Technology Color Copiers
Volume V Applied Technology Accessories
Volume VI Applied Technology Controllers
Volume VII Appendix Product Line and Accessories

ii COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN . 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
System Configuration

The GP605/605V may be configured as follows:

[3] [4] [5]

[2]

[1]

[1] Finisher-D1
[2] Printer Board
[3] Copy tray
[4] GP605/605V
[5] Side Paper Deck-C1

Figure 1

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) iii
When Turning Off the Main Power Switch

Be sure to turn off the main power switch, and disconnect the power plug before starting
disassembly/assembly work with the following in mind:

1. When you turn off the main power switch for adding printer functions, any data
being processed at the time may be lost. Check to make sure that the data lamp on
the control panel is off before operating the main power switch.
After turning off the main power switch, disconnect the communication cable from
the printer board so that data will not be accepted during work.
2. Do not turn off the main power switch when downloading is taking place. Other-
wise, the machine may stop operating.
3. Some units remain powered even when the control panel power switch is turned
off. Be sure to turn off the main power switch, and disconnect the power plug
before starting disassembly/assembly work.
(If the heater switch is on, the cassette heater and the drum heater remain pow-
ered even when the main power switch is turned off.)
4. Not all power will be removed even when the front door is opened if both the control
panel power switch and the main power switch are on.

[1] [2]
Copying Error Copying Error Data Error Data Error
COPY A COPY B MAIL BOX OPTIONS ON/OFF

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

ID 0 C

[3]

OFF ON

[4]

[1] Data lamp


[2] Power switch
[3] Main power switch
[4] Heater switch
Figure 2 Arrangement of the Switches

iv COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN . 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

I. FEATURES ................................. 1-1 B. Control Panel ....................... 1-17


II. SPECIFICATIONS ...................... 1-2 C. Extension Mode ................... 1-18
A. Copier .................................... 1-2 D. User Mode ........................... 1-19
1. Type .................................. 1-2 V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE
2. System .............................. 1-2 USER ........................................ 1-21
3. Performance ..................... 1-3 VI. SAFETY .................................... 1-22
4. Others ............................... 1-7 A. Safety of Laser Light ............ 1-22
B. Side Paper Deck-C1 ............ 1-10 B. CDRH Regulations .............. 1-23
III. NAMES OF PARTS .................. 1-11 C. Handling the Laser Assembly
A. External View ....................... 1-11 ............................................. 1-24
B. Cross Section ...................... 1-14 D. Safety of Toner .................... 1-28
IV. OPERATING THE COPIER ...... 1-16 VII. IMAGE FORMATION ................ 1-29
A. Turning on the Power Switch A. Outline .................................. 1-29
............................................. 1-16

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

I. BASIC OPERATIONS ................. 2-1 1. Basic Sequence of Operations


A. Functional Construction ......... 2-1 (power-on) ........................ 2-5
B. Electrical Circuitry .................. 2-2 D. Controlling the Main Motor (M1)
1. Outline .............................. 2-2 ............................................... 2-6
2. MFC PCB .......................... 2-2 1. Outline .............................. 2-6
3. Image Processor PCB ...... 2-2 E. Inputs to and Outputs from the
4. DC Controller PCB ........... 2-3 Major PCBs ............................ 2-7
5. Control panel CPU PCB ... 2-3 1. Wiring Diagram of Major
6. Original Orientation Detection PCBs ................................. 2-7
PCB................................... 2-3 2. Inputs to the DC Controller
7. Image Server .................... 2-3 PCB................................... 2-8
C. Basic Sequence of Operations 3. Outputs from the DC
............................................... 2-5 Controller PCB ................ 2-14

CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

I. OPERATIONS ............................ 3-1 II. SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM ...... 3-5


A. Outline .................................... 3-1 A. Outline .................................... 3-5
B. Basic Sequence of Operations B. Controlling the Scanner Motor
............................................... 3-3 ............................................... 3-6
C. Changing the Reproduction Ratio III. CONTROLLING THE SCANNING
............................................... 3-4 LAMP .......................................... 3-8

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) v
A. Outline .................................... 3-8 1.
Removing the Scanner Motor
B. Controlling the Temperature by a ........................................ 3-20
Fluorescent Lamp Heater .... 3-10 2. Scanner Drive Cable ...... 3-21
C. Controlling Pre-Heat Voltage C. PCBs .................................... 3-28
............................................. 3-10 1. Removing the Light Intensity
D. Initial Activation .................... 3-11 Control PCB .................... 3-28
E. Detecting an Error ................ 3-12 2. Removing the Inverter PCB
IV. DETECTING THE ORIGINAL SIZE ........................................ 3-29
.................................................. 3-14 D. Others .................................. 3-31
A. Outline .................................. 3-14 1. Removing the Original Size
B. Detection by Original Sensors Sensor (1/2) .................... 3-31
............................................. 3-14 2. Removing the Original Size
C. Detection by the Feeder ...... 3-14 Sensor (3/4) .................... 3-32
V. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .... 3-15 3. Removing the Scanner Home
A. No. 1 Mirror Mount ............... 3-16 Position Sensor .............. 3-33
1. Removing the Scanning 4. Removing the Copyboard
Lamp/Scanning Lamp Heater Glass ............................... 3-33
........................................ 3-16 5. Removing the Image Leading
2. Points to Note When Edge Sensor ................... 3-34
Replacing the Scanning Lamp 6. Removing the Standard White
........................................ 3-19 Plate ................................ 3-35
3. After Replacing the Scanning 7. After Replacing the Standard
Lamp ............................... 3-19 White Plate ..................... 3-36
B. Scanner Drive Assembly ..... 3-20

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

I. OUTLINE..................................... 4-1 1.
Removing the CCD PCB
II. ANALOG IMAGE PROCESSING 4-4 ........................................ 4-22
A. Outline .................................... 4-4 2. After Replacing the CCD Unit
III. DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING 4-6 ........................................ 4-23
A. Outline .................................... 4-6 B. Image Processor PCB ......... 4-24
B. Image Procesing Functional 1. Removing the Image
Block ...................................... 4-7 Processor PCB ............... 4-24
C. Shading Correction ................ 4-9 2. After Replacing the Image
D. Line Conversion ................... 4-10 Processor PCB ............... 4-25
E. Editing .................................. 4-11 C. Hard Disk (image server) ..... 4-26
F. Density Processing .............. 4-12 1. Removing the Hard Disk
1. Outline ............................ 4-12 (image server)................. 4-26
2. Density Adjustment during 2. After Replacing the Hard Disk
Printing ............................ 4-14 (image server)................. 4-26
G. Binary Processing ................ 4-15 D. Others .................................. 4-27
1. Dither Screen Method ..... 4-15 1. Removing the System
2. Random Error Diffusion (R- Motherboard ................... 4-27
ED) Method ..................... 4-16 2. Removing the Memory Board
H. Image Memory ..................... 4-17 ........................................ 4-28
I. Detecting the Orientation of 3. Removing the Various Printer
Originals ............................... 4-19 Boards ............................ 4-28
J. Black Pixel Count ................. 4-20 4. Removing the Original
IV. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .... 4-21 Detection PCB ................ 4-29
A. CCD PCB ............................. 4-22

vi COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

I. OPERATIONS ............................ 5-1 IV. Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor


A. Outline .................................... 5-1 .................................................. 5-12
B. Basic Sequence of Operations A. Outline .................................. 5-12
(laser exposure system) ........ 5-4 V. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .... 5-13
II. GENERATING THE BD SIGNAL 5-5 A. Laser Unit............................. 5-14
A. Outline .................................... 5-5 1. Removing the Laser Unit
B. Flow of the BD Signal ............ 5-5 ........................................ 5-14
III. LASER DRIVER PCB ................. 5-7 2. After Replacing the Laser Unit
A. Outline .................................... 5-7 ........................................ 5-15
B. Controlling the Laser Activation B. BD Unit ................................. 5-16
............................................... 5-8 1. Removing the BD Unit .... 5-16
C. Controlling the Laser Intensity
............................................. 5-10

CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

I. PROCESSES .............................. 6-1 2. Changing the Primary


A. Outline .................................... 6-1 Charging Level Setting ... 6-17
B. Basic Sequence of Operations 3. Primary Charging Assembly
(image formation) ................... 6-3 Cleaning Mechanism ...... 6-18
II . POTENTIAL CONTROL ............. 6-5 4. Others ............................. 6-19
A. Outline .................................... 6-5 B. Dust-Collecting Roller Bias .. 6-20
B. Determining the Optimum Grid 1. Outline ............................ 6-20
Bias ........................................ 6-8 C. Controlling the Pre-Transfer
C. Grid Bias Corrective Control .. 6-8 Charging Mechanism ........... 6-21
D. Determining the Optimum Laser 1. Outline ............................ 6-21
Output .................................... 6-9 2. Controlling the Output to Suit
E. Laser Output Corrective control the Environment (fuzzy
............................................... 6-9 control) ............................ 6-22
F. Determining the Optimum 3. Pre-Transfer Charging
Developing Bias ................... 6-10 Assembly Cleaning
G. Potential Control for Mechanism ..................... 6-23
Transparency Mode ............. 6-11 4. Others ............................. 6-24
H. Target Potential Correction in D. Controlling the Transfer Guide
Each Mode ........................... 6-12 Bias ...................................... 6-25
1. Adjusting the Density during 1. Outline ............................ 6-25
Printing (PDL input) ........ 6-13 2. Controlling the Output to Suit
2. Potential Control during High the Environment ............. 6-26
Humidity Mode ................ 6-14 E. Controlling the Transfer Charging
3. Density Adjustment during Mechanism........................... 6-27
Printing (scanner input) .. 6-15 1. Outline ............................ 6-27
III . CONTROLLING THE CHARGING 2. Controlling the Output to Suit
MECHANISMS .......................... 6-16 the Environment (fuzzy
A. Controlling the Primary Charging control) ............................ 6-28
Mechanism........................... 6-16 3. Correcting the Output at the
1. Outline ............................ 6-16 Trailing Edge of Paper .... 6-29

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) vii
4. Transfer charging Assembly 3. Removing the Primary
Cleaning Mechanism ...... 6-30 Charging Assembly ........ 6-57
5. Others ............................. 6-31 4. Removing the Pre-Transfer
F. Controlling Separation Charging Charging Assembly ........ 6-57
............................................. 6-32 5. Removing the Dust-Collecting
1. Outline ............................ 6-32 Roller .............................. 6-58
2. Correcting the Output to Suit 6. Removing the Transfer/
the Environment and the Separation Charging
Toner Deposit ................. 6-33 Assembly ........................ 6-58
3. Correcting the Output upon C. Charging Wire ...................... 6-60
Detection of Leakage ...... 6-34 1. Outline ............................ 6-60
4. Others ............................. 6-35 2. Removing the Wire Cleaner of
IV . DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ...... 6-36 the Primary Charging
A. Outline .................................. 6-36 Assembly ........................ 6-60
B. Controlling the Developing 3. Removing the Wire Cleaner of
Assembly ............................. 6-37 the Transfer Separation
C. Controlling the Toner Cartridge Charging Assembly ........ 6-61
Drive Mechanism ................. 6-38 4. Routing the Charging Wire
D. Controlling the Developing Bias ........................................ 6-62
............................................. 6-39 5. Routing the Grid Wire for the
E. Detecting the Toner Level and Primary Charging Assembly
Controlling the Toner Supply ........................................ 6-64
Mechanism........................... 6-41 6. Adjusting the Height of the
V . DRUM CLEANER UNIT ............ 6-45 Charging Wire ................. 6-65
A. Outline .................................. 6-45 D. Process Unit......................... 6-66
B. Detecting the Waste Toner (case 1. Removing the Process Unit
full condition) ........................ 6-46 ........................................ 6-66
VI. CONTROLLING THE DRUM 2. Mounting the Process Unit
HEATER .................................... 6-48 ........................................ 6-68
A. Outline .................................. 6-48 E. Developing Assembly .......... 6-69
VII . DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .... 6-49 1. Removing the Developing
A. Photosensitive Drum Unit .... 6-50 Assembly ........................ 6-69
1. Points to Note When Handling 2. Removing the Hopper ..... 6-70
the Photosensitive Drum 6-50 3. Removing the Blade Unit
2. Removing the Photosensitive ........................................ 6-71
Drum ............................... 6-51 4. Mounting the Blade ......... 6-72
3. Replacing the Photosensitive 5. Removing the Developing
Drum Heater ................... 6-53 Cylinder ........................... 6-72
4. Mounting the Photosensitive F. Drum Cleaner Unit ............... 6-75
Drum Unit ........................ 6-54 1. Removing the Cleaning Blade
B. Parts Associated with the ........................................ 6-75
Process Unit......................... 6-55 2. Mounting the Cleaning Blade
1. Removing the Pre-Exposure ........................................ 6-77
Lamp Unit ....................... 6-55 G. Separation Claw/Separation Claw
2. Removing the Potential Drive Assembly .................... 6-79
Sensor Unit ..................... 6-56

CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

I. OUTLINE..................................... 7-1 B. Arrangement of Rollers and


A. Specifications and Construction Sensors .................................. 7-2
............................................... 7-1 II. PICKUP ASSEMBLY .................. 7-3

viii COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A. Control System ...................... 7-3 F. Detecting the Horizontal
B. Sequence of Operations (pickup) Registration Position ............ 7-32
............................................... 7-4 1. Outline ............................ 7-32
1. Right Deck ........................ 7-4 2. Operations ...................... 7-33
2. Pickup from the Cassette 2 3. Controlling the Horizontal
.......................................... 7-5 Registration Motor (M15)
C. Controlling the Pickup Motor (M2) ........................................ 7-34
............................................... 7-6 V. CONTROLLING THE DELIVERY
1. Outline .............................. 7-6 ASSEMBLY ............................... 7-35
D. Movement of the Lifter ........... 7-7 A. Reversal Delivery ................. 7-35
1. Outline .............................. 7-7 VI. CONTROLLING THE CASSETTE
2. Lifter Limiter (deck right/left) HEATER .................................... 7-36
.......................................... 7-9 VII. DETECTING JAMS ................... 7-38
3. Detecting the Presence/ A. Outline .................................. 7-38
Absence of Paper ........... 7-10 1. Arrangement of Jam Sensors
4. Detecting the Level of Paper ........................................ 7-38
........................................ 7-10 2. Types of Jams ................ 7-39
E. Detecting the Cassette Paper B. Sequence of Operations (jam
Size ...................................... 7-13 detection) ............................. 7-40
1. Cassette Deck Right/Left 1. Delay Jams ..................... 7-40
........................................ 7-13 2. Stationary Jams .............. 7-43
2. Cassette 3/4 .................... 7-13 VIII. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .... 7-44
3. Markings on the Width Guide A. Manual Tray Assembly ........ 7-45
Rail .................................. 7-14 1. Removing the Manual Tray
4. Paper Size ...................... 7-15 Unit.................................. 7-45
F. Manual Feed Tray Pickup 2. Removing the Pickup Roller
Assembly ............................. 7-18 ........................................ 7-46
1. Pickup Operation ............ 7-18 3. Mounting the Pickup Roller
2. Detecting the Paper Size ........................................ 7-46
........................................ 7-19 4. Removing the Feeding Roller
III. CONTROLLING THE ........................................ 7-47
REGISTRATION CLUTCH 5. Orientation of the Feeding
.................................................. 7-20 Roller .............................. 7-47
A. Outline .................................. 7-20 6. Removing the Separation
B. Control System .................... 7-20 Roller .............................. 7-48
C. Sequence of Operations 7. Adjusting the Tension of the
(registration brake) ............... 7-21 Separation Roller ............ 7-48
IV. MAKING DOUBLE-SIDED COPIES 8. Removing the Manual Feed
.................................................. 7-22 Tray Paper Sensor ......... 7-49
A. Control System .................... 7-22 9. Routing the Manual Feed Tray
1. Copying on the First Side Assembly Side Guide Timing
........................................ 7-22 Belt .................................. 7-51
2. Copying on the Second Side 10. Position of the Pickup Roller
........................................ 7-23 Releasing Solenoid of the
B. Sequence of Operations ...... 7-24 Manual Feed Tray .......... 7-52
C. Controlling the Reversal Motor 11. Removing the Manual Feed
(M11) .................................... 7-25 Roller .............................. 7-53
1. Outline ............................ 7-25 12. Mounting the Manual Feed
D. Controlling the Duplexing Feeder Roller .............................. 7-54
Motor (M12) ......................... 7-26 B. Cassette Pickup Assembly .. 7-55
1. Outline ............................ 7-26 1. Removing the Front Deck
E. No-Stacking Operation ........ 7-27 (right) .............................. 7-55
1. Outline ............................ 7-27 2. Removing the Pickup
2. Outline of Operations ...... 7-28 Assembly of the Front Deck
(left) ................................. 7-56

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) ix
3. Removing the Cassette 3 2.Removing the Registration
Pickup Assembly ............ 7-57 Brake Clutch ................... 7-71
4. Removing the Cassette 4 3. Removing the Registration
Pickup Assembly ............ 7-57 Roller .............................. 7-72
5. Removing the Pickup Roller 4. Removing the Pre-
........................................ 7-57 Registration Roller .......... 7-73
6. Removing the Feeding Roller E. Feeding Assembly ............... 7-75
........................................ 7-59 1. Removing the Feeding Belt
7. Orientation of the Feeding ........................................ 7-75
Roller of the Cassette Pickup 2. Removing the Fixing Feeding
Assembly ........................ 7-59 Unit Releasing lever Sensor
8. Removing the Separation ........................................ 7-77
Roller .............................. 7-59 F. Duplexing Unit ..................... 7-78
9. Adjusting the Pressure of the 1. Removing the Duplexing Unit
Separation Roller ............ 7-61 ........................................ 7-78
10. Orientation of the Separation 2. Removing the Front Cover of
Roller .............................. 7-61 the Duplexing Unit .......... 7-78
11. Position of the Pickup Roller 3. Removing the Reversing
Releasing Solenoid of the Flapper Solenoid ............ 7-79
Cassette (3/4) ................. 7-62 4. Removing the Reversal Motor
12. Adjusting the Registration of ........................................ 7-79
the Front Deck (right/left) 5. Removing the Lower Feeder
........................................ 7-63 Motor ............................... 7-80
13. Adjusting the Registration of 6. Removing the Horizontal
the Cassette 3/4.............. 7-63 Registration Motor .......... 7-80
14. Removing the Lifter Motor 7. Removing the Deck (left)
(M16/M17) of the Cassette (3/ Draw-Out Clutch/Lower
4) ..................................... 7-64 Feeder Middle Clutch ..... 7-81
15. Adjusting the Position of the 8. Removing the Lower Feeding
Lifter Motor M16 (M17) for the Right Clutch .................... 7-82
Cassette 3 (4) ................. 7-65 9. Removing the Duplexing
C. Vertical Path Roller Assembly Reversal Sensor ............. 7-83
............................................. 7-68 10. Removing the U-Turn Sensor
1. Removing the Vertical Path ........................................ 7-86
Roller 1/3/4 ..................... 7-68 11. Removing the Pre-Confluence
2. Removing the Vertical Path Sensor ............................ 7-86
Roller 2 ........................... 7-69 12. Removing the Post-
D. Registration Feeding Assembly Confluence Sensor ......... 7-87
............................................. 7-71 13. Removing the Front Deck
1. Removing the Registration (lifter) Draw-Out Sensor .. 7-88
Clutch/Registration Brake 14. Removing the Horizontal
Clutch .............................. 7-71 Registration sensor ......... 7-88

CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

I. OPERATIONS ............................ 8-1 B. Controlling the Fixing Roller Drive


A. Outline .................................... 8-1 Mechanism............................. 8-6
B. Basic Sequence of Operations C. Controlling the Cleaning Belt
(fixing system) ........................ 8-4 Drive Mechanism ................... 8-8
II. FIXING DRIVE SYSTEM ............ 8-5 D. Controlling the Fixing Inlet Guide
A. Outline .................................... 8-5 Drive Mechanism ................... 8-9

x COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
E. Controlling the Thermistor 4. Removing the Main
Reciprocating Mechanism ... 8-10 Thermistor ....................... 8-35
F. Controlling the Upper Separation 5. Removing the Sub Thermistor
Claw Reciprocating Mechanism ........................................ 8-36
............................................. 8-11 D. Fixing Roller Assembly ........ 8-37
III. CONTROLLING THE FIXING 1. Removing the Upper Fixing
TEMPERATURE ....................... 8-12 Roller .............................. 8-37
A. Outline .................................. 8-12 2. Mounting the Upper Fixing
B. Down Sequence Control ...... 8-13 Roller .............................. 8-39
C. Controlling Temperature by Mode 3. Removing the Lower Fixing
............................................. 8-14 Roller .............................. 8-40
1. Transparency Mode ........ 8-15 4. Adjusting the Nip ............ 8-40
2. Thick Paper Mode .......... 8-16 E. Separation Claw Assembly .. 8-42
3. Power Save Mode .......... 8-17 1. Removing the Upper
D. Error Detection ..................... 8-18 Separation Claw ............. 8-42
IV. CONTROLLING THE FIXING 2. Removing the Lower
ROLLER BIAS .......................... 8-24 Separation Claw ............. 8-42
A. Outline .................................. 8-24 F. Delivery Assembly ............... 8-43
V. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .... 8-25 1. Removing the External
A. Fixing Assembly ................... 8-26 Delivery Roller ................ 8-43
1. Removing the Fixing 2. Removing the Internal
Assembly ........................ 8-26 Delivery Roller ................ 8-43
B. Fixing Roller Cleaning Assembly 3. Removing the Delivery Speed
............................................. 8-29 Switch Clutch .................. 8-45
1. Removing the Fixing Cleaning G. Paper Sensors ..................... 8-46
Belt .................................. 8-29 1. Removing the Claw Jam
2. Mounting the Fixing Cleaning Sensor ............................ 8-46
Belt .................................. 8-31 2. Removing the External
C. Fixing Heater and Control Parts Delivery Roller ................ 8-46
............................................. 8-32 3. Removing the Internal
1. Removing the Main/Sub Delivery Sensor .............. 8-46
Heater ............................. 8-32 4. Removing the Reversal
2. Mounting the Main/Sub Heater Sensor ............................ 8-47
8-33 5. Removing the Fixing/Feeding
3. Removing the Thermal Switch Unit Outlet Sensor .......... 8-47
........................................ 8-34

CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

I. CONTROL PANEL ...................... 9-1 A. Outline of the Power Supply


A. Outline .................................... 9-1 ............................................. 9-10
II. DOWNLOADING ........................ 9-2 B. Turning on the Power .......... 9-12
A. Outline .................................... 9-2 1. Outline ............................ 9-12
III. COUNTERS ................................ 9-4 2. Power Supply at Main Power
IV. FANS ........................................... 9-6 Switch-On ....................... 9-14
A. Arrangement, Functions, and 3. Power Supply at Main Power
Error Codes............................ 9-6 Switch-On and Control Panel
B. Sequence of Operations ........ 9-8 Switch-On ....................... 9-15
1. 2-Speed Control ............... 9-8 C. Rated Outputs of the DC Power
2. Sequence of Operations ... 9-9 Supply PCB.......................... 9-16
V. POWER SUPPLY ..................... 9-10 D. Protective Functions ............ 9-17
E. Backup Battery .................... 9-18

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) xi
1. MFC PCB ........................ 9-18 11. Removing the Power Supply
2. Image Processor PCB .... 9-19 Cooling Fan 1 ................. 9-43
VI. OTHERS ................................... 9-21 12. Removing the Power Supply
A. Sleep Mode .......................... 9-21 Cooling Fan 2 ................. 9-44
1. Outline ............................ 9-21 13. Removing the Separation Fan
2. Operation ........................ 9-22 ........................................ 9-45
B. Low Power mode ................. 9-23 14. Removing the Laser Scanner
C. Silence Mode ....................... 9-24 Fan .................................. 9-46
D. Power Save Mode ............... 9-24 D. Drive Assembly .................... 9-48
VII. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .... 9-25 1. Removing the Left Pickup
A. External Covers ................... 9-26 Drive Assembly ............... 9-48
1. Removing the Front Door 2. Removing the Pickup Drive
........................................ 9-27 Assembly ........................ 9-49
2. Removing the Inside Upper 3. Removing the Developing
Cover .............................. 9-28 Drive Assembly ............... 9-50
3. Removing the Fixing/Feeding 4. Removing the Vertical Path
Unit Cover ....................... 9-28 Drive Assembly ............... 9-51
4. Removing the Rear Cover 5. Removing the Waste Toner
........................................ 9-29 Drive Assembly ............... 9-52
B. Control Panel ....................... 9-30 6. Removing the Multifeeder
1. Removing the Control Panel Pickup Drive Assembly ... 9-53
........................................ 9-30 7. Removing the Lifter Drive
2. Removing the Control Panel Assembly (right deck) ..... 9-54
Controller (CPU) PCB and the 8. Removing the Lifter Drive
Control Panel Inverter PCB Assembly (for the left deck)
........................................ 9-31 ........................................ 9-55
3. Removing the Control Panel 9. Removing the Main Drive
PCB and the LCD Panel Assembly ........................ 9-56
........................................ 9-32 10. Removing the Drum Drive
C. Fans ..................................... 9-34 Assembly ........................ 9-57
1. Removing the Primary 11. Removing the Cassette
Charging Assembly Fan Pickup Drive Assembly ... 9-60
........................................ 9-34 12. Removing the Toner Cartridge
2. Removing the Fixing Heat Drive Assembly ............... 9-61
Discharge Fan ................ 9-35 E. Switches ............................... 9-62
3. Removing the Scanner 1. Removing the Cover Switch
Cooling Fan .................... 9-35 (door switch) Assembly
4. Removing the Stream ........................................ 9-62
Reading Fan ................... 9-36 2. Removing the Manual Feed
5. Removing the Laser Cooling Tray Switch Assembly .... 9-63
Fan .................................. 9-37 3. Removing the Drum Heater
6. Removing the De-Curling Fan Switch Assembly ............ 9-64
........................................ 9-38 F. DC Controller PCB ............... 9-65
7. Removing the Feeding Fan G. Power Supply Unit ............... 9-66
........................................ 9-39 H. High-Voltage Transformer (AC)
8. Removing the Drum Fan ............................................. 9-67
........................................ 9-40 I. High-Voltage Transformer (DC)
9. Removing the Inverter Cooling ............................................. 9-67
Fan .................................. 9-41 J. Relay PCB ........................... 9-69
10. Removing the Pre-Transfer K. MFC PCB ............................. 9-69
Charging Assembly Fan L. Routing the Belt ................... 9-71
........................................ 9-42

xii COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

I. SIDE PAPER DECK ................. 10-1 B. Deck Body.......................... 10-26


A. Inputs to and Outputs from the 1. Detaching the Deck from the
Side Deck Driver .................. 10-1 Copier ........................... 10-26
1. Inputs to the Side Deck Driver 2. Removing the Compartment
(1/2)................................. 10-1 ...................................... 10-28
2. Inputs to the Side Deck Driver 3. Changing the Deck Paper
Input (2/2) ....................... 10-2 Size ............................... 10-30
3. Outputs from the Side Deck 4. Adjusting the Deck
Driver (1/1) ...................... 10-3 Registration................... 10-31
B. Pickup .................................. 10-4 5. Adjusting the Position of the
1. Outline ............................ 10-4 Roll ................................ 10-31
2. Pickup Operation ............ 10-4 C. Drive Mechanisms ............. 10-32
3. Sequence of Operations 1. Removing the Deck Pickup
(pickup from the deck) .... 10-6 Clutch (CL102) ............. 10-32
C. Deck Paper Detection .......... 10-7 2. Removing the Deck Feeding
1. Detecting the Presence/ Clutch (CL101) ............. 10-32
Absence of Paper ........... 10-7 3. Removing the Deck Main
2. Switching the Deck Paper Motor (M101) ................ 10-33
Size ................................. 10-7 4. Removing the Deck Lifter
3. Deck Paper Level Detection Motor (M102) ................ 10-33
........................................ 10-8 5. Removing the Lifter Cable
D. Deck Lifter ............................ 10-9 (front of the deck).......... 10-34
1. Detecting the Presence/ 6. Removing the Lifter Cable
Absence of Paper ........... 10-9 (rear of the deck) .......... 10-36
2. Paper Level Indicator on the 7. Routing the Lifter Cable
Deck Front Cover ......... 10-11 ...................................... 10-38
E. Opening Closing the Deck D. Feeding System ................. 10-39
(compartment) ................... 10-12 1. Removing the Deck Pickup
1. Opening/Closing the Deck Unit................................ 10-39
...................................... 10-12 2. Removing the Deck Pickup
2. Sequence of Operations Roller ............................ 10-39
(opening/closing the deck) 3. Orientation of the Deck Pickup
...................................... 10-13 Roller ............................ 10-40
F. Controlling the Deck Motor 4. Removing the Deck Pickup/
........................................... 10-14 Feeding Roller .............. 10-40
1. Controlling the Deck Main 5. Orientation of the Deck
Motor (M101) ................ 10-14 Pickup/Feeding Roller .. 10-41
2. Controlling the Deck Lifter 6. Removing the Deck
Motor (M102) ................ 10-16 Separation Roller .......... 10-41
II. DETECTING JAMS ................. 10-18 7. Adjusting the Pressure of the
A. Outline ................................ 10-18 Deck Separation Roller
III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .. 10-20 ...................................... 10-42
A. External Covers ................. 10-21 8. Positioning the Deck Pickup
1. Removing the Front Cover Roller Releasing Solenoid
...................................... 10-21 (SL101) ......................... 10-43
2. Removing the Rear Cover E. Electrical System ............... 10-44
...................................... 10-24 1. Removing the Side Deck
3. Removing the Right Cover Driver PCB .................... 10-44
...................................... 10-24 2. Removing the Open Switch
4. Removing the Upper Cover PCB............................... 10-44
...................................... 10-25
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) xiii
CHAPTER 11 SIDE PAPER DECK

I . SELECTING THE SITE ............ 11-1 IV . INSTALLING THE CONTROL


II . UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION CARD V................................... 11-22
.................................................. 11-4 1. Removing the Control Panel
A. Unpacking ............................ 11-5 ...................................... 11-22
B. Mounting the Scanner.......... 11-8 2. Before Installing the Control
C. Mounting the Fixing Assembly Card .............................. 11-24
............................................. 11-9 3. Installing the Control Card
D. Mounting the Corona Assemblies ...................................... 11-25
........................................... 11-10 V . INSTALLING THE REMOTE
E. Checking the Developing DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II ........ 11-27
Assembly ........................... 11-13 VI . INSTALLING THE COPY DATA
F. Mounting the Pick-Up Assembly CONTROLLER-A1 .................. 11-36
........................................... 11-14 A. Setting the Board ............... 11-36
G. Supplying Toner ................. 11-15 B. Installing to the Copier ....... 11-39
H. Mounting the ADF .............. 11-16 C. Checking the Operation ..... 11-42
I. Checking Images/Operations VII . INSTALLING THE CASSETTE
(user mode)........................ 11-17 HEATER (FOR 120V MODEL:
J. Changing the Size of the Front CASSETTE HEATER UNIT 15)
Deck (right and left) ........... 11-20 ................................................ 11-53
III . RELOCATING THE COPIER A. Installing to the Copier ....... 11-53
................................................ 11-21

CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED IV. SCHEDULED SERVICING ITEMS


PARTS ...................................... 12-1 .................................................. 12-8
II. DURABLES TABLE .................. 12-2 A. Copier .................................. 12-8
A. Copier .................................. 12-2 B. Work Steps ........................ 12-11
B. Side Paper Deck .................. 12-5 1. Work 1 .......................... 12-11
III. SCHEDULED SERVICING CHART 2. Work 2 .......................... 12-12
.................................................. 12-6

CHAPTER 13 TROBLESHOOTING

I. GUIDE TO TROUBLESHOOTING 1. Adjusting the Image Position


TABLES .................................... 13-1 ........................................ 13-7
A . Image Adjustment Basic 2. Adjusting the Left/Right Image
Procedure ............................ 13-3 Margin ............................. 13-8
B . Points to Note for Scheduled 3. Adjusting the Image Leading
Servicing .............................. 13-6 Edge Margin ................. 13-12
II . STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4. Adjusting the Left/Right Non-
.................................................. 13-7 Image Width .................. 13-12
A. Adjusting Images ................. 13-7 5. Adjusting the Image Leading
...................................... 13-13

xiv COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
B. Scanner System ................ 13-14 (SL6) ............................. 13-28
1. Replacing the Scanner Drive 9-6. Position of the Deck (right)
Cable ............................ 13-14 Pickup Solenoid (SL7) .. 13-29
2. Adjusting the Scanner Mirror 9-7. Position of the Deck (left)
Mount ............................ 13-14 Pickup Solenoid (SL8) .. 13-30
3. After Replacing the Scanning 9-8. Position of the Cassette 3/4
Lamp ............................. 13-14 Pickup Solenoid (SL9/10)
C. Image Formation System... 13-15 ...................................... 13-31
1. Routing the Primary Charging 9-9. Position of the Side Paper
Assembly Grid Wire ...... 13-15 Deck Pickup Roller Releasing
2. Routing the Charging Solenoid ........................ 13-32
Assembly Charging Wires 10. Routing the Manual Feed Tray
...................................... 13-15 Assembly Side Guide Timing
3. Mounting the Drum Cleaning Belt ................................ 13-32
Blade ............................. 13-15 11. Routing the Drive Belt ... 13-33
4. Mounting the Developing E. Fixing System .................... 13-34
Blade ............................. 13-15 1. Point to Note When Mounting
5. Replacing the Potential the Fixing Heater .......... 13-34
Sensor/Potential Control PCB 2. Position of the Fixing
...................................... 13-15 Assembly Inlet Guide .... 13-34
D. Pickup/Feeding System ..... 13-18 3. Adjusting the Lower Roller
1. Orienting the Deck/Cassette Pressure (nip) ............... 13-36
Pickup Roller................. 13-18 F. Laser Exposure System..... 13-37
2. Orienting the Deck/Cassette 1 After Replacing the Laser Unit
Separation Roller .......... 13-19 ...................................... 13-37
3. Orienting the Deck/Cassette 2 Checking the Laser Power
Pickup Assembly Feeding ...................................... 13-38
Roller ............................ 13-19 G. Electrical Parts ................... 13-41
4. Orienting the Manual Feed 1 After Replacing the CCD Unit
Tray/Side Paper Deck Pickup ...................................... 13-41
Roller ............................ 13-20 2 After Replacing the Image
5. Orienting the Manual Feed Processor PCB ............. 13-42
Pickup Roller................. 13-21 3 After Replacing the MFC PCB
6. Orienting the Side Paper Deck ...................................... 13-43
Feeding Roller .............. 13-21 4. After Replacing the Hard Disk
7. Adjusting the Pressure of the ...................................... 13-44
Deck/Cassette Separation 5. After Replacing the DC
Roller ............................ 13-22 Controller PCB .............. 13-45
8. Adjusting the Pressure of the 6. Checking the Surface
Manual Tray Pickup/Feeding Potential Control System
Roller ............................ 13-23 ...................................... 13-45
9. Mounting the Solenoids 7. Checking the Potential
...................................... 13-24 System .......................... 13-51
9-1. Position of the Fixing Inlet 8. Potential Control System
Guide Solenoid (SL1) ... 13-25 Conversion Table ......... 13-53
9-2. Position of the Fixing Cleaning 9. Checking the Environment
Belt Solenoid (SL2) ....... 13-26 Sensor .......................... 13-57
9-3. Position of the Delivery 10. Checking the
Flapper Solenoid (SL3) Photointerrupters .......... 13-58
...................................... 13-27 III . TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE
9-4. Position of the Fixing/Feeding FAULTS .................................. 13-63
Unit Locking Solenoid (SL4) A. Making Initial Checks ......... 13-63
...................................... 13-27 1. Checking the Site ......... 13-63
9-5. Position of the Multifeeder 2. Checking the Originals
Pickup Latching Solenoid ...................................... 13-63

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) xv
3. Copyboard Cover, Copyboard 19. The copy is foggy (horizontal).
Glass, and Standard White ...................................... 13-79
Plate .............................. 13-64 20. The copy has poor sharpness.
4. Checking the Charging ...................................... 13-80
Assemblies ................... 13-64 21. The copy is blank. ......... 13-81
5. Checking the Developing 22. The copy is solid black.
Assembly ...................... 13-64 ...................................... 13-82
6. Checking Papers .......... 13-64 IV . TROUBLESHOOTING
7. Checking the Periodically MALFUNCTIONS .................... 13-82
Replace Parts ............... 13-64 A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions
8. Others ........................... 13-64 ........................................... 13-82
B. Sample Image Faults ......... 13-65 1. E000 ............................. 13-82
C. Troubleshooting Image Faults 2. E001 ............................. 13-83
........................................... 13-67 3. E002 ............................. 13-83
1. The copy is too light (halftone 4. E003 ............................. 13-83
area) ............................. 13-67 5. E004 ............................. 13-84
2. The copy is too light (solid 6. E005 ............................. 13-84
black area). ................... 13-68 7. E010 ............................. 13-84
3. The copy is too light (entire 8. E012 ............................. 13-85
area, considerably). ...... 13-68 9. E013 ............................. 13-85
4. The copy has uneven density 10. E014 ............................. 13-86
(darker at front). ............ 13-69 11. E015 ............................. 13-86
5. The copy has uneven density 12. E019 ............................. 13-86
(lighter at front). ............ 13-69 13. E020 ............................. 13-87
6. The copy is foggy (entire 14. E025 ............................. 13-87
area). ............................ 13-70 15. E030 ............................. 13-88
7. The copy is foggy (vertical). 16. E031 ............................. 13-88
...................................... 13-71 17. E032 ............................. 13-88
8. The copy has black lines 18. E043 ............................. 13-89
(feeding direction, fuzzy, 19. E051 ............................. 13-89
thick). ............................ 13-71 20. E060 ............................. 13-90
9. The copy has black lines 21. E063 ............................. 13-90
(feeding direction, fine). 22. E065 ............................. 13-91
...................................... 13-72 23. E066 ............................. 13-91
10. The copy has white spots 24. E067 ............................. 13-91
(vertical). ....................... 13-73 25. E068 ............................. 13-92
11. The copy has white lines 26. E069 ............................. 13-92
(vertical). ....................... 13-73 27. E100 ............................. 13-92
12. The copy has white spots 28. E102 ............................. 13-93
(horizontal). ................... 13-74 29. E110 ............................. 13-93
13. The back of the copy is soiled 30. E111 ............................. 13-93
...................................... 13-75 31. E121 ............................. 13-94
14. The copy has poor fixing. 32. E202 ............................. 13-94
...................................... 13-76 33. E204 ............................. 13-94
15. The copy has a displaced 34. E211 ............................. 13-95
leading edge (appreciably 35. E215 ............................. 13-95
excess margin). ............ 13-77 36. E218 ............................. 13-95
16. The copy has a displaced 37. E219 ............................. 13-95
leading edge (excess margin). 38. E220 ............................. 13-95
...................................... 13-77 39. E222 ............................. 13-95
17. The copy has a displaced 40. E226 ............................. 13-96
leading edge (no margin). 41. E240 ............................. 13-96
...................................... 13-77 42. E241 ............................. 13-96
18. The copy has a blurred image. 43. E243 ............................. 13-96
...................................... 13-78 44. E251 ............................. 13-97

xvi COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
45. E302 ............................. 13-97 80. The Control Card Set
46. E320 ............................. 13-97 message fails to turn off.
47. E601 ............................. 13-97 ....................................13-114
48. E602 ............................. 13-98 81. The Add Paper message fails
49. E677 ............................. 13-98 to turn off. (deck right/left)
50. E710 ............................. 13-98 ....................................13-114
51. E711 ............................. 13-98 82. The Add Paper message fails
52. E712 ............................. 13-98 to turn off. (cassette 3/4)
53. E713 ............................. 13-99 ....................................13-114
54. E717 ............................. 13-99 83. The fixing heater fails to
55. E800 ............................. 13-99 operate. .......................13-115
56. E804 ...........................13-100 84. Pickup operation fails. (side
57. E805 ...........................13-100 paper deck) .................13-116
58. E820 ...........................13-100 85. The deck lifter fails to move
59. E823 ...........................13-101 up. (side paper deck)
60. E824 ...........................13-101 ....................................13-117
61. E830 ...........................13-101 V . TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING
62. AC power is absent. ...13-102 PROBLEMS ..........................13-118
63. The DC power supply fails to A. Copy Paper Jams ............13-118
operate 1. ....................13-103 1. Pickup Assembly ........13-119
64. The DC power supply fails to 2. Separation/Feeding Assembly
operate 2. ....................13-104 ....................................13-120
65. Pickup operation fails. 3. Fixing/Delivery Assembly
....................................13-105 ....................................13-121
66. The lifter fails to move up. 4. Fixing/Delivery Assembly
....................................13-106 (reversal delivery assembly)
67. The lifter fails to move up. ....................................13-121
(cassette pickup) ........13-107 5. Cleaner Unit ................13-122
68. Pickup operation fails. 6. Lower Feeding Assembly
(multifeeder pickup) ....13-108 ....................................13-122
69. The vertical path roller fails to B. Faulty Feeding .................13-123
rotate. ..........................13-109 1. Double feeding ...........13-123
70. The registration roller fails to 2. Wrinkles ......................13-123
rotate. ..........................13-109 VI . ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS
71. The No. 1 mirror fails to OF PARTS ............................13-124
operate. .......................13-110 A. Clutches ...........................13-124
72. The pre-exposure lamp fails to B. Solenoids .........................13-126
turn on. ........................13-111 C. Motors ..............................13-128
73. The scanning lamp fails to D. Fans .................................13-130
turn on. ........................13-111 E. Sensors 1 .........................13-132
74. The cartridge inside toner F. Sensors 2 .........................13-134
feeder motor (M6) fails to G. Switches ...........................13-136
operate. .......................13-112 H. Counters, Heaters, Fuses, and
75. The hopper inside toner Others ..............................13-138
feeder motor (M18) fails to I. PCBs ................................13-140
operate. .......................13-112 J. Side Paper Deck ..............13-142
76. The drum heater fails to 1. Sensors and Switches
operate. .......................13-112 ....................................13-142
77. The Add Toner indicator fails 2. Motors, Clatches, Solenoids,
to turn on. ....................13-113 and PCBs ....................13-144
78. The Add Toner fails to turn on K. Variable Registers (VR), Light-
....................................13-113 Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins
79. The Control Card Set by PCB .............................13-146
message fails to turn on 1. MFC PCB ....................13-147
....................................13-113

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) xvii
2.
Image Processor PCB 1.Starting Service Mode and
....................................13-148 Selecting an Item ........13-161
3. DC Controller PCB .....13-149 2. Ending Service Mode
4. DC Power Supply PCB ....................................13-162
....................................13-150 3. Backing Up the RAM
5. Relay PCB ..................13-150 ....................................13-162
6. Control Panel CPU PCB 4. Basic Operation ..........13-163
....................................13-151 B. DISPALY Control Display Mode
7. HV-DC PCB ................13-152 .........................................13-165
8. Side Deck Driver (side paper C. I/O Input/Output Display Mode
deck) ...........................13-153 .........................................13-176
VII . UPGRADING THE COPIER .13-154 D. ADJUST Adjustment Mode
A. Replacing the DIMM ........13-154 .........................................13-204
1. Removing the DIMM of the E. FUNCTION Operation/Inspection
Image Processor PCB Mode ................................13-218
....................................13-155 F. OPTION Settings Mode ...13-230
2. Removing the DIMM of the G. PG Test Print ...................13-242
MFC PCB ....................13-156 H. COUNTER Mode .............13-246
B. Downloading ....................13-157 IX. SELF DIAGNOSIS ................13-250
1. Before the Work ..........13-157 A. Copier Self Diagnosis ......13-250
2. Downloading ...............13-157 B. ADF Self Diagnosis ..........13-258
VIII . SERVICE MODE ................13-160 C. Finisher Self Diagnosis ....13-259
A. Outline ..............................13-160

APPENDIX

A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ....... A-1 D. SPECIAL TOOLS TABLE ........ A-17
B. LIST OF SIGNALS/ E. SOLVENTS/OILS ..................... A-19
ABBREVIATIONS ...................... A-3
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
................................................... A-9

xviii COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter provides specifications of the copier, instructions on how to operate the
copier, and an outline of copying processes.

I. FEATURES ................................. 1-1 D. User Mode ........................... 1-19


II. SPECIFICATIONS ...................... 1-2 V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE
A. Copier .................................... 1-2 USER ........................................ 1-21
B. Side Paper Deck-C1 ............ 1-10 VI. SAFETY .................................... 1-22
III. NAMES OF PARTS .................. 1-11 A. Safety of Laser Light ............ 1-22
A. External View ....................... 1-11 B. CDRH Regulations .............. 1-23
B. Cross Section ...................... 1-14 C. Handling the Laser Assembly
IV. OPERATING THE COPIER ...... 1-16 ............................................. 1-24
A. Turning on the Power Switch D. Safety of Toner .................... 1-28
............................................. 1-16 VII. IMAGE FORMATION ................ 1-29
B. Control Panel ....................... 1-17 A. Outline .................................. 1-29
C. Extension Mode ................... 1-18

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

I . FEATURES
1. High-Speed Operation, High Quality Image
Copying speed : 60 copies/min (1-to-n),
55 copies/min (stream reading, 1-to-1)
Reading resolution : 600 × 600 dpi
Output resolution : 1,200-equivalent × 600 dpi
Printer output resolution (w/accessory) : 2,400-equivalent × 600 dpi
1,200-equivalent × 600 dpi (for 120-V UL model)

2. Image Server as Standard


The copier comes standard with a 2-GB hard disk, enabling electronic sorting.
When making multiple copies of a single original, the original may be read no more than once
to turn out as many copies as needed.

3. No-Stacking Duplexing Mechanism


The copier need not stack sheets in its duplexing unit, capable of processing double-sided
copies without disrupting smooth flow.

4. Large-Capacity Paper Source


The addition of accessories enables the copier to hold as many as 7,650 sheets of copy paper:
• Paper deck (right; 1,500 sheets)
• Paper deck (left; 1,500 sheets)
• Cassette 3 (550 sheets)
• Cassette 4 (550 sheets)
• Multifeeder (50 sheets)
• Side Paper Deck-C1 (accessory; 3,500 sheets)

5. Various Delivery Processing (w/ accessory)


• Finisher* (1- or 2-point stapling)
• Saddle finisher* (middle bound booklet)
*Accessory.

6. Printer Functions
The copier may be equipped with a printer board (accessory), servicing as a printer on a net-
work.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-1
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

II . SPECIFICATIONS
A. Copier
1. Type

Body Console

Copyboard Fixed

Light source Fluorescent lamp

Lens Lens array (F3.7)

Photosensitive medium Amorphous silicon (108 mm dia.)

Table 1-201

2. System

GP605/GP605V

Copying Indirect photostatic

Charging Corona

Exposure Twin laser

Copy density adjustment Auto or manual

Development Dry (toner projection)

Pickup Auto Front deck (2 holders), front cassette (2 holders)

Manual Manual feed tray


(about 5.5 mm deep; about 50 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper)

Transfer Corona

Separation Corona (static separation)

Cleaning Blade

Fixing Heating rollers


GP605 (100-V model): 760 W (main) + 400 W (sub)
GP605V (100-V model): 850 W (main) + 360 W (sub)
GP605 (120/230-V model): 910 W (main) + 390 W (sub)

Table 1-202

1-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

3. Performance

GP605 / GP605V

Original type Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.)

Maximum original size A3

DIRECT 1:1

REDUCE I 1 : 0.250

REDUCE II 1 : 0.500

REDUCE III 1 : 0.611

REDUCE IV 1 : 0.707
Reproduction ratio

REDUCE V 1 : 0.816

REDUCE VI 1 : 0.865

ENLARGE I 1 : 1.154

ENLARGE II 1 : 1.224

ENLARGE III 1 : 1.414

ENALRGE IV 1 : 2.000

ENALRGE V 1 : 4.000

ZOOM 1 : 0.250 to 4.00 (in 1% increments)


Wait time 5 min or less (at 20°C room temperature)
First copy 6.5 sec (stream reading, right deck, Direct, A4/LTR, non-AE,
face-down delivery)
5.2 sec (book mode, cassette 1, Direct, A4/LTR, non-AE, straight delivery, not
including pre-heating of fluorescent lamp)
Continuous copying 999 copies max.
Copy size Single- AB A3 max.; postcard min. (vertical feeding)
sided
Inch 279.4 × 431.8 mm (11"×17") max., STMT min. (vertical
feeding)

AB A3 max., A5 min. (vertical feeding)


Double-
sided Inch 279.4 × 431.8 mm (11"×17") max., STMT min. (vertical
feeding)

Table 1-203-1

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-3
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Copy paper type

• Plain Paper (64 to 80 g/m2)


A4, B5, LTR
• Tracing Paper (SM-1)
Right deck
A4, B5
Left deck
• Colored Paper (recommended by Canon)
A4
• Thick Paper (90 to 200 g/m2)
A4, B5, LTR

• Plain Paper (64 to 80 g/m2)


A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R, 279.4 × 431.8 mm (11"×17"),
LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT (vertical feeding)
• Tracing Paper (SM-1)
Cassette 3
A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R
• Colored Paper (recommended by Canon)
B4, A4, A4R
• Thick Paper (90 to 200 g/m2)
A3, B4, A4, B5, AR, B5R, LTR, LTRR

• Plain Paper (64 to 80 g/m2)


A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R, 279.4 × 431.8 mm (11"×17"),
LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT (vertical feeding)
• Tracing Paper (SM-1, GNT-80, GSN-75)
A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R
• Colored Paper (recommended by Canon)
Manual feed tray
B4, A4, A4R
• Postcard (vertical feeding only)
Japanese government postcards
• Label Sheet (recommended by Canon)
B4, A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR
• Thick Paper (90 to 200 g/m2)
A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, LTR, LTRR

Table 1-203-2

1-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Copy paper type

• Plain Paper (64 to 80 g/m2)


A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R, 279.4 × 431.8 mm (11"×17"),
LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT (vertical feeding)
• Tracing Paper (SM-1, GNT-80, GSN-75)
A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R
• Transparency (recommended by Canon)
A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR
Single-sided mode • Colored Paper (recommended by Canon)
B4, A4, A4R
• Postcard (vertical feeding only)
Japanese government postcards
• Label Sheet (recommended by Canon)
B4, A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR
• Thick Paper (90 to 200 g/m2)
A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, LTR, LTRR

• Plain Paper (64 to 80 g/m2)


A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R, 279.4 × 431.8 mm (11"×17"),
LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT (vertical feeding)
• Tracing Paper (SM-1, GNT-80, GSN-75)
A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R
Face-down delivery mode • Colored Paper (recommended by Canon)
B4, A4, A4R
• Postcard (vertical feeding only)
Japanese government postcards
• Label Sheet (recommended by Canon)
B4, A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR
• Thick Paper (90 to 200 g/m2)
A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, LTR, LTRR

• Plain Paper (64 to 80 g/m2)


A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R, 279.4 × 431.8 mm (11"×17"),
LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT (vertical feeding)
Auto • Colored Paper (recommended by Canon)
B4, A4, A4R
• Thick Paper (90 to 200 g/m2)
A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, LTR, LTRR
Double-
sided mode • Plain Paper (64 to 80 g/m2)
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R, 279.4 × 431.8 mm (11"×17"),
LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT (vertical feeding)
Manual • Colored Paper (recommended by Canon)
feed tray B4, A4, A4R
• Postcard (vertical feeding only)
Japanese government postcards
• Thick Paper (90 to 200 g/m2)
A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, LTR, LTRR

Table 1-203-3

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-5
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Claw No
Paper deck (right,
Tray left) 162 mm deep (approx.; about 1,500 sheets of 80 g/m2)

Cassette 3/4 55 mm deep (approx.; about 550 sheets of 80 g/m2)

Delivery tray 250 sheets (approx.; equivalent of 80 g/m2 paper)


Image server (hard disk size) 2GB

Leading edge Direct, Enlarge/Reduce: 4.0 +1.5, -1.0 mm (4.0 + 1.8, -1.4 mm)*
Non-
image Trailing edge Direct, Enlarge/Reduce: 2.5 ±1.5 mm (2.5 ±1.8 mm)*
width
Left/right (1st side) Direct, Enlarge/Reduce: 2.5 ±1.5 mm (2.5 ±1.8 mm)*

Auto clear Yes (2 min standard; may be changed between 0 and 9 min in 1-
min increments)
Auto power-off No

Low power mode Yes (15 min standard; may be changed in user mode to 10, 15,
20, 30, 40, 50, 90 min or 2, 3, or 4 hr.)
Power
save Yes (60 min standard; may be changed in user mode to 10, 15,
Auto sleep
mode 20, 30, 40, 50, 90 min or 2, 3, or 4 hr)
Power save mode Yes

Accessory • Finisher-D1
• Saddle Finisher-D2
• Side Paper Deck-C1
• Cassette Heater Kit-16 (for Side Paper Deck-C1)
• Remote Diagnostic Device II
• Copy Data Controller-A1
• Control Card V
• Copy Tray Unit-D1
• Original Base D1
*When the ADF is used.

Table 1-203-4

1-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

4. Others

GP605 / GP605V

Temperature 15° to 30°C


Operating
conditions Humidity 5% to 80%
Atmospheric
Pressure 810.6 to 1013.3 hpa (0.8 to 1.0 atm)

Power 100V : LLPxxxxx 230V (UK) : QLExxxxx


supply 100V (GP605V) : LEExxxxx 230V (DL) : TLExxxxx
Serial No. 120V (UL) : NLExxxxx 230V (ITA) : PLExxxxx
120V : NLZxxxxx 230V (CA) : RLExxxxx
230V (AMS) : ULExxxxx 230V : PLPxxxxx
230V (FRN) : SLExxxxx

Power consumption
100V/20A 100V/15A 120V 230V
Maximum (kW) 2.0 1.5 2.0 2.0
Continuous* (Wh)
498 497 474 467
: (Reference)
Standby (Wh)
357 355 335 330
: (Reference)
SLEEP (Wh)
12 12 12 16
: (Reference)
LOW-POWER
MODE (Wh) 158 155 141 135
: (Reference)
ENERGY -10% 346 315 313 298
SAVER
MODE (Wh) -25% 311 269 270 255
: (Reference) -50% 269 224 216 200
*The operationg conditions are as follows:
As many as 10 originals are placed, the copy count is set to '20', and
this sequence is repeated three times with the intervals of jobs being
20 min.
Noise Copying 78 dB or less
(Sound power level Stanby
:impulse mode) 55 dB or less

Ozone (8 hr average) 0.05 ppm or less


Width 764 mm
Dimensions Depth 795 mm
Height 1137 mm
Weight 251Kg

Consumables Copy paper Keep copy paper wrapped to protect against humidity. Avoid direct
Toner sunshine, and keep at 40°C/85% or less.

Table 1-204-1

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-7
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Reproduction mode Size Copy paper size copies/min*

A3(297×420mm) A3 26(30)

A4(210×297mm) A4 55(60)

B4(257×364mm) B4 32(35)
Direct
B5(182×257mm) B5 58(60)

A4R(297×210mm) A4R 33(43)

B5R(257×182mm) B5R 33(50)


III
(61.1%) A3àA5R B5R 34

IV B4àA5R B5R 38
(70.7%)
A3àA4R A4R 32
Reduce
V
(81.6%) B4àA4R A4R 36

VI A4àB5 B5 57
(86.5%)
A3àB4 B4 28
II
(200.0%) A5RàA3 A3 –*

III A4RàA3 A3 23
(141.4%)
B5RàB4 B4 23
Enlarge IV
A4RàB4 B4 27
(122.4%)

V B4àA3 A3 28
(115.4%)
B5àA4 A4 50
Note: A5R originals cannot be set in the ADF.
*1-to-n values are in parentheses.

Table 1-204-2 Copying Speed (copier alone)

1-8 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Reproduction mode Size Copy Size copies/min*

279.4×431.8mm 279.4×431.8mm 23(30)


(11"×17") (11"×17")

LTR LTR 55(60)


Direct
LGL LGL 36(36)

LTRR LTRR 33(46)

STMTR STMT –*(60)

III 279.4×431.8mm
LTRR 30
(64.7%) (11"×17")àLTRR

IV 279.4×431.8mm
Reduce LGL 28
(73.3%) (11"×17")àLGL

V
LGLàLTRR LTRR 38
(78.6%)
STMTRà
II 279.4×431.8mm
279.4×431.8mm –*
(200.0%) (11"×17")
(11"×17")
LTRRà
III 279.4×431.8mm
Enlarge 279.4×431.8mm 25
(129.4%) (11"×17")
(11"×17")

IV LGLà
279.4×431.8mm
(121.4%) 279.4×431.8mm 27
(11"×17")
(11"×17")

Note: A5R originals cannot be set in the ADF.


*1-to-n values are in parentheses.

Table 1-204-3 Copying Speed (copier alone)

The specifications are subject to change for product improvement.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-9
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

B. Side Paper Deck-C1


Item Descriptions

Pickup No claw (retard) type

Paper storage Side tray

Copy paper type • Plain Paper (64 to 80 g/m2)


A4, B5, LTR
• Tracing Paper (SM-1)
A4, B5
• Colored Paper (recommended by Canon)
A4
• Thick Paper (90 to 200 g/m2)
A4, B5, LTR

Paper storage capacity 385 mm high (stack; approx.; about 3,500 sheets of 80 g/m2)

Serial No. A4 type: ZQYxxxxx/LTR type: ZQZxxxxx

Paper size alternation By relocating the size guide plate (in steps), by setting in service mode
(OPTION)

Dimensions 329 (W) × 583 (D) × 680 (H) mm

Weight 33.5 kg (approx.)

Power supply DC power from the copier.

Operating Conditions Same as the copier.


Temperature
Humidity
Atmospheric pressure

Table 1-205

The specifications are subject to change for product improvement.

1-10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

III . NAMES OF PARTS

A. External View

[1]
[2] [3]

[14]

[4]

[13]
[15] [5]
Detailed view of 15
and 16 [16]

[16] [15]
[6]

[7]

[12] [11] [10] [9] [8]

[1] ADF [9] Right deck


[2] Control panel power switch [10] Left deck
[3] Original delivery tray [11] Cassette 3
[4] Main power switch [12] Cassette 4
[5] Manual feed tray [13] Front cover
[6] Upper right cover [14] Delivery tray
[7] Lower right cover [15] Heater switch (cassette)
[8] Waste toner case/drum protective sheet holder [16] Leakage breaker

Figure 1-301 External View 1

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-11
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

[3] [10]

[2]

[11]
[1]
[6]
[12]

[8]

[5]
[7] [4]
[9]

[1] Delivery cover [8] Total copy counter


[2] Control panel [9] Printer counter
[3] Copyboard glass [10] Connector for downloading (bi-Centronics)
[4] Feeding assembly releasing lever [11] Switch for downloading
[5] Service book holder right: LOAD (for downloading)
[6] Grip, drum stop tool holder left: COPY (for normal copying)
[7] Cover switch (door switch) assembly [12] LCD contrast adjuster

Figure 1-302 External View 2

1-12 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Blank Page

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-13
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

B. Cross Section

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9][10] [11] [12] [13]

[43]
[42]

[14]
[15]
[16]
[41] [17]
[40] [18]
[39] [19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]

[38] [24]
[25]
[37]
[36]
[35] [26]

[27]
[28]
[29]
[34]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]

Figure 1-303 Cross Section

1-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

[1] No. 1 mirror [23] Right deck pickup roller


[2] Scanning lamp [24] Right deck feeding roller
[3] Fixing assembly [25] Right deck separation roller
[4] Copyboard glass [26] Right deck
[5] Fixing cleaning belt [27] Cassette 3 pickup roller
[6] Laser unit [28] Cassette 3 feeding roller
[7] Feeding assembly [29] Cassette 3 separation roller
[8] Drum cleaning unit [30] Cassette 4 pickup roller
[9] Photosensitive drum [31] Cassette 4 feeding roller
[10] Primary charging assembly [32] Cassette 4 separation roller
[11] CCD unit [33] Cassette 4
[12] Bending mirror [34] Cassette 3
[13] Set-up cartridge [35] Left deck
[14] Hopper [36] Left deck separation roller
[15] Developing cylinder [37] Left deck feeding roller
[16] Pre-transfer charging assembly [38] Left deck pickup roller
[17] Manual feed tray feeding roller [39] Lower fixing roller
[18] Manual feed tray pickup roller [40] Upper fixing roller
[19] Manual tray separation roller [41] External delivery roller
[20] Registration roller [42] No. 3 mirror
[21] Transfer charging assembly [43] No. 2 mirror
[22] Separation charging assembly

Table 1-301

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-15
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

IV . OPERATING THE COPIER

A. Turning on the Power Switch


The copier is equipped with two switches: "main power switch" and "control panel power
switch."
When turning on the copier, be sure to turn on the main power switch and then the control panel
power switch in the order indicated.

[1]

Copying Error Copying Error Data Error Data Error


COPY A COPY B MAIL BOX OPTIONS ON/OFF

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

ID 0 C

[2]
[3]

[1] Control panel power switch


[2] Main power lamp
[3] Main power switch

Figure 1-401 Arrangement of the Switches

1-16 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

B. Control Panel

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

Copying Error Copying Error Data Error Data Error


COPY A COPY B MAIL BOX OPTIONS ON/OFF

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

ID 0 C

[18] [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] [9] [8]

[1] Screen contrast dial [10] Start key


[2] Copy key A [11] Clear key
[3] Copy key B [12] Numeric keypad
[4] Mail Box key [13] ID key
[5] Extension key [14] Interrupt key
[6] Save Power key [15] User Mode key
[7] Control panel power switch [16] Guide key
[8] Main power lamp* [17] Reset key
[9] Stop key [18] Touch panel

Figure 1-402

*Turns on when the main power switch is turned on.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-17
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

C. Extension Mode

Mode Separate Page


TWO-PAGE Use it to copy, for example, the left and right pages of an open book on
SEPARATION separate sheets of paper by a single operation.

TRANSP. Use it to insert a single sheet between transparencies when copying on


INTERLVING transparencies.

SHIFT Use it to shift the entire image on the original to the center or a corner of its
copy.

COVER/SHT Use it to copy on different types of paper for covers, back covers, and chapter
INSERTION covers.

DIF. SIZE Use it to make copies of originals of different sizes (but of the same feeding
ORIGINAL width).

MARGIN Use it to create a margin for binding along the edge of copies.

FRAME ERASE Use it to erase shadow-like images (on copies) of frames or holes in the
originals.

IMAGE COMB. Use it to copy 2, 4, or 8 originals on a single sheet of paper through automatic
reduction.

IMAGE Use it to copy a single image on a sheet of paper of a specific size through
SEPARATION automatic enlargement (by dividing into two or four).

NEGA/POSI Use it to make copies by reversing the black and white images of an original.

SHARPNESS Use it to make sharp copies of an original.

FORM Use it to make copies by combining "form images" stored in advance with the
COMPOSITION image of an original.

MODE MEMORY Use it to store or call back copying modes.

RECALL Use it to call back up to three copying modes stored in advance.

BOOKLET Use it to make copies of a single- or double-sided original so that a booklet


may be made.

Table 1-401 Functions

1-18 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

D. User Mode
CUSTOM AE ADJUSTMENT Use it to select an auto density adjustment method.
COMMON (priority on speed*/priority on image quality)
SETTINGS
AUDIBLE TONES Use it to enable/disable the buzzer.
(input sound, alarm sound, job end sound; ON*/OFF)

DRAWER ELIGIBILITY FOR Use it to set a drawer for auto drawer switching.
APS/ADS (stack by pass: ON/OFF* ; drawers: ON*/OFF)

PAPER ICON SETTING Use it to select an icon for paper in the cassettes.
(no factory setting)

PRINTING PRIORITY Use it to set priority on printing. (copier*/printer)

ENERGY SAVER MODE Use it to change the level of same power mode.
(-10%*, -25%, -50%, no recovery time)

INCH ENTRY Use it to enable/disable inch input. (ON/OFF*)

SET SYSTEM SETTING Use it to set an ID No. for system control. (4 digits)
PASSWORD

DEPT. ID MANAGEMENT Use it to enable/disable ID control by group for ID No. or


count control. (enable/disable*)

INITIALIZE CUSTOM Use it to return the common settings to factory settings.


COMMON SETTINGS (Yes/No)

CUSTOM COPY STANDARD KEY 1,2 SETTING Use it to select preference keys for the Basic screen from the
SETTINGS mode keys on the Extension Mode screen or the memory keys
for the mode memory.

AUTO ORIENTATION Use it to enable/disable automatic rotation of images on


selected paper based on the results of combination on original
size and reproduction ratio.

AUTO COLLATE Use it to enable/disable switching the sorter to sort mode in


response to placement of an original in the feeder. (ON*/OFF)

Use it to enable/disable the use of film photo mode.


PHOTO MODE (ON/OFF*)

Use it to enable/disable auto copy start in response to


SADF AUTO FEED placement of an original in the feeder manual feed assembly.
(ON*/OFF)

Use it to change the ratio of reduction for fit-to-page mode.


FIT IMAGE MODE (93%; between 90% and 99%)
ADJUSTMENT
Use it to enable/disable copy wait time display.
JOB DURATION DISPLAY (ON/OFF*)

Use it to change the settings for auto detection of original


AUTO ORIGINAL orientation.
ORIENTATION RECOGNITION (initial setting: ON*/OFF; original type replacement: ON/
OFF*; identified text: Japanese*/Western & Russian)

Use it to change copying modes stored as standard modes.


STANDARD SETTINGS (Yes/No; at time of shipment, copy count at 1, auto paper
selection at ON, density/image adjustment at Auto)

Use it to return each copy settings item to factory settings.


INITLALIZE CUSTOM
COMMON SETTINGS *Factory setting.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-19
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

TIMER DATE & TIME SETTING Use it to set the current date and time.
SETTINGS
AUTO SLEEP TIME Use it to set the length of time taken to start sleep mode after opera-
tion/turning off the control panel switch. (10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50,
60*, 90 min or 2, 3, 4 hr)

AUTO CLEAR TIME Use it to set the length of time taken to bring back the Basic screen
on the touch panel after operation. (0 min; 1* to 9 min)

LOW-POWER MODE TIME Use it to set the length of time taken to start low power consumption
mode after operation. (10, 5*, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 90 min; 2 to 40 hr)

Use it to set the length of time taken to start silent mode after opera-
TIME UNTIL UNIT QUIETS tion. (0 min; 1* to 9 min)
DOWN
Use it to set the day of the week on which the control panel power
DAILY TIMER SETTINGS switch is turned off. (Sun. to Sat.; 00:00 to 23:59; in 1-min incre-
ments)

Use it to fine-adjust if a discrepancy occurs in size between original


ADJUSTMENT/ ZOOM FINE ADJUSTMENT and copy images for vertical and horizontal ratios.
CLEANING
Use it to remove dirt from the pickup roller assembly by moving
FEEDER CLEANING copy paper through the ADF.

Use it to clean the wire of the charging assembly.


WIRE CLEANING
Use it to adjust the interval of staples (2-point stapling) when the
DOUBLE STAPLE SPACE ADF (accessory) is used. (40 to 150mm; 120mm*)
ADJUSTMENT
Use it to set/sort the mailbox settings.
IMAGE MAIL BOX REGISTRATION
SERVER Use it to set the size of the image server. (300 to 1700 MB;
CUSTOM HD MEMORY ASSIGNMENT 500MB*)
SETTINGS

*Factory settings.

1-20 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

V . ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE USER


Instruct the user to clean the following at least once a week:

No. Parts Description


1 Copyboard glass Wipe it with a moist cloth; then, dry wipe it.

2 ADF feeding belt Wipe it with a cloth moistened with mild detergent
solution; then, dry wipe it.

Table 1-501 Parts

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-21
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

VI . SAFETY
A. Safety of Laser Light
Laser light can be harmful to the human body. The copier's laser assembly is completely
housed within a protective case and by means of external covers, preventing leakage of laser light
to the outside as long as the copier is used normally.

CLASS 1LASER PRODUCT


LASER KLASSE 1
APPAREILA RAYONNEMENT
LASER DE CLASSE 1

APPARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1


PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASE 1
APARELHO A LASER DE CLASSE 1
EN60825:1991

Figure 1-601 Laser Class Label

1-22 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

B. CDRH Regulations
On August 2, 1976, the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the US Food
and Drum Administration put into force a set of regulations governing laser products.
The regulations apply to laser products produced on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of
laser products within the US is prohibited unless they show compliance with the regulations.
Figure 1-602 shows the label certifying compliance with the CDRH regulations, and all laser
products to be sold in the US must bear a copy of the label.

CANON
30-2, SHIMOMARUKO, 3-CHOME, OHTAKU, TOKYO,
146, JAPAN.

MANUFACTURED:
THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS WITH CQRH RADIATION
PERFORMANCE STANDARD 21CFR CHAPTER 1
SUBCHAPTER J.

Figure 1-602 CDRH Compliance Label

Note:
The text may differ from model to model.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-23
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

C. Handling the Laser Assembly


Be sure to take extra care whenever servicing areas around the copier’s laser assembly, as by
avoiding the insertion of any tool having a high reflectance.
Be sure also to remove any watches and rings. They can reflect the laser beam to damage your
eyes during work.
The copier’s laser beam is a red light. Any covers that may reflect the laser beam bear a copy of
the label shown in Figure 1-603. Exercise particular caution whenever servicing behind such cov-
ers.

You will find the label on the copier's laser scanner covers from which laser light can escape.

DANGER- Laser radiation when open


and interlock defeated.
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE
TO BEAM.

FS6-8821

Figure 1-603-1 Label on the 100/120-V Model

1-24 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CAUTION-LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS


DEFEATED. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
ATTENTION-RAYONNEMENT LASER DANGEREUX EN
CAS D'OUVERTURE ET LORSQUE LA
SƒCURITƒ EST NEUTRALISƒE.
EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU.
VORSICHT-LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG
GE…FFNET UND
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG
…BERBR…CKT.NICHT DEM STRAHL
AUSSETZEN.
PRECAUCION-RADIACION LASER EN EL INTERIOR. CIERRE
SELLADO. EVITE LA EXPOSICION AL HAZ EN
CASO DE ROTURA DE ESTE PARA SU APERTURA.
ATTENZIONE-RADIAZIONE LASER PERICOLOSA IN CASO DI
APERTURA E QUANDO IL BLOCCO DI SICUREZZA
é GUASTO. EVITARRE L'ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO.
VARO! -AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA
OLET ALTTIINA LASERS TEILYLLE. L KATSO
S TEESEEN.
VARNING-LASERSTR LNING N R DENNA DEL R
…PPNAD OCH SP RREN R URKOPPLAD.
BETRAKTA EJ STR LEN.
ADVARSEL!-LASER BESTR LING N R BEN OG LUKKE AFBRYDER ER
SAT UD AF FUNKTION. UNDG BESTR LING.
ADVARSEL-LASERSTR LING N R DEKSEL PNES OG
FS6-8822

Figure 1-603-2 Label on the 230-V Model

DANGER- Laser radiation when open.


AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

FS6-8820

Figure 1-603-3 Label on the 100/120-V Model

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-25
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

FS6-8623
CAUTION -LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
ATTENTION -RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS D'OUVERTURE. EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU.
VORSICHT -LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GE…FFNET. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
PRECAUCION -RADIACION LASER CUANDO SE ABRE. EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO.
ATTENZIONE -RADIAZIONE LASER IN CASO DI APERTURA. EVITARE L'ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO.
VARO! -AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LASERS TEILYLLE. L KATSO S TEESEEN.
VARNING -LASERSTR LNING N R DENNA DEL R …PPNAD. BETRAKTA EJ STR LEN.
ADVARSEL! -LASER STR LING, N R DENNE ER BEN. UNDG BESTR LING.
ADVARSEL -LASERSTR LING N R DEKSEL PNES. UNNG EKSPONERING FOR STR LEN.

Figure 1-603-4 Label on the 230-V Model

1-26 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

DANGER- Laser radiation when open.


AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

FS6-8820

Figure 1-603-5 Label on the 100/120-V Model

FS6-8623
CAUTION -LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
ATTENTION -RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS D'OUVERTURE. EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU.
VORSICHT -LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GE…FFNET. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
PRECAUCION -RADIACION LASER CUANDO SE ABRE. EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO.
ATTENZIONE -RADIAZIONE LASER IN CASO DI APERTURA. EVITARE L'ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO.
VARO! -AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LASERS TEILYLLE. L KATSO S TEESEEN.
VARNING -LASERSTR LNING N R DENNA DEL R …PPNAD. BETRAKTA EJ STR LEN.
ADVARSEL! -LASER STR LING, N R DENNE ER BEN. UNDG BESTR LING.
ADVARSEL -LASERSTR LING N R DEKSEL PNES. UNNG EKSPONERING FOR STR LEN.

Figure 1-603-6 Label on the 230-V Model

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-27
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

D. Safety of Toner
Toner is non-toxic matter composed of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dyes.
If your skin or clothes have come into contact with toner, be sure to remove as much of it as
possible with tissue paper and then wash with water. Hot water will cause toner to turn jelly and
become fused with cloth fibers, resisting removal.
Further, toner tends to react to vinyl material. Keep it away from vinyl materials.

Caution:
Do not dispose of toner into fire. It can lead to explosion.

1-28 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

VII . IMAGE FORMATION


A. Outline
Figure 1-701 shows the construction of the copier, which uses an indirect photostatic method
of image reproduction.

Scanning lamp
Copyboard glass

Primary charging assembly

Pre-exposure LED array Potential sensor

Dust-collecting
roller

Pickup
(manual feed tray)

Pre-transfer
Fixing assembly charging
Cleaner assembly
Transfer charging Pickup
assembly (deck/cassette)
Separation charging assembly
Separation claw

Figure 1-701 Construction

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 1-29
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The copier forms images in the following eight steps:

Step 1 Pre-exposure
Step 2 Primary charging (positive DC)
Step 3 Laser exposure
Step 4 Development (AC + positive DC)
Step 5 Transfer (negative DC)
Step 6 Separation (AC + positive DC)
Step 7 Fixing
Step 8 Drum cleaning

Static Image Formation Block

2.Primary charging 3.Laser exposure

1.Pre-exposure

4.Development

8.Drum cleaning

5.Transfer Manual feed tray


Registration
Delivery 7.Fixing 6.Separation

Copy paper Deck/Cassette


Drum rotation

Figure 1-702

1-30 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2
BASIC OPERATIONS

This chapter provides descriptions on basic operations, functions of each operation,


relationships between electrical and mechanical systems, and timing at which each
associated part is turned on.

I. BASIC OPERATIONS ................. 2-1 D. Controlling the Main Motor (M1)


A. Functional Construction ......... 2-1 ............................................... 2-6
B. Electrical Circuitry .................. 2-2 E. Inputs to and Outputs from the
C. Basic Sequence of Operations Major PCBs ............................ 2-7
............................................... 2-5

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

I . BASIC OPERATIONS
A. Functional Construction
The copier is divided into the following six functional blocks:
• Original exposure system
• Image processing system
• Laser exposure system
• Image formation system
• Pickup/feeding system
• Control system

Original

Optical path Original illumination


Original
DC controller PCB Control panel CCD PCB Exposure System

Printer
Motherboard boards
MFC PCB (accessory)
Image server
(hard disk) Image processor PCB Image Processing
System
Token ring
Relay PCB
board
Page memory
Laser diver PCB (accessory)
DC power supply PCB Control System
Laser scanner Laser Exposure
System

Charging

Photo-
Cleaning sensitive Development
drum
Image Formation System
Separation

Transfer
Fixing

Delivery Feeding Pickup Manual


tray control feed tray
Lower feeding assembly

Deck left Deck right


Side
Paper Deck-C1
Cassette 3 (accessory)

Pickup/Feeding System Cassette 4

Figure 2-101

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2-1
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

B. Electrical Circuitry
1. Outline
The copier's major electrical mechanisms are controlled by the CPU on the MFC PCB, image
processor PCB, and DC controller PCB. The following tables show the control functions assigned
to each CPU and the ICs and their functions used around the CPUs (RAMs, DIMMs).

2. MFC PCB

Name Description
CPU • Controls the control panel, hard disk, and personal box image management.
• Controls job management, operation status management, and log management.
• Controls PDL image transfer sequence.
• Controls PDL-image processor PCB communications and service mode.

RAM • Stores service mode data. (For details, see E. "Backup Battery" in Chapter 9 "Externals and
Auxiliary Control.")
• Stores user mode data. (For details, see E. "Backup Battery" in Chapter 9 "Externals and
Auxiliary Control.")

DIMM • Controls programs.

Table 2-101 Control Items

3. Image Processor PCB

Name Description
CPU • Controls the fixing temperature, original scanning lamp, high voltage, potential, and toner
supply.
• Controls paper feeding, image processing, scanner reading, and copying sequence.
• Controls printing sequence, output management, and ADF.
• Controls the sorter (accessory) and communications control device (accessory).
• Controls the page memory management mechanism and hard disk image input/output.
• Controls service mode.

RAM • Stores service mode data. (For details, see E. "Backup Battery" in Chapter 9 "Externals and
Auxiliary Control.")
• Stores user mode data. (For details, see E. "Backup Battery" in Chapter 9 "Externals and
Auxiliary Control.")
• Stores pickup/delivery counter readings.

DIMM • Controls programs (used to control the input/output ports on the DC controller PCB).

Table 2-102 Control Items

2-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

4. DC Controller PCB

Name Description
CPU • Controls the scanner motor drive mechanism, reversal motor drive mechanism, and
(built-in duplexing feeding motor drive mechanism.
ROM) • Controls the cassette size detection mechanism and charging wire cleaning motor drive
mechanism.
• Controls lifter drive.

Table 2-103 Control Items

5. Control Panel CPU PCB

Name Description
CPU • Monitors key inputs.
• Controls buzzer sound.
• Tuns on/off the LCD.

Table 2-104 Control Items

6. Original Orientation Detection PCB

Name Description
CPU • Controls the original orientation detection mechanism.

Tale 2-105 Control Items

7. Image Server

Name Description
Hard disk • Stores form images.
• Stores mail box images.
• Stores the error history.
• Stores the jam history.
• Stores the job history.

Table 2-106 Control Items

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2-3
Printer boards I/F PCB

2-4
(accessory) (accessory)
Image server DP
(hard disk) RAM CPU

System Video
motherboard controller

Control panel MFC Image processor


PCB PCB
Memory
CPU DP
CPU CPU PCB
RAM

BD
Accessories
PCB
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

DC controller

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.


• ADF IPC
• Finisher, Etc. communication 2 PCB
DP
Laser
DC loads RAM
circuit

driver
Image

• Clutch PCB 2
• Solenoid
processing

• Motor CPU
• Sensor, Etc.
Laser
Cassette (inside) driver
Paper level Original PCB 1
Heater HV- HV- Laser A/D
PCB

detection

PCB
orientation
PCB

PCB
PCB control DC1 AC scanner

control
CCD detection
PCB PCB
Scanner

PCB driver

Potential
PCB PCB
control PCB
PCB Fluorescent
motor driver
Non-stacking

Figure 2-102 Relationship of Major PCBs


lamp inverter
feeding driver

Light intensity

M4 FL M5 DC loads
• Clutch
• Solenoid
Light
• Motor
intensity
• Sensor, Etc.
sensor
MFC: Multi Function Controller.

CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)


DP: Dual Port.
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

C. Basic Sequence of Operations


1. Basic Sequence of Operations (power-on)

From power-on Main power switch ON


to standby Control panel power switch ON
195˚C 200˚C
WMUP WMUPR STBY

Scanner home position


Scanner unit

sensor (PS1)
Initial activation
Scanning lamp (FL1)
Scanner motor (M4)
Fixing main heater (H1)
Controlled to 200˚C
Fixing sub heater (H2) yyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyyy
Fixing drive motor (M3)

Main motor (M1)

Drum motor (MO)

Pre-exposure LED assembly


Printer unit

Primary charging

Grid bias
Developing bias (DC)

Developing bias (AC)

Bias roller

Pre-transfer charging (DC)

Pr-transfer charging (AC)

Transfer charging

Separation charging
VD VL
Surface potential measurement yyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyy
Primary, pre-transfer, transfer,
separation charging wire
cleaning motor

Figure 2-103

Period Description
WMUP (warm-up) From when the power switch is turned on to when the surface temperature of the
fixing assembly reaches 195°C.

WMUPR (warm- To execute potential stabilization control and surface potential control.
up rotation)
Table 2-107

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2-5
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

D. Controlling the Main Motor (M1)


1. Outline
Table 2-108 shows the functions of the main motor control circuit, and Figure 2-104 is a block
diagram of the circuit.

Item Description
Power supply 38 V from the relay PCB.

Drive signal Signals (MAIN_MOTOR_ON) from the DC controller PCB.

Operating/drive Waste toner feeding screw


assembly Cleaner assembly
Feeding belt
Internal delivery roller
External delivery roller
Reversing roller
Separation claw (reciprocating operation)
Developing assembly unit (through CL10)

Control ON/OFF control


Constant speed control

Error detection Error code E010

Table 2-108

J1720 J611
38V
1 1
Relay PCB GND Drive circuit
2 2 Main motor
(M1)

J514 J612 Clock pulse


0V generation
B7 1
5V circuit
B6 2
MAIN_MOTOR_ON Control
DC controller B5 3 Reference
PCB MAIN_MOTOR_FG panel
B4 4 signal
0V generation
B3 5
circuit

When the main motor drive signal


goes '1', the main motor starts to rotate.

When the main motor starts to rotate,


the pulse signal goes '1'.

When the pulse signal goes '0', error


code E010 is indicated.

Figure 2-104 Control Circuit Block Diagram

2-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

E. Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs


1. Wiring Diagram of Major PCBs

J1009
J502 Liquid
Potential

Control panel CPU PCB


crystal J1002
control PCB J1014 Key
J3 display LED
(LCD) J1010
Non-stacking J519 J1004 PCB
feeding J1015
driver PCB Control J1019
J3602
volume Control
Scanner J506 J1013
PCB J1012 panel
motor driver power
PCB J802 J1018 switch PCB
J503 J1008 J1003
Laser scanner J503
motor driver J1455
PCB J762 Printer J1454 System
PCB mother
Light J852 Light J506 (accessory) PCB
intensity intensity J1453
PCB J165 control PCB J853
J1401
Fluorescent J506 J525 J1407
DC controller PCB

lamp J1102
inverter PCB J1002 Page
J1405 J1402
J510 memory
J711
HV-AC HV-DC MFC PCB PCB
Image J354
PCB PCB J1406 J1110
J741 J723 server
J516 J1103
Environment J355
sensor PCB J1409
J302 J1403
Download

Image processor PCB


Cassette 3 J516 PCB
paper level J1461
J1108
detection PCB J295 BD
PCB
Cassette 4 J516 J3701
paper level
J1105
detection PCB J296
CCD
Heater J505 PCB J1502
driver J1106
PCB J2605
Laser Laser
J520 driver J1353
Control driver J1107
Card-V PCB 2 PCB 1
(accessory)
J1354
J521 Original J1112
Copy Data
orientation
Controller
detection
(accessory) J1
PCB

Note: The in the diagram indicates connection, NOT the flow of signals.

Figure 2-105 Wiring Diagram of Major PCBs

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2-7
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

2. Inputs to the DC Controller PCB


• Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (1/6)

DC controller PCB

J507
Scanner PS1 -A3 When the scanner is at its
home -A1 +5V home position, '1'. (The light
position -A2 PS1S
sensor
blocking plate is at PS1.)
J168

J167
J507
PS3 -A6 When the scanner is at the
Image +5V
leading edge -A4
PS3S
image leading edge position,
sensor -A5 '1'. (The light-blocking plate is at
J507 PS3.)
Copyboard PS4 -B10
J167

cover -B9 +5V


open/closed -B8 PS4S When the copyboard cover is
sensor
J509 closed, '1'.
PS5 -A3
J197
J198

Registration -A2 +5V


paper sensor -A1 PS5S When paper is detected, '1'.
J180 J508
PS6 -B16
J192

Fixing claw -B15 +5V


jam sensor -B14 PS6S When paper is detected, '1'.
Fixing J508
PS7 -B3
cleaning belt -B2 +5V
length -B1 PS7S When the fixing cleaning belt is
sensor running short, '1'.
J187
J211

Fixing J508
PS8 -B6
cleaning belt -B5 +5V
Length -B4 PS8S When the fixing cleaning belt is
warning running out, '1'.
sensor J508
PS9 -A3
Internal -A2 +5V
delivery -A1 PS9S When paper is detected, '1'.
sensor
J508
PS10 -A9
External
J210

-A8 +5V
delivery -A7 PS10S When paper is detected, '1'.
sensor
J508
PS11 -A12
Fixing
feeding unit -A11 +5V
outlet sensor -A10 PS11S When paper is detected, '1'.
J3606
PS12 -3 J519
Duplexing
J340

reversal -2 J3602-B7 -B6


sensor -1 PS12S When paper is detected, '1'.
J3605
PS13 -3 J519
J338

U-turn -2 J3602-B6 -B7


sensor -1 PS13S When paper is detected, '1'.
J3603
PS14 -A14 J519
Pre-
J326

-A13 J3602-B5 -B8


confluence -A12 +5V PS14S When paper is detected, '1'.
sensor relay
PS15
J3603
-B18 J3601-1
(PCB )
Post- J519
J336

-B17 J3602-B4 -B9


confluence -B16 J3601-2 PS15S When paper is detected, '1'.
sensor
J322
No-stacking
feeding driver (relay
PCB )
PCB

Figure 2-106 Inputs to the DC Controller PCB

2-8 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

• Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (2/6)

DC controller PCB
J508
PS16 -A6
+5V

J180
Reversal -A5
sensor -A4
PS16S When paper is detected, '1'.
J510
PS17 -B9
Manual feed +5V

J224
-B8 PS17S When paper is detected, '1'.
tray paper -B7
sensor
+5V relay
PS18
J36036
-B15 J3601-1
(
PCB )
J519
Horizontal
J330
J334

-B14 J3602-B2 -B11 PS18S When paper is detected, '1'.


registration -B13 J3601-2 J322
sensor

PS19
No-stacking feed driver PCB relay
PCB ( ) J514
-A3 +5V
Waste toner J261 -A2
case full PS19S When the waste toner case is
-A1
sensor
J511 full, '1'.
PS20 -B3
Deck (right) +5V
-B2 PS20S When paper is detected, '1'.
pick-up -B1
sensor
J229

J511
PS21 -A7 +5V
Deck (right) -A6 PS21S
lifter sensor -A5 When the lifter is at the stop
J511 position, '1'.
PS22 -A10 +5V
Deck (right) -A9 PS22S
paper sensor -A8 When paper is detected, '1'.
J511
PS23 -B6
Deck (right) +5V
J229

open/closed -B5 PS23S When the deck (right) is closed,


-B4
sensor '1'.
J511
PS24 -B9 +5V
Deck (right) -B8 PS24S When the lifter is at the upper
limit sensor -B7
limit, '1'.
J518
PS25 -A9
Deck (left)
-A8 +5V
J314

pickup
-A7
PS25S When paper is detected, '1'.
sensor relay
PS26
J36033
-A17 J3601-1
+5V (
PCB )
J519
J366

Deck (left) -A16 J3602-B3 +5V -B10 PS26S


feed sensor -A15 J3601-2 J322 When paper is detected, '1'.

PS27
No-stacking feed driver PCB relay
PCB ( ) J511
-B12 +5V
J229

Deck (right) -B11 PS27S When paper is detected, '1'.


feed sensor -B10
J509
Fixing PS28 -B10 +5V
J197

feeding unit -B9


releasing -B8
PS28S When the fixing feeding unit
lever sensor J518 releasing lever is set, '0'.
PS31 -A3
-A2 +5V
Deck (left) PS31S
lifter sensor -A1 When the lifter is at the stop
J518
position, '1'.
PS32 -A6 +5V
J314

Deck (left) -A5 PS32S


paper sensor -A4
When paper is detected, '1'.
J518
PS33 -B3 +5V
Deck (left) -B2 PS33S
open/closed -B1 When the deck (left) is closed,
sensor '1'.

Figure 2-107 Inputs to the DC Controller PCB

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2-9
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

• Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (3/6)

DC controller PCB

J518
PS34 -B6 +5V

J314
Deck (left) -B5 PS34S
-B4 When the lifter is at the upper
limit sensor
J510
limit, '1'.
PS35 -B3 +5V

J222
Manual feed -B2 PS35S When paper is detected, '1'.
sensor -B1
J515
PS37 -B3 PS37S
Cassette 3
pickup -B2
sensor -B1 When paper is detected, '1'.
J515
PS38 -A7 PS38S
Cassette 3 -A6
lifter sensor -A5 When paper is detected, '1'.
J515
PS39 -A10 +5V
J281

Cassette 3 -A9 PS39S When paper is detected, '1'.


paper sensor -A8
J515
PS40 -B6 +5V
Cassette 3
-B5 PS40S
open/closed
-B4 When the cassette 3 is closed,
sensor
J515 '1'.
PS41 -B9
Vertical path
3 paper -B8 +5V
-B7 PS41S When paper is detected, '1'.
sensor
J517
Cassette 4 PS42 -B3
pickup -B2 +5V
sensor -B1 PS42S When paper is detected, '1'.
J517
PS43 -A7 +5V
Cassette 4 -A6 PS43S
lifter sensor -A5 When the lifter is at the stop
position, '1'.
J517
PS44 -A10 +5V
J305

Cassette 4 -A9 PS44S When paper is detected, '1'.


paper sensor -A8
J517
PS45 -B6 +5V
Cassette 4
open/closed -B5 PS45S When the cassette 4 is closed,
-B4
sensor '1'.
J517
PS46 -B9 +5V
Vertical path
4 paper -B8 PS46S When paper is detected, '1'.
sensor -B7
J502
PS47 -B6 +5V
Vertical path
J144

-B5 PS47S
1 paper -B4 When paper is detected, '1'.
sensor
J516
Lower right PS48 -A3
-A2 +5V
J291

cover
open/closed -A1 PS48S When the lower right cover is
closed, '1'.
J290

sensor
J516
PS49 -B10 +5V
Vertical path
J303

2 paper -B9 PS49S


-B8 When paper is detected, '1'.
sensor

Figure 2-108 Inputs to the DC Controller PCB

2-10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

• Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (4/6)

DC controller PCB

J513
Deck (right ) PS51 -B10 PS PS Approx. level
paper level +5V
-B9
middle -B8
PS51S 51S 52S (sheets)
sensor

J258
J513 0 0 1~375
PS52 -B13 0 1 376~750
Deck (right) -B12 +5V
paper level PS52S 1 1 751~1500
high sensor -B11
J514
Deck (left) PS54 -B10
paper level -B9 +5V PS PS Approx. level
middle -B8 PS54S 54S 55S (sheets)
sensor
J268
J514 0 0 1~375
PS55 -B13 +5V
Deck (left) 0 1 376~750
paper level -B12 PS55S
high sensor -B11 1 1 751~1500
J502
Manual feed PS56 -A3
-A2 +5V
J101

tray cover
open/closed -A1
PS56S When the manual feed tray
sensor cover is closed, '1'.
PS57
Copyboard
glass sensor See "Outputs from the DC Controller PCB 3/7."

Upper right J502


PS58 -B3
cover +5V
J146

open/closed -B2 PS58S When the upper right cover is


sensor -B1
J512
closed, '1'.
Toner PS59 -B3
cartridge cover -B2 +5V
open/closed -B1
PS59S When the cartridge cover is
sensor closed, '1'.
J243

Cartridge MSW1 J512


detecting -B7
switch MSW1S The toner cartridge is set, '0'.
-B6
Waste toner MSW2
clog N.O.
J512
detecting -B14 When the waste toner feed pipe
J251

J249

MSW2S
J250

switch -B13 is clogged, alternately '0' and '1'.


Pre-transfer MSW3
charging N.O.
J504
cleaning HP -A4
J124
J126

detecting MSW3S When the wire cleaner is at the


switch -A3
home position, '0'.
Primary MSW4
charging wire N.O.
J502
-A10
J106

cleaner HP MSW4S When the wire cleaner is at the


detecting -A9
switch home position, '0'.
Manual tray MSW5
cover N.O. SW2 (door switch) J1723-7
1 Relay
open/closed
detecting See V.B. "Power-On Sequence" in Chapter 9.
switch
PCB
Transfer/separ MSW6 J509
N.O.
ation charging -A7
J198

MSW6S When the wire cleaner is at the


J197

wire cleaner
HP detecting -A6
switch home position, '0'.
Front cover MSW7 J502
N.O.
open/closed -B17
J111

detecting MSW7S When the front cover is closed,


-B16
switch '0'.
MSW8
Cartridge N.O.
motor drive See "Outputs from the DC Controller PCB 3/7."
switch

Figure 2-109 Inputs to the DC Controller PCB

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2-11
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

• Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (5/6)

DC controller PCB

J503
-B1
+5V

J119
Original size SIZE1 -B2
sensor 1 -B3
SIZE1 When an original is detected, '0'.

J118

J117
J503
-B4 +5V
J120

Original size SIZE2 -B5 SIZE2 When an original is detected, '0'.


sensor 2 -B6

J504
-B1 +5V
J136

Original size -B2


sensor 3
SIZE3 SIZE3 When an original is detected, '0'.
-B3
J135

J504
-B4
+5V
J137

Original size SIZE4 -B5


sensor 4 -B6
SIZE4 When an original is detected, '0'.
SIZE ON

J513
-B4 SV1-0
Cassette 3 -B5
J257

SV1 SV1-1
paper length -B6 0V
sensor -B7 +5V

J514
-A11 SV2-0
Cassette 4 -A12
J266

SV2-1
paper length SV2 -A13 0V
sensor -A14 +5V

SVR1 J510
-B6 +5V
Manual feed
J224

tray paper -B5 SVR1


width volume
-B4

Figure 2-110 Inputs to the DC Controller PCB

2-12 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

• Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (6/6)

DC controller PCB

SVR2 J513
-B3 +5V
Cassette 3 paper

J256
width detecting -B2 SVR2
See D. "Detecting the Cassette
volume
-B1 Paper Size" in Chapter 7.
SVR3 J514
-A10 +5V
Cassette 4 paper

J265
-A9 SVR3
width detecting See D. "Detecting the Cassette
volume -A8 Paper Size" in Chapter 7.
J504
-B7 +5V
(hopper internal
J139

-B8 TS1S
toner sensor) TS1
-B9 When toner is absent, '0'.

J504
-B10 +5V
(hopper internal
J138
J140

-B11 TS2S
toner lower limit TS2
-B12 When toner is absent, '0'.
sensor)

J504
-B15 +5V
J142

Developing TS3 -B16 TS3S When toner is absent, '0'.


assembly internal -B17
toner sensor
J508
-B7 M-TEMP
Fixing main
J190

thermistor TH1
-B8
J180
J187

J508 See III. "Fixing Assembly


-B9 S-TEMP
Temperature Control" in
J191

Fixing sub Chapter 8.


thermistor TH2
-B10

J502
J2-1 J3-4 -A11 +24V
J2-2
Potential J2-4 Potential control J3-3 -A12 POT-ON When potential control is under
J108

sensor DP1 J1-1 PCB J3-2 -A13 POT-SIG


J1-2 way, '1'.
J3-1 -A14
J1-5 Analog voltage to suit surface
potential of the drum.
J853 J506
J852
Light intensity control -1 -B1
FL-GAIN
-1 -2 -B2
Light intensity -2 PCB
sensor HEAT-ON
PD2001 -5 -3 -B3
-4 -B4
FL-TH See III. "Controlling the
OV Scanning Lamp" in Chapter 3.
-5 -B5
H5 -4 FL-REF
Fluorescent
lamp heater
-5
Temperature
sensor
-6

Figure 2-111 Inputs to the DC Controller PCB

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2-13
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

3. Outputs from the DC Controller PCB


• Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (1/7)

DC controller PCB

Hopper internal J504


magnet roller -B13 +24V

J138
J141
drive clutch CL1 -B14
CL1-ON* When '0', CL1 turns on.
J509
-A4 +24V
Registration
J200

J198

clutch CL2 -A5


CL2-ON* When '0', CL2 turns on.

J197
J509
Registration -B6 +24V
J207

brake clutch CL3 -B7


CL3-ON* When '0', CL3 turns on.
J512
-A11 +24V
Developing CL4
clutch -A12 When '0', CL4 turns on.
CL4-ON*
J513
-A12 +24V
J255

Pre-registration CL5
clutch -A13
CL5-ON* When '0', CL5 turns on.
J513
Pre-registration -A10 +24V
J254

J271

brake clutch CL6 -A11


CL6-ON* When '0', CL6 turns on.
J513
Manual feed -A8
J253

+24V
tray pickup CL7 -A9
clutch CL7-ON* When '0', CL7 turns on.
J511
-A3 +24V
J229
J231

Vertical path 1 CL8 -A4


clutch CL8-ON* When '0', CL8 turns on.
J514
-A6 +24V
J264

Vertical path 2
clutch CL9 -A7
CL9-ON* When '0', CL9 turns on.
J511
Deck (right) -A1 +24V
J229
J230

pickup clutch CL10 -A2


CL10-ON* When '0', CL10 turns on.
J518
Deck (left) -B7 +24V
J314
J320

pickup clutch CL11 -B8


CL11-ON* When '0', CL11 turns on.
J515
Cassette 3 -A1 +24V
J282

pickup clutch CL12 -A2


CL12-ON* When '0', CL12 turns on.
J281

J515
-A3 +24V
J283

Vertical path 3
clutch CL13 -A4
CL13-ON* When '0', CL13 turns on.
J517
Cassette 4 -A1 +24V
J306

pickup clutch CL14 -A2


CL14-ON* When '0', CL14 turns on.
J305

J517
-A3 +24V
J307

Vertical path 4 CL15


clutch -A4
CL15-ON* When '0', CL15 turns on.

Figure 2-112 Outputs from the DC Controller PCB

2-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

• Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (2/7)

DC controller PCB
No-stacking feeding
J36033 driver PCB J322
-B9

J332
Lower feeding J519
CL16 -B10 J3602-B9 -B4
middle clutch CL16-ON* When '1', CL16 turns on.
J36033
-B7
J331

J330
Lower feeding J519
right clutch CL17 -B8 J3602-B10 -B3 CL17-ON*
[1] When '1', CL17 turns on.
J36033 +24V
-B11 J3601-3
Deck (left) J519
J333

feeding clutch CL19 -B12 J3602-B11 -B2 CL19-ON*


When '1', CL19 turns on.
J513
J252 -A6 +24V
Manual feed
tray feeding CL18 -A7
CL18-ON* When '0', CL18 turns on.
clutch
J180 J508
-A13 +24V
J186

Delivery speed
switching CL21 -A14
CL21-ON* When '0', CL21 turns on.
clutch
J508
-B11 +24V
Fixing inlet
J192
J193

-B12 SL1P* When SL1P* is '0', the plunger is pulled.


guide SL1 -B13 SL1R*
solenoid When SL1R* is '0', the plunger is pushed.
J508
Fixing -B19 +24V
J196

cleaning belt SL2 -B20 SL2-ON*


solenoid When '0', SL2 turns on.
J508
Delivery -B17 +24V
J195

flapper SL3 -B18 SL3-ON*


solenoid When '0', SL3 turns on.
J509
-B1 +24V
Fixing feeding
J197
J204
J205

-B2 SL4P* When SL4P* is '0', the plunger is pulled.


unit locking SL4 -B3 SL4R*
solenoid When SL4R* is '0', the plunger is pushed.
J510
-B10 +24V
Multifeeder
J224

-B11 SL6P* When SL6P* is '0', the plunger is pulled.


pickup clutch SL6 -B12 SL6R*
solenoid When SL6R* is '0', the plunger is pushed.
J511
Deck (right) -A11 +24V
J229
J234

pickup SL7 -A12 SL7-ON*


solenoid When '0', SL7 turns on.
J518
Deck (left) -B9 +24V
J321

J314

pickup SL8 -B10 SL8-ON*


solenoid When '0', SL8 turns on.
J515
Cassette 3 -B10 +24V
J281
J289

pickup SL9 -B11 SL9-ON*


solenoid When '0', SL9 turns on.
J517
Cassette 4 -B10 +24V
J313

J305

pickup SL10 -B11 SL10-ON*


solenoid When '0', SL10 turns on.
J36044 J322 [1]
Reversing -1 No-stacking J3601-3 +24V J519
flapper SL11 -2 feeding driver
J3602-B8 -B5 SL11-ON*
solenoid PCB When '1', SL11 turns on.
+24V
[1]

Relay PCB

Figure 2-113 Outputs from the DC Controller PCB

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2-15
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

• Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (3/7)

DC controller PCB

J512
-B9 M0LCK
-B10 M0-ON While rotating at constant speed, '0'.

J250

J249
Drum motor M0
M5
-B11 +5V While M0 is rotating, '1'.
-B8
-B12
J514
-B4 M1-FG
-B5 M1-ON While rotating, '1'
Main motor M1
M5
-B6 +5V While M1 is rotating, '1'.
-B3
-B7
J513
-A2 M2-FG
-A3 M2-ON While rotating, '1'.
Pickup motor M2 -A4 +5V While M2 is rotating, '1'.
-A1
-A5
J508
-A17 M3LCK
-A18 M3-ON While rotating at constant speed, '0'.
-A19 +5V While M3 is rotating, '1'.
J180

Fixing motor M5
M3 -A15
-A16
-A20

J762 J503
-4 -A7 M4F/H While rotating at high speed, '1'.
-3 -A8 M4LCK
J116

Laser scanner Laser scanner -2 -A9 M4-ON While rotating at constant speed,
M4 motor driver -1 -A10
motor
PCB
M4LCK is '0'.
+38V
0V While M4 is rotating, '1'.

J802 J506
PS57 J804 -12 -A1 0v
-3 +5V -11 -A2
Copyboard -2 GLS_DT -10 -A3
No use
glass sensor -OPT D0
-1 -9 -A4 -OPT D1
-8 -A5 -OPT D2
J158

J803 -5 -7 -A6 -OPT D3


-4 -6 -A7 -OPT CW See ll. "Scanner Dive
-3 -5 -A8 -OPT CCW
Scanner motor M5 -4 -A9 System" in Chapter 3.
-2 -3 -A10
-OPT CDWN0
-1 -2 -A11
-OPT CDWN1
-1 -A12
-OPT CDWN2
-OPT HOFF
Scanner motor driver PC

Cartridge motor drive


switch
MSW8 J512
N.O.
Cartridge -B4 M6+
While M6 is rotating, '1'.
J245

J243

internal toner M6 -B5 M6-


feeder motor
J504 M7FW M7RV
Pre-transfer -A8 M7FW
1 0 (rear ➔ front)
J130

J124
J129

charging wire M7 -A9 M7RV


cleaning motor 0 1 (front ➔ rear)
J502 M8FW M8RV
Primary -A7 M8RV (rear ➔ front)
0 1
J105

J104

charging wire M8 -A8 M8FW


cleaning motor 1 0 (front ➔ rear)

Figure 2-114 Outputs from the DC Controller PCB

2-16 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

• Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (4/7)

DC controller PCB
Transfer/ J509 M9FW M9RV
separation -B4 M9RV 0 1 CCW(rear ➔ front)

J206

J197
charging wire M9 -B5 CW(front ➔ rear)
M9FW 1 0
cleaning motor
No-stacking feeding
J3603 driver PCB J36022 J519
-A6 -A5 -A8 See IV.C. "Controlling the
-A7 Motor -A6 -A7 DUPI-OFF
Duplexing -A8 -A7 -A6 DUPI-B Reversal Motor (M11)" in
J325

reversal M11 -A9 driver -A8 -A5 DUPI-A Chapter 7.


motor 0V
-A10
J323

-A11 J3602 J519


-A1 -A9 -A4 See IV.D. "Controlling the
-A10 -A3 DUPF-OFF

J322
-A2 Motor Duplexing Feeder Motor
-A2 DUPF-B
J324

Duplexing -A3 -A11


feed motor M12 -A4 driver -A12 -A1 DUPF-A (M12)" in Chapter 7.
0V
-A5 J3602
-B1 -A1 -A12
-B2 -A2 -A11
SREGI-HOLD See IV.D.3. "Horizontal
Motor SREGI-B
-B3 -A3 -A10 Registration Motor (M15)" in
J329

Horizontal driver SREGI-A


M15 -B4 -A4 -A9
registration
-B5
0V Chapter 7.
motor -B6 +24V
J514
Deck (right) -A4 M13-ON
lifter motor M13
While M13 is rotating, '1'.
-A5

J514
-B1 M14-ON
Deck (left)
M14
While M14 is rotating, '1'.
lifter motor -B2

J516
Cassette 3 -A4 M16-ON
While M16 is rotating, '1'.
J293

liter motor M16 -A5


J290

J516
Cassette 4 -B1 M17-ON While M17 is rotating, '1'.
J301

lifter motor M17 -B2

J504
-B18 M18+
J138
J143

Hopper M18 While M18 is rotating, '1'.


internal toner -B19 M18-
feeder motor
FM1 J504
Primary
-A13 FM1LCK While rotating at constant speed, '0'.
J131

-A15 FM1-ON While the fan is rotating, '1'. (24 V for


charging
assembly fan -A14
full speed, 12 V for half speed)
FM2 J503
-A4 FM2LCK While rotating at constant speed, '0'.
J114

Fixing -A6 FM2-ON While the fan is rotating, '1'. (24 V for
assembly heat -A5
discharge fan full speed, 12 V for half speed)
FM3 J504
-A10 FM3LCK While rotating at constant speed, '0'.
J131

Scanner -A12 FM3-ON


cooling fan -A11
While the fan is rotating, '1'. (24 V for
full speed, 12 V for half speed)
FM4 J502
-A4 FM4LCK While rotating at constant speed, '0'.
J103

Stream -A6 FM4-ON


reading fan -A5
While the fan is rotating, '1'. (24 V for
full speed, 12 V for half speed)

Figure 2-115 Outputs from the DC Controller PCB

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2-17
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

• Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (5/7)

DC controller PCB

FM5 J503
-A1 FM5LCK While rotating at constant speed, '0'

J113
Laser driver -A3 FM5-ON
cooling fan -A2
While the fan is rotating, 1'.

FM6 J509
-B11 FM6LCK While rotating at constant speed, '0'.
J209 -B13 FM6-ON
De-curling While the fan is rotating, '1'.
fan -B12

J197
FM7 J509
-A8 FM7LCK While rotating at constant speed, '0'.
J202

Feeding fan -A10 FM7-ON


-A9
While the fan is rotating, '1'.
(24 V for full speed, 12 V for half speed)
FM8 J512
-A8 FM8LCK While rotating at constant speed, '0'.
J241

-A10
Drum fan FM8-ON While the fan is rotating, '1'.
-A9
(24 V for full speed, 12 V for half speed)
FM9 J507
-A7 FM9LCK While rotating at constant speed, '0'.
J167
J175

Inverter -A9 FM9-ON


cooling fan -A8 While the fan is rotating, '1'.
(24 V for full speed, 12 V for half speed)
FM10 J504
-A5 FM10LCK
While rotating at constant speed, '0'.
J128

J124

-A7
Pre-transfer FM10-ON While the fan is rotating, '1'.
charging fan -A6
(24 V for full speed, 12 V for half speed)
FM11 J505
-B1 FM11LCK While rotating at constant speed, '0'.
-B3
Power supply
-B2
FM11-ON While the fan is rotating, '1'.
cooling fan 1 (24 V for full speed, 12 V for half speed)
J155

FM12 J505
-B4 FM12LCK While rotating at constant speed, '0'.
Power supply -B6 FM12-ON While the fan is rotating, '1'.
cooling fan 2 -B5
(24 V for full speed, 12 V for half speed)
FM13 J509
-A11 FM13LCK While rotating at constant speed, '0'.
J203

J197

-A13
Separation
-A12
FM13-ON While the fan is rotating, '1'.
fan (24 V for full speed, 12 V for half speed)
FM14 J504
-A16 FM14LCK While rotating at constant speed, '0'.
J131

Laser -A18 FM14-ON


-A17
While the fan is rotating, '1'.
scanner fan
J504
LED1 -A1 PEXP When '1', turns on.
J125

J124

Pre-exposure
lamp
-A2
J1002 J506
J1003 -6 -B6 OV
-7 -B7 FL-CLK
Inverter -8 -B8
-1 FL-ERR
Scanning -2 PCB -9 -B9
DP1 -4
PRH-ON See III.'Controlling the Scanning
lamp -10 -B10 PRH-PWM
-5 -11 -B11
Lamp' in Chapter 3.
FL-ON
-12 -B12 OV
-13 -B13 FL-PWM

Figure 2-116 Outputs from the DC Controller PCB

2-18 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

• Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (6/7)

DC controller PCB

J503
Total copy -B12
+24V

J121
counter CNT1 -B13
CNT1D When '0', the count is incremented.

J503
J65-1 -B11 CNT2D When '0', the count is incremented.
Accessories J63-1 J65-2 -B10
Accessories counter J65-3 +24V
counter CNT2 -B9 CNT2-B1
J63-2 PCD J65-4 -B8 CNT2-B2
J65-5 -B7
Some 230-V models only.
J503
Printer -B14 +24V
J121

counter CNT3
-B15 CNT3D When '0', the count is incremented.
J273 J510
Primary charging J731-1 -16 -A1
(grid wire)
(primary charging wire) T601 -15 -A2
-14 -A3
Transfer charging
T701 -13 -A4
-12 -A5
Dust collecting roller
J732-1 -11 -A6
-10 -A7
Developing assembly
J732-5 -9 -A8
HVT- See III. "Controlling the
-8 -A9
Fixing roller DC1
J733-1 -7 -A10 Charging mechanism" in
-6 -A11 Chapter 6.
Feeding guide
J733-3 -5 -A12
J734-1 -4 -A13
Pre-transfer charging
AC J734-5 -3 -A14
trans- J722-1
-2 -A15
Separation charging former HVT- J722-2
AC J722-3 -1 -A16

Separation claw
J737-1
J505
-A9 MHDTC
Main SSR1 -A10 MH-ON
H1
heater -A11 SH-ON
TA RL1
-A12 SHDTC
See III. "Controlling the Fixing
Sub H2 Thermistor Relay Temperature" in Chapter 8.
heater -A13 OV
-A14 24V

J512-13 +24V
Main power
J24

switch (SW1) -14


SHUT_OFF* When '0', the main power switch turns off.

Figure 2-117 Outputs from the DC Controller PCB

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2-19
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

• Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (7/7)

DC controller PC

J507
J172-7 -B1
J172-6 -B2
J172-5 -B3

J167
J172-4 -B4
To ADF J172-3 -B5
J172-2 -B6
J172-1 -B7
J23-1 1
J34

2 J172-1 +24V
J23-2
-2
ADF connector of
the copier's back
Relay PCB
J505
J151-5 -A1
J151-4 -A2
J151-3 -A3
J151-2 -A4
To finisher J151-1 -A5
(accessory) J48-2
J48-1 J1723-8 +24V
-9
Finisher connector
of the copier's back
Relay PCB
J512
J152B-7 -A1
J152B-6 -A2
J152B-5 -A3
J239

J152B-4 -A4
J152B-3 -A5
To paper J152B-2 -A6
deck J152B-1 -A7
(accessory)
J152C-4 -1 +38V
J152C-3 -2 J172-3
J41

-3 -2 +24V
J152C-2
-1
Paper deck connector
on the copier's back
Relay PCB

Figure 2-118 Outputs from the DC Controller PCB

2-20 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3
ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

This chapter provides descriptions on the operations and the functions of the
scanner drive mechanism and the original detection mechanism, relationship
between electrical and mechanical systems, and timing at which each associated
part is turned on.

I. OPERATIONS ............................ 3-1 C. Controlling Pre-Heat Voltage


A. Outline .................................... 3-1 ............................................. 3-10
B. Basic Sequence of Operations D. Initial Activation .................... 3-11
............................................... 3-3 E. Detecting an Error ................ 3-12
C. Changing the Reproduction Ratio IV. DETECTING THE ORIGINAL SIZE
............................................... 3-4 .................................................. 3-14
II. SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM ...... 3-5 A. Outline .................................. 3-14
A. Outline .................................... 3-5 B. Detection by Original Sensors
B. Controlling the Scanner Motor ............................................. 3-14
............................................... 3-6 C. Detection by the Feeder ...... 3-14
III. CONTROLLING THE SCANNING V. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .... 3-15
LAMP .......................................... 3-8 A. No. 1 Mirror Mount ............... 3-16
A. Outline .................................... 3-8 B. Scanner Drive Assembly ..... 3-20
B. Controlling the Temperature by a C. PCBs .................................... 3-28
Fluorescent Lamp Heater .... 3-10 D. Others .................................. 3-31

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

I . OPERATIONS
A. Outline
Table 3-101 shows the major functions of the original exposure system.

Item Description
Original illumination Illumination by a fluorescent lamp
Original scanning Book mode: scanning by the No. 1 mirror mount
ADF mode (one-side reading): scanning by stream reading (2 fixed points
of small-size reading and large-size reading)
ADF mode (double-sided reading): scanning by the No. 1 mirror mount
Scanner position By a scanner home position sensor (PS1)
detection By an image leading edge sensor (PS3)
Enlargement/reduction Main scanning direction: images are processed by a line memory
Sub scanning direction: No. 1 mirror mount is moved at different speeds
Scanner drive control No. 1 mirror mount: pulse control by a stepping motor (M5)
Lens mount: fixed in position
Scanning lamp control [1] Pre-heat control by a fluorescent lamp heater
[2] Pre-heat voltage control
[3] Initial activation control
[4] Intensity control by an intensity sensor
[5] Fluorescent lamp life detection
Original size detection [1] By an original size sensor
[2] By the ADF
Others Copyboard glass sensor (PS57)
Fluorescent lamp temperature sensor (H5): detects the temperature of the
fluorescent lamp heater

Table 3-101 Major Functions

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-1
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

Figure 3-101 shows the major components of the original exposure system.

Home position Original


Copyboard glass

No. 2 mirror
Image leading Small-size Large-size
edge stream reading stream reading
Scanning point point
lamp CCD
No. 1 mirror mount No. 1 mirror
Lens

No. 3 mirror
No. 2 mirror mount

Figure 3-101 (cross sectional view)

Scanning lamp (FL1)

Copyboard glass sensor Scanner motor (M5)


Light-blocking
plate
Image leading
Fluorescent lamp heater (H5)
edge sensor (PS3)
(forward)

Scanner home
position sensor No. 1 mirror mount
(PS1)
(reverse)

No. 2 mirror mount Light intensity sensor (PD2001)

Figure 3-102 (external view)

Component Notation Description


Scanning lamp FL1 Fluorescent amp (rated at 43 W)
Scanner motor M5 5-phase stepping motor
Scanner home position sensor PS1 Photointerrupter (detects the scanner home position)
Image leading edge sensor PS3 Photointerrupter (detects the image leading edge)
Copyboard glass sensor PS57 Photointerrupter (detects the presence/absence of the
copyboard glass)
Fluorescent lamp temperature H5 Thermistor (detects the fluorescent lamp heater
sensor temperature)
Light intensity sensor PD2001 Photodiode (detects the lamp light intensity)
Fluorescent lamp heater H5 Nickel chrome line (rated at 36 W; stabilizes the
temperature inside the fluorescent lamp)
Mirror No. 1 through No. 3 mirrors

Table 3-102 Major Components

3-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

B. Basic Sequence of Operations


• book mode, 1 original
· Lamp performance measurement [1] In book mode, turns on as soon as the original size is found.
· Heating [2] In ADF mode, turns on as soon as an original is placed in the ADF.
Control panel
Main power power Copy Start If for scanning two or more pages, kept on
switch ON switch ON Original set key ON
also in reverse to stabilize light intensity.
SLEEP WMUP WMUPR STBY INTR SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY

70˚C Controlled
Fluorescent lamp to 70˚C Controlled to 70˚C
heater (H5)
Scanning lamp pre-
heat voltage
1.5 sec
Scanning lamp
(FL1)
Initial activation OFSET GAIN
Shading correction
Scanner motor (M5)
Scanner HP sensor HP search
(PS1)
1st page image
Image leading edge leading edge
signal (ITOP)

If not at HP, HP search. Synchronizing in sub scanning direction.


Reading the standard white plate.

Figure 3-103 Basic Sequence of Operations

HP Image leading edge

Scanner HP sensor Image leading edge sensor


52.5 mm

Original

1) HP search at power-on

2) Shading correction position

3) Pre-scanning
(speed used at 50% reduction)
4) Original scanning
(book mode)
185 mm
4) Original scanning Small-size position
(ADF mode; stream reading) (less than 216 mm long)

385 mm
4) Original scanning Large-size position
(ADF mode; stream reading) (216 mm or longer)

Figure 3-104 Scanner Movement


COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-3
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

C. Changing the Reproduction Ratio


1. Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction
Volume 3>Chapter 3>I.B. "Changing the Reproduction Ratio"
Images are processed by a line memory.

2. Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction


Volume 3>Chapter 3>I.B. "Changing the Reproduction Ratio"
The scanning speed of the No. 1 mirror mount is varied.

8000
Scanning speed (pps)

4000 The scanner motor speed is varied


in increments of 1% (ratio).

2000
1000
500

50% 100% 200% 400%

25%/reverse

Figure 3-105 Relationship between Scanning Speed and Reproduction Ratio

3-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

II . SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM


A. Outline
Figure 3-201 shows the components of the scanner drive system.

[1] Direction of motor rotation


[2] Speed of motor rotation
Copyboard glass sensor (PS57)
Used to detect the presence/absent
of the copyboard glass. If absent,
Scanner motor driver PCB

Detection signal the drive signal to the motor is off.

Control Drive signal


signal
Scanner motor (M5)
DC controller PCB

Detection signal (forward)

(reverse)

No. 2 mirror mount

Scanner HP sensor (PS1)


No. 1 mirror mount
Used to detect the home position of
the No. 1 mirror mount. The No. 1
mirror mount is stopped in reference
to this signal.

Figure 3-201 Components of the Scanner Drive System

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-5
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

B. Controlling the Scanner Motor


Figure 3-202 shows the construction of the scanner motor control mechanism.

The number of steps (clock


signals) is determined based on
combinations of D0 through D3. Relay PCB

38 VU

-12 V
GND

GND

GND
12 V
For motor drive

5V
J801
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J506A J802
0V
1 1
2 Not used 2 J803
OPT-D0
3 3 1 Scanner motor
DC controller PCB

OPT-D1 2
4 4
OPT-D2 3 M5
5 5
4
OPT-D3
6 6 5
OPT-CLK
7 7 Excitation
OPT-CCW
8 8 control
OPT-CD0
9 9
OPT-CD1
10 10
11 OPT-CD2 11 J804
OPT-DWN
12 12 0V
1
13 Not used 13 2 GLS_DT PS57
3 5V
Copyboard
glass sensor
Scanner motor driver PCB

When '1' power to Motor drive sync clock pulses; when '1',
the motor is cut. the motor is at rest. The motor starts to
rotate in response to clock pulses.
The current to the motor is In the absent of the
determined based on combinations copyboard glass,'1'.
of CD0 through CD2.
Used to switch the direction of motor rotation:
when '1', the scanner moves forward; when
'0', the scanner moves in reverse.

Figure 3-202 Construction of the Control System


4.4A 0.9A
Current level
8000
Motor speed (pps)

4000 The scanner motor speed is varied


in increments of 1% (ratio).
2000
1000
500
50% 100% 200% 400%

25%/reverse

Figure 3-203 Relationship between Motor Speed and Reproduction Ratio

3-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

Related Error Code

E202 The No. 1 mirror mount does not reach the home position sensor within
(scanner home position a specific period of time.
detection error)
E204 [1] The image leading edge signal is not generated when the No. 1
(image leading edge mirror mount is moving forward.
detection error) [2] The image leading edge signal from the ADF is not generated in
stream reading mode.

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X Use it to adjust the image leading edge position by


(scanner image leading edge position entering a setting.
adjustment) Vertical Image leading edge sensor
size plate
Copyboard glass

Standard white plate


Lower setting Higher setting
Setting range: 0 to 2970 (a change of 12 causes a
shift of 1 mm)
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S Use it to adjust the home position (standard white
(scanner home position adjustment) plate read position) by entering a setting.
If the standard white plate is soiled, use this mode
to avoid reading the soiled area.
Vertical HP sensor
size plate
Copyboard glass

Standard white plate


Lower setting Higher setting
Setting range: 0 to 4

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-7
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

III . CONTROLLING THE SCANNING LAMP


A. Outline
The scanning lamp is controlled for the following:
[1] Temperature by a fluorescent lamp heater
[2] Pre-heat voltage
[3] Initial activation
[4] Intensity by a light intensity sensor
Figure 3-301 shows the construction of the mechanisms used to control the scanning lamp.

J852 Voltage to suit the light intensity.


24 V
1
Difference between FL-DTCT
2
FL-REF and FL-DTCT. GND
3 To light intensity sensor
FL-PWM is corrected Light intensity control PCB 38 V
4
based on this data. GND To temperature sensor/scanner
5
FL-TH
heater
6
When '0' ,the scanner 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 Fluorescent lamp
heater turns on. J853 J851
heater temperature
GND

GND

Reference intensity
24 VU

38 VU

level for comparison


against FL-DTCT.
J506B
FL-GAIN
Relay PCB
1
38 VU

2 HEAT-ON
GND

FL-TH
3 J1001
DC controller PCB

4
0V 1 2
T1001
FL-REF
5
Transformer Fluorescent H5
6 0V 6 drive control lamp
FL-CLK Temperature
7 7 transformer sensor
FL-ERR
8 8 Activation J803
PRH-ON voltage
9 9 1
PRH-PWM Pre-heat Pre-heat voltage 2
10 10 output
11
FLON
11 control 3
0V 4
12 12 5
13 FL-PWM 13
Current
Output detection
J1002 control

Scanning
lamp
When '0', the
Light intensity
fluorescent Inverter PCB sensor
lamp turns on.
Fluorescent heater

Pulse signals. Changing the pulse When '0', pre-heat voltage is applied.
width increases/decreases the
intensity of light. Error detection

Pulse signals. Changing the pulse Pulse signals used to drive


width increases/decreases the pre- the transformer (T1001).
heat voltage.

Figure 3-301 Construction of the Control System

3-8 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>LAMP>L-DATA Use it to enter the setting recorded on the service


(scanning lamp light intensity data input) label if the result of CCD-ADJ is NG, thereby
determining FL-PWM.
Settings: 0 to 255
Higher setting
Lower intensity Higher intensity
Lower setting

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-9
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

B. Controlling the Temperature by a Fluorescent Lamp Heater


The fluorescent lamp controls the area around the fluorescent lamp to 70°C to ensure a stable
light intensity.
Main power Control panel Copy Start
switch ON switch ON key ON

SLEEP WMUP WMUPR STBY INTR SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY

Fluorescent heater 70˚C Controlled


to 70˚C Controlled to 70˚C
(H5)
Initial
Scanning lamp activation
(FL1)

Figure 3-302 Heater-On Sequence

C. Controlling Pre-Heat Voltage


A pre-heat voltage is applied to the fluorescnet lamp even when the lamp remains off so as to
ensure an optimum intensity in the shortest time possible.
Main power Control panel Copy Start
switch ON power switch ON Original set key ON

SLEEP WMUP WMUPR STBY INTR SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY

Fluorescent heater 70˚C


Controlled to 70˚C Controlled to 70˚C
(H5)
Scanning lamp
2.9V 4.1V 2.9V 4.1V Optimum value 2.9 V
pre-heat voltage
1.5 1.5
sec Optimum sec
value
Scanning lamp
(FL1)

The scanning lamp is assumed to Intensity Continued application of pre-heat voltage


check
have reached its optimum intensity would hinder temperature control;
when the temperature of the area therefore, it is turned off and on in
around it reaches 70˚C. Then, the conjunction with the scanner heater.
pre-heat voltage is increased to
prepare for activation.

The intensity of light is checked by the intensity sensor to


determine the optimum level based on the measurement.

Figure 3-303 Pre-Heat Voltage Application Sequence

Voltage Description
Standby Used to stabilize the heat inside the fluorescent lamp while
2.9 V
pre-heating the lamp is off.
Pre-heating Applied 1.5 sec immediately before turning on the
before 4.1 V fluorescent lamp, thereby shortening the time until optimum
activation intensity is attained.
Pre-heating 3.9 V to 3.8 V (optimum To stabilize the inside of the fluorescent lamp during
during level is applied to suit activation.
activation the measurement of the
light intensity sensor)

Table 3-301 Pre-Heat Voltage

3-10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

D. Initial Activation
The fluorescent lamp is turned on when the control panel power switch is turned on for the
following:
[1] To stabilize the inside of the fluorescent lamp in the shortest time possible.
[2] To check the intensity by the light intensity sensor to determine pre-heat voltage.

The fluorescent lamp is assumed to have reached a


level appropriate to activation when the temperature Purpose of the Intensity Check
around it reaches 70˚C, and the pre-heat voltage is [1] To determine an optimum level
increased to prepare for activation. for pre-heat voltage.
Control panel [2] To find out the remaining life of
Main power power switch the fluorescent lamp (approx.).
switch ON ON

SLEEP WMUP WMUPR STBY

Fluorescent lamp heater 70˚C


Controlled to 70˚C
(H5)
Scanning lamp pre-heat
2.9 V 4.1 V Optimum level 2.9 V
voltage

Intensity check

Scanning lamp (FL1)

Temperature at power-on (control panel) Activation period


40˚C or less 30 sec
40˚C to 60˚C 20 sec
60˚C to 65˚C 5 sec
65˚C or more Off

Figure 3-304 Sequence of Operations (initial activation)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-11
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

E. Detecting an Error
As part of controlling the fluorescent lamp, checks are made of the following:
[1] Remaining life of the fluorescent lamp (See Figure 3-305.)
[2] Activation error
[3] Thermistor error
E225
An error is indicated if the optimum
light intensity is not attained in 5
sec after activation.
E219
The fluorescent lamp is assumed to have reached
the end of its life upon detection of 170˚C or higher E219
during activation (requiring much power to attain
The fluorescent lamp is assumed to
an optimum level of intensity).
have reached the end of its life upon
E225 detection of 170˚C or higher during
If an optimum light intensity activation (requiring much power to
cannot be attained within 5 attain an optimum level of intensity).
sec after activation.
Main power Control panel Copy Start
switch ON power switch ON key ON

SLEEP STBY INTR SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY

Detection
Intensity sensor
output (FLDTCT)
Scanning lamp
(FL1)
Temperature sensor
output (FL-TH)

Controlled to 70˚C Controlled to 70˚C

Figure 3-305 Checking the Remaining Life of the Fluorescent Lamp

3-12 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

Related Error Code

E220 [1] While in standby, the scanning lamp turns on. (detected in reference
(activation error) to the voltage of FL-DTCT)
[2] During scanning, the scanning lamp turns off. (detected in reference
to the voltage of FL-DTCT)
E222 [1] When the main power switch is turned on, the temperature does not
(fluorescent lamp heater reach 70˚C or higher 5 min after the scanner heater has turned on
error) (HEAT-ON=1).
[2] While power is supplied, the temperature does not reach 75˚C or
more 3 min after the fluorescent lamp heater has turned on.
E211 [1] When the main power switch is turned on, the temperature does not
(thermistor open circuit) reach 10˚C or higher 2 min after the fluorescent heater has turned
on (HEAT-ON=1).
[2] While power is supplied, a temperautre of 0˚C or lower is detected.
E215 While the scanning lamp is off, a temperature of 170˚C or more is
(thermistor short circuit) detected.
E219 While the scanning lamp is on, a temperature of 170˚C or higher is
(scanning lamp end of life) detected by the thermistor.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-13
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

IV . DETECTING THE ORIGINAL SIZE


A. Outline
Volume 3>Chapter 3>I.F.>1. "Outline"

Detection by
Original Sensors

AB/INCH
AB
INCH

AB/INCH
AB

Detection by Original Sensors

Figure 3-401 Arrangement of the Original Sensors

B. Detection by Original Sensors


Volume 3>Chapter 3>I.F>2.>3. "Detecting the Original Size"

C. Detection by the Feeder


Volume 3>Chapter 3>I.F.>4. "Detecting the Size of the Originals in the Feeder"

3-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

V. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go
through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier's parts while keeping the
following in mind:

1. ! Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work.

2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted.

3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. Do not leave out the toothed washer that comes with one of the mounting screws on the rear
cover to protect against static electricity.

5. Do not leave out the washer that comes with the screw used for the grounding wire and the
varistor to ensure electrical continuity.

6. Do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed, unless otherwise mentioned.

7. Turn off the front cover switch or the power switch before sliding out the duplexing feeding
unit or the fixing assembly.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-15
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

A. No. 1 Mirror Mount


1. Removing the Scanning Lamp/ [3] [1]
Scanning Lamp Heater
1) Remove the right glass retainer [2-1] and
the left glass retainer [2-2]; then, detach [2-1]
the copyboard glass [3] and the scanning [2-2]
map cover [4].

[4] [1]

Figure 3-A501
2) Remove the four screws [5], and detach
the scanning lamp inside cover [6].
[5] [6] [5]

Figure 3-A502

3-16 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3) Move the No. 1 mirror mount [7] to where [7] [9] [8]
the scanning lamp inside cover has been
removed; then, remove the two screws
[8], and detach the anti-reflection plate
[9].
[8]

Figure 3-A503

Caution:
When mounting the anti-reflection plate,
be sure to fit it in the cut-offs (front, rear)
of the No. 1 mirror mount securely. Fur-
ther, be sure to fit the connector in step
4) in the anti-refection plate.

Cut-off (front)
Figure 3-A504

Cut-off (rear) Anti-reflection plate

Figure 3-A505

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-17
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

4) Disconnect the connector [10], and re- [13]


move the two screws [11]; then, detach
the scanning lamp [13] from the electrode
plate (front) [12].
[10]

[11] [12] [11]

Figure 3-A506

5) Pull out the scanning lamp (w/ the scan-


ning lamp heater) [13] by pulling it to the [13]
front.

Figure 3-A507

6) Remove the scanning lamp heater [14]


from the scanning lamp [13].

[13] [14]

Figure 3-A508

3-18 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

2. Points to Note When Replacing


the Scanning Lamp
• Do not start working if the surface of the
scanning lamp is hot. 4 mm (approx.)
• Do not leave fingerprints on the surface of
the scanning lamp.
• Dry wipe the surface of the scanning lamp if
soiled.
• When mounting the scanning lamp heater to
the scanning lamp, be sure to match the
markings. (The connector of the scanning
lamp heater must be toward the front of the Marking
copier.)
• When mounting the scanning lamp to the
copier, take care not to touch its light-emit- Heater
ting side.
• When mounting the scanning lamp to the
copier, be sure that the print/marking is to-
ward the upper front of the copier. Light-emitting
side

Upper : 5 to 7 mm (approx.) Heater


Light-emitting
side

Figure 3-A509
3. After Replacing the Scanning
Lamp
1) Execute
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ
in service mode.
2) When all items of
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD and data of
COPIER>ADJUST>LAMP>L-DATA
have been updated, record them on the
service label.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-19
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

B. Scanner Drive Assembly


1. Removing the Scanner Motor
1) Open the toner cartridge cover.
2) Remove the upper right cover.
3) Remove the rear cover.
4) Remove the four screws [1], and discon-
nect the connector [2]. [1]

[1]

[2]
Figure 3-B501
5) While pulling the scanner motor unit [3]
toward the front, detach the belt to detach [3]
the motor.

Adjustment:
When the position of the scanner motor
must be adjusted while mounting it, ad-
just the tension of the belt to 13±2N
(1.3±0.2 kgf) using a spring gauge.

Figure 3-B502

3-20 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

2. Scanner Drive Cable


a. Adjusting the Tension of the Scanner
Drive Cable [1]
Before starting the work, obtain the mirror
positioning tool (FY9-3040-000).
1) Remove the ADF.
2) Remove the right glass retainer. [2]
3) Remove the copyboard glass.
4) Open the front cover, and remove the up-
per inside cover and the inside cover (AP
kit).
5) Remove the control panel.
6) Remove the rear cover.
7) Remove the four screws [1], and detach
the right reinforcing stay [2].
8) Remove the inverter PCB unit. [1]
9) Move the No. 1 mirror mount until its
cable metal fixing [3] is visible through Figure 3-B503
the hole in the copier's side plate.
[3]

Front
Figure 3-B504

[3]

Rear
Figure 3-B505

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-21
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

10) Rout the scanner cable through the pulley


and hooks as shown in Figure 3-B506.

Steel ball [4]

Wind seven times.


Put the steel ball into the hole in
the pulley. (Try not to leave gaps
between cable lengths.)

[3]

[8]

Fix
[5] temporarily.
[1]
[2]
[7]

[6]

Figure 3-B506

3-22 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

11) Fit the mirror positioning tool [4] between [4]


the No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2 mir-
ror mount; then, insert the pin [5] that
comes with the mirror positioning tool.

[5]
Front
Figure 3-B507

[4]

[5]
Rear
Figure 3-B508

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-23
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

12) Secure the cable metal fixing [3] tempo- [3]


rarily fixed in place in [8] of step 10) using [6] [6]
two screws [6] through the hole in the side
plate.

Front
Figure 3-B509

[6] [3] [6]

Rear
Figure 3-B510
13) Detach the mirror positioning tool.
14) Mount the parts back by performing steps
1) through 8) in reverse.

3-24 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

b. Removing the No. 1 Mirror Mount Flex-


ible Cable

Caution:
Do not disconnect the connector (con-
nected to the No. 1 mirror mount) of the
flexible cable unless you are replacing
the No. 1 mirror mount. (Do not discon-
nect the cable when cleaning the mirror.)

1) Remove the two screws [1], and detach [1]


the right glass retaining cover [2].

[2]

[1]
Figure 3-B511

2) Remove the copyboard glass. No. 1 mirror mount


3) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the cen-
ter. Flexible cable

Figure 3-B512

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-25
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

4) Peel off the warning label from the flex- Warning label
ible cable. Flexible cable

Figure 3-B513

5) Push in the claw to release the flexible


Claw
cable fixing plate.

Fixing plate
(before being
released)

Fixing plate
(after being
released)
Figure 3-B514

3-26 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

6) While pushing the boss (2 pc.) with a Small screwdriver


small screwdriver, disconnect the flexible
cable carefully from the connector.

Caution:
• When mounting, be sure to butt the
flexible cable fully against the rear,
and push in the fixing plate while hold-
ing it level.
• When pushing in the fixing plate, do not
touch the reflecting plate.
Boss Boss

Flexible cable

Figure 3-B515

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-27
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

C. PCBs
1. Removing the Light Intensity [1]
Control PCB
1) Remove the right glass retainer.
2) Remove the copyboard glass.
3) Remove the screw [1] from the No. 1 mir-
ror mount; then, while pushing down the
three claws, free the intensity control PCB Claw
holder.

Figure 3-C501

4) Disconnect the connector [2] (J165), and


remove the screw [3]; then, detach the
light intensity control PCB [4].

[2]

[3]

[4]

Figure 3-C502

3-28 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

2. Removing the Inverter PCB


1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and discon- [1] [2] [2] [3] [2] [2] [1]
nect the seven connectors [2]. While re-
moving the hook of the mounting plate
upward, remove the inverter control as-
sembly [3].

Figure 3-C503

Inverter unit

Hook (left)

Inverter unit
Hook (right)

Figure 3-C504

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-29
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3) Remove the six screws [4], and detach the [4] [4] [4]
inverter PCB [5].

[5] [4]

Figure 3-C505

3-30 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

D. Others
1. Removing the Original Size
Sensor (1/2)
1) Remove the copyboard glass.
2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the right
end.
3) Remove the two screws [1], and discon-
nect the connector [2]; then, detach the
original sensor unit [3].

[1] [3] [2]

Figure 3-D501

4) Disconnect the connector [4] (one each),


[5] [4] [5]
and detach the original sensor (1/2) [5].

Figure 3-D502

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-31
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

2. Removing the Original Size


Sensor (3/4)
1) Remove the copyboard glass.
[1] [3]
2) Remove the two screws [1], and discon-
nect the connector [2]; then, detach the
original sensor unit [3].

[2]
[1]
Figure 3-D503

3) Disconnect the connector [4] (one each), [4]


and detach the original sensor (3/4) [5].

[5]

Figure 3-D504

3-32 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3. Removing the Scanner Home


Position Sensor
1) Remove the rear cover. [4] [3]
2) Free the harness from the wire saddle [1],
and disconnect the connector [2]; then, re-
move the screw [3], and detach the sensor [1]
mount [4].

[2]

Figure 3-D505

3) Disconnect the connector [5], and remove


the screw [6]; then, detach the scanner
home position sensor [7].

[7] [6] [5]

Figure 3-D506

4. Removing the Copyboard Glass [2] [3]


1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Free the harness from the wire saddle [1],
and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the
sensor mount [3].
[1]

Figure 3-D507

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-33
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

3) Disconnect the connector [4], and detach [4] [5]


the copyboard glass sensor [5].

Figure 3-D508

5. Removing the Image Leading [4] [3]


Edge Sensor
1) Remove the rear cover.
[1]
2) Free the harness from the wire saddle [1],
and disconnect the connector [2]; then, re-
move the screw [3], and detach the sensor
mount [4].

[2]

Figure 3-D509
3) Disconnect the connector [5], and remove
the screw [6]; then, detach the image lead-
ing edge sensor [7].

[6]

[7] [5]

Figure 3-D510

3-34 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

6. Removing the Standard White


Plate
1) Remove the right glass retaining cover.
2) Remove the copyboard glass.
3) Remove the small cover [1] for the stan-
dard white plate with a flat-blade screw-
driver.

[1]

Figure 3-D511

4) Remove the two screws [2], and detach [3] [2]


the standard white cover [3].

[2]

Figure 3-D512

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-35
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

5) Remove the four screws [4], and detach [4]


the standard white plate [5].

7. After Replacing the Standard


White Plate
[4] [5]
1) Execute
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ Figure 3-D513
in service mode.
2) When all items under
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD and data under
COPIER>ADJUST>LAMP>L-DATA
have been updated, record the results on
the service label.

3-36 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4
IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

This chapter provides descriptions on the copier's image processing operations,


functions of each operation, relationships between electrical and mechanical
systems, and timing at which each associated part is turned on.

I. OUTLINE..................................... 4-1 F.Density Processing .............. 4-12


II. ANALOG IMAGE PROCESSING G.Binary Processing ................ 4-15
.................................................... 4-4 H.Image Memory ..................... 4-17
A. Outline .................................... 4-4 I.Detecting the Orientation of
III. DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING Originals ............................... 4-19
.................................................... 4-6 J. Black Pixel Count ................. 4-20
A. Outline .................................... 4-6 IV. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .... 4-21
B. Image Procesing Functional A. CCD PCB ............................. 4-22
Block ...................................... 4-7 B. Image Processor PCB ......... 4-24
C. Shading Correction ................ 4-9 C. Hard Disk (image server) ..... 4-26
D. Line Conversion ................... 4-10 D. Others .................................. 4-27
E. Editing .................................. 4-11

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

I . OUTLINE
Table 4-101 shows the major functions of the image processing system.

Item Description
CCD Number of CCD lines: 1
Number of pixels: 7500
Size of a CCD pixel: 7 × 7 µm
AE [1] Priority on speed by ABC processing
[2] Priority on image quality by pre-scanning
Shading correction [1] Shading adjustment in service mode
[2] Shading correction executed for each copy
Binary processing [1] Text/photo mode, text mode by random error diffusion (R-ED) method
[2] Print photo mode by screen dither processing
Memory size [1] Page Memory (DRAM)
18 MB (equivalent of 4 A4 originals; not compressed)
[2] Image server (hard disk)
2 GB (equivalent of 1,920 A4 originals; compressed)
Others [1] Original orientation detection
[2] Black pixel count

Table 4-101 Major Functions

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-1
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

Figure 4-101 shows the functional construction of the image processing system.

Analog image processing block

CCD

Analog image processing

A-D conversion

CCD PCB

Digital image processing block

IP PCB

Digital image processing


(for scanner input)
Memory board

Page memory Memory control Compression/


decompression

MFC PCB
To laser driver
PCB
Data transfer control

Digital image processing


(for PDL input)

System motherboard
Image server
Hard disk
PDL board

Figure 4-101 Functional Construction

4-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

Table 4-102 shows the functions of each PCB used in the image processing system.

PCB Description
CCD PCB [1] CCD driver
[2] Analog image processing
[3] A/D conversion
IP (image processor) PCB Digital processing (for scanner input)
MFC (multi-function controller) PCB Digital image processing (PDL input)
System motherboard Relays image signals.
PDL board Converts PDL data into a format that can be
processed by the copier.
Memory board (DRAM) Page memory of last images
Image server (hard disk) Stores image data that has been read in sequence.

The functions of each PCB given in the above table are limited to those relating to image processing.

Table 4-102 Functions of PCBs

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-3
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

II . ANALOG IMAGE PROCESSING


A. Outline
Analog image processing takes place on the CCD PCB, which possesses the following func-
tions:
1. CCD drive Volume 3>Chapter 4>II.B. "CCD"
2. CCD output offset correction Volume 4>Chapter 4>III. "Analog Image Processing"
3. CCD output gain correction Volume 4>Chapter 4>III. "Analog Image Processing"
4. CCD output A/D conversion Volume 3>Chapter 4>III.D. "A/D Conversion"
5. Real-time AE processing Volume 3>Chapter 4>III.E. "ABC Circuit"
(ABC processing)

Data for generating sync, pulses for the reader Clock, pulses for data reading

Communicates timing for CLK-DT reading. Main scanning sync signal

Sync clock, pulses for the reader


When '1', the CCD turns on.
CCD PCB
J1105
CCD J1502
CCD-ON 40 40

Image processing PCB


CCD drive 46 CLK-LD 46
Odd-numbered Even-numbered pixels control 47 CLK-DT 47
48 CCD-CLK 48
pixels Analog image (sync pulse HSYNC
generation) 34 34
signal 30 R-CLK 30
31 31
Analog signal processing block AD-CLK
35 35
1. Gain correction 38
AD-LD
38
2. Offset correction AD-DT
39 39
Even-numbered pixels
Odd-numbered A/D 45
ABC-ON
45
pixels conversion 17 17
8 Digital image signal
Shading correction

37 37

AE P-LNG
42 42
procession P-WD
43 43
A/D (ABC circuit)
conversion
8 3 3
Digital image signal
13 13

Width of an original (main When '1', the ABC circuit


scanning direction) executes AE. Data for gain/
offset correction
Length of an original (sub Clock pulses for data reading
scanning direction)
Communicates timing for AD-DT reading.

Figure 4-201 Functional Block Diagram

4-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y Enter a value to adjust the read start position.


(CCD read start position adjustment)
Lower setting

Higher setting Read start position

Original

Vertical size plate

Setting range: 0 to 400 (a change of 12 causes a shift


of 1 mm)

COPIER>ADJUST>AE>AE-TBL Enter a value to adjust the density correction curve for


(real-time AE mode text density adjustment) real-time AE mode (in 10 steps).
Setting range: 0 to 9 (default at 4)
Copy density

White

Original
White density
A higher setting produces darker
text.
A lower setting produces lighter text.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-5
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

III . DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING


A. Outline
Digital image processing takes place on the following PCBs:

PCB Description
IP (image processor) [1] Digital Image Processing (for scanner input)
PCB • Shading correction
• Enlargement/reduction (main scanning direction)
• Edge emphasis
• Binary processing
• AE processing (density correction curve)
• Negative/positive reversal
• Frame erasing
• Rotation
• Smoothing
[2] Compression/decompression
[3] Data transfer control
MFC (multi-function controller) [1] Digital Image Processing (for PDL input)
PCB • Enlargement/reduction (main/sub scanning direction)
[2] Data transfer control
System motherboard Relays image signals.
PDL board Converts PDL data into a format that can be
processed by the copier.
Memory board (DRAM) Page Memory: 18 MB
(equivalent of 4 A4 originals; not compressed)
Image server Stores image data that has been read in sequence.
(hard disk) 2 GB (1,920 A4 originals; compressed)

Table 4-301 Related PCBs

4-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
B. Image Processing Functional
Block

Analog image processing block

CCD PCB

Even-numbered/odd-numbered pixels Turned to two channels for laser A and B


IP PCB

Shading correction

Output by scanner clock, pulses Line conversion


Even-numbered/odd-numbered line
Original orientation detection PCB
Output by printer clock, pulses
Test pattern Enlargement/reduction
(main scanning direction)

Frame erasing on scanner input data


(by scanner clock pules) Edge emphasis
1. Original frame erasing PDL board
2. Book frame erasing
3. Hole image erasing Density processing MFC PCB

Enlargement/reduction
Binary processing (text, text / photo mode) (main / sub scanning direction)
Frame erasing on data after image Binary processing
memory output (print photo mode)
(by printer clock, pulses)
1. Sheet frame erasing Line conversion
2. Binding
Frame erasing Data transfer control

To laser driver
PCB Frame erasing Rotation

Smoothing Compression /
de-compression
Converts binary data of Memory control
Black pixel count DRAM Hard disk
600×600-dpi into 1200×600-dpi.

Memory board Image server

Figure 4-301 Functional Block Diagram

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-7
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

C. Shading Correction
Volume 3>Chapter 4>IV.B. "Shading Correction"

Shading Correction
1. Offset Correction
CCD PCB
Turns the minimum outputs of the CCD while the
CCD fluorescent lamp is off to '0'.
2. Scanning Lamp Intensity Adjustment
Turns on the fluorescence lamp, and adjusts its
Odd-numbered Even-numbered pixels
activation voltage so that the maximum output of the
pixels Analog image signal CCD in response to standard white paper will be
'255'.
Analog signal processing block 3. Offset Correction Value
1. Gain correction Stores the difference between '0' and the output of
2. Offset correction each CCD cell while the fluorescent lamp is off.
4. Target Level Correction Value
Stores the difference between light reflected by
A/D conversion A/D conversion
standard white plate and standard white paper.
8 8 Digital image
signal
Data for gain/offset adjustment
AD-DT

Determining the Shading Correction Value (for each


copy)
1. Offset Correction
Stores the difference between '0' and the output of
Shading correction each CCD cell while the fluorescent lamp is off, and
the value will be used as the correction value (for
correction of variation among the cells).
RAM
2. Gain Correction
Turns on the fluorescent lamp, and compares the
CCD outputsgenerated by the light reflected by the
Image processing PCB standard white plate and the light reflected by
standard white paper for storage in memory; the
difference will be used as the correction value (to
correct thedeterioration of the fluorescent lamp).

Figure 4-302 Shading Correction Block Diagram

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>GAIN-E/O If a faulty image is noted after executing


(CCD output gain adjustment input) COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ, enter the
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>OFST-E/O value recorded on the service label.
(CCD output offset adjustment value input)
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>SH-TRGT
(white level target value input for shading
correction)

COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ For details of execution, see VIII. "Service Mode" in


(shading auto adjustment) Chapter 13.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-9
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

D. Line Conversion
In this block even-numbered/odd-numbered pixels (parallel processing) are converted into
even-numbered/odd-numbered lines (parallel processing) for division into two channels (lasers A
and B).

3750 pixels

Even-numbered pixels 2 4 6 8 7498 7500

CCD
1st line 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7497 7498 7499 7500

Odd-numbered pixels 1 3 5 7 7497 7499

Feeding direction
Analog image processing block

CCD PCB
Image
Even-numbered /
odd-numbered pixels
1st line

Shading correction

Line conversion

Even-numbered /
odd-numbered lines
Feeding direction

IP PCB Image

2nd line
1st line
7500 pixels

1st line 1 2 3 4 5 6 7497 7498 7499 7500

(odd-numbered line; for laser A)

2nd line 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7497' 7498' 7499' 7500'
(even-numbered line; for laser B)

Figure 4-303 Conceptual Diagram of Line Conversion

4-10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

E. Editing
The digital image processing block performs the following editing functions:
[1] Enlargement/reduction Volume 3>Chapter 4>IV.D.1. "Enlargement/Reduction
(main scanning direction) Processing"
[2] Edge emphasis Volume 3>Chapter 4>IV.E.2. "AI Outline Processing"
[3] Negative/positive reversal Volume 3>Chapter 4>IV.F.1. "Negative/Positive Reversal"
[4] Frame Erasing
[5] Rotation
[6] Shift Volume 3>Chapter 4>IV.D.2. "Shift"
[7] Layout
[8] Image synthesis

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-11
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

F. Density Processing
1. Outline
The digital image processing block performs the following density processing:
[1] LOG conversion Volume 3>Chapter 4>IV.G.1. "Logarithmic Correction"
[2] Density correction Volume 3>Chapter 4>IV.G.2. "Density Processing"
[3] AE processing Volume 3>Chapter 4>IV.G.2. "Density Processing"
[4] Density adjustment Volume 3>Chapter 4>IV.G.2. "Density Processing"
[5] Density adjustment during printing
Of the foregoing functions, 1. through 4. are performed when scanner input image data is being
read, and 5. is performed when printing scanner input image data/PDL input image data.

Edge emphasis
Identifies the type of original by
Multiple-value data pre-scanning, and selects the best AE
table. (AE with priority on image quality)
AE processing (AE table)
Converts image signals possessing intensity
data representing reflected light into image
LOG conversion (LOG table) signals possessing data representing toner
Density adjustment density.
when reading data
Density adjustment (F value table) Selects an F value table to suit the Copy
Density key setting on the control panel.

Density adjustment ( table)


Selects a table to suit the text, text/photo,
or photo mode setting.

Binary processing
Binary data
Density adjustment
when printing data Density adjustment (laser power/developing bias)

Figure 4-304 Flow of Density Processing

4-12 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>DENS-ADJ If the copy image is foggy or the high-density area is


(copy density correction) fuzzy, use this mode to correct the F value table.
Setting range: 0 to 9 (default at 3)

White
F9 F1

Copy density
Black Original density White

A lower setting A higher setting


decreases fogging. reduces fuzzy images.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-13
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

2. Density Adjustment during Printing


The image data is in binary form when printing starts, and the data does not possess density
information. To adjust the density of images during printing, the copier corrects the laser intensity
and the developing bias as follows:

The developing bias is reduced earlier than the laser


power to prevent fogging.

Corrects the laser powerand the developing bias


according to the selected F value.

Laser power Vdc correction


F value
correction value value
Lighter
1 ×0.8
-20V
3
×1.0
Density 5
7 ×1.2
9 ×1.5
Darker

The laser power is increased to The developing bias is not increased


ensure firm toner deposit. to prevent fogging.

Table 4-302 Correction Table for Scanner Input

Laser power Vdc correction VD correction


F value
correction value value value
Lighter
The laser power is increased for 1 ×0.8
F=5 (standard laser power) as 2 ×0.9
compared with the level used for 3 ×1.0
scanner input to ensure reproduction of 4 ×1.1
fine lines narrower than a single pixel.
5 ×1.2
Density 6 ×1.3 +10V
7 ×1.4 +20V
8 ×1.5 +30V
9 ×1.5 +40V
Darker

The bias is corrected to increase


the contrast.

Table 4-303 Correction Table for PDL Input

4-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

G. Binary Processing
The copier performs binary processing for the following:
[1] Print photo mode (dither screen method)
[2] Text, text/photo mode, print photo mode (R-ED, i.e., random error diffusion, method)

1. Dither Screen Method


Image data is subjected to screen processing so that the images may be produced in 256 grada-
tions out of binary data.

4 pixels
8 pixels

In this area, as many as 16 The black pixels are


different density patterns thickened according to
may be created. As such, an density.
area consisting of 8 × 4
pixels enables creating of
256 (16 × 16) density
patterns.

Screens consisting of 106


lines running at 45˚ are
created.

Figure 4-305A Conceptual Diagram of the Dither Screen Method

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-15
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

2. Random Error Diffusion (R-ED) Method


In the existing error diffusion (ED) method, a fixed pattern (error diffusion matrix) is used to
diffuse (distribute) errors occurring as a result of binary processing over surrounding pixels, possi-
bly generating specific patterns on the output images. To reduce such patterns, the copier adds
random values to the image signals representing pixels (hence, random error diffusion).

Step 1

A random number is added to the image signal


representing each pixel.

At this time, a value that brings the sum to


+α 0 is added to the adjacent pixel to prevent
-α an error caused by the random number.

Step 2
Error Diffusion Matrix (fixed pattern)
Each error is diffused (distributed)
×0.05
to the surrounding pixels according to the
×0.01 ×0.1
×0.05 ×0.2
ratio of the error diffusion matrix.
×0.2
×0.1 ×0.1 ×0.1
×0.03 ×0.05 Pixel in question (e.g., density at 135)
×0.01
When the slice level used for binary
processing is 128, this pixel will be a black
pixel (255).
In this case, the diffusion will be 125 (255 -
135).

Black(255) Error

Slice level Pixel in question


(128) (density at 135)

White(0)

Figure 4-305B Conceptual Diagram of the Error Diffusion Method

4-16 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

H. Image Memory
The copier is equipped with the following image memory:
[1] Image server (hard disk)
[2] Memory board (DRAM; page memory)

1. For main scanning direction, control is Scanner input


based on synchronization with the BD CCD PCB PDL board
signal.
IP PCB
For sub scanning direction, control is
based on synchronization with the PDL input
PTOP signal (image leading edge Image
signal generated from the registration processing
ON signal).
2. Controls the destination of image data. Frame erasing

MFC PCB
Rotation

Memory board
Compression / Data transfer
Memory
DRAM expansion control
control

Black density
count
To image server
Page memory to enable
synchronization of image Hard disk
signals for each page.

Stores images, and generates a selected number of sets.

Figure 4-306 Image Memory Block Diagram

Image data

Stores images in page memory


Memory board once, and waits until the previous
image is compressed.
Compression

Hard disk
De-compression
Develops and stores images in page
Memory board memory to enable synchronization
of image signals for each page.

To laser driver PCB

Figure 4-307 Flow of Image Data

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-17
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PM-RD-MD 1: Read while writing to page memory. (default)


(page memory read control on/off) 0: Read at the end of writing a single-page equivalent
of data into page memory, thereby preventing jams
in memory otherwise caused by jams in the feeder.

COPIER>FUNCTION>HRD-DISK>FOR- • Use it to initialize the hard disk.


MAT • Use it on a normal hard disk.
(hard disk formatting) • Use it when replacing the hard disk (or at time of
shipment from the factory).
• Execution takes about 1 sec.

COPIER>FUNCTION>HRD-DISK>SCAN- • Use it to check the hard disk for errors or to initialize


DISK it.
(hard disk scanning) • Use it to a hard disk with a fault.
• Execution takes about 25 min.

4-18 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

I. Detecting the Orientation of Originals


In this block, the orientation of text data is checked to identify the orientation of an original so
that reduced page composition may take place in the correct orientation regardless of the orienta-
tion of each original in the ADF.

270˚

90˚
180˚

Communicates the result of


detection to the IP PCB.
[1] 0˚
IP PCB [2] 90˚
[3] 180˚
[4] 270˚
[5] Not known (output as is)
8 Image data
All image data is
read, and text
areas are
The text data in
extracted.
Text area Text orientation storage and the
detection block detection block fonts in the
dictionary are
matched to identify
2 the orientation of
the text.
Text data storage Dictionary storage
block block
Flash ROM

Image data is subjected to binary Stores language


processing to speed up processing. dictionaries.

Figure 4-308 Conceptual Diagram of Detection

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-19
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

J. Black Pixel Count


In this block, the black pixels in image data are counted to obtain an estimate of the amount of
toner on paper. Using the resulting data, the copier optimizes the current level of the separation DC
bias.
40 mm

Image
leading edge
Original

The black pixels within a width of 40 mm


along the image leading edge are counted
to obtain an estimate of the amount of toner
per unit area.

Figure 4-309 Range of Counting Black Pixels

4-20 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

IV . DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go
through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier's parts while keeping the
following in mind:

1. ! Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work.

2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted.

3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. Do not leave out the toothed washer that comes with one of the mounting screws on the rear
cover to protect against static electricity.

5. Do not leave out the washer that comes with the screw used for the grounding wire and the
varistor to ensure electrical continuity.

6. Do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed, unless otherwise mentioned.

7. Turn off the front cover switch or the power switch before sliding out the duplexing feeding
unit or the fixing assembly.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-21
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

A. CCD PCB
1. Removing the CCD PCB
[1] [3]
1) Remove the copyboard glass.
2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the left
end.
3) Remove the two screws [1], and discon-
nect the connector [2]; then, detach the
original sensor unit (rear) [3].

[2]
[1]
Figure 4-A401
4) Release the front and rear claws, and de-
tach the CCD cover [4].
Claw
[4]

Figure 4-A402

4-22 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

5) Remove the three fixing screws [5], and [5] [8]


disconnect the connector [6]; then, detach [5]
the flat cable [7] from the CCD PCB, and
detach the CCD unit [8].

[6] [5]

Figure 4-A403

[7]

Figure 4-A404

2. After Replacing the CCD Unit


1) Execute
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ
in service mode.
2) When all items under
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD and data under
COPIER>ADJUST>LAMP>L-DATA
have been updated, record the results on
the service label.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-23
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

B. Image Processor PCB


1. Removing the Image Processor
PCB
1) Remove the copyboard glass.
2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the left [3]
edge. [1]
3) Remove the two screws [1], and discon-
nect the connector [2]; then, detach the
original sensor unit (rear) [3].

[2]
[1]
Figure 4-B401
4) Remove the two screws [4], and detach
the flat cable [5].
[4] [4]
[5]

Figure 4-B402

4-24 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

5) Remove the four screws [6], and detach [6] [7] [6]
the image processor cover [7].

Caution:
At this time, take care not to damage the
flat cable removed in step 4).

[6] [6]
Figure 4-B403

6) Disconnect the seven connectors [9] of the [10] [9] [10]


image processor PCB [8], and remove the
[8] [9]
six screws [10]; then, detach the image
processor PCB [8].

Caution:
At this time, take care not to damage the
connector [12] of the image processor
PCB and the original orientation PCB
[11].

[10]
[10] [9] [9] [10] [12] [11]

Figure 4-B404

2. After Replacing the Image


Processor PCB
See G. "Electrical Parts" under II. of
Chapter 13.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-25
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

C. Hard Disk (image server)


1. Removing the Hard Disk (image
server)
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Open the system box.
3) Remove the system cover, face plate, and
partition. (See Figures 9-K701 and -
K702.)
4) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and re-
move the four screws [2]; then, detach the [1]
hard disk (image server) [3] together with
the mounting plate.

[2] [2]
[3]
Figure 4-C401
5) Remove the four screws [4], and take out
the hard disk (image sever) [3].

[4] [4]

[3]

2. After Replacing the Hard Disk Figure 4-C402


(image server)
See G. "Electrical Parts" under II. of
Chapter 13.

4-26 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

D. Others
1. Removing the System Motherboard [2] [1] [3]
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the three flat cables [1] and three
screws [2]; then, open the system box [3].

[2]

[2] [1]

Figure 4-D401
3) Disconnect the three connectors [4], and
remove the four screws [5]; then, detach
the motherboard [6]. [5] [6] [5]

[5] [4] [5]

Figure 4-D402

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-27
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

2. Removing the Memory Board [2]


1) Remove the copyboard glass.
2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the left
edge.
3) Remove the original sensor unit (rear).
4) Remove the CCD cover.
5) Remove the CCD unit.
6) Remove the image processor cover.
7) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the memory board [3] from the image pro-
cessor PCB [2].

[1] [3] [1]

Figure 4-D403

3. Removing the Various Printer


Boards [2]
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach [1]
the printer board unit [3] from the system
box [2].

[3]
[1]

Figure 4-D404

4-28 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

3) Remove the seven screws [4], and detach [4]


the printer board [5].

[4]

[4]
[4]

[5]

Figure 4-D405

4. Removing the Original Detection [3]


PCB [1]
1) Remove the copyboard glass.
2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the left
end.
3) Remove the two screws [1], and discon-
nect the connector [2]; then, detach the
original sensor unit (rear) [3].

[2]
[1]

Figure 4-D406

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-29
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

4) Release the front and rear claws of the


CCD cover [4], and detach the CCD cover Claw
[4]. [4]

Figure 4-D407

5) Remove the three fixing screws [5], and [5] [8]


disconnect the connector [6]; then, detach [5]
the flat cable [7] from the CCD PCB, and
detach the CCD unit [8].

[6] [5]

Figure 4-D408

[7]

Figure 4-D409

4-30 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM

6) Remove the two screws [9], and detach [9]


the flat cable [10]. [10]
[9]

Figure 4-D410

7) Remove the four screws [11], and detach [11] [12] [11]
the image processor cover [12].

Caution:
Take care not to damage the flat cable re-
moved in step 6).

[11] [11]
Figure 4-D411

8) Remove the three screws [13], and detach


the original orientation detection PCB
[14].

Caution:
Take care not to damage the connector
[15] of the image processor PCB and the
original orientation detection PCB [14].

[13] [15] [14] [13]

Figure 4-D412

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 4-31
CHAPTER 5
LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

This chapter provides descriptions on the copier's laser exposure operations,


functions of each operation, relationships between electrical and mechanical
systems, and timing at which each associated part is turned on.

I. OPERATIONS ............................ 5-1 B. Controlling Laser Activation ... 5-8


A. Outline .................................... 5-1 C. Controlling the Laser Intensity
B. Basic Sequence of Operations ............................................. 5-10
(laser exposure system) ........ 5-4 IV. CONTROLLING THE LASER
II. GENERATING THE BD SIGNAL SCANNER MOTOR .................. 5-12
.................................................... 5-5 A. Outline .................................. 5-12
A. Outline .................................... 5-5 V. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .... 5-13
B. Flow of the BD Signal ............ 5-5 A. Laser Unit............................. 5-14
III. LASER DRIVER PCB ................. 5-7 B. BD Unit ................................. 5-16
A. Outline .................................... 5-7

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

I . OPERATIONS
A. Outline
Volume 4>Chapter 4>I.A. "Outline"

Item Description
Laser intensity control [1] APC control
[2] Optimum intensity control to suit the surface potential of the drum
Laser scanning By 2 laser semiconductors (laser A, B)
Synchronization control Main scanning direction: by BD signal (based on laser B)
Sub scanning direction: by PTOP signal
(image leading edge signal in page memory)
Laser scanner motor [1] Constant speed rotation control
control [2] Full-speed/wait rotation switching

Table 5-101 Major Functions

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-1
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

Figure 5-101 shows the major components of the laser exposure system.
To accommodate the increase in copying speed, laser scanning is performed by two beams
(lasers A and B).

80 µm Laser A

Laser driver PCB


Laser B

8-facet mirror

Laser unit
Imaging lens

Laser scanner motor

Laser mirror

BD PCB

BD mirror
Photosensitive drum

Laser A

A
Laser B B
18 pixels
(760µm)

Figure 5-101 External View

Component Notation Description


Laser semiconductor Visible laser light (675 nm), 2 beams
Laser scanner motor M4 DC motor, 2-speed control
Polygon mirror 8-faceted
RD mirror/BD detection PCB
Laser driver PCB Laser activation control
Laser scanner motor driver PCB Laser scanner motor rotation control

Table 5-102 Components

5-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

The laser A and the laser B have a discrepancy of 80 µm (between light-emitting sections) as
follows:

80µm

Figure 5-102

A delay is initiated in the image signals on the image processor PCB to generate a delay of 760
µm (equivalent of 18 pixels) at time of scanning the drum, thereby preventing interference of laser
beams.

760µm (18 pixels)

Figure 5-103

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>IP-DELAY If you have replaced the image processor PCB or


(image processor PCB display input) initialized the RAM on the image processor PCB, enter
the values recorded on the label attached to the PCB.

COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>LA-DELAY If you have replaced the laser unit or the image


(laser unit delay value input) processor PCB, or if you have initialized the RAM on
the image processor PCB, enter the value recorded on
the label attached to the laser unit.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-3
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

B. Basic Sequence of Operations (laser exposure system)

Image leading edge signal in When the surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 195˚C,
page memory full-speed rotation is stated. (for potential control)

Control panel Copy Start


power switch ON 195˚C key ON

INTR PSTBY PRINT LSTR STBY

Laser scanner Wait rotation Wait rotation


motor
Image leading
edge signal
Wait activation Activation for imaging
Laser A
Wait activation
Laser B

BD signal
Laser B
1 scan
Detects the laser B. Activation for potential control

Figure 5-104 Basic Sequence of Operations

5-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

II . GENERATING THE BD SIGNAL


A. Outline
Volume 4>Chapter 5>II. "Generating the BD Signal."

Laser driver PCB


Laser unit

8-facet mirror

Imaging lens

Laser scanner motor

Laser mirror

BD PCB

BD mirror

Photosensitive drum

Figure 5-201 Construction of the Control System

B. Flow of the BD Signal


Clock pulses for the printer Generates sync signals
for the printer based Reads from memory based on this
on CLK-B. sync signal.
When the laser beam
is detected, '1'.
Memory control

BD-SGNL PSYNC-B VIDEO-B


CLK-B
Sync signal

1 5
generation

GND
BD 2 4 generation CLK-B Laser
5V
detection 3
GND
3 driver
4 2
PCB -5V CLK-A PSYNC-A VIDEO-A
5 1 CLK-A
J3701 generation

Image processor PCB

Figure 5-202 Flow of Signals

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-5
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>PVE-OFST If you have replaced the image processor PCB or


(laser projection position adjustment) initialized the RAM on the image processor PCB, enter
the adjustment value.
Setting range: -300 to 300
Lower setting Higher setting
(front) (rear)

Laser B
Note that the laser A move in sync with the laser B.

Related Error Code

E100 [1] If the BD signal is not detected within a specific period of time.
(BD error) [2] See the descriptions under III.C "Controlling the Laser Intensity."

5-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

III . LASER DRIVER PCB


A. Outline
Figure 5-301 shows items of control related to the laser driver circuit:
[1] Turning on and off the laser.
[2] Controlling the intensity of the laser.

Clock pulses for the laser B Relay PCB


[1]
5V
J1714

-8V
8V
GND

GND

GND
Image signals for the laser B The laser diode is turned on
to suit the image signal.
Laser driver PCB 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
J1106 J1301
1 1 Laser B
VIDEO-B

LD-B
16 16
17 CLK-B
17

20 20 Intensity monitor
21 CLK-A 21
Image processor PCB

24 24
LD-A

25 25
VIDEO-A

40 40 Laser A
J1353
J1107
J1354
10 Light intensity 10
control signal EEPROM
18 18
1 Activation control 1
signal
9 9
19 19

30 30
Laser driver PCB 2

[2]
VR for image area activation adjustment

Figure 5-301 Function Construction

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-7
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

B. Controlling Laser Activation


Figure 5-301B shows the construction of the system used to control laser activation.

This signal is used to decrease the laser intensity


between sheets to prolong the life of the laser.

Reset signal per scan. Relay PCB


J1714

5V

-8V
8V
GND

GND

GND
Laser activation
signal for sampling
Laser driver PCB 1
1 2 3 4 56
J1301

J1107 J1354
GND
1 1
GND
2 2
Not used
3 3 Laser B
SH-D-B
4 4

LD-B
RST-B
5 5
LD-DWN
6 6
Not used
7 7
SH-D-A
Intensity monitor
Image processor PCB

8 8
RST-A
9 9
LD-A

10 10
Intensity control signal
Laser A

18 18
GND
19 19
LD-EN-B
20 20
LD-EN-A
21 21
22
LD-OFF-B
22 To LD-A/B
LD-OFF-A
23 23
Not used
24 24
BSH-B
25 25
BSH-A
26 26
27
SH-B
27 To LD-A/B
28 SH-A 28
GND
29 29
GND
30 30
Laser driver PCB 2

When the laser activation


Sampling during wait activation
prohibit signal is
'1', activation is disabled.
Sampling during imaging activation

When the laser OFF signal is '1' , the laser turns off.

Figure 5-301B Construction of the Control System

5-8 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>LA-PWR-A,B If you have replaced the laser unit or the IP PCB, or


(laser power adjustment input) initialized the RAM on the IP PCB, enter the value
recorded on the label attached to the laser unit.

COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER>POWER- Use this mode to turn on the laser when checking laser
A,B activation.
(laser power adjustment activation)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-9
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

C. Controlling the Laser Intensity


The laser is controlled for the following:
[1] Laser power auto control (APC control).
[2] Intensity control to suit the surface potential of the drum.
[1]-1

[2]-1 The intensity is monitored, and a voltage


suited to the intensity is fed back.
Selects either laser A EEPROM
or laser B EEPROM for writing. [1]-2

[2]-2 The output is controlled so that


the voltage fed back and the
The activation voltage Relay PCB
voltage from the EEPROM will
determined by potential be identical.
5V J1714

-8V
8V
control is written into the GND

GND

GND
EEPROM.
Laser driver PCB 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
J1301

J1107

LD-B Laser B

Intensity monitor
Image processor PCB

LD-A

J1354
1 1
Laser A
9 9
GND
10 10
LD-DT1
11 11
LD-DT2
12 12 To
SK EEPROM
13 13
CS
14 14
For laser B
15 GND 15
GND EEPROM
16 16
L-RDY-B
17 17 For laser A
L-RDY-A
18 18 EEPROM
19 19

30 30
Laser driver PCB 2

When the laser intently is as specified, '1'.

Clock pulses for writing to and reading from the EEPROM.

Figure 5-302 Functional Block Diagram

5-10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

Related Error Code

E102 The value (LD-DT1) written to the EEPROM and the value read (LD-
(EEPROM write error) DT2) do not match.

E100 [1] See the descriptions under II. "Generating the BD Signal."
(laser intensity error) [2] The intensity of the laser fails to reach a specific level.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-11
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

IV . CONTROLLING THE LASER SCANNER MOTOR


A. Outline
The laser scanner motor is controlled for the following:
[1] Constant speed rotation control
[2] Full-speed/wait rotation switching

Relay PCB

J1715
38V 0V
When '0', full-speed rotation; when '1', wait state rotation.
J761
1 2 3

J763
1
J503 J762
SP-SEL
Laser scanner M4
7
LM-RDY*
4
motor driver 11 Drive
signal
8 3 Laser scanner
LM-ON
9 2
0V motor
DC controller PCB

10 1

When the motor speed reaches a specific level, '0'

When '0', the laser scanner motor turns on.

Figure 5-401 Functional Block Diagram

Related error code

E110 [1] LM-RDY* goes '1' when the motor is rotating (i.e., when LM-ON
(laser scanner rotation speed is '0').
error) [2] LM-RDY* does not go '0' within a specific period of time.

5-12 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

V . DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go
through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier's parts while keeping the
following in mind:

1. ! Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work.

2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted.

3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. Do not leave out the toothed washer that comes with one of the mounting screws on the rear
cover to protect against static electricity.

5. Do not leave out the washer that comes with the screw used for the grounding wire and the
varistor to ensure electrical continuity.

6. Do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed, unless otherwise mentioned.

7. Turn off the front cover switch or the power switch before sliding out the duplexing feeding
unit or the fixing assembly.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-13
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

A. Laser Unit
1. Removing the Laser Unit
1) Remove the copyboard glass.
2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the left
end.
3) Remove the original sensor unit (rear).
(See Figure 4-B401.)
4) Remove the CCD unit. (See Figure 4-
A403.)
5) Remove the image processor PCB. (See
Figure 4-B404.)
6) Remove the screw [1], and detach the im-
age processor PCB support plate [2]. [2] [1]

Figure 5-A501
7) Remove the six screws [3], and detach the
laser driver PCB cover [4]. [3]

[3]

[4] [3]

Figure 5-A502

5-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

8) Remove the three screws [5], and detach [5]


the original orientation detection PCB [6].

[6] [5]
Figure 5-A503

9) Remove the eight screws [7], and discon- [7]


[7] [8]
nect the three connectors [8]; then, detach
the laser scanner unit [9].
[8]

[7] [7] [9] [7] [8]

Figure 5-A504
2. After Replacing the Laser Unit
See F. "Laser Exposure System" under II.
in Chapter 13.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-15
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

B. BD Unit
1. Removing the BD Unit
1) Open the front cover. [1] [2] [2] [2] [1]
2) Slide out the process unit. (See Figures 6-
D701 through -D702.)
3) Remove the three screws [1], and discon-
nect the seven connectors [2]; then, re-
move the fan (primary charging, scanner
cooling, polygon mirror) unit [3].

[1] [3]
Figure 5-B501

[3] [2] [2] [2]

Figure 5-B502

4) Remove the screws [4], and slide out the


BD unit [5] to the front.

Caution:
Be sure to mark the position of the screw
[4] with a scriber before loosening it.

[4] [5]

Figure 5-B503

5-16 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

5) Disconnect the connector [6], and remove [6] [5]


the BD unit.

Figure 5-B504

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 5-17
CHAPTER 6
IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

This chapter provides descriptions on the copier's image processing operations,


functions of each operation, relationships between electrical and mechanical
systems, and timing at which each associated part is turned on.

I. PROCESSES .............................. 6-1 F. Controlling Separation Charging


A. Outline .................................... 6-1 ............................................. 6-32
B. Basic Sequence of Operations IV . DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ...... 6-36
(image formation) ................... 6-3 A. Outline .................................. 6-36
II . POTENTIAL CONTROL ............. 6-5 B. Controlling the Developing
A. Outline .................................... 6-5 Assembly ............................. 6-37
B. Determining the Optimum Grid C. Controlling the Toner Cartridge
Bias ........................................ 6-8 Drive Mechanism ................. 6-38
C. Grid Bias Corrective Control .. 6-8 D. Controlling the Developing Bias
D. Determining the Optimum Laser ............................................. 6-39
Output .................................... 6-9 E. Detecting the Toner Level and
E. Laser Output Corrective Control Controlling the Toner Supply
............................................... 6-9 Mechanism........................... 6-41
F. Determining the Optimum V . DRUM CLEANER UNIT ............ 6-45
Developing Bias ................... 6-10 A. Outline .................................. 6-45
G. Potential Control for B. Detecting the Waste Toner (case
Transparency Mode ............. 6-11 full condition) ........................ 6-46
H. Target Potential Correction in VI. CONTROLLING THE DRUM
Each Mode ........................... 6-12 HEATER.................................... 6-48
III . CONTROLLING THE CHARGING A. Outline .................................. 6-48
MECHANISMS .......................... 6-16 VII . DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .... 6-49
A. Controlling the Primary Charging A. Photosensitive Drum Unit .... 6-50
Mechanism........................... 6-16 B. Parts Associated with the
B. Dust-Collecting Roller Bias .. 6-20 Process Unit......................... 6-55
C. Controlling the Pre-Transfer C. Charging Wire ...................... 6-60
Charging Mechanism ........... 6-21 D. Process Unit......................... 6-66
D. Controlling the Transfer Guide E. Developing Assembly .......... 6-69
Bias ...................................... 6-25 F. Drum Cleaner Unit ............... 6-75
E. Controlling the Transfer Charging G. Separation Claw/Separation
Mechanism........................... 6-27 Claw Drive Assembly ........... 6-79

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

I . PROCESSES
A. Outline
Table 6-101 shows the major functions of the image formation system.

Item Pre-exposure
Pre-exposure LED array (64 LEDs)
ON/OFF control
Primary charging DC constant current control (switched among 3 settings in service
mode)
Grid bias DC constant voltage control (determined by potential control)
Developing bias AC constant voltage control (ON/OFF control only)
DC constant voltage control (determined by potential control)
Dust-collecting roller DC constant voltage control (ON/OFF control only; +1000 V)
bias
Pre-transfer charging AC constant current control (fuzzy control by an environment
sensor)
DC constant voltage control
Transfer guide bias DC constant voltage control (switched according to
control temperature/humidity)
Transfer charging DC constant current control (fuzzy control by an environment
sensor)
Separation charging DC constant current control (fuzzy control by an environment
sensor and toner deposit)
AC constant voltage control
Potential [1] Setting the optimum grid bias.
[2] Setting the optimum laser output.
[3] Setting the optimum developing bias (DC).
Wire auto cleaning [1] Primary charging wire
[2] Pre-transfer charging wire

Table 6-101 Major Functions

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-1
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

Figure 6-101 shows the major components of the image formation system.

Set-up cartridge

Primary charging assembly


Potential sensor
Pre-exposure

Hopper
Cleaner unit
Developing assembly

Dust-collecting roller

Pre-transfer charging assembly

Separation charging assembly Transfer guide


Transfer charging assembly

Figure 6-101 (cross section)

6-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

B. Basic Sequence of Operations (image formation)


Copying, 1 Original, 2 Prints

The start timing varies as follows according to the environmental


conditions detected at time when the control panel power switch is turned
on:
1. If low humidity, not started.
2. If normal temperature/high humidity, as soon as the control panel
power switch is turned on.

Each voltage is applied in At 200˚C, WMUPR ends.


sequence to stabilize the
Control panel potential of the drum.
Main power power Copy Start
switch ON switch ON key ON
195˚C 200˚C
SLEEP WMUP WMUPR STBY INTR
Potential stabilization
Idle rotation sequence Potential
Main motor(M1) sequence control

Drum motor(M0)
Potential sensor
Pre-exposure
lamp
Primary charging
bias (DC)
Grid bias
Developing
clutch (CL4)
Developing
bias (AC)
Developing
bias (DC)
Dust-collecting
roller bias (DC)
Pre-transfer
charging bias
(AC + DC)
Transfer guide
bias (DC)
Transfer
charging bias
(DC)
Separation
charging bias
(AC + DC)

Executed according to the setting in service mode Charge-up sequence is executed here even if
(COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DRUM-IDL). idle rotation sequence is not executed.

Figure 6-102 At Power-On

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-3
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

When the source of paper is selected, the signal


is generated to start advance pickup.

Potential control is used during INTR for


the following:
1. 10 min after the main power switch For 4-on-1 or other layout processing, the signal
has been turned on. is generated after reading all originals.
2. 60 min after the main power switch
has been turned on.
Printing is ready after a single line of data has been
written in the page memory, generating this signal.

Copy Start PRINT PRINT request


key ON setting set signal

SCFW SCRV RSTBY


STBY INTR STBY
PSTBY PRINT LSTR

Main motor (M1)


Drum motor (M0)
Potential sensor
Before forming an image, a series of During continuous printing, the high
charging operations is executed to voltage is not turned off even between
stabilize the potential of the drum. sheets to stabilize high-voltage output.
Image formation 1 Image formation 2
Pre-exposure lamp
Primary charging
bias (DC)
Grid bias
Developing clutch
(CL4)
Developing bias
(AC)
Developing bias
(DC)
Dust-collecting DC for image
formation
roller bias (DC)
Pre-transfer
charging bias
(AC + DC)
Transfer guide bias
(DC)
Transfer charging
bias (DC)
Separation
charging bias
(AC + DC)

Figure 6-103 Basic Sequence of Operations (Printing)

6-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

II . POTENTIAL CONTROL
A. Outline
Volume 2>Chapter 4>I.B. "Controlling the Surface Potential of the Drum"

The potential is controlled for the following:


[1] Determining the optimum grid bias. (VD control)
[2] Determining the optimum laser output. (VL control)
[3] Determining the optimum developing bias (DC). (Vdc control)

Figure 6-201 shows the construction of the control system:


Laser driver PCB

Laser light

Control Primary charging wire


signal

Potential sensor
DC controller PCB

Grid wire
High-voltage DC PCB

DC bias

Control
signal

al
DC bias

sign
ction
DC bias Developing cylinder
Potential control

Dete
J3
0V
14 1
POT-DT
13 2
POT-ON
12 3
11 24 VU
PCB

4
J502

Drum surface When '1', the potential


potential reading sensor turns on.

Figure 6-201 Construction of the Control System

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-5
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

Figure 6-202 shows the basic sequence (timing) of operations related to potential control.

A series of charging operations is executed to


stabilize the potential of the drum.

Potential control is as when the main power switch is turned on.


195˚C 200˚C
WMUP WMUPR STBY
Potential stabilization sequence Transparency mode
potential control
Potential control
Optimum grid bias Optimum laser output Optimum laser output
determined determined determined

Drum motor(M0)
Primary
charging bias
(DC) Fixed value
Grid bias
Laser
Developing bias
AC bias (AC)
Developing bias
(DC)
To prevent stray toner, the developing bias
is turned off for non-image areas.

Figure 6-202 Basic Sequence of Operations (potential control)

The charging characteristics are likely to have


stabilized at this point, and potential control will
not be executed after this point.

Potential control is executed 10 min and 60


min after the temperature of the fixing
assembly has reached 195˚C.

10 min 60 min
Potential
Main power Potential control for Copy Start Potential Potential
switch ON control transparency key ON control control

Fixing assembly temperature at 195˚C


(end of fixing assembly warm-up)
Copy Start
[1] The control panel power switch is turned on.
key ON
[2] The front door is opened/closed.

Figure 6-203 Timing of Potential Control Operations

6-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT 0: disable potential control.


(potential control on/off) 1: enable potential control. (default)

COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>EPOTOFST If you have replaced the image processor PCB or


(potential sensor offset value input) initialized the RAM on the image processor PCB,
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VL-OFST enter the value recorded on the service label.
(VL target potential offset input)
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VD-OFST
(VD target potential offset value input)

COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>OFST For adjustments, see descriptions on electrical parts in


(potential sensor offset adjustment) Chapter 13>II. "Standards and Adjustments."

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-7
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

B. Determining the Optimum Grid Bias


A grid bias is selected so that the surface potential of the drum will be identical to the target
potential (the primary charging bias is fixed).

The relationship between the surface potential of


the drum (VD) and the gird bias is obtained based
on measurements taken several times.

VD3
VD2 Charging
VD1 characteristic curve
If the target VD is attained basde on this
measurement, control is ended; otherwise,
500V 600V 700V corrective control will start.
Grid bias

195˚C 200˚C
WMUP WMUPR STBY
Measurement
Measurement Measurement Measurement
(VD2)
Potential sensor (VD1) (VD3) (targetVD)

Primary charging
bias (DC)
Grid bias
500 V 600 V 700 V Vg

Potential control A grid bias (VG) needed to attain the


target VD is selected.
sequence started
Figure 6-204 Sequence of Operations

C. Grid Bias Corrective Control


If an optimum grid bias cannot be selected after measuring the surface potential of the drum
several times, a corrective control sequence is started to determine the optimum grid bias.
Measurement is continued while varying the level of
the grid bias so as to attain the target VD. If the measurement is identical to the target VD,
control is ended. Measurements are taken as many
VD1 VD3
as 8 times; at times, an approximate level (to the
Target VD target VD) may be used.
VD2
VD-NG

195˚C 200˚C
WMUP WMUPR STBY
Potential
VD-NG VD1 VD2 VD3 VD8
sensor
Primary charging
bias (DC)
Grid bias
500V 600V 700V Vg Vg1 Vg2 Vg3 Vg8

The grid bias (vg) needed to


Potential control attain the target VD is
sequence started Corrective control determined.
sequence started

Figure 6-205 Sequence of Operations (corrective control)

6-8 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

D. Determining the Optimum Laser Output


The laser output is determined so that the surface potential (light area potential VL) of the drum
at time of laser exposure will be identical to the target potential.
The relationship between the surface potential of the
drum (VL) and the laser output is determined based
on measurements taken several times.

VL3
VL2 If the target VL is obtained at
VL1 this measurement, control is
ended; otherwise, corrective
Reference output -10% -20% control is stated.
Laser output
195˚C 200˚C

WMUP WMUPR STBY


Measurement
Potential Measurement (VL2) Measurement Measurement
(VL1) (VL3) (target VL)
sensor
Developing
bias (DC)
Laser
Reference output -10% -20% Pw
Activation using The laser output (P)
the reference output Activation at an output 10% needed to attain the target
determined at time of lower than the reference VL is determined.
shipment. output.

Figure 6-206 Sequence of Operations

E. Laser Output Corrective Control


If an optimum laser output cannot be selected after measuring the surface potential of the drum
several times, a corrective control sequence is started to determine the optimum laser output.
Measurement is continued by varying the
level of the laser output so as to attain
the target VL. If the measurement is identical to the
target VL, control is ended.
VL1 Measurements are taken as many
VL3
Target VL as 8 times; at times, an approximate
VL2
VL-NG (to the target VL) may be used.

195˚C 200˚C
WMUP WMUPR STBY

VL-NG VL1 VL2 VL3 VL8


Potential sensor
Developing bias
(DC)
Laser
Reference -10% -20% Pw Pw1 Pw2 Pw3 Pw8
output
The laser output needed to
Corrective control sequence attain the target VL is
started determined.

Figure 6-207 Sequence of Operations (corrective control)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-9
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

F. Determining the Optimum Developing Bias


An optimum developing bias (Vdc) is computed based on the optimum drum surface potential
(VD).

Potential sensor

Vg
VD
Vdc

Vdc is computed based on this VD; Photosensitive drum Developing


Vdc = VD - Vback (120 V) cylinder

195˚C 200˚C
WMUP WMUPR STBY

VD VL
Potential sensor
Optimum grid Optimum laser output
bias determined determined
Laser
Pw
Grid bias
Vg Vg Pw Vdc
Potential determined

Potential control sequence started

Figure 6-208 Sequence of Operations

6-10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

G. Potential Control for Transparency Mode


To prevent detachment of toner in high density areas on transparencies, the contrast is de-
creased to limit the amount of toner deposit. To enable the decrease in contrast, potential control for
transparency mode is executed to select a target value.

VD VL Vdc
corrective corrective corrective
value value value
+100V

Using the target value for transparency mode,


potential control sequence is executed.

Potential control
Transparency potential
sequence started
control sequence started
195˚C 200˚C
WMUP WMUPR STBY

VD VL VLohp
Potential sensor

Transparency mode
Laser laser power determined
Vg Pw
Pwohp
Grid bias

Vg Pw Pwohp
Potential determined
Vdc

Figure 6-209 Sequence of Operations

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>BODY> 1: use the target value obtained for transparency mode


OHP-CNT potential control during transparency mode operation.
(transparency mode potential control (default)
ON/OFF) 0: disable potential control for transparency mode.

Potential control
sequence started
Main power switch Transparency mode
Set OFF/ON potential control

COPIER > OPTION > BODY > OHP-CNT

Figure 6-210 Timing of Control

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-11
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

H. Target Potential Correction in Each Mode


The laser power/developing bias determined in relation to potential control is corrected for the
following operating mode, and the result is used as the target value specific to each:

Purpose Correction
Density adjustment To enable reproduction of fine lines Correct the laser power/developing
during printing (PDL (PDL data from a computer) to suit bias according to the F setting.
input) the needs of the user.
Density correction To attain density levels suited to the Corrects the laser power/developing
during printing (scanner needs of the user. bias according to the F setting.
input)
During operation in high To prevent decreases in density Corrects the laser power/developing
humidity mode (caused by a lower developing bias according to the environment.
efficiency because of moist toner or
a lower transfer efficiency caused
by moist paper).

Table 6-201 Operating Modes

6-12 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

1. Adjusting the Density during Printing (PDL input)

Laser power Vdc VD


F value correction correction correction
value value value
Lighter 1 x0.8
The laser power is increased 2 x0.9
(to increase the contrast), 3 x1.0
thereby enabling reproduction 4 x1.1
of fine lines narrower than a 5 x1.2
single particle of toner.) Density 6 x1.3 +10V
7 x1.4 +20V
8 x1.5 +30V
Darker 9 x1.5 +40V

The laser power/developing The laser power has


bias is corrected to suit the F reached the upper limit,
value setting. requiring correction of
the developing bias to
increase the contrast.
Potential control
195˚C sequence started 200˚C

WMUP WMUPR STBY

VD VL
Potential sensor

Laser
Vg Pw
Grid bias
Vg Pw Vdc
Potential determined

Figure 6-211 Sequence of Operations

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>BODY> 1: correct the target value to enable variation of density


CNT-W/PR during printing. (default)
(density setting mode on/off during 0: disable the mechanism used to vary the density during
printing) printing.

A laser power output Vdc


Main power switch suited to the F value setting
Set OFF/ON is used.

Potential Printing F value


control started changed

COPIER > OPTION > BODY > CNT-W/PR

Table 6-202 Timing of Control

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-13
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Potential Control during High Humidity Mode

In a low humidity environment, Laser power Vdc VD


the resistance of paper correction correction correction
decreases and, on the other value value value
hand, the transfer efficiency Lighter Extra low humidity -5%
increases; as such, the laser
power is reduced to prevent Low humidity
Density
excess deposit of toner. Normal humidity
High humidity +20V
In a high humidity environment, Darker Extra high humidity +5% +30V
the moisture of paper decreases
the transfer efficiency; as such,
The laser power/Vdc is corrected
the laser power is increased to
to suit the environment.
increase the density.
Potential control
195˚C sequence started 200˚C
WMUP WMUPR STBY

VD VL
Potential sensor

Laser
Vg Pw
Grid bias

Vg Pw
Potential determined
Vdc

Figure 6-212 Sequence of Operations

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>BODY> 1: correct the laser power/developing bias to suit the


CNT-W/HM environment (default)
(high humidity mode potential control 0: disable correction of the target value
setting) 2: extra low humidity mode (See the above figure.)
3: low humidity mode (See the above figure.)
4: normal humidity mode (See the above figure.)
5: high humidity mode (See the above figure.)
6: extra high humidity mode (See the above figure.)
7: laser power corrective value +15%
Vdc correction value +40 V
VD correction value 0 V

The laser power/Vdc suited to


the environment is updated
Main power switch each time the Copy Start key is
Set OFF/ON Potential control pressed.

Copy Start
key ON

COPIER > OPTION > BODY > CNT-W/HM

Table 6-203 Timing of Control

6-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

3. Density Adjustment during Printing (scanner input)

Laser power Vdc


F value
correction value correction value
Lighter 1 x 0.8
-20V
3
x 1.0
Density 5
7 x 1.2
9 x 1.5
Darker

The laser power/Vdc is corrected


according to the F setting.
Potential control
195˚C sequence started. 200˚C

WMUP WMUPR STBY

VD VL
Potential sensor

Laser
Vg Pw
Grid bias

Vg Pw
Potential determined
Vdc

Figure 6-213 Sequence of Control

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>USER> 1: correct the target value to enable variation of density


PM-DENS during printing. (default)
(density setting mode on/off during 0: disable the mechanism used to vary the density during
printing) printing.

The laser power/Vdc is used


Main power switch
Set Potential control to suit the F value setting.
OFF/ON

Copy Start key F setting updated


ON

COPIER > OPTION > BODY > PM-DENS

Table 6-204 Timing of Control

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-15
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

III . CONTROLLING THE CHARGING MECHANISMS


A. Controlling the Primary Charging Mechanism
1. Outline
Volume 2>Chapter 6>I.C. "Controlling the Primary Charging Current"

The primary charging mechanism is controlled for the following:


[1] Primary charging bias constant current
[2] Grid bias constant voltage

Figure 6-301 shows the construction of the primary charging control system.

The primary charging bias varies as


follows according to PR-CNT
potential.

Primary charging bias


1600µA

When an overcurrent or an
800µA
undercurrent is detected, '0'. Relay PCB
24 VH
24 VH

When '1', high-voltage 11V 12V


3V
output is ready.
GND
GND

PR-CNT

1 2 3 4
Primary charging wire
J510A J723
0V T601
1 16 Grid wire
HVDC-EN
2 15
PR-CNT
3 14
PR-ERR
4 13
J731
High-voltage DC PCB

GRD-CNT
5 12
DC controller PCB

6 11
7 10
8 9
9 8
10 7
11 6
12 5 The grid bias varies as follows
13 according to GRD-CNT potential.
4
14 3 900V
15 2
Grid bias

16 1
400V

3V 11V 12V
GRD-CNT

A voltage input between 0 and 12 V, A voltage input between 0 and 12 V, used to


used to control the current level of the control the voltage level of the grid bias.
primary bias.

Figure 6-301 Construction of the Control System

6-16 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Changing the Primary Charging Level Setting


If uneven images occur, the primary charging level may be changed in service mode to sup-
press the problem.

Primary charging current


Setting VD target value (v) Grid bias (V)
correction value (µA)
Standard mode 0 400 600
Suppression mode 1 1 +300 400 550

Suppression mode 2 2 +600 400 400

A higher output suppresses unevenness.


A lower output suppresses uneven charging
efficiency on the surface of the drum.

Table 6-301 Primary Charging Levels

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PR-SEL 0: standard mode (default)


(potential unevenness suppression 1: suppression mode 1
mode selection) 2: suppression mode 2

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-17
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

3. Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism


Volume 3>Chapter 6>VI.A.2. "Charging Wire Cleaning Mechanism"

When '1', the wire cleaner moves toward the rear.

J502A
1 When '1', the wire cleaner moves toward the front.
...

PRWC-RV
DC controller PCB

7
PRWC-FV
8
0V
9
PRWC-HP
10
...

When the wire cleaner reaches


the home position, '0'.
17 Wire
rea
r

Home position
sensor (MSW4)
fro Primary charging
nt
wire cleaning
motor (M8)

Wire cleaner

Primary charging assembly

Figure 6-302 Construction of the Construction System

Timing of Cleaning

[1] The surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100˚C or lower when the control panel power switch is
turned on.
[2] The wire cleaning mechanism is turned on in user mode.
[3] At the end of LSTR after making 2000 prints following wire cleaning.

Related Error Code

E060 The wire cleaner does not reach the home position within a
(wire cleaner HP error) specific period of time.

6-18 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4. Others

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>GDID If you have replaced the image processor PCB or initialized


(grid bias output adjustment value input) the RAM on the image processor PCB, enter the value
recorded on the service label.

Related Error Code

E065 An overcurrent is detected (PR-ERR=1) because of leakage.


(primary charging output error)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-19
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

B. Dust-Collecting Roller Bias


1. Outline
The dust-collecting roller bias mechanism is controlled for the following:
[1] Turning on and off the dust-collecting roller bias.

Figure 6-303 shows the construction of the dust-collecting roller bias control system.

Relay PCB

24 VH
24 VH
When '1', high-voltage
output is ready.

GND
GND
1 2 3 4

J510A J723
0V J732
1 16
HVDC-EN 1 DC 1000V
2 15
2
3 14 3
Dust-collecting
High-voltage DC PCB

4 13
roller
5 12
DC controller PCB

6 11
7 10
When '1',
8 the dust-collecting 9
9 roller bias turns on. 8
10 7
11 6
12 5
13 4
14 3
15 2
16 1

Figure 6-303 Construction of the Control System

6-20 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

C. Controlling the Pre-Transfer Charging Mechanism


1. Outline
The pre-transfer charging mechanism is controlled for the following:
[1] DC bias constant current
[2] AC bias constant voltage
[3] Output to suit the environment (fuzzy control)

Figure 6-304 shows the construction of the pre-transfer charging control system.

The current level of the pre-transfer bias


varies as follows according to the PTDC-
CNT potential.
300µA

When '1', high-voltage 3V 11V 12V


DC output is ready. Relay PCB PTDC-CNT
24 VH
24 VH

Pre-transfer charging wire


GND
GND

J721
J723 1 2 3 4
J510A
0V
1 16
HVDC-EN
2 15
3 14
4 When '1', 13
High-voltage DC PCB

high-voltage AC
DC controller PCB

5 12
6 output is ready. 11 J734
5
7 10 4
8 9 3
AC transformer

9 8 2
High-voltage

10
HVAC-EN
7 1
11 PTDC-CNT AC+DC
6
1 1
High-voltage

12 5 HVAC-ON J742
PT/SP-ERR 2 2
AC PCB

13 4 24VP
3 3
14 3 GND
4 4
15 2 GND
5 5
16 1 J722 J741

When an overcurrent or When '1', high-voltage AC


an undercurrent is output turns on. AC output 9.0 kVpp
detected, '1'

A voltage input between 0 and 12 V, used to control the


level of current of the pre-transfer bias.

Figure 6-304 Construction of the Control System

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-21
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment (fuzzy control)


The pre-transfer charging current is controlled to an optimum value to suit the environment
(conditions identified based on data from the environment sensor).

Pre-transfer current (µA)

Low High
humidity humidity

Figure 6-305 Pre-Transfer Current Output Table

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FUZZY 0: enable fuzzy control. (default)


(fuzzy control ON/OFF) 1: low humidity mode. (The pre-transfer charging current is
lower than the standard level.)
2: normal humidity mode.
3: high humidity mode. (The pre-transfer charging current is
higher than the standard level.)
Selecting '1' through '3' makes the mechanism independent of
the environment sensor.

6-22 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

3. Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism


Volume 3>Chapter 6>V.A.2. "Charging Wire Cleaning Mechanism"

When '1', the wire cleaner moves toward the front.

When the wire cleaner reaches


J504A
the home position, '0'.

1
2
1 0V
3
DC controller PCB

PSTWC-HP
4

PSTWC-FW
8
PSTWC-RV
9

When '1', the wire cleaner moves toward the rear.


19

rea Home position


r
sensor (MSW3)

fro
nt

Wire Pre-transfer
charging wire
cleaning motor
(M7)
Wire cleaner

Pre-transfer charging assembly

Figure 6-306 Construction of the Control System

Timing of Cleaning

[1] The surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100˚C or lower when the control panel power switch
is turned on.
[2] The wire cleaning mechanism is turned on in user mode.
[3] At the end of LSTR after making 2000 prints following wire cleaning.

Related Error Code

E066 The wire cleaner does not reach the home position in a
(wire cleaner home position error) specific period of time.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-23
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4. Others

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>PRE-TR If you have replaced the image processor PCB or initialized


(pre-transfer charging current output the RAM on the image processor PCB, enter the value on the
adujstment input) service label.

Related Error Code

E068 An overcurrent is detected (PT/SP-ERR=1) because of


(pre-transfer charging output error) leakage.

6-24 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

D. Controlling the Transfer Guide Bias


1. Outline
To prevent soiling of the surface of the transfer guide with toner (leading to soiled backs), a
bias of the same polarity as toner is applied to the transfer guide. The transfer guide charging
mechanism is controlled for the following:
[1] Transfer guide bias constant voltage
[2] Output to suit the environment
Figure 6-307 shows the construction of the transfer guide bias

Relay PCB

24 VH
24 VH
When '1', high voltage output is ready.

GND
GND
1 2 3 4

J510A J723
0V
1 16
HVDC-EN
2 15
3 14
4 13
High-voltage DC PCB
DC controller PCB

5 12
6 11
7 10
8 When '1', the transfer 9
guide bias turns on.
9 8
10 7 J733
11 6 1
DC 600V/200V
12 2
5
13 4
14 3 Transfer guide
15 FGD-ON 2
16 FGD-CNT 1

'1' : +200V
'0' : +600V

Figure 6-307 Construction of the Control System

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-25
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment


The transfer guide bias is controlled to an optimum level to suit the environment (conditions
identified based on data from the environment sensor).

A bias of the same polarity as the toner is


applied in sync with the rotation of the
photosensitive drum.
The photosensitive drum is rotating;
yet, paper is not being fed.
Normally, +600 V is applied to prevent
adhesion of toner to the transfer guide.
Transfer guide bias

Paper passing Paper being fed


Normal/low humidity +600 +600

High humidity +200 +600

In a high humidity environment, paper tends to absorb moisture


(lower resistance), charging the paper in excess to affect transfer
(faulty transfer); as such, the output is decreased.

Figure 6-308 Transfer Guide Bias Output Table

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>BODY> 0: switches to +200 V in high humidity. (default)


TRNSG-SW 1: fixes the transfer guide bias to +600 V.
(transfer guide bias control mode 2: fixes the transfer guide bias to +200 V.
switching) 3: switches to +200 V in normal humidity.
4: switches to +200 V in low humidity.
If transfer faults occur, select '2' through '4'.

6-26 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

E. Controlling the Transfer Charging Mechanism


1. Outline
The transfer charging mechanism is controlled for the following:
[1] DC bias constant current
[2] Output to suit the environment (fuzzy control)
[3] Output correction at the trailing edge of paper

Figure 6-309 shows the construction of the transfer charging control system.

Relay PCB

24 VH
24 VH
When '1', high voltage output is ready.

GND
GND
1 2 3 4

J510A
0V
1 1
HVDC-EN
2 2
3 3
High-voltage DC PCB

4 4
DC controller PCB

5 5
TR-CNT
6 6
7 TR-ERR 7
T701
8 8
9 9 Transfer charging wire
10 10
11 11
12 12
The transfer current varies as follows
13 13
according to the TR-CNT potential.
14 14
15 15 TR-CNT
16 16 3V 11V 12V
Transfer
current

A voltage input between 0 and 12 V, When an overcurrent or


used to control the transfer current an under current is -650µA
output. detected, '1'.

Figure 6-309 Construction of the Control System

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-27
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment (fuzzy control)


The transfer current output is controlled to an optimum level to suit the environment (condi-
tions identified based on the data from the environment sensor).

-650

current (µA)
Transfer

-150

Low High
humidity humidity

Figure 6-310 Transfer Current Output Table

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FUZZY 0: enable fuzzy control. (default)


(fuzzy control ON/OFF) 1: low humidity mode. (The transfer current is lower
than the standard level.)
2: normal humidity mode.
3: high humidity mode. (The transfer current is higher
than the standard level.)
Selecting '1' through '3' makes the control mechanism
independent of the environment sensor.

6-28 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

3. Correcting the Output at the Trailing Edge of Paper


When paper moves through the transfer charging assembly, the resistance abruptly drops as
soon as the paper leaves the assembly, possibly causing discharge current momentarily and, ulti-
mately, leading to white spots or distorted images. To prevent such a problem, the transfer current
level is corrected (reduced) when the trailing edge of paper passes.

The output of the transfer current is


varied over a width of 20 mm along
the trailing edge of paper.

20 mm

Paper

Feeding direction

Figure 6-311 Trailing Edge of Paper

When making a double-sided print, paper will absorb fixing


oil and tend to collect less charges (low resistance); since
the discharge current along the trailing edge of paper will
be low, the output is not varied.

In a low humidity environment, paper tends to dry


up collecting excess charges (high resistance); to
counter, the output is reduced.

Transfer current correction (µA)

Single-sided copying Double-sided copying

Low humidity +220

Normal humidity +150

High humidity

Table 6-302

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>BODY> 1: do not vary the transfer current level. (default; select if


TRSW-P-B transfer faults occur along the trailing edge)
(transfer current output correction 0: correct the transfer current level along the trailing edge of
control ON/OFF) paper.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-29
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4. Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism


Volume 3>Chapter 6>VI.A.2. "Transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Mechanism"

When the wire cleaner is at the home position, '0'.


1 J509A

0V
6
TSWC-HP
7

13
Wires

Wire cleaner

Transfer
Home position
DC controller PCB

charging
assembly sensor (MSW6)
Transfer/separation
Separation charging wire
charging rea cleaning motor (M9)
r
assembly

fro
nt

1 J509B

TSWC-RV
4
TSWC-FW
5

13
When '1', the wire cleaner moves toward the front.

When '1', the wire cleaner moves toward the rear.

Figure 6-312 Construction of the Cleaning Mechanism

Timing of Cleaning

1. The surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100˚C or lower when the control panel power switch is
turned on.
2. The wire cleaning mechanism is turned on in user mode.
3. At the end of LSTR after making 2000 prints following wire cleaning.

Related Error Code

E063 The cleaner does not reach the home position within a
(wire cleaner home position error) specific period of time.

6-30 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

5. Others

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>TR-N1 If you have replaced the image processor PCB or initialized


(output adjustment on single-sided the RAM on the image processor PCB, enter the value
print or 1st side of double-sided print; recorded on the service label.
plain paper)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>TR-N2
(output adjustment on 2nd side of
double-sided print; plain paper)

Related error Code

E069 An overcurrent is detected (TR-ERR=1) because of leakage.


(transfer charging output error)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-31
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

F. Controlling Separation Charging


1. Outline
The separation mechanism is controlled for the following:
[1] DC bias constant current
[2] AC bias constant current
[3] output correction to suit the environment and deposit of toner (fuzzy control)
[4] output correction upon detection of leakage

Figure 6-313 shows the construction of the control system for the separation charging mecha-
nism.

The level of the DC bias varied to suit the


SPDC-CNT potential.

500µA

When '1', the high-voltage 3V 11V 12V


DC output is ready. Relay PCB SPDC-CNT
24 VH
24 VH

GND
GND

J721
J723 1 2 3 4
J510A
0V Separation
1 16
HVDC-EN charging wire
2 15
3 14
4 13
When '1',
5 12
High-voltage DC PCB

high-voltage
DC controller PCB

6 11 J734
AC output is 5
7 ready 10 4
8 9 3
High-voltage AC

9 8 2
HVAC-EN 1
10 7
11 AC+DC
6 HVAC-CNT
SPDC-CNT
High-voltage AC

1 1
12 5 HVAC-ON J742
PT/SP-ERR 2 2
PCB

13 4 24VP
transformer

HVAC-CNT 3 3
14 3 GND
4 4
15 2 GND
5 5
16 1 J722 J741

When an overcurrent When '1', high- The AC bias voltage level varies
or an under current is voltage output according to the HVAC-CNT potential.
detected, '1'. turns on.
12KVPP
A voltage input between 0 and 12 V, used to control
the current level of the separation bias.
8KVPP

3V 11V 12V
HVAC-CNT

Figure 6-313 Construction of the Control System

6-32 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Correcting the Output to Suit the Environment and the Toner Deposit
The separation current output is controlled to an optimum level to suit the environment (condi-
tions identified by the data from the environment sensor) and the toner deposit (low, average, or
high based on the count of black pixels).

If the toner deposit is little, the output is


In a low humidity environment, paper tends to increased to prevent separation fault.
dry up, collecting excess charges (high
resistance); as such, the output is decreased.

Low toner deposit


Separation current(µA)

Average toner deposit


High toner deposit

Low humidity High humidity

If the toner deposit is high, the current level is decreased


to prevent double transfer.

Figure 6-314 Separation Current Output Table

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FUZZY 0: enable fuzzy control. (default)


(fuzzy control ON/OFF) 1: low humidity mode. (The separation current is lower than
the standard level.)
2: normal humidity mode.
3: high humidity mode. (The separation current is higher than
the standard level.)
Selecting '1' through '3' makes the control mechanize
independent of the environment sensor.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-33
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

3. Correcting the Output upon Detection of Leakage


The separation output is decreased upon detection of leakage.

Low voltage mode


E068 indicated

Main power switch


10.5 kvpp 9.8 kvpp NG Set OFF/ON 9.8 kvpp 9.2 kvpp

Upon detection of leakage cur-


rent, the output is decreased,
and tried again.

COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SP-MODE

Figure 6-315 Sequence of Operations

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>BODY> 0: standard mode. (default; AC output is 10.5 kVpp)


SP-MODE 1: low voltage mode (AC output is 9.8 kVpp; select if errors
caused by leakage occur frequently)

6-34 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4. Others

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>HV-SP>SP-N1 If you have replaced the image processor PCB or initialized


(output adjustment for single-sided the RAM on the image processor PCB, enter the value
print or 1st side of double-side print; recorded on the service label.
plain paper)

COPIER>ADJUST>HV-SP>SP-N2
(output adjustment on 2nd side of
double-sided print; plain paper)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-35
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

IV . DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY
A. Outline
Volume 3>Chapter 6>II.B.D. "Developing Assembly"

Figure 6-401 shows the construction of the developing assembly.

Toner cartridge

M6
Toner feeder motor
(inside the cartridge)
Toner feeding screws

Toner sensor Hopper


(TS3; inside Toner sensor (TS; inside the hopper)
the developing
assembly)

Developing cylinder Toner lower limit sensor


(TS2; inside the hopper)

Main motor CL1


Magnet roller
M1 CL4 drive clutch M18
Developing cylinder Toner feed motor
clutch (inside the hopper)
Magnet roller
Moves toner from the hopper to
the developing assembly.

Figure 6-401 Construction of the Developing Assembly

6-36 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

B. Controlling the Developing Assembly


Figure 6-402 shows the construction of the control system.

When '0', the


clutch turns on.

J504B
1
24VU
MGR-CL-ON To CL1
13
14 Toner feed motor
The motor turns on
(inside the hopper)
HM-ON
in response to 24 V.
18
19
0V M18
Toner feeding screw
Magnet roller CL1
J512A
drive clutch
DC controller PCB

1
Developing cylinder
24VU
11
DEV-CL-ON Magnet roller
12
13
14 When '0', the Main motor
clutch turns on. Toner stirring screw
M1 CL4
J514B
1 Developing cylinder clutch
2
0V
3
MM-FG
4
MM-ON
5
5V
6
0V
7

14

Figure 6-402 Construction of the Control System

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-37
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

C. Controlling the Toner Cartridge Drive Mechanism


Figure 6-403 shows the construction of the toner cartridge drive control system.

Toner feed motor


M6 (inside the cartridge)
12 V is applied to turn on the
cartridge motor.

When the toner cartridge


door is closed, '1'.

PS59
MSW1

J512B
1
DC controller PCB

CRGDR-OPN
2
5V
3
CRGM-ON
4
0V
5
5V
6
CRG-DTC
7 Toner cartridge motor drive switch
When the door is open, power to
14 the motor is stopped.

When the cartridge is set, '0'.

Cartridge sensor

Toner cartridge cover open/closed sensor

Figure 6-403

Related Error Code

E025 An overcurrent caused by an overload on the motor has been


(cartridge toner feed motor fault) detected twice.

6-38 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

D. Controlling the Developing Bias


The developing bias is controlled for the following:
[1] DC bias constant voltage
[2] AC bias constant voltage

Relay PCB

24 VH
24 VH
When '1', developing
AC bias is generated.

GND
GND
AC output 1000 Vpp

1 2 3 4
J721

J510A J723
0V
1 16 J732
HVDC-EN
2 15
3 14
4 13
High-voltage DC PCB

5 12
DC controller PCB

6 11
7 10
8 DEV-AC-ON 9
Developing cylinder
9 DEV-DC-CNT 8
10 7
11 6
12 5
13 4
The developing DC bias varies as
14 3 follows according to the DEV-DC-CNT
15 2 potential.
16 1
Developing DC bias

500V
image area
Non-image
area
A voltage input between 0
and 12 V, used to control the When '1', developing AC
3V 11V 12V
voltage level of the bias is generated.
DEV-DC-CNT
developing DC bias.

Figure 6-404 Construction of the Control System

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-39
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP> If you have replaced the MFC PCB or initialized the RAM on
DE-DC the MFC PCB, enter the value recorded on the service label.
(image area developing DC bias output Settings: 0 to 500
input)
COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>
DE-NO-DC
(sheet-to-sheet-distance developing
DC bias output input)
COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP> Settings: -50 to 50
DE-OFST Higher setting
(developing DC bias offset level offset Lighter images Darker images
adjustment) Lower setting

6-40 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

E. Detecting the Toner Level and Controlling the Toner Supply


Mechanism
Figure 6-406 shows the construction of the toner supply control system.

Toner cartridge

Toner sensor (TS1; inside the hopper)


Purpose: To keep the toner inside the
hopper to a specific level.
Operation: If the absence of toner is
detected, the toner feeding screw inside
the toner cartridge is rotated to supply the
hopper with toner. Toner feeding screw

Toner lower limit sensor


(TS2; inside the hopper)
Purpose: To detect the absence of toner
inside the hopper.
Magnet roller Operation: If the absence of toner is
detected, the ongoing operation is
Toner sensor stopped, and the Add Toner message will
(TS3; inside the developing assembly) be indicated.

Purpose: To keep the toner inside the developing assembly to a


specific level.
Operation: If the absence of toner is detected, the magnet roller is
rotated to supply the developing assembly with toner.

Figure 6-405

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-41
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

J504B
When the absence of toner is detected, '0'.
1

5V
7
TS1
8
0V
9
DC controller PCB

5V
10 TS1
TS2
11

TS
2
0V
12
3
TS
5V
15
TS3
16
0V
17

19

Figure 6-406 Construction of the Control System

6-42 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

The hopper supplies the developing assembly with toner as follows:

If the toner supply sequence has not ended at the time the
machine operation ends, the toner supply sequence will be
resumed next time machine operation is started.

The toner supply sequence is started The toner supply sequence is


when the absence of toner is detected ended if the presence of toner is
for 0.3 sec or more. detected for 0.7 sec or more.

Toner supply
sequence started
Toner supply STBY

Toner sensor
(inside the
developing
assembly)
2sec 1sec
Magnet roller
Supply Supply Supply

If supply is continued without an


interruption, toner can start to overflow If the absence of toner is detected for
(missing the timing for suspension). 120 sec, E020 will be indicated.

Figure 6-407 Sequence of Operations

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-43
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

Figure 6-408 shows the sequence of operations by which the toner cartridge supplies the hop-
per with toner.

If the toner supply sequence has not ended at the time the machine
operation ends, the toner supply sequence will be continued until it ends.

If the presence of toner is detected


If the absence of toner is detected for 0.5 sec or for 1.5 sec or more, the toner supply
more, the toner supply sequence is started. sequence ends.

Toner supply
sequence started
Toner supply STBY

Toner sensor 150 sec


(inside the hopper)
Toner lower limit sensor
(inside the hopper)

Toner feeding screw


Supply

If the absence of toner is detected for 150 sec If the absence of toner is detected for 150 sec
or more, a message to prompt toner supply will or more, a message to prompt toner supply will
be indicated on the touch panel. (The machine be indicated on the touch panel. (The machine
remains ready.) stops operation.)

Figure 6-408 Sequence of Operations

Related Error Code

E020 The toner sensor (TS3; inside the developing assembly) has
(toner supply error) detected the absence of toner for 3 sec or more.

6-44 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

V . DRUM CLEANER UNIT


A. Outline
Volume 3>Chapter 6>V. "Drum Cleaning"

Figure 6-501 shows the construction of the drum cleaner unit.

Pre-exposure lamp

Cleaning blade

Magnet roller

Waste toner feeding screw

Separation claw
M1

Main motor

Figure 6-501 Construction of the Drum Cleaner Unit

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-45
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

B. Detecting the Waste Toner (case full condition)


Volume 3>Chapter 6>V.B. "Detecting the Waste Toner"

Figure 6-502 shows the construction of the control system used to monitor the waste toner
case.

1 J514B
2
3 0V
4 MM-FG
5 MM-ON M1 Main motor
6 5V
7 0V

14 Waste toner
lock sensor
(MSW2)

(front)
DC controller PCB

J514A
0V
1
WT-FULL
2
5V
3

14

Waste toner case


As toner collects, the
case becomes heavy,
causing the waste
toner case sensor to
detect the flag.
1 J512B

5V
Waste toner case full sensor (PS19)
13
WT-RCK
14

Figure 6-502 Construction of the Control System

6-46 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

Related Error Code

E013 The waste toner lock sensor (MSW2) has remained on for 4
(waste toner lock) sec or more.
E019 After the waste toner case full sensor (PS19) has turned, on,
(waste toner case full) 50,000 prints or more have been made without any action.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-47
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

VI . CONTROLLING THE DRUM HEATER


A. Outline
Volume 2>Chapter 4>VI.B. "Drum Heater"

Figure 6-601 shows the construction of the control system for the drum heater.

When the heater switch is turned on, the heater will remain on
at all times, operating independently of the main power switch.

Heater switch
SW3

SW2
Main power Front door
switch switch
SW1
AC Input (N)
AC Input (H)

When the input voltage is


equivalent of 42˚C or more,
When the heater switch is off,
the heater will turn off; 42˚C
the heater operates in sync
or less, the heater will turn on.
with the main power switch.

1 2 3 4 5
J2601

J505A
1
2 J2602 J01
Heater temperature control PCB

AC (H) HT-TEMP
3 1 W1 1
DC controller PCB

4 2 2
Heater driver PCB

AC (N)
5 J2605 3 W2 3 Thermistor
D-HTR-ON
6 3 4 4
0V Fuse
7 2 5 5
8 1 6 6
7 Drum heater (H3)
8
9
10 Controlled to 42˚C
11

When '1', AC power supply is started to


the heater temperature control PCB.

Figure 6-601 Construction of the Control System

6-48 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

VII . DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go
through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier's parts while keeping the
following in mind:

1. ! Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work.

2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted.

3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. Do not leave out the toothed washer that comes with one of the mounting screws on the rear
cover to protect against static electricity.

5. Do not leave out the washer that comes with the screw used for the grounding wire and the
varistor to ensure electrical continuity.

6. Do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed, unless otherwise mentioned.

7. Turn off the front cover switch or the power switch before sliding out the duplexing feeding
unit or the fixing assembly.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-49
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

A. Photosensitive Drum Unit


1. Points to Note When Handling the Photosensitive Drum
The copier's photosensitive drum is a high-sensitivity amorphous silicon drum, and its sensitiv-
ity can deteriorate if it or the process unit is not placed or stored properly. Be sure to keep the
following in mind when handling the photosensitive drum or the process unit:
1. If you have removed the process unit from the copier, keep the photosensitive drum away from
light. To do so, use the photosensitive drum protective sheet or wrap it in six or more sheets of
A3 copy paper.
2. Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum near a window, i.e., do not subject it to
direct sunshine.
3. Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum in places subjected to high tempera-
ture, high humidity, low temperature, or low humidity or areas subject to rapid changes in
temperature or humidity.
4. Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum in places subject to dust, ammonium
gas, or organic solvent gas.
The foregoing points apply to the photosensitive drum of all models.

6-50 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Removing the Photosensitive


Drum
1) Open the front cover.
2) Slide out the process unit. (See Figures 6-
D701 through -D703.) [1]
3) Remove the three screws [1], and discon- [1]
nect the three connectors [2]; then, detach
the auxiliary plate [3].

[2]
[1] [3] [2]
[2]

Figure 6-A701

[5]
4) Remove the two screws [4], and detach
the positioning holder [5].

[4]

Figure 6-A702

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-51
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

5) Remove the three screws [6], and remove [6] [6]


the drum fixing plate [7].

[7]
[6]

Figure 6-A703

6) Remove the screw [8], and detach the [10]


bearing stopper [9]; then, lift off the pho-
tosensitive drum [10] while sliding it to
the front (in the direction of the arrow).

Points to Note When Removing


the Process Unit
[1] When you have removed the process
unit, do not rotate the photosensitive
drum in the opposite direction. Do-
ing so could bend the blade.
[2] Do not rotate the magnet roller of the
cleaner unit. Doing so will cause
leakage of toner.

[8]
[9]
Figure 6-A704

6-52 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

3. Replacing the Photosensitive


Drum Heater
1) Remove the photosensitive drum from the
copier.
2) Remove the two mounting screws [1], and
detach the flange [2] at the front; then, dis- [1]
connect the connector [3].

[2]

[3]

Figure 6-A705
3) Pull out the flange at the rear [4], and de-
tach the power supply unit [5] from the [4]
photosensitive drum.

[5]

Figure 6-A706

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-53
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4) Pull out the flat heater (drum heater) [6]


from inside the drum cylinder. [6]

Points to Note When Mounting


the Flange
There is hardly a gap between the flange
and the inner side of the drum, causing Figure 6-A707
the flange to get stuck if pushed at an
angle.
When mounting the flange, push it in a
parallel direction to the drum without
applying excessive force.

4. Mounting the Photosensitive


Drum Unit
Mount the photosensitive drum by revers-
ing the steps used to remove it with the follow-
ing in mind.

Caution:
Be sure to attach the bearing stopper as
soon as you have placed the photosensi-
tive drum on the process unit. (Other-
wise, the photosensitive drum may fall,
damaging its surface.)

6-54 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

B. Parts Associated with the


Process Unit
1. Removing the Pre-Exposure
Lamp Unit [2]
1) Open the front cover.
2) Slide out the process unit.

Caution:
Cover the drum with A3 paper or the like
when you have slid out the process unit.

3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove


the two screws [2]; then, detach the pre-
exposure unit [3].

[3]
[1]
Figure 6-B701
4) Remove the three screws [4], and detach
the pre-exposure holder [5]; then, detach
the pre-exposure lamp [6]. [5]

[4]
Figure 6-B702

[6]

Figure 6-B703

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-55
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Removing the Potential Sensor [1] [3]


Unit [1]
1) Open the front cover.
2) Remove the process unit.
3) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly.
4) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and
pull out the dust-proofing glass [2]; then,
remove the screw [3], and detach the po-
tential sensor unit [4].

[4] [2]

Figure 6-B704

Caution:
It is difficult to pull out the potential sen-
sor in a horizontal direction. As shown,
shift it down once, and then slide it out to
facilitate the work.

Figure 6-B705
5) Remove the two screws [5], and detach
the potential sensor cover [6]; then, detach [5]
the potential sensor [7].

Caution:
Replace the potential sensor simulta-
neously with the potential sensor PCB.
When mounting it, be sure to fit the boss
at its rear in the hole on the rear side of [7]
the copier; then, match it on the front [6]
side, and screw it in place.
Figure 6-B706

6-56 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

3. Removing the Primary Charging [1]


Assembly
1) Open the front cover.
2) Remove the inside cover (process unit).
3) Disconnect the connector [1]; while shift-
ing the charging assembly fixing plate [2]
to the left, slide out the primary charging
assembly [3].

[2] [3]

Figure 6-B707

4. Removing the Pre-Transfer


Charging Assembly
1) Open the front cover.
2) Remove the inside cover (process unit).
3) Disconnect the connector [1]; while shift-
ing the charging assembly fixing plate [2]
to the right, slide out the pre-transfer
charging assembly [3].

[1] [2]
[3]

Figure 6-B708

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-57
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

5. Removing the Dust-Collecting


Roller
[1]
1) Remove the pre-transfer charging assem-
bly.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the motor cover [2].

[2]

[1]

Figure 6-B709

3) Remove the dust-collecting roller arm [3]


and the twisted spring [4]; then, detach the
dusts-collecting roller [5]. [4]

[5]

[3]
Figure 6-B710

6. Removing the Transfer/


Separation Charging Assembly
1) Open the front cover.
2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly.
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the
charging cover [2].

[2] [1]

Figure 6-B711

6-58 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4) Remove the screw [3], and detach the fix- [3]


ing plate [4]; then, disconnect the connec- [6]
tor [5], and detach the transfer/separation
charging assembly [6].

[4]
[5]

Figure 6-B712

Points to Note When Mounting Boss


• The transfer/separation charging as-
sembly is equipped with a positioning
boss on its front and rear.
When mounting the assembly, be sure
to hook the bosses on the cut-offs in the
stay.
• If the charging assembly cleaner is on
the front side, the home position detect-
ing microswitch can become damaged;
be sure to set the charging cleaner at the
center. Boss

Figure 6-B713

Boss Boss

Figure 6-B714

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-59
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

C. Charging Wire
1. Outline
The primary, pre-transfer, and transfer/
separation charging wire are used around the
photosensitive drum, each of a 0.06mm diam-
eter.

2. Removing the Wire Cleaner of the


Primary Charging Assembly
Cut-off [1] [2] [4]
1) Move the clip mount [1] to the rearmost
position, and remove the screw [2] to de-
tach the support plate [4] of the wire [3]
cleaner motor shaft [3]; then, take out the
clip mount [1] through the opening in the
shielding plate [5] together with the wire
cleaner motor shaft [3].
2) Pick the wire cleaner with radio pliers,
and release the hook with your fingers.
Cut-off
[5]

Figure 6-C701

Figure 6-C702

6-60 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

3. Removing the Wire Cleaner of the


Transfer Separation Charging
Assembly
1) Remove the transfer/separation charging
assembly. [1]
2) Move the felt holder [1] to the frontmost
position.

Figure 6-C703
3) Remove the motor cover [2] together with
the motor.

[2]
Figure 6-C704
4) Remove the E-ring [3], and pull the lead
screw [4] to the front and then up to de-
[3] [4]
tach.

Figure 6-C705

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-61
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

5) Take out the felt holder [1] through the [1]


cut-offs in the shielding plate [5]. Cut-off
6) Pick the wire cleaner with radio pliers, re-
lease the hook with your fingers. (See Fig-
ure 6-C702.)

[5]

Cut-off

Figure 6-C706

4. Routing the Charging Wire


As a rule, the charging wire (except the
grid wire) is routed in the same way for all
charging assemblies; the following uses the [1] [2] [1]
charging assembly:
1) Remove the screw one each [1], and de-
tach the shielding plates (left/right) [2].
To prevent deformation (slack) of the pri-
mary charging assembly, be sure to work
on the left and right shielding plates sepa-
rately. (Do not loosen the screws on both
left and right shielding plates.)

2) Remove the wire cleaner.


Figure 6-C707
Caution:
For other charging assemblies, remove
the lids (2 pcs.).

3) Free a length of about 5cm from the


charging wire reel (wire diameter 0.06
mm), and form a loop on the end (2mm in Reel
diameter). Charging electrode

Reference: Stud
When forming a loop, wind the wire
around the hex key once, and twist the
hex key three to four times; then, twist
the charging wire to form a loop easily.
Charging
(front) (rear)
wire

Figure 6-C708

6-62 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4) Cut off the twisted end of the wire (ex-


cess) with a nipper.
5) Hook the loop on the stud.
6) At the rear side, hook the charging wire on
the charging wire positioner; then, hook
and twist the charging wire tensioning
spring on the charging wire.

Figure 6-C709

7) Cut the excess charging wire with a nip-


per.
8) Pick the end of the charging wire
tensioning spring with tweezers, and hook
it on the charging wire electrode. (In the
case of the pre-transfer charging assem- Figure 6-C710
bly, hook the spring on the pin at the
front.)

Caution: Grid side


Check the following:
• The charging wire must not be bent or
twisted.
• The charging wire must be in the V-
groove of the charging wire positioned. Correct Wrong

Figure 6-C711
9) Mount the cushion at the front of the
charging wire (except the primary charg-
ing assembly).
10) Mount the shielding plate (left, right).

Caution:
For other charging assemblies, mount
the lids (2 pcs.).

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-63
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

11) Mount the wire cleaner. (At this time,


make sure that the orientation of the wire
cleaner is correct.)
12) Wipe the charging wire with lint-free pa-
per moistened with alcohol.

5. Routing the Grid Wire for the


Primary Charging Assembly
1) Check to make sure that the four screws
used to keep the blocks and the shielding B
plate (front, rear) in place; then, hook the
C
end of the charging wire on stud A; after
routing the charging wire for 41 runs,
hook it on studs, B, C, and D; then, lead it
through the two washers [1], and turn it 1/
2 over the screw [2] to keep it in place.

D [1] [2]

Figure 6-C712

2) Loosen the screws [3], [4], [5], and [6];


then, tighten the screw [7] at a torque of
1.5 ±0.2 kg • cm; then, tighten the screws
[3], [4], [5], and [6] in order at a torque of [5]
10 kg • cm or more. [6]

[7]
[4] [3]

Figure 6-C713

6-64 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

6. Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire

Charging assembly Height of the charging wire

Primary

- 0mm - 0mm
7.5 7.5
+ 3mm + 3mm

Pre-transfer

No height adjusting
mechanism
13.6±0.3mm

Transfer

15.7±0.2mm

Separation

10±0.2mm

Figure 6-C714

Reference:
The height of the charging wire for the primary assembly and the transfer charging assembly
may be adjusted by turing the screw found on the back of the assemblies. A single turn of the
screw changes the height by about 0.7mm.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-65
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

D. Process Unit
1. Removing the Process Unit
1) Open the front cover.
2) Remove the developing assembly. (See E.
"Developing Assembly.")
3) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit, and
place the drum protective sheet.
4) Remove the inside cover (process unit).
5) Slide out the primary charging assembly
[1] and the pre-transfer charging assembly
[2].

[1] [2]

Figure 6-D701

6) Fit the drum stop tool [3]; then, remove [6] [7] [6]
the screw [4], and detach the fixing screw
[5].
7) Remove the three screws [6], and slide out
the process unit [7].

[6] [3] [4] [5]

Figure 6-D702

6-66 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

8) Slide out the process unit [7] as far as pos- [7]


sible; while holding the grips, detach it by Grip
lifting it.
Grip

Figure 6-D703

Caution:
When placing the process unit after re-
moval, rotate the kit support plate [1]
counterclockwise so as to keep a dis-
tance from the floor.

[1]

Figure 6-D704

Points to Note When Removing


the Photosensitive Drum
[1] When you have removed the photo-
sensitive drum, do not rotate the
magnet roller of the cleaner unit.
Doing so could cause leakage of
toner.
[2] When removing the photosensitive
drum or mounting it, do not rotate it
counterclockwise to avoid bending
of the blade.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-67
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Mounting the Process Unit


Mount the process unit by reversing the
steps used to remove it. When placing it on the
slide rails, however, pay attention to the areas
indicated in the figures.

Figure 6-D705

Figure 6-D706

Figure 6-D707

Figure 6-D708

6-68 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

E. Developing Assembly [1] [2] [1]


1. Removing the Developing
Assembly
1) Open the manual feed tray cover; then, re-
move the four mounting screws [1], and
detach the developing assembly stay [2].

Figure 6-E701

2) Disconnect the two connectors [3], and


slide out the developing assembly [4] to [3] [4] [3]
the front.

Figure 6-E702

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-69
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Removing the Hopper [3]


1) Remove the developing assembly from
the copier.
2) Remove the four mounting screws [1], [1]
and disconnect the connector [2]; then,
detach the hopper [3].

[2]
Figure 6-E703

[1]

[1]

Figure 6-E704

6-70 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

3. Removing the Blade Unit [1]


1) Remove the four mounting screws [1],
and detach the sleeve cover [2].

[2]

Figure 6-E705

2) Remove the screw [3], and detach the po-


[5] [5] [5]
larity plate [4]; then, remove the five
screws [5], and detach the blade [6] to-
gether with the mounting plate [7]. [7]

[5] [5]

[6]

[4] [3]

Figure 6-E706

Caution:
The blade must be adjusted to an ex-
tremely high accuracy. Do not remove it
on its own in the field. (Detach it to-
gether with its mounting plate.)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-71
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4. Mounting the Blade


Mount the blade by reversing the steps
used to remove it.
1) Butt the blade mounting plate against the
developing assembly, and secure it in
place with five screws.
Be sure to put copy paper over the devel-
oping cylinder for protection before start-
ing to mount the blade.
2) Mount the polarity plate with a screw.

5. Removing the Developing


Cylinder
1) Remove the developing assembly from
the copier. [1] [2]
2) Remove the blade unit.
3) Remove the three mounting screws [1]
from the rear, and detach the deceleration
gear retainer [2].

[1]
Figure 6-E707

4) Remove the three gears [3].


[3]

Figure 6-E708

6-72 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

5) Remove the E-ring [4], and detach the [4]


pressure arm [5].

[5]
Figure 6-E709

6) Remove the E-ring [6], gear [7], pressure


roll [8], washer [9], grip ring [10], seal
[11], butting roll [12], washer [9], and
bearing [13] in the order indicated.

[13]
[9]

[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]

[7]
[6]
Figure 6-E710

7) Remove the E-ring [14] and the pressure


arm [15] at the front.

[14] [15]

Figure 6-E711

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-73
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

8) Remove the C-ring [16], washer [17], [24]


pressure roll [18], seal [19], washer [17],
butting roll [20], C-ring [16], and bearing
[21]; the, remove the two screws [22], and
detach the bushing [23] and then the de- [22]
veloping sleeve [24].

[23]
[21]
[16]
[20]
[17]
[19]
[18]
[17]
[16]

Figure 6-E712
Caution:
Do not leave fingerprints or oil on the
surface of the developing cylinder. Wipe
off any with lint-free paper. (Do not use
solvent.)

Points to Note When Mounting Magnetic seal plate


the Developing Cylinder
Both front and rear sides of the develop-
ing assembly and the developing cylin-
der are equipped with a magnetic seal
plate.
When mounting the developing cylin-
der, take care not to bring the magnetic
seal plate into contact with the surface of
the cylinder to avoid damage.

Figure 6-E713

6-74 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

F. Drum Cleaner Unit Cleaning blade


Construction

Separation claw
Figure 6-F701

1. Removing the Cleaning Blade [1]


1) Open the front cover.
2) Slide out the process unit.
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the re-
ciprocating arm [2].

[2]

Figure 6-F702

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-75
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

4) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove [4]


the five screws [4]; then, while pushing it
toward the rear, detach the cleaning blade
together with the mounting plate [5].

[3] [5]

Figure 6-F703

5) Remove the E-ring [6], and detach the [7]


[6]
pressure plate [7]; then, detach the clean-
ing blade assembly [8]. [8]

Figure 6-F704

[9]
6) Remove the five screws [9], and detach
the blade retaining plate [10]; then, detach
the cleaning blade [11].

[11] [10]

Figure 6-F705

6-76 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Mounting the Cleaning Blade


1) Butt the cleaning blade [1] against the rear
end of the blade retaining plate [2]. Butted against
the edge.
Caution:
When butting the cleaning blade, be sure
there is not gap.

[1]
[2]

Figure 6-F706

2) Tighten the screws on the blade retaining


plate temporarily in the order indicated.

Caution:
When tightening the screws temporarily,
be sure to hold the blade down against
the end. (See Figure 6-F706.)

Figure 6-F707

3) Tighten the screws on the blade retaining


plate fully in the order indicated.

Figure 6-F708

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-77
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

Caution:
When mounting the cleaning blade, be Blade auxiliary plate
sure to put the blade auxiliary plate be- Blade back plate
tween the blade support plate and the Blade support plate
blade back plate.

Caution:
After mounting the cleaning blade, turn
the drum; if toner slips off the cleaning
blade at this time, repeat the foregoing
steps.
If the problem is not corrected after
tightening the screws, replace the clean-
ing blade.

Figure 6-F709

6-78 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

G. Separation Claw/
Separation Claw Drive
Assembly
1) Open the front cover.
2) Take out the process unit.
3) Remove the E-ring [1], and slide out the
separation claw holder shaft [2] to the
front to detach the separation holder [3].

[3] [2]

[1]

Figure 6-G701

[4]
4) Remove the spring [4], and detach the
separation claw [5].

[5]

Figure 6-G702
Points to Note When Mounting
When mounting the separation claw
holder, be sure that the separation claw Separation claw holder
holder spring is butted against the drum
cleaner case. Further, check to make sure
that the rack of the separation claw 3
drive assembly is engaged with the
groove in the separation claw holder.

Rack
Figure 6-G703

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 6-79
CHAPTER 7
PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

This chapter provides descriptions on the copier's operations between pickup and
delivery, functions of each operation, relationships between electrical and
mechanical systems, and timing at which each associated part is turned on.

I. OUTLINE..................................... 7-1 C. Controlling the Reversal Motor


A. Specifications and Construction (M11) .................................... 7-25
............................................... 7-1 D. Controlling the Duplexing Feeder
B. Arrangement of Rollers and Motor (M12) ......................... 7-26
Sensors .................................. 7-2 E. No-Stacking Operation ........ 7-27
II. PICKUP ASSEMBLY .................. 7-3 F. Detecting the Horizontal
A. Control System ...................... 7-3 Registration Position ............ 7-32
B. Sequence of Operations (pickup) V. CONTROLLING THE DELIVERY/
............................................... 7-4 ASSEMBLY ............................... 7-35
C. Controlling the Pickup Motor (M2) A. Reversal Delivery ................. 7-35
............................................... 7-6 VI. CONTROLLING THE CASSETTE
D. Movement of the Lifter ........... 7-7 HEATER.................................... 7-36
E. Detecting the Cassette Paper VII. DETECTING JAMS ................... 7-38
Size ...................................... 7-13 A. Outline .................................. 7-38
F. Manual Feed Tray Pickup B. Sequence of Operations (jam
Assembly ............................. 7-18 detection) ............................. 7-40
III. CONTROLLING THE VIII. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .... 7-44
REGISTRATION CLUTCH ....... 7-20 A. Manual Tray Assembly ........ 7-45
A. Outline .................................. 7-20 B. Cassette Pickup Assembly .. 7-55
B. Control System .................... 7-20 C. Vertical Path Roller Assembly
C. Sequence of Operations ............................................. 7-67
(registration brake) ............... 7-21 D. Registration Feeding Assembly
IV. MAKING DOUBLE-SIDED COPIES ............................................. 7-70
.................................................. 7-22 E. Feeding Assembly ............... 7-74
A. Control System .................... 7-22 F. Duplexing Unit ..................... 7-77
B. Sequence of Operations ...... 7-24

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

I . OUTLINE
A. Specifications and Construction
Table 7-101 shows the major functions of the pickup/feeding system.

Item Description
Paper feeding reference Center
Paper stacking capacity Paper deck (right, left) : 1,500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Cassette (3, 4) : 550 sheets (80 g/m2)
Multifeeder : 50 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper size switch Paper deck (right, left) : by the service person
Cassette (3, 4) : by the user
Multifeeder : by the user
Duplexing system No-stacking
Related user mode Turning on and off the cassette selection mechanism
Selecting paper icons
Related mechanical Deck horizontal registration
adjustment Cassette horizontal registration
Manual feed tray horizontal registration

Table 7-101 Functions

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-1
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

B. Arrangement of Rollers and Sensors

External delivery roller Internal delivery roller Registration roller

PS10
Multifeeder feeding roller
PS9 PS6

Delivery auxiliary roller PS5


PS16
Reversal auxiliary roller PS11
PS12 PS35
Lower feeding
middle roller PS47
PS13 Reversing roller Lower feeding
PS14 PS15 right roller Pre-registration roller

PS26 PS27
U-turn roller 2 PS25 Left deck PS20
U-turn roller 1 Pre-confluence roller feeding roller Vertical path 1 roller

PS49
Vertical path 2 roller

PS41
PS37 Vertical path 3 roller

PS46
PS42
Vertical path 4 roller

Figure 7-101 Arrangement of Rollers and Sensors

PS5: Registration sensor PS6: Claw jam sensor

PS9: Internal delivery sensor PS10: External delivery sensor


PS11: Fixing feeding outlet sensor PS12: Duplexing reversal sensor
PS13: U-turn sensor PS14: Pre-confluence sensor
PS15: Post-confluence sensr PS16: Reversal sensor
PS20: Right deck pickup sensor PS25: Left deck pickup sensor
PS26: Left deck feed sensor PS27: Right deck feed sensor
PS35: Multifeeder feed sensor PS37: Cassette 3 pickup paper sensor
PS41: Vertical path 3 sensor PS42: Cassette 4 pickup paper sensor
PS46: Vertical path 4 sensor PS47: Vertical path 1 sensor
PS49: Vertical path 2 sensor

7-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

II . PICKUP ASSEMBLY
A. Control System
Pickup
motor

M2
J511-B11 C1 feed detection signal (PS27S)
J502-B5 Vertical path 1 paper detection signal (PS47S)
J509-A2 Registration assembly detection signal (PS5S)
J509-A4 Registration clutch drive signal (CL2D)
J513-A13 Pre-registration roller clutch drive signal (CL5D)
J519-B3 Lower feeder right roller clutch drive signal (CL17D)
J519-B4 Lower feeder middle roller clutch drive signal (CL16D)
J519-B9 Post-confluence paper detection signal (PS15S)

CL2
J519-B2 C2 feeding clutch drive signal (CL19)
J519-B10 C2 feed detection signal (PS26S)
J518-B8 C2 pickup clutch drive signal (CL11D)

CL17
PS5

CL16
J518-A8 C2 pickup detection signal (PS25S)
J518-B10 C2 pickup solenoid drive signal (SL8D) CL5
J518-A2 C2 lifter detection signal (PS31S) CL19 PS47
PS15
J518-A5 C2 paper detection signal (PS32S)
CL11

J511-A4 Vertical path 1 clutch drive signal (CL8D)


SL8

[1] [1] CL8


J511-B2 C1 pickup detection signal (PS20S)
DC controller PCB

[2] [2]
PS26 [3] CL10 PS27
J511-A2 C1 pickup clutch drive signal (CL10D) PS20
[3] SL7
PS25 [4]
J511-A12 C1 pickup solenoid drive signal (SL7D)
[4]
PS31 [5] PS21
J511-A6 C1 lifter detection signal (PS21S)
[5] PS32 [6] PS22
J511-A9 C1 paper detection signal (PS22S)
[6] [7] PS49
J516-B9 Vertical path 2 paper detection signal (PS49S)
[7]
CL9
J514-A7 Vertical path 2 clutch drive signal (CL9D)
CL13
J515-A4 Vertical path 3 clutch drive signal (CL13D)
J515-B8 Vertical path 3 paper detection signal (PS41S) PS41

J515-B2 C3 pickup detection signal (PS37S) CL12


PS37
J515-A2 C3 pickup clutch drive signal (CL12D) SL9
J515-B11 C3 pickup solenoid drive signal (SL9D) PS38

J515-A6 C3 lifter detection signal (PS38S) PS39


CL15
J515-A9 C3 paper detection signal (PS39S)
J517-A4 Vertical path 4 clutch drive signal (CL15D) PS46

J517-B8 Vertical path 4 paper detection signal (PS46S) CL14


J517-B2 C4 pickup detection signal (PS42S) SL10 PS42

J517-A2 C4 pickup clutch drive signal (CL14D) PS43 PS44

J517-B11 C4 pickup solenoid drive signal (SL10D)


J517-A6 C4 lifter detection signal (PS43S)
J517-A9 C4 paper detection signal (PS44S)

Figure 7-201 Construction of the Drive Mechanism

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-3
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

B. Sequence of Operations (pickup)


1. Right Deck
• A4, 2 Sheets, Continuous

The copier's deck pickup assembly uses separation rollers to separate paper.
Volume 1>Chapter 5 "Separation Mechanism and Pickup Method"
Copy Start key ON
or print command received 1st sheet picked up
2nd sheet picked up

Pickup motor (M2)


Right deck
pickup clutch (CL10)
Right deck
pickup solenoid (SL7)
Right deck pickup
paper sensor (PS25)
Vertical path roller 1
paper sensor (PS47)
Registration roller
paper sensor (PS5)
Registration roller
clutch (CL2)

Stopped temporarily to create a sheet-to-sheet distance

Figure 7-202 Pickup from the Right Deck

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>CST>C1-DWSW When pickup is from a selected source, the fixing heater


COPIER>OPTION>CST>C2-DWSW temperature control mechanism is switched to thick paper
COPIER>OPTION>CST>DK-DWSW control sequence.
COPIER>OPTION>CST>C3-DWSW • C1: front deck (right)
COPIER>OPTION>CST>C4-DWSW C2: front deck (left)
DK: side paper deck
C3: cassette 3
C4: cassette 4

7-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2. Pickup from the Cassette 4


• A4, 2 Sheets, Continuous

The copier's cassette pickup assembly uses separation rollers.


Volume 1>Chapter 5 "Separation Mechanism and Pickup Method"

Copy Start key ON


or print command received 1st sheet picked up
2nd sheet picked up

Pickup motor (M2)


Cassette 4 pickup
clutch (CL14)
Cassette 4 pickup
solenoid (SL10)
Cassette 4 pickup
paper sensor (PS42)
Vertical path roller 4
sensor (PS46)
Vertical path roller 3
paper sensor (PS41)
Vertical path roller 2
paper sensor (PS49)
Vertical path roller 1
paper sensor (PS47)
Registration roller
paper sensor (PS5)
Registration roller
clutch (CL2)

Stopped temporarily to create a sheet-to-sheet distance

Figure 7-203 Pickup from the Cassette 4

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-5
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

C. Controlling the Pickup Motor (M2)


1. Outline
Table 7-201 shows the functions of the pickup motor control circuit, and Figure 7-204 is a
block diagram of the circuit.

Item Description

Power supply Supplies 38 V from the relay PCB.

Drive signal Signal (M2-ON) from the DC controller PCB.

Operating/driving See Figure 7-201.


assembly

Control On/off control


Constant speed control

Error detection Error code "E015"

Table 7-201

J1721 J621
38V 1
11
Relay GND
PCB 12 2 Drive circuit Pickup motor
(M2)

J513 J622 Clock pulse


0V generation
A5 1
5V circuit
A4 2
DC controller M2_ON Control
A3 3 Reference
PCB M2_FG circuit signal
A2 4
0V generation
A1 5 circuit

When the M2 drive signal goes '1',


the pickup motor starts to rotate.

When the pickup motor starts to


rotate, the pulse signal goes '1'.

When the pulse signals goes '0',


error code "E015" is indicated.

Figure 7-204

7-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

D. Movement of the Lifter


1. Outline
When the deck or the cassette is slid in, the cassette open/closed sensor turns on and, at the
same time, the pickup roller starts to move down, causing the light-blocking plate to leave the lifter
sensor, driving the cassette lifter motor and, ultimately, moving up the lifter.
The lifter keeps moving up until the lifter sensor detects the surface of paper. (In the case of the
deck right/left, a limiter is mounted to stop the lifter if it fails to stop moving up.)
When the deck or cassette open button is pushed, the drive gear of the lifter becomes free to let
the lifter move down on its own weight.

Right deck Left deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4

Cassette open/ Deck right open/ Deck left open/ Cassette 3 open/ Cassette 4 open/
closed detection closed sensor closed sensor closed sensor closed sensor
(PS23) (PS33) (PS40) (PS45)

Lifter position Lifter sensor Lifter sensor Lifter sensor Lifter sensor
detection (PS21) (PS31) (PS38) (PS43)

Paper presence/ Deck right paper Deck left paper Cassette 3 paper Cassette 4 paper
absence detection sensor (PS22) sensor (PS32) sensor (PS39) sensor (PS44)

Copy paper level Deck right paper Deck lifter paper Cassette 3 paper Cassette 4 paper
detection level middle level middle level detection level detection
sensor (PS51) sensor (PS54) PCB PCB
Deck right paper Cassette 2 paper (variable resistor) (variable resistor)
level upper sensor level upper sensor
(PS52) (PS55)

Lifter upper Deck right limit Deck left limit --- ---
limiter sensor sensor
(PS24) (PS34)

Drive motor Deck right lifter Deck lifter motor Cassette 3 lifter Cassette 4 lifter
motor (M13) (M14) motor (M16) motor (M17)

Figure 7-202 Components

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-7
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

Pickup sensor
Paper
Feeding roller
Pickup roller

Separation roller

Lifter position lever

Pickup roller
Lifter position sensor

Paper detecting
lever
Paper sensor

Deck open/ Lifter


closed sensor

Figure 7-205 Deck

Pickup sensor
Pickup roller

Paper Feeding roller

Separation roller

Pickup roller

Lifter position sensor

Lifter

Paper sensor
Cassette open/
closed sensor

Figure 7-206 Cassette

7-8 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2. Lifter Limiter (deck right/left)


When the lifter moves up and the surface of paper reaches the cassette limit sensor, the drive to
the lifter motor stops.

DC controller PCB

J514

A4
Q62 Motor
drive M13
CPU circuit
A5

J511
B8 (PS24)

Deck right limit


sensor
When the limit signal is received,
Motor drive signal the motor drive signal is stopped.

DC controller PCB

J514

B1
Q53 Motor
drive
M14
circuit
CPU
B2

J518
A5 (PS34)

Deck left limit


sensor
When the lift signal is received,
Motor drive signal
the motor drive signal is stopped.

Figure 7-207 Block Diagram of the Limiter

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-9
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3. Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper


The presence/absent of paper inside the deck and the cassette is detected by the cassette paper
sensor.

Paper sensor Paper detecting lever Paper sensor


Paper detecting lever

Copy paper

Lifter Lifter

Figure 7-208 Paper Present Figure 7-209 Paper Absent

4. Detecting the Level of Paper


a. Outline
The copier indicates the level of paper inside the deck and the cassette in four readings (includ-
ing No Paper) on the control panel.

3 bars 100% to about 50% of capacity


2 bars about 50% to about 10% of capacity
1 bar about 10% of capacity or less
No bar No paper

Figure 7-210 Table 7-203

7-10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

b. Operation
In the case of the deck right/left, two sensors are used to detect the position of the deck, and
combinations of the states of the sensors (on/off) are used to find out the level of paper.
For the absence of paper, an exclusive sensor is used. (See 3. "Detecting the Presence/Absence
of Paper.")

DC controller PCB

[1] [1] [1]

[2] [2] [2]

Paper level Paper level Paper level


(100% to (about 50% (about 10%
about 50%) to about 10%) or less)

Figure 7-211 Construction of the Mechanism

Deck right Deck left


[1] [2] [1] [2]
Paper level Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor
(PS51) (PS52) (PS22) (PS54) (PS55) (PS32)

100% to about 50% ON ON ON ON ON ON

About 50% to about 10 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON

About 10% or less OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON

None OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

Table 7-204 Combinations of Sensor States

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-11
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

In the case of cassette 3/4, the resistance of the variable resistor operating in conjunction with
the movement of the lifter drive shaft is used to find out the level of paper.

DC controller PCB

Variable
Paper level (much) resistor

Variable
Paper level (little) resistor

Figure 7-212 Construction of the Mechanism

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C3-LVOL Reading when 50 sheets exit in the cassette 3


COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C3-HVOL Reading when 275 sheets exist in the cassette 3
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C4-LVOL Reading when 50 sheets exist in the cassette 4
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C4-HVOL Reading when 275 sheets exist in the cassette 4
Record the above readings on the service label.

7-12 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

E. Detecting the Cassette Paper Size


1. Cassette Deck Right/Left
The cassette deck right/left is not equipped with a paper detecting mechanism, and the paper
size is switched as follows (A4, B5, and LTR):

1. By changing the paper size plate of the cassette.


2. By registering the new paper size in service mode.

Cassette Deck Service Mode Settings

Cassette deck right COPIER>OPTION>BODY>P-SZ-C1 6 : A4, 15 : B5, 18 : LTR


Cassette deck left COPIER>OPTION>BODY>P-SZ-C2

2. Cassette 3/4
1. The length of paper is detected by two photointerrupers (each cassette).
2. The width of paper is detected by a slide volume.
Volume 2>Chapter 5>11>A.3. "Detecting the Paper Size"

Width guide (rear)


Paper width detecting VR

Paper length sensor unit Width guide (front)

Cassette
Length guide

Figure 7-213

Cassette 3 Cassette 4
Length detection SV1 (2 photointerrupers) SV2 (2 photointerrupers)
Width detection SV2 SVR3

Table 7-205

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-13
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3. Markings on the Width Guide Rail


The width guide rail inside the cassette is equipped with paper size positioning holes, which are
marked A through M as shown in Table 7-206.
Refer to these markings if the user reports skew movement of paper, thereby deciding whether
the paper width is set correctly. (Note that this information is not disclosed to the user.)

Marking Paper size Remarks


A STMT-R
B A5-R
C B5-R
D KLGL-R
E GLTR-R
F G-LGL U3
G A4-R
H LGL/LTR-R
I FLSC U2
J B4/B5
K G-LTR U1
L 279.4×431.8mm U4
(11"×17") /LTR
M A3/A4

Table 7-206 Markings and Paper Sizes

7-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

4. Paper Size
The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB determines the size of paper based on the inputs
on paper width and paper length.
Table 7-208 shows the paper size groupings selected in service mode.
*Paper size selected at time of shipment.

Length PS102/ PS101/ PS102/ PS101/ PS102/ PS101/ PS102/ PS101/


sensor
PS104 PS103 PS104 PS103 PS104 PS103 PS104 PS103
Width
sensor Signal SZ 2 SZ 1 SZ 2 SZ 1 SZ 2 SZ 1 SZ 2 SZ 1
(slice level) ON/
Unit: mm OFF 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
A4 A3
288.5
279.4×
(U4) 431.8mm
Group Size
(11"×17")
273.7 U1 * G-LTR
(U1)
261.8 K-LGL
B5 U2
238.0 * FOOLSCAP
STMT LTRR LGL (U2) OFFICIO
212.9 E-OFFI
A5 A4R
206.6 (U3) A-LGL
G-LTRP A-OFFI
196.6
K-LGLR U3 * G-LGL
186.0
B5R FOLIO
165.2 AUS-FLS
A5R
144.1 U4 * LTR
STMTR A-LTR

Table 7-207 Paper Sizes Table 7-208 Factory Settings

Related Service Mode


* Factory setting.
COPIER>OPTION>CST>CST-U1 31 : GLTR * , 22 : KLGL
COPIER>OPTION>CST>CST-U2 24 : FLSC * , 26 : OFI, 27 : E-OFI, 33 : A-LGL,
36 : A-OFI
COPIER>OPTION>CST>CST-U3 34 : GLGL * , 35 : FOLI, 25 : A-FLS
COPIER>OPTION>CST>CST-U4 18 : LTR * , 29 : A-LTR

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-15
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C3- Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for STMTR in the
STMTR left deck.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C3-A4R Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for A4R in the left
deck.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C4- Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for STMTR in the
STMTR right deck.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C4-A4R Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for A4R in the
right deck.

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>C1-DWSW Use it to switch the fixing assembly temperature control


mechanism for deck right pickup.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>C2-DWSW Use it to switch the fixing assembly temperature control
mechanism for deck left pickup.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>C3-DWSW Use it to switch the fixing assembly temperature control
mechanism for cassette 3 pickup.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>C4-DWSW Use it to switch the fixing assembly temperature control
mechanism for cassette 4 pickup.

7-16 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

• Papers Supported by the Copier

Paper Notation Size (vertical×horizontal; mm)


A3 A3 (297±1)×(420±1)
A4R A4R (210±1)×(297±1)
A4 A4 (297±1)×(210±1)
A5 A5 (210±1)×(148.5±1)
A5R A5R (148.5±1)×(210±1)
B4 B4 (257±1)×(364±1)
B5R B5R (182±1)×(257±1)
B5 B5 (257±1)×(182±1)
11×17 11×17 (279±1)×(432±1)
LTRR LTRR (216±1)×(279±1)
LTR LTR (279±1)×(216±1)
STMT STMT (216±1)×(139.5±1)
STMR STMTR (139.5±1)×(216±1)
LEGAL LGL (216±1)×(356±1)
Korean Government K-LGL (265±1)×(190±1)
Korean Government R K-LGLR (190±1)×(265±1)
FOOLSCAP FLSC (216±1)×(330±1)
Australian FOOLSCAP A-FLS (206±1)×(337±1)
OFICIO OFI (216±1)×(317±1)
Ecuadorian OFFICIO E-OFI (220±1)×(320±1)
Bolivian OFFICIO B-OFI (216±1)×(355±1)
Argentine LTR A-LTR (280±1)×(220±1)
Argentine LTRR A-LTRR (220±1)×(280±1)
Government LTR G-LTR (267±1)×(203±1)
Government LTRR G-LTRR (203±1)×(267±1)
Argentine LGL A-LGL (220±1)×(340±1)
Government LGL G-LGL (203±1)×(330±1)
FOLIO FOLI (210±1)×(330±1)
Argentine OFFICIO A-OFI (220±1)×(340±1)

Table 7-209 Paper Sizes

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-17
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

F. Manual Feed Tray Pickup Assembly


1. Pickup Operation
a. Control System
Volume 2>Chapter 5>B.b. "Multifeeder Manual Feeding"
Pickup drive : pickup motor (M2)
Pickup roller contro : manual feed tray pickup clutch (CL7)
manual feed tray pickup solenoid (SL6)
Paper feed detection : manual feed sensor (PS35)

DC controller PCB
Manual feed tray paper detection signal (MLT_PAPER_PS) J510-B8

Manual feed signal (MLT_CURL_ENTRY) J510-B2

Manual feed tray feed clutch drive signal


(CL18D) J513-A7

Manual feed tray pickup clutch drive signal


(CL7D) J513-A9

Manual feed tray pickup solenoid drive signal


(pickup direction, CL6P) J510-B11

Manual feed tray pickup solenoid drive signal


(release direction) J510-B12
Pickup
M2
motor
CL18

CL7

SL6

Middle Feeding roller Manual feed tray


roller pickup solenoid

Pickup roller
Paper
To
registration
roller
PS35
PS17 Tray
Separation roller

Figure 7-214

7-18 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2. Detecting the Paper Size


Volume 2>Chapter 5>B.3. "Detecting the Paper Size"

Side guide (rear)

Manual feed tray


Manual feed tray power width

(MLT_WTH_VR)J510-B5

Variable
registration(SVR1)
detection signal

Side guide (front)

DC controller PCB

Figure 7-215

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4R Use it to change the paper width basic value for A4R on the
manual feed tray.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A6R Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for A6R on the
manual feed tray.
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>MF-A4 Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for A4 on the
manual feed tray.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-19
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

III . CONTROLLING THE REGISTRATION CLUTCH


A. Outline
Volume 2>Chapter 6>III>A. "Controlling the Registration Roller"
Registration clutch CL2
Registration clutch drive signal CL2D
Registration brake clutch CL3
Registration brake clutch drive signal CL3D
Shift clutch activation timing service mode

B. Control System

Registration roller

Pickup motor

CL2 M2

CL3
Registration drive signal (CL2D)
J509-A5 DC controller
Registration brake drive signal (CL3D) PCB
J509-B7

Figure 7-301

7-20 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

C. Sequence of Operations (registration brake)

Registration clutch ON
(CL2)
OFF

ON
Registration brake
OFF
clutch (CL3)

50 msec (approx.)

Pre-registration
clutch (CL5) ON

OFF

ON

Pre-registration brake
clutch (CL6) OFF

146 msec (approx.) 146 msec (approx.)

Note: If paper stops for a long time before the registration roller,
• ADF original processing time
• Finisher delivery processing time

Figure 7-302

As soon as the registration drive signal turns off, the registration brake clutch is kept on de-
pending on the way paper is being fed for a specific period of time to prevent idle rotation otherwise
caused by inertia.

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST Use it to adjust the image write start position in main


scanning direction during re-pickup

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-21
1.
A.

7-22
Reversing flapper solenoid drive signal (SL11D)
J519-B5

Fixing/feeding outlet paper


detection signal (PS11S)

SL11
J508-A11

PS10

M12
Reversal paper detection signal (PS16S)

SL3
Control System

J508-A5

PS16
PS11
External delivery detection signal (PS10S)
Copying on the First Side

Lower feeder motor

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.


J508-A8

PS9 PS6[1]

PS12
Delivery flapper solenoid drive signal (SL3D)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

J508-B18

Fixing separation claw paper detection signal (PS6S)


DC controller PCB

[1]

M11 Reversal motor


J508-B15

Figure 7-401
Internal delivery detection signal (PS9S)

[2]

[2]
J508-A2

[3]
Duplexing reversal detection paper signal (PS12S)
[3]
IV . MAKING DOUBLE-SIDED COPIES

J519-B6

PS5 Registration paper detection signal (PS5S)

J509-A2

CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)


2.

Reversing flapper solenoid drive signal (SL11D)


J519-B5

U-turn paper detection signal (PS13S)


J519-B7

SL11

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.


motor
M12
Lower feeder
PS13
Copying on the Second Side

PS12

Duplexing reversal paper


detection signal (PS12S)
J519-B6

Pre-confluence detection
M11 Reversal motor

PS14

DC controller PCB
signal (PS14S)

Figure 7-402
J519-B8
Post-confluence paper detection signal (PS15S)
J519-B9
Lower feeding middle clutch drive
PS15

signal (CL16D)
J519-B9
CL16
M2

CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)


PS5

Pickup motor

CL17
J519-B9
Lower feeding right clutch drive signal (CL17D)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

7-23
B.

7-24
A4, 4 Originals, Double-Sided Copies
Original set in ADF
Copy Start key ON or print count set
Copying on face of 1st sheet Copying on back of 2nd sheet
Copying on face of 2nd sheet Coping on back of 1st sheet

Pickup motor (M 2)

Internal paper sensor (PS 9)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.


Flapper solenoid (SL 3)
Sequence of Operations
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

Duplexing reversal motor Dawn-in Push out


(M 11) yyy
,,, yyy
,,,
Reversal paper sensor
yyy
,,, Draw in ,,,
yyy
Push out
(PS 1)
Fixing outlet paper sensor
(PS 11)
Reversal guide solenoid

Figure 7-403
(SL 11)
Duplexing feeder motor 300mm/s 660mm/s 300mm/s
(M 12)
660mm/syyy
,,, ,,,
yyy
,,,
yyy ,,,
yyy
Duplexing reversal paper
sensor (PS 12)

U-turn sensor (PS 13)


Lower feeding middle clutch
(CL 16)
Pre-confluence paper sensor
(PS 14)
Lower feeding right clutch
(CL 17)
Post-confluence paper
sensor (PS 15)

CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)


CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

C. Controlling the Reversal Motor (M11)


1. Outline
Table 7-401 shows the function of the reversal motor control circuit, and Figure 7-404 is a
block diagram of the circuit.

Item Description

Power supply Supplies 24 V from the no-stacking feeder driver PCB.

Drive signal Signal (DUPI_OFF) from the DC controller PCB.

Operating/drive See Figure 7-401.


assembly

Control ON/OFF control


Direction control

Error detection No error code; however, if a fault in the drive of the motor, a jam will occur.

Table 7-401

When the M11 drive signal goes '1',


the pickup motor starts to rotate.

When the M11 drive signal goes '0',


the pickup motor stops.

DC controller No-stacking feeding +24V


PCB driver PCB
FU3

+24V
J519 J3602 J3603
DUPI-OFF Interface A
A8 A5 circuit A9

DUPI-B A11 M11


A7 A6 Interface Motor
CPU circuit A*
(IC13) driver A8
DUPI-A Interface (IC1) B
A6 A7 circuit A7
A10
B*
A5 A8 A6

Phase A excitation control signal

Phase B excitation control signal


Figure 7-404

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-25
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

D. Controlling the Duplexing Feeder Motor (M12)


1. Outline
Table 7-402 shows the functions of the duplexing feeder motor control circuit, and Figure 7-
405 is a block diagram of the circuit.

Item Description
Power supply 24 V is supplied by the no-stacking feeding driver PCB.

Drive signal Signal (DUPF_OFF) from the DC controller PCB.

Operating/drive See Figure 7-401.


assembly

Control ON/OFF control


Rotation control

Error detection No error code; however, a fault in the motor drive will cause a jam.

Table 7-402

When the M12 drive signal goes '1',


the pickup motor starts to rotate.

When the M15 drive signal goes '0',


the pickup motor stops.

DC controller No-stacking feeding +24V


PCB driver PCB
FU2

+24V
J519 J3602 J3603
DUPF-OFF Interface A
A4 A9 circuit A4

DUPF-B M12
Interface Motor
CPU A3 A10 circuit A*
(IC13) driver A3
DUPF-A Interface (IC3) B
A2 A11 circuit A2
A5
B*
A1 A12 A1

Phase-A excitation control signal

Phase-B excitation control signal

Figure 7-405

7-26 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

E. No-Stacking Operation
1. Outline
In no-stacking operation, paper after fixing is moved to the holding tray assembly by the deliv-
ery flapper and the reversing flapper and, then, is moved to the lower feeding assembly.
The copier re-orders image pages in its memory for printing, eliminating the need for printing
in the order of the originals; as a result, its paper feeding operation need not be held at rest too long
and, consequently, double-sided copies may be made faster. As many as two sheets of paper may
exist simultaneously between the registration sensor and the lower feeding outlet sensor.

Related Service Mode

COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ- Use it to adjust the image write start position in main


REFE scanning direction for re-pickup.
(-100 to 100 mm)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-27
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2. Outline of Operations
For instance, no-stacking operation takes place as follows when making one set of double-
sided copies of 10 originals.

1. The 1st sheet is picked up from the deck 2. The 1st side is printed on the 1st sheet.
right. The 2nd sheet is picked up.

3. The 3rd side is printed on the 2nd sheet. 4. The 1st sheet is moved to the reversing
The 1st sheet is moved to the holding tray assembly.
assembly.
The 3rd sheet is picked up.

3
3
1

Figure 7-406-1

7-28 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5. The 1st sheet is moved to the lower feed- 6. The 1st sheet is re-picked up from the
ing assembly. lower feeding assembly.
The 5th side is printed on the 3rd sheet.

3 5
5

1 3
1

7. The 2nd side is printed on the 1st sheet. 8. The 7th side is printed on the 4th sheet,
The 2nd sheet is kept in wait, and the 4th and the 1st sheet is discharged.
sheet is picked up.

2
2
1
1 7
5
3
5 3

Figure 7-406-2

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-29
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

9. The 4th side is printed on the 2nd sheet, 10. The 2nd sheet is discharged.
and the 3rd sheet is kept in wait in the The 9th side is printed on the 5th sheet.
lower feeding assembly.
The 5th sheet is picked up.

4
4 3 9
7

7
5
5

2 1
2 1

11. The 6th side is printed on the 3rd sheet. 12. The 3rd sheet is discharged.

6
6 5
5
9

7 9 7
4 3 4 3
2 1 2 1

Figure 7-406-3

7-30 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

13. The 8th side is printed on the 4th sheet. 14. The 4th sheet is discharged, and the 10th
side is printed on the 5th sheet.

8
7 10
8
9
7

6 5
6
4 3
5

2 4 3
1
2 1

15. The 5th sheet is discharged.

10
9

8 7
6 5
4 3
2 1

Figure 7-406-4

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-31
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

F. Detecting the Horizontal Registration Position


1. Outline

Paper position detection By the horizontal registration sensor (PS18)

Detection start timing By the post-confluence sensor (PS15)

Drive By the horizontal registration motor (M15)

Position measurement By controlling the horizontal registration motor pulses (1 pulse = about 0.16 mm)

Related service mode COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-REFE

Related error code E051: The home position cannot be detected within a specific period of time.

Table 7-403 Functions

Horizontal registration motor (M15)

Horizontal registration
sensor (PS18)

Copy paper

Moves through
the sensor.

Figure 7-407

7-32 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)


CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2. Operations
The horizontal registration sensor moves to the start position (A4 detection position) when the
main power switch is turned on or the front cover is closed, and moves to a detection position to suit
the size of paper expected in the lower feeding assembly. Its position of detection is "paper width +
2 mm."


The paper detection mechanism starts when paper moved to the lower feeding assembly has
moved past the confluence sensor (PI 15) and has been moved over a specific distance (about 10
mm past the horizontal registration sensor).
The position of paper is detected with reference to the start position and by finding out the
difference between the start position and the actual paper position from the number of drive pulses
(1 pulse = about 0.16 mm) of the motor.

Main power switch ON

Start position
detection Paper position detection

Duplexing reversal
motor (M11)
Lower feeding middle
clutch (CL16)
Lower feeding rear
clutch (CL17)
Post-confluence
sensor (PS15)
Paper about 10 mm from the
Horizontal registration registration sensor.
motor (M15)
Horizontal registration Paper position detection
sensor (PS18)
Home position

Start position
Start position + 2 mm

: moves to the rear.


: moves to the front.

Figure 7-408 Horizontal Registration Detection

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-33
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3. Controlling the Horizontal Registration Motor (M15)


Table 7-404 shows the functions of the reversal motor control circuit, and the Figure 7-409 is a
block diagram of the circuit.

Item Description

Power supply 24 V is supplied by the no-stacking feeding driver PCB.

Drive signal Signal (SREGI_HOLD) from the DC controller PCB.

Operating/drive See Figure 7-407.


assembly

Control ON/OFF control


Rotation control
Stop position retention

Error detection Error code "E051"

Table 7-404

When the M15 drive signal goes '1',


the pickup motor starts to rotate.

When the M15 drive signal goes '0',


the pickup motor is held in stop state.

DC controller No-stacking feeding +24V


PCB driver PCB
FU3

+24V
J519 J3602 J3603
SREJI-HOLD Interface A
A8 A1 circuit B4

SREJI-B B5 M15
CPU Interface Motor
A7 A2 circuit A*
(IC13) driver B3
SREJI-A Interface (IC2) B
A6 A3 circuit B2
B6
B*
A5 A4 B1

Phase-A excitation control signal

Phase-B excitation control signal

Figure 7-409

7-34 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

V . CONTROLLING THE DELIVERY/ASSEMBLY

A. Reversal Delivery
The copier discharges paper either in face-up delivery or in face-down delivery mode.

Delivery Copying operation


Face-up • Making multiple copies of a single original.
• Making copies on transparencies
(However, the images will be mirror images.)

Face-down • Other than above

Table 7-501
One-way
clutch
Main
motor Gear for delivery
tray spec
M0 (slower with finisher spec)
SL3

Delivery flapper solenoid

CL21

M11
SL11
Reversing
Reversing assembly
flapper solenoid

Delivery speed
switching clutch Reversal motor

Figure 7-501

Parts (notation) Description


Main motor (M0) Drives the feeding roller.
Delivery flapper solenoid Turns on in face-up mode to lead paper to the delivery assembly.
(SL3)
Delivery speed switching Turns on in reversal delivery mode to speed up the rotation of the external
clutch (CL21) delivery roller.
Reversing flapper Turns off in reversal delivery mode to lead paper to the reversing
solenoid (SL11) assembly.
Reversal motor (M11) Moves paper to the reversing assembly.

Table 7-502

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-35
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

VI . CONTROLLING THE CASSETTE HEATER


The drive of the cassette heater is synchronized with either the outlet power supply or the
control panel power switch, selected by the heater switch (SW3).
While the copier is operating (i.e., both power switch and control panel power switch are on),
the cassette heater ON signal (CASSETTE_HEATER_ON) controls the drive of the cassette heater
at all times.

Main power switch ON Main power switch ON


Main power switch OFF Control panel power Control panel power
switch OFF switch ON
Sync with Drives the cassette heater. Drives the cassette heater. Drives the cassette heater
outlet power in response to the cassette
supply (ON) heater ON signal.
Sync with Stops the cassette heater. Stops the cassette heater.
control panel
paper supply
switch (OFF)

Table 7-601

Heater switch (SW3)


OFF ON

From power Selects either power outlet sync or control


outlet panel power switch sync.

Main power
switch
Relay Heater switch
(RLY2) (SW3)
J1722 J2601 J2601
Control panel 1 3 3 4
J2602
power switch 24V
4
Z2602
Relay PCB J2604
4 GND 3
J2602
J1722 24V RLY2602
2 1 3
Q2603
Cassette heater
MFC DC controller (H4)
Q2604
PCB PCB

J505 J2605
CASETTE_HEAT_ON
A8 1
Heater drier PCB
When the cassette heater ON signal
goes '1', the cassette heater turns on.
When making double-side copies in a
low-humidity environment, '0';
otherwise, '1'.

Figure 7-601 Block Diagram of the Cassette Heater Control Mechanisms

7-36 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

Blank page

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-37
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

VII . DETECTING JAMS


A. Outline
1. Arrangement of Jam Sensors

PS10 PS9 PS6

PS5
PS16
PS11 PS35
PS12

PS13 PS47
PS14 PS15

PS26 PS27
PS25 PS20

PS49

PS41
PS37

PS46
PS42

Figure 7-701 Arrangement of Sensors

7-38 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2. Types of Jams

Stationary
Sensor Delay jam Stationary jam from
jam power-on
Right deck pickup sensor PS20 Present Absent Absent
Left deck pickup sensor PS25 Present Absent Absent
Cassette 3 pickup sensor PS37 Present Absent Absent
Cassette 4 pickup sensor PS42 Present Absent Absent
Right deck feed sensor PS27 Present Absent Present
Left deck feed sensor PS26 Present Absent Present
Manual feed sensor PS35 Present Absent Present
Vertical path 1 sensor PS47 Present Present Present
Vertical path 2 sensor PS49 Present Present Present
Vertical path 3 sensor PS41 Present Absent Present
Vertical path 4 sensor PS46 Present Absent Present
Registration roll sensor PS5 Present Present Present
Claw jam sensor PS6 Absent Present Present
Internal delivery sensor PS9 Present Present Present
External delivery sensor PS10 Present Present Present
Reversal sensor PS16 Present Present Present
Fixing feeding outlet sensor PS11 Absent Absent Present
Duplexing reversal sensor PS12 Present Present Present
U-turn sensor PS13 Present Present Present
Pre-confluence sensor PS14 Present Present Present
Post-confluence sensor PS15 Present Present Present

Table 7-701 Types of Jams

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-39
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

B. Sequence of Operations (jam detection)


1. Delay Jams
a. Cassette Pickup (Right deck, Left deck, cassette 3, 4)

A specific time I after the pickup clutch turns


Copy Start key on, a jam check starts.
ON or
PRINT set

INTR / PRINT

Pickup clutch
(LC10, 11, 12, 13)
Pickup solenoid I I
(SL7, 8, 9, 10)
0.13 sec 0.13 sec
Jam check
Pickup sensor
Normal Error
(PS20, 25, 37, 42)

A check is made for about 0.13 to find out if paper


has reached the pickup sensor; if paper is absent, a
pickup delay jam is identified.

Figure 7-702 Detecting a Delay Jam

Source of paper Time period (I)


Right deck 0.12 sec (approx.)
Left deck 0.15 sec (approx.)
Cassette 3 0.15 sec (approx.)
Cassette 4 0.15 sec (approx.)
Manual feed tray 0.18 sec (approx.)

Table 7-702 Time Period I and Source of Paper

7-40 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

b. Other Delay Jams


Basically, the same principles are used to detect delay jams other than pickup sensor delay
jams.

A specific time I after the leading edge


Copy Start key of paper is detected by the sensor N-1,
ON or a jam check is started.
PRINT set

INTR / PRINT

I I
Sensor N-1
0.13 sec 0.13 sec
Jam check
Normal Error
Sensor N

A check is made for about 0.13 A delay jam is identified if


sec to find out if paper has paper does not reach the
reached the sensor N. sensor N during this period.

Figure 7-703 Detecting Other Delay Jams

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-41
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

Delay jam sensor N Sensor N-1 Time used I (sec)

Right deck feed sensor (PS27) Right deck pickup sensor (PS20) 0.12
Left deck feed sensor (PS26) Left deck pickup sensor (PS25) 0.12
Vertical path 1 sensor (PS47) Vertical path 2 sensor (PS49) 0.58
Vertical path 1 sensor (PS47) Left deck feed sensor (PS26) 0.24
Vertical path 1 sensor (PS47) Post-confluence sensor (PS15) 0.88
Vertical path 2 sensor (PS49) Vertical path 3 sensor (PS41) 0.38
Vertical path 3 sensor (PS41) Vertical path 4 sensor (PS46) 0.37
Vertical path 3 sensor (PS41) Cassette 3 pickups sensor (PS37) 0.12
Vertical path 4 sensor (PS46) Cassette 4 pickup sensor (PS42) 0.12
Registration sensor (PS5) Pre-registration sensor (PS47) 0.53
Registration sensor (PS5) Manual feed sensor (PS35) 0.37
Internal delivery sensor (PS9) Claw jam sensor (PS6) 0.13
External delivery sensor (PS10) Internal delivery sensor (PS9) 0.26
External delivery sensor (PS10) Fixing feeding outlet sensor (PS11) 0.27
Reversal sensor (PS16) Internal delivery sensor (PS9) 0.18
Reversal sensor (PS16) Fixing feeding outlet sensor (PS11) 0.10
Duplexing reversal sensor (PS12) Fixing feeding outlet sensor (PS11) 0.30
U-turn sensor (PS13) Duplexing reversal sensor (PS12) 0.27
Pre-confluence sensor (PS14) U-turn sensor (PS13) 1.08
Post-confluence sensor (PS15) Pre-confluence sensor (PS14) 0.38
Post-confluence sensor (PS15) Left deck feed sensor (PS26) 0.17

Table 7-703 Time Period

7-42 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2. Stationary Jams
a. Common Stationary Jams

A jam check is started after feeding


Copy Start key "paper length + 40 mm" upon detection
ON or of the leading edge of paper.
PRINT set

INTR / PRINT

L + 40mm L + 40mm
Jam check
Normal Error
Sensor N
(L = paper length)

If paper is detected here, a


stationary jam is identified.

Figure 7-704 Detecting Stationary Jams

b. Stationary Jam at Power-On


A stationary jam at power-on is identified in relation to the presence/absence of paper over a
specific sensor about 1 sec after the control panel power switch is turned on.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-43
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

VIII . DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go
through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier's parts while keeping the
following in mind:

1. ! Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work.

2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted.

3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. Do not leave out the toothed washer that comes with one of the mounting screws on the rear
cover to protect against static electricity.

5. Do not leave out the washer that comes with the screw used for the grounding wire and the
varistor to ensure electrical continuity.

6. Do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed, unless otherwise mentioned.

7. Turn off the front cover switch or the power switch before sliding out the duplexing feeding
unit or the fixing assembly.

7-44 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

A. Manual Tray Assembly


1. Removing the Manual Tray Unit
[1] [2]
1) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the delivery tray unit [2].

Figure 7-A801
2) Remove the four screws [3], and detach
the upper right cover [5] while the toner [3]
cartridge cover [4] is open.

[4] [5] [3]


Figure 7-A802
3) Remove the screw [6], and disconnect the
connector [7]; then, detach the manual
feed tray unit [8].
[8]

[7]
[6]

Figure 7-A803

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-45
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2. Removing the Pickup Roller


1) Open the manual tray paper guide.
2) Remove the left/right stop rings [1] (two
each), shutters [2] (two each), spacers [3]
(two each), and rolls [4] (two each).

Caution:
If the multifeeder is used during installa- [1]
[2]
tion or if the multifeeder has not been [3]
[4]
used for a long time, pickup can fail. If [4]
such happens, detach the protective [3]
sheet from the sponge roller, and dry [1] [2]
wipe the sponge roller. Figure 7-A804

3. Mounting the Pickup Roller Direction of [2]


Mount the pickup roller by reversing the rotation
steps used to remove it with the following in
mind:
• The front pickup roller and the rear pickup
roller are not interchangeable.
• The front pickup roller is identified by its sil-
ver-colored collar.
When mounting the pickup roller [1] to
the pickup assembly, be sure that the round [1] front of
Collar (silver)
marking [2] on the collar (silver) is toward the the copier
copier's front,
• The rear pickup roller is identified by its Figure 7-A805
gold collar.
When mounting the pickup roller [3] to
the pickup assembly, be sure that the round [4]
marking [4] on the side of the roller and the
round marking [5] on its collar (gold) are to- Direction of [5]
ward the copier's rear. rotation

[3] (rear of
Collar (gold)
the copier)
Figure 7-A806

7-46 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

4. Removing the Feeding Roller


1) Remove the pickup roller, and remove the [1] [2] [1]
stop ring.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the manual feed tray guide [2].

Figure 7-A807

3) Remove the stop ring [3] from the front of


the feeding roller assembly, and move the
feeding roller assembly [5] together with
the timing belt [4] to detach.

[5]
[4]
[3]
Figure 7-A808

5. Orientation of the Feeding Roller


[8]
When mounting the feeding roller [6] to
the manual feed tray pickup assembly, be sure
that the belt pulley [7] and the round marking
5
[8] are toward the copier's front.

[7] (front of the


copier)
[6]
Figure 7-A809

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-47
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

6. Removing the Separation Roller [3]


1) Remove the two mounting screws [1], and
detach the separation roller support plate
[2].
2) Remove the joint [3], and detach the sepa-
ration roller [4].

Caution 1:
When removing the separation roller,
pay attention to the bushing at the front.
It will slip off.

[1] [2] [4] [1]


Figure 7-A810

Caution 2: Urethane sponge pieces


Initially, the urethane sponge of the part
is pink, and changes over time (acceler-
ated if exposed to light).
Its tone will change from pink to orange
and to yellow; it is a general characteris-
tic of urethane sponge, and no physical
deterioration (in performance) exists be-
cause of changes in color, and the part is
not identified by color.
Figure 7-A811

7. Adjusting the Tension of the


Separation Roller
If double feeding or pickup failure occurs,
adjust the position of the pressure spring used
for the separation roller.
• If double feeding occurs, move the spring in
B
the direction of A.
A
• If pickup failure occurs, move the spring in
the direction of B.

Figure 7-A812

7-48 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

8. Removing the Manual Feed Tray [2] [1]


Paper Sensor
1) Remove the mounting screw [1], and de-
tach the solenoid cover [2].
2) Remove the mounting screw [3], and de-
tach the solenoid [4] together with the up-
per plate.

Figure 7-A813

[3] [4]
Figure 7-A814
3) Remove the screw [5], and detach the con-
nector cover [6]; then, disconnect the con- [6]
nector [7]. [5]

[7]

Figure 7-A815

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-49
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

4) Remove the ten mounting screws [8], and


detach the manual feed tray pickup assem-
bly [9]. [8] [8]
[9]

[8]
[8] [8]

Figure 7-A816

5) Remove the two mounting screws [10], [10] [11] [10]


and detach the lower cover [11].

Figure 7-817

6) Remove the two mounting screws [12], [12] [13] [12]


and detach the guide plate [13].

Figure 7-A818

7-50 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

7) Remove the two mounting screws [14],


and remove the sensor mount [15].
8) Detach the sensor from the sensor mount.

[14] [15] [14]


Figure 7-A819

9. Routing the Manual Feed Tray Timing belt


Assembly Side Guide Timing Belt Pulley
Pulley Rack plate
Butt the rack plate of the manual feed tray Section A
against section A (open condition).
Move the slide volume in the direction of
B, and attach the timing belt to the pulley.

Slide volume
Figure 7-A820

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-51
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

10. Position of the Pickup Roller


Releasing Solenoid of the Manual
Feed Tray A
Slide the solenoid into the direction of A
so that the gap between the shutter [1] and the
shutter plate [2] is 0.4 ±0.2 mm when the sole-
noid is pulled.

Figure 7-A821

0.4±0.2mm

0.4±0.2mm
[1]
[2]

Figure 7-A822

11. Removing the Manual Feed Roller


1) Open the manual feed tray door. [2] [1]
2) Remove the two screws [3], and detach
the front fixing plate [2] of the manual
feed roller assembly [1].

[3]

Figure 7-A823

7-52 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3) Remove the screw [5], and detach the rear


fixing plate 1 [4]; then, detach the rear fix- [6]
ing plate 2 [6].

[4] [5]
Figure 7-A824

4) Remove the E-ring [7], spacer [8], and [10]


bearing [9] at both front and rear; then, de- [9] [8]
tach the manual feed roller [10]. [7]

Figure 7-A825

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-53
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

12. Mounting the Manual Feed Roller


1) Set the manual feed roller assembly to the
copier.
2) Mount the rear fixing plate 2 and the rear
fixing plate 1 in the order indicated; then,
secure them in place with the mounting
screw [3].

Caution:
When mounting the manual feed roller,
hook the two claws of the rear fixing
plate 2 on the three holes in the rear side
plate; then, mount the rear fixing plate 1
to secure.

Rear fixing plate 2


Figure 7-A826

3) Secure the front fixing plate [4] with two [4]


screws [5].

[5]

Figure 7-A827

7-54 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

B. Cassette Pickup
Assembly
1. Removing the Front Deck (right)
1) Slide out the deck.
2) Open the upper right cover and the lower
right cover.

Caution:
The pickup assembly cannot be removed
unless the deck has been removed (the
lifter will get trapped).

3) Remove the mounting screw [1], and de-


tach the connector cover [2]; then, discon-
nect the connector [3].
4) Remove the two mounting screws [4], and [4]
detach the pickup assembly [5].

[2]
[4] [3]

[1]
[5]
Figure 7-B801

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-55
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2. Removing the Pickup Assembly [2]


of the Front Deck (left)
1) Slide out the deck (right, left).
2) Remove the two stoppers [2] from both
left and right of the deck (left) [1].

[1]
Figure 7-B802

[3]
3) Disconnect the connector [3] from inside
the copier.

Figure 7-B803

7-56 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

4) Remove the two screws [4], and remove [5] [4]


the two pickup assembly fixing plate [5];
then, detach the cassette 2 pickup assem- [6]
bly [6]. [4]

Caution:
When removing the fixing plate, be sure [5]
to support the pickup assembly to avoid
dropping it.

Figure 7-B804

3. Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup


Assembly
Same as removing the deck (right) pickup
assembly.

4. Removing the Cassette 4 Pickup


Assembly
Same as removing the deck (right) pickup
assembly.

5. Removing the Pickup Roller [1]


1) Remove the pickup assembly from the
copier.
2) Remove the two stop rings [1] on the out-
side, and move the pickup roller [2] in the
direction of the arrow to detach.

[2]
Figure 7-B805

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-57
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

nOrientation of the Pickup Roller


Mount the pickup roller by reversing the
steps used to remove it with the following in
mind:
• The front pickup roller and the rear pickup
roller are not interchangeable.
• The collar of the front pickup roller is gold in
color.
When mounting the pickup roller [1] to [2]
the pickup assembly, be sure that the round
marking [2] on the side of the roller and the Direction of [3]
round marking [3] on the collar (gold) are to-
rotation
ward the copier's front.

[1]
Collar (gold) (front of
the copier)
Figure 7-B806

• The collar of the rear pickup roller is silver. Direction of [5]


When mounting the pickup roller [4] to the rotation
pickup assembly, be sure that the round
marking [5] on the collar (silver) is toward
the rear.

[4] Collar (silver) (rear of


the copier)
Figure 7-B807

7-58 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

6. Removing the Feeding Roller [1] [2] [4] [5] [3] [7] [6]
1) Remove the pickup assembly from the
copier.
2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the
feeding roller cover [1].
3) Remove the stop ring [3] form the front of
the fixing roller.
4) Remove the stop ring [4] and the pickup
roller [5] at the font; then, detach the feed-
ing roller [7] together with the timing belt
[6].
Figure 7-B808

7. Orientation of the Feeding Roller


of the Cassette Pickup Assembly [3]
When mounting the feeding roller assem- [5]
bly [1] to the cassette pickup assembly, be
sure that the belt pulley [2] is toward the
copier's front.
When mounting the feeding roller [3] to
the feeding roller shaft [4], be sure that the
round marking [5] is toward the copier's front.
[4]
[2]
[1] (front of the copier)

Figure 7-B809

8. Removing the Separation Roller


1) Remove the two mounting screws [1], and
remove the feeding guide plate [2]; then,
detach the open/close guide [3].
(Skip this step for the pickup assembly of
the front deck left.)
[1] [2] [3] [1]

Figure 7-B810

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-59
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2) Remove the two mounting screws [4], and


remove the separation roller assembly [5]
from the joint. (If for the pickup assembly
of the front deck left, remove one screw.)

[4] [5] [4]

Figure 7-B811

3) Detach the separation roller [6] from the [6]


separation roller shaft mount.

Figure 7-B812

Caution: Urethane sponge pieces


Initially, the urethane sponge of the part
is pink, and changes over time (acceler-
ated if exposed to light).
Its tone will change from pink to orange
and to yellow; it is a general characteris-
tic of urethane sponge, and no physical
deterioration (in performance) exists be-
cause of changes in color, and the part is
not identified by color.
Figure 7-B813

7-60 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

9. Adjusting the Pressure of the


Separation Roller
If double feeding or pickup failure occurs,
adjust the position of the pressure spring used
for the separation roller.
• If double feeding occurs, move the spring in
the direction of B.
• If pickup failure occurs, move the spring in
the direction of A.

B
Figure 7-B814

10. Orientation of the Separation Wider groove Narrower groove


Roller
Keep the following in mind when replac-
ing the separation roller.
(rear of the copier)
Caution:
If mounted in the wrong orientation, in-
terference with the clamp washer can
lead to faults. Take care.

(front of the copier)


Figure 7-B815

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-61
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

11. Position of the Pickup Roller


Releasing Solenoid of the
Cassette (3/4)
As shown in Figure 7-B816, adjust the po-
sition of the solenoid by using the two screws
[3] so that the distance from the bottom of the
pickup assembly and section A of the roller
arm is 36 ±0.5 mm when [1] and [2] are oper-
ated.

[2] [1]

[1]
[2]

A
36±0.5mm

[3]

Viewed from A

Figure 7-B816

7-62 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

12. Adjusting the Registration of the [3]


Front Deck (right/left)
[2]
1) Loosen the four screws [2] on the cassette
front cover [1] and the two fixing screws [3]
[3].

[2]

[2] [1]

Figure 7-B817

[4]
2) Move the cassette guide assembly (front)
[4] to the front or the rear to make adjust-
ments.

Figure 7-B818

13. Adjusting the Registration of the


[1]
Cassette 3/4
1) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the cassette front cover [2].

[2]
Figure 7-B819

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-63
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2) Loosen the two fixing screws [3] on the [3]


cassette (left/right), and make adjustments [4]
using the adjusting screw [4]. [3]
After adjustment, be sure to execute
COPIER>FUNCTION>CST>C3-
STMTR/AR or C4-STMTR/A4R in
service mode.

Figure 7-B820

14. Removing the Lifter Motor (M16/


M17) of the Cassette (3/4)
1) Slide out the front deck (right); then, slide
out the cassette 3/4.
2) Remove the right cover of the cassette as-
sembly as instructed under C.2. "Remov-
ing the Vertical Path Roller 2."
3) Remove the two fixing screws [1] of the
lifter motor (M16/M17), and disconnect [2]
the connector [2]; then, detach the lifter [3]
motor [3].

[3]

[1]

[2]
Figure 7-B821

7-64 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

15. Adjusting the Position of the


Lifter Motor M16 (M17) for the
Cassette 3 (4)
1) Remove the guide plate 1 of the vertical [1]
path roller 2 as instructed under C.2. "Re-
moving the Vertical Path Roller 2."
(In the case of the lifter motor M17, re-
move the cassette 3 pickup assembly 2 us-
ing the same instructions as in B.1. "Re-
moving the front deck (right) Pickup As-
sembly.")

[2]

Figure 7-B822

2) Move the lifter motor (M16/M17) [3] to


the right, and fix it with the screw [4] in
place temporarily. [3]

[4] [4]

Figure 7-B823

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-65
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3) Set the cassette 3/4 in the copier without


paper inside. [5]
4) Check to make sure that the lifter drive
gear [5] is engaged with the lifter motor
gear [6] by looking from the copier's right
side. Then, check to make sure that the [6]
lifter drive gear is fully away from the
lifter motor gear when the cassette 3/4 re- [7]
leasing button [7] is pushed halfway.

Caution:
The releasing button is pushed "half-
way" so that
• The separation roller moves down.
• The cassette is just about to slide out.

Figure 7-B824

5) If the lifter drive gear is not fully away


from the lifter motor gear, move the lifter
motor (M16/M17) [7] to the left, and push
[7]
the releasing button halfway once again to
make a check.
6) Secure the lifter motor M16/M17 fully
with two screws.
7) Mount the removed parts, and turn on the
copier.
8) Push the cassette releasing button under
the following conditions to make sure that
the cassette is slid out normally.
• The cassette contains no paper.
• The cassette contains about 500 sheets
of paper.

Figure 7-B825

7-66 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

C. Vertical Path Roller [4]


Assembly [5]
[3]
1. Removing the Vertical Path Roller
1/3/4 [2]
1) Remove the cassette pickup assembly. [1]
2) Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2]
at the front; then, remove the grip ring [3],
clutch [4], and bearing [5] at the rear.

Figure 7-C801

3) Remove the E-ring [6] at the front and the


rear of the roller shaft; then, move the
bearing [7] (on both sides) to the center,
and detach the guide plate [8].
Remove the vertical path roller [9].

[7]
[9] [6]
[8]

[7] [6]

[9]

Figure 7-C802

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-67
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2. Removing the Vertical Path Roller [1]


2
1) Remove the deck (right), and slide out the [1]
cassette 3/4.
2) Remove the four screws [1], and detach
the cassette mount right cover [2].

[1]

[1] [2]
Figure 7-C803

3) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove [4]


the screw [4]; then, detach the guide plate
[5].

[5]
[3]
Figure 7-C804

7-68 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

4) Remove the E-ring [6] at the front of the [6] [8]


roller shaft; then, move the bearing [7] to [7]
the center, and detach the vertical path
roller 2 [8].

Figure 7-C805

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-69
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

D. Registration Feeding
Assembly [2] [3]
[1]
1. Removing the Registration
Clutch/Registration Brake Clutch
1) Slide out the fixing feeding unit from the
copier.
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove
the grip ring [2]; then, detach the registra-
tion clutch [3].

Figure 7-D801

2. Removing the Registration Brake


Clutch
1) Remove the transfer separation charging
assembly front cover. [3]
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove [1]
the grip ring [2]; then, detach the registra-
tion brake clutch [3].

[2]

Figure 7-D802

7-70 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3. Removing the Registration Roller


1) Remove the front cover of the fixing feed-
ing unit.
2) Remove the transfer separation charging
assembly.
3) Remove the registration brake clutch. [2]
4) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the
clutch drive gear [2]. [1]

Caution:
When removing the drive gear, take care
not to drop the pin.

Figure 7-D803

[4] [5]
5) Remove the spring [3], E-ring [4], and
bushing [5] at the front.

[3]
Figure 7-D804

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-71
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

6) Remove the registration clutch.


7) Remove the spring [6], E-ring [7], spacer
[8], and bushing [9] at the rear; then, de- [7] [8]
tach the registration roller [10]. [9]

[10]

[6]
Figure 7-D805

4. Removing the Pre-Registration


Roller
1) Open the middle right cover, and remove
the screw [1]; detach the connector cover
[2], and remove the two screws [3]; then,
detach the rear fixing plate [4].

[3]

[2]

[1]
[4] [3]

Figure 7-D806

7-72 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2) Remove the screw [5], and detach the [7]


[6]
front fixing plate [6]; then, detach the pre-
registration roller assembly [7].

[5]
Figure 7-D807

3) Remove the two springs [8], E-ring [9], [8]


and arm support shaft [10] at the front.
4) Remove the E-ring [11], spacer [12], and
bearing [13].

[10]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[9]
Figure 7-D808
5) Perform steps 3) and 4) for the rear; then,
detach the pre-registration roller assem-
bly.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-73
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

E. Feeding Assembly
1. Removing the Feeding Belt
1) Slide out the fixing feeding unit from the
copier.
2) Remove the fixing feeding unit front
cover.
3) Disconnect the three connectors [1], and
remove the screw [2]; then, detach the [3] [1]
harness guide [3].

[2]
[1]

Figure 7-E801

4) Remove the two screws [4], and detach


the fixing feeding unit releasing lever sup- [5]
port plate [5]. [4] [4]

Figure 7-E802

7-74 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

5) Remove the E-ring [6], bearing [7], and [8]


three screws [8]. [6] [7]

Figure 7-E803

6) Remove the E-ring [9], gear [10], pin [11], [13] [14]
three screws [12], E-ring [13], and bear-
ing [14].

[12]
[11] [9] [10]
Figure 7-E804

[16]
7) Remove the feeding belt unit [15], and de- [17]
tach the feeding belt [16] and the postcard [16]
belt [17].

[15]
Figure 7-E805

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-75
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

2. Removing the Fixing Feeding Unit


Releasing lever Sensor
1) Slide out the fixing feeding unit from the
copier.
2) Detach the fixing feeding unit front cover.
3) Release the claw of the fixing feeding unit
releasing lever sensor [1]. [1]

Figure 7-E806

7-76 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

F. Duplexing Unit
1. Removing the Duplexing Unit
Duplexing unit Grip
1) Slide out the duplexing unit from the
copier.
2) Holding the left and right grips of the
duplexing unit, detach it from the copier.

Caution:
Take care not to trap your hand between
the grip and the rail. Do not place the
duplexing unit where it is subjected to
damage.

Grip
Figure 7-F801

2. Removing the Front Cover of the [2] [1]


[3]
Duplexing Unit
1) Remove the four screws [1] and the three
knobs [2]; then, detach the front cover [3].

[1]

Figure 7-F802

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-77
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3. Removing the Reversing Flapper


Solenoid
1) Remove the duplexing unit from the
copier. [1] [1]
2) Remove the two screws [1], and discon-
nect the connector [2]; then, detach the re-
versing flapper solenoid [3].

[2] [3]

Figure 7-F803

4. Removing the Reversal Motor


1) Remove the front cover of the duplexing
unit.
2) Disconnect the two connectors [1] , and
remove the four screws [2]; then, detach [2] [3] [2]
the reversal motor together with the motor
support plate [3].

[2] [1]
Figure 7-F804

7-78 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3) Remove the four screws [4], and detach [4] [5] [4]
the reversal motor [5].

Figure 7-F805

[2]
5. Removing the Lower Feeder
Motor
1) Remove the front cover of the duplexing
unit.
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove
the two screws [2]; then, detach the lower
feeder motor [3].

[2] [3] [1]


Figure 7-F806

6. Removing the Horizontal


Registration Motor
1) Remove the duplexing unit from the
copier.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the upper cover [2].

[1]

[2]
Figure 7-F807

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-79
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

3) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove [4] [5] [3]


the screw [4]; then, detach the horizontal
registration motor [5].

Figure 7-F808

7. Removing the Deck (left) Draw-


Out Clutch/Lower Feeder Middle
Clutch
1) Remove the duplexing unit from the
copier.
2) Remove the front cover.
3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove [2] [2]
the grip ring [2]; the, detach each clutch
[3].

[1] [3] [1] [3]

Figure 7-F809

7-80 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

8. Removing the Lower Feeding


Right Clutch
1) Remove the duplexing unit from the
copier.
2) Remove the front cover.
3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove
the two screws [2]; then, detach the latch
plate [3].

[2] [1] [3] [2]

Figure 7-F810

4) Remove the bearing [4] and spacer [5];


then, detach the lower feeding right clutch [4] [5] [6]
[6].

Figure 7-F811

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-81
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

9. Removing the Duplexing Reversal


Sensor
1) Remove the duplexing unit from the [1] [2][3] [4] [6] [7]
copier.
2) Remove the front cover.
3) Remove the motor support plate.
4) Remove the following from the front side
of the reversing roller shaft [1]:
• E-ring [2]
• Gear [3] and parallel pin [4]
• E-ring [5]
• Spacer [6]
• Bearing [7] [5]

Figure 7-F812

5) Remove the following from the rear of the


reversing roller shaft [1]: [1] [9] [10]
• E-ring [8]
• Spacer [9]
• Bearing [10]

[8]

Figure 7-F813

7-82 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

6) Release the front and rear springs [11] of [11]


the reversing guide.

(front)
Figure 7-F814

[11]

(rear)
Figure 7-F815

7) While lifting the reversing guide, detach


the reversing roller [12].

[12]
Figure 7-F816

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-83
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

8) Disconnect the two connectors [13], and [15] [14]


remove the four screws [14]; then, detach
the reversing guide assembly [15].

[14]

[13]

Figure 7-F817

9) Remove the two screws [16], and detach [16] [17] [16]
the duplexing reversal sensor [17].

Figure 7-F818

7-84 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

10. Removing the U-Turn Sensor


1) Perform steps 1) through 8) given for the
removal of the duplexing reversal sensor.
2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the U-
turn sensor [2]. [1]

[2]
Figure 7-F819

11. Removing the Pre-Confluence


Sensor
1) Disconnect the connector [1] from the
bottom of the duplexing unit; then, re-
move the screw [2], and detach the pre-
confluence sensor [3].

[1]

[3]

[2]

Figure 7-F820

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-85
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

12. Removing the Post-Confluence [1]


Sensor
1) Remove the two screws [1] from the bot-
tom of the duplexing unit; then, detach the
left deck feeding roller assembly [2].
[2]

[1]

Figure 7-F821

2) Disconnect the connector [3]; then, re-


move the screw [4], and detach the post- [3]
confluence sensor [5].

[5]

[4]

Figure 7-F822

7-86 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

13. Removing the Front Deck (lifter)


Draw-Out Sensor
1) Disconnect the connector [1] from the
bottom of the duplexing unit; then, re- [1]
move the screw [2], and detach the front
deck (left) feed sensor [3].
[2]

[3]

Figure 7-F823

14. Removing the Horizontal [2]


Registration Sensor
1) Remove the duplexing unit from the
copier.
2) Remove the front cover.
3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove
the three screws [2].

[1] [2]
Figure 7-F824

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 7-87
CHAPTER 7 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

4) Remove the screw [3], and detach the


duplexing unit right fixing assembly [4];
then, remove the two screws [5] at the
rear, and detach the right grip plate [6].

Caution:
When mounting the right grip plate, be
sure that the boss on the grip plate is in [6]
the hole of the side plate.

[5]

[4]

[3]

Figure 7-F825

5) Remove the screw [7], and detach the


horizontal registration sensor [8].

[8] [7]

Figure 7-F826

7-88 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8
FIXING SYSTEM

This chapter provides descriptions on the copier's fixing operations, functions of


each operation, relationships between electrical and mechanical systems, and
timing at which each associated part is turned on.

I. OPERATIONS ............................ 8-1 A. Outline .................................. 8-12


A. Outline .................................... 8-1 B. Down Sequence Control ...... 8-13
B. Basic Sequence of Operations C. Controlling Temperature by Mode
(fixing system) ........................ 8-4 8-14
II. FIXING DRIVE SYSTEM ............ 8-5 D. Error Detection ..................... 8-18
A. Outline .................................... 8-5 IV. CONTROLLING THE FIXING
B. Controlling the Fixing Roller Drive ROLLER BIAS .......................... 8-24
Mechanism............................. 8-6 A. Outline .................................. 8-24
C. Controlling the Cleaning Belt V. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .... 8-25
Drive Mechanism ................... 8-8 A. Fixing Assembly ................... 8-26
D. Controlling the Fixing Inlet Guide B. Fixing Roller Cleaning Assembly
Drive Mechanism ................... 8-9 ............................................. 8-29
E. Controlling the Thermistor C. Fixing Heater and Control Parts
Reciprocating Mechanism ... 8-10 ............................................. 8-32
F. Controlling the Upper Separation D. Fixing Roller Assembly ........ 8-37
Claw Reciprocating Mechanism E. Separation Claw Assembly .. 8-42
............................................. 8-11 F. Delivery Assembly ............... 8-43
III. CONTROLLING THE FIXING G. Paper Sensors ..................... 8-46
TEMPERATURE ....................... 8-12

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

I . OPERATIONS
A. Outline
Table 8-101 shows the major functions of the fixing system.

Item Functions
Fixing method Heating roller (fixing roller + pressure roller)
Fixing heater Main heater: used mainly for temperature control during PRINT
Sub heater: used mainly for temperature control during STBY
Control temperature 200˚C (during STBY)
Temperature [1] Main Thermistor for temperature control, error detection
detection [2] Sub Thermistor for error detection
[3] Thermal Switch for error detection
Control [1] Down sequence control
[2] Temperature control by mode
•Transparency mode
•Thick paper mode
Cleaning method Cleaning belt roller (driven by a solenoid and one-way clutch)
Error detection [1] Temperature control error detection by a thermistor
[2] Overheating detection by a thermal switch
Others [1] Fixing inlet guide drive control about 1 mm (top/down)
[2] Thermistor reciprocating control 12 mm
[3] Upper separation claw reciprocating control 3 mm
[4] Fixing roller bias control +600 V

Table 8-101

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-1
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

Figures 8-101 and -102 show the major components of the fixing system.

Cleaning belt unit

Cleaning belt

Upper fixing roller


Main thermistor (TH1)
Separation claw Sub thermistor (TH2)

Thermal switch (TP1)


Inlet guide

Lower fixing roller

Figure 8-101 Cross Section

Upper fixing roller

Sub thermistor (TH2)

Main thermistor (TH1)

Thermal switch (TP1)

Figure 8-102 External View

8-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

Parts Notation Description


Upper fixing roller Heating roller, 50 mm dia.
Lower fixing roller Pressure roller, 38 mm dia.
Fixing motor M3 DC motor, 22 W
Main heater H1 Used mainly for temperature control during PRINT
(850 W for 20A model; 760 W for 15A model)
Sub heater H2 Used mainly for temperature control during STBY (365 W for
20A model; 400 W for 15A model)
Main thermistor TH1 Temperature control, error detection
Sub thermistor TH2 Error detection
Thermal switch TP1 Designed for an operating temperature of 223˚C
Cleaning belt • Driven by the cleaning belt drive solenoid (SL2)
• Turns on twice for large-size paper (B4 or larger)
Turns on once for small-size paper (smaller than B4)
Separation claw Designed for a reciprocating distance of 3 mm
Inlet guide Designed for up/down movement of 1.8 mm

Table 8-102 Components

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-3
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

B. Basic Sequence of Operations (fixing system)

Main power Control panel


switch power switch Copy Start key
ON ON 195˚C 200˚C ON

SLEEP WMUP WMUPR STBY INTR PSTBY PRINT LSTR STBY


Wait indicator RED GREEN RED

Fixing motor

Main heater

Sub heater

Controlled to 200˚C Controlled to 200˚C

210˚C
205˚C
200˚C
195˚C

The temperature drops


because of passage of
Both main and sub heaters
paper.
are turned on to return to
200˚C in a short time.

Figure 8-103 Basic Sequence of Operations

8-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

II . FIXING DRIVE SYSTEM


A. Outline
The fixing drive system is controlled for the following:
[1] Drive of the fixing roller.
[2] Drive of the cleaning belt.
[3] Drive of the fixing inlet guide.
[4] Drive of the thermistor reciprocating mechanism.
[5] Drive of the upper separation claw reciprocating mechanism.

Issues an error upon Indicates that the cleaning


detection. belt is running out on the
control panel upon detection.

J508B
Detection signal

Detection signal PS8


Cleaning belt drive solenoid Web absent
SL2

warning sensor
Drive signal PS7
Web absent sensor

Drive signal
DC controller PCB

Thermistor

M1
Main motor
M3
J508A Upper Fixing roller
separation motor
claw
SL1

Drive signal

Inlet guide drive solenoid

Figure 8-201 Construction of the Control System

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-5
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

B. Controlling the Fixing Roller Drive Mechanism


Figure 8-202 shows the construction of the control system used to control the fixing roller drive
mechanism.

Upper fixing roller

When the rotation speed of the fixing


motor reaches a specific value, '0'.

J508A
1
DC controller PCB

14
0V
15
0V
16
FXM-LCK
17 M3
FXM-ON
18
5V Fixing drive motor
19
0V
20

When '1', the motor turns on.

Figure 8-202 Construction of the Control System

8-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

Related Error Code

E014 FXM-LCK is '1' for more than 2 sec while the motor is rotating (i.e.,
(fixing motor speed error) FXM-ON=1).

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-7
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

C. Controlling the Cleaning Belt Drive Mechanism


Figure 8-203 shows the construction of the control system used to control the cleaning belt
drive mechanism.

Length Detection 1
When the cleaning belt length detecting flag comes into contact with the cut-off (300 mm from
the end of the cleaning belt), the cleaning belt length warning sensor (PS8) detects the flag,
causing the message "Web Running Out" on the control panel. (Copying may continue.)

(front)
Cleaning belt
length detecting flag

Cleaning belt length


warning sensor (PS8)

Cleaning belt absent


sensor (PS7)

Length detection 2

If copying continues after detection by


PS8, the flag moves farther down,
causing error code E005 upon
detection by the cleaning belt length
Cleaning belt sensor (PS7).
roller (feed side)

J508B
0V
1
WEB-LESS
2 To PS7
DC controller PCB

5V
3
0V
4
WEB-WARN
5 To PS8
5V
6

20

Figure 8-203 Construction of the Control System

8-8 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

D. Controlling the Fixing Inlet Guide Drive Mechanism


Volume 2>Chapter 6>IV.5 "Adjusting the Height of the Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide"

Figure 8-204 shows the construction of the control system used to control the fixing inlet guide
drive mechanism.

Upper fixing roller (rear)

Inlet guide

Top/bottom width: 1.8 mm


DC controller PCB

When '0', the fixing inlet guide


1 J508B moves down. (paper length less
than 300 mm)
24V
11
FIXG-DWN
12
FIXG-UP
13
Fixing inlet guide
solenoid (SL1)
When '0', the fixing inlet guide
20 moves up. (paper length 300
mm or more)
(front)

Figure 8-204 Construction of the Control System

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-9
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

E. Controlling the Thermistor Reciprocating Mechanism


Volume 2>Chapter 6>IV.5. "Controlling the Reciprocating Mechanism of the Thermistor"

Figure 8-205 shows the control system used to control the reciprocating mechanism of the
thermistor.

Cam (front)

Reciprocating width: 12 mm One-way clutch

Upper fixing roller

Cleaning belt drive belt solenoid (SL2)

(rear) Main thermistor

Figure 8-205 Construction of the Control System

8-10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

F. Controlling the Upper Separation Claw Reciprocating


Mechanism
Figure 8-206 shows the control system used to control the reciprocating mechanism of the
uppes separation claw.

(rear) Reciprocating width: 3 mm

Upper separation claw unit

(front)

Cam

One-way
clutches

M1
Eccentric cams Main motor

Figure 8-206 Construction of the Control System

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-11
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

III . CONTROLLING THE FIXING TEMPERATURE


A. Outline
The fixing temperature mechanism is controlled for the following:
[1] Down sequence
[2] Temperature by Mode
[3] Error detection

Voltage to suit the


temperature detected by the Voltage suited to the temperature
J508B main thermistor. detected by the sub thermistor
1

M-TEMP
7
0V
8
S-TEMP
9
0V
10
Upper fixing roller

20

Sub thermistor
DC controller PCB

Main
heater
Main thermistor
J505A
1
Sub heater
Thermal switch
MHDTC When 223˚C, the AC
9 line is turned off.
MH-ON
10 RLY
SH-ON
11
SHDTC SSR Relay
12
0V
13
24V Front door
14

When the sub heater is powered, '0'.

When '1', the main heater turns on.

Figure 8-301 Construction of the Control System

8-12 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

B. Down Sequence Control


Volume 2>Chapter 6>II.3. "Controlling the Roller Temperature"

Copy
Start key
ON

STBY PRINT STOP PRINT

Main heater(H1)

Sub heater(H2)

Copying speed 60cpm 50cpm 40cpm Stopped 60cpm

Controlled to 200˚C
The sub heater is also turned
on to recover temperature.
200˚C
195˚C
190˚C
185˚C
180˚C
175˚C
170˚C
165˚C
160˚C

At 175˚C, dropped to
50 cpm. At 200˚C, printing is resumed automatically.

At 170˚C, dropped to
40 cpm. At 165˚C, printing stopped.

Figure 8-302 Down Sequence

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FIX-TMP1
(down sequence state temperature) Setting 50cpm 40cpm Stop Resume
Set a relatively high temperature for users 0 170˚C 165˚C 160˚C 175˚C
who prefer priority on image quality, and a
relatively low temperature for users who prefer 1 175˚C 170˚C 165˚C 180˚C
priority on productivity.
2 180˚C 175˚C 170˚C 185˚C
3 185˚C 180˚C 175˚C 190˚C

4 190˚C 185˚C 180˚C 195˚C


5 195˚C 190˚C 185˚C 200˚C

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-13
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

C. Controlling Temperature by Mode


The surface temperature of the fixing roller is controlled according to purpose for the following
operating modes:

Purpose Correction
Transparency mode To prevent wrapping of Lowers the control temperature.
transparencies.
Thick paper mode To prevent drops in the surface Increases the down sequence rush
temperature of the fixing roller. temperature.
Power save mode To reduce the power consumption. Lowers the control temperature for
STBY.

Table 8-301

8-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

1. Transparency Mode
To prevent wrapping of a transparency around the fixing roller (or it would start to melt be-
cause of the heat from the fixing roller), the surface temperature of the fixing roller is lowered in
transparency mode.
Copy
Transparency Start key
mode selected ON 195˚C

STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY


Wait indicator Green Red Green

Fixing motor
(M3)
Main heater Controlled to
195˚C
(H1)
Sub heater Controlled to
200˚C Controlled to 200˚C
(H2)

Idle rotation is continued until


the surface temperature of the
fixing roller drops to
transparency mode
temperature.
210˚C
205˚C
200˚C
195˚C

Temperature for transparencies

Figure 8-303 Sequence of Operations

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>OHP-TEMP 0: disables transparency mode temperature control.


(transparency mode temperature setting) (normal temperature control only)
1: enables transparency mode temperature control at
"normal control level -10˚C."
2: enables transparency mode temperature control at
"normal control level -15˚C."
3: enables transparency mode temperature control at
"normal control level -20˚C."

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-15
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

2. Thick Paper Mode


To prevent drops in the surface temperature of the fixing roller against passage of paper, the
down sequence rush temperature is increased. (This applies only when the source of paper is the
cassette selected for thick paper in user mode.)

Related Service Mode

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FIX-TEMP
(thick paper mode down sequence start Setting 50cpm 40cpm Stop Resume
temperature) 0 170˚C 165˚C 160˚C 175˚C
1 175˚C 170˚C 165˚C 180˚C
2 180˚C 175˚C 170˚C 185˚C

3 185˚C 180˚C 175˚C 190˚C


4 190˚C 185˚C 180˚C 195˚C
5 195˚C 190˚C 185˚C 200˚C

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CPMKP-SW 0: disables down sequence of thick paper mode.


(thick paper mode down sequence on/off) 1: enables down sequence for thick paper mode
(default)

8-16 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

3. Power Save Mode


A press on the Save Power key on the control panel will lower the control temperature used
during STBY to reduce power consumption.

WMUPR omitted

Save Power Save Power


Power save mode key key
selected in user mode 195˚C 200˚C
ON OFF

STBY SLEEP WMUP STBY

Main heater
(H1)
Sub heater
(H2)

Controlled to 200˚C Controlled to 200˚C


Temperature
control according
to saving rate
200˚C
195˚C

180˚C
Saving by 10%

The Save Power key is


155˚C
turned off, returning to
Saving by 25%
normal temperature.
110˚C
Saving by 50%

Figure 8-304 Sequence of Operations

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-17
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

D. Error Detection
The fixing temperature control mechanism is monitored for the following:
[1] Temperature control error by the main thermistor (TH1; see the sequence charts on the
pages that follow)
[2] Sensor error by the sub thermistor (TH2; see the sequence charts on the pages that follow)
[3] Overheating error by the thermal switch (TP1)

J508B Voltage suited to the Voltage suited to the


1 temperature detected by the temperature detected by
main thermistor the sub thermistor

M-TEMP
7
0V
8
S-TEMP
9
0V
10
Upper fixing roller

20

Sub thermistor
DC controller PCB

Main
heater Main thermistor
J505A
1
Sub heater Thermal switch
At 223˚C, the AC
MHDTC line is turned off
9
MH-ON RLY
10
SH-ON
11 Relay
SHDTC SSR
12
0V
13
24V Front door
14

When the sub heater is powered, '0'.


When '1', the main heater turns on.
J512A
1
When '0', the main switch is turned off.

24V
13
SW-OFF Main switch
14

Figure 8-305 Construction of the Control System

8-18 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

[1]E000
If the temperature detected by the main thermistor does
not increase to 70˚C or higher within 5 min after the
control panel power switch has been turned on.
Main power Control panel power Main power
switch ON switch ON switch OFF

SLEEP WMUP

Fixing motor 3 sec


(M3)
Main heater
(H1)
Sub heater
(H2)

3.5 min

70˚C
Main thermistor detection
temperature

Figure 8-306 Sequence of Operations (error detection)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-19
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

[1]E001
If the main thermistor or the sub thermistor
has detected 230˚C or higher for 2 sec.
Control panel
Main power power Main power
switch ON switch ON 195˚C switch OFF

SLEEP WMUP WMUPR STBY

Fixing motor 3 sec


(M3)
Main heater
(H1)
Sub heater
(H2)
2 sec

230˚C

195˚C

Figure 8-307 Sequence of Operations (error detection)

8-20 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

[1]E002
[1] The main thermistor does not detect
100˚C within 3 min after it has detected 70˚C.
[2] The main thermistor does not detect
Control panel
100˚C within 3 min after it has detected 100˚C.
Main power power switch Main power
switch ON ON switch OFF

SLEEP WMUP

Fixing motor 3 sec


(M3)
Main heater
(H1)
Sub heater
(H2)

150˚C

100˚C

70˚C

2.5 min

Figure 8-308 Sequence of Operations (error detection)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-21
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

[1]E003
If the main thermistor detects 70˚C for 2
sec or more after it has detected 100˚C.
Main power Control panel power Main power
switch ON switch ON switch OFF

SLEEP WMUP

Fixing motor 3 sec


(M3)
Main heater
(H1)
Sub heater
(H2)

100˚C

70˚C

2 sec

Figure 8-309 Sequence of Operations (error detection)

8-22 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

[2]E001
If the difference of readings between main
thermistor and sub thermistor is 50˚C or more.
Copy Start
key

STBY PRINT

Fixing motor
(H3)
Main heater
(H1)

Sub heater

200˚C

50˚C

Figure 8-310 Sequence of Operations (error detection)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-23
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

IV . CONTROLLING THE FIXING ROLLER BIAS


A. Outline
The fixing roller bias is controlled for the following:
[1] Fixing roller bias constant voltage

Figure 8-401 shows the construction of the control system used to control the fixing roller bias.

Relay PCB

24 VH
24 VH
When '1', high-voltage output is ready.

GND
GND
1 2 3 4

J510A J723
0V
Fixing roller
1 16
HVDC-EN
2 15
3 14
4 13
High-voltage DC PCB

5 12
DC controller PCB

6 11
7 10
8 9
9 8
10 7 J733
11 6 1
DC 600V
12 5 2

13 4
14 3
FGD-ON 2
15
16 1

When '1', the fixing roller bias turns on.

Figure 8-401 Construction of the Control System

8-24 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

V . DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go
through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier's parts while keeping the
following in mind:

1. ! Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work.

2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted.

3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. Do not leave out the toothed washer that comes with one of the mounting screws on the rear
cover to protect against static electricity.

5. Do not leave out the washer that comes with the screw used for the grounding wire and the
varistor to ensure electrical continuity.

6. Do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed, unless otherwise mentioned.

7. Turn off the front cover switch or the power switch before sliding out the duplexing feeding
unit or the fixing assembly.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-25
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

A. Fixing Assembly
1. Removing the Fixing Assembly [1]
1) Slide the fixing/feeding unit halfway out
the copier. [2]
2) While pushing on the stopper [2] on both
ends of the fixing/feeding unit rail [1],
slide the fixing/feeding unit farther out.

[2]
[1]

Figure 8-A501

3) While pushing the releasing lever link [3]


found at the rear of the fixing/feeding unit,
shift up the fixing/feeding unit releasing
lever [4], and remove the screw [5] to de-
tach.

Caution:
When setting the fixing/feeding unit in [3]
the copier, be sure to mount the releasing
lever, and shift the lever while pressing
the releasing lever link.

[4] [5]
Figure 8-A502

8-26 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

4) Remove the two screws [6], pre-transfer [7] [6]


charging assembly cover [7], and fixing
roller knob [8]; then, remove the two
screws [9], and detach the fixing/feeding
unit cover [10].

[9]
[9]
[6]
[8] [10]

Figure 8-A503

5) Disconnect the four connectors [11], and [12] [11] [13]


remove the three screws [12]; then, detach
the fixing motor [13].

[12] [12] [11]

Figure 8-A504

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-27
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

6) Open the fixing/delivery assembly, and [17] [15]


remove the screw [14]; then, holding the [14]
front [16] and the rear [17] of the fixing
assembly [15], detach the fixing assembly
from the copier.

[16]
Figure 8-A505

8-28 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

B. Fixing Roller Cleaning


Assembly
1. Removing the Fixing Cleaning
Belt
1) Slide the fixing/feeding unit halfway out;
then, release the stoppers on both rails,
and slide the unit farther out.
2) Remove the pre-transfer charging assem-
bly cover, fixing feeding unit releasing le-
ver, and fixing roller knob.
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fix-
ing assembly upper cover [2].
[1] [2]

Figure 8-B501

4) Remove the two screws [3] used to secure


the fixing cleaning belt assembly, and [3]
open the top of the fixing cleaning belt as-
sembly upward.

[3]
Figure 8-B502

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-29
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

5) While pushing the cleaning belt feeding [6]


roller [4] and the take-up roller [5] toward
the rear, detach the cleaning belt [6].

[5] [4]

Figure 8-B503

Caution:
When cleaning the silicone oil pan, be [7]
sure to remove the silicone oil collecting
in the oil pan [7] found under the clean-
ing belt feeding roller.

Figure 8-B504

8-30 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

2. Mounting the Fixing Cleaning [3] [1]


Belt
Mount the fixing cleaning belt by revers-
ing the steps used to remove it.
1) Wind the cleaning belt [2] around the
cleaning belt take-up roller [1] two to
three times, and mount it so that the arm
guide plate [3] at the front is on the outside
of the take-up roller.
At this time, check to make sure that the
area of contact with the roller is impreg-
nated with oil.

[2]
Figure 8-B505

Caution:
Check the fixing cleaning belt for skew, Take up roller
wrapping, and wrinkling. Further, be
sure that the winding direction and the
mounting orientation are as indicated.

Cleaning belt
feeding roller

Figure 8-B506

2) After mounting the fixing cleaning belt,


move the plunger [4] of the cleaning belt
feeding solenoid into the direction of the
arrow.

Caution:
If you have replaced the cleaning belt, be
sure to return the setting under
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-
WEB to '0' in service mode.

[4]

Figure 8-B507

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-31
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

C. Fixing Heater and Control [3] [1] [3]


Parts
1. Removing the Main/Sub Heater
1) Remove the fixing assembly from the
copier.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the rear terminal cover [2]; then, pull out
the two fastons [3].

[1] [2]

Figure 8-C501

3) Remove the two screws [4], and detach


the heater positioning plate (rear) [5]. [5] [4]

[4]
Figure 8-C502

8-32 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

4) Remove the two fastons [6] at the front, [8] [7] [6]
and detach the screw [7]; then, detach the
heater positioning plate (front) [8].

Figure 8-C503

5) Remove the main/sub heater.

2. Mounting the Main/Sub Heater


Mount the fixing heaters by reversing the
steps used to remove with the following in
mind:
a. Do not touch the surface of the heater.
b. Mount both heaters so that the side with
the longer harness (from the terminal) is at
the front.
c. Viewing from the front of the fixing as-
sembly, mount the main heater [1] on the [2] [1]
right and the sub heater [2] on the left.

Figure 8-C504

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-33
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

3. Removing the Thermal Switch [1] [2] [3] [1]


1) Remove the fixing assembly from the
copier.
2) Detach the fixing cleaning belt; then, re-
move the two screws [1], oil pan [2], and
fixing harness cover [3].

Figure 8-C505

3) Remove the faston [4]; then, remove the [6] [5] [4] [7] [5]
two screws [5], and detach the electrode
assembly [6] and the thermal switch
holder [7].

Figure 8-C506

4) Remove the four screws [8], and detach


the thermal switch assembly [9].

[8] [9] [8]

Figure 8-C507

8-34 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

5) Remove the two screws [10], and detach


the thermal switch [11].

[10]
[10]

[11]
Figure 8-C508

4. Removing the Main Thermistor


1) Remove the fixing assembly from the [3] [2]
copier.
2) Detach the fixing cleaning belt, and re-
move the oil pan.
3) Remove the fixing harness cover.
4) Disconnect the connector [1] of the ther-
mistor; then, remove the screw [2], and
detach the thermistor assembly [3] by
shifting it to the rear.

Caution:
When shifting the thermistor assembly
to the rear, take care not to damage the
fixing roller.

[1]
Figure 8-C509

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-35
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

5) Remove the two thermistor retaining [4] [5] [4]


springs [4], and remove the main ther-
mistor [5].

Figure 8-C510

5. Removing the Sub Thermistor [2]


1) Slide the fixing assembly out of the
copier.
2) Remove the fixing cleaning belt and the
oil pan.
3) Remove the fixing harness cover.
4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove
the screw [2]; then, remove the sub ther-
mistor assembly [3].

[1] [3]

Figure 8-C511

5) Remove the screw [4], and remove the sub


thermistor [5].

[4] [5]
Figure 8-C512

8-36 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

D. Fixing Roller Assembly


1. Removing the Upper Fixing Roller
1) Remove the fixing assembly from the
copier.
2) Detach the cleaning belt, and clean the oil
pan.
3) Remove the two fixing heaters.
4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the
locking support plate [2] at the front.

[2] [1]

Figure 8-D501

5) Remove the screw [3], and detach the


locking support plate [4] at the rear.

[3] [4]
Figure 8-D502

6) Open the upper fixing unit [5].


[5]

Figure 8-D503

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-37
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

7) Remove the stopper [6] from the front and [6]


the rear.

Figure 8-D504

[6]

Figure 8-D505

8) While paying attention to the thermal


switch and the thermistor, remove the up-
per roller assembly.

8-38 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

9) Remove the C-ring [9] at the front; then, [12]


remove the gear [10], bushing [11], and
bearing [12]. [11]

[10]

[9]

Figure 8-D506
10) Remove the C-ring [13] at the rear; then,
remove the electrode plate [14], spacer [17]
[15], bearing [16], and bushing [17]. [16]
[15]
[14]
[13]

Figure 8-D507
2. Mounting the Upper Fixing Roller
Mount the upper roller by reversing the
steps used to remove it.

Caution: A
a. Remove it while taking care not to
soil or scratch the roller surface;
then, keep the roller in paper.
b. Mount it so that the long cut-off A
shown in Figure 8-D508 is toward
the rear.
c. When mounting it, clean the elec- Figure 8-D508
trode plate [1] and the electrode ter-
minal [2]. [2] [1]

Figure 8-D509

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-39
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

3. Removing the Lower Fixing Roller [1]


1) Remove the fixing assembly from the
copier.
2) Remove the fixing cleaning belt; then,
clean and detach the oil pan.
3) Open the upper fixing unit.
4) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the lower separation claw support plate
[2].

[2] [1]
Figure 8-D510

5) Remove the lower roller [3] from the fix-


ing assembly, and remove the E-rings [4]
and the bearings [5] from both front and
rear.

[4]
[3]

[5]
Figure 8-D511

4. Adjusting the Nip


a. Measuring the Nip
Be sure to wait 15 min or more after the
copier finishes warm-up; then, make 20
A4 copies, and perform the following:

1) Place A3 paper, and select A3 on the con-


trol panel.

8-40 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
of paper.

,


2) Select COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>
NIP-CHK in service mode to discharge
paper.

b. Standards
1) Measure the area shown in Figure 8-
D512.

Note:
a and c are points 10 mm from both ends

2) Check to see if the measurements are as


indicated in Table 8-D501; otherwise,
perform c. "Making Adjustments."

c. Making Adjustments
Feeding
direction

Dimensions

heated.
b

a-c
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

A3
a

Figure 8-D512

Measurements*
7.3mm ± 0.5mm

0.5 mm or less
c

b
Center
of paper

* Be sure both upper and lower rollers are fully

Table 8-D501

1) Remove the fixing assembly from the [1]


copier.
2) Detach the fixing cleaning belt; then,
clean and remove the oil pan.
3) Remove the two fixing heaters.
4) Open the upper fixing unit.
5) Adjust the nip by two adjusting screws [1]
(front and rear).

[1]
Figure 8-D513

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-41
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

E. Separation Claw
Assembly
1. Removing the Upper Separation
Claw
1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the [2]
copier. [1]
2) Release the spring [1] used to open the
fixing/delivery assembly; then, detach the
upper separation claw [2].

Figure 8-E501

2. Removing the Lower Separation


Claw
1) Remove the fixing assembly from the
copier.
2) Remove the two screws, and detach the
lower separation claw assembly together
with the support plate.
3) Remove the spring [1] from the lower
separation claw.
[1]
Figure 8-E502

4) Remove the three screws [2], and detach


the lower separation claw support plate
[3]; then, detach the separation claw.

[2]

[3]
[2]
Figure 8-E503

8-42 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

F. Delivery Assembly
1. Removing the External Delivery
Roller
1) Remove the fixing assembly from the
copier.
2) Remove the three screws [1], and detach
the delivery roller guide [2].

[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
Figure 8-F501

3) Remove the E-ring [3] at the front, and


slide the bearing [4] toward the gear.

[4] [3]

Figure 8-F502

4) Remove the E-ring [5] at the rear, and


slide the bearing [6] to the rear; then, de-
tach the external delivery roller assembly
[7].

[7]

[5] [6]
Figure 8-F503

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-43
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

5) Remove the E-ring [8], one-way gear [9],


and bearing [10]; then, remove the two E-
rings [11], and detach the two rollers [12].

Caution: [12]
Each roller is equipped with a parallel [11]
pin. Take care not to lose it.
[12]
[11]

[10]

[9] [8]
Figure 8-F504

2. Removing the Internal Delivery


Roller
1) Remove the fixing assembly from the
copier.
2) Remove the spring [2], three E-rings [3],
and bushing [4] at the front; then, detach [1] [4] [2] [3] [5]
the drive gear [5].

[3]
Figure 8-F505

8-44 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

3) Remove the E-ring [6] and bushing [7] at


the rear of the shaft; then, detach the inter-
nal delivery roller [1].

[1]

[7]
[6]

Figure 8-F506

3. Removing the Delivery Speed [1]


Switch Clutch
1) Slide out the fixing feeding unit from the
copier.
2) Remove the fixing motor.
3) Remove the three screws [1], and detach
the fixing front support plate [2].

[2] [1]

Figure 8-F507

4) Disconnect the two connectors [3]; then, [4]


remove the two screws [4], and detach the
delivery speed switching clutch [5]. [3]

[4] [5]

Figure 8-F508

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-45
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

G. Paper Sensors
1. Removing the Claw Jam Sensor
1) Remove the fixing assembly from the
copier.
2) Remove the two screws, and detach the
lower separation claw assembly.
3) Detach the claw jam sensor [1] from the
right side of the lower delivery assembly.

[1]

Figure 8-G501

2. Removing the External Delivery


Roller
1) Remove the external delivery roller.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the external delivery sensor assembly [2].

[1] [1]
[2]
Figure 8-G502

3. Removing the Internal Delivery [1] [2]


Sensor
1) Slide out the fixing assembly from the
copier.
2) Open the upper delivery assembly; then, [1]
remove the two screws [1], and detach the
internal delivery sensor [2].

Figure 8-G503

8-46 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM

4. Removing the Reversal Sensor


1) Remove the fixing assembly from the
copier.
2) Open the upper delivery assembly; then,
remove the screw [1], and detach the re-
versal sensor [2].

[2] [1]
Figure 8-G504

5. Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit


Outlet Sensor
1) Remove the screw [1] from the bottom of
the fixing/feeding unit, and detach the fix-
ing/feeding outlet sensor [2].

[1] [2]
Figure 8-G505

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 8-47
CHAPTER 9
EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

This chapter provides descriptions on the auxiliary control operations, functions of


each operation, relationships between electrical and mechanical systems, and
timing at which each associated part is turned on.

I. CONTROL PANEL ...................... 9-1 B. Low Power mode ................. 9-23


A. Outline .................................... 9-1 C. Silence Mode ....................... 9-24
II. DOWNLOADING ........................ 9-2 D. Power Save Mode ............... 9-24
A. Outline .................................... 9-2 VII. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .... 9-25
III. COUNTERS ................................ 9-4 A. External Covers ................... 9-26
IV. FANS ........................................... 9-6 B. Control Panel ....................... 9-30
A. Arrangement, Functions, and C. Fans ..................................... 9-34
Error Codes............................ 9-6 D. Drive Assembly .................... 9-48
B. Sequence of Operations ........ 9-8 E. Switches ............................... 9-62
V. POWER SUPPLY ..................... 9-10 F. DC Controller PCB ............... 9-65
A. Outline of the Power Supply G. Power Supply Unit ............... 9-66
............................................. 9-10 H. High-Voltage Transformer (AC)
B. Turning On the Power.......... 9-12 ............................................. 9-67
C. Rated Outputs of the DC Power I. High-Voltage Transformer (DC)
Supply PCB.......................... 9-16 ............................................. 9-67
D. Protective Functions ............ 9-17 J. Relay PCB ........................... 9-68
E. Backup Battery .................... 9-18 K. MFC PCB ............................. 9-68
VI. OTHERS ................................... 9-21 L. Routing the Belt ................... 9-71
A. Sleep Mode .......................... 9-21

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

I . CONTROL PANEL
A. Outline
The copier's control panel consists of the PCBs shown in Figure 9-101 and a liquid crystal
display (LCD) panel capable of showing images using 320 × 240 dots.
Control panel

LCD Control
Control panel PCB panel PCB
inverter PCB (LCD) (keys and LEDs)

Control panel CPU PCB Control panel


power switch
PCB
• Monitoring key inputs (keypad,
function keys) CPU LCD contrast
adjustment
• Controlling buzzer sound PCB
• Turning on/off control panel
LEDs
System
CPU
motherboard
DC controller
PCB
• Controls data communication MFC
• Supplies data (display data) CPU
PCB
Adjusts the LCD contrast.

Image
CPU
processor
PCB

Figure 9-101 Functional Construction

Related Service Mode

COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL> Checks the LCD for missing dots.


LCD-CHK
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL> Starts a check on the control panel LEDs (activation).
LED-CHK
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL> Ends a check on the control panel LEDs (de-activation).
LED-OFF
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL> Starts a check on key inputs.
KEY-CHK
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL> Adjusts coordinates of the touch panel.
TOUCHCHK

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-1
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

II . DOWNLOADING
A. Outline
The copier allows the functions shown in Table 9-201 when it is connected to a computer with
a bi-Centronics interface.

PCB Element Downloading Uploading


MFC PCB Flash ROM Yes No
Backup RAM Yes Yes
Image processor PCB Flash ROM Yes No
Backup RAM Yes Yes

Table 9-201 Functions

Use the switch behind the copier's inside cover to change between downloading and uploading.
For details of work, see VII. "Upgrading" in Chapter 13.

Switch for downloading

COPY LOAD

Figure 9-201 Connectors and Switches

Switch position Copier operation Remarks


LOAD Downloading/uploading No copying operation
COPY Copying

Table 9-202 Operation and Switch Position

9-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

Blank Page

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-3
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

III . COUNTERS
The copier is equipped with counters for counting sheets according to the type of output. See
Figures 9-301 and -302 for the arrangement of counters and sensors associated with these counters
(explanations on how the counters operate by country follow).

[4] [5]

[1]

[3]
[2]

Figure 9-301 Locations of Counters

Finisher Copier

PI6

PS10
S3

PS14

Figure 9-302 Arrangement of Sensors

9-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

[F13-5611, F13-5614, F13-5631, F13-5691, F13-5651, F13-5671, F13-5661, F13-5661,


F13-5641, F13-5601]
Count increment
Ref. Counter Count
w/ finisher w/o finisher
[1] Copier Increments the count per [Single-Sided Image] [Single-Sided
copier output. PI6 or S3 of the Image]
[2] Printer Increments per printer output. finisher PS10
[Double-Sided Image] [Double-Sided
[3] 1st side: PS14 Image]
[4] Remote Diagnostic The count is incremented for 2nd side: PI6 or S3 of 1st side: PS14
Device II (100/120 copy output. (The count is not the finisher 2nd side: PS10
(UL) -V areas only) incremented for printer output.
Copy Data However, it is incremented for
Controller-A1 an output using the mail box
requiring a card.)
[5] Control Card V The count is incremented for By the pickup start signal (PCB
(accessory) copy output. (The count is not internal signal).
incremented for printer output. Reference:
However, it is incremented for The pickup start signal is generated
an output using the mail box more or less at the same time as the
requiring a card.) activation of each deck, cassette, and
manual feed tray clutch.

Table 9-301 Counter Operations 1


[F13-5621, F13-5681]
Count increment
Ref. Counter Count
w/ finisher w/o finisher
[1] Copier Increments the count per [Single-Sided Image] [Single-Sided
copier output. PI6 or S3 of the Image]
[2] Printer Increments per printer output. finisher PS10
[Double-Sided Image] [Double-Side
[3] Copier Increments per large-size 1st side: PS14 Image]
output. 2nd side: PI6 or S3 of 1st side: PS14
the finisher 2nd side: PS10
[4] Remote Diagnostic The count is incremented for
Device II (100/120 copy output. (The count is not
(UL) -V areas only) incremented for printer output.
Copy Data However, it is incremented for
Controller-A1 an output using the mail box
requiring a card.)
[5] Control Card V The count is incremented for By the pickup start signal (PCB
(accessory) copy output. (The count is not internal signal).
incremented for printer output. Reference:
However, it is incremented for The pickup start signal is generated
an output using the mail box more or less at the same time as the
requiring a card.) activation of each deck, cassette, and
manual feed tray clutch.

Table 9-302 Counter Operations 2

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-5
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

IV . FANS
A. Arrangement, Functions, and Error Codes
Table 9-401 shows the names and functions of the copier's fans and error codes associated with
the fans.

2-speed control Error


Notation Name Functions
(voltage) code
FM1 Primary charging assembly Prevents soiling of the wire in the Yes (24/12v) E824
fan primary charging assembly.

FM2 Fixing assembly heat Discharges heat from around the Yes (24/12v) E805
discharge fan fixing assembly.

FM3 Scanner cooling fan Cools the scanner Yes (24/12v) E226

FM4 Stream reading fan Cools the copyboard glass in No (24v)


stream reading

FM5 Laser driver Cools the laser driver PCB No (24v) E121

FM6 De-curling fan Cools copy paper Yes (24/12v) No

FM7 Feeding fan Draws copy paper to the feeding Yes (24/12v) No
belt.

FM8 Drum fan Draws and removes ozone from Yes (24/18v) E820
around the drum and stray toner.

FM9 Inverter cooling fan Cools the control panel inverter No (24v) E251
assembly.

FM10 Pre-transfer charging Discharges ozone from around the Yes (24/12v) E823
assembly fan pre-transfer charging assembly.

FM11 Power supply cooling fan 1 Cools the DC power supply PCB Yes (24/12v) E804

FM12 Power supply cooling fan 2 Cools the DC power supply PCB Yes (24/12v) E804

FM13 Separation fan Facilitates separation of copy Yes (24/12v) E830


paper from the drum.

FM14 Laser scanner motor Cools the laser scanner motor, and No (24v) E111
cooling fan insulates it from the fixing
assembly.

Table 9-401 Fans

9-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

The fans are arranged as shown in Figure 9-401; the arrows show the direction of air current:

FM8
FM9

FM5 FM13 FM4


FM2
FM1 FM10
FM7
FM14
FM3

FM6
FM11

FM12

Figure 9-401 Arrangement of the Fans

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-7
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

B. Sequence of Operations
1. 2-Speed Control
Some of the copier's fans are designed for 2-speed control (Table 9-401). The speed is switched
by the voltage switching circuit of each fan by switching voltage levels.
Some fans are controlled according to the state of the printer, while some are controlled by the
state of the scanning lamp.

DC controller PCB
24V 12/18V

Full-speed 24V or 12/18V


signal
Voltage Clock signal
CPU Half-speed
signal switching circuit

Fan

In the case of FM2, the voltage is reduced to 18 V during half-speed rotation.

Figure 9-402 2-Speed Control Block Diagram

9-8 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

2. Sequence of Operations
The fans operate as follows, ones controlled according to the state of the printer and ones
controlled by the state of the scanning lamp:
(FM3, FM4, FM11, and FM12 operate based on the state of both the printer unit and the scan-
ning lamp, and the control mechanism for higher speed is used for the chart.)

a. Fans Operating According to the State of the Printer Unit


Warm-up: Until the temperature of the fixing assembly reaches 195˚C.
Main power Intial multiple rotation: After the temperature of the fixing assembly has
switch ON reached 200˚C until potential control ends.
Control panel
switch ON Initialmultiple rotation Pre-heating
Printer unit Warm-up Standby Copying After copying Jam Door open Error

Primary charging 15 min


assembly fan (FM1) yyyy yyyyyyy
,,,, ,,,,,,, yyyyyyy
,,,,,,, yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Fixing assembly heat
,,,, yyyyyyy
yyyy ,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
discharge fan (FM2) ,,,,
yyyy
15 min
,,,,
yyyy ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy
,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
Scanner cooling fan 15 min
(FM3) yyyy yyyyyyy
,,,, ,,,,,,,
,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy
,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Laser driver cooling ,,,,
yyyy
15 min
,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy
,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy
,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
fan (FM5)
De-curling fan (FM6)
yyyy
,,,,
15 min yyyyyyy
,,,,,,, yyyyyyy
,,,,,,, yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Feeding fan (FM7) ,,,,
yyyy ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
,,,,
yyyy
15 min
,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Drum fan (FM8) ,,,,
yyyy ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy ,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,
yyyy ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy ,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
Pre-transfer charging 15 min
assembly fan (FM10) yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Power supply cooling 15 min
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,15 min
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
fan 1/2 (FM11, FM12) yyyy
,,,, ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,, yyyyyyy
yyyy ,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
Separation fan (FM13) ,,,,,,
yyyyyy
15 min

Laser scanner motor


,,,,,,
yyyyyy
15 min
cooling fan (FM14)
yyyy
,,,,
: full speed. ,,,,: half speed.
yyyy

Figure 9-403

b. Fans Operating According to the State of the Scanning Lamp

Main power
switch ON
Scanning lamp Off On Pre-heating Error

Scanning lamp cooling fan 15 min


,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,, yyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,
(FM3) ,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy ,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyy ,,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy ,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyy ,,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyyyyyy
Stream reading fan (FM4)
Inverter cooling fan (FM9)

Power supply cooling fan 15 min


,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,, yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
1/2 (FM11, FM12) yyyyyyy
,,,,,,, yyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,, yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
yyyyyyy
,,,,,,, yyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,, yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
: full speed. yyyyy
,,,,,
,,,,,: half speed.
yyyyy
Figure 9-404

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-9
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

V . POWER SUPPLY
A. Outline of the Power Supply
The copier's DC power is supplied by the DC power supply PCB and the relay PCB.

PCB Function
DC power supply • Generates DC power from AC power.
PCB • Protects against overcurrent.

Relay PCB • Generates DC power from DC power (24Và18V)


• Distributes DC power to loads.
• Protects each load against overcurrent.

Table 9-501 Major Functions

9-10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

Figure 9-501 shows how the copier's power supplies are arranged:

Heater switch (SW3)


AC power unit
Door switch (SW2) Drum heater (H3)

temperature
control PCB
Heater
driver
Line PCB

Drum
Leakage noise C A
AC input breaker filter
RLY2 B Cassette heater (H4)
ELCB

LF1

RLY1 Output for


Non- deck heater
100V Service outlet Main power (accessory)
model for finisher supply Fixing Main heater (H1)
(accessory) switch DC power heater
supply PCB driver
Control PCB Sub heater (H2)
panel DC controller
5V PCB
CPU
PCB

motor (M3)
Duplexing
Control 5V

assembly
panel ·Motor Main Drum Pickup
12V

Fixing
switch ·Solenoid 3.3V/5V motor motor motor

unit
·Sensor 24V -8V/8V (M1) (M0) (M2)
B 12V/15V
A C 24V/38V
24V

5V
12V
18V
24V
38V

5V
24V

38V

38V

38V

38V
Relay
PCB
3.3V
5V
12V

38V

-8V
5V
8V
-8V
3.3V
5V
24V
-12V
5V
12V
38V

3.3V

24V
38V

24V

3.3V
5V
8V
15V

24V
38V
(accessory)
Laser Scanner
Intensity
Inverter

scanner Laser Image


control

System mother- driver processor motor


PCB

motor ADF CCD PCB


PCB

board driver
driver PCB 1 PCB 3.5K
PD
PCB
PCB
-8V
5V
8V
3.3V
5V
12V
3.3V
5V
12V

24V
38V

MFC Printer Laser HV-DC1 Intensity Scanning


PCB board driver PCB sensor lamp
(accessory) PCB 2 PCB heater
24V
5V
12V

HV-AC
Image PCB
server
(hard disk)

Figure 9-501 Power Supply Block Diagram

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-11
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

B. Turning On the Power


1. Outline
The copier's power output is controlled by the main power supply switch and control panel
power switch, or signals from the printer board (accessory).

Line Main
Leakage noise power
breaker filter switch
ELCB

LF1

Relay PCB
AC
input Switching Overcurrent
1 Output
DC power supply PCB J1706 circuit 1 detection
2
1 J1706 circuit
5V
Converter 2
circuit 1 J1704 12V Switching
1 1 Output
3.3V/+8V circuit 2
3.3V/5V/+8V J1704
-8V/12V/15V -8V/15V
x Output
J1703 J1703
1 1
2 2 Overcurrent
Converter 24V detection Output
circuit 2 3 3 circuit
1 38V 1 MSW5 Manual feed
24V/38V
J1702 J1702 tray door
1
Switching 3 24V 3 switch
3
circuit J1707 J1701
Door switch
Sequence
control circuit Remote signal
1 1 control assembly
J1707 J1701 4
7
3
J1719 J1723
Control panel POWER_IN A-REMOTE
A11

B12

Switching
CPU PCB
Control circuit 2 J505
J503 DC When the remote signal is received, the
panel controller
switch PCB converter circuit 2, switching circuit 1, and
A31
J525 switching circuit 2 on the DC power supply
System
Printer
mother
MFC PCB are turned on.
A31

WAKE UP
PCB PCB
PCB
J1407 Signal from the control panel power switch

Signal from the printer PCB : Power supply line


: Signal line
: Output when only the main power
switch is on.
: Output upon arrival of the signal
from the control panel switch or
the printer PCB.

Figure 9-502 Power-On Sequence

9-12 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

Table 9-502 shows the output of the power supply in relation to combinations of the printer
board signal and the states of the main power switch and the control panel switch.

Control panel
Main power Power supply
switch or printer Remarks
switch output
board signal
OFF OFF None If the heater switch is on, the drum heater and
the cassette heater are supplied with power
(AC).
heater switch (SW3)

OFF ON

ON OFF 3.3V* *Supplied only to the following PCBs:


5V* 3.3V: printer PCB (accessory)
+8V 5V: printer PCB (accessory)
-8V DC controller PCB
12V* 12V: printer PCB (accessory)
15V
ON ON All

Table 9-502 Power Supply and Switch Operation

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-13
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

2. Power Supply at Main Power Switch-On

DC power OFF
Control supply PCB RLY1
panel 5V Fixing assembly
CPU DC controller To heater
PCB PCB
5V 3.3V

Duplexing

assembly
Control
panel ·Motor 5V Main Drum Pickup
12V

Fixing
-8V

motor
power ·Solenoid motor motor motor

(M3)
8V

unit
switch ·Sensor 24V (M1) (M0) (M2)
12V 24V
15V 38V
5V
12V
18V
24V
38V

5V
24V

38V

38V

38V

38V
Relay
PCB
3.3V
5V
12V

3.3V
5V
12V

38V

-8V
5V
8V
-8V
3.3V
5V
24V
-12V
5V
12V
38V

3.3V

24V
38V
24V
3.3V
5V
8V
15V

24V

24V
38V
38V control PCB

(accessory)
Laser Scanner Inverter
scanner Laser Image Heater
motor CCD
Intensity
System driver processor PCB driver
motherboard motor driver PCB
PCB 1 PCB PCB

3.5K
driver PCB

PD
PCB
-8V
5V
8V
3.3V
5V
12V
3.3V
5V
12V

24V

Scanning
Intensity

MFC Printer Laser HV-DC1 ADF


sensor

heater

PCB board driver PCB


lamp
PCB

(accessory) PCB 2
24V
5V
12V

HV-AC
Image PCB
server
(hard disk)

Figure 9-503 Power Supply Block Diagram

9-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

3. Power Supply at Main Power Switch-On and Control Panel Switch-On

ON
DC power RLY1
Control supply PCB
panel 5V DC controller Fixing assembly
CPU To heater
PCB PCB

Duplexing

assembly
Control 5V 3.3V Main Drum Pickup

Fixing
5V

motor
panel ·Motor motor motor motor

(M3)
12V -8V

unit
power ·Solenoid (M1) (M0) (M2)
switch ·Sensor 24V 8V
12V 24V
15V 38V * * * * *

5V
24V

38V

38V

38V

38V
5V
12V
18V
24V
38V

Relay
PCB

*
3.3V
5V
12V
3.3V
5V
12V

38V

-8V
5V
8V
-8V
3.3V
5V
24V
-12V
5V
12V
38V

3.3V

24V
38V
24V
3.3V
5V
8V
15V

24V

24V
38V
38V control PCB

(accessory)
Laser Laser Image Scanner Inverter
scanner motor Heater

Intensity
System driver processor PCB CCD
motherboard motor PCB 1 PCB driver PCB driver

3.5K
driver PCB PCB

PD
PCB
-8V
5V
8V
3.3V
5V
12V
3.3V
5V
12V

24V

MFC Printer Laser HV-DC1 Intensity Scanning ADF


PCB board driver PCB sensor lamp
(accessory) PCB 2 PCB heater
*
5V
12V

24V

Image
server HV-AC
(hard disk) PCB
Note: The output with the asterisk (*) is turned on/off
by the relay (RLY1) on the relay PCB.

Figure 9-504 Power Supply Block Diagram

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-15
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

C. Rated Outputs of the DC Power Supply PCB


Output (V) 3.3 5 +8 -8 12 15 24 38
Connector J1704-3 J1706-1 J1705-5 J1705-7 J1704-1 J1705-9 J1701-3 J1703-1 J1702-1
No. J1706-2 J1703-2
J1703-3
Output
voltage
+7 +10
tolerance ±5 ±4 ±10 ±10 ±10 ±5
-10 -7
(%)
Rated
current 4.5 8 0.6 0.3 2.1 0.5 0.3 12.0 6.5
(A)
Overcurrent
protection 4.5 to 5.0 22 to 25 1.8 to 2.5 1.2 to 2.0 5.0 to 6.0 1.5 to 2.5 23 to 24 13 to 14
level (A)
Note: However, the following applies for the AC input: for 100-V model, 85 to 110 V; for 120-V
model, 97.8 to 132 V; for 230-V model, 187 to 264 V.

Table 9-503 Rated Outputs

9-16 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

D. Protective Functions
The copier is designed to automatically stop the output of the DC power supply as soon as the
overcurrent protective mechanism turns on.
If an overcurrent is detected by the overcurrent detection circuit A, outputs [1] and [2] are
stopped; this is to prevent malfunction of the copier, as output [1] is used by the logic system.
If the overcurrent detection circuit B detects an overcurrent, output [2] is stopped.

DC power supply PCB Output [1] Relay PCB

5V Overcurrent
detection
circuit A
12V
Converter
circuit 1 Overcurrent 3.3V
protection
+8V
3.3V/5V/+8V circuit 1
-8V/12V/15V -8V
15V

Output [2]
Overcurrent
Converter Overcurrent detection
circuit 2 protection 38V circuit B
circuit 2
Output stop signal 2

24V/38V 24V
Output stop signal 1

J1701 Overcurrent
Sequence detection signal 2
5
control Overcurrent detection signal 1
circuit 4

Outputs [1] and [2] are stopped.

Output [2] is stopped.

Figure 9-505 Protective Function Block Diagram

Detection by Copier operation Resetting


Overcurrent Stops outputs [1] and [2] Turn off the main power switch, and remove the
detection circuit A from the DC power supply cause; then, leave the machine alone for about 3
PCB. min, and turn on the main power switch.

Overcurrent Stops output [2] from the Remove the cause, and turn off and then on the
detection circuit B DC power supply PCB. control panel power switch.

Table 9-504 Protective Functions

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-17
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

E. Backup Battery
The copier's MFC PCB and image processor are equipped with a lithium battery for backing up
data needed as when the power plug is disconnected.

1. MFC PCB

Uses • Drives the clock inside the copier.


• Retains the job counter readings.
• Retains the contents shown in user mode. (Table 9-507)
• Retains contents shown in service mode. (Table 9-506)
Life • About 5 yr (with the power plug disconnected)
Replacement • When the MFC PCB is replaced (recharging not possible)
After replacement • Enter the values on the service label.

Table 9-505 Backup Battery

Contents Retained for Service Mode

OPTION >BODY MODEL-SZ OPTION >CST U1-NAME


U2-NAME
OPTION>USER COPY-LIM
U3-NAME
SLEEP
U4-NAME
WEB-DISP
CST-U1
DATE-DSP
CST-U2
MB-CCV
CST-U3
PM-DENS
CST-U4

Table 9-506

9-18 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

Contents Retained for User Mode

CUSTOM • Sets the buzzer. CUSTOM • Selects print photo mode.


COMMON • Turns on/off the cassette auto COPY • Enables feeder manual feed
SETTINGS select mechanism. SETTINGS auto start.
• Sets the special tray. • Changes fit-to-page mode.
• Selects printing priority. • Enables/disables original
• Changes power save mode. orientation auto detection.
• Enables/disables inch input. • Change standard mode.
• Selects paper icons. TIMER • Changes auto sleep time.
• Sets system control SETTINGS • Changes auto clear time.
management IDs. • Changes low-power mode
• Manage ID by group. shift time.
CUSTOM • Set Standard KEY 1,2 • Changes silent mode shift
COPY • Set AUTO ORIENTAITION time.
SETTINGS • Sets the weekly timer.
ADJUSTMENT/ • Zoom fine adjustment
CLEANING

Table 9-507

2. Image Processor PCB

Uses • Retains counter readings.


• Retains contents shown in user mode. (Table 9-510)
• Retains contents shown in service mode. (Table 9-509)
Life • About 5 yr (with the power plug disconnected)
Replacement • When the image processor PCB is replaced (recharging is
not possible)
After replacement • Enter the values recorded on the service label.

Table 9-508 Back-Up Battery

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-19
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

Contents Retained for Service Mode

COPIER> COPIER> COPIER>


ADJUST>LAMP L-DATA ADJUST>HV-PRI GRID OPTION>BODY SCANSLCT
AE AE-TBL HV-TR TR-N1 OHP-TEMP
TR-N2 PM-RD-MD
ADJ-XY ADJ-X OHP-CNT
ADJ-Y PRE-TR
CNT-W/HM
ADJ-S HV-SP SP-N1 PR-SEL
CCD GAIN-E SP-N2 CNT-W/PR
GAIN-O FEED-ADJ REGIST FIX-TMPI
OFSET-E ADJ-REFE TRSW-P-B
OFSET-O SP-MODE
CST-ADJ C3-STMTR
SH-TRGT PR-D-SEL
C3-A4R
LASER PVE-OFST C4-STMTR USER SIZE-DET
LA-DELAY C4-A4R CST P-SZ-C1
LA-PWR-A MF-A4R P-SZ-C2
LA-PWR-B MF-A6R C1-DWSW
IP-DELAY MF-A4 C2-DWSW
DEVELOP DE-DC C3-LVOL DK-DWSW
DE-NO-DC C3-HVOL C3-DWSW
DE-OFST C4-LVOL C4-DWSW
C4-HVOL
DENS DENS-ADJ ACC DK-P
COPIER>
BLANK BLANK-T OPTION>BODY PO-CNT ACC>
BLANK-B TRNSG-SW FEEDER> STRD-S
FIX-TEMP ADJUST STRD-L
V-CONT EPOTOFST
VL-OFST CPMKP-SW OPTION DOC-F-SW
VD-OFST IDL-MODE SIZE-SW
FUZZY SORTER> BLNK-SW
SCANSLCT ADJUST

Table 9-509

Contents Retained for User Mode

Adjustment/cleaning • Changes middle binding position.


• Changes double stapling width.

Table 9-510

! Caution:
• Replace the lithium battery only with the one listed in the Parts Catalog.
• Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.
• The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated.
• Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of it in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of chil-
dren and discard any used battery promptly.

9-20 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

VI . OTHERS
A. Sleep Mode
1. Outline
The copier is provided with sleep mode, in which power consumption is reduced in standby
state by limiting the destinations of power. (Only the main power supply switch is on.)
The copier will automatically shift to sleep mode when standby state continues for a specific
period of time*.
*May be changed in user mode.

Related User Mode

Changing auto sleep time 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60*, 90 min; 2, 3, 4 hr
*Factory default.

DC power OFF
supply PCB RLY1
Control
panel 5V Fixing assembly
CPU DC controller To heater
PCB PCB
5V 3.3V
Duplexing

assembly
Control
panel ·Motor 5V Main Drum Pickup
12V
Fixing

-8V
motor
power ·Solenoid motor motor motor
(M3)
8V
unit

switch ·Sensor 24V (M1) (M0) (M2)


12V 24V
15V 38V
5V
12V
18V
24V
38V

5V
24V

38V

38V

38V

38V
Relay
PCB
3.3V
5V
12V

3.3V
5V
12V

38V

-8V
5V
8V
-8V
3.3V
5V
24V
-12V
5V
12V
38V

3.3V

24V
38V
24V
3.3V
5V
8V
15V

24V

24V
38V
38V control PCB

(accessory)

Laser Scanner Inverter


scanner Laser Image Heater
motor CCD
Intensity

System driver processor PCB driver


motherboard motor driver PCB
PCB 1 PCB PCB
3.5K

driver PCB
PD

PCB
-8V
5V
8V
3.3V
5V
12V
3.3V
5V
12V

24V

Scanning
Intensity

MFC Printer Laser HV-DC1 ADF


sensor

heater

PCB board driver PCB


lamp
PCB

(accessory) PCB 2
24V
5V
12V

HV-AC
Image PCB
server
(hard disk)

Figure 9-601 Power Supply in Sleep Mode

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-21
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

2. Operation
a. Shift from Standby to Sleep Mode
The timer on the MFC PCB keeps track of lapses of time, and it issues a sleep mode shift
command when a specific period of time passes. In response to the sleep shift command, the DC
controller PCB causes the DC_POWER_OFF signal to go '0' and the A_REMOTE signal to go '0'.
In response to the A_REMOTE signal=0, the relay circuit switches the power supply to sleep
mode.

Keeps track of lapses of


time for sleep mode.

When the signal goes '0',


Sleep mode shift command shift to sleep mode.

DC_POWER_OFF
Image
MFC CPU
processor
PCB IC18
PCB

Control
A-REMOTE
A11

B12
panel Switching 3 Remote signal
CPU PCB circuit J1719 control assembly
Control J505
panel power J503 DC
switch controller Relay PCB
PCB A31
J525
Printer
System MFC
B31

PCB
motherboard PCB
(accessory)
J1407

Figure 9-602 Shift to Sleep Mode

Reference:

100V/20A 100V/15A
120V model 230V model
model model
Standby power consumption
(Wh) 357 355 335 330

Sleep mode power consumption


12 12 12 16
(Wh)
The heater switch is off, and printer mode is not available.

9-22 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

b. Return to Standby
The copier returns to standby state in response to the control panel power switch or the signal
from the printer PCB (accessory).

When the POWER_IN signal or the WAKE_UP


signal is received, the DC_POWER_OFF signal
goes '1', generating the A-REMOTE signal.

DC_POWER_OFF
MFC Image CPU When the remote signal is received,
PCB processor IC18 the copier shifts to standby state.
PCB

Control panel POWER_IN A-REMOTE


A11

B12
Switching 3 Remote signal
CPU PCB control
Control circuit J505 J1719
J503 DC assembly
panel controller
power switch Relay PCB
PCB
A31
J525
Printer System
B31

MFC WAKE UP
PCB motherboard
(accessory) PCB
Signal from the control panel power switch
J1407

Signal from the printer PCB

Figure 9-603 Return to Standby

B. Low Power mode


In low power mode, the power to the fixing heater in standby is cut to reduce power consump-
tion during standby.

Related User Mode

Changing the shift time to low power 10, 15*, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 90 min; 2, 3, 4 hr
consumption mode *Factory default.

Reference:
100V/20A 100V/15A
120V model 230V model
model model
Standby power consumption
(Wh) 359 355 335 330

Low power consumption mode


158 155 141 135
power consumption (Wh)
The heater switch is off, and printer mode is not available.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-23
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

C. Silence Mode
In silence mode, the laser scanner motor revolution is reduced (3/4) in standby state.
For details, see IV. "Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor" in Chapter 5.

Related User Mode

TIME UNTIL UNIT QUIETS DOWN None; 1* to 9 min (1-min increments)


*Factory setting.

D. Power Save Mode


In power save mode, the copier switches the control temperature for the fixing heater, thereby
reducing the power consumption during standby state.
For details, see "Cortrolling the Fixing Tempereture "in Chapter 8.

Related User Mode

ENERGY SAVER MODE -10%*, -25%, -50%, none


*Factory default.

Reference:
100V/20A 100V/15A
120V model 230V model
model model
Standby power consumption
(Wh) 359 355 335 330

Power save mode power -10% 346 315 313 298


consumption (Wh)
-25% 311 269 270 255
-50% 269 224 216 200
The heater switch is off, and printer mode is not available.

9-24 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

VII . DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go
through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier's parts while keeping the
following in mind:

1. ! Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work.

2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted.

3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. Do not leave out the toothed washer that comes with one of the mounting screws on the rear
cover to protect against static electricity.

5. Do not leave out the washer that comes with the screw used for the grounding wire and the
varistor to ensure electrical continuity.

6. Do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed, unless otherwise mentioned.

7. Turn off the front cover switch or the power switch before sliding out the duplexing feeding
unit or the fixing assembly.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-25
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

A. External Covers [2]


[1] Front door
[2] Toner cartridge cover [1] [3]
[3] Upper right cover
[4] Manual feed tray cover [4]
[5] Upper rear right cover
[6] Waste toner case cover
[5]
[7] Lower right cover
[8] Front lower right cover
[9] Front lower left cover [6]

[7]
[9]

[8]
Figure 9-A701

[13]

[10] Rear cover


[11] Lower left cover
[12] Delivery tray
[13] Upper left cover

[12]

[11]
[10]

Figure 9-A702

Caution:
Do not remove the cover shown in the Cover Screw
figure. Screw Cover
If removed and mounted again, it will
displace the ADF, adversely affecting
images.

Figure 9-A703
9-26 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

[14] Inside upper cover [14] [15] [16] [17]


[15] Inside cover (process unit)
[16] Inside cover (primary)
[17] Inside cover (pre-transfer)
[18] Inside cover (lower right)

[18]
Figure 9-A704

Remove the covers as necessary when [3]


cleaning, inspecting, or repairing the inside of
the machine.
Those covers that may be detached by
merely removing their mounting screws are
omitted from the discussions.
[4]
1. Removing the Front Door
1) Open the front door, and remove the
mounting screw [2] from the door tape
[1].
2) Open the toner cartridge cover [3], and re-
move the hinge pin [4] upward from the
front door.
3) Pull out the front door upward at an angle. [2] [1]

Figure 9-A705

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-27
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

2. Removing the Inside Upper Cover


1) Open the front door, and shift the fixing/
feeding assembly lever [1]; then, slide out
the fixing/feeding unit [2].
2) Remove the four mounting screws [3],
and detach the inside cover [4] (process [5] [6] [3] [5] [4] [5] [3]
unit).
3) Remove the three mounting screws [5],
and detach the inside upper cover [6].

[1] [2]

Figure 9-A706

3. Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit


Cover
1) Open the front door, and shift the fixing/
feeding assembly lever to slide out the fix-
ing/feeding unit.
2) Remove the mounting screw of the releas-
ing lever; then, while pushing the releas-
ing lever at the rear of the fixing/feeding
unit (Figure 8-A502) to the front, detach it
while the lever is up.
3) Remove the mounting screw [3], and de-
tach the fixing knob [4]. [6] [5]
4) Remove the mount screw [5], and detach
the transfer separation charging assembly
cover [6].
5) Remove the two mounting screws [7], and
detach the fixing/feeding unit cover [8].

[7]
[7]
[3]
[4] [8]

Figure 9-A707

9-28 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

4. Removing the Rear Cover


1) Remove the eight mounting screws [1],
and detach the rear cover [2]. [1]

[1]

[1]

[1] [2]

Figure 9-A708

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-29
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

B. Control Panel
1. Removing the Control Panel
1) Remove the standard white plate. (See
Figures 3-D511 through -D513.)
2) Remove the copyboard glass and the con-
trol panel middle cover.
3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the face plate [2].

[2] [1] [2]


Figure 9-B701

4) Remove the two screws [3], and detach [3] [4]


the delivery tray unit [4].

Figure 9-B702

5) Remove the two screws [5], and detach [5]


the upper right cover [7] while keeping
the toner cartridge cover [6] open.

[6] [7]
Figure 9-B703

9-30 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

6) Remove the four screws [8] of the front [8] [10] [9] [8]
cover, and disconnect the three connectors
[9]; then, detach the control panel [10].

[9]
Figure 9-B704

2. Removing the Control Panel [1] [3] [2] [1]


Controller (CPU) PCB and the
Control Panel Inverter PCB
1) Remove the four mounting screws [1],
and disconnect the eight connectors [2];
then, detach the control panel controller
(CPU) PCB [3].

[2] [1]

Figure 9-B705

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-31
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

2) Remove the two mounting screws [4], and [4] [5]


disconnect the two connectors [5]; then,
detach the control panel inverter PCB [6].

[6] [5] [4]

Figure 9-B706
3. Removing the Control Panel PCB
and the LCD Panel
1) Remove the three screws [1], and detach
the control panel lower cover [2]. [1] [2] [1]

Figure 9-B707

2) Remove the CPU PCB. [3] [4] [3] [3]


3) Remove the eleven screws [3] and the two
screws [4], and detach the CPU PCB.

[3] [3] [3] [4] [3]

Figure 9-B708

9-32 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

4) Remove the nine screws [5], and detach [7] [5]


the control panel PCB [6]; then, remove
the three screws [7], and detach the LCD
panel [8].

Caution:
When mounting the control panel PCB
or the LCD panel to the control panel,
keep in mind that some locations need to
be screwed together with the CPU PCB
mounting plate (2 locations on the con-
trol panel PCB, 2 locations on the LCD
panel).

[8] [7] [5] [6]

Figure 9-B709

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-33
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

C. Fans
1. Removing the Primary Charging [1] [2] [1]
Assembly Fan
1) Open the front door.
2) Remove the inside cover (process unit).
3) Remove the inside upper cover.
4) Remove the two screws [1], and slide out
the primary charging fan [2].

Caution:
When mounting the primary charging
assembly fan, be sure that the direction
of air current matches the marking indi-
cated on the fan.

Figure 9-C701

5) Disconnect the connector [3] found on the


back of the fan, and detach the primary
charging assembly fan [2].

[3] [2]

Figure 9-C702

9-34 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

2. Removing the Fixing Heat


Discharge Fan
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the four screws [1], and discon- [1] [2] [1]
nect the connector [2]; then, slide out the
fixing assembly heat discharge fan [3].

Caution:
When mounting the fixing heat dis-
charge fan, be sure that the direction of
air current match the marking indicated
on the fan.

[1] [3] [1]

Figure 9-C703

3. Removing the Scanner Cooling


Fan
1) Open the front door.
[1] [2] [1]
2) Remove the inside cover (process unit).
3) Remove the inside upper cover.
4) Remove the two screws [1], and slide out
the scanner cooling fan [2].

Caution:
When mounting the scanner cooling fan,
be sure that the direction of air current
matches the marking indicated on the
fan.

Figure 9-C704

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-35
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

5) Disconnect the connector [3] found on the [2] [3]


back of the fan, and detach the scanner
cooling fan [2].

Figure 9-C705

4. Removing the Stream Reading


Fan
1) Open the front door.
2) Remove the inside cover (process unit). [1] [2] [1]
3) Remove the inside upper cover.
4) Remove the two screws [1], and take out
the stream reading fan assembly [2].

Caution:
When mounting the stream reading fan,
be sure that the direction of air current
matches the marking indicated on the
fan.

Figure 9-C706

9-36 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

5) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove [4] [5] [4] [3]
the two screws [4]; then, detach the stream
reading fan [5].

Figure 9-C707
5. Removing the Laser Cooling Fan
1) Remove the copyboard glass.
2) Remove the original sensor unit 1. [2]
3) Remove the image processor cover, and
detach the image processor PCB.
4) Remove the two screws [1], and discon-
nect the connector [2]; then, detach the la-
ser cooling fan [3] together with its
mount.

[1] [3] [1]

Figure 9-C708

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-37
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

5) Remove the two screws [4], and detach [3] [4]


[4]
the laser cooling fan [3].

Caution:
When mounting the laser cooling fan, be
sure that the direction of air current
matches the marking indicated on the
fan.

Figure 9-C709
6. Removing the De-Curling Fan
1) Open the front door. [2]
2) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. [3] [1]
3) Remove the fixing/feeding unit cover.
4) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and re-
move the four screws [2]; then, detach the
fixing motor mount [3] together with the
fixing motor.

[2]
[2]

Figure 9-C710

[5]
[4]
5) Remove the two screws [4], and discon-
nect the connector [5]; then, detach the de-
livery speed switching clutch [6].

[4]
[6]
Figure 9-C711

9-38 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

6) Disconnect the connector [7], and remove [8]


the two screws [8]; then, detach the de- [9]
curling fan [9].

Caution:
When mounting the de-curling fan, be
sure that the direction of air current
matches the marking indicated on the
fan.

[7]
[8]

Figure 9-C712

7. Removing the Feeding Fan


1) Open the front door.
2) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. [1]
3) Remove the fixing/feeding unit cover.
4) Take out the feeding assembly.
5) Remove the feeding roller and the feeding
belt.
6) Remove the four screws [1], and detach
the feeding duct [2].

[1] [2] [1]


Figure 9-C713

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-39
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

7) Remove the three screws [3], and detach [3]


the feeding fan [4].

Caution:
When mounting the feeding fan, be sure
that the direction of air current matches
the marking indicated on the fan.

[4]
Figure 9-C714

8. Removing the Drum Fan


1) Remove the rear cover. [3] [1]
2) Remove the high-voltage transformer
(DC).
3) Remove the two screws [1], and discon-
nect the connector [2]; then, detach the
drum fan unit [3].

[2] [1]
Figure 9-C715

9-40 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

4) Disconnect the connector [4], and remove [5]


the three screws [5]; then, detach the drum
fan [6].

Caution:
When mounting the drum fan, be sure
that the direction of air current matches
the marking indicated on the fan.

[4] [6] [5]

Figure 9-C716

9. Removing the Inverter Cooling


Fan
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and slide out
the inverter fan [2].

Caution:
When mounting the inverter cooling fan, [1] [2] [1]
be sure that the direction of air current
matches the marking indicated on the
fan.

Figure 9-C717

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-41
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

3) Disconnect the connector [3], and detach [3] [2]


the inverter cooling fan [2].

Figure 9-C718

10. Removing the Pre-Transfer


Charging Assembly Fan
1) Open the front door.
2) Remove the inside cover (process unit).
3) Remove the two screws [1], and discon-
nect the two connectors [2]; then, detach
the fan motor [3].

Caution:
When mounting the pre-transfer charg- [1] [2] [3]
ing fan, be sure that the direction of air
current matches the marking indicated
on the fan.

Figure 9-C719

9-42 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

4) Disconnect the connector [4], and remove [4] [6]


the two screws [5]; then, detach the pre-
transfer charging assembly fan [6].

[5]

Figure 9-C720
11. Removing the Power Supply
Cooling Fan 1
1) Remove the lower left cover.
2) Remove the power supply unit.
3) Remove the three screws [1], and detach
the fan mount [2].

Caution:
When mounting the power supply cool- [2] [1]
ing fan 1, be sure that the direction of air
current matches the marking indicated
on the fan.

[1]
Figure 9-C721

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-43
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

4) Remove the two screws [3], and discon- [3] [5] [4] [3]
nect the conector [4]; then, detach the
power supply cooling fan 1 [5].

Figure 9-C722

12. Removing the Power Supply


Cooling Fan 2
1) Remove the lower left cover.
2) Remove the power supply unit.
3) Remove the three screws [1], and detach
the fan mount [2]. (See Figure 9-C721.)
4) Remove the two screws [3], and discon-
nect the connector [4]; then, detach the
power supply cooling fan 2 [5].

Caution:
When mounting the power supply cool-
ing fan 2, be sure that the direction of air
current matches the marking on the fan.

[3] [5] [4] [3]

Figure 9-C723

9-44 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

13. Removing the Separation Fan


1) Open the front door.
[1]
2) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. [1] [2]
3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the fixing/feeding lower cover [2].

Figure 9-C724
4) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove
the five screws [4]; then, detach the sepa- [5] [4]
ration fan unit [5].

[4] [3] [4]

Figure 9-C725

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-45
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

5) Remove the three screws [6], and detach


the separation fan [7].

Caution:
When mounting the separation fan, be
sure that the direction of air current [6]
matches the marking indicated on the
fan.

[7]

Figure 9-C726

14. Removing the Laser Scanner Fan


1) Open the front door.
2) Remove the inside cover (process unit).
3) Remove the inside upper cover.
4) Remove the two screws [1], and slide out
the laser scanner fan [2].

Caution: [1] [2] [1]


When mounting the laser scanner fan, be
sure that the direction of air current
matches the marking on the fan.

Figure 9-C727

9-46 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

5) Disconnect the connector [3] found on the [3] [2]


back of the fan; then, detach the laser
scanner fan [2].

Figure 9-C728

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-47
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

D. Drive Assembly
1. Removing the Left Pickup Drive
Assembly
Construction

1) Remove the rear cover.


2) Open the system box assembly. (See Fig-
ure 4-D401.)
3) Remove the high-voltage transformer
(AC). (See Figure 9-H701.)
4) While detaching the belt [1], remove the
three screws [2], and detach the left [1] [3] [2]
pickup drive assembly [3].

[2] [2]

Figure 9-D701

9-48 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

2. Removing the Pickup Drive


Assembly
Construction

1) Remove the rear cover.


2) Remove the high-voltage transformer
(DC). (See Figure 9-I701.)
3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Remove the drum gear.
5) Remove the waste toner pipe. [4]
6) Remove the two screws [1], and loosen
the harness guide [2]; disconnect the two [3] [4]
connectors [3], and remove the six screws
[4]; then, detach the pickup drive assem-
bly [5].

[1]
[2] [4] [5]

Figure 9-D702

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-49
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

3. Removing the Developing Drive


Assembly
Construction

[3] [1]
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the high-voltage transformer
(DC). (See Figure 9-I701.)
3) Remove the flywheel. (See Figure 9-
D712.)
4) Remove the drum gear. (See Figure 9-
D713.)
5) Remove the waste toner pipe. (See Figure
9-D715.)
6) Remove the drum drive assembly. (Figure
9-D717.)
7) Remove the waste toner drive assembly.
(See Figure 9-D707.)
8) Remove the two screws [1], and discon- [2] [1]
nect the connector [2]; then, detach the
Figure 9-D703
drum fan [3].
[5] [6] [5] [4]

9) Disconnect the two connectors [4], and re-


move the four screws [5]; then, detach the
developing drive assembly [6].

[5] [4]
Figure 9-D704

9-50 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

4. Removing the Vertical Path Drive


Assembly
Construction

1) Remove the rear cover.


2) Remove the waste toner case.
3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the harness guide [2].

[1]

[2]
Figure 9-D705

4) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove [5] [4]


the two screws [4]; then, detach the verti-
cal path drive assembly [5].

[4] [3]

Figure 9-D706

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-51
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

5. Removing the Waste Toner Drive


Assembly
Construction

[1] [2]
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the high-voltage transformer
(DC).
3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Remove the drum gear.
5) Remove the waste toner pipe.
6) Remove the drum drive assembly.
7) Remove the six screws [1], and detach the
waste toner drive assembly [2].

[1] [1]

Figure 9-D707

9-52 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

6. Removing the Multifeeder Pickup


Drive Assembly
Construction

[2] [1] [2] [3] [1]


1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the high-voltage transformer
(DC).
3) Loosen the mounting screw on the rear
fixing plate of the registration roller as-
sembly.
4) Remove the four screws [1], and discon-
nect the four connectors [2]; then, detach
the multifeeder pickup drive assembly [3].

[1]

[2] [1] [2]

Figure 9-D708

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-53
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

7. Removing the Lifter Drive


Assembly (right deck)
Construction

1) Remove the rear cover.


2) Remove the high-voltage transformer
(DC).
3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Remove the drum gear.
5) Remove the waste toner pipe.
6) Remove the screw, and loosen the harness [1] [3] [2]
guide [1]; disconnect the two connectors
[2], and remove the four screws [3]; then,
detach the lifter drive assembly (for the
right deck) [4].

[4] [3] [2] [3]

Figure 9-D709

9-54 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

8. Removing the Lifter Drive


Assembly (for the left deck)
Construction

1) Remove the rear cover.


2) Open the system box assembly.
3) Remove the DC controller assembly.
4) Disconnect the three connectors [1], and [1] [2] [1]
remove the four screws [2]; then, detach
the lifter drive assembly (for the left deck)
[3].

[2] [1] [3] [2]

Figure 9-D710

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-55
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

9. Removing the Main Drive


Assembly
Construction

1) Remove the rear cover.


2) Remove the high-voltage transformer
(DC). (See Figure 9-I701.)
3) Remove the flywheel. (See Figure 9-
D712.)
4) Remove the drum gear. (see Figure 9-
D713.)
5) Remove the waste toner pipe. (See Figure
9-D715.)
6) Remove the drum drive assembly. (See
Figure 9-D717.)
7) Remove the waste toner drive assembly.
(See Figure 9-D707.)
8) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and re-
move the nine screws [2]; then, detach the [2] [1] [2]
main drive assembly [3]. [2]

Caution:
When mounting the main drive assem-
bly, be sure to slide out the fixing/feed-
ing assembly in advance. (A coupling
and a spring are mounted to the back of
the main drive assembly. If the fixing/
feeding assembly is inside, the action of
the spring will hinder mounting work.)

[2] [2] [3] [2]

Figure 9-D711

9-56 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

10. Removing the Drum Drive


Assembly
Construction

1) Remove the rear cover. [1] [2]


2) Remove the high-voltage transformer
(DC).
3) Open the system box assembly. (See Fig-
ure 4-D401.)
4) Remove the high-voltage transformer
(AC). (See Figure 9-H701.)
5) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the flywheel [2].

Figure 9-D712

6) Loosen the two screws [3], and remove [3] [4]


the binding screw [4] (w/ a spring); then,
detach the gear [5] of the drum shaft.

Caution:
When removing the screw from the
drum shaft gear, pay attention to the di-
rection of rotation of the gear. (Be sure
to turn it counterclockwise.)

[3] [5]

Figure 9-D713

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-57
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

7) Remove the waste toner case, remove the [6] [7] [8] [6]
five screws [6], and disconnect the four
connectors [7]; then, remove the waste
toner case mount [8].

[6] [7] [7]

Figure 9-D714

8) Remove the E-ring [10] from the tip of the


waste toner pipe [9]; slide up the bushing
[11], and remove the two screws [12]; [10]
then, remove the waste toner pipe [9].

[11]

[12]

[9]
Figure 9-D715

9-58 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

9) Remove the screw [13], and detach the [13] [14]


drum cleaning pipe cover [14].

Figure 9-D716

10) Disconnect the four connectors [15], and


remove the five screws [16]; then, detach [15] [16] [15]
the drum drive assembly [17].

[15] [16] [17] [16]

Figure 9-D717

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-59
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

11. Removing the Cassette Pickup


Drive Assembly
Construction

1) Remove the rear cover.


2) Remove the high-voltage transformer [1] [1] [1]
(DC).
3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Remove the drum gear.
5) Remove the waste toner pipe.
6) Remove the cassette pickup assembly
(upper, lower). (See Figure 7-B801.)
7) Remove the five screws [1], and detach
the pickup drive assembly [2].

[1] [2]

Figure 9-D718

9-60 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

12. Removing the Toner Cartridge


Drive Assembly
1) Remove the upper right cover.
2) Open the toner cartridge cover, and slide
out the toner cartridge.
3) Remove the four screws [1], and discon-
nect the connector [2]; then, detach the
toner cartridge drive assembly [3]. [1]

[3] [1]

[2]

Figure 9-D719

4) Remove the three screws [4], and discon- [4] [6]


nect the connector [5]; then, detach the
toner cartrdige drive motor [6].

[5] [4]
Figure 9-D720

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-61
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

E. Switches
1. Removing the Cover Switch (door
switch) Assembly
1) Remove the inside upper cover. (See Fig-
ure 9-A706.)
2) Remove the control panel. (See Figure 9-
B704.)
3) Remove the three screws [1], and slide out
the cover switch assembly [2] to the front.

[1] [2] [1]

Figure 9-E701

4) Disconnect the five connectors [3], and [3] [2]


detach the cover switch assembly [2].

[3]

Figure 9-E702

9-62 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

2. Removing the Manual Feed Tray


Switch Assembly
1) Remove the inside right cover.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and discon-
nect the two connectors [2]; then, detach [1] [2] [3]
the pre-transfer charging assembly [3].

Figure 9-E703

3) Disconnect the three connectors [4], and


remove the screw [5]; then, detach the po- [6]
tential sensor PCB [6].

[4]

[4] [5]

Figure 9-E704

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-63
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

4) Remove the screw [7], and disconnect the [9]


two connectors [8]; then, remove the
manual feed tray switching assembly [9].

[7]

[8]

Figure 9-E705

3. Removing the Drum Heater


Switch Assembly
1) Remove the lower left cover.
2) Remove the three screws [1], and discon-
nect the seven connectors [2]; then, re- [2]
move the power supply cord mount [3], [2]
and release the fixing claw to detach the
drum heater switch [4].

[3]

[4]

[1] [1]
[1] [2]

Figure 9-E706

9-64 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

F. DC Controller PCB
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Open the system box assembly.
3) Disconnect the 19 connectors on the PCB,
and remove the four screws [1]; then, de- [1] [2] [1]
tach the DC controller PCB [2].

[1]

Figure 9-F701

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-65
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

G. Power Supply Unit


1) Remove the lower left cover. [1] [2]
2) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and
disconnect the 19 connectors on the relay
PCB [2].

[1]
Figure 9-G701

3) Remove the two screws [3], and detach [3] [4] [3]
the cover plate [4]; then, remove the two
screws [5], and detach the power supply
unit [6].

[5] [6] [5]

Figure 9-G702

9-66 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

H. High-Voltage Transformer
(AC)
1) Remove the rear cover.
[1] [1] [2] [1] [1]
2) Remove the waste toner case and the
waste toner case mount.
3) Disconnect the four connectors [1], and
remove the screw [2]; then, detach the
high-voltage transformer assembly (AC)
[3].

[3]

Figure 9-H701

I. High-Voltage Transformer [2] [1] [2]


(DC)
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Disconnect the five connectors [1], and
remove the two screws [2]; then, detach
the high-voltage transformer assembly
(DC) [3].

[1] [3] [1]

Figure 9-I701

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-67
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

J. Relay PCB
1) Remove the lower left cover.
2) Disconnect the connector from the relay
PCB, and remove the PCB spacer to de- [1]
tach the relay PCB [1].

Figure 9-J701
K. MFC PCB
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the system box.
3) Remove the 16 screws [1], and detach the
system cover 1 [2]. [1]

[1]
[1]

[1]

[1]
[2]

[1]

[1]

Figure 9-K701

9-68 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

4) Remove the two screws [3], and detach [3]


the face plate [4]; then, remove the three [6]
screws [5], and detach the partition plate [4]
[6].

[5]

[3]
Figure 9-K702
5) Disconnect the three connectors [7], and
remove the four screws [8]; then, detach [8]
the motherboard PCB [9].

[9]

[7]
[7]

[8]

Figure 9-K703

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-69
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

6) Disconnect the four connectors [10], and [11]


remove the seven screws [11]; then, de-
tach the MFC PCB [12].

[11]

[12] [11]

[11] [10]

[11]

[10]

Figure 9-K704

9-70 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

L. Routing the Belt

Developing/waste toner drive belt

Main motor

Pickup motor

Main drive belt

Pickup drive belt

Figure 9-L701

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 9-71
CHAPTER 10
SIDE PAPER DECK

This chapter provides descriptions on basic operations of the paper deck, functions
of each operation, relationships between electrical and mechanical systems, and
timing at which each associated part is turned on.

I. SIDE PAPER DECK ................. 10-1 II. DETECTING JAMS ................. 10-18
A. Inputs to and Outputs from the A. Outline ................................ 10-18
Side Deck Driver .................. 10-1 III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
B. Pickup .................................. 10-4 ................................................ 10-20
C. Deck Paper Detection .......... 10-7 A. External Covers ................. 10-21
D. Deck Lifter ............................ 10-9 B. Deck Body .......................... 10-26
E. Opening / Closing the Deck C. Drive Mechanisms ............. 10-32
(compartment) ................... 10-12 D. Feeding System ................. 10-39
F. Controlling the Deck Motor E. Electrical System ............... 10-44
........................................... 10-14

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

I . SIDE PAPER DECK


A. Inputs to and Outputs from the Side Deck Driver
1. Inputs to the Side Deck Driver (1/2)

Side deck driver PCB

+5VR
J10-1 J8-5 J104-5
Deck pickup -2 -4 -4 When PS101 detects paper, '1'.
sensor PS101 DPPD
-3 -3 -3 (When the light-blocking sensor is
at PS101.)
+5VR
J5-1 J4-4 J103-7
Deck paper When paper is absent in the deck,
-2 -3 -6 '0'.
absent sensor PS102 DPE*
-3 -2 -5 (When the light-blocking sensor is
not at PS102.)
+5VR
J6-1 J4-7 J103-10
Deck lifter upper -2 -6 -9 When the deck lifter is at the upper
limit sensor PS103 DLUL limit, '1'.
-3 -5 -8
(When the light-blocking sensor is
at PS103.)
+5VR
J7-1 J4-10 J103-13
Deck lifter When the lifter is at the pickup
-2 -9 -12
position sensor PS104 DLPD position, '1'.
-3 -8 -11 (When the light-blocking sensor is
at PS104.)
+5VR
J24-1 J108-5
Deck set sensor -2
When the deck is set in the copier,
PS105 -4
DSET '1'.
-3 -3 (When the light-blocking sensor is
at PS105.)
+5VR
J12-1 J8-10 J104-10
Deck feed sensor When PS106 detects paper, '1'.
-2 -9 -9
PS106 DPFD (When the light-blocking sensor is
-3 -8 -8 at PS106.)
+5VR
Deck paper J18-1 J17-3 J107-3
When the deck lifter is at the paper
supply position -2 -2 -2
PS107 DPSP supply position, '1'.
-3 -1 -1 (When the light-blocking sensor is
sensor
at PS107.)
+5VR
J19-1 J17-14 J107-6
Deck paper level -2 -13 -5
When PS108 detects the absence
sensor PS108 DPLD of paper (level decreasing to half),
-3 -12 -4
'1'.
(When the light-blocking sensor is
+5VR at PS108.)
J25-1 J108-8
Deck open sensor PS109 -2 -7
When the compartment is set in
DOPND* the deck, '1'.
-3 -6
(When the light-blocking sensor is
at PS109.)

Figure 10-101a

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-1
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

2. Inputs to the Side Deck Driver Input (2/2)

Side deck driver PCB

SW100
J3-1 J103-4
Deck open DOPN* When SW100 is pushed to open
switch -2 -3 the deck, '0'.
+5VR
LED100
-3 -2
Deck open
indicator -4 -1 When the deck is open/closed,
DOLON* '0'.
Open switch PCB (The LED turns on or flashes
while the deck lifter motor is
SW101 rotating.)
J22-1 J109-3
Deck open DOPD* When the deck is open, '0'.
detecting switch NO -2 -1 (When SW101 is not pushed.)

SW102
J102-1 J107-8
Deck lifter lower DLLD When the deck lifter is at the
limit detecting NO -7 lower limit, '1'.
-2
switch (When SW102 is not pushed.)

+38VU
+24VU. J101-1
-3
Power supply -2
0VU

Copier

Figure 10-101b

10-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

3. Outputs from the Side Deck driver (1/1)

Side deck driver PCB

+38VU
J15-1 J106-1
-2 -2

+5VR
J14-2 J105-5
-6 -1
Deck main M101 DBIT1
-5 -2
motor DBIT0
See p. 10-14.
-4 -3
DMPLK
-3 -4 DMON
-1 -6

J22-1 J17-9 J107-9


Deck lifter See p. 10-16.
motor M102 -2 -10 -10

24VU
J11-1 J8-6 J104-6
Deck feeding CL101 -2 -7 -7
clutch DPFCD* When '0', CL101 turns on.
24VU
J13-2 -11 J3-11
Deck pickup CL102 -1 -12 -12
clutch DPUCD* When '0', CL102 turns on.

24VU
Deck pickup J9-2 J8-1 J104-1
roller releasing SL101 -1 -2 -2
DPRSD*
solenoid When '0', SL101 turns on.
24VU
J23-2 J108-1
Deck open
solenoid SL102 -1 -2
DOPSD* When '0', SL102 turns on.

Figure 10-102

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-3
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

B. Pickup
1. Outline
The side paper deck (hereafter, "deck") is capable of holding as many as 3,500 sheets of paper
(A4/LTR/B5 of 80 g/m2), and operates in response to the control signals from the copier's DC
controller.
The lifter of the deck is driven by the deck lifter motor (M102), and paper is picked up and
moved by the drive of the deck main motor (M101).

2. Pickup Operation
The paper set in the deck is held up by the lifter, and is kept at a specific position.
When the Copy Start key is pressed and the deck pickup clunch (CL102) turns on, the drive of
the deck main motor (M101) rotates the pickup roller to start pickup operation. At this time, the
pickup/feeding roller and the separation roller serve to make sure that only one sheet of paper is
picked up.
Then, when the deck pickup sensor (PS101) detects paper, the deck pickup roller releasing
solenoid (SL101) turns on so that the pickup roller leaves the surface of paper.
The deck feeding roller starts to rotate when the deck feeding clutch (CL101) turns on. Then,
the paper that has been picked up is moved to the copier's registration roller, and is made to arch so
as to remove the skew.
The registration roller controls the paper so that its leading edge and the leading edge of the
image on the photosensitive drum match.

10-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Deck feed paper detection

PS106
signal (DPFD)
Deck pickup detection signal
(DPPD)

PS101
Deck feeding clutch dive signal
(DPFCD*)

CL101
Deck pickup clutch drive signal
(DPUCD*)

Figure 10-103
DC controller PCB

Side deck driver PCB

CL102
Deck main motor drive signal
M101

CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)


Deck pickup roller releasing
solenoid drive signal (DPRSD*)
SL101
(copier)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

10-5
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

3. Sequence of Operations (pickup from the deck)

Copy Start key


ON

INTR SCAN PRINT LSTR STBY

Deck main motor


(M101)
Deck pickup clutch
(CL102)
Deck pickup roller releasing
solenoid (SL101)
Deck pickup sensor
(PS101)
Deck feed sensor
(PS106)
Deck feeding clutch
(CL101)

Figure 10-104

10-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

C. Deck Paper Detection


1. Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper
The presence/absence of paper inside the deck is detected by the deck paper absent sensor
(PS102). When the deck runs out of paper and, as a result, the paper detecting lever of the pickup
roller assembly leaves the deck paper absent sensor, the copier's control panel will indicate the
absence of paper.
Paper detecting lever Deck paper absent sensor

Copy paper

Lifter

Figure 10-105a Paper Present

Paper detecting lever Deck paper absent sensor

Lifter

Figure 10-105b Paper Absent

2. Switching the Deck Paper Size


To change the deck paper size, move the guide plate inside the deck at time of installation or in
response to the user's request, and enter the new paper size in service mode (OPTION>ACC>DK-
P).

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-7
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

3. Deck Paper Level Detection


The deck uses the deck paper supply position sensor (PS107), deck paper level sensor (PS108),
and deck paper absent sensor (PS102) to find out and communicate to the copier an approximate
level of paper inside its compartment so that the level may be indicated in the copier's control panel.
Table 10-101 shows the possible combinations of sensor outputs and levels of paper.

Control panel
Paper level PS102 PS107 PS108
indication
About 1750 to 3500 sheets 1 1 1
About 500 to 1750 sheets 1 1 0
1 to about 500 sheets 1 0 0
0 0 0 0
1: The light-blocking plate is over the sensor.
0: The light-blocking plate is not over the sensor.

Table 10-101

10-8 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

D. Deck Lifter
1. Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper
The lifter of the deck is connected to a reel by means of a cable, and is driven by the deck lifter
motor (M102). The lifter is moved up or down by changing the direction of rotation of the motor.
When the deck (compartment) is pushed inside the copier, the deck open detecting switch
(SW101) is pushed; the lifter stops when the deck open sensor (PS109) detects the light-blocking
plate.
The deck lifter upper limit sensor (PS103) is used to prevent damage to the deck in the event
that the lifter fails to stop moving up beyond the deck lifter position sensor because of some fault.
The lifter starts to move down as soon as the deck open switch (SW100) is pushed, and contin-
ues to move down until the deck paper supply position sensor (PS107) leaves the sensor lever
(falling edge of the sensor output).
When paper is supplied, the paper will push the lever of the deck paper supply position sensor,
causing the lifter to move farther down until the stack of paper leaves the sensor lever.
The lifter repeats downward movement each time paper is supplied until it pushes the deck
lifter lower limit detecting switch (SW102; maximum paper supply position).
The copier's DC-CPU monitors the combination of sensor outputs (activation) related to the
movement of the deck lifter; when the deck lifter position sensor (PS104) output and the deck level
sensor position sensor (PS108) output are '1' and the deck paper supply position sensor (PS107) is
'0' (not likely in practice), the copier's control panel will indicate 'E041'.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-9
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

Deck lifter
Deck open position sensor
detection switch (PS104)
(SW101) Deck paper Deck open
Deck main Deck lifter upper
supply position sensor switch
motor limit sensor
(PS107) (SW100)
M101 (PS103)
Deck pickup roller

Deck paper
level sensor
(PS108)
Deck pickup / feeding roller

M102
Deck separation roller
Deck lifter
motor

Deck lifter
cable
Deck lifter lower
limit detecting switch
(SW102)

Lifter

Copy paper

Figure 10-106

10-10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

2. Paper Level Indicator on the Deck Front Cover


The drive of the deck lifter motor (M102) is received by a coupling, and is forwarded to the
rack by a drive belt. The rack is equipped with a black belt, which moves up and down within the
indicator window placed in the deck front cover.
When the level of paper lowers and, as a result, the lifter moves up to pickup position, the area
of the black belt within the indicator window increases gradually, decreasing the white area so as to
indicate the decreasing level of paper.

Rack Black belt

Indicator window

Deck front cover

The lifter moves down to indicate


an increase in the level of paper Drive belt
(white area).

Deck lifter
Coupling
motor

M102

Figure 10-107

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-11
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

E. Opening / Closing the Deck (compartment)


1. Opening/Closing the Deck
When the deck open switch (SW100) is pushed, the deck open solenoid (SL102) turns on to
release the deck (compartment), causing the deck to be pushed several centimeters to the front by
the work of a spring. At the same time, the deck lift motor (M102) starts to rotate, and the lifter
inside the deck moves down.
When the deck (compartment) is pushed inside the copier manually, the deck open sensor
(PS109) detects the light-blocking plate of the compartment, and the lifter moves up to the pickup
position.
When the deck lifter motor starts to rotate as when the deck is opened or closed, the deck open
indicator (LED100) on the open switch PCB will turn on or flash.

J100 J103
SW100 -1 Deck open signal (DOPN*) -4
J103
-4 Deck open indicator LED activation signal (DOLON*) -1
LED100
Open switch PCB
PS103 Deck lifter upper limit detection signal J103
(DLUL) -9
(compartment)

PS109 J108
Deck open detecting signal (DOPND*) -7

SW101 J109
Deck open detection signal (DOPD*) -3 Side
DC
deck
controller
Deck lifter driver
PCB
PCB

Deck open solenoid drive signal J108


(DOPSD*) -11
SL102
SW102 Deck lifter lower limit detection signal J107
(DLLD) -8

Open Deck lifter motor drive signal J107


M102
(copier)

Figure 10-108

10-12 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

2. Sequence of Operations (opening/closing the deck)

Deck open
switch ON Compartment set

On Flashing Off
Deck open indicator
(LED100)

Deck lifter motor


(M102)

Deck paper supply position * *


sensor (PS107)

Deck lifter lower limit


detecting switch (SW102)

Deck open solenoid


(SL102)

Compartment open
Deck open detecting switch
(SW101)

Deck open sensor


(PS109)

Deck lifter position sensor


(PS104)

Deck lifter down Deck lifter up

* : Varies according to the level of the stack.

Figure 10-109

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-13
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

F. Controlling the Deck Motor


1. Controlling the Deck Main Motor (M101)
The deck main motor is controlled by the copier's DC controller. Figure 10-110 shows the
circuit that drives the deck main motor, and has the following functions:
[1] Turning on and off the deck main motor.
[2] Switching the speed or rotation of the deck main motor.

a. Turning On and Off the Motor


When the deck main motor drive signal (DMON) from the copier goes '1', the motor drive
circuit turns on so that the motor starts to rotate at a specific speed. On the other hand, when the
deck main motor drive signal (DMON) goes '0', the motor drive circuit goes off to stop the motor.
The copier's DC controller monitors the rotation of the deck motor in reference to the deck
main motor PLL lock signal (DMPLK); if the motor PLL lock signal remains '1' for 900 msec or
more while DMON is '1' for some reason, the copier's control panel will indicate 'E043' .

Deck main motor

J105 Deck main motor drive J14


-4 signal (DMON) -3 M101
Deck main motor PLL
Side -3 lock signal (DMPLK) -4
DC deck Motor
Encoder
controller driver drive circuit
Deck main motor speed
PCB PCB -2 switch signal (DBIT 0) -5

Deck main motor speed


-1 switch signal (DBIT 1) -6

(copier) Deck main motor driver PCB

Figure 10-110

10-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

b. Switching the Motor Rotation Speed


To accommodate future copiers, the deck is equipped with a mechanism that automatically
switches pickup/feeding speed, in response to and based on combinations of the speed switch sig-
nals (DBIT 0, DBIT 1) from the copier's DC controller to the side deck driver PCB.
The combinations of the speed switch signals are as shown in Table 10-102. (In the case of the
host copier, the motor rotates at high speed.)

Speed switch signal


Rotation speed
DBIT 0 DBIT 1
High speed L L
Medium speed H L
Low speed L H

Table 10-102

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-15
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

2. Controlling the Deck Lifter Motor (M102)


The deck lifter motor control circuit is located on the side deck driver PCB. (See Figure 10-111
for a block diagram.)
The combination circuit in the diagram consists of various logic circuits, and serves to rotate
the deck lifter motor clockwise or counterclockwise based on the combinations of the deck lifter
motor drive signal (DLMON*) and the deck lifter up signal (DLUP*) from the copier's DC control-
ler and the output signals from various sensors.
The copier's control panel will indicate 'E041' if the deck lifter position sensor (PS104) does
not detect the lifter in about 60 sec after the generation of the deck lifter up signal.

[1] Conditions Making the Lifter Move Up


• The deck is connected to the copier. à deck set signal (DSET) = '1'
• The deck (compartment) is closed. à deck open detection signal (DOPND*) = '1'
• The deck (compartment) is closed. à deck open detecting switch = 'ON'
• deck lifter upper limit detection signal (DLUL) = '0' and deck lifter position detection signal
(DLPD) = '0'
• deck lifter motor drive signal (DLMON*) = '0'
• deck lifter up signal (DLUP*) = '0'
As a result, the lifter moves up.

[2] Conditions Making the Lifter Move Down


• The deck (compartment) is open. à deck open detection signal (DOPND*) = '0'
• deck lifter lower limit detecting signal (DLLD) = '0' and deck lifter position detection signal
(DLPD) = '0'
• deck lifter motor drive signal (DLMON*) = '0'
• deck lifter up signal (DLUP*) = '1'
As a result, the lifter moves down.

10-16 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

Deck open
detection signal 24V 24V
24V Deck open detecting
(DOPD)
switch (SW101)

Deck lifter up drive signal


M102

Deck lifter motor down signal


Deck lifter
motor

Motor drive circuit


Deck open signal
(DOPN*)

Deck open
Communication conversion IC (Q17)

Deck lifter upper limit


switch (SW100)
detection signal
(DLUL)
PS103
DC
controller Deck lifter upper
PCB limit sensor
Deck open detection
Combination circuit

signal (DOPND*)
PS109
Deck open
Deck lifter position sensor
Deck lifter motor detection signal
drive signal (DLPD)
PS104
(DLMON*)
Deck lifter
Deck lifter up position sensor
signal (DLUP*) Deck set signal
(DSET)
PS105
Deck set
Deck lifter roller limit sensor
detection signal
(DLLD)

Deck lifter lower limit


detecting switch (SW102)

Deck paper supply position detection signal (DPSP)


PS107

Copier Deck paper supply


Side deck driver PCB position sensor

Note: The communications conversion IC (Q17) in the diagram converts serial signals
to parallel signals and vice versa.

Figure 10-111

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-17
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

II. DETECTING JAMS


A. Outline
The side paper deck is equipped with the two sensors shown in Figure 10-201 to find out
whether paper is being moved normally.
A jam is identified based on the outputs of the signals at such times as instructed by the copier's
DC controller. When the copier's DC controller identifies a jam, all paper moving ahead of the jam
is discharged and the operation is stopped. (Then, the copier's control panel shows how to remove
jams.)

PS106
PS101

Figure 10-201

Sensor No. Name Description


PS106 Deck feed sensor Finding a delay jam.
PS101 Deck pickup sensor Finding a delay jam.

Table 10-201

10-18 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

The copier's DC controller identifies a jam under the following conditions:

1. When the copier's power switch is turned on, at the end of the WAIT period, or in standby,
paper exists over the deck feed sensor (PS106).

2. Deck Pickup/Vertical Path Delay Jam

Copy Start key


ON Jam indicator

INTR SCAN PRINT

Deck pickup clutch


(CL102)

Jam check
Deck pickup sensor
(PS101)
Deck feed sensor Normal Error
(PS106)
Deck main motor
(M101)

Figure 10-202

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-19
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

III . DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
The copier possesses the mechanical characteristics discussed in the following pages; go
through the instructions given when disassembling/assembling the copier's parts while keeping the
following in mind:

1. Disconnect the power plug before disassembly/assembly work.

2. Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them, unless otherwise noted.

3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.

4. Do not leave out the toothed washer that comes with one of the mounting screws to protect
against static electricity.

5. Do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed, unless otherwise mentioned.

6. If the deck is equipped with an anti-humidity heater, be sure to disconnect its power plug for
safety.

10-20 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

A. External Covers [7]

[1] Deck releasing grip


[2] Upper front cover
[3] Compartment open/closed detecting [1]
switch
[4] Front cover
[2]
[5] Right cover
[6] Upper cover [6]
[7] Rear cover
[3]

[4] [5]

Figure 10-A301

1. Removing the Front Cover


1) Release the deck from the copier, and
push down the latch plate [2] of the com- [2]
partment [1]; then, open the compartment
[1].

(rear)

[1]

Figure 10-A302

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-21
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

2) Loosen the four screws [3], and remove [3]


the front cover [4] of the deck toward the
front.

[4]

Figure 10-A303

Caution:
When mounting the front cover to the
deck, be sure to match the coupling used
as a paper level indicator.

Match.

Figure 10-A304a

10-22 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

Caution:
When mounting the front cover, be sure
that the gap between the front cover and Upper front cover
the upper front cover is 3 ±1 mm.

Front cover

m
1m

Figure 10-A304b
Caution:
If you inadvertently moved the drive belt
for the paper level indicator behind the Deck front cover
front cover when removing the front Indicator
cover and cannot find its initial position, window
The lifter moves
or moved the deck lifter, move down the down to indicate
deck lifter to its lower limit, and move Drive belt
an increase in the
the drive belt in the direction of the ar- level of paper
row (thereby increasing the while area) (white area).
until it stops; then, mount the front
cover. (Operating the deck without
matching the paper level indicator and
the deck lifter position can damage the
drive mechanism of the paper level indi-
cator.)
Figure 10-A305 (front view)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-23
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

2. Removing the Rear Cover [1]


1) Release the deck, and remove the six
screws [1]; then, detach the rear cover [2].

[1]

[2]

[1]

Figure 10-A306

3. Removing the Right Cover [2]


1) Remove the three screws [1], and move
the right cover [2] to the front; then, re-
move it toward the rear.

[1]

Figure 10-A307

10-24 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

4. Removing the Upper Cover [2]


1) Remove the rear cover. (See p. 10-24.)
2) Push down the latch plate [2] of the com-
partment [1] to open the compartment [1].

(rear)

[1]
Figure 10-A308
3) Remove the three screws [3], and discon- [4] [5]
nect the connector [4]; then, remove the [3]
upper front cover [5].

Figure 10-A309

4) Close the deck vertical path assembly, and [6] [7]


remove the two screws [6]; then, detach
the upper cover [7].

Figure 10-A310

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-25
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

B. Deck Body
1. Detaching the Deck from the
Copier
1) Place a stack of copy paper [3] (about 8 [2]
cm in height) on the floor for placement of
the deck [2] to prevent deformation of the
roll support plate [1].

8 cm (approx.)
[3] [3]
[1]

Figure 10-B301
2) Remove the right cover. (See p. 10-24.)

10-26 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

3) Remove the four screws [5], and detach


the deck [6] from the deck base [7].

(left)
[7] [5]

[6]

(right)
[5]

Figure 10-B302

4) Hold the deck [8] as shown, and place it


on the stack of paper prepared in step 1).

[8]

Figure 10-B303

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-27
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

2. Removing the Compartment [2]


1) Place a stack of copy paper [3] (about 8
cm in height) on the floor for placement of
the deck [2] to prevent deformation of the
roll support plate [1].

8 cm (approx.)
[3] [1] [3]

Figure 10-B304

2) Detach the deck from the copier, and push


down the latch plate [5] of the compart- [5]
ment [4] to open the compartment [4].

(rear)

[4]

Figure 10-B305

10-28 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

3) Remove the screw [6] and the stopper


plate [7]; then, slide the compartment [8]
farther out.

[7]
(rear left of the [6]
compartment) [8]

Figure 10-B306

4) Remove the right cover. (See p. 10-24.) [9]


[12]
5) Remove the screw [9] of the harness
guide, and disconnect the connector [10];
then, remove the three left and right
screws (each) [12], and detach the com-
partment [8] toward the front while lifting
it slightly.
6) Place the compartment [8] on the stack of
copy paper prepared in step 1).
[10] [11]

[12]
[8]

Figure 10-B307

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-29
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

3. Changing the Deck Paper Size [2] [1]


If the user wishes to change the paper size
of the deck, perform the following:
1) Open the compartment of the deck, and
remove all paper.
2) If the lifter of the deck is up, turn on the
copier's power switch, and push down the
sensor lever [2] of the paper supply posi-
tion sensor inside the compartment [1] to
move down the lifter to its lower limit.

Figure 10-B308

3) Remove the screw [3], and mount the pa-


per trailing edge guide plate [4] to suit the [4] [3] [5]
new paper size.
4) Likewise, remove one screw each [5], and
mount the left and right guide plates [6] to
suit the new paper size.
5) Enter the new paper size in the copier's
service mode (OPTION>ACC>DK-P).

[6]

Figure 10-B309

10-30 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

4. Adjusting the Deck Registration [1] [3] [2]


If the left/right registration (standard of 0
±1.5 mm) needs to be adjusted, perform the
following:
1) Slide out the compartment, and adjust the
position of the latch plate [1] of the deck
open solenoid (SL102) using the two
screws [2]. (At this time, use the scale
graduation [3] on the latch plate as a
guide.)

(rear left of the compartment)

Figure 10-B310

5. Adjusting the Position of the Roll [4]


If the compartment cannot be opened/
closed smoothly, requiring adjustment of the
position for the roll mounted to the front of the
deck, perform the following: [5]
1) Remove the front cover. (See p. 10-21.)
2) With the compartment fully slid out, turn

3 mm (approx.)
the four mounting screws [4] on the roll
support plate [3] so that the roll [1] is
about 3mm from the floor [2]. (Use the
scale graduation [5] on the front side plate
as a guide.)

[3]

[1] [2]

Figure 10-B311

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-31
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

C. Drive Mechanisms
1. Removing the Deck Pickup
Clutch (CL102)
1) Remove the deck pickup unit. (See p. 10-
39.)
2) Disconnect the connector [1] and the E- [1]
ring [2]; then, detach the deck pickup
clutch [3].

Caution:
When mounting the pickup clutch, be
sure to put the clutch into the slip stop [3]
[4].
Be sure also to hook the harness on the [4] [2] [5]
U-groove [5] of the guide.
Figure 10-C301

2. Removing the Deck Feeding [1]


Clutch (CL101) [2]
1) Remove the deck pickup unit. (See p. 10-
39.)
2) Remove the harness retainer [1], and dis-
connect the connector [2]; then, remove
the E-ring [3], and detach the deck feeding
clutch [4].

Caution:
When mounting the feeding clutch, be
sure to put the clutch into the slip stop
[5].

[5]
[3] [4]

Figure 10-C302

10-32 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

3. Removing the Deck Main Motor [2]


(M101)
1) Detach the deck from the copier, and re-
move the six screws; then, detach the rear
cover.
2) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and re-
move the four screws [2]; then, detach the
deck main motor [3].
At this time, take care not to damage the [1]
gear at the tip of the motor spindle.

[3]
Figure 10-C303
4. Removing the Deck Lifter Motor
(M102) [1] [2]
1) Open the compartment of the deck, and
remove all copy paper.
2) Turn on the copier's power. If the lifter of
the deck is up, push down the sensor lever
[1] of the paper supply position sensor.
Stop the lifter [2] when it is about 7cm
from the base plate of the compartment,
and insert a hex wrench into the hole of
the lifter drive shaft [3] to hold it in place
(thereby preventing it from rotating).

Figure 10-C304

[3] [4]
.)
rox
app
m(
7c

[2]
Figure 10-C305

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-33
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

3) Take out the compartment from the deck.


(See p. 10-28.)
4) Disconnect the connector [5], and remove [5]
the five screws [6]; then, detach the deck
lifter motor unit [7].
[6]

[7] [6]

Figure 10-C306

5. Removing the Lifter Cable (front


of the deck) [1]
1) Open the compartment of the deck, and
remove all paper.
2) Remove the screw, and detach the paper
trailing edge guide plate from inside the
compartment.
3) Push the lever [1] of the paper supply po-
sition sensor inside the compartment to
move down the lifter; when the holes on
the left and right of the compartment side
plate and the holes on the left and right of
the lifter match, insert two long screw-
drivers [2] through the holes to hold the
lifter in position.

[2]

Figure 10-C307

10-34 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

4) Remove the front cover of the deck. (See [3]


p. 10-21.)
5) Remove the four screws [3], and detach
the roll support plate [4].

[4]

Figure 10-C308

6) Remove the coupling shaft [5] and the E-


[16] [10] [13]
ring [6]; then, detach the pulley cover [7].
7) Remove the two screws [8], and detach
the cable fixing plate [9] on the left side;
then, detach the lifter cable [10] on the
outside.
8) Remove the two screws [11], and detach
the cable fixing plate [12] on the right
side; then, detach the lifter cable [13] on
the inside.
9) To detach the lifter cable [13] on the in-
side from the pulley [14] on the inside, re-
move the two set screws [16] on the pulley
[15] on the outside, and detach the pulley [8] [9] [14][15] [12][11]
[15] on the outside.
[7]

[6]

[5]

Figure 10-C309

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-35
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

6. Removing the Lifter Cable (rear of [1]


the deck)
1) Open the deck, and remove all paper.
2) Remove the screw, and detach the paper
trailing edge guide plate from inside the
compartment.
3) Push down the lever [1] of the paper sup-
ply position sensor inside the compart-
ment to move down the lifter until the left
and right holes in the compartment side
plate and the left and right holes of the
lifter match; then, insert two long screw-
drivers [2] through the holes.
At this time, match the top surface of the
lifter with the marking on the compart-
ment left side plate to facilitate matching
the holes. [2]
4) Remove the compartment. (See p. 10-28.)
Figure 10-C310 [8]
5) Remove the screw [3], and detach the sen-
sor plate [4].
6) Remove one screw each [5], and detach
the sensor cover upper/lower [6].
7) Disconnect the two connectors [7], and re-
move the five screws [8]; then, detach the
metal plate [9]. [3]

[8]
[4]

[9]
[8]

[7]

Figure 10-C311
[5]

[6]

Figure 10-C312

10-36 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

8) Insert a hex wrench [11] into the hole of [11]


[10]
the lifter drive shaft [10] to hold it in place
(thereby preventing it from rotating).

Caution:
If you fail to prevent the lifter drive shaft
from rotating, the lifter cable will be-
come slack as soon as you remove the
lifter motor unit.

Figure 10-C313

9) Remove five screws [12], and detach the


lifter motor unit [13].

[12]

[12]
[13]

Figure 10-C314

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-37
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

7. Routing the Lifter Cable


1) Check to make sure that the lifter drive shaft and the lifter are held in place with a hex wrench
[1] and long screwdrivers [2].
2) Secure the cable fixing plate [3] to the lifter with two screws.
3) Hook the lifter cable on the upper pulley [4].
4) Hook the ball of the lifter cable on the pulley [5] of the lifter drive shaft; then, wind the cable
along the groove of the pulley about 1.5 times. At this time, be sure to keep the lifter cable taut
until the long screwdrivers are slightly lifted and stopped.
5) Secure the pulley to the lifter drive shaft with two set screws [6].
6) Mount all pulleys that have been removed back to the lifter drive shaft; then, measure the
height from the base plate of the compartment to the top face of the lifter to ensure that the lifter
is level.
[4]

[3]

[4]

(rear)

[5]

[6]

[3]

[3]
[6]
[5] [2]
[1]
[3]

Figure 10-C315

10-38 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

D. Feeding System [1] [2] [3] [2]


1. Removing the Deck Pickup Unit
1) Remove the upper cover. (See p. 10-25.)
2) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and re-
move the five screws [2].
3) Remove the deck pickup unit [3].

[2]

Figure 10-D301

Caution: [3]
When mounting the deck pickup unit
[3], be sure to use the three screws
shown in Figure 10-D302.

Screws

Figure 10-D302

[2]
2. Removing the Deck Pickup Roller
1) Remove the deck pickup unit. (See p. 10-
39.)
2) Turn over the deck pickup unit; then, re-
move the resin ring [1] (one each), and de-
tach the deck pickup roller [2].

[1]

Figure 10-D303

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-39
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

3. Orientation of the Deck Pickup [3]


Roller
When mounting the deck pickup roller [1] (direction
at the front, be sure that the marking [2] on the [2]
of rotation)
collar (silver) is toward the front and the mark-
ing [3] on the side of the roller is toward the
rear.

[1] Collar (silver) (front)

Figure 10-D304a
When mounting the deck pickup roller [4]
at the rear, be sure that the marking [5] on the
side of the roller and the marking [6] on the [5]
collar (silver) are toward the rear.
(direction
of rotation) [6]

Collar (gold) (rear)


[4]

Figure 10-D304b

[2] [3] [1]


4. Removing the Deck Pickup/
Feeding Roller
1) Remove the deck pickup unit. (See p. 10-
39.)
2) Turn over the deck pickup unit.
3) Remove the resin ring [1], and detach the
deck pickup/feeding roller [2] and the
drive belt [3] toward the front.

Figure 10-D305

10-40 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

5. Orientation of the Deck Pickup/ [3]


Feeding Roller
When mounting the deck pickup/feeding
roller [1], be sure that the belt pulley [2] is to-
ward the front.
When mounting the pickup/feeding roller
rubber piece to the pickup/feeding roller shaft,
be sure that the marking [3] is toward the rear.

[2] (front)
[1]

Figure 10-D306

6. Removing the Deck Separation [1]


Roller
1) Detach the deck from the copier, and re-
move the two screws [1]; then, detach the
separation roller support plate [2].
2) Remove the joint, and detach the deck
separation roller [3].

[2]

Figure 10-D307a

[3]

Figure 10-D307b

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-41
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

Caution:
The urethane sponge used on the deck
separation roller changes over time from
initial pink to orange and then to yellow,
accelerated if exposed to light. This is a
general characteristic of urethane
sponge, and does not affect its perfor-
mance, and the part is not identified by
color.

7. Adjusting the Pressure of the


Deck Separation Roller
If double feeding or pickup failure occurs
when the deck is used as the source of paper,
change the position of the deck separation
roller pressure spring:
• If pickup failure occurs, move the spring in
the direction of arrow A.
• If double feeding occurs, move the spring in
the direction of arrow B.

B
Figure 10-D308

10-42 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

8. Positioning the Deck Pickup [2]


Roller Releasing Solenoid
(SL101)
Take note of the position of the two fixing
screws [2] used for the deck pickup roller re-
leasing solenoid [1] before detaching it from
its support plate with reference to the scale
graduations on the plate. Or, mark the position
on the support plate with a scriber if you are
replacing the solenoid on its own (in this case,
be sure to mount it back to its initial position).

[1]

Figure 10-D309

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-43
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

E. Electrical System [1] [3]


1. Removing the Side Deck Driver
PCB
1) Detach the deck from the copier; then, re-
move the six screws, and detach the rear
cover.
2) Disconnect the nine connectors [1], and
remove the four screws [2]; then, detach
the deck driver PCB [3].

[2]

Figure 10-E301

2. Removing the Open Switch PCB


1) Detach the deck from the copier, and push [2]
down the latch plate [2] of the compart-
ment [1]; then, open the compartment [1].

(rear)

[1]
Figure 10-E302

10-44 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK

2) Remove the three screws [3], and discon- [3] [4] [5]
nect the connector [4]; then, detach the
upper front cover [5].

Figure 10-E303

3) Remove the two screws [6], and detach [7] [6]


the open switch PCB [7].

Figure 10-E304

Caution:
When mounting the upper front cover,
take care to avoid trapping the harness
by the open switch PCB and be sure to
connect all connectors.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 10-45
CHAPTER 11
INSTALLATION

This chapter provides instructions on how to install the copier and its accessories.

I. SELECTING THE SITE ............ 11-1 J. Changing the Size of the Front
II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION Deck (right and left) ........... 11-20
.................................................. 11-4 III. RELOCATING THE COPIER . 11-21
A. Unpacking ............................ 11-5 IV. INSTALLING THE CONTROL
B. Mounting the Scanner.......... 11-8 CARD V................................... 11-22
C. Mounting the Fixing Assembly V. INSTALLING THE REMOTE
............................................. 11-9 DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II ........ 11-27
D. Mounting the Corona Assemblies VI. INSTALLING THE COPY DATA
........................................... 11-10 CONTROLLER-A1 .................. 11-36
E. Checking the Developing A. Setting the Board ............... 11-36
Assembly ........................... 11-13 B. Installing to the Copier ....... 11-39
F. Mounting the Pick-Up Assembly C. Checking the Operation ..... 11-42
........................................... 11-14 VII. INSTALLING THE CASSETTE
G. Supplying Toner ................. 11-15 HEATER(for 120V model: Cassette
H. Mounting the ADF .............. 11-16 Heater Unit 15) ........................ 11-53
I. Checking Images/Operations A. Installing to the Copier ....... 11-53
(user mode)........................ 11-17

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

I . SELECTING THE SITE


The site of installation must meet the following conditions; if possible, pay a visit to the user's
before the delivery of the copier.

1. There must be a power outlet providing voltage as rated (+10%, -15%) and a means of ground-
ing the copier.

2. The temperature and the humidity of the site must be 15°C to 30°C and 5% to 80%, respec-
tively. In particular, avoid areas near water faucets, water boilers, humidifiers, and refrigera-
tors.

3. The area must not be near sources of fire, and the site must not be subject to dust or ammonium
gas. If direct sunshine is expected, provide curtains.

4. The level of ozone generated by the copier will not harm the health of the people working
around it. However, some individuals may find the odor unpleasant, and it is important to make
sure that the room is ventilated well.

5. The area must ensure that the copier's feet will remain in contact and the copier will remain
level.

6. The area must allow adequate space for operating the copier. (The copier must be at least 10 cm
away from any wall.)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-1
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

7. The area must have good current of air. If multiple copiers are expected, arrange so that the
exhaust from one copier will not be drawn into another. Further, avoid placing a copier near the
air vent of the room.

Exhaust

Wrong 1

Figure 11-101

In general, the silicone gas* generated by a copier tends to soil corona charging wires, shortening
the wire life. Keep in mind that this is particularly true in a low humidity environment.
*Result of silicone oil evaporating from the fixing assembly.

Wrong 2

Figure 11-102

11-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

Outline of Work Space


Use the following as a guide when planning a working area.
n Copier + Finisher

10 cm min.

50 cm min.
200 cm min. Copier

120 cm min.

50 cm min.
250 cm min.

n Copier + Finisher + Side Paper Deck

10 cm min.
110 cm min.

Copier
200 cm min.

120 cm min.
50 cm min.

310 cm min.

n Copier + Copy Tray

10 cm min.

50 cm min.
Copier
200 cm min.

50 cm min.
50 cm min.

180 cm min.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-3
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

II . UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION


Bringing in a piece of metal from a cold to warm place causes droplets of water to form on its
surface. This phenomenon is known as condensation, and a copier suffering from condensation can
turn out blank copiers.
If you are installing a copier after bringing it from a cold place, leave it alone for at least one
hour before unpacking, thereby allowing it to get used to the site temperature.

Caution:
A. Keep the following in mind when using stairs to deliver the copier in or out of the user's:
1. Remove the fixing/feeding unit, lower feeding path, and copy paper from the copier,
and transport them separately from the copier.
(If the ADF is installed, be sure to remove it also.)
2. When holding the copier, do not use the hand grips of the pickup assembly/delivery
assembly; instead, support it by grasping the four corners of its bottom.
B. Shift up the two adjusters (front) on the copier's bottom to make sure that they are un-
locked. Further, take care so that the adjusters will not slip off the copier during transpor-
tation.
C. Be sure to work in a group of three persons. When removing the pads, arrange one person
at the rear and one person at the front holding a hand grip so that the remaining one person
may remove the pads.
D. Keep the following in mind when moving the copier:
1. The hand grips are inside the shipping box.
2. Be sure that each hand grip has been fully inserted before lifting the copier. (The hand
grips can slip off. Take extra care.)
3. The copier weighs about 251 kg. Be sure to work in a group of four when lifting it.

11-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

A. Unpacking
No. Work Remarks
1 Unpack the copier. Remove the two grip
covers (front, rear) on the left side, and
shift up the grips. Grip Grip (front)
(rear)

Grip covers

2 Take out the grip from inside the shipping


box. Grip

3 Remove the grip cover (rear) from the


right side of the copier, and shift up the
grip at the rear. Grip
Grip cover

4 Open the upper right door, and slide the


face cover (small) to the rear to remove; Face cover (small)
then, detach the face cover (large).
Push in the grip removed in step 2) into
the slot at the front.

Grip

Face cover (large)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-5
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

No. Work Remarks


5 Holding the grips on the pick-up side
(front, rear), lift the copier slightly, and
remove the pad.
Likewise, holding the grips on the
delivery side, lift the copier slightly, and
remove the pad.
At this time, be sure to remove the plastic
bag.

6 Shift up the two adjusters (front) on the


bottom of the copier, and check to make
sure that they are unlocked.

7 Take out the two slope plates stored in the


middle of the skid.

Skid Slope plate

11-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

No. Work Remarks


8 Turn over the slope plates, and match the
pin holes of the skid and the pin holes of
the slope plates; then, fit the pins (one
each).
Holding the grips (front, rear) of the
copier, slide the copier down the slope
plates off the skid.

Caution:
The pins are taped in place to the
slopes.
Pin

Slope plates

9 Open the cardboard box that comes with


the copier, and take out the parts and sub
members. Check that none of the
attachments is missing.
10 Put away the grip used in step 4) in the
compartment behind the front cover.

Front cover Grip

11 Mount the face covers (right and left) that


have been removed.

Caution:
Before moving on to the next steps, check to see if there is condensation on the outside or the
inside of the copier right after taking it out of its shipping box. If condensation is found, stop
the work and wait until the copier has become used to the room temperature.
Start the steps that follow after making sure that the copier is free of condensation.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-7
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

B. Mounting the Scanner


No. Work Remarks
1 Remove the packaging tape from the
copier.
2 Open the ADF.
Remove the protective pad of the
copyboard glass.
3 Slide the scanner fixing to the front to
remove. (Store away the metal fixing for
possible future relocation of the machine.) Tape

Scanner fixing

11-8 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

C. Mounting the Fixing Assembly


No. Work Remarks
1 Open the front door.
2 Shift down the fixing/feeding assembly
releasing lever in the direction of the
arrow (left), and unlock the transfer/
separation charging assembly.
Slide out the fixing/feeding unit to the
front.

Fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever

Fixing/feeding unit

3 Remove the tag and the separation


assembly releasing member from above Separation assembly
Tape releasing member
the fixing/feeding assembly.

Caution:
Be sure to remove all traces of glue
(from tape) and foreign matter from
the feeding belt.

4 Remove the tag retaining tape, and


remove the two fixing nip releasing
screws at the front and the rear.

Screws

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-9
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

D. Mounting the Corona Assemblies


No. Work Remarks
1 Remove the screw, and detach the front
cover of the transfer separation charging
assembly.

Screw

Front cover of the transfer separation


charging assembly

2 Remove the metal fixing (1 screw), and Screw


disconnect the connector.
While pressing down on the front and the
rear of the transfer separation charging
assembly, pull it to the front then to the
upper left to remove.
Use alcohol solution, and clean the
transfer separation charging wire.
Metal fixing
Connector

3 Mount the transfer separation charging


assembly with the following in mind: Charging assembly
• The charging assembly must be
completely dry.
• The charging wire cleaning member is at
the center.
• The gut wire is not forced against the
transfer guide.
• The grounding plate is positioned on the
outside of the frame. (See the diagram
on the right.) Grounding plate

4 Connect the connector of the transfer


separation charging assembly, and mount
the metal fixing.
5 Mount the front cover of the transfer
separation charging assembly with a
screw.
Push in the fixing/feeding assembly until
it locks in place.

11-10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

No. Work Remarks


6 Remove the screw, and detach the front
cover of the primary charging assembly. Front cover of the primary charging assembly

Screw

7 Disconnect the connector and unlock the


primary charging assembly; then take out
Primary charging
the charging assembly. Connector
assembly
Clean the primary charging wire and the
grid wire using alcohol.

Unlock

8 Remove the screw, and detach the front


Front cover of the pre-transfer
cover of the pre-transfer charging
charging assembly
assembly.

Screw

9 Disconnect the connector; then, unlock Connector


the pre-transfer charging assembly, and Unlock
take out the charging assembly.
Clean the pre-transfer charging wire with
alcohol.

Pre-transfer charging assembly

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-11
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

No. Work Remarks


10 While keeping the lock released, push in
the primary charging assembly, and
connect the connector.
11 With the lock released, insert the
pre-transfer charging assembly, and One-way arm
connect the connector.

Caution:
Check to make sure that the one-
way arm of the transfer charging
assembly is on top of the eccentric
cam.

Eccentric cam

12 Mount the primary charging assembly


cover and the pre-transfer charging
assembly cover with one screw each.
13 Close the front door.

11-12 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

E. Checking the Developing Assembly


No. Work Remarks
1 Open the multifeeder tray, and remove the
Door tape
screw from the door tape.

2 Take out the developing assembly from


the shipping box that comes with the
copier.
Turn the developing assembly cylinder
gear by hand, and check the cylinder
surface for damage.
3 Holding the center of the developing
assembly (pocket of the grip), mount it in Developing
the copier. Then, connect two connectors. assembly

Caution:
When mounting the developing
assembly, try inserting it from high
above, taking care not to bring the
developing cylinder into contact
with the metal plate of the develop-
ing assembly base.

Connectors

4 Secure the developing assembly locking


unit in place with six screws (M4 × 6; Developing assembly
black; attachment). Screws
Screws

Screws

5 Mount the door tape of the multifeeder


with a screw.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-13
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

F. Mounting the Pick-Up Assembly


No. Work Remarks
1 Open the multifeeder door, and shift the
lever in the direction of the arrow. Then,
take out the pick-up roller releasing
spacer.

Pick-up roller
releasing spacer

2 Open the upper right door and the lower


right door. Then, push the releasing button
of the front deck (R), cassettes 3 and 4,
and slide them out half way.
3 Remove the three pick-up roller releasing
spacers.

Pick-up roller
releasing spacers

4 Secure the deck pressure plate to the front Deck pressure plate
deck (left) with an RS tightening screw
(M4 × 6; white).
screw

11-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

G. Supplying Toner
No. Work Remarks
1 Take out the toner cartridge from the
Toner cartridge
packaging box.

2 Remove the packing tape Packing tape

3 Open the hopper cover, and insert the


toner cartridge from the front of the Hopper cover
copier.

Caution:
Insert the toner cartridge until the
marking of the toner cartridge and
the marking of the copier come
into contact.

Marking
Toner cartridge Toner cartridge

4 Close the hopper cover.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-15
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

H. Mounting the ADF


No. Work Remarks
1 Remove the face plate of the ADF
connector found on the copier's back
2 Insert the ADF connector into the socket
on the back of the copier.

Connector

3 With the ADF open, mount the ADF


document tray with two RS tightening Screws
screws (M4 × 8; white).

Caution:
When mounting the ADF original
tray, fit the hook of the tray in the
copier's groove, and slide it to the
left before securing it in place with
screws. ADF document
tray
Hook

4 Attach the ADF manual feed instructions


label to the manual feed tray of the ADF. Label

11-16 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

I. Checking Images/Operations (user mode)


No. Work Remarks
1 Push the releasing buttons of the cassettes
3 and 4; then, slide out the cassettes to the
front, and remove the packing material.
2 Set the side plates of the cassettes 3 and 4
against the holes (A4/A3) of the marking Stops
M.
Fit the stops into the holes identified as
follows so that the bottom of the cassette
will not lift.
A: STMT-R Marking A
H: LTR-R
Marking H
Caution:
This step applies only if the user
does not use Inch-configured paper.

3 Connect the power plug to the outlet; • Adjust the contrast of the control panel using the
then, turn on the main power switch and control dial on the screen. Inform the user of how
the control panel power switch in the dial may be used.
sequence. • Check that the Supply Paper indicator has turned
on.
Caution: • Press the keys on the keypad and the Clear key to
In the case of a 230V model, make sure that the correct copy count is indicated.
connect the power plug that comes
with the unit to the copier before
making checks.

230V

4 Place copy paper into the cassettes Caution:


according to paper size. If you need to change the size of the deck
(R) or (L), see J. "Changing the Size of the
Front Deck (right and left)."

5 Attach the size stickers to the paper size


plate of the cassettes.
6 Set each cassette to the copier.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-17
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

No. Work Remarks


7 Attach cassette size stickers to the
cassettes to suit the user's needs.

Sticker

8 If you are not installing the finisher,


mount the copy tray.
9 When WAIT has ended, start service Starting Service Mode
mode. 1. Press the User Mode key.
2. Press '2' and '8' of the keypad at the same time.
Control Panel Key Operations 3. Press the User Mode key.
Select 'COPIER'.
â
Select 'FUNCTION'.
â
Select 'INSTALL'.
â
Select 'TONER-S'.
â
Check that the message 'CHECK THE Caution:
DEVELOPER' is indicated. Do not turn off the power while the machine
â is operating.
After making sure that the developing
assembly is properly mounted, press the
'OK' key.
â
The copier will start toner supply
operation (about 10 min).
â
When the operation ends, press the Reset
key twice to end service mode.

11-18 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

No. Work Remarks


10 (This step is for the 120V model only.) Document tray
Perform the following while toner is
being supplied.
• Mount the document tray to the copier's
right using the two stepped screws that
come with the unit.

Screws

11 When toner supply operation has ended, • Make sure that there is no abnormal noise.
place the Test Sheet on the copyboard, • Check the copy image at each default
and make copies to check copy images. reproduction ratio.
Images on the first ten copies or so may • Make sure that as many copies as set are made.
be soiled because of toner falling from the • If a discrepancy is noted between left and right,
drum separation claws. Soiling should correct by adjusting the rear height of the primary
stop as more copies are made. charging wire.
Check to make sure that pick-up • Make sure that all copying operations are correct.
operation from each cassette is normal.
12 Make double-sided copies to check the
operation.
13 Make settings for standard mode in user For details of service mode, see the VIII. in chapter
mode and service mode to suit the user's 13.
needs.
14 Press the Reset key twice to end service
mode.
15 Clean up the area around the copier.
16 Move the copier to the site of installation,
and fix the copier in place using the
adjusters.
17 If you need to install accessories, install
them now according to the instructions
given in the respective Installation
Procedures.
18 Fill out the Service Sheet.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-19
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

J. Changing the Size of the Front Deck (right and left)


No. Work Remarks
1 Press the releasing button, and slide out
the deck.
2 Remove the screw from the rear guide
plate, and fix the guide plate in position to Guide plate
suit the new size. Screw

3 Remove the screw (one each) from the Guide plates


left and right guide plates. Then, fix the
guide plates in position to suit the new
size.

Screws

4 Put paper in the deck.


5 Attach the new size sticker to the paper
size plate of the deck.
6 Slide the deck into copier.
7 Start service mode, and register the new For deck (R): COPIER>OPTION>CST>
paper size. P-SZ-C1
For deck (L): COPIER>OPTION>CST>
P-SZ-C2
A4: 6, B5: 15, LTR: 18

11-20 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

III . RELOCATING THE COPIER


If the copier must be relocated by truck or other means of transportation, perform the follow-
ing:

No. Work Checks Remarks


1 Make a copy in Direct.
2 Remove all paper from all
cassettes.
3 Turn off the power switch, and
disconnect the power plug from the
outlet.
4 Fix the No. 2 mirror mount in place Check to make sure that the
with the locking plate working No. 2 mirror mount will not
through the left cover side. move.
5 Remove the developing assembly. Transport the developing
assembly separately.
6 Tape the transfer charging
assembly, fixing/feeding unit
releasing lever, and lower feeding
assembly in place.
7 Tape the front door, hopper cover,
each cassette, and main right door
(upper/lower) in place.
8 Place A3 copy paper on the
copyboard glass, and tape the ADF
in place.

Caution:
A. Keep the following in mind when using stairs to deliver the copier in or out of the user's:
1. Remove the fixing/feeding unit, holding tray, and copy paper from the copier, and
transport them separately from the copier.
(If the ADF is installed, be sure to remove it also.)
2. When holding the copier, do not use the hand grips of the pickup assembly/delivery
assembly; instead, support it by grasping the four corners of its bottom.
B. Shift up the two adjusters (front) on the copier's bottom to make sure that they are un-
locked. Further, take care so that the adjusters will not slip off the copier during transpor-
tation.
C. When delivering the copier into/out of the user's, be sure to remove the accessories (side
paper deck, finisher).

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-21
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

IV . INSTALLING THE CONTROL CARD V


Check to make sure that the image/
memory lamp is off before turning off the
main power switch.

1. Removing the Control Panel


1) Remove the screw (one each), and detach Screws
the two magnet plates from the top of the
control panel. Magnet plate
Magnet plate

Figure 11-401

2) Remove the screw, and detach the pri- Primary charging


mary charging assembly cover. assembly cover

Screw

Figure 11-402

11-22 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

3) Disconnect the two connectors, and de- Connectors


tach the dust-proofing glass.

Dust-proofing glass
Figure 11-403

Process unit cover


4) Slide out the feeding assembly.
5) Remove the four screws, and detach the
process unit cover.

Screws (to prevent displacement)

Figure 11-404

6) Remove the five screws, and detach the Inside cover (upper)
inside cover (upper).

Screws
Figure 11-405

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-23
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

7) Remove the tree fixing screws, and detach Control panel


the control panel.

Screws
Figure 11-406

2. Before Installing the Control Card Screws


1) Remove the three screws, and detach the
control panel back cover.

Control panel back cover

Figure 11-407

Screw
2) Remove the screw, and then remove the
inlet face plate.

Inlet face plate

Figure 11-408

11-24 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

3. Installing the Control Card Screws Screws


1) Secure the control card in place to the con-
trol panel with four screws that come with
the unit.

Caution:
Secure the control card in place so that it
will not come into contact with the con-
trol panel cover when a card is inserted
through the slot.

Control Card V
Figure 11-409

Screw (w/ washer)


2) Lead the grounding wire through the wire Wire saddle
saddle, and secure it in place with one
screw (w/ washer) that comes with the Grounding wire
unit.

Figure 11-410

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-25
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

3) Disconnect the shorting connector from Shorting connector


the control panel cable; lead the cable of Wire saddle
the control card through the wire saddle,
and connect it to the connector. (You will Remove
not be using the shorting connector.)

Connect

Figure 11-411

4) Secure the control panel in place to the


copier. Control panel label
5) Remove the protective sheet from the con-
trol panel label of the control card.
6) Attach the control panel label to the con-
trol card.
7) Connect the connectors and mount the
covers that have been disconnected or re-
moved.
8) Turn on the copier's main power switch
and the control panel switch; then, check
the operation of the control card.

Figure 11-412

11-26 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

V. INSTALLING THE REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II


Keep the following in mind for the instal-
lation:

1. Observe all applicable regulations of the


country.
2. Check to make sure that the host copier
has been properly installed.
3. Disconnect the copier's power plug before
starting the work.
4. Identify the screws by type (length, diam-
eter) and location.
5. Prepare the computer at the service station
with the necessary settings.

1) Remove the two screws [2], and detach


the upper cover [1] of the controller. [1] [2]
[2]

Figure 11-501

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-27
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

2) Connect the connector [3] of the power [4]


supply unit to the connector [4] of the con-
troller as shown.

[3]

Figure 11-502

3) Remove the four screws [6], and detach


the face plate [5] from the copier's rear
cover.

[6] [5]

Figure 11-503

[7]

4) Connect the connector J521 [7] of the


copier and the cable of the controller.

Figure 11-504

11-28 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

5) Secure the controller in place on the [8]


copier's rear cover with four screws [8]
(that come with the unit). [8]

[8]
[8]

Figure 11-505

6) Remove the slack from the cable between


the copier and the controller; bundle the
excess length of the cable, and secure it in
place with the harness band [9].

[9]

Figure 11-506

7) Shift SW2-4 [10] of the DIP switch to ON


(so as to select IPC for communication
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

between controller and copier). [10]

LED1 LED2 LED3


2 6
BAT1

1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4

SW1

CN3 CN2

Figure 11-507

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-29
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

8) If IC6 [11] is mounted on the PCB of the


controller, shift SW2-7 of the DIP switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[12] to ON; otherwise, shift the bit to [12]
OFF.

Note 1: If the IC6 [11] is not mounted, you


need not mount one. LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1

Note 2: If the ROM (IC6) [15] is mounted or if LED5


SW2
1

SW4
1
SW3
1

you are replacing it, be sure to shift


LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4

SW2-7 of the DIP switch [12] to ON. SW1

[11]
9) Set the bits of the DIP switch (SW3) [13] CN3 CN2

on the PCB of the controller as shown in


Table 11-501. Figure 11-508

[13]

1 2 3 4 5 6
LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1

1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4

SW1

CN3 CN2

Figure 11-509

Switch Setting Description

SW3-1 SW3-2 Description


OFF OFF Set the modem signal transmission level to -16 dBm.
SW3-1 See
ON OFF Set the modem signal transmission level to -14 dBm.
SW3-2 right.
OFF ON Set the modem signal transmission level to -12 dBm.
ON ON Set the modem signal transmission level to -10 dBm.

SW3-3 OFF Keep it to OFF at all times.

ON Sets the line to push pulse.


SW3-4
OFF Sets the line to dial pulse.

ON Sets the dial pulse speed to 20PPS.


SW3-5
OFF Sets the dial pulse speed to 10PPS.

SW3-6 — Not used.

Table 11-501

11-30 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

10) Connect the power supply unit to the


power plug, and check to make sure that [14]
LED1 [14] (green) on the PCB of the con-
troller turns on.
LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1

1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4

SW1

CN3 CN2

Figure 11-510

11) Execute RAM clear. Set the bits of the


DIP switch [15] (SW2) on the PCB of the
controller as shown in the following table,
and push the push switch [16] (SW4) so
that LED5 [17] (red) turns on.

[15]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW2 bits Setting
SW2-1 OFF
SW2-2 OFF
SW2-3 ON [17] LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1

SW2-4 ON LED5
SW2
1

SW4
1
SW3
1

LED6
2

[16]
LED4

SW2-5 OFF IC6 CN4

SW1

SW2-6 OFF
CN3 CN2

SW2-7 See step 8).


SW2-8 OFF
Figure 11-511

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-31
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

12) When LED [17] (red) has turned on, set


the bits of the DIP switch [15] (SW2) on
the PCB of the controller as shown in the
following table, and push the push switch
[16] (SW4) so that LED5 [17] (red) turns
off to indicate that the RAM has been
cleared.
[15]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW2 bits Setting
SW2-1 OFF
SW2-2 OFF [17] LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1

SW2-3 OFF LED5


SW2
1 1
SW3
1
SW4
LED6
2
SW2-4 ON LED4
IC6
[16] CN4

SW1

SW2-5 OFF
SW2-6 ON CN3 CN2

SW2-7 See step 8).


SW2-8 OFF
Figure 11-512

13) Shift SW2-6 on the DIP switch [18] on the [18]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PCB of the controller to OFF.

LED1 LED2 LED3


2 6
BAT1

1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4

SW1

CN3 CN2

Figure 11-513

11-32 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

14) Connect the telephone line to the control-


ler. LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1

If the controller is connected on its own, 1 1 1


SW2 SW3
connect the modular jack cable to its con- LED5
LED6
SW4

2
nector [19] (LINE). LED4
IC6 CN4

If the extension function of the controller SW1

is to be used, connect the existing tele-


phone or the fax to the connector [20]
CN3 CN2
(TEL) of the controller, and connect the
telephone line to the connector [19]
(LINE) of the controller.
[20] [19]

Figure 11-514

15) Call the service station, and ask for initial


settings for the controller. (In response to LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1

a signal, LED 4 [21] (red) of the controller 1 1 1


SW2 SW3
should start to flash.) LED5 SW4

[21] LED6
LED4
IC6
2
CN4

SW1

CN3 CN2

Figure 11-515

16) Call the service station to find out whether


the initial settings work has ended. If it
ended in failure, repeat steps 11) through
13), i.e., RAM clear, and start initial set-
tings work once again.

Caution:
Be sure to check with the service station
to find out whether the settings are cor-
rect once again.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-33
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

17) Check to find out if the controller is ca-


pable of calling the service station. Press LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1

the push switch SW4 [16] on the PCB of 1 1 1


SW2 SW3
the controller. [22] LED5 SW4
LED6
[16] 2
In response, LED6 [22] (red) should turn LED4
IC6 CN4

on; it should turn off to indicate the end of SW1

transmission, and should flash if the trans- [23]


mission ends in failure.
CN3 CN2
If LED6 [22] is flashing, press the push
switch SW4 [16] once again to try re-
transmission. Figure 11-516
If the push switch SW1 [23] is pressed
while LED6 [22] is flashing, on the other
hand, the controller cancels transmission
attempts.

18) Check to make sure that the communica-


[24]
tion between the controller and the copier
is normal.
Connect the copier's power plug, and turn LED1 LED2 LED3

on the power switch; then, check to see 2 6


BAT1

that LED2 [24] (orange) flashes. LED5


SW2
1 1
SW3
1
SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4

SW1

CN3 CN2

Figure 11-517

11-34 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

19) Press the copier's Copy Start key, and [25]


check to make sure that LED3 [25] (pink)
flashes for each delivery.
LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1

1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4

SW1

CN3 CN2

Figure 11-518

20) Attach the switch settings label [26] to the


[2]
upper cover of the controller, and record
the latest switch settings. [26]
[1]
[2]

Figure 11-519

21) Secure the upper cover [1] of the control-


ler with two screws [2]. When doing so,
check to make sure that the cable of the
power supply unit is fitted to the cable
guide and it is not trapped by the upper
cover [1].

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-35
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

VI . INSTALLING THE COPY DATA CONTROLLER-A1


A. Setting the Board
1) Remove the two screws [2], and detach [1]
[2] [2]
the cover [1] of the controller.

Figure 11-A601

2) Set the DIP switches SW1 and SW5 on


the controller to suit the needs of the user.
2.1)Set SW1-4 of the DIP switch to suit the
type of the host copier.
2.2)Set SW5-2 DIP switch to suit the appro-
priate paper size if group control is
planned.
To use AB papers (A3, A4, B4, B5), keep
the bit to OFF.
To use Inch papers (11×17, LTR, LGL,
STMT), keep it to ON.

11-36 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

bit Position Description Remarks


SW1 1~3 OFF For normal operation.
4 OFF For serial communication. NP6030, NP6060, NP8530, NP9800
ON For IPC communication. Other than above.
5 ON For use of a central control device. Requires the Interface Board-B1.
For normal operation or for remote For remote control using a
OFF control using a commercially commercially available modem,
available modem. requires a modem and the Interface
Board-B1.
6 ON For RAM clear.
OFF For normal operation.
SW5 1 ON For factory adjustment.
OFF For normal operation.
2 ON For control of Inch papers (11×17, For controlling paper other than
LTR, LGL, STMT). those on the left, make settings in
OFF For control of AB papers (A3, A4, service mode. See C.10. "Checking
B4, B5). the Operation."

3 ON For service mode.


OFF For normal operation.
4 ON For group control. *1
OFF For no group control.
5,6 OFF Not used.
*1: Set SW5-4 (DIP switch) to OFF if the Control Card-V is used or remote control only by the Copy
Data Controller-A1 is used (i.e., not using ID input, paper size control, toner color control, copy mode
control, paper type control).

Table 11-A601

2.3)If group control is not used, shift SW5-4 LED1 LED2 LED3
SW2
(DIP switch) to OFF.
Photocoupler

SW3
To install the Interface Board-B1, Com- LED4 LED5 LED6
munication Control Board-A1, or Inter-
SRAM
EPROM

face Board-A1, see the descriptions under JA1

"Setting the Board" in their respective In- JC8 JB2


JA2
JC5 JC6
stallation Procedures. CPU JC9
JB1

J5 IPC
6 1 6 1 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

SW1 SW5
6 1 6 1

Figure 11-A602

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-37
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

3) Set the jumper connectors (JA1, JA2, JB1,


JB2) on the controller to suit the needs of
LED1 LED2 LED3
the user. SW2

Photocoupler
SW3
LED4 LED5 LED6

SRAM
EPROM
JA1 JA1
JC8 JB2
JA2
JC5 JC6
JC9 JA2
CPU
J5 IPC
6 1 6 1 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

JB2 JB1

Figure 11-A603

A: If the Communication Control Board-A1


or the Interface Board-B1 is to be con-
nected (requiring the Power Supply-A1).

JB2 JB1

Figure 11-A604

B: If the Communication Control Board-A1


or the Interface Board-B1 is not to be con-
nected (not requiring the Power Supply-
A1). JA1

JA2

Figure 11-A605

11-38 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

B. Installing to the Copier


Keep the following in mind for the instal-
lation:
1. Observe all applicable regulations of the
country.
2. Check to make sure that the host copier
has been properly installed.
3. Disconnect the copier's power plug before
starting the work.
4. Identify the screws by type (length, diam-
eter) and location.
5. Prepare the computer at the service station
with the necessary settings.

1) Remove the four screws [2], and detach


the face plate [1] of the copier's rear cover.

[2] [1]

Figure 11-B601

2) If the Card Reader-A1 is to be installed,


connect the card reader relay cable (9P) to
J4 of the controller.

J4

Cable for the card reader

Figure 11-B602

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-39
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

3) Connect the 8P connector [8] of the con-


troller and the 8P connector [9] (J521) of
the copier's DC controller.

[9]
[8]

Figure 11-B603

4) If the Card Reader-A1 is to be installed,


connect the relay cable (9P) for the card
reader connected to J4 of the controller to
the 9P connector (J520) of the copier's DC
control.
5) Secure the controller to the copier's rear [10]
cover with four screws [10]. (Use the
screws that come with the unit.)

[10]

Figure 11-B604

11-40 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

6) Remove the slack from the cable between


the copier and the controller. Bundle the
excess length of the cable, and secure it
with the harness band [11].

[11]

Figure 11-B605

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-41
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

C. Checking the Operation


1) If the Communications Control Board-A1
or the Interface Board-B1 is not to be con-
nected (not requiring the Power Supply-
A1), go to step 4).
Connect the connector [1] of the power
supply to the connector [2] of the control- [2]
ler securely as shown.
Check to make sure that the cord is in the
groove of the board.

[1]
Groove of the board

Figure 11-C601

2) Connect the power supply to the power


plug, and check to make sure that LED1
of the controller turns on.

LED1
LED1 LED2 LED3
SW2

Photocoupler
SW3
LED4 LED5 LED6
SRAM
EPROM

JA1
JC8 JB2
JA2
JC5 JC6 JB1
CPU JC9
J5 IPC
6 1 6 1 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

Figure 11-C602

11-42 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

3) Turn on the copier's main switch, and


check to make sure that LED2 of the con- LED2 LED3
troller flashes. LED1 LED2 LED3
Make a copy, and check to make sure that SW2

Photocoupler
LED3 flashes during copying operation. SW3

LED4 LED5 LED6

SRAM
EPROM
JA1
JC8 JB2
JA2
JC5 JC6 JB1
CPU JC9
J5 IPC
6 1 6 1 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

Figure 11-C603

4) If the Communications Board-A1 or the LED1 LED2 LED3


Interface Board-B1 is to be connected (re-
quiring the Power Supply-A1), go to 5). LED1 LED2 LED3
SW2
Turn on the copier's main switch, and

Photocoupler
SW3
check to make sure that LED1 of the con- LED4 LED5 LED6
troller turns on and LED2 turns off.

SRAM
EPROM
Make a copy, and check to make sure that JA1

LED3 flashes during copying operation. JC8 JB2


JA2
JC5 JC6 JB1
CPU JC9
J5 IPC
6 1 6 1 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

Figure 11-C604

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-43
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

5) If group control is not planned, go to step LED1 LED2 LED3


SW2
11).

Photocoupler
SW3
If group control is planned, set the input LED4 LED5 LED6

method, control mode, and paper size to

SRAM
EPROM
suit the needs of the user. JC8 JB2
JA1

Shift SW5-3 of the DIP switch of the con- JC5 JC6 JB1
JA2

troller to ON. CPU JC9


IPC
J5
6 1 6 1 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

6 1

SW5-3

Figure 11-C605

6) Connect the connector [3] of the Numeric [4]


Keypad-A1 to the connector J3 [4] of the
controller. [3]

Figure 11-C606

11-44 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

7) Press the switch (SW2) on the controller


to start service mode. SW2

LED1 LED2 LED3


SW2

Photocoupler
SW3
LED4 LED5 LED6

SRAM
EPROM
JA1
JC8 JB2
JA2
JC5 JC6 JB1
CPU JC9
J5 IPC
6 1 6 1 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

Figure 11-C607

8) Select the appropriate input method:


8.1)Input by keys on the Numeric Keypad-A1
for 'card' or 'ID' (initially, 'card').
8.2)To change from 'card' to 'ID,' perform the
following using the keys on the keypad:
To change 'ID' to 'card,' on the other hand
(requiring the Card Reader-A1), go to 8-
4).
MANAGE-CARD is indicated.
8.3)Press the '2' key, and press the ENT key. Code Input method
MANAGE-ID is indicated. 1 Card
8.4) To change to card input,
When MANAGE-ID is indicated, press 2 ID
the '1' key, and then press the ENT key.
MANAGE-CARD will be indicated. Table 11-C601

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-45
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

Caution:
1. If SW5-4 of the DIP switch on the
controller is set to OFF, group control
is disabled, and the following is indi-
cated:

Figure 11-C608
2. If the copier's memory is used for ID
input (using the copier on its own), the
exiting ID Nos. may be used for the
controller. Perform the following:

n Drawing the ID Nos.


a) Set the DIP switch (SW1) of the controller bit Position
as follows: SW1 1,2 ON
b) Press the switch SW4 on the controller.
In response, LED5 turns on momentarily. 3 OFF
c) Check LED5; it should turn on to indicate
that the data has been drawn. Table 11-C602
Otherwise, LED5 will flash. Press the
switch SW4 once again, and see that LED1 LED2 LED3
LED5 turns on.
The copier cannot discharge paper while
LED1 LED2 LED3
data is being drawn. SW2
d) Set the DIP switch (SW1) on the control SW3

as follows (LED5 should turn off): LED4 LED5 LED6

JA1
LED5 JB2
JA2
JB1

6 1 6 1 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

SW1-3 SW1-2 SW1-1 SW4

Figure 11-C609

bit Position
SW1
1, 2, 3 OFF

Table 11-C603

11-46 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

9) Select the appropriate control mode as fol-


lows:
9.1)Select the appropriate control mode using
the Numeric Keypad-A1.
v
Use v / so that FORMAT=1 is indicated.
9.2)Select the appropriate control No. to suit
the host copier and the needs of the user
(initially, '1').
9.3)For example, to select '3',
1. FORMAT=1 is indicated. To change
the initial setting '1' to '3',
Press the '3' key.
To clear the input, press the 'c' key for
retry.
To cancel, press the ESC key.
2. When FORMAT=3- is indicated,
press the ESC key.
3. FORMAT=3- is indicated, and the
cursor flashes for a while to indicate
that formatting is taking place. When
the cursor stops to flash, the control
mode is set to '3'.

Caution:
When the control mode has been
changed, the unit price, upper limit,
counter reading, and ID Nos. are initial-
ized, requiring input of the appropriate
settings once again.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-47
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

10) Select the paper size for control as fol-


lows:
10.1) As needed, change the paper size for
control using the DIP switch on the con-
troller and the Numeric Keypad-A1. To
use the existing size, go to step 11).
v
10.2) Use the v / key to scan through the paper
sizes. (Note that control paper size 5
'OTH' cannot be changed and, therefore,
is not indicated).
EX 1:
1. SIZE 1=A3 is indicated.
2. Press the v key.
3. SIZE 2=A4 is indicated.
4. Press the v key.
5. SIZE 3=B4 is indicated.
6. Press the v key.
7. SIZE 4=B5 is indicated.
v
8. Press the key.
9. SIZE 3=B4 is indicated.
v
10. Press the key.
11. SIZE 2=A4 is indicated.

EX 2:
v
1. Press the v / key to indicate
SIZE 3=B4
2. Find the size of LGL form the conver-
sion code tables (Table 11-C604), and
press '1' and '3'.
3. SIZE 3=13 is indicated.
4. Press the ENT key.
5. SIZE 3=LGL is indicated.

Caution:
1. For SIZE 1 through 4, the same paper size code cannot be used more than once.
2. The counter readings will not be cleared by changing the size.

11-48 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

n Conversion Code Table

Size Code Size Code


B5 1 Postcard (Jpn) 25
FOOLS 2 U LARGE2 26
A4 3 GLTR 27
B4 5 10×8 28
A3 7 G LGL 29
U SMALL (US) 8 K LGL 33
STMT 9 OFFICIO 35
U LARGE (UL) 10 E OFFICIO 36
LTR 11 A OFFICIO 37
LGL 13 B OFFICIO 38
LDR (11×7) 15 A LT R 39
A5 17 A LGL 41
A FOOLS 18 12×18 48
A6 19 B3 49
FOLIO 21 A2 50
COMPUTER 23 17×22 51
U SMALL 2 24 18×24 52

Table 11-C604

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-49
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

11) Check the DIP switch settings as follows:


11.1) Set SW5-3 (DIP switch) of the control- S1 S5
ler to OFF.
v
11.2) Using the v / key, indicate the settings SW1-1 SW1-3 SW1-5 SW5-1 SW5-3 SW5-5
of the DIP switches (SW1, SW5) of the SW1-2 SW1-4 SW1-6 SW5-2 SW5-4 SW5-6
controller.
: bits are at ON.

: bits are at ON.

Figure 11-C610

11.3) Check the settings of the DIP switches


(SW1, SW5) of the controller. (See Table
11-A601.)
If the settings are wrong, go back to "Set-
ting the Board" to make the appropriate SW2
settings.
If you are setting the Interface Board-B1, LED1 LED2 LED3
SW2

Photocoupler
Interface Board-A1, or Communications SW3
Control Board-A1 (accessories), see its LED4 LED5 LED6

respective Installation Procedure. SRAM


EPROM

11.4) Press the switch (SW2). JC8 JB2


JA1

JA2
JC5 JC6 JB1
CPU JC9
J5 IPC
6 1 6 1 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

6 1

SW5-3

Figure 11-C611

11-50 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

11.5) Check to make sure that the Numeric


Keypad-A1 indicates the following; then,
disconnect the keypad.

Figure 11-C612

12) Attach the switch settings label [6] to the


cover [5] of the controller, and record the [7]
latest switch settings on the label.

[6]
[5]

[7]

Figure 11-C613

13) Secure the cover of the controller with


two screws [7]. When doing so, check to
make sure that the cable of the power sup-
ply unit is fitted to the cable guide and is
not trapped by the upper cover.
14) To Connect the Control Card Printer-A1,
connect it to the connector J4 of the con-
troller. (As necessary, use a relay cable.)

J4

Figure 11-C614

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-51
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

15) If the cable is all inside the controller, end


the work by attaching the petty-pull [8] to [8]
the lower right of the copier's back.

Copy Data
Controller-A1

Figure 11-C615

16) Fit the cable used to connect the controller


to the petty-pull.
17) Check to make sure that no cord is trapped
by the copier or the sorter casters.

11-52 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

VII . INSTALLING THE CASSETTE HEATER


(for 120V model: Cassette Heater Unit 15)
A. Installing to the Copier

Necessary Parts
Heater assembly
1pc. FG2-9812-000 (for 220/
240V model use)
Heater cable guide
1pc. FG2-9195-000 Screw
Screw 2pc. XA9-0628-000
Screw 1pc. XB6-7400-609

Harness unit
Heater unit Screws

Figure 11-701

1) Turn off the copier, and disconnect its Heater


power plug.
Hook at
2) Mount the heater cable guide to the heater Connector
the rear.
with a screw, and connect the connector.

Heater cable
Screw guide

Figure 11-702

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-53
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

3) Remove the copier’s rear cover. DC controller PCB


4) Disconnect the connector of the DC con- Connectors
troller PCB, and free it from the wire
saddle.
Remove the three fixing screws, and de-
tach the DC controller PCB.

Screw
Screw Screw

Figure 11-703

5) Press releasing button of the front deck Stopper


(R), and slide out it. Screwdriver
Detach the stoppers from both ends, and
take out the deck (R).
Take out the front deck (L) in the same
way.

Stopper

Front deck (R)

Screwdriver
Figure 11-704

11-54 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

6) Slide out the cassettes 3 and 4, and re-


move the inside cassettes.

Inside cassette
Remove.

Figure 11-705

7) Insert the heater unit (to which the har-


ness unit is secured) so that it will be un-
der the holding plate found between the
copier's cassettes 3 and 4.

Heater
Slide inside.
Figure 11-706

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-55
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

Caution 1:
Check to make sure that the hook at the
rear of the heater unit is in the groove.
Heater unit
Hook on the groove.

Figure 11-707

Caution 2:
Check to make sure that the connector at
the tip of the heater cable guide is in the
groove of the copier rear plate and, in
addition, that the heater cable guide is
securely in the groove. Fit in the
groove.

Harness unit

Figure 11-708

11-56 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION

8) Secure the heater unit in place with two


screws.

Heater unit

Screws
Figure 11-709

9) Connect the connector of the heater unit Connector (heater side)


and the copier's connector.

Connect.

Connector (copier side)

Figure 11-710

10) Mount the DC controller PCB and the rear


cover.
11) Set all cassettes.
12) Connect the power plug, and turn on the
power switch.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 11-57
CHAPTER 12
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

This chapter discusses those of the copier's parts that require inspection and
maintenance.

I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED IV. SCHEDULED SERVICING ITEMS


PARTS ...................................... 12-1 .................................................. 12-8
II. DURABLES TABLE .................. 12-2 A. Copier .................................. 12-8
A. Copier .................................. 12-2 B. Work Steps ........................ 12-11
B. Side Paper Deck .................. 12-5
III. SCHEDULED SERVICING CHART
.................................................. 12-6

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

I . PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS


To maintain the performance of the machine at a specific level, you must replace the parts in
Table 12-101 on a periodical basis. (Once they fail, they will appreciably affect the machine regard-
less of external change or damage.)
Schedule the replacement so that it will coincide with a periodical visit.

As of December 1998
No. Parts name Parts No. Q’ty Life (copies) Remarks
1 Primary, pre-transfer, separation
FY3-0030-000 AR 250,000
charging wire
2 Primary grid wire FY1-0883-000 AR 500,000
3 Thermistor FY7-7463-000 1 500,000
4 No. 2 thermistor FH7-7464-000 1 500,000
5 Thermal switch FH7-6281-000 1 1,000,000
Note: The above values are estimates only, and are subject to change based on future data.

Table 12-101

[1] Transfer/separation
charging assembly [1] Primary charging assembly

[1] Pre-transfer
charging assembly

[4] No. 2 thermistor

[3] Thermistor

[5] Thermal switch

[2] Primary grid wire

Figure 12-101

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 12-1
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

II . DURABLES TABLE
Table 12-201 shows the parts that may require replacement because of deterioration or damage
at least once over the period of machine warranty. Replace them when they have failed.

A. Copier
As of December 1998
No. Parts name Parts No. Q’ty Life (copies) Remarks
1 Scanning lamp FH7-3347 1 200hr
2 Developing cylinder FB4-1819 1 1,000,000
3 Developing assembly roll FS5-6579 2 1,000,000
4 Cleaner separation claw FB4-8018 3 250,000
5 Cleaning blade FB4-1596 1 1,000,000 Use both edges;
one for 500,000
copies. Apply
toner after
replacement.
6 Primary charging assembly FG6-2015 1 1,000,000
7 Transfer/separation charging FG6-2045 1 1,000,000
assembly
8 Pre-transfer charging assembly FG6-2016 1 1,000,000
9 Primary charging wire cleaner 1 FF2-3552 2 250,000
10 Primary charging wire cleaner 2 FF2-3551 2 250,000
11 Transfer charging wire cleaner 1 FF5-6883 1 500,000
12 Transfer charging wire cleaner 2 FF5-6884 1 500,000
13 Separation charging wire FF5-7891 1 250,000
cleaner
14 Pre-transfer charging wire FF5-3090 1 500,000
cleaner
15 Pre-transfer charging assembly FF5-7934 1 500,000
scraper
16 Upper fixing roller FB2-7200 1 500,000
17 Lower fixing roller FB4-2220 1 500,000
18 Fixing cleaning belt FB4-7491 1 500,000
19 Insulating bush (front, rear) FB2-7239 2 500,000 Simultaneously
with upper
fixing roller.
20 Delivery upper separation claw FC1-0391 6 500,000

Table 12-201-1

12-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

No. Parts name Parts No. Q’ty Life (copies) Remarks


21 Delivery lower separation claw FA2-9037 2 1,000,000
22 Pickup roller (deck, cassette) FB4-2033 8 250,000 Actual copies
made; may be
checked in
service mode.
(Use 2 for each
holder.)
23 Pickup/feeding roller (deck, FB4-2034 8 250,000 Actual copies
cassette) made; may be
checked in
service mode.
(Use 2 for each
holder.)
24 Separation roller (deck, cassette) FB2-7777 4 250,000 Actual copies
made; may be
checked in
service mode.
(Use 2 for each
holder.)
25 Pickup roller (manual feed tray) FB4-2033 2 120,000 Actual copies
made; may be
checked in
service mode.
26 Pickup/feeding roller (manual FB4-2035 2 120,000 Actual copies
feed tray) made; may be
checked in
service mode.
27 Separation roller (manual feed FB2-7545 1 120,000 Actual copies
tray) made; may be
checked in
service mode.
28 Decurling guide (Rear) FF5-9544 1 500,000
29 Decurling guide (Center) FF5-9413 1 500,000
30 Decurling guide (Front) FF5-9543 1 500,000

Table 12-201-2

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 12-3
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

[3] [2]
[5] [24]
[26]
[27]
[1] [25]

[3]

[23]
[23]
[24]
[24] [4]
[22] [23]
[24]
[22]
[23]
[22] [24]

[22]

Figure 12-201a

[12] [9]
[11] [10]
[13] [10]
[9]

[7]
[14]
[6]
[15]
[8]

[18]
[16]
[19]
[20]

[19]
[20] [17]
[21]

[28]
[29]
[30]

Figure 12-201b

12-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

B. Side Paper Deck


As of November 1998
No. Parts name Parts No. Q’ty Life (copies) Remarks
1 Side paper deck pickup roller FB4-2033-000 2 250,000
2 Side paper deck feeding roller FB4-2034-000 2 250,000
3 Side paper deck separation FB2-7777-020 1 250,000
roller

Table 12-202

[1]

[2]

[3]

Figure 12-202

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 12-5
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

III . SCHEDULED SERVICING CHART


Caution:
1. As a rule, provide scheduled servicing every 250,000 copies.
2. Before setting out for a visit, check the Service Book, and take any parts expected to
require replacement.
3. Clean each charging wire with alcohol; then, mount it back only after making sure that it
has dried.

As of November 1998
No. Work Checks Remarks
1 Report to the person in charge. Check the general conditions.
2 Record the counter reading. Check the faulty copies.
3 Make test copies. Check the following: Standards (single-sided
a. image density copying)
b. background for soiling Leading edge: 4.0+1.5,
c. characters for clarity -1.0mm
d. leading edge margin Left/right: 2.5 ±1.5mm
e. fixing, registration, and Trailing edge:
back for dirt 2.5±1.5mm
4 Clean the charging assemblies: Dry wipe with lint-free
• charging wire (primary, pre-transfer, paper; then, clean with
transfer/separation) alcohol.
• grid wire (primary charging
assembly)
• shielding plate
• roll electrode

Points to Note When Cleaning/Replacing the Charging Wires and


Replacing the Charging Wire Cleaner

Check to make sure that the charging wire is at the center of the cleaner at the end of the
following work; otherwise, image faults may occur:
a. Cleaning the charging wire.
b. Replacing the charging wire.
c. Moving the charging cleaner by hand.
d. Replacing the charging wire cleaner.

Good example Bad example

Table 12-301-1

12-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

No. Work Checks Remarks


5 Clean the optical path: Use a blower brush; if
• No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors necessary, use alcohol.
• dust-proofing glass
• original reflecting plate
• standard white plate
6 Scanner system Check the tension of the cable; Check and adjust the
• scanner cable adjust it as necessary. Clean scanner cable only after
• scanner rail the sliding area, and apply the first 250,000 copies.
silicone oil (FY9-6011).
7 Check the waste toner case. If the waste toner case is half
full or more, dispose of the
waste toner in a plastic bag, or
replace the waste toner case.
8 Clean the filters: Remove the dust from
• ozone filter the surfaces of the
• dust-proofing filter filters.
9 Developing assembly Clean the developing
• developing assembly rolls assembly rolls.
10 Clean the pickup/feeding assembly:
• transfer guide (upper/lower) plate
• registration roller (upper/lower)
• feeding belt
• various feeding rollers
11 Clean the fixing/delivery assembly:
• separation claw (upper/lower)
• various feeding rollers
• inlet guide
• cleaning belt (check)
• inlet guide oil pan
• thermistor
• No. 2 thermistor
• thermal switch
12 Clean the cleaning assembly:
• side scraper
13 Clean the duplexing unit:
• duplexing horizontal registration
sensor
14 Clean the copyboard glass.
15 Make test copies.
16 Make sample copies.
17 Put the sample copies in order, and
clean up the area around the machine.
18 Record the latest counter reading.
19 Fill out the Service Sheet, and report to
the person in charge.

Table 12-301-2

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 12-7
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

IV . SCHEDULED SERVICING ITEMS


Caution:
Do not use solvents/oils other than those shown herein.

A. Copier
: Clean : Replace : Oil : Adjust : Inspect
Intervals
Unit Part Instal- every every every every Remarks
lation 250,000 500,000 750,000 1,000,000
Externals/ Copyboard glass
controls Ozone filter Remove the dust from
(FM2, FM8) the surface of the filter.
See Figure 12-401.
Dust-proofing filter Remove the dust from
(FM1, FM3, FM4; the surface of the filter.
FM10, FM14) See Figure 12-401.
Scanner Scanner cable Check/adjust for the
first 250,000 copies.
Scanner rail Apply silicone oil
(FY9-6011).
Optical path No. 1 through
No. 3 mirrors
Dust-proofing glass
Reflecting plate
Standard white plate
Charging Charging wire
assembly (primary, pre-
transfer,
transfer/separation)
Grid wire (primary)
Charging assembly
shield plate (each
assembly)
Roller electrode

Table 12-401-1

12-8 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

: Clean : Replace : Oil : Adjust : Inspect


Intervals
Unit Part Instal- every every every every Remarks
lation 250,000 500,000 750,000 1,000,000
Photosensitive Photosensitive Use alcohol and drum
drum drum cleaning powder (CK-
0429); for steps, see
B.2. "Work Steps."
Slip ring electrode Clean the following with
(for drum heater) alcohol; then, apply
grease (FY9-6008):
• electrode of the slip
ring
• protrusion of
electrode
• static brush
Developing Developing cylinder
assembly Developing
assembly roll
Cleaner Toner replace the For details of work,
(rear/front) see item 1 of
B.1."Work."
Magnet roller For details of work,
see item 2 of
B.2."Work."
Fixing Inlet guid
assembly
Cleaning belt Remove the slack at
installation.
Oil receptacle
Thermistor
No. 2 thermistor
Thermal switch
Delivery Separation claw
assembly (upper/lower)
Waste toner Waste toner case Check/remove.
collecting
mechanism
Pickup/feeding Transfer guide
assembly
Registration roller
(upper, lower)
Feeding belt
Various feeding
rollers
Duplexing Duplexing
assembly horizontal
registration sensor

Table 12-401-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 12-9
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Ozone filter for FM8

Ozone filter Dust-proofing filter for FM4


for FM2
Dust-roofing filter
for FM10

Dust-proofing filter
for FM1
Dust-proofing filter
for FM14
Dust-proofing filter
for FM3

Figure 12-401

12-10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

B. Work Steps
Perform the following for the parts associ-
ated with the drum:
1. Work 1
a. Cleaning the toner pan
1) Slide out the fixing feeding unit from the
copier.
2) Unlock the slide rails, and slide the fixing/
feeding unit farther out.

Figure 12-402
3) Remove the screw [3], and remove the
toner pan (rear, front); then, remove the Cleaning assembly
toner from the toner pan.

[3]

Toner pan

Figure 12-403

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 12-11
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

Cleaning assembly

[3]

Toner pan

Figure 12-404

2. Work 2 [3]
a. Cleaning the photosensitive drum. CK-0429 [2]
b. Removing the toner from the magnet
roller assembly.
c. Reversing/replacing the cleaning
blade.

Caution:
Do not rotate the magnet roll drive as-
sembly during work. Otherwise, waste
toner may fall through the cleaner as-
sembly.

1) Slide out the process unit. (Be sure to


place the drum protective sheet over the
fixing/feeding unit.)
2) Take out the photosensitive drum.
3) Moisten lint-free paper [1] with 5 to 10 cc [1]
of alcohol [2]; then, pour 0.2 to 0.3 g of
drum cleaning powder (CK-0429) [3] on Figure 12-405
the lint-free paper.

12-12 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

4) While butting the lint-free paper relatively


strongly against the photosensitive drum,
wipe the surface of the drum from the
front to the rear and from the rear to the
front.

5 to 10cm
Figure 12-406

Caution:
• Keep the widths of cleaning to 5 to 10
cm in the peripheral direction of the
drum.
• Move the lint-free paper back and forth
15 to 20 times over a single area.
Forcing the lint-free paper will not af-
fect the life of the drum.

5) When the alcohol has evaporated, dry


wipe the surface with lint-free paper. If
the area is uneven, go back to step 4), and
increase the back-and-forth movements.
6) Rotate the drum for the width (5 to 10
cm), and repeat steps 3) through 5) until
the entire area of the surface has been
cleaned.
7) Remove the cleaning blade assembly.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 12-13
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

8) Insert a ruler [6] between the magnet roll


[4] and the scraper [5], and move it from
the front to the rear and then from the rear
to the front to break any cake of toner.

[6]

[5] [4]

Figure 12-407

9) Remove the cleaning blade from the


cleaning blade assembly.
10) Put the reversed or new cleaning blade [7] Butted against the edge.
against the edge of the rear of the blade
retaining plate [8].

[7]
[8]

Figure 12-408

Caution:
When butting the cleaning blade, be sure
to apply force to eliminate any gap.

12-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

11) Tighten the screws on the blade retaining


plate in the order indicated.

• Tighten temporarily for screws 1


through 5.

Caution 1:
While the blade is held in place with the
plate, tighten the screws temporarily.

• Tighten fully for screws 6 trough 10.


Figure 12-409

Caution 2:
When mounting the cleaning blade, be Blade auxiliary plate
sure to put the blade auxiliary plate be- Blade back plate
tween the blade support plate and the Blade support plate
blade back plate.

Figure 12-410

Caution 3:
After mounting the cleaning blade, ro-
tate the drum; if toner slips through the
blade, repeat the foregoing steps. If the
fault is not corrected, replace the blade.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 12-15
CHAPTER 13
TROUBLESHOOTING

I. GUIDE TO TROUBLESHOOTING A. Copy Paper Jams ............13-118


TABLES .................................... 13-1 B. Faulty Feeding .................13-123
A . Image Adjustment Basic VI . ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS
Procedure ............................ 13-3 OF PARTS ............................13-124
B . Points to Note for Scheduled A. Clutches ...........................13-124
Servicing .............................. 13-6 B. Solenoids .........................13-126
II . STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS C. Motors ..............................13-128
.................................................. 13-7 D. Fans .................................13-130
A. Adjusting Images ................. 13-7 E. Sensors 1 .........................13-132
B. Scanner System ................ 13-14 F. Sensors 2 .........................13-134
C. Image Formation System... 13-15 G. Switches ...........................13-136
D. Pickup/Feeding System ..... 13-18 H. Counters, Heaters, Fuses, and
E. Fixing System .................... 13-34 Others ..............................13-138
F. Laser Exposure System..... 13-37 I. PCBs ................................13-140
G. Electrical Parts ................... 13-41 J. Side Paper Deck ..............13-142
III . TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE K. Variable Registers (VR), Light-
FAULTS .................................. 13-63 Emitting Diodes, and Check Pins
A. Making Initial Checks ......... 13-63 by PCB .............................13-146
B. Sample Image Faults ......... 13-65 VII . UPGRADING THE COPIER
C. Troubleshooting Image Faults ..............................................13-154
........................................... 13-67 A. Replacing the DIMM ........13-154
IV . TROUBLESHOOTING B. Downloading ....................13-157
MALFUNCTIONS .................... 13-82 VIII. SERVICE MODE ..................13-160
A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions IX . SELF DIAGNOSIS ................13-250
........................................... 13-82 A. Copier Self Diagnosis ......13-250
V . TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING B. ADF Self Diagnosis ..........13-258
PROBLEMS ..........................13-118 C. Finisher Self Diagnosis ....13-259

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I . GUIDE TO TROUBLESHOOTING TABLES


The troubleshooting tables used in this chapter are a modified (tabulated) version of generally
used flow charts.
Study the following:
EX. AC power is absent.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Power plug 1 Is the power plug connected to the NO Connect the power plug.
power outlet?
Covers 2 Is the front cover closed securely? NO Close the front cover.

Power supply 3 Is the rated voltage present at the NO Inform the user that the
power outlet? problem is not of the copier.
4 Is the rated voltage present between YES Go to step 6.
J1-1 and J1-2? (J1 is near the power
cord mount.)

The rest is omitted.

n If you want to find out possible causes (faulty part), see the column under "Cause."
In the case of the above table, the power plug may be disconnected, the covers may not be
closed firmly, the main power may be absent, and so forth.
n If you want to find out the checks or action to take, make checks according to the steps under
"Checks" and perform the work under "Action."
Answer the question under each check to make Yes or No, and take the appropriate action.
Otherwise, go to the next step, and make the check under it.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-1
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<Step> <Checks> <Yes/No> <Action>

Is the power
NO Connect the
1 plug connected to the
power plug.
power outlet?

YES

Are the front Close the front


2 NO
door and the covers door and the
closed firmly? covres.

YES

Is the rated Inform the user


3 NO
voltage at the power that the problem is
outlet? not of the copier.

YES

The rest is omitted.

n You may come across such instructions as "Measure the voltage between J109-1 (+) and J109-
2 (-) on the DC controller PCB" when you are asked to check voltage using a meter.
The instructions mean that you are to connect the + or - probe of the meter to its respective
terminal; for example, for J109-1 (+) and J109-2 (-), connect the positive probe to J109-1 and
the negative probe to J109-2.

13-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A . Image Adjustment Basic Procedure

1 Checking the Printer Side (1/2)

<Making Pre-Checks> <Making Image Initial Checks> <Checking the Density Slope> <Checking Solid Black>

Clean the following:


[1] Grid wire Does
the copy have NO Check PG7 (halftone). Check PG8 (solid black).
[2] Primary charging wire
[3] Pre-transfer charging wire vertical lines?
[4] Transfer charging wire
YES
Is
Is there NO the copy YES
Check the following:
[1] Wire height.
Clean the following, and check for
adhesion of foreign matter:
a difference in
density between front
free of fuzzy images
and is its density A
[1] Dust-proofing glass and rear? proper?
[2] Fixing roller nip
[2] Charging assemblies Clean the
following, and check for NO
YES
adhesion of foreign matter:
Make several copies of the
NA3 Chart. Select COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VDM
Generate several of the Is the rear NO in service mode.
following test prints: Does the lighter?
[1] PG4 halftone (printer) NO
copy have vertical
[2] PG6 blank (reader) lines?
[3] PG7 halftone (reader) YES Check the
[4] PG8 solid black (reader) YES Is the potential control
Turn the adjusting screw at Turn the adjusting screw at reading of VDM NO system; if normal,
Output Conditions the front of the primary the rear of the primary between 432 replace the
· AE OFF charging assembly charging assembly and 452? photosensitive
· Fat 5 counterclockwise. (1.5 mm counterclockwise. (1.5 mm drum.
· Potential control ON Check the following: max. in one direction) max. in one direction) YES
[1] Drum cleaning blade
[2] Separation claws Execute potential
If the test prints have a fault, control. Select COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VL1M
in service mode.
Turn off and then on the power switch,
and generate one test print of PG7.
Check the following;
If a copy image has a fault,

if normal, replace the


Is appropriate part:
the reading NO
Caution: of VL1M between 62 [1] Laser output
[1] If the difference in density still exists after and 82? [2] Potential control
turning the adjusting screw 1.5 mm in one system
direction (a single full turn causes a change of YES
0.7 mm), check the charging assembly,
scanning lamp, and scanner for dirt.
[2] When turning the adjusting screw Replace the
counterclockwise, be sure that the height of the Is the test YES
print of PG6 (blank) developing
Go to wire is not 7.5 mm or less. foggy? assembly.
2 Checking the Scanner Side
NO

Set OPTION>BODY>CNT-W/HM
in service mode between 2 and 7.
· A higher setting increases the
density.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-3
1 Checking the Printer Side (2/2)

<Checking for Fogging> <Checking Halftone Density>

A Check PG6 (blank) Check PG4 (halftone)

NO
Is the copy foggy? Is the
density
NO
appreciably low (lighter)
compared to the density of No. End.
3 (halftone) of the Test
YES Chart?

Select COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VDM
in service mode.
YES

Increase the setting of


ADJUST>DEVELOP>DE-OFST
Is the Check the potential in service mode.
reading of VDM NO controller system; if
between 432 and normal, replace the
452? photosensitive drum.

YES

Select COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VL1M
in service mode.

Check the following;


if faulty, replace the
Is the NO appropriate part:
reading of VL1M [1] Laser output
between 62 and [2] Potential control
82?
system
YES

Decrease the setting of


ADJUST>DEVELOP>DE-OFST.
· A lower setting decreases the
density.

13-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2 Checking the Scanner Side

<Making Initial Checks> <Checking the Density Slope> <Checking Solid Black Density> <Checking for Fogging>
Is
Does the Is there a the density Is gray Execute
NO difference in density NO of gray scale No. 1 NO scale No. 10 YES
copy have vertical COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ
lines? between front and (solid black) too low (blank) foggy?
rear? (light)? in service mode.

YES YES YES NO

Check to see if the Check the scanning


Clean the following: standard white plate is lamp. If it has reached
[1] Mirrors properly mounted. If its end, replace it.
[2] Lens there is a gap, correct <Checking Halftone Density>
[3] Standard white plate it.

Clean the following


parts: Is the YES
density of gray scale End.
[1] Mirrors No. 3 proper?
Execute [2] Lens
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ [3] Standard white plate
NO
in service mode. [4] Dust-proofing glass
[5] Scanning lamp
[6] Reflecting plate If too dark,
Execute potential
Execute control.

If too light,
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ Turn off and on the
in service mode. power switch, and
make one copy. Decrease the setting of
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>
DENS-ADJ in sevice mode.
Increase the setting in
Is there a Execute
NO COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>
difference in density COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ
between front and DENS-ADJ in service mode.
in service mode.
rear?
YES

Is the
Check the printer side. density of gray NO
scale No. 1 (solid black)
too low (light)? Make one copy.

YES

Increase the setting of


COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>
DENS-ADJ in service Does the
mode. density of gray scale
YES No. 3 (halftone)
change?

NO

Check the printer side.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-5
B . Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing

Caution:
• Check to make sure that the block (front, rear) is free of melting, thermal deformation, cracking,
or yellowing because of leakage. If noted, replace it with a new part.
• Check and clean as far as the inside of the block (front, rear).
• Do not use a cloth soiled with metal powder for cleaning.
• Do not use a moist cloth. Instead, dry wipe with lint-free paper, and then use alcohol;
thereafter, make sure that alcohol has completely evaporated before mounting to the copier.
• Try to finish scheduled servicing and scheduled replacement within a specific period of time.

Part Tool/solvent Work


Pre-exposure lamp Alcohol Cleaning.
Copyboard glass Alcohol Cleaning.
Scanning lamp Lint-free paper Dry wiping.
Standard white plate Lint-free paper Dry wiping.
Reflecting plate Blower brush Cleaning.
No. 1 mirror through Blower brush Cleaning by a blower brush;
No. 3 mirror or lint-free if dirt is excessive, cleaning
paper with lint-free paper.

Part Tool/solvent Work


Primary charging assembly, Alcohol and Dry wiping; then,
transfer/separation assembly, lint-free paper cleaning with lint-free
pre-transfer assembly paper moistened with
Part Tool/solvent Work alcohol.
Separation claw Solvent and Cleaning. Dust-proofing glass Lint-free paper Cleaning
lint-free paper Dust-collecting roller Disposing of toner
Upper roller, Cleaning oil, Cleaning. collecting around the
lower roller lint-free paper dust-collecting roller.
Paper guide Solvent and Cleaning. Developing assembly mount Moist cloth* Cleaning.
lint-free paper Registration roller Alcohol and Cleaning.
Feeding assembly Moist cloth* Cleaning. lint-free paper
Re-pickup assembly, Alcohol, lint- Cleaning. *Make sure no droplet of water remains.
reversing roller free paper
Re-pickup assembly, Alcohol and Cleaning.
pickup roller, lint-free paper
registration roller
*Make sure no droplet of water remains. Part Tool/solvent Work
Manual feed tray, pickup Alcohol and Cleaning.
roller, feeding roller lint-free paper
Vertical path roller Alcohol and Cleaning.
lint-free paper

13-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

II . STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS


A. Adjusting Images

1 Adjusting the Image Position

Make 10 prints from each of the following sources of paper to see if the image margin and the
non-image width are as indicated:
• Cassette (each)
• Front deck (left, right)
• Manual feed tray
• Duplexing feeding unit
• Side paper deck

The image margin and the non-image width must be as follows on prints made in Direct:

2.5±1.5mm

+1.5mm 0
4.0 —1.0mm
2

8
10

Figure 13-A201 Image Leading Edge Figure 13-A202 Left/Right Image


Margin Margin

2.5mm±1.5

0
2

+1.5mm 6
4.0 —1.0mm
8
10

Figure 13-A203 Image Leading Edge Figure 13-A204 Left/Right Non-Image


Non-Image Width Width

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-7
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

If not as indicated, adjust the image position in the following order:


[1] Left/right image margin (registration adjustment)
[2] Image leading edge margin (registration adjustment)
[3] Left/right non-image width (CCD read start position)
[4] Image leading edge non-image width (scanner image leading edge position)

2 Adjusting the Left/Right Image Margin


a. Cassette 3/4
1) Remove the two screws [2], and detach
the cassette front cover [1]. [2]

[1]

Figure 13-A205
2) Loosen the two fixing screws [3] on the
left and right of the cassette; then, make [3]
adjustments using the adjusting screw [4]. [4]
3) After adjustment, be sure to execute [3]
COPIER>FUNCTION>CST>C3-
STMTR/A4R or C4-STMTR/A4R in
service mode.

Figure 13-A206

13-8 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

b. Front Deck (left/right)


1) Loosen the four screws [2] and the two
fixing screws [3] on the cassette front [3]
cover [1]. [2]
[3]

[2]

[2] [1]

Figure 13-A207

2) Move the cassette guide assembly (front) [4]


[4] to the front or the rear to make adjust-
ments.

Figure 13-A208

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-9
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

c. Manual Feed Tray


1) Loosen the two mounting screws on the manual tray, and adjust the position of the manual tray.

[1]
[1]

Figure 13-A209

d. Duplexing Feeding Unit (2nd side of double-sided print)


1) Correct the image margin as specified using service mode (COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-
ADJ>ADJ-REFE).

Edge of paper

Decrease the setting of Increase the setting of


ADJ-REFE. (A decrease ADJ-REFE. (An increase
of 23 decreases the of 23 increases the
margin by 1 mm.) margin by 1 mm.)

2.5mm±2.0

0
2

8
10

Figure 13-A210

13-10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

e. Side Paper Deck


1) Slide out the compartment, and adjust the position of the latch plate of the deck open solenoid
using the two screws. (At this time, use the scale graduations on the latch plate as a guide.)

Scale graduations
Latch plate Screws

Figure 13-A211 Left Rear of the Compartment

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-11
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

3 Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin


1) Set the image margin as specified in service mode (COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-
ADJ>REGIST).
Decrease the setting of REGIST.
(An increase of 23 increases the
margin by 1 mm.)

Leading edge of paper

Increase the setting of REGIST.


(A decrease of 23 decreases the
margin by 1 mm.)

Figure 13-A212

4 Adjusting the Left/Right Non-Image Width


1) Correct the non-image width as specified in service mode (COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-
XY>ADJ-Y).

Image edge
Decrease the setting of Increase the setting of
ADJ-Y. (A decrease of 12 ADJ-Y. (An increase of
decreases the non-image 12 increases the image
width by 1 mm.) width by 1 mm.)

2.5mm±2.0

0
2

8
10

Figure 13-A213

13-12 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 Adjusting the Image Leading


1) Correct the non-image width as specified in service mode (COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-
XY>ADJ-X).
Decrease the setting of ADJ-X. (A decrease
of 12 decreases the non-image width by 1
mm.)

Image leading edge

Increase the setting of ADJ-X. (An increase of


12 increases the non-image width by 1 mm.)

Figure 13-A214

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-13
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

B. Scanner System
1 Replacing the Scanner Drive Cable
See Chapter 3> V.B. "Scanner Drive System."

2 Adjusting the Scanner Mirror Mount


See Chapter 3> V.B. "Scanner Drive System."

3 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp


See Chapter 3> V.B. "Scanner Drive System."

13-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Image Formation System


1 Routing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
See Chapter 6> VII.C. "Charging Wires."

2 Routing the Charging Assembly Charging Wires


See Chapter 6> VII.C. "Charging Wires."

3 Mounting the Drum Cleaning Blade


See Chapter 6> VII.F. "Drum Cleaner Unit."

4. Mounting the Developing Blade


See Chapter 6> VII.E. "Developing Assembly."

5 Replacing the Potential Sensor/Potential Control PCB


1) Check to make sure that the data lamp on the control panel is off, and turn off the main
power switch.
2) Disconnect the power plug.

Caution:
The copier remains powered as long as the power plug is connected to the power outlet even
after the main power switch is turned off. Be sure to disconnect the power plug.

3) Replace the potential sensor/potential control PCB.

Caution:
The potential sensor and the potential control PCB are adjusted as a pair. Be sure to replace
both of them if either of them must be replaced.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-15
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

4) Fit the potential sensor tester electrode (FY9-3041) to the potential sensor.
Potential sensor
tester electrode

Potential sensor

Figure 13-C201

Caution:
When fitting the tester electrode to the potential sensor, take care so that the magnet of the
electrode will not come into contact with the potential sensor cover.

5) Connect the cable of the potential sensor tester electrode to the support metal plate (GND) of
the potential measurement PCB.

Caution:
Be sure not to bring the clip into contact with the sensor cover by keeping it sufficiently away
from the window of the sensor.

Potential sensor support plate Support plate (GND)

Cable

Figure 13-C202

13-16 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

6) Insert the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly.
7) Connect the power plug to the power outlet, and turn on the main power switch and the control
panel power switch.
8) Execute COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>OFST in service mode.
9) Record the setting of OFST on the service label.
10) Check to make sure that the data lamp on the control panel is off, and turn off the main power
switch.
11) Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.
12) Detach the potential sensor tester electrode.
13) Connect the power plug to the power outlet, and turn on the main power switch and the control
panel power switch.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-17
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

D. Pickup/Feeding System
1 Orienting the Deck/Cassette Pickup Roller
Mount the deck/cassette pickup roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the follow-
ing in mind:
• The front and rear pickup rollers are not interchangeable.
• The front pickup roller is identified by its gold collar. When mounting the pickup roller [1] to
the pickup assembly, be sure that the round marking [2] and the round marking [3] on the collar
(gold) are toward the copier's front.
[2]

[3]
Direction
of rotation

Collar (gold) (front of the copier)


[1]

Figure 13-D201a

• The rear pickup roller is identified by its silver collar. When mounting the rear pickup roller [4]
to the pickup assembly, be sure that the round marking [5] on the side of the roller is toward the
copier's front while the round marking [6] on the collar (silver) is toward the copier's rear.

Direction
of rotation [6]

[5]

Collar (silver) (rear of the copier)


[4]

Figure 13-D201b

13-18 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

2 Orienting the Deck/Cassette Separation Roller


When replacing the separation roller, be sure to orient it as follows:

Wider groove Narrower groove

(front of the copier)

Figure 13-D202

3 Orienting the Deck/Cassette Pickup Assembly Feeding Roller


When mounting the deck/cassette pickup assembly feeding roller, be sure that the belt pulley
[2] is toward the copier's front. When mounting the feeding roller [3] to the feeding roller shaft [4],
be sure that the round marking [5] is toward the copier's front.

[3]

[5]

[4]
[2] (front of the copier)
[1]

Figure 13-D203

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-19
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 Orienting the Manual Feed Tray/Side Paper Deck Pickup Roller


Mount the manual feed tray/side paper deck pickup roller by reversing the steps used to remove
it with the following in mind:
• The front and rear pickup rollers are not interchangeable.
• The front pickup roller is identified by its silver collar. When mounting the pickup roller [1] to
the pickup assembly, be sure that the round marking [2] on the collar (silver) is toward the
copier's front.
(direction of rotation) [2]

Collar (silver) (front of the copier)


[1]
[1] Pickup roller
[2] Marking (collar)
Figure 13-D204a

• The rear pickup roller is identified by its gold collar. When mounting the pickup roller [4] to
the pickup assembly, be sure that the round marking [5] on the side of the roller and the round
marking [6] on the collar (gold) are toward the rear of the copier.

[5]

(direction of rotation)
[6]

Collar (gold) (rear of the copier)


[4]
[4] Pickup roller
[5] Marking (roller)
[6] Marking (collar)
Figure 13-D204b

13-20 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 Orienting the Manual Feed Pickup Roller


When routing the feeding roller assembly [1] to the manual feed tray pickup assembly, be sure
that the belt pulley [2] is toward the copier's front. When mounting the feeding roller [3] to the
feeding roll shaft [4], be sure that the round marking [5] is toward the copier's front.

[5]
[3]

[4]
[2] (front of the copier)

[1]

Figure 13-D205

6 Orienting the Side Paper Deck Feeding Roller


When mounting the feeding roller [1] to the side paper deck pickup assembly, be sure that the
belt pulley [2] is toward the copier's front. When mounting the feeding roller [3] to the feeding roler
shaft [4], be sure that the round marking [5] is toward the copier's rear.

[5]
[3]

[4] [2] [1] (front)

Figure 13-D206

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-21
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

7 Adjusting the Pressure of the Deck/Cassette Separation Roller


If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup operation, reposition the pressure
spring of the separation roller.
• If double feeding occurs, move the spring into the direction of arrow B.
• If pickup failure occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow A.

[1]

[2]

A
[3]
B
[4]

[1] Feeding roller [2] Separation roller


[3] Pressure lever [4] Pressure spring

Figure 13-D207

13-22 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

8 Adjusting the Pressure of the Manual Tray Pickup/Feeding Roller


If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup operation, reposition the pressure
spring of the separation roller.
• If double feeding occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow A.
• If pickup failure occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow B.

B
A

Figure 13-D208

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-23
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

9 Mounting the Solenoids

SL 1 SL 2
1.8mm Guide (if the fixing cleaning belt is new) (if the fixing cleaning belt
has been in use)

8.6mm
Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid A
(SL 1) (SL 2) (SL 2)

Side paper deck SL 3


SL 101 Solenoid
(SL 101)

SL6
Push fully.
SL4

Screws SL3 Solenoid


SL2 SL7 (SL 3)
SL 11 No adjustment SL8 SL1
needed SL 4 Solenoid
SL11 SL9 (SL 4)
SL 6
Solenoid
(SL 6) SL10

0.4±0.2mm

10.5±0.5mm
SL 9 / 10 SL 8 SL 7
50±0.5mm
36±0.5mm

34.5±0.5mm

Figure 13-D209

13-24 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

9.1 Position of the Fixing Inlet Guide Solenoid (SL1)


Adjust the position of the solenoid using the screw [1] so that the guide will lower 1.8 mm
when the solenoid turns on.

Guide
1.8mm

Solenoid (SL1) [1]

Figure 13-D210

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-25
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

9.2 Position of the Fixing Cleaning Belt Solenoid (SL2)


a. If the Fixing Cleaning Belt is New
Adjust the position of the solenoid using the screw [1] so that the movement of the drive lever
will be over a distance of 8.6 mm.

Solenoid (SL2)

[1] 8.6mm

Figure 13-D211a

b. If the Fixing Cleaning Belt Has Been in Use


Before removing the solenoid, take note of the position A of the drive lever when the solenoid
is on. After replacing the solenoid, adjust the position using the screw [1] so that it will be the same
as it was before removal when the solenoid turns on.

Solenoid (SL2)

[1] A

Figure 13-D211b

13-26 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

9.3 Position of the Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL3)


Adjust the position of the solenoid using the screw [1] so that the drive lever is fully moved
when the solenoid turns on (i.e., the steel core is pulled).
Solenoid (SL 3)

Pushed fully.

[1]
Figure 13-D212

9.4 Position of the Fixing/Feeding Unit Locking Solenoid (SL4)


Adjust the position of the solenoid using the screw [1] so that the locking lever sticks out of the
frame by 10.5 ±0.5 mm when the solenoid turns on (steel core is pulled).
10.5±0.5mm

[1] Solenoid(SL 4)
Locking lever

Figure 13-D213

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-27
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

9.5 Position of the Multifeeder Pickup Latching Solenoid (SL6)


Slide the solenoid into the direction of A to adjust so that the gap between the shutter [1] and
the shutter plate [2] is 0.4 ±0.2 mm when the solenoid is pulled.

Figure 13-D214a
0.4±0.2mm

0.4±0.2mm

[1] [2]

Figure 13-D214b

13-28 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

9.6 Position of the Deck (right) Pickup Solenoid (SL7)


Adjust pickup solenoid using the screw [1] so that the distance between the bottom face of the
pickup unit of each holder and the bottom edge of the bushing of the support plate is 34.5 ±0.5 mm
when the plunger of the pickup roller releasing solenoid is pulled as shown (operated as in [1] and
[2]).

[2] [1]

[1]
[2]

A
34.5±0.5mm

Viewed from A

Figure 13-D215

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-29
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

9.7 Position of the Deck (left) Pickup Solenoid (SL8)


Adjust the pickup solenoid using the screw [1] so that the distance between the bottom face of
the pickup unit of each holder and the bottom edge of the bushing of the roller support plate is 50
±0.5 mm when the plunger of the pickup roller releasing solenoid is pulled as shown (operated as in
[1] and [2]).
[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

A
50±0.5mm

Viewed from A

Figure 13-D216

13-30 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

9.8 Position of the Cassette 3/4 Pickup Solenoid (SL9/10)


Adjust the pickup solenoid using the screw [1] so that the distance between the bottom face of
the pickup unit of each holder and the bottom edge of the bushing of the roller support plate is 36
±0.5 mm when the plunger of the pickup roller releasing solenoid is pulled as shown (operated as in
[1] and [2]).

[2] [1]

[1]
[2]

A
36±0.5mm

Viewed from A

Figure 13-D217

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-31

,

CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

9.9 Position of the Side Paper Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid


Before removing the deck pickup roller releasing solenoid [1] from the support plate, keep note
of the positions of the two fixing screws [2] of the solenoid with reference to the scale graduations
on the support plate; or, mark the position of the solenoid (of itself) on the support plate with a
scriber.
If you are mounting the solenoid on its own, be sure to secure it in place in its initial position.

[2] [1]

Figure 13-D218

10 Routing the Manual Feed Tray Assembly Side Guide Timing Belt
Butt the rack plate of the manual feed tray against section A (open condition).
Move the slide volume into the direction of B, and attach the timing belt to the pulley.
Timing belt

Pulley Rack plate Pulley


Section A

Slide volume
Figure 13-D219

13-32 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

11 Routing the Drive Belt

Developing/waste toner drive belt

Main motor

Pickup motor

Main drive belt

Pickup drive belt

Figure 13-D220

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-33
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

E. Fixing System
1 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Heater
1. Do not touch the surface of the heater.
2. Mount the fixing heater so that its terminal with the longer wire is toward the front. (This
applies to both heaters.)
3. Mount the main heater (760 W for the 15A model; 850 W for the 20 A model) on the right side
of the fixing assembly (viewing from the front) and the sub heater (400 W for the 15A model;
360 W for the 20A model) to the left side.
4. Connect the fastons of the heater harness at the rear. (Connect the right side to the main heater,
and the top side to the sub heater when viewing from the rear.)

2 Position of the Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide


Points to Note When Adjusting in the Field
• The inlet guide must be mounted as shown in the diagram.
• The inlet guide must lower when the solenoid (SL1) turns on.
• The inlet guide must be level so that the difference in height between its front and rear must be
within 0.5 mm.
• The inlet guide must be adjusted for height by loosening the fixing screw on the "height adjust-
ing support plate."

13-34 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Height of the Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide

1.5±0.2mm
1.5±0.2mm

Fixing
screw
Fixing
screw

Figure 13-E201

Caution:
You would have to adjust the position of the inlet guide if you removed the inlet guide mount.
Do not loosen the fixing screw on the inlet guide to avoid adjustment. If the fixing screw has
been loosened for some reason, be sure to tighten it back in reference to the scale graduations
on the fixing assembly mount.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-35
3



CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Adjusting the Lower Roller Pressure (nip)


The nip width is correct if it is as indicated in Table 13-E201. Otherwise, adjust it using the
pressure adjusting nut.

Caution:
Feeding
direction

b
l a-c l
A3 copy paper

Figure 13-E202

a and c are points 10 mm from both edges of the paper.

Dimensions
a
b
c

Center of
paper

Measurements*
7.3±0.5mm
0.5 mm or less
*Taken when the upper and lower rollers have sufficiently been heated.

Table 13-E201

a. Measuring the Nip Width


1) Place A3 copy paper on the manual feed tray.
2) Select COPIER>FUNCTON>FIXING>NIP-CHK in service mode, and discharge the paper.
A3 copy paper will be picked up and discharged as a copy (Figure 13-E202).

13-36 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

F. Laser Exposure System


1 After Replacing the Laser Unit
1) Check to make sure that the data lamp on the control panel is off, and turn off the main power
switch.
2) Disconnect the power plug.

Caution:
The machine remains powered as long as the power plug is connected to the power outlet
even after the main power switch has been turned off. Be sure to disconnect the power plug.

3) Replace the laser unit.


4) Take notes of the values recorded on the label (LA-PWR-A/B, LA-DELAY) of the new laser
unit.
5) After mounting, connect the power plug, and turn on the main power switch and the control
panel power switch.
6) Enter the values from step 4) in service mode (COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>LA-PWR-A/B,
COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>LA-DELAY).

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-37
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

2 Checking the Laser Power


1) Check to make sure that the data lamp on the control panel is off, and turn off the main power
switch.
2) Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.
3) Remove the image processor cover according to the instructions in the following: Chapter
4>IV.B "Removing the Image Processor PCB."

Image processor cover

Figure 13-F201

4) Open the laser power checker inlet cover.

Laser power checker inlet cover

Figure 13-F202

5) Shift the switch on the laser power checker (FY9-4013) to '2'.

13-38 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

6) Orient the light-receiving face of the laser power checker as shown, and insert it.

Laser power checker

Light-receiving face

Figure 13-F203

7) Insert the lead wire of the laser power checker into the digital multimeter.
Digital multimeter 7
5
3
7
0
4 DIG
MU ITA
LTI L
ME
TE
R
YOKO
GAWA

-
4
2
mV
0
2
PO RE 4 +
WER L/%
DATA MIN/
-H MAX
RA AV
NG G
E
SELE
/~/Hz CT
uA mA
10A

/ CU

/AD mV
P/K
C
+
0(/ Hz/rpm V
N
OPE

~V
Hz
TERM
SHUT IN
TERAL

10 TRUE20kH
A RM z
mA· 0.1
% S
uA V
CO
FU
SE
M
D
FU
SE
D 1000
MA V
X

Figure 13-F204

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-39
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

8) Connect the power plug to the power outlet, and turn on the main power switch and the control
panel power soft switch.
9) Select COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER in service mode.
10) Select POWER-A, and press the OK key.
11) Check to see if the reading of the digital multimeter is between 6 and 8 mV so that the power of
the laser A is at a correct level.
12) Select POWER-B, and press the OK key.
13) Check to see if the reading of the digital multimeter is between 6 and 8 mV so that the power of
the laser B is at a correct level.

13-40 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

G. Electrical Parts
1 After Replacing the CCD Unit
1) Check to make sure that the data lamp on the control panel is off, and turn off the main power
switch.
2) Disconnect the power plug.

Caution:
The copier remains powered as long as it is connected to the power outlet even after the main
power switch has been turned off. Be sure to disconnect the power plug.

3) Replace the CCD unit.


4) After mounting, connect the power plug to the power outlet, and turn on the main power switch
and the control panel power switch.
5) Execute COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ in service mode.
6) Record the new values when all items of COPIER>ADJUST>CCD and the data of
COPIER>ADJUST>LAMP>L-DATA have been updated.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-41
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

2 After Replacing the Image Processor PCB


1) Make settings in user mode except the following:
• adjust/clean>change middle staple position
• adjust/clean>change double staple width
2) Record the setting of the following in service mode:
• item A
3) Check to make sure that the data lamp on the control panel is off, and turn off the main power
switch.
4) Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.

Caution:
The machine remains powered as long as the power plug is connected to the power outlet
even after the main power switch has been turned off. Be sure to disconnect the power plug.

5) Replace the image processor PCB.


6) Take notes of the values (IP-DELAY) recorded on the new image processor PCB.

Figure 13-G201

7) After mounting, connect the power plug, and turn on the main power switch and the control
panel power switch.
8) Execute COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANER>IP in service mode.
9) Turn off and then on the main power switch, and turn on the control panel power switch.
10) Enter the settings of the user mode/service mode that have been recorded.
11) Execute COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ in service mode.
12) Record the new values when all items of COPIER>ADJUST>CCD and the data of
COPIER>ADJUST>LAMP>L-DATA have been updated.
13) Enter the values from step 6) in service mode (COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>IP-DELAY).

13-42 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

3 After Replacing the MFC PCB


1) Take notes in user mode except the following:
• adjust/clean>change middle staple position
• adjust/clean>change double staple width
2) Record the setting of the following in service mode:
• item B
3) Check to make sure that the data lamp on the control panel is off, and turn off the main power
switch.
4) Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.

Caution:
The machine remains powered as long as the power plug is connected to the power outlet
even after the main power switch has been turned off. Be sure to disconnect the power plug.

5) Replace the MFC PCB.


6) Check to make sure that the setting of the DIP switch on the new MFC PCB is the same as the
DIP switch on the removed MFC PCB.
7) After mounting, connect the power plug to the power outlet, and turn on the main power switch
and the control panel power switch.
8) Execute COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>MF-CON in service mode.
9) Turn off and then on the main power switch, and turn on the control panel power switch.
10) Record the settings from the previous step in user mode/service mode.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-43
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

4 After Replacing the Hard Disk


1) Take notes in user mode for the following:
• set image server spec>register/set mail box
• set image server spec>set image server size
2) Inform the user that the following will be lost and obtain his/her approval:
• form images in memory
• images in mail box
3) As necessary take notes of the following in service mode (the data will be lost):
• COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM
• COPIER>DISPALY>ERR
• COPIER>COUNTER>JOB>all items
4) Check to make sure that the data lamp on the control panel is off, and turn off the main power
switch.
5) Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.

Caution:
The machine remains powered as long as the power plug is connected to the power outlet
even after the main switch has been turned off. Be sure to disconnect the power plug from the
power outlet.

6) Replace the hard disk.


7) After mounting, connect the power plug, and turn on the main power switch and the control
power switch.
8) Execute COPIER>FUNCTION>HARD-DISK>FORMAT in service mode.
If the result of execution is OK, end the work.
If the result of execution is NG, execute COPIER>FUNCTION>HRD-DISK>SCANDISK.
If the result is NG once again, replace the hard disk (it is likely to be faulty).

13-44 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB


No particular work is needed in conjunction with the replacement of the DC controller PCB.

6 Checking the Surface Potential Control System


a. Outline
If an image fault occurs, it is important first to find out whether the cause is in the latent static
formation block (including the photosensitive drum and the potential control system) or the devel-
opment/transfer block, requiring a check on the surface potential, which may be checked in service
mode.

b. Disabling Auto Control


The auto control mechanism may be disabled as one way of finding out whether the corona
current control, lamp intensity control, or developing bias control mechanism is faulty ("non-auto
control mode" hereafter).
Non-auto control mode, further, may be used as an emergency measure in response to a fault in
any of the auto control mechanisms.
Keep in mind that each output in non-auto control will be fixed to its standard setting.

1. Steps
1) Select COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT in service mode; then, enter '0', and press the
OK key.
2) Press the Reset key twice.

Caution:
In non-auto control mode, all settings for corona current control, light intensity control, and
developing bias control will automatically be set to the standard settings stored in the ROM.

2. Making Use of Non-Auto Control Mode


If an image fault occurs, use it to find out whether the cause is on the input side or the output
side of the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB.
If the images made in non-auto control mode are relatively better, the potential measurement
unit or the DC controller PCB may be faulty.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-45
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

c. Zero-Level Check
A "zero level check" may be used as a means to find out the condition of the surface potential
control circuit.

Reference:
A zero-level check is to find out whether a microprocessor is reading 0 V when the surface
potential of the drum is 0 V.

A zero-level check enables a check on the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB and the
measuring unit, and it may be either of the following two ways; method 1 enables a check on the
level shift circuit on the DC controller PCB, while method 2 enables a check on the potential
measurement circuit:
1. Method 1
1) Turn off the power switch.
2) Short J522-1 and -2 on the DC controller PCB with a jumper wire, and disconnect the connec-
tor J3 of the potential control PCB.

Connector (J3)

J522

Figure 13-G202

13-46 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

3) Fit the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly, and turn on the power switch.
4) Select COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>DPOT-K in service mode, and check to make sure that
the reading during initial rotation is between 0 and 30.

If the reading is not between 0 and 30, the DC controller PCB may be faulty.

5) Turn off the power switch, and detach the door switch actuator.
6) Remove the door switch actuator.
6) Detach the jumper wire from the DC controller PCB.
7) Connect the connector to J3 on the potential control circuit.
8) Turn on the power switch.

2. Method 2
1) Turn off the power switch.
2) Remove the developing assembly, and slide out the process unit.
3) Disconnect the connector of the potential sensor.
Connector

Figure 13-G203

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-47
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

4) Remove the two screws, and replace the potential sensor support plate.

Screws

Potential sensor support plate

Figure 13-G204

5) Put back the developing assembly and the process unit.


6) Connect the connector of the potential sensor.
Potential sensor support plate Connectors

Figure 13-G205

13-48 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

7) Attach the potential sensor tester electrode (FY9-3041) to the potential sensor.

Caution:
When attaching the tester electrode to the potential sensor, take care so that the magnet on the
meter electrode will not come into contact with the potential sensor cover.

Potential sensor tester electrode

Potential sensor

Figure 13-G206

8) Connect the cable of the potential sensor tester electrode to the support metal plate (GND) of
the potential measurement PCB.

Caution:
Be sure never to bring the clip into contact with the cover of the sensor. Keep it sufficiently
away from the window of the sensor.

Potential sensor support plate Support metal plate (GND)

Cable

Figure 13-G207

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-49
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

9) Fit the door switch auto control into the door switch assembly.
10) Turn on the power switch.

Caution:
Do not touch the potential sensor after turning on the power switch.

11) Select COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>DPOT-K in service mode, and check that the reading dur-
ing initial rotation is between 0 and 30.

Reference:
1. If the result in method 1 is as indicated, and the result in method 2 is not as indicated,
suspect dirt on the sensor or a fault in the potential measurement unit.
2. If the results in method 1 and method 2 are as indicated,
assume that the signal path from the potential sensor unit to the microprocessor on the DC
controller PCB is normal and the operation in general is also normal.

12) Turn off the power switch.


13) Detach the potential sensor meter electrode.
14) Mount the potential sensor support plate.
15) Turn on the power switch.

13-50 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7 Checking the Potential System

START

Turn off the potential control


mechanism.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT '0'

<Checking the Primary Output> <Checking the Laser Output>


Is the problem
corrected?
NO
A
Turn off potential control:
YES Turn on the potential control mechanism:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CN-T '0'
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT '1'
Turn off the power switch.
Measure the voltage PR-CNT during
[1] Short J522-1 and -2 on the DC copying at the J510A-3 on the DC
controller PCB with a jumper wire. controller PCB. Turn off and then on the power switch.
[2] Disconnect J3 from the potential
measurement PCB. Select the following in service mode:
COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>PRIARY
(current of primary charging assembly). Is the reading of the
Turn on the power switch. following in service mode 50 ±10? YES
Convert the reading (in µA) taken during COPIER>DISPLAY>
copying into a control voltage as in DPOT>VLIM
Start service mode: 8 Potential Control Conversion Table.
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>DPOT-K NO

Check the laser output.


Is the
difference
Is the reading NO between the actual NO
between 0 and 30? Replace the DC controller PCB. measurement of PR-CNT and the Replace the DC controller PCB.
reading of PRIMARY in Is the laser
output at the NO
service mode maximum level?
±10%?
YES
YES
Turn off the power switch. YES

Replace HVT. Is the YES Replace the laser unit.


[1] Remove the jumper wire used to problem corrected? END
short J522-1 and -2 on the DC
controller PCB.
[2] Connect J3 on the potential
measurement PCB. NO

Replace the photosensitive drum. If


Turn on the power switch. the problem is not corrected, check
the laser output.
Check to make sure that the
potential measurement PCB is
powered, and check the potential
sensor using the potential sensor
meter electrode.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-51
<Checking the Developing Bias Output> <Checking the Transfer Output>
A
Turn on the potential control mechanism:
Is the toner image on
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT '1' the photosensitive NO
Replace the photosensitive drum.
drum before transfer
normal?

Measure the voltage DEV-DC-CNT YES


during copying at J510A-9 on the DC
controller PCB. Turn off the potential control mechanism:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT '0'

Measure the voltage TR-CNT during


Select the following in service mode: copying at J510A-6 on the DC controller
COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS> PCB.
BIAS(developing bias DC value).
Convert the reading taken during copying
(in V) into a control voltage as in Select the following in service mode:
COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>TR
8 Potential Control Conversion Table.
Convert the reading (µA) taken during
copying into a control voltage USING
8 Potential Control Conversion Table.

Is the difference
between the actual NO
measurement of Is the difference between NO
Replace the DC controller PCB. the actual measurement of
DEV-DC-CNT and Replace the DC controller PCB.
BIAS in service TR-CNT and TR in service
mode ±10%? mode ±10%?

YES YES

Measure the voltage of J510A-8 on the Replace the


DC controller PCB. high-voltage YES
transformer. Is the End.
problem corrected?

NO

Is the voltage about NO [1] Check the transfer charging assembly for leakage.
5 V when the scanner Replace the DC controller PCB.
is moving forward? [2] Change the setting of the following in service
mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FUZZY.
[3] Try replacing copy paper.
YES

Check the developing assembly for


leakage. If normal, check the transfer
output.

13-52 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

8 Potential Control System Conversion Table

Primary Developing Pre-transfer Transfer Separation


Control (V) (µA) bias (V) (µA) (µA) (µA)
3.00 1,400 0 0 440 100
3.05 1,391 3 -2 437 96
3.10 1,382 7 -4 434 92
3.15 1,373 11 -6 431 88
3.20 1,365 15 -8 429 85
3.25 1,356 18 -10 426 81
3.30 1,347 22 -12 426 77
3.35 1,338 26 -14 420 73
3.40 1,330 30 -16 418 70
3.45 1,321 33 -18 415 66
3.50 1,312 37 -20 412 62
3.55 1,303 41 -22 409 58
3.60 1,295 45 -24 407 55
3.65 1,286 48 -26 404 51
3.70 1,277 52 -28 401 47
3.75 1,268 56 -30 398 43
3.80 1,260 60 -33 396 40
3.85 1,251 63 -35 393 36
3.90 1,242 67 -37 390 32
3.95 1,233 71 -39 387 28
4.00 1,225 75 -41 385 25
4.05 1,216 78 -43 382 21
4.10 1,207 82 -45 379 17
4.15 1,198 86 -47 376 13
4.20 1,190 90 -49 374 10
4.25 1,181 93 -51 371 6
4.30 1,172 97 -53 368 2
4.35 1,163 101 -55 365 -1
4.40 1,155 105 -57 363 -5
4.45 1,146 108 -59 360 -8
4.50 1,137 112 -61 357 -12
4.55 1,128 116 -63 354 -16
4.60 1,120 120 -66 352 -20
4.65 1,111 123 -68 349 -23
4.70 1,102 127 -70 346 -27
4.75 1,093 131 -72 343 -31
4.80 1,085 135 -74 341 -35
4.85 1,076 138 -76 338 -38
4.90 1,067 142 -78 335 -42
4.95 1,058 146 -80 332 -46

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-53
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Primary Developing Pre-transfer Transfer Separation


Control (V) (µA) bias (V) (µA) (µA) (µA)
5.00 1,050 150 -82 330 -50
5.05 1,041 153 -84 327 -53
5.10 1,032 157 -86 324 -57
5.15 1,023 161 -88 321 -61
5.20 1,015 165 -90 319 -65
5.25 1,006 168 -92 316 -68
5.30 997 172 -94 313 -72
5.35 938 176 -96 310 -76
5.40 980 180 -99 308 -80
5.45 971 183 -101 305 -83
5.50 962 187 -103 302 -87
5.55 953 191 -105 299 -91
5.60 945 195 -107 297 -95
5.65 936 198 -109 294 -98
5.70 927 202 -111 291 -102
5.75 918 206 -113 288 -106
5.80 910 210 -115 286 -110
5.85 901 213 -117 283 -113
5.90 892 217 -119 280 -117
5.95 883 221 -121 277 -121
6.00 875 225 -123 275 -125
6.05 866 228 -125 272 -128
6.10 857 232 -127 269 -132
6.15 848 236 -129 266 -136
6.20 840 240 -132 264 -140
6.25 831 243 -134 261 -143
6.30 822 247 -136 258 -147
6.35 813 251 -138 255 -151
6.40 805 255 -140 253 -155
6.45 796 258 -142 250 -158
6.50 787 262 -144 247 -162
6.55 778 266 -146 244 -166
6.60 770 270 -148 242 -170
6.65 761 273 -150 239 -173
6.70 752 277 -152 236 -177
6.75 743 281 -154 233 -181
6.80 735 285 -156 231 -185
6.85 726 288 -158 228 -188
6.90 717 292 -160 225 -192
6.95 708 296 -162 222 -196

13-54 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Primary Developing Pre-transfer Transfer Separation


Control (V) (µA) bias (V) (µA) (µA) (µA)
7.00 700 300 -165 220 -200
7.05 691 303 -167 217 -203
7.10 682 307 -169 214 -207
7.15 673 311 -171 211 -211
7.20 665 315 -173 209 -215
7.25 656 318 -175 204 -218
7.30 647 322 -177 203 -222
7.35 638 326 -179 200 -226
7.40 630 330 -181 198 -230
7.45 621 333 -183 195 -233
7.50 612 337 -185 192 -237
7.55 603 341 -187 189 -241
7.60 595 345 -189 187 -245
7.65 586 348 -191 184 -248
7.70 577 352 -193 181 -252
7.75 568 356 -195 178 -256
7.80 560 360 -198 176 -260
7.85 551 363 -200 173 -263
7.90 542 367 -202 170 -267
7.95 533 371 -204 167 -271
8.00 525 375 -206 165 -275
8.05 516 378 -208 162 -278
8.10 507 382 -210 159 -282
8.15 498 386 -212 156 -286
8.20 490 390 -214 154 -290
8.25 481 393 -216 151 -293
8.30 472 397 -218 148 -297
8.35 463 401 -220 145 -301
8.40 455 405 -222 143 -305
8.45 446 408 -224 140 -308
8.50 437 412 -226 137 -312
8.55 428 416 -228 134 -316
8.60 420 420 -231 132 -320
8.65 411 423 -233 129 -323
8.70 402 427 -235 126 -327
8.75 393 431 -237 123 -331
8.80 385 435 -239 121 -335
8.85 376 438 -241 118 -338
8.90 367 442 -243 115 -342
8.95 358 446 -245 112 -346

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-55
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Primary Developing Pre-transfer Transfer Separation


Control (V) (µA) bias (V) (µA) (µA) (µA)
9.00 350 450 -247 110 -350
9.05 341 453 -249 107 -353
9.10 332 457 -251 104 -357
9.15 323 461 -253 101 -361
9.20 315 465 -255 99 -365
9.25 306 468 -257 96 -368
9.30 297 472 -259 93 -372
9.35 288 476 -261 90 -376
9.40 280 480 -264 88 -380
9.45 271 483 -266 85 -383
9.50 262 487 -268 82 -387
9.55 253 491 -270 79 -391
9.60 245 495 -272 77 -395
9.65 236 498 -274 74 -398
9.70 227 502 -276 71 -402
9.75 218 506 -278 68 -406
9.80 210 510 -280 66 -410
9.85 201 513 -282 63 -413
9.90 192 517 -284 60 -417
9.95 183 521 -286 57 -421
10.00 175 525 -288 55 -425
10.05 166 528 -290 52 -428
10.10 157 532 -292 49 -432
10.15 148 536 -294 46 -436
10.20 140 540 -297 44 -440
10.25 131 543 -299 41 -443
10.30 122 547 -301 38 -447
10.35 113 551 -303 35 -451
10.40 105 555 -305 33 -455
10.45 96 558 -307 30 -458
10.50 87 562 -309 27 -462
10.55 78 566 -311 24 -466
10.60 70 570 -313 22 -470
10.65 61 573 -315 19 -473
10.70 52 577 -317 16 -477
10.75 43 581 -319 13 -481
10.80 35 585 -321 11 -485
10.85 26 588 -323 8 -488
10.90 17 592 -325 5 -492
10.95 8 596 -327 2 -496
11.00 0 600 -330 0 -500

13-56 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

9 Checking the Environment Sensor


1) Perform the following:
Select COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG in service mode; then, check and record the tempera-
ture and the humidity indicated on the control panel.
data A
RTMP °C ....data A1
RHUM % ....data A2
2) Press the Reset key twice, and turn off the power switch.
3) Remove the environment sensor, and insert the environment sensor tool (FY9-3014) in its
place.
4) Turn on the power switch, and leave the copier alone for 5 min.
5) Select COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG in service mode; then, check and record the tempera-
ture and the humidity on the control panel:
data B
RTMP °C ....data B1
RHUM % ....data B2
6) Compare data A and data B.
• The difference between data A1 and data B1 is 0 ±5.
• The difference between data A2 and data B2 is 0 ±20.
If the difference between data A and data B is not as indicated, replace the environment
sensor.
7) Press the Reset key twice, and turn off the power switch.
8) Detach the environment sensor tool, and inert the environment sensor.
9) Mount all covers.

Caution:
The environment sensor tool (FY9-3014) is adjusted at the factory to high accuracy. To main-
tain its performance, be sure to store it in an airtight case with a drying agent.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-57
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

10 Checking the Photointerrupters


The copier's photointerrupters may be checked using either its service mode or a conventional
meter or the machine's service mode.

a. Using a Meter
1) Set the meter range to 30 VDC.
2) Connect the - probe of the meter to GND of the DC controller PCB.
3) Connect the + probe of the meter to the terminals indicated (DC controller PCB).
4) Make checks as indicated.

b. Using Service Mode


1) Select COPIER>I/O in service mode, and check the appropriate addresses:

Caution:
Take care. Turning on/off a sensor can start a motor or the like.

13-58 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Connector No.
Sensor Checks 1/0 Voltage
I/O address
PS1 While in standby, move The light-blocking plate
Scanner home J507-A1 the scanner by hand. is at PS1. 1 5V
position sensor The light-blocking plate
PC is not at PS1. 0 0V
PS3 While in standby, move When the light-blocking
Image leading edge J507-A4 the scanner by hand. plate is at PS3. 1 5V
sensor When the light-blocking
PC plate is not at PS3. 0 0V
PS4 While in standby, move The cover is closed.
Copyboard cover J507-B9 the copyboard cover by 1 5V
open/closed sensor hand. The cover is opened.
PC 0 0V
PS5 While in standby, put Paper is not over PS5.
Registration paper J509-A2 paper over PS5. 1 5V
sensor Paper is over PS5.
PC 0 0V
PS6 While in standby, put Paper is not over PS6.
Fixing claw jam J508-B15 paper over PS6. 0 0V
sensor Paper is over PS6.
PC 1 5V
PS7 While in standby, put Paper is not over PS7.
Fixing cleaning belt J508-B2 paper over PS7. 0 0V
sensor Paper is over PS7.
PC 1 5V
PS8 While in standby, put Paper is inserted.
Fixing cleaning belt J508-B5 paper over the detecting 1 5V
warning sensor lever of PS8. Paper is removed.
PC 0 0V
PS9 While in standby, put Paper is inserted.
Internal delivery J508-A2 paper over the detecting 1 5V
sensor lever of PS9. Paper is removed.
PC 0 0V
PS10 While in standby, put Paper is inserted.
External delivery J508-A8 paper over the detecting 1 5V
sensor lever of PS10. Paper is removed.
PC 0 0V
PS11 While in standby, put Paper is inserted.
Fixing/feeding unit J508-A11 paper over the detecting
1 5V
outlet sensor lever of PS11. Paper is removed.
PC 0 0V
PS12 While in standby, put Paper is inserted.
Duplexing reversal J519-B6 paper over the detecting 0 0V
sensor lever of PS12. Paper is removed.
PC 1 5V
PS13 While in standby, put Paper is inserted.
U-turn sensor J519-B7 paper over the detecting
1 5V
lever of PS13. Paper is removed.
PC 0 0V

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-59
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Connector No.
Sensor Checks 1/0 Voltage
I/O address
PS14 While in standby, put Paper is inserted.
Pre-confluence sensor J519-B8 paper over the detecting 1 5V
lever of PS14. Paper is removed.
PC 0 0V
PS15 While in standby, put Paper is inserted.
Post-confluence J519-B9 paper over the detecting 1 5V
sensor lever of PS15. Paper is removed.
PC 0 0V
PS16 While in standby, put Paper is inserted.
Reversal sensor J508-A5 paper over the detecting 1 5V
lever of PS16. Paper is removed.
PC 0 0V
PS17 While in standby, move Paper is inserted.
Manual feed tray J510-B8 the rear partition plate 1 5V
paper sensor by hand. Paper is removed.
PC 0 0V
PS18 While in standby, move The light-blocking plate
Horizontal registration J519-B1 the side guide by hand. is not at PS18. 1 5V
sensor The light-blocking plate
PC is at PS18. 0 0V
PS19 While in standby, put Paper is inserted.
Waste toner full J514-A2 paper over the detecting 1 5V
sensor lever of PS19. Paper is removed.
PC 0 0V
PS20 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Front deck (right) J511-B2 the detecting lever by is at PS20. 1 5V
pickup sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS20. 0 0V
PS21 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Front deck (right) J511-A6 the detecting lever by is at PS21. 1 5V
lifter sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS21. 0 0V
PS22 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Front deck (right) J511-A9 the detecting lever by is at PS22. 1 5V
paper sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS22. 0 0V
PS23 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
J511-B5 the detecting lever by 1 5V
Front deck (right) is at PS23.
open/closed sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC 0 0V
is not at PS23.
PS24 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
J511-B8 the detecting lever by is at PS24. 1 0V
Front deck (right)
limit sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS24. 0 5V
PS25 J518-A8 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate 1 0V
Front deck (left) the detecting lever by is at PS25.
pickup sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC 0 5V
is not at PS25.
PS26 J519-B10 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate 1 0V
Front deck (right) the detecting lever by is at PS26.
feeding sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS26. 0 5V
PS27 J511-B11 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate 1 0V
Front deck (right) the detecting lever by is at PS27.
feeding sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC 0 5V
is not at PS27.

13-60 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Connector No.
Sensor Checks 1/0 Voltage
I/O address
PS28 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Fixing/feeding unit J509-B9 the detecting lever by is at PS28. 1 5V
releasing lever sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS28. 0 0V
PS31 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Front deck (left) lifter J518-A2 the detecting lever by is at PS31. 1 5V
sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS31. 0 0V
PS32 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Front deck (left) paper J518-A5 the detecting lever by is at PS32. 1 5V
sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS32. 0 0V
PS33 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Front deck (left) J518-B2 the detecting lever by is at PS33. 1 5V
open/closed sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS33. 0 0V
PS34 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Front deck (left) limit J518-A5 the detecting lever by is at PS34. 1 5V
sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS34. 0 0V
PS35 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Multifeeder detecting J510-B2 the detecting lever by is at PS35. 1 5V
inlet sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS35. 0 0V
PS37 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate —
Cassette 3 pickup J515-B2 the detecting lever by is at PS37. 5V
sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
—— — 0V
is not at PS37.
PS38 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Cassette 3 lifter sensor J515-A6 the detecting lever by is at PS38. 1 5V
hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS38. 0 0V
PS39 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
J515-A9 — 5V
Cassette 3 paper the detecting lever by is at PS39.
sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
—— — 0V
is not at PS39.
PS40 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Cassette 3 open/closed J515-B5 the detecting lever by is at PS40. 1 5V
sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS40. 0 0V
PS41 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Vertical path 3 sensor J515-B8 the detecting lever by is at PS41. 1 5V
hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS41. 0 0V
PS42 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Cassette 4 pickup J517-B2 the detecting lever by is at PS42. 1 5V
sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS42. 0 0V
PS43 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Cassette 4 lifter sensor J518-A6 the detecting lever by is at PS43. 1 5V
hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS43. 0 0V
PS44 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Cassette 4 paper J517-A9 the detecting lever by is at PS44. 1 5V
sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS44. 0 0V

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-61
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Connector No.
Sensor Checks 1/0 Voltage
I/O address
PS45 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Cassette 4 open/closed J517-A9 the detecting lever by is at PS45. 1 5V
sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS45. 0 0V
PS46 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Vertical path 4 sensor J517-B8 the detecting lever by is at PS46. 1 5V
hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS46. 0 0V
PS47 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Pre-registration paper J502-B5 the detecting lever by 1 5V
is at PS47.
sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS47.
0 0V
PS48 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Lower right cover J516-A2 the detecting lever by is at PS48.
1 5V
open/closed sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS48.
0 0V
PS49 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Vertical path 2 sensor J516-B9 the detecting lever by is at PS49.
1 5V
hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at 49.
0 0V
PS51 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
Deck (right) paper J513-B9 the detecting lever by is at PS51.
1 5V
level middle sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC is not at PS51.
0 0V
PS52 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
J513-B12 the detecting lever by is at PS52.
— 5V
Deck (right) paper
level upper sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
—— is not at PS52.
— 0V
PS54 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
J514-B9 the detecting lever by
1 5V
Deck (left) paper level is at PS54.
middle sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC 0 0V
is not at PS54.
PS55 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
J514-B12 the detecting lever by
— 5V
Deck (left) paper level is at PS55.
upper sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
—— — 0V
is not at PS55.
PS56 J502-A2 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate 1 5V
Multifeeder cover the detecting lever by is at PS56.
open/closed sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC 0 0V
is not at PS56.
PS58 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate
J502-B2 1 5V
Left center cover the detecting lever by is at PS58.
open/closed sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC 0 0V
is not at PS58.
PS59 J512-B2 While in standby, move The light-detecting plate 1 5V
Toner cartridge cover the detecting lever by is at PS59.
open/closed sensor hand. The light-detecting plate
PC 0 0V
is not at PS59.

13-62 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

III . TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS


A. Making Initial Checks
1. Checking the Site
a. The power voltage must be as rated ±10 V. (Do not disconnect the power plug day and
night.)
b. The copier must not be in a high-temperature/-humidity environment (i.e., near water fau-
cets, water boilers, humidifiers) or a cold place. The copier must not be near a source of fire
or is subjected to dust.
c. The copier must not be subjected to ammonium gas.
d. The copier must not be exposed to direct sunlight. If needed, provide curtains.
e. The copier must be in a well-ventilated place.
f. The copier must remain level.
g. The copier must remain powered throughout the night.
Check the site against the above conditions.

2. Checking the Originals


Find out whether the problem is due to originals or to the copier.
a. The copy density is normally at 5 ±1.
b. Reddish originals tend to produce copies with poor contrast.

Reference:
Red-colored sheets or slips tend to produce copies with poor contrast.

c. Check the density of the originals.

Reference:
Diazo copies used as originals or originals with a high transparency tend to produce copies
which may be mistaken as being "foggy."
Originals prepared in pencil tend to produce copies which may be mistaken as being "too
light."

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-63
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

3. Copyboard Cover, Copyboard Glass, and Standard White Plate


Check the copyboard cover, copyboard glass, and standard white plate for dirt. If soiled, clean
them with mild detergent solution or alcohol; if scratched, replace them.

4. Checking the Charging Assemblies


a. Check each charging assembly for dirt and the charging wire for a fault (scratches).
b. Clean the charging wire or the shielding plate of each charging assembly; if dirt cannot be
removed, replace the part.
c. Check the type and the height of each charging wire.
d. Check to make sure that each charging assembly is correctly set.
e. Check the charging wire spring for rust.
f. Check the charging wire cleaning pad (of each charging assembly) for displacement.

5. Checking the Developing Assembly


a. Check to make sure that the rolls on both ends of the developing assembly are in contact
with the drum.
b. Check the surface of the developing cylinder to make sure that there is an even coating of
toner.

6. Checking Papers
a. Is the paper of a type recommended by Canon?
b. Is the paper moist? Try paper fresh out of package.

7. Checking the Periodically Replace Parts


Check the parts against the Scheduled Servicing Chart and the Table of Periodically Replaced
Parts to find out if they have reached the end of life. Replace them as necessary.

8. Others
During the winter months, bringing in a copier from a cold to warm place can cause condensa-
tion inside it, leading to various problems.

Reference:
a. Condensation on the scanner (glass, mirror, lens) tends to produce darker images.
b. Condensation on the charging system tends to produce leakage.
c. Condensation on the pickup or feeding guide plate tends to produce feeding faults.
If condensation is noted, dry wipe the part or leave the copier alone for 60 min.

Caution:
If the copies have uneven density (between front and rear), is too light, or is foggy, make
adjustments according to the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure before using the trouble-
shooting tables.

13-64 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-65
B. Samples of Image Faults

13-66 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Troubleshooting Image Faults

1 The copy is too light (halftone area).

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Perform the Image Adjustment Basic YES End.
Procedure. Is the problem corrected?
Scanner (dirt) 2 Does the problem occur on copy images YES The cause is between
only? the scanner and the
CCD:
1. Check the standard
white plate for dirt.
2. Execute
COPIER>FUNCTION>
CCD>CCD-ADJ in
service mode.
AE adjustment 3 Make copies in AE mode. Is the density YES End.
correct?
Developing 4 Are the rolls of the developing assembly NO Check to see if the
assembly in contact with the drum? developing assembly
pressure plate to see if
it is mounted properly.
Is the toner on the
YES developing cylinder in
an even coating?

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-67
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

2 The copy is too light (solid black area).


3 The copy is too light (entire area, considerably).

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Copy paper 1 Try copy paper fresh out of package. Is YES 1. The paper may be
the problem corrected? moist. Instruct the
user on the correct
method of storing
paper.
2. Inform the user that
the use of paper not
recommended by
Canon may not
produce the best
results.
2 Perform the Image Adjustment Basic YES End.
Procedure. Is the problem corrected?
3 Turn off the power switch in the middle of NO Go to step 8. (The
copying operation, and open the front cause is before
cover. At this time, is the toner image on transfer.)
the surface of the photosensitive drum
before transfer normal?
Transfer faults 4 Is the transfer/separation charging NO Fit the charging
assembly fitted securely? assembly securely.
5 Set the following to '1' through '3': YES End. (The cause is in
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FUZZY in the environment.)
service mode. Is the problem corrected? NO Set FUZZY back to '1',
and go to the next step.
Transfer 6 Measure the resistance between the YES Check to make sure
guide transfer guide and the plate (metal) of the that the transfer guide
feeding assembly. Is it 0 Ω? is not in contact with a
Transfer fault

metal area of the


feeding assembly (e.g.,
side plate).
DC NO Check the high-voltage
controller transformer (HVT) and
PCB the DC controller PCB.
Developing 7 Is the developing assembly fitted NO Check the developing
Developmentfault

assembly securely? Are the rolls of the developing assembly pressure plate
(position) assembly in firm contact with the to see if it mounted
photosensitive drum? correctly.

Pre-transfer 8 Is the pre-transfer charging assembly NO Fit the charging


charging fitted securely? assembly securely.
assembly

13-68 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Potential 9 Turn off and on the power switch. Check NO Check the power
control, the setting of the following in service supply control system;
Photosensitive mode: VLIM and VDM of if normal, replace the
drum COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT. Is it as photosensitive drum.
follows? YES Check the control
Developing bias VLIM: between 62 and 82 system for the
control VDM: between 432 and 452 developing bias.

4 The copy has uneven density (darker at front).


5 The copy has uneven density (lighter at front).

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Perform the Image Adjustment Basic YES End.
Procedure. Is the problem corrected?
Developing 2 Are the developing rolls of the developing NO Check the developing
assembly assembly in firm contact with the assembly locking unit.
photosensitive drum?
Scanner (dirt) 3 Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, YES End.
side reflecting plate, mirror, lens, and dust-
proofing glass. Is the problem corrected?
Is the transfer/separation charging
assembly fitted securely?
Pre-exposure 4 Is the light of the pre-exposure lamp even NO 1. Replace the pre-
lamp during copying operation? exposure lamp.
2. Replace the DC
controller PCB.
Developing 5 Is the toner on the developing cylinder in NO 1. Clean the edge of the
assembly an even coating? blade of the
developing assembly.
(dry wiping)
2. Clean the surface of
the developing
cylinder.
3. Check to see if the
toner inside the
developing
assembly is even.
Charging YES 1. Clean all charging
assembly, Copy wires once again,
paper and check the
position of the
charging wires.
2. Try replacing copy
paper.
3. Check the nip of the
fixing roller.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-69
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

6 The copy is foggy (entire area).

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Perform the Image Adjustment Basic YES End.
Procedure. Is the problem corrected?
Scanner 2 Does the problem occur in copy images YES The cause is between
only? the scanner and the
CCD; check the
following:
1. scanning lamp for
dirt and end of life.
2. reflecting plate,
mirror, lens, and
standard white plate
for dirt.
Potential control 3 Set the following to '0' in service mode, YES The cause is in the
system and turn off the potential control: potential control
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PC-CNT. Is system. Make checks
the problem corrected? according to II.
"Standards and
Adjustments" in
Chapter 13.
Cleaner 4 Is the cleaning blade mounted correctly? NO Mount the cleaning
assembly blade correctly.

Pre-exposure 5 Is the pre-exposure lamp on during NO 1. Replace the pre-


lamp, DC copying operation? exposure lamp.
controller PCB 2. Replace the DC
controller PCB.
Developing rolls 6 Are the developing rolls worn? YES Replace the developing
rolls.
Developing NO Replace the developing
cylinder cylinder.

13-70 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

7 The copy is foggy (vertical).


8 The copy has black lines (feeding direction, fuzzy, thick).

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Scanner (dirt) 1 Does the problem occur in copy images YES The cause is between
only? the scanner and the
CCD; check the
following:
1. scanning lamp for
dirt and end of life.
2. reflecting plate,
mirror, lens, and
standard white plate
for dirt.
Potential control 2 Set the setting of the following in service YES The cause is in the
system mode to '0', and turn off potential control: potential control
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PC-CNT. Is system. Make checks
the problem corrected? as in II. "Standards and
Adjustments" in
Chapter 13.
Primary 3 Clean the primary charging wire, grid YES End.
charging wire, an shielding plate. Is the problem
assembly corrected?
Is the light of the pre-exposure lamp even
during copying operation?
Pre-exposure 4 Clean the pre-exposure lamp. Is the YES End.
lamp problem corrected?
Fixing assembly 5 Using the door switch actuator, press the NO The cause is after the
Developing rolls Copy Start key while keeping the front fixing system. Check
cover open. Turn off the power switch the fixing assembly
while copy paper is in the feeding upper and lower rolls
assembly, and check the image. Is the for dirt.
copy image normal?
Developing 6 Is the toner on the developing cylinder in NO Check the edge of the
assembly an even coating? blade of the developing
assembly.
Drum cleaner YES 1. Remove the drum
unit cleaner blade, and
check the edge.
2. Check the drum
cleaner unit.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-71
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

9 The copy has black lines (feeding direction,fine).

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Scanner (dirt) 1 Does the problem occur in copy images YES The cause is between
only? the scanner and the
CCD:
1. Check the standard
white plate and each
mirror for dirt.
2. Execute
COPIER>FUNCTION
>CCD>CCD-ADJ
in service mode.
Fixing system 2 Using the door switch actuator, press the YES The cause is after the
Copy Start key while keeping the front fixing system; check
cover open. Turn off the power switch the following:
while copy paper is in the feeding 1. fixing assembly
assembly, and check the image. Is the upper roller for
copy image normal? scratches and black
lines.
2. cleaning belt for dirt.
3. thermistor and
separation claw for
dirt, and
reciprocating
operation
Primary 3 Clean the primary charging assembly. Is YES End.
charging the problem corrected?
assembly (dirt)
Photosensitive 4 Is there paper or foreign matter lodged on YES Remove the foreign
drum cleaner the cleaning blade of the cleaner matter, and remove the
assembly assembly? cleaning blade and the
cleaner assembly
external covers.
5 Are there scratches on the edge of the YES Reverse the edge. (If
cleaning blade? (Feel the edge of the both edges are
cleaning blade for scratches.) scratched, replace the
blade.)
Photosensitive 6 Are there scratches or black lines in the YES Replace the
drum peripheral direction of the photosensitive photosensitive drum. If
drum? scratches are found,
find out the cause.
Developing NO Check the developing
system assembly.

13-72 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

10 The copy has white spots (vertical).


11 The copy has white lines (vertical).

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Copy paper 1 Try copy paper fresh out of package. Is YES The copy paper may be
the problem corrected? moist. Instruct the user
on the correct method
of storing paper.
Dust-proofing 2 Clean the dust-proofing glass. Is the YES End.
glass problem corrected?
Scanner (dirt) 3 Does the problem occur in copy images YES The cause is between
only? the scanner and CCD:
1. Check the standard
white plate for dirt.
2. Execute
COPIER>FUNCTION
>CCD>CCD-ADJ
in service mode.
Photosensitive 4 Are there scratches in the peripheral YES Find out the cause of
drum direction of the photosensitive drum the scratches; then,
corresponding to the problem in the replace the
image? photosensitive drum.
Developing 5 Is the toner on the developing cylinder in NO Check the edge of the
assembly an even coating? blade of the developing
assembly for paper lint
or the like.
Fixing assembly 6 Using the door switch actuator, generate a YES The cause is after the
test print PG-TYPE8 (solid black) while fixing system; check
keeping the front cover open. the following:
Turn off the power switch immediately 1. fixing upper roller
before copy paper enters the fixing for offset.
assembly, and check the image. Is the
image normal?
Transfer/ 7 Clean the pre-transfer charging assembly YES End.
separation and the transfer/separation charging
charging assembly. Is the problem corrected? NO Perform the following:
assembly, 1. Change the setting
Pre-transfer of the following in
charging service mode:
assembly COPIER>OPTION>
BODY>TRNSG-SW.
2. Change the setting
of the following in
service mode:
COPIER>OPTOIN>
BODY>FUZZY.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-73
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

12 The copy has white spots (horizontal).

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Developing 1 Does the problem occur at intervals of YES 1. Clean the
assembly about 52 mm? developing rolls.
2. Dry wipe the
surface of the
developing cylinder.
3. If scratches are
found on the surface
of the developing
cylinder, replace the
developing cylinder.
Drum 2 Does the problem occur at intervals of YES 1. Clean the drum.
about 34 mm? 2. If scratches are
found on the drum,
replace the drum.
Copy paper 3 Try paper fresh out of package. Is the YES The copy paper is
problem corrected? moist. Instruct the user
on the correct method
of storing paper.
Scanner rail, 4 Does the problem occur in copy images YES 1. Check the scanner
Scanner cable only? rail for foreign
matter.
2. Adjust the tension
of the scanner cable.
Charging wire 5 Are there scratches on the surface of the NO Clean the charging
(dirt) photosensitive drum? assembly.
Photosensitive YES Replace the
drum photosensitive drum.

13-74 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

13 The back of the copy is soiled

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Transfer guide 1 Is the transfer guide soiled with toner? YES 1. Clean the transfer
guide.
2. Check the transfer
guide bias.
3. Check the
developing
assembly for
leakage of toner.
Drum cleaner 2 Is the paper feeding assembly soiled with YES 1. Clean the feeding
toner? assembly.
2. Check the drum
cleaning assembly
for leakage of waste
toner.
Fixing assembly 3 Is the fixing assembly lower roller soiled? YES 1. Clean the fixing
assembly lower
roller.
2. Clean the fixing
assembly inlet guide.
3. Check the fixing
upper roller and the
cleaning belt.
NO Check the following:
1. registration roller
for dirt.
2. delivery roller and
separation claw for
dirt.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-75
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

14 The copy has poor fixing.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Copy paper 1 Is the paper thick paper or otherwise YES Set the following in
paper with poor fixing performance? service mode to '1':
COPIER>OPTION>
BODY>CPMKP-SW.
Explain the following
to the user:
1) Select the cassette
with thick paper as
the special cassette.
2) Select the icon of
the selected cassette
as the thick paper
icon (2nd column
from right, 3rd from
the top):
Thick paper icon:
3) Be sure to set all
thick paper in the
selected cassette in
the future.
2 Is the copy paper of a type recommended NO Try recommended
by Canon? paper. If the results are
good, ask the user to
use recommended
paper.
Fixing assembly 3 Does the problem occur vertically? YES Check the fixing
assembly for scratches
and dirt.
NO Check the nip of the
fixing roller.

13-76 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

15 The copy has a displaced leading edge (appreciably excess margin).


16 The copy has a displaced leading edge (excess margin).
17 The copy has a displaced leading edge (no margin).

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Original 1 Is the original set properly? NO Set the original properly.
2 Make copies using the following source YES Check the following
of paper. Is the displacement different for the source of paper
among copies? suffering from leading
1. Left/right front deck edge displacement:
2. Each cassette 1. each roller for the
3. Side paper deck end of life
4. Duplexing feeding assembly 2. each roller for
soiling by paper lint
3. paper path for dirt
Registration 3 Make adjustments using the following in NO 1. Check the
clutch service mode: registration roller
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED- for deformation.
Registration ADJ>REGIST. Is the problem corrected? 2. Check the
roller registration roller
drive system.
YES End.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-77
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

18 The copy has a blurred image.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Scanner drive 1 Is the cable on the cable pulley YES 1. Route the cable
cable overlapping while the scanner is moving? once again.
Further, is the cable too loose or too taut? 2. If the cable is
twisted or frayed,
replace it.
Scanner rail 2 Move the No. 1 mirror mount slowly by NO Clean the surface of the
hand. Does the No. 1 mirror mount move scanner rail with
smoothly? alcohol. Thereafter,
apply a small amount
of lubricant.
Photosensitive 3 Does the problem occur at intervals of YES 1. Check the drum gear.
drum about 34 cm? 2. Check the drum ends
(where the
developing rolls
come into contact)
for scratches and
protrusions.
Drum drive gear 4 Does the problem occur at intervals of YES Check the drum drive
about 3 mm? gear.
Developing gear 5 Does the problem occur at intervals of YES Check the developing
about 6 mm? assembly.
Cleaner 6 Does the problem occur at intervals of YES Check the cleaner
assembly gear about 6 mm? assembly.
Drum drive NO Check the drum drive
system system.

13-78 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

19 The copy is foggy (horizontal).

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Does the problem occur at the same YES Go to step 3.
position on all copies made in Direct?
Scanning lamp, 2 Does the scanning lamp flicker while the YES Check the scanning
Lamp regulator scanner is moving forward? lamp and the lamp
regulator.
Scanner 3 Make reduced copies, and compare them NO Check the scanner
against copies made in Direct. Are the system.
Feeding system positions of the problem different? YES Check the feeding
system.

20 The copy has poor sharpness.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Copyboard glass 1 Is the copyboard glass soiled with oil? YES Clean the copyboard
glass.
Mirror position 2 Is the horizontal reproduction ratio in NO Adjust the distance
Direct within the specified range? between No. 1 mirror
and the No. 2 mirror.
Scanner (dirt) 3 Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting plate, YES End.
mirror, lens, and dust-proofing glass. Is
the problem corrected?
Photosensitive 4 Replace the photosensitive drum. Is the YES End.
drum problem corrected?
Lens drive NO Check the operation of
assembly the lens drive assembly.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-79
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

21 The copy is blank.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Developing 1 Is the developing assembly locked to the NO Check the locking
assembly photosensitive drum during copying mechanism of the
operation? developing assembly.
Developing 2 Is the developing assembly rotating NO Check the drive
assembly drive during copying operation? mechanism of the
mechanism developing assembly.
Transfer 3 Is the transfer charging assembly fully NO Insert it fully.
charging inserted?
assembly 4 Is leakage noted in the transfer charging YES Check the transfer
assembly? charging assembly.
CCD unit 5 Is the voltage of the power to the CCD NO 1. Check the relay
unit as rated? PCB.
2. Check the path of
power between the
Relay PCB CCD unit and the
relay PCB; if
normal, replace the
CCD unit.
Laser unit image 6 Is the laser output normal? NO 1. Replace the laser
processor PCB unit.
2. Replace the image
processor PCB.
Drum unit YES Replace the drum unit.

13-80 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

22 The copy is solid black.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Scanning lamp 1 Is the scanning lamp on? NO See "The scanning
lamp fails to turn on."
Primary 2 Select COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT in NO Check the primary
charging service mode. Is the setting of VDM charging assembly.
assembly between 432 and 452?
3 Is the connection of the following normal? NO Correct the connection.
1. Image processor PCB
2. CCD unit
3. DC control PCB
4. Relay PCB
Image processor 4 Does the problem occur in copy images NO 1. Replace the image
PCB only? processor PCB.
2. Replace the DC
controller PCB.
CCD unit YES Replace the CCD unit.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-81
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

IV . TROUBLESHOOTING MALFUNCTIONS
A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions
Caution:
When removing or mounting each sensor, be sure to pay attention to the orientation and
position of the spring used to force the detecting lever.

1 E000

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Thermistor 1 Clear E000, and turn off and then on the YES The cause is the
power switch. Select COPIER>DISPLAY thermistor; check the
>ANALOG. Does either FIX-C or FIX-E following:
indicate a rise in temperature? • thermistor for
mounting.
• thermistor surface for
dirt.
• connection.
DC controller 2 Turn off the power switch, and cool the YES Replace the DC
PCB upper fixing roller sufficiently; then, turn controller PCB.
on the power switch.
Clear E000, and turn off and then on the
power switch, and select COPIER>I/O/
>IP in service mode. Is bit 4 and bit 5 of
P012 '0' ?
Heater 3 Is electrical continuity of each heater NO Replace the heater.
(open circuit) normal?
SSR YES Check the wiring; if
normal, replace the
SSR.

13-82 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

2 E001

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


SSR 1 Keep the power switch off to cool the YES Replace the SSR.
(short circuit) upper fixing roller sufficiently; during this
time, check each thermistor for dirt on the
surface, mounting, and connection.
Turn on the power switch, and clear
E001; then, turn off and then on the
power switch.
Select COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG in
service mode. Are the readings of both
FIX-C and FIX-E 200°C or higher?
Thermistor 2 Replace the thermistor. Is the problem YES End.
(TH1/TH2) corrected?
DC controller NO Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

3 E002
4 E003

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Turn on the power switch, and clear YES See the descriptions for
E002/E003; then, turn off and then on the the item in question.
power switch. Is any of the following
true?
• The fixing heater fails to operate.
• E002 or E003 is indicated.
2 Is the contact of the connector on the DC NO Correct the
controller PCB and the connectors inside connections.
the fixing assembly good? Further, is the
wiring from the thermistor to the DC
controller PCB good?
Main thermistor 3 Is the thermistor in even contact with the NO Mount the thermistor
(TH1; mounting) upper fixing roller? properly.
Main thermistor 4 Clean the contact face of the thermistor. Is YES End.
(TH1; dirt) the problem corrected?
Main thermistor 5 Replace the thermistor. Is the problem YES End.
(TH; faulty) corrected?
DC controller 6 Replace the heater. Is the problem YES End.
PBC corrected? NO Replace the DC
controller PCB.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-83
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 E004

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


SSR 1 Replace the SSR. Is the problem YES End.
DC controller corrected? NO Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

6 E005

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Cleaning belt 1 Has the cleaning belt of the fixing YES Replace the cleaning
assembly been taken up? belt with a new one.
Cleaning belt 2 Is the position of the cleaning belt NO Correct the position of
detecting lever detection lever correct? the lever.
DC controller 3 Is the cleaning belt sensor (PS7) normal? YES Replace the DC
PCB (See the instructions on how to check controller PCB.
Sensor photointerrupters.) NO Replace the sensor.

7 E010

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Is the connector of the main motor NO Connect the connector.
connected?
DC controller 2 Does the voltage between J514-B5 (+) NO Replace the DC
PCB and J514-B3 (-) on the DC controller PCB controller PCB.
Main motor change from 0 to about 5 V when the YES Replace the main
(M1) Copy Start key is pressed? motor.

13-84 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

8 E012

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Connector 1 Are the connectors (J601, J602) of the NO Connect the connectors
drum motor connected securely? securely.
DC controller 2 Measure the voltage of the connectors of NO Check the connection
PCB the drum motor when the power switch is of the cable up to the
turned on. Is it as follows? DC controller PCB; if
• J602-2: 5 V normal, replace the DC
• J602-3: 5 V controller PCB.
Relay PCB 3 Measure the voltage of the connector of NO Check the connection
the drum motor when the power switch is of the cable up to the
turned on. Is it as follows? relay PCB; if normal,
• J601-1: 38 V replace the relay PCB.
Drum motor YES Replace the drum
(M0) motor.

9 E013

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Waste toner 1 Is the waste toner feeding screw drive NO It is most likely that the
feeding screw gear pushing against the waste toner feeding screw inside
feeding screw lock detecting switch the waste toner pipe is
(MSW2)? prevented from rotating
for some reason.
Remove the waste
toner pipe, and try
turning the screw by
hand. If it can be
turned easily, mount
and check once again.
Otherwise, replace the
waste toner pipe, and
remove the cause.
MSW2 2 Select COPIER>I/O>IP in service mode. YES Replace MSW2.
DC controller Is bit 2 of P002 '1' ? NO Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-85
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

10 E014

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Is the connector of the pickup motor NO Connect the connector.
connected?
DC controller 2 Does the voltage between J513-A3 (+) NO Replace the DC
PCB and J513-A1 (-) on the DC controller controller PCB.
Pickup motor PCB change from 0 to about 5 V when YES Replace the pickup
(M2) the Copy start key is pressed? motor.

11 E015

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Is the connector of the pickup motor NO Connect the connector.
connected?
DC controller 2 Does the voltage between J513-A3 (+) NO Replace the DC
PCB and J513-A1 (-) on the DC controller controller PCB.
Pickup motor PCB change from 0 to about 5 V when YES Replace the pickup
(M2) the Copy Start key is pressed? motor.

12 E019

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Waste toner 1 Is the waste toner case full? NO Dispose of the waste
toner.
Waste toner case 2 Is the movement of the waste toner mount NO Correct the movement.
mount smooth?
Connect the 3 Is the connector (J514) on the DC NO Connect the connector
connector controller PCB connected securely? securely.
Waste toner 4 Replace the waste toner sensor (PS19). Is YES Check the connection
case sensor the problem corrected? of the cable up to the
DC controller PCB; if
normal, replace the
waste toner sensor
(PS19).
DC controller NO Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

13-86 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

13 E020

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Toner feed 1 Take out the developing assembly, and YES Check the rotation of
screw, Toner detach the upper cover of the developing the toner feeding screw
sensor (TS3) assembly. Is there toner inside the inside the developing
developing assembly? assembly; if normal,
replace the toner sensor
(TS3).
2 Select COPIER>FUNCTION>PART- NO Check the connection;
CHK in service mode, and check the if normal, replace the
operation of the hopper drive clutch clutch.
(CL1). Does the clutch operate?
Hopper drive 3 Check the operation of the hopper motor NO Check the connection;
clutch (CL1) (M18) using MTR. Does the motor if normal, replace the
operate? motor.
YES Check the following:
• magnet roller inside
the hopper for
rotation.
• path from the hopper
to the developing
assembly for
clogging by toner.

14 E025

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Connector 1 Is the connector (J512) on the DC YES Connect the connector
controller PCB connected securely? securely.
Drive system 2 Does the drive system of the toner feeding NO Correct the drive
mechanism inside the cartridge operate system.
Toner feeder smoothly? YES Replace the toner
motor (M6; feeder motor inside the
inside cartridge) cartridge.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-87
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

15 E030

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Total copy 1 Turn off the power switch, and disconnect NO Check the wiring from
counter J03 from the DC controller PCB. Set the the DC controller PCB
meter range to × 1KW, and measure the to the total copy counter;
resistance between J503-B12 and J503- if normal, replace the
B13. Is it about 500W? total copy counter.
Total copy 2 Connect J503 to the DC controller PCB, YES Replace the total copy
counter and turn on the power switch; then, set the counter.
DC controller meter range to 30 VDC. NO Replace the DC
PCB Does the voltage of J503-B13 on the DC controller PCB.
controller change from about 24 to about
0 and then to about 24 V when the Copy
Start key is pressed?

16 E031

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Printer counter 1 Turn off the power switch, and disconnect NO Check the wiring from
J503 of the DC controller PCB. Set the the DC controller PCB
meter range to × 1KW, and measure the to the total copy counter;
resistance between J503-B14 and J503- if normal, replace the
B15. Is it about 500W? total copy counter.
Total copy 2 Connect J503 to the DC controller PCB, YES Replace the total copy
counter and turn on the power; then, set the meter counter.
DC controller to the 30 VDC range. Does the voltage of NO Replace the DC
PCB J503-B15 on the DC controller. Does it controller PCB.
change from about 24 to about 0 and then
to about 24 V when the Copy Start key is
pressed?

17 E032

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Connector 1 Is the copy data controller or the NE NO Connect the accessory
controller connected securely? securely.
DC controller 2 Replace the copy data controller or the NO Replace the DC
PCB Remote Diagnostic Device II. Is the controller PCB.
Copy data problem corrected? YES Correct the accessory.
controller,
Remote
Diagnostic
Device II

13-88 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

18 E043

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Side deck driver 1 Is there electrical continuity between the NO Replace the side deck
PCB following connectors of the side deck driver PCB.
driver PCB?
Signal Connectors
38VU J106-1 J101-1
0VU J106-2 J101-2
Deck main 2 Replace the deck main motor (M101) of YES End.
motor (M101) the side paper deck. Is the problem
DC controller corrected? NO Check the wiring from
PCB the DC controller PCB
to the motor; if normal,
replace the DC
controller PCB.

19 E051

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Horizontal 1 Is the horizontal home positions sensor NO Replace the sensor.
registration (PS18) normal?
home position
sensor (PS18)
Horizontal 2 Disconnect J3603 of the no-stacking feed YES Replace the horizontal
registration driver PCB. Is there electrical continuity registration motor
motor (M15) between the following pins of the motor (M15).
side?
J3603-B4 and -B5 and -B3
J3603-B2 and -B6 and -B1
No-stacking 3 Replace the no-stacking driver PCB. Is NO End.
feed driver PCB the problem corrected?
DC controller Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-89
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

20 E060

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Connector 1 Are the connectors of the primary NO Connect the connectors
charging assembly connected securely? securely.
Connector 2 Is the connector (J502) of the DC NO Connect it securely.
controller PBC connected securely?
Primary 3 Is the mounting of the primary charging NO If normal, replace the
charging wire cleaner home position detecting switch switch.
cleaner home and the connection of the cable normal?
position
detecting switch
(MSW4)
Primary 4 Replace the primary charging wire YES End.
charging wire cleaner motor (M8). Is the problem
cleaner motor corrected?
(M8)
DC controller NO Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

21 E063

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Connector 1 Are the connectors of the transfer/ NO Connect the connectors
separation charging assembly connected securely.
securely?
Connector 2 Is the connector (J509) on the DC NO Connect the connector
controller PCB connected securely? securely.
Transfer/ 3 Is the mounting of the transfer/separation NO If normal, replace the
separation charging wire cleaner home position detecting switch.
charging wire detecting switch and the connection of the
cleaner home cable normal?
position
detecting switch
(MSW6)
Transfer/ 4 Replace the transfer/separation charging YES End.
separation wire cleaner motor (M9). Is the problem
charging wire corrected?
cleaner motor
(M9)
DC controller NO Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

13-90 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

22 E065

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Mounting 1 Is the primary charging assembly NO Mount the assembly
mounted securely? securely.
Connector 2 Is the contact of the primary charging NO Correct the problem.
assembly free of dirt and fault?
Wiring 3 Is the wiring from the HV-DC PCB to the NO Correct the wiring.
HV-DC PCB primary charging assembly normal? YES Replace the HV-DC PCB.

23 E066

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Connector 1 Are the connectors of the pre-transfer NO Connect the connectors
charging assembly connected securely? securely.
Connector 2 Is the connector (J504) on the DC NO Connect the connector
controller PCB connected securely? securely.
Pre-transfer 3 Is the mounting of the pre-transfer NO If normal, replace
charging wire, charging wire cleaner home position detecting switch.
Cleaning home detecting switch and the connection of the
position cable normal?
detecting switch
(MSW3)
Pre-transfer 4 Replace the pre-transfer charging wire YES End.
charging wire cleaner motor (M7). Is the problem
cleaner motor corrected?
(M7)
DC controller NO Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

24 E067

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Mounting 1 Are the primary charging assembly, pre- NO Mount the assemblies
transfer charging assembly, and transfer/ securely.
separating charging assembly mounted
securely?
Wiring 2 Is the wiring from the HV-DC PCB to NO Correct the wiring.
each charging assembly and the
connection from the HV-AC PCB to each
charging assembly normal?
HV-AC PCB 3 Replace the HV-AC PCB. Is the problem YES End.
HV-DC PCB corrected? NO Replace the HV-DC PCB.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-91
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

25 E068

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Mounting 1 Is the transfer/separation charging NO Mount it securely.
assembly mounted securely?
Wiring 2 Is the connection of the wiring from the NO Correct the wiring.
HV-AC PCB to the transfer/separation
charging assembly (separation charging
assembly side) normal?
HV-AC PCB 3 Replace the HV-AC PCB. Is the problem YES End.
HV-DC PCB corrected? NO Replace the HV-DC
PCB.

26 E069

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Mounting 1 Is the transfer/separation charging NO Mount the assembly
assembly mounted securely? securely.
Wiring 2 Is the connection of the wiring from the NO Correct the wiring.
HV-DC PCB to the transfer/separation
charging assembly (transfer charging
assembly side) normal?
Contact 3 Is the contact between the HV-DC PCB NO Connect the contact.
HV-DC PCB and the body normal? YES Replace the HV-DC
PCB.

27 E100

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


BD PCB 1 Select COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT in YES Check the connection
service mode. Is the reading of VLIM of the BD PCB and the
between 62 and 82? IP PCB and the
position of the BD
PCB; if normal, replace
the BD PCB.
Laser output 2 Is the reading of VDM between 432 and YES Check the following:
452? • laser output
• foreign matter in the
laser path
Image processor NO Replace the image
PCB processor PCB.

13-92 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

28 E102

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Relay PCB 1 Is the voltage of the following terminals NO Check the connection
on the relay PCB as indicated? from the DC power
J1714-1: 5 V supply PCB to the
J1714-3: 8 V relay PCB; if normal,
J1714-5: -8 V replace the relay PCB.
Laser unit 2 Is the connection from the relay PCB to YES Replace the laser unit.
the laser driver PCB normal? NO Correct the connection.

29 E110

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Connector 1 Is the connector (J762) on the laser NO Connect the connector
scanner motor driver PCB connected securely.
securely?
Connector 2 Is the connector (J503) on the DC NO Connect the connector
controller PCB connected securely? securely.
Laser scanner 3 Replace the laser scanner motor (M4). Is NO End.
motor (M4) the problem corrected?
DC controller YES Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

30 E111

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Foreign matter 1 Is there foreign matter that hinders the YES Remove the foreign
rotation of the laser scanner fan? matter.
Connector 2 Is the connector (J504) on the DC NO Connect the connector
controller PCB connected correctly? securely.
Laser scanner 3 Replace the laser scanner fan (FM14). Is NO End.
fan (FM14) the problem corrected?
DC controller YES Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-93
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

31 E121

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Foreign matter 1 Is there foreign matter that hinders the YES Remove the foreign
rotation of the laser driver cooling fan? matter.
Connector 2 Is the connector (J503) on the DC NO Connect the connector
controller PCB connected securely? securely.
Laser driver 3 Replace the laser driver cooling fan NO End.
cooling fan (FM5). Is the problem corrected?
(FM5)
DC controller YES Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

32 E202

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Is the scanner at the scanner home NO See "The scanner fails
position when E202 turns on? to move forward."
Scanner home 2 Is the scanner home position sensor (PS1) YES Check the wiring from
position sensor normal? (See the instructions on how to the DC controller PCB
(PS1) check photointerrupters.) to the sensor; if normal,
replace the sensor.
Replace the DC
DC controller 3 NO controller PCB.
PCB

33 E204

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Does the scanner motor forward when the NO See "The scanner fails
Copy Start key is pressed? to move forward."
Scanner image 2 Is the scanner image leading edge sensor YES Check the wiring from
leading edge (PS3) normal? (See the instructions on the DC controller PCB
sensor (PS3) how to check photointerrupters.) to the sensor; if normal,
sensor replace the sensor.
Replace the DC
DC controller NO controller PCB.
PCB

13-94 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

34 E211
35 E215

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Connector 1 Is the connection of the connectors (J852, NO Connect the connector
J853) on the light intensity control PCB securely.
secure?
Fluorescent 2 Replace the fluorescent lamp heater. Is the YES End.
lamp heater problem corrected?
Light intensity 3 Replace the light intensity control PCB. Is YES End.
control PCB the problem corrected?
DC controller NO Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

36 E218

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Fluorescent 1 Is the fluorescent lamp mounted properly? NO Mount the lamp
lamp Are the connectors (J1002, J1003) on the properly.
Connector 2 inverter PCB connected securely? NO Connect the connectors
Replace the fluorescent lamp. Is the securely.
Fluorescent 3 problem corrected? YES End.
lamp
DC controller NO Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

37 E219
38 E220
39 E222

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Connector 1 Are the connectors (J852, J853) on the NO Connect the connectors
light intensity control PCB connected securely.
securely?
Fluorescent 2 Replace the fluorescent lamp heater. Is the YES End.
lamp heater problem corrected?
Light intensity 3 Replace the light intensity PCB. Is the YES End.
control PCB problem corrected?
DC controller NO Replace the DC
PBC controller PCB.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-95
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

40 E226

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Foreign matter 1 Is there foreign matter that hinders the YES Remove the foreign
rotation of the scanner cooling fan? matter.
Connect 2 Is the connector (J504) on the DC NO Connect the connector
controller PCB connected securely? securely.
Scanner cooling 3 Replace the scanner cooling fan (FM3). Is NO End.
fan (FM3) the problem corrected?
DC controller YES Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

41 E240

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


DC controller 1 Turn off and on the power switch. Is the YES End.
PCB problem corrected? NO Replace the DC
controller PCB.

42 E241

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Original 1 Is the original orientation detection PCB NO Mount the PCB
orientation PCB mounted correctly? correctly.
Original 2 Replace the original orientation detection YES End.
orientation PCB. Is the problem corrected?
detecting circuit
Image processor NO Replace the image
PCB processor PCB.

43 E243

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


DC controller 1 Turn off and then on the power switch. Is YES End.
PCB the problem corrected?
Control panel 2 Replace the control panel PCB. Is the NO Replace the DC
PCB problem corrected? controller PCB.
YES End.

13-96 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

44 E251

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Foreign matter 1 Is there foreign matter that hinders the YES Remove the foreign
rotation of the inverter cooling fan? matter.
Connector 2 Is the connector (J507) on the DC NO Connect the connector
controller PCB connected securely? securely.
Inverter cooling 3 Replace the inverter cooling fan (FM7). Is NO End.
fan (FM7) the problem corrected?
DC controller YES Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

45 E302
46 E320

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Connector 1 Is the connection of the connectors of the NO Connect the connectors
CCD PCB (J1502) and the image securely.
processor PCB (J1105) secure?
CCD PCB 2 Replace the CCD PCB. Is the problem YES End.
Image processor corrected? NO Replace the image
PCB processor PCB.

47 E601

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Connector 1 Is the connection of the connectors of the NO Connect the connectors
page memory PCB and the image securely.
processor PCB (J1110) secure?
Wiring 2 Are the connection and the cable between NO Correct the problem.
the MFC PCB (J1402, J1403) and the
image processor PCB (J1102, J1103)
normal?
Page memory 3 Replace the page memory PCB. Is the YES End.
PCB problem corrected?
Image server 4 Replace the image server (HD). Is the YES End.
(HD) problem corrected?
Image processor 5 Replace the image processor PCB. Is the YES End.
PCB problem corrected?
MFC PCB NO Replace the MFC PCB.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-97
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

48 E602

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Connector 1 Is the connection and the cable between NO Correct the problem.
the image server (HD) and the MFC PCB
(J1405, J1406) normal?
Image server 2 Replace the image server (HD). Is the YES End.
(HD) problem corrected?
MFC PCB NO Replace the MFC PCB.

49 E677

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Connector 1 Is the connection of the printer board NO Correct the problem.
(accessory) normal?
Connector 2 Is the connection between the system NO Correct the problem.
motherboard and the MFC PCB normal?
System 3 Replace the system motherboard. Is the YES End.
mother- board problem corrected?
MFC PCB NO Replace the MFC PCB.

50 E710
51 E711

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Malfunction 1 Turn off and then on the power switch. Is YES End.
DC controller the problem corrected? NO Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

52 E712

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Malfunction 1 Turn off and then on the power switch. Is YES End.
the problem corrected?
Connector 2 Is the connector (J772) used to connect the NO Replace the DC
ADF and the copier connected securely? controller PCB.
ADF controller 3 Replace the ADF controller PCB. Is the YES End.
PCB problem corrected?
DC controller NO Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.
13-98 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

53 E713

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Malfunction 1 Turn off and then on the power switch. Is YES End.
the problem corrected?
Connector 2 Is the connector (J703) used to connect NO Replace the DC
the finisher and the copier connected controller PCB.
securely?
Finisher 3 Replace the finisher controller PCB. Is the YES End.
controller PCB problem corrected?
DC controller NO Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

54 E717

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Connector 1 Is the copy data controller or the Remote NO Connect the accessory
diagnostic device II connected securely? securely.
Copy data 2 Replace the copy data controller or the YES End.
controller, Remote diagnostic device II. Is the
Remote problem corrected?
diagnostic
device II
DC controller NO Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

55 E800

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Malfunction 1 Turn off and then on the power switch. Is YES End.
the problem corrected?
Relay connector 2 Is the relay connector (J24) of the power NO Connect the connector
(J24) switch (SW1) connected securely? securely.
Power switch 3 Set the meter range to × 1Ω, and NO Replace the power
(SW1) disconnect the relay connector (J24); then, switch (SW1).
DC controller connect the probe to the connector on the YES Check the wiring from
PCB power switch side. Is the resistance about the DC controller PCB
30Ω at this time? to the power switch
(SW1); if normal,
replace the DC
controller PCB.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-99
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

56 E804

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Foreign matter 1 Is there foreign matter that hinders the NO Remove the foreign
rotation of the power supply cooling fan matter.
(1/2)?
Connector 2 Is the connector (J505) on the DC YES Connect the connector
controller PCB connected securely? securely.
Power cooling 3 Replace the power cooling fan (1/2). Is NO End.
fan 1/2 (FM11/ the problem corrected?
FM12)
DC controller YES Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

57 E805

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Foreign matter 1 Is there foreign matter that hinders the YES Remove the foreign
rotation of the fixing heat discharge fan? matter.
Connector 2 Is the connector (J503) on the DC NO Connect the connector
controller PCB connected securely? securely.
Fixing heat 3 Replace the fixing heat discharge fan NO End.
discharge fan (FM2). Is the problem corrected?
(FM2)
DC controller YES Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

58 E820

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Foreign matter 1 Is there foreign matter that hinders the YES Remove the foreign
rotation of the drum fan? matter.
Connector 2 Is the connector (J512) of the DC NO Connect the connector
controller PBC connected securely? securely.
Drum fan (FM8) 3 Replace the drum fan (FM8). Is the NO End.
DC controller problem corrected? YES Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

13-100 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

59 E823

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Foreign matter 1 Is there foreign matter that hinders the YES Remove the foreign
rotation of the pre-transfer charging fan? matter.
Connector 2 Is the connector (J504) on the DC NO Connect it securely.
controller PCB connected securely?
Pre-transfer 3 Replace the pre-transfer charging fan NO End.
charging fan (FM10). Is the problem corrected?
(FM10)
DC controller YES Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

60 E824

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Foreign matter 1 Is there foreign mater that hinders the YES Remove the foreign
rotation of the primary charging assembly matter.
fan?
Connector 2 Is the connector (J504) on the DC NO Connect the connector
controller PCB connected securely? securely.
Primary 3 Replace the primary charging assembly NO End.
charging fan (FM1). Is the problem corrected?
assembly fan
(FM1)
DC controller YES Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

61 E830

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Foreign matter 1 Is there foreign matter that hinders the YES Remove the foreign
rotation of the separation fan? matter.
Connector 2 Is the connector (J509) on the DC control NO Connect the connector
PCB connected securely? securely?
Separation fan 3 Replace the separation fan (FM13). Is the NO End.
(FM13) problem corrected?
DC controller YES Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-101
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

62 AC power is absent.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Power plug 1 Is the power plug connected to the power NO Connect the power
outlet securely? plug securely.
Main power 2 Is the rated AC voltage present at the NO Inform the user that the
supply power outlet? problem is not of the
copier's.
Leakage breaker 3 Remove the rear cover. Has the leakage NO Remove the cause that
breaker mounted on the power cord turned on the leakage
mount turned on (i.e., the switch is at ¡). breaker, and shift its
switch to |.
Power cord, 4 Replace the power or and the line filter YES End.
Line filter (LF1) (LF1). Is there AC power? NO Check the AC power
line for wiring and the
connectors for poor
contact.
Power switch 5 Connect the meter probes to both NO Replace the power
(SW1) terminals of the power switch (SW1). Is switch.
Wiring the reading 0Ω when the switch is turned YES Check the AC power
on and ∞ Ω when it is turned off? line for wiring and the
connector for poor
contact.

13-102 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

63 The DC power supply fails to operate 1.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Control panel 1 Is the main power lamp on? YES See "The DC power
power switch supply fails to operate
2."
AC power 2 Is there the rated voltage between J28-1 NO See "AC power is
supply and J28-5 and between J28-2 and J28-7 absent 2."
on the DC power supply PCB?
Wiring 3 Is the connection of the cable for the NO Correct the connection.
connector (J1701-4 for overcurrent
detection signal 1) on the relay PCB
normal?
Fuse (FU101) 4 Is the fuse (FU101) on the DC power YES Remove the cause that
supply PCB blown? blew the fuse, and
replace the fuse.
Wiring, DC load 5 Turn off the main power supply switch. YES Turn off the power
When the power switch is turned on in switch, and disconnect
about 3 min, is the voltage between the the following
relay PCB and the following terminals connectors from the
normal? relay PCB: J1711,
J1712, J1714, J1716,
pin Output J1718.
Connector Remarks
No. voltage Connect one of the
disconnected
J1704 1 12V ±7%,-10%
connectors, and turn on
3 3.3V ±5%
the power switch.
J1705 1 +8V ±10% Repeat this for all
3 -8V ±10% connectors to find the
5 15V ±10% connector that turns on
J1706 1 5V ±4% the protection circuit;
then, check the wiring
Note that the outputs in the table assume from that connector
that the AC input power has a tolerance of and the DC loads.
±10%.
DC power NO Replace the DC power
supply PCB supply PCB.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-103
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

64 The DC power supply fails to operate 2.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Is the main power lamp on? NO See "The DC power
supply fails to operate
1."
Connector 2 Is the connection of the connectors of the NO Correct the connection.
following PCBs normal?
• Relay PCB
J1718
• DC controller PCB
J501, J525 YES End.
• MFC PCB
J1402, J1403, J1407
• Image Processor PCB
J1101, J1102, J1103
3 Turn off the main power such. Is there NO Replace the DC power
DC power when the power switch is supply PCB.
turned on in about 3 min and the control
panel power switch is turned on?

13-104 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

65 Pickup operation fails.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Slide out and in the cassette. Is the sound NO See "The lifter fails to
of the lifter falling and the lifter motor move up."
turning heard?
Drive gear 2 Is the drive belt routed correctly? NO Route the belt correctly.
Upper right 3 Are the upper right cover and the lower NO Close the covers
cover, Lower right cover closed firmly? firmly.
right cover
Pressure cover 4 Are the upper right cover and the lower NO Check the pressure
right cover forcing the vertical path rolls springs.
1, 2, 3, and 4 in place?
Vertical path 1 5 Open the upper right cover and the lower NO Check the wiring; if
clutch (CL8), right cover. Do the vertical path rollers 1, normal, replace the
Vertical path 2 2, 3, and 4 and the pre-registant roller clutch(es).
clutch (CL9), rotate when power is put over the cover
Vertical path 3 open/closed sensor and the Copy Start key
clutch (CL13), is pressed?
Vertical path 4
clutch (CL15),
Pre-registration
roller clutch (CL5)
Registration roller 6 Is the leading edge of the copy paper as YES See "the registration
drive clutch far as the registration roller assembly? roller fails to rotate."
Pickup 7 Open the upper right cover and the lower YES Go to step 9.
assembly right cover. Does the feeding/separation
roller rotate when a screwdriver is
inserted into the door switch and the Copy
Start key is pressed?
Pickup clutch 8 Set the meter to the 30VDC range, and YES Check the wiring; if
connect the probes to the connectors of normal, replace the
the DC controller PCB as indicated in the clutch in question.
DC controller following table. Does the voltage change NO Replace the DC
PCB from 24 to 0 V when the Copy Start key is controller PCB.
pressed?
Cassette Clutch + -
Right deck CL10 J511-A1 GND
Left deck CL11 J518-B7 GND
3 CL12 J515-A1 GND
4 CL14 J517-A1 GND

Sensor 9 Check which sensor has detected the jam NO Check the wiring and
in COPIER>I/O>IP in service mode. Is the lever; if normal,
the sensor normal? replace the sensor.
Pickup assembly YES Remove the pickup
assembly, and check
the spring.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-105
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

66 The lifter fails to move up.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Gear lever 1 Remove the deck, and move up the lifter NO Remove the pickup
by hand. Does it move smoothly? assembly, and check
the gear and the lever.
Spring lever 2 Push up the pickup roller releasing lever NO Remove the pickup
with your finger. Doe the pickup roller assembly, and check
move down? the spring and the
lever.
Deck open/ 3 Is the voltage of the following connectors NO Check the sensor flag
closed sensor on the DC controller PCB about 5 V when and the wiring; if
the deck is inserted? normal, replace the
right deck (PS23): J511-B5 sensor.
left deck (PS33): J518-B2
Deck limit 4 Is the voltage of the following connectors NO Check the sensor flag
sensor on the DC controller PCB about 0 V ? and the wiring; if
right deck (PS24): J511-B8 normal, replace the
left deck (PS34): J518-B5 sensor.
Lifter motor 5 Turn on the main power switch and the YES Replace the deck lifter
control paper switch, and set the meter motor.
DC controller range to 30 VDC. NO Replace the DC
PCB Connect the - probe to the ground and the controller PCB.
+ probe to the connectors on the DC
controller PCB. Does the voltage change
from about 0 to 24 V?
right deck (M13): J514-A4
left deck (M14): J514-B1

13-106 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

67 The lifter fails to move up. (cassette pickup)

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Cassette size 1 Is the size of the cassette indicated on the NO Check the cassette size
detecting switch message display? detecting switch.
Latch (cassette) 2 Is the movement of the open button on the NO Mount the button
cassette normal? properly.
Spring lever 3 Push down the pickup roller releasing NO Remove the pickup
lever with your finger. Does the pickup assembly, and check
roller move down? the spring and lever.
Cassette open/ 4 Is the voltage of the following connectors NO Check the sensor flag
closed sensor on the DC controller PCB about 5 V when and the wiring; if
the cassette is slid in? normal, replace the
cassette 3 (PS40): J515-B5 sensor.
cassette 4 (PS45): J517-B5
Lifter motor 5 Turn on the main power switch and the YES Remove the lifter
control panel power switch. Set the meter motor assembly, and
to the 30 VDC range, and connect the - check the gears; if
probe to ground and the + probe to the normal, replace the
following jacks. Does the voltage change motor.
DC controller from about 0 to 24 V when the cassette is NO Replace the DC
PCB slid in? controller PCB.
cassette 3 (M16): J516-A4
cassette 4 (M17): J516-B1

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-107
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

68 Pickup operation fails. (multifeeder pickup)

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Wiring 1 Is the connector of the multifeeder (to the NO Connect the connector
body) connected properly? properly.
2 Is the leading edge of the copy paper as YES See "The registration
far as the registration roller? roller fails to rotate."
Pickup roller, 3 Are the pickup roller, pickup/feeding NO Mount the roller(s)
Pickup/feeding roller, and separation roller mounted in correctly?
roller, their correct orientation?
Separation roller
Multifeeder 4 Execute the following service mode, and NO Check the wiring and
paper sensor place paper in the multifeeder. Does the the sensor flag; if
(PS17) bit change from 0 to 1? normal, replace the
bit 0 of COPIER>I/O>IP>POC1 sensor (PS17); i.e., DC
controller PCB J510-
B7, -B8, -B9.
Multifeeder 5 Execute the following in service mode. Is NO Check the wiring; if
feeding clutch the sound of the clutch (CL7) operating normal, replace the
(CL7) heard? clutch (CL7); i.e., DC
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>CL1 controller PCB J513-
A8, -A9.
Multifeeder 6 Execute the following service mode. Is the NO Check the wiring; if
feeding clutch sound of the clutch (CL18) operating heard? normal, replace the
(CL18) COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>CL16 clutch (CL18); i.e., DC
controller PCB J513-
A6, A7.
Multifeeder 7 Execute the following service mode. Does NO Check the wiring and
pickup solenoid the multifeeder pickup roller move up and the link; if normal,
(SL6) down? replace the solenoid
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>SL5 (SL6); i.e., DC
(up) controller PCB J510-
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>SL6 10, -11, -12.
(down)
DC controller 8 Replace the DC controller PCB. Is the YES End.
PCB problem corrected?

13-108 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

69 The vertical path roller fails to rotate.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Belt, Gear, 1 Is the drive of the pickup motor (M2) NO Mount the belt, gear, and
Coupling transmitted to each vertical path roller coupling correctly.
through the belt, gear, and coupling?
Vertical path 1 2 Execute the following service mode. Is NO Check the wiring; if
clutch the sound of the clutch (CL8) operating normal, replace the clutch
heard? (CL8); i.e., DC controller
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>CL7 PCB J511-A3, -A4.
Vertical path 2 3 Execute the following service mode. Is NO Check the wiring; if
clutch the sound of the clutch (CL9) operating normal, replace the clutch
heard? (CL9); i.e., DC controller
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>CL9 PCB J514-A6, -A7.
Vertical path 3 4 Execute the following service mode. Is NO Check the wiring; if
clutch the sound of the clutch (CL13) operating normal, replace the clutch
heard? (CL13); i.e., DC
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>CL3 controller PCB J515-A3, -
A4.
Vertical path 4 5 Execute the following service mode. Is NO Check the wiring; if
clutch the sound of the clutch (CL15) operating normal, replace the clutch
heard? (CL15); i.e., DC
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>CL5 controller PCB J517-A3, -
A4.
DC controller YES Replace the DC controller
PCB PCB.

70 The registration roller fails to rotate.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Belt, Gear, 1 Is the drive from the main motor (M1) NO Mount the belt, gear, and
Coupling transmitted to the registration roller coupling correctly.
through the belt, gear, and coupling?
Registration 2 Execute the following service mode. NO Check the wiring and the
paper sensor When paper is placed over the sensor flag; if normal,
(PS5) registration paper sensor, does the bit replace the sensor (PS5);
change from '0' to '1'? i.e., DC controller PCB
bit 1 of COPIER>I/O>IP>P001 J509-A1, -A2, -A3.
Registration 3 Execute the following service mode. Is NO Check the wiring; if
clutch (CL2) the sound of the clutch (CL2) operation normal, replace the clutch
heard? (CL2); i.e., DC controller
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART- PCB J509-A4, -A5.
DC controller CHK>CL19 YES Replace the DC controller
PCB PCB

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-109
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

71 The No. 1 mirror fails to operate.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Copyboard glass 1 Is the copyboard glass mounted correctly? NO Mount the copyboard
so that it turns on the
copyboard glass sensor
(PS57) correctly.
Copyboard glass 2 Measure the voltage of J804-2 on the NO If the voltage does not
sensor (PS57) scanner motor driver PCB. change when the sensor
• Is it 5 V when the copyboard glass is is pressed by hand and
mounted? the wiring is free of a
• Is it 0 V when the copyboard glass is problem, replace the
removed? sensor.
Cable 3 Is the scanner drive cable routed NO Route the cable
correctly? correctly.
Scanner path 4 Is the scanner rail free of dirt, and does NO Check the rail for dirt
the scanner move smoothly when pushed and foreign matter; as
by hand? necessary, clean,
lubricate, or correct.
Reference:
If the rail is soiled,
clean it with
alcohol, and apply a
small amount of
silicone oil (FY9-
6010).

Relay PCB 5 Measure the voltage of J801 on the NO Check the AC line up
scanner motor driver PCB. Is it as to the relay PCB; if
indicated? normal, replace the
J801-1: 38 V relay PCB.
J801-3: 12 V
J801-5: -12 V
J801-6: 5 V
DC controller 6 Measure the voltage of J506-A12 on the NO Check the wiring; if
PCB DC controller PCB. Does it change from normal, replace the DC
0 to 5 V when the control panel power controller PCB.
switch is turned on?
Scanner motor 7 Replace the scanner motor driver PCB. Is YES End.
driver PCB the problem corrected?
Scanner motor NO Replace the scanner
(M5) motor (M5).

13-110 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

72 The pre-exposure lamp fails to turn on.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Pre-exposure 1 Select COPIER>1/O>IP in service mode. YES Check the wiring from
lamp PCB Does bit 6 of address P017 change from the DC controller PCB
'0' to '1' when the Copy Start key is to the pre-exposure
pressed? lamp PCB; if normal,
replace the pre-
exposure lamp PCB.
DC controller 2 Set the meter to the 30 VDC range. Does NO Replace the DC
PCB the voltage between J504-A1 (+) on the controller PCB.
Pre-exposure DC controller PCB and GND change YES Check the wiring from
lamp PCB from 0 to 24 V when the Copy Start key is the DC controller PCB
pressed? to the pre-exposure
lamp PCB; if normal,
replace the pre-
exposure lamp PCB.

73 The scanning lamp fails to turn on.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Connector 1 Select COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC- YES Check the connector. It
R>SCANLAMP in service mode. Does may have poor contact.
the scanning lamp remain on for 3 sec
when the OK key is pressed?
Lamp 2 Is the scanning lamp (LA1) mounted NO Disconnect the power
correctly? plug, and mount the
lamp correctly.
Relay PCB 3 Measure the voltage of J1001-1 on the NO Check the AC line up
inverter PCB. Is it 38 V? to the relay PCB; if
normal, replace the
relay PCB.
Inverter PCB 4 Measure the voltage of J506-B11 on the YES Check the wring; if
DC controller PCB. Does it change from normal, replace the
5 to 0 V when the control panel power inverter PCB.
DC controller switch is turned on? NO Check the wiring; if
PCB normal, replace the DC
controller PCB.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-111
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

74 The cartridge inside toner feeder motor (M6) fails to operate.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Execute COPIER>FUNCTION>PART- NO Go to step 3.
CHK>MTR in service mode. Does the
cartridge inside toner feeder motor rotate?
DC controller 2 Execute COPIER>FUNCTION>PART- NO Replace the DC
PCB CHK>MTR in service mode to operate controller PCB.
J243, 245 the hopper motor. Is the voltage between YES Check the connection
J512-B4 (+) and J512-B5 (-) on the DC of the relay connectors
controller PCB 24 V? J243 and J245.

75 The hopper inside toner feeder motor (M18) fails to operate.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Execute COPIER>FUNCTION>PART- NO Go to step 3.
CHK>MTR in service mode. Does the
hopper inside toner feeder motor rotate?
DC controller 2 Execute COPIER>FUNCTION>PART- NO Replace the DC
PCB CHK>MTR in service mode to operate controller PCB.
J138, 143 the hopper inside toner feeder motor. Is YES Check the connection
the voltage between J504-B18 (+) and of the relay connectors
J504-B19 (-) on the DC controller PCB J138 and J143.
about 24 V?

76 The drum heater fails to operate.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Open the front door, and release the YES The drum heater is
fixing/feeding assembly. Are the ends of normal.
the drum warm? (Do not touch the surface
of the drum.)
DC controller 2 Set the meter range to 12 VDC, and NO Replace the DC
PCB connect the probes to J505-A8 (+) and controller PCB.
J505-A7 (-) on the DC controller PCB. Is
the voltage between the terminals 5 V
during standby?
Heater driver 3 Replace the heater driver PCB. Is the YES End.
PCB problem corrected?
Drum heater 4 Remove the drum, and set the meter range NO Replace the drum
(H3) to 'Ω × 1'. Does the index of the meter heater.
Drum heater swing when ht probes are connected to YES Replace the drum
controller PCB both terminals? heater controller PCB.

13-112 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

77 The Add Toner indicator fails to turn on.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Is there toner inside the hopper? YES Go to step 2.
Toner sensor 2 Select COPIER>I/O>IP in service mode. NO 1. Replace the sensor.
(hopper), DC Move toner away from the toner sensor 2. Replace the DC
controller PCB (TS1) to exposure the sensor. At this time, controller PCB.
DC controller is bit 9 of P002 '0' (toner absent)? YES 1. Replace the DC
PCB, Control controller PCB.
panel 2. Replace the control
panel.

78 The Add Toner fails to turn on.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Toner 1 Is there toner at the rear of the hopper? NO The toner inside the
hopper is not enough.
Supply toner.
Toner sensor 2 Select COPIER>I/O>IP in service mode. YES 1. Replace the toner
(TS1) At this time, is bit 9 of P002 '0' (toner sensor inside the
absent)? hopper.
DC controller NO 1. Replace the DC
PCB Control controller PCB.
panel 2. Replace the control
panel.

79 The Control Card Set message fails to turn on.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


CC-V 1 Can copies be made without a control YES Check the connector of
card? the CC-V for a short
circuit.
Control panel 2 Replace the control panel. Does the YES End.
DC controller message turn on? NO Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-113
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

80 The Control Card Set message fails to turn off.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Control card 1 Is the control card inserted correctly? NO Insert the control card
correctly.
DC controller 2 Can copies be made? NO Replace the DC
PCB controller PCB.
CC-V YES Replace the CC-V.

81 The Add Paper message fails to turn off. (deck right/left)

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Deck paper 1 Is the deck paper sensor mounted NO Mount the sensor and
sensor (PS22 for correctly, and is the movement of the the flag properly.
right; PS32 for sensor flag normal?
left)

82 The Add Paper message fails to turn off. (cassette 3/4)

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Cassette paper 1 Is the cassette paper sensor mounted NO Mount the sensor and
sensor (PS39 for correctly, and is the movement of the the flag properly.
3; PS44 for 4) sensor flag normal?
Cassette pickup 2 Is the output gear of the lifter motor and YES Mount the lifter motor
assembly the gear of the cassette pickup motor properly. Or, replace
poorly engaged? the lifter motor and the
cassette pickup
assembly
simultaneously.

13-114 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

83 The fixing heater fails to operate.

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Multifeeder 1 Is the multifeeder cover closed firmly? NO Close the multifeeder
cover cover firmly.
Multifeeder 2 Is the multifeeder cover open/closed NO Mount the sensor
cover open/ sensor mounted properly? properly.
closed sensor YES Replace the
(PS56) multifeeder open/
closed sensor.
Fixing/feeding 3 Is the fixing/feeding unit releasing lever NO Mount the sensor
unit releasing sensor mounted properly? properly.
lever sensor YES Replace the fixing/
(PS28) feeding unit releasing
lever sensor.
Thermal switch 4 Slide out the fixing assembly, and connect NO Replace the thermal
(TP1) the meter probes to both terminals of the switch.
thermal switch (TP1). Is there electrical
continuity?
Relay (RLY1) 5 Replace the relay (RLY1). Is the problem YES End.
corrected?
Fixing heater 6 Slide out the fixing assembly, and connect NO Replace the fixing
(H1, H2) the meter probes to both terminals of the heater.
fixing heater (H1, H2). Is there electrical
continuity?
SSR 7 Is the voltage of the connector on the DC YES Replace the SSR.
DC controller controller PCB about 5 V? NO Replace the DC
PCB Heater + controller PCB.
Main heater (H1) J505-A10
Main heater (H2) J505-A11

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-115
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

84 Pickup operation fails. (side paper deck)

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Upper right 1 Are the upper right door and the lower NO Close the doors firmly.
door, Lower right door closed firmly?
right door
Lifter 2 Slide out the compartment from the deck. NO See the "The lifter fails
Does the lifter move down? Further, is the to move up."
lifter heard to move up when the
compartment is slid in?
Deck pickup 3 Does the pickup roller rotate? YES If the roller is soiled,
roller clean it with alcohol; if
it is deformed by wear,
replace it.
Belt 4 Is the belt used to transmit the drive to the NO Route the belt
pickup roller routed correctly? correctly.
Drive belt, Gear, 5 Is the drive from the deck main motor NO Check the drive belt,
Coupling transmitted to the pickup assembly gear, and coupling.
through the drive belt, gear, and coupling?
Side deck driver 6 Measure the voltage of the connector on NO Replace the side paper
PCB the side deck PCB. Does it change from deck PCB.
Deck pickup/ 24 to 0 V when the Copy Start key is YES Check the wiring up to
vertical path pressed? the clutch; if normal,
clutch (CL102 J104-7: CL101 replace the clutch.
for pickup; J104-12: CL102
CL101 for
feeding)

13-116 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

85 The deck lifter fails to move up. (side paper deck)

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Side paper deck 1 Is the deck installed correctly? NO Install the deck
correctly.
Lifter cable 2 Is the lifter cable routed correctly? NO Route the cable
correctly.
Spring, Lever 3 Push up the pickup roller releasing lever NO Remove the pickup
by your finger. Does the pickup roller assembly, and check
move down? the spring and the
lever.
Deck lifter 4 Does the deck lifter motor rotate? YES Go to step 6.
motor (M102)
Side deck driver 5 Does the voltage between J109-3 on the NO Replace the side deck
PCB side deck driver PCB and GND (-) change driver PCB.
Deck open from about 0 to 5 V when the deck is YES Check the wiring to the
detecting switch closed? switch; if normal,
(SW101) replace the switch.
Deck lifter 6 Does the voltage between J107-8 (+) on YES Check the lever and the
lower limit the side deck driver PCB and GND (-) wiring; if normal,
detecting switch change as follows? replace the sensor.
(SW102) • when the deck is opened, 0 V.
Side deck driver • when the deck is closed, 5 V. NO Replace the side deck
PCB driver PCB.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-117
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

V . TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING PROBLEMS


A. Copy Paper Jams
Jams tend to be limited to the following blocks of the copier:
[1]Pickup assembly
[2]Separation/feeding assembly
[3]Fixing/delivery assembly
[4]Drum cleaner unit
[5]Reversing assembly
[6]Duplexing feeding assembly
The troubleshooting procedures that follow are organized according to location.
The copier is designed to indicate the location and type of each jam in its service mode
(COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM).

[3] [4]

[2] [1]

[5] [6]

Figure 13-501

13-118 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

1 Pickup Assembly

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Pickup 1 Is the copy paper curled or wavy? YES Replace the paper;
assembly instruct the user on the
correct method of
storing paper.
2 Try paper of a type recommended by YES Advise the user to use
Canon. Is the problem corrected? recommended paper.
DC controller 3 Does the pickup roller of the selected NO See "Pickup operation
PCB, Pickup cassette, deck, or manual feed tray rotate fails" for each source
clutch during copying operation? of paper.
Pickup roller 4 Is the pickup roller deformed or worn? YES Replace the pickup
roller.
Guide plate NO Check the guide plate
for deformation.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-119
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

2 Separation/Feeding Assembly

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Copy paper 1 Is the leading edge of copy paper past the YES Go to step 5.
registration roller?
Registration 2 Is the coupling of the registration roller NO Mount the fixing/
roller connected properly? feeding unit properly.
3 Is the registration roller deformed (worn) YES If soiled, clean the
or soiled? roller with alcohol; if
worn, replace it.
4 Are the roller retaining springs on both NO Mount them correctly.
ends of the registration roller mounted YES Check the transfer
correctly? guide for foreign
matter and
deformation.
Registration 5 Does the registration clutch operate NO Check the registration
clutch normally? clutch.
Transfer/ 6 Is the transfer/separation charging YES Check the transfer/
separation assembly set securely? separation charging
charging assembly.
assembly 7 Are there burrs on the paper guide of the YES Remove the burrs.
transfer/separation charging assembly?
Copy paper 8 Use paper of a type recommended by YES Advise the user to use
Canon. Is the problem corrected? recommended paper.
Separation claw 9 Is the separation claw under the cleaner YES Replace the separation
(cleaner unit) unit damaged? claws.
Feeding belt 10 Are the two feeding belts moving NO Check the belt and the
properly? pulley.
Feeding fan YES Check to make sure
that the feeding fan is
operating.

13-120 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

3 Fixing/Delivery Assembly

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Separation claw 1 Is the separation claw worn or YES 1. Replace the
(delivery deformed? separation claw.
assembly) 2. If dirt is found, clean
it with solvent.
Upper/lower 2 Is the upper/lower roller deformed or YES Replace the roller.
roller scratched?
Fixing assembly

Paper guide 3 Is the paper guide soiled with toner? YES Clean the guide with
solvent.
4 Is the height of the paper guide normal? NO Adjust the height.
Nip 5 Is the lower roller pressure (nip) as NO Adjust the pressure.
indicated?
Cleaning belt 6 Is the cleaning belt taken up normally? NO Check the fixing
cleaner unit.
Sensor lever 7 Does each sensor lever move smoothly? NO Adjust the lever.
Delivery assembly

Delivery 8 Are the external delivery sensor (PS10) NO Replace the sensor.
sensor and the claw jam sensor (PS6) normal?
Delivery paper 9 Is the delivery paper deflecting plate NO Correct the orientation
deflecting oriented in the direction of delivery? of the delivery paper
plate deflecting plate.
Delivery roller 10 Does the delivery roller move NO Check the drive
drive smoothly? assembly of the
assembly delivery roller.
Leading edge YES Check the leading
margin edge of copy paper for
a margin.

4 Fixing/Delivery Assembly (reversal delivery assembly)

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Duplexing reversal 1 Is the duplexing reversal sensor (PS12) NO Replace the sensor.
sensor (PS12) normal?
Internal delivery 2 Is the internal delivery paper sensor NO Replace the sensor.
paper sensor (PS9) (PS9) normal?
Delivery flapper 3 Does the delivery flapper move NO Adjust the position of
solenoid (SL3) correctly? the delivery flapper
solenoid or replace it.
Reversing flapper 4 Does the reversing flapper move NO Adjust the position of
solenoid (SL11) correctly? the reversal flapper
solenoid or replace it.
Reversal motor 5 Does the reversal motor (M11) rotate at NO Replace the reversal
(M11) the correct timing? motor.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-121
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 Cleaner Unit

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Transfer/ 1 Is the transfer/separation charging NO Fit the transfer/
separation assembly and the pre-transfer charging separation charging
charging assembly fitted securely? assembly securely.
assembly,
Pre-transfer
charging
assembly
Separation claw 2 Is the height of the charging wire as NO Adjust the height of the
(cleaner unit) indicated? charging wire.
Copy paper 3 Is the separation claw under the cleaner YES Replace the separation
unit damaged? claw.
High-voltage 4 Try paper of a type recommended by YES Advise the user to use
transformer, DC Canon. recommended paper.
controller PCB NO 1. Check the high-
voltage transformer.
2. Check the DC
controller PCB.

6 Lower Feeding Assembly

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


1 Is the lower feeding assembly set NO Set the assembly
correctly? correctly.
Lower feeding 2 Is the roller inside the lower feeding NO Replace CL16 or
middle clutch assembly rotating? CL17.
(CL16), Lower
feeding right
clutch (CL17)
Pre-confluence 3 Are the pre-confluence sensor (PS14) and NO Replace PS14 or PS15.
sensor (PS14), the post-confluence sensor (PS15)
Post-confluence normal?
sensor (PS15)

13-122 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

B. Faulty Feeding
1 Double Feeding

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Separation roller 1 Is the separation roller deformed or worn? YES Replace the separation
roller.
Spring NO Replace the spring used
to pull the separation
roller.

2 Wrinkles

Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action


Pickup 1 Turn off the power while copy paper is YES Check the pickup
assembly moving through the feeding assembly. At assembly. Check the
this time, is the copy paper wrinkled? Or registration roller.
is it moving askew?
Copy paper 2 Try paper fresh out of package. Is the YES The paper may be
problem corrected? moist. Advise the user
on the correct method
of storing paper.
3 Try paper recommended by Canon. Is the NO Advise the user to use
problem corrected? recommended paper.
Paper 4 Is the paper guide soiled with toner or YES Clean it with solvent.
guide foreign matter?
5 Is the height of the paper guide NO Adjust the height.
Fixing assembly

appropriate?
Lower 6 Is the lower roller pressure (nip) as NO Adjust the pressure.
roller indicated?
pressure YES Try replacing the upper
Upper/ and lower rollers one
lower after the other.
roller
pressure

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-123
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

VI . ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS


A. Clutches

CL1

CL4
CL7
CL18 CL5
CL6
CL2

CL8
CL10 CL3

CL11 CL9 CL12


CL17
CL16
CL13 CL19
CL21
CL14
CL15

Figure 13-601

13-124 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Clutches

Symbol Name Notation Description


Clutch CL1 Drives the hopper.
CL2 Drives the registration roller.
CL CL3 Drives the registration roller brake.
CL4 Drives the developing cylinder.
CL5 Drives the pre-registration roller.
CL6 Drives the pre-registration roller brake.
CL7 Drives the manual feed tray pickup roller.
CL8 Drives the vertical path 1 roller.
CL9 Drives the vertical path 2 roller.
CL10 Drives the front deck (right) pickup roller.
CL11 Drives the front deck (left) pickup roller.
CL12 Drives the cassette 3 pickup roller.
CL13 Drives the vertical path 3 roller.
CL14 Drives the cassette 4 pickup roller.
CL15 Drives the vertical path 4 roller.
CL16 Drives the lower feeding middle roller.
CL17 Drives the lower feeding right roller.
CL18 Drives the manual feed tray feeding roller.
CL19 Drives the front deck (left) feeding roller.
CL21 Switches delivery speed.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-125
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

B. Solenoids

SL6

SL4

SL3
SL7

SL8 SL2 SL1

SL11 SL9

SL10

Figure 13-602

13-126 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Solenoids

Symbol Name Notation Description


Solenoid SL1 Drives the fixing inlet guide.
SL SL2 Drives the fixing cleaning belt.
SL3 Drives the delivery flapper.
SL4 Locks the fixing/feeding unit.
SL6 Drives the manual feed tray pickup latch.
SL7 Drives the front deck (right) pickup
mechanism.
SL8 Drives the front deck (left) pickup
mechanism.
SL9 Drives the cassette 3 pickup mechanism.
SL10 Drives the cassette 4 pickup mechanism.
SL11 Drives the reversing flapper.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-127
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Motors

M5

M6

M18
M0
M4

M1
M8 M7
M2

M13 M15
M9

M14 M3

M11
M16
M12

M17

Figure 13-603

13-128 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Motors

Symbol Name Notation Description


Motor M0 Drum motor
M M1 Main motor
M2 Pickup motor
M3 Fixing motor
M4 Laser scanner motor
M5 Scanner motor
M6 Cartridge motor
M7 Pre-transfer charging wire cleaner motor
M8 Primary charging wire cleaner motor
M9 Transfer separation charging wire cleaner
motor
M11 Reversal motor
M12 Duplexing feeding motor
M13 Front deck (right) lifter motor
M14 Front deck (left) lifter motor
M15 Horizontal registration motor
M16 Cassette 3 lifter motor
M17 Cassette 4 lifter motor
M18 Hopper inside toner feeder motor

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-129
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

D. Fans

FM8
FM9

FM2 FM5 FM4


FM13
FM10
FM7

FM1
FM14
FM3

FM6

FM11

FM12

Figure 13-604

13-130 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Fans

Symbol Name Notation Description


Fans FM1 Primary charging assembly fan
FM2 Fixing assembly heat discharge fan
FM3 Scanner cooling fan
FM4 Stream reading fan
FM5 Laser driver cooling fan
FM6 De-curling fan
FM7 Feeding fan
FM8 Drum fan
FM9 Inverter cooling fan
FM10 Pre-transfer charging assembly fan
FM11 Power supply cooling fan 1
FM12 Power supply cooling fan 2
FM13 Separation fan
FM14 Laser scanner fan

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-131
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

E. Sensors 1

PS59
PS5 PS35
PS16
PS9 PS47
PS10 PS7
PS8 PS49
PS28
PS41
PS6 PS11
PS38
PS37
PS52
PS51 PS39
PS19 PS40
PS55 PS46
PS54 PS42
PS43
PS44
PS45

PS4

PS57

PS3
PS17
PS1

PS56
PS15
PS14 PS20
PS27
PS26
PS13
PS24 PS58
PS12
PS21 PS18
PS25 PS22
PS34 PS23
PS31 PS48
PS32
PS33

Figure 13-605

13-132 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Sensors 1

Symbol Name Notation Description


Photointerrupter PS1 Scanner home position detection
PS3 Image leading edge detection
PS4 ADF open/closed detection
PS5 Registration paper detection
PS6 Fixing claw jam detection
PS7 Fixing cleaning belt detection
PS8 Fixing cleaning belt warning detection
PS9 Internal delivery paper detection
PS10 External delivery paper detection
PS11 Fixing feeding unit outlet paper detection
PS12 Duplexing reversal paper detection
PS13 U-turn paper detection
PS14 Pre-confluence paper detection
PS15 Post-confluence paper detection
PS16 Reversal paper detection
PS17 Manual feed tray paper detection
PS18 Horizontal registration paper detection
PS19 Waste toner case full detection
PS20 Front deck (right) pickup paper detection
PS21 Front deck (right) lifter position detection
PS22 Front deck (right) paper detection
PS23 Front deck (right) open/closed detection
PS24 Front deck (right) lifter upper limit detection
PS25 Front deck (left) pickup paper detection
PS26 Front deck (left) feeding paper detection
PS27 Front deck (right) feeding paper detection
PS28 Fixing/feeding unit releasing lever detection
PS31 Front deck (left) lifter position detection
PS32 Front deck (left) paper detection
PS33 Front deck (left) open/closed detection
PS34 Front deck (left) lifter upper limit detection
PS35 Manual feed tray de-curling inlet paper detection
PS37 Cassette 3 pickup paper detection
PS38 Cassette 3 lifter position detection
PS39 Cassette 3 paper detection
PS40 Cassette 3 open/closed detection
PS41 Vertical path 3 roller paper detection
PS42 Cassette 4 pickup paper detection
PS43 Cassette 4 lifter position detection
PS44 Cassette 4 paper detection
PS45 Cassette 4 open/closed detection
PS46 Vertical path 4 roll paper detection
PS47 Vertical path roller 1 paper detection
PS48 Lower right cover open/closed detection
PS49 Vertical path 2 roller paper detection
PS51 Front deck (right ) medium level paper detection
PS52 Front deck (right) upper level paper detection
PS54 Front deck (left) medium level paper detection
PS55 Front deck (left) upper level paper detection
PS56 Manual feed tray cover open/closed detection
PS57 Copyboard glass detection
PS58 Middle right cover open/closed detection
PS59 Toner cartridge cover open/closed detection

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-133
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

F. Sensors 2

SIZE4
SIZE3

DP1 SVR1
TS2
TS1
TS3

SIZE2
SIZE1

SVR2
SV1

SVR3

SV2

Figure 13-606

13-134 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Sensors 2

Symbol Name Notation Description


Piezoelectric TS1 Hopper inside toner level detection 1
TS oscillator TS2 Hopper inside toner lower limit detection 2
TS3 Developing assembly inside toner level
detection

Potential sensor DP1 Drum surface potential measurement


DP
Photointerrupter SV1 Cassette 3 paper length detection
SV SV2 Cassette 4 paper length detection

Reflecting type SIZE1 Original size detection 1


SIZE sensor SIZE2 Original size detection 2
SIZE3 Original size detection 3
SIZE4 Original size detection 4

Slide registration SVR1 Manual feed tray paper width detection


SVR2 Cassette 3 paper width detection
SVR3 Cassette 4 paper width detection

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-135
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

G. Switches

SW1
MSW8

MSW1
MSW4

MSW2 MSW3 MSW5

MSW6

SW2
MSW7

SW3

Figure 13-607

13-136 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Switches

Name Notation Description


Switch SW1 Main switch
SW2 Front cover switch
SW3 Drum heater switch

MSW1 Cartridge detection


MSW2 Waste toner clogging detection
MSW3 Pre-transfer charging wire cleaner home position
detection
MSW4 Primary charging wire cleaner home position detection
MSW5 Manual feed tray cover open/closed detection
MSW6 Transfer/separation charging wire cleaner home position
detection
MSW7 Front cover open/closed detection
MSW8 Cartridge motor drive

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-137
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

H. Counters, Heaters, Fuses, and Others

FL1
LED1
H3
H5

TH2
TH1
TP1
H1
H2
CNT2
CNT1
HD1 CNT3

SSR1
RL2
RL1 H4
ELCB1
LF1

Figure 13-608

13-138 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Counters, Heaters, Fuses, and Others

Name Notation Description


Counter CNT1 Total counter
CNT2 Options counter (some 230-V models only)
CNT3 Printer counter

SSR SSR1 Solid state relay

Scanning lamp FL1 Scanning lamp


(fluorescent lamp)

Heater H1 Fixing main heater


H2 Fixing sub heater
H3 Drum heater
H4 Cassette heater (standard with 100-V)
H5 Scanning lamp heater

Thermistor TH1 Fixing heater main thermistor


TH2 Fixing heater sub thermistor (end part)

Thermal switch TP1 Fixing heater thermal switch

Leakage breaker ELCB1 Leakage breaker

Line filter LF1 AC power supply noise removal

Relay RL1 Fixing heater power supply


RL2 Drum heater/cassette heater power supply

Pre-exposure lamp LED1 Drum pre-exposure

Image server (hard disk) HD1 Hard disk memory

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-139
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I. PCBs

27 9
7 1

32
16
8
26
31
3 28 19
33
29 30 13
2
18
20
17

23 22

24

15
25

14

10

11

4
12

Figure 13-609

13-140 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

PCBs

Notation Name Description


1 CCD PCB CCD drive/analog image processing
2 Image processor PCB Digital image processing
3 Page memory PCB Image data storage
4 MFC PCB System control
5 System motherboard Signal relay
6 DC controller PCB DC load control
7 Laser driver PCB 1 Laser diode drive
8 Laser driver PCB 2 Laser intensity control
9 Scanner motor drier PCB Scanner motor driver
10 DC power supply PCB DC power supply
11 HVT-DC1 PCB High-voltage DC component generation
12 HVT-AC PCB High-voltage AC component generation
13 Bi-Centronics PCB Downloading I/F
14 Relay PCB DC power supply distribution/supply
15 Heater driver PCB Cassette heater drive
16 Fluorescent inverter PCB Fluorescent lamp activation control
17 Drum heater control PCB Drum heater drive
18 BD PCB Laser beam detection
19 Potential control PCB Drum surface potential control
20 Options counter PCB Options counter drive
22 Environment sensor PCB Machine internal temperature/humidity detection
23 No-stacking PCB Duplexing feeding unit drive
24 Cassette 3 paper level Cassette 3 paper level detection
detection PCB
25 Cassette 4 paper level Cassette 4 paper level detection
detection PCB
26 Laser scanner motor drier Laser scanner motor drive
PCB
27 Intensity control PCB Fluorescent lamp intensity control
28 Intensity sensor PCB Fluorescent lamp intensity detection
29 Original orientation Original orientation detection
detection PCB
30 Control panel CPU PCB Control panel control
31 Control panel key and Control panel key input, LED indication
LED PCB
32 Control panel main Control panel power switch
switching PCB
33 Control panel volume Control panel contrast adjustment
PCB

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-141
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

J. Side Paper Deck


1. Sensors and Switches

PS104
PS102

PS107 SW100
PS101
PS109 PS103
PS106
SW101

PS108

SW102

PS105

Figure 13-610 Side Paper Deck

13-142 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Symbol Name Notation Description

Photointerrupter PS101 Detects paper picked up from the deck.


PS102 Detects the absence of paper in the deck.
PS103 Detects the upper limit of the deck lifter.
PS104 Detects the position of the deck lifter.
PS105 Detects installation (connection) of the deck.
PS106 Detects paper in the vertical path for the
deck.
PS107 Detects the deck paper supply position.
PS108 Detects the level of paper in the deck.
PS109 Detects the state (open) of the deck.

Switch SW100 Deck open switch

Microswitch SW101 Deck open detecting switch


SW102 Deck lifter upper limit detecting switch

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-143
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Motors, Clutches, Solenoids, and PCBs

SL101

CL101

CL102

M101 [2]

[1]

SL102

M102

Figure 13-611 Side Paper Deck

13-144 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Symbol Name Notation Description

Motor M101 Deck main motor


M M102 Deck lifter motor

Clutch CL101 Deck vertical path clutch


CL CL102 Deck pickup clutch

Solenoid SL101 Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid


SL SL102 Deck open solenoid

PCB [1] Side deck driver PCB


[2] Open switch PCB

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-145
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

K. Variable Registers (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes, and Check


Pins by PCB
Of the variable resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes, and switches found inside the machine,
those needed in the field are discussed.

Caution:
1. Some LEDs emit dim light even when they are off. This is a normal condition, and must be
kept in mind.
2. VRs that may be used in the field.
:
VRs that must not be used in the field
:

Caution:
The VRs and check pins not found in the tables are for factory use only. They require special
tools and high accuracy and, therefore, must not be touched in the fieled when making adjust-
ments and checks.

13-146 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

1. MFC PCB

J1410
J1409

ON
J1408
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW1

BAT1

J1406
J1402

J1403

J1401

J1405
Figure 13-612

The functions of the DIP switch (SW1) are as follows; use it to change the country (site) of
installation:

Setting Configuration
ON
AB
12345678

ON
A
12345678

ON
INCH
12345678

ON
AB/INCH
12345678

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-147
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Image Processor PCB

J1113
J1101 J1102 J1103

J1110

J1106
J1107
LED4 LED2
LED3 LED1
J1111

BAT1
J1109

J1105
J1114
J1112
J1108

Figure 13-613

13-148 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

3. DC Controller PCB

J518 J517 J516 J515 J514 J513 J512


J519

J511
J526

J510
J501
J502

J520
J503

J525
VR1 J524
J522

J523 J521
J504

J505 J506 J507 J508 J509

Figure 13-614

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-149
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

4. DC Power Supply PCB

J703
J712 J711

J1705
J702
Q931

R261

J1704
FU101

J701

Figure 13-615

5. Relay PCB

J1706

J1722
J1702 J1703
J1704 J1705 J1701

J1716 J1719 J1721


J1711

J1712 J1714 J1718 J1713 J1720 J1717 J1723

Figure 13-616

13-150 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

6. Control Panel CPU PCB

J1010 J1011

J1012

J1009 J1006
J1013 J1005
J1004

J1008 J1001

J1003
J1002

Figure 13-617

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-151
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

7. HV-DC PCB

J732 J737 J733

3 1 21 2 1

Settings

SW101
2
J731
1

3
J734
1

1 4 1 5 1 16

J721 J722 J723

Figure 13-618

The slide switch (SW101) is for factory use only, and is not used for servicing work in the field.
(Keep it as it is set at the factory.)

13-152 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

8. Side Deck Driver (side paper deck)

13 1 6 1 2 1 3 1
J103 J105 J106 J101 7
1
J102
J104
1
8
12

1
J108

1
J107 3

J109
10 1

Figure 13-619

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-153
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

VII . UPGRADING THE COPIER


The copier may be upgraded by either of the following two ways:
[1] Replacing the DIMM on the image processor PCB and the DIMM on the MFC PCB; or
[2] Re-writing the contents of the DIMM by downloading from the computer.

A. Replacing the DIMM


Figure 13-701 shows where the DIMMs are mounted.

DIMM on the image


processor PCB

DIMM on the MFC PCB

Figure 13-701

13-154 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

1. Removing the DIMM of the Image Processor PCB


1) Turn off the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet.
2) Remove the copyboard glass, and detach the small cover of the IP cover by removing the
screw.
3) Open the claws of the slot, and pull off the DIMM as if to lift it at an angle.

Small cover
Screw

Push.
DIMM
Push.

Figure 13-702

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-155
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Removing the DIMM of the MFC PCB


1) Turn off the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet.
2) If the printer board is installed, remove it.
3) Remove the rear cover.
4) Open the claws of the slot, and remove the DIMM as if to lift it at an angle.

Push.

Push. DIMM

Figure 13-703

13-156 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

B. Downloading
1. Before the Work
• Prepare a PC to which the copier service support tool (downloading tool) has been installed.
• Prepare a bi-Centronics cable (with the "IEEE 1284Std-compliant" notation).

2. Downloading
a. Making Connections
• Check to make sure that the data lamp is off.
1) Turn off the copier’s main power switch, and disconnect the power plug; if the printer board is
installed, disconnect the cable.
2) Open the front door, and open the connector cover for downloading.

Switch for downloading

COPY LOAD

Figure 13-704

3) Slide the switch shown in Figure 13-705 to LOAD position, and disconnect the two connec-
tors.

Connectors Switch for downloading

LOAD
Bi-Centronics connector

Figure 13-705

4) Connect the copier and the PCB with the bi-Centronics cable.
• Keep the PC OFF.
• Be sure that the 25-pin end of the bi-Centronics cable is to the PCB and the 36-pin end is to the
copier.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-157
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

5) Turn on the PCB, and start the copier service support tool.
6) Connect the copier’s power plug to the power outlet, and turn on the main power switch.

b. Downloading
1) When the copier service support tool has started, select 'To Main Menu' on the screen.
2) Select 'Next' under 'Download/Upload'.

Figure 13-706

3) Select the model and PCB for downloading.


IP: DIMM for IP-CPU
MFC: DIMM for MFC
4) Start downloading for the flash ROM as instructed on the screen of the PC.
5) When downloading has ended, turn off the PC as follows:
'OK' à 'To Main Menu' à 'End Copier Service Support Tool' à 'End'

13-158 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

c. After Downloading
1) Turn off the copier’s main power switch, and disconnect the power plug.
2) Disconnect the bi-Centronics cable from the PC and the copier.
3) Slide the downloading switch to "COPY" side.

Switch for downloading

COPY

Figure 13-707

4) Close the connector cover, and close the front door.


5) If the copier is equipped with fax functions, connect the modular cable.
6) Turn on the main power switch.
7) Start service mode, and check the ROM version:
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-159
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

VIII . SERVICE MODE


A. Outline
The service mode screen configuration has a 3-layer construction: Initial screen, Level 1/Level
2 screen, and Level 3 screen.

User screen

( )(2,8)( )
Reset key

Initial screen
Reset key

Select an item.

Level 1/Level 2
screen From Level 1/
Level 2 screen

Select a Level 1 item at the top of the screen;


then, select a Level 2 item.

Level 3 Level 3 Level 3 Level 3


Item screen Item screen Item screen Item screen

Previous/Next Previous/Next Previous/Next


page page page

Figure 13-A801 Configuration of the Screens

13-160 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

The copier’s service mode is divided into the following seven:

COPIER

FEEDER
DISPLAY Control display mode
SORTER
I/O I/O display mode
BOARD

ADJUST Adjustment mode

FUNCTION Operation/inspection mode

OPTION Settings mode

TEST Test print mode

COUNTER Counter mode

Figure 13-A802 Service Mode Classification

1. Starting Service Mode and Selecting an Item


1) Press the asterisk key " " on the control panel.
2) Press "2" and "8" on the keypad at the same time.
3) Press the asterisk key " " on the control panel.
nThe above operations bring up the Initial screen (Figure 13-A803).

Copier service mode


COPIER

ADF service mode FEEDER


■Shown if installed.
SORTER
Finisher service mode
■Shown if installed.
BOARD
Accessory board service mode
■Shown if installed.

Figure 13-A803 Initial Screen

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-161
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Ending Service Mode


Press the Reset key once to return to the Service Mode Initial screen (Figure 13-A803).
Press the Reset key twice to end service mode and return to the User screen (standard screen).

3. Backing Up the RAM


Each machine is adjusted at the factory, and its adjustment values are recorded on the service
label (attached to the cover of the service document case).

Item A: Value retained by the RAM on the image processor PCB.


Item B: Value retained by the RAM on the MFC PCB.

Table 13-A801

If you have replaced the above PCBs or initialized the RAMs, the corresponding values will be
affected. If you have made adjustments or changed service mode values in the field, be sure to
record the new values on the service label.

Item A Factory Field1 Field2 Field3 Item A Factory Field1 Field2 Field3

BODY PO-CNT OPTION DOC-F-SW

FEEDER
TRNSG-SW SIZE-SW
FIX-TEMP
CPMKP-SW OPTION BLNK-SW

SORTER
IDL-MODE

FUZZY

SCANSLCT

OHP-TEMP Item B Factory Field1 Field2 Field3


PM-RD-MD BODY MODEL-SZ
OHP-CNT

CNT-W/HM

PR-SEL
COPIER>OPTION

USER COPY-LIM
CNT-W/PR
SLEEP
FIX-TMP1
WEB-DSP
TRSW-P-B
DATE-DISP
SP-MODE
COPIER>OPTION

FTMP-DWN MB-CCV

DRUM-CLN PM-DENS

DRM-IDLE
F-GD-CNT CST U1-NAME
USER SIZE-DET U2-NAME
PR-D-SEL U3-NAME

CST P-SZ-C1 U4-NAME

P-SZ-C2 CST-U1
C1-DWSW CST-U2
C2-DWSW CST-U3
DK-DWSW CST-U4
C3-DWSW
C4-DWSW

ACC DK-P

Figure 13-A804 Service Label

13-162 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

4. Basic Operation
a. Initial Screen

COPIER
Initial item
FEEDER
Touch an item to
select.
SORTER
BOARD

Figure 13-A805

b. Level 1/Level 2 Screen

Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter


Level 1 items
Touch an item to
VERSION
select.
USER

ACC-STS

ANALOG
Level 2 items
CST-STS
Touch an item to
select. JAM

ERR
HV-STS

Figure 13-A806

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-163
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

c. Level 3 Item Screen


Number of pages

Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter


<VERSION> < 1/3 > < READY >
Level 2
item DC-CON
State of copier
IP
READY: The copier is ready to respond to a service/copying
PANEL operation.
ANAPRO JAM: The copier has a paper jam.
SERVICE: The copier is in the process of a service operation.
POWER WAITING: The copier is in operation (e.g., initial rotation).
DOOR: The copier's door is open.
Level 3
item COPYING: The copier is making copies.
ERROR: The copier has a service error.

+/- OK

To previous page
To next page

Figure 13-A807

Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter

<VERSION> < 1/3 > < READY >


FL-OFST xxxxx ➔ (yyyyy) {aaaaa~bbbbb}

A press on an item highlights it Numeric input range


(against black background). Value before change

FL-OFST Numeric input

+/- OK

To store new numeric input


To reverse + and -

Stop key: Use it to stop an ongoing operation.

Clear key: Use it to clear a numeric value.

Start key: Use it to make a copy without ending service mode.


Figure 13-A808

13-164 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

B. DISPLAY Control Display Mode


When you select COPIER>DISPLAY, you will see the following screen, and are given the
choices shown in the table that follows.

Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter

VERSION

USER DPOT

ANALOG

CST-STS SENSOR

JAM MISC

ERR ALARM1
HV-STS

Figure 13-B801 COPIER>DISPLAY

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-165
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Items under COPIER>DISPLAY


Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Description
DISPLAY VERSION DC-CON Indicates the version of the ROM on the DC controller PCB.
IP Indicates the version of the ROM on the image processor PCB.
FEEDER Indicates the version of the ROM on the feeder controller PCB.
SOR Indicates the version of the ROM on the sorter controller PCB.
PC/PCL Indicates the version of the ROM on the PC/PCL controller PCB.
LIPS Indicates the version of the ROM on the LIPS controller PCB.
MFC Indicates the version of the ROM on the MFC PCB.
PCL Indicates the version of the ROM on the PCL controller PCB.
PS/KANJI Indicates the version of the ROM on the PS/KANJI controller PCB.
SDL-STCH Indicates the version of the ROM on the saddle stitcher controller PCB.

USER LANGUAGE Indicates the language used.


COUNTER Indicates the count control type for the copy counters.

ANALOG TEMP Indicates the machine temperaure humidity (detected by the


environment sensor).
HUM Indicates the machine internal humidity (detected by the environment
sensor).
OPTICS Indicates the temperature of the scanning lamp (detected by the
fluorescent lamp temperature sensor H5).
FIX-C Indicates the temperature at the middle of the upper fixing roller
(detected by the main thermistor TH1).
FIX-E Indicates the temperature of the ends of the upper fixing roller
(detected y the sub thermistor TH2).

CST-STS WIDTH-C3 Indicates the paper size for the cassette 3.


WIDTH-C4 Indicates the paper size for the cassette 4.
WIDTH-MF Indicates the paper width (new value) or the paper size for the manual
feed tray.

JAM Indicates the jam history.

ERR Indicates the error history.

HV-STS PRIMARY Indicates the current level (µA) of the primary charging assembly.
PRI-GRID Indicates the grid voltage (V) of the primary charging assembly.
PRI-TR Indicates the current level (µA) of the pre-transfer charging assembly.
TR Indicates the current level (µA) of the transfer charging assembly.
SP Indicates the current level of the separation charging assembly (µA).
BIAS Indicates the voltage of the developing DC bias (V).

DPOT DPOT-K Indicates the surface potential (V) of the photosensitive drum.
VL1M Indicates the drum light area potential measurement (V).
VDM Indicates the drum dark area potential measurement (V).

SENSOR DOC-SZ Indicates the size of an original detected by the original size sensor.
DOC-SZ1 Indicates the output of the original size sensor 1.
DOC-SZ2 Indicates the output of the original size sensor 2.
DOC-SZ3 Indicates the output of the original size sensor 3.
DOC-SZ4 Indicates the output of the original size sensor 4.

MISC FL-LIFE Indicates the activation duty ratio (%) of the scanning lamp.

ALARM1 Indicates alarm codes.

13-166 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Items under FEEDER>ADJUST


Level 1 Level 3 Description
DISPLAY FEEDSIZE Indicates the size of an original detected by the feeder.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-167
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<VERSION> COPIER>DISPLAY
Indicates the versions of the ROMs on the copier and accessory PCBs.
Level 3 Description Remarks
DC-CON Indicates the version of the ROM on the DC controller PCB. Indication <xx, yy>
IP Indicates the version of the ROM on the image processor PCB.
FEEDER Indicates the version of the ROM on the feeder controller Version
PCB. number
SORTER Indicates the version of the ROM on the sorter controller PCB. R&D control
number
PS/PCL Indicates the version of the ROM on the PS/PCL controller
PCB.
LIPS Indicates the version of the ROM on the LIPS controller PCB.
MFC Indicates the version of the ROM on the MFC PCB.
PCL Indicates the version of the ROM on the PCL controller PCB.
PS/KANJI Indicates the version of the ROM on the PS/Kanji controller
PCB.
SDL- Indicates the version of the ROM on the saddle stitcher
STCH controller PCB.

<USER>
Indicates the items related to the User screen and the user.
Level 3 Description Remarks
LAN- Indicates the language used and the Indication <LANGUGE JP. oo. aa>
GUAGE paper size configuration used.
Paper configu-
Language used ration code
Destination aa
00 AB
00:CANON 01 Inch
01:OEM 02 A
03 All sizes

COUNTER Indicates the type of count control Indication <COUNTER bb>


for copy counters.
Details of each
counter code
bb Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3
00
01 Double-sided
Total
02 Small-size
03 Large-size
04 Large-size Small-size
10
14 Total Print total Large-size
15 Double-sided

13-168 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<ANALOG> COPIER>DISPLAY
Indicates the readings of analog sensors.

Level 3 Description Remarks


TEMP Indicates the machine internal temperature (detected by the Unit: °C
environment sensor).
HUM Indicates the machine internal relative humidity (detected by Unit: %RH
the environment sensor).
OPTICS Indicates the temperature of the scanning lamp (indicated by Unit: °C
the fluorescent lamp sensor).
FIX-C Indicates the temperature at the middle of the upper fixing
roller (detected by the main thermistor TH1).
FIX-E Indicates the temperature of the ends of the upper fixing
roller (detected by the sub thermistor TH2).

<CST-STS>
Indicates the use of the cassette and the manual feed tray.

Level 3 Description Remarks


WIDTH- Indicates the paper size for the cassette 3. The paper width is shown
C3 as a whole number,
WIDTH- Indicates the paper size for the cassette 4 . omitting decimal places.
C4
WIDTH- Indicates the paper size and the paper width (mm) for the
MF manual feed tray.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-169
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<JAM> COPIER>DISPLAY
Indicates jam data.

Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter


< JAM > < 1/25 > < READY >
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII

+/- OK
Figure 13-B802 Jam Screen

Description Remarks
AAA Indicates the order of jams (the higher the number, the older 1 to 200 (200 as highest)
the jam).
BBBB Indicates the date of a jam. Month and day (in 2 digits
each)
CCCC Indicates the time of a jam. In 24-hr notation
DDDD Indicates jam recovery time. In 24-hr notation
E Indicates the location of a jam. 0: copier
1: feeder
2: finisher
FFff Indicates jam codes. FF: jam type (Table 13-
B801)
ff: sensor that detected
the jam.
• For the copier, see
Table 13-B803.
• For the feeder or the
finisher, see its
respective Service
G Indicates the source of paper. See Table 13-B802.
HHHHHH Indicates the soft counter for the source of paper.
IIIII Indicates the paper size in question.

13-170 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

COPIER>DISPLAY
FF: Type of Jam ff: Copier Jam Sensors
Code Type Code Jam sensor
01xx Delay jam xx01 Front deck (right) pickup
02xx Stationary jam sensor (PS20)

03xx Residual jam at power-on xx02 Front deck (left) pickup


sensor (PS25)
04xx Door open jam during copying
xx03 Cassette 3 pickup sensor
05xx ADF jam during stream reading (PS37)
Table 13-B801 xx04 Cassette 4 pickup sensor
(PS42)
xx05 Vertical path 1 sensor (PS47)
xx06 Vertical path 2 sensor (PS49)
G: Source of Paper xx07 Vertical path 3 sensor (PS41)
Code Description xx08 Vertical path 4 sensor (PS46)
1 Front deck (right) xx09 Registration sensor (PS5)
2 Front deck (left) xx10 U-turn sensor (PS13)
3 Cassette 3 xx11 Pre-confluence sensor
4 Cassette 4 (PS14)

5 Not used xx12 Post-confluence sensor


(PS15)
6 Not used
xx13 Front deck (left) feed sensor
7 Side paper deck (PS26)
8 Manual feed tray xx14 Front deck (right) feed
9 Duplexing assembly sensor (PS27)

Table 13-B802 xx15 Side paper deck feed sensor


(PS106)
xx16 Manual feed tray feed sensor
(PS35)
xx17 Side paper deck pickup
sensor (PS101)
xx0A Fixing separation claw
sensor (PS6)
xx0B Internal delivery sensor
(PS9)
xx0C External delivery sensor
(PS10)
xx0D Fixing/feeding outlet sensor
(PS11)
xx0E Reversal sensor (PS16)
xx0F Duplexing reversal sensor
(PS12)
Table 13-B803

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-171
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<ERR> COPIER>DISPLAY
Indicates error codes.

Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter


< ERR > < 1/8 > < READY >
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G
AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G

+/- OK
Figure 13-B803

Description Remarks
AAA Indicates the order of errors (the higher the number, the older 1 to 64 (64 as highest)
the error).
BBBB Indicates the date of an error. Month, day (2 digits each)
CCCC Indicates the time of an error. In 24-hr notation
DDDD Indicates the time of error recovery. In 24-hr notation
EEEE Indicates error codes. See chapter 13>IX the
descriptions under "Self
Diagnosis."
FFff Indicates detail codes. If none, '0000'.
G Indicates the location of a jam. 0: copier.
1: feeder.
2: finisher.

13-172 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<ALRAM1> COPIER>DISPLAY
Indicates alarm codes.

Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter


< ALRM-1 > < 1/1 > < READY >
BODY 00
DF 00
SORTER 00 00 00 00

+/- OK
Figure 13-B804

Level 3 Description Remarks


BODY Indicates alarms for the copier.
Code Type
01 Separation charging assembly leakage
02 Feeding fan (FM7) locking
03 De-curling fan (FM6) locking
04 Front deck (right) lifter fault
05 Front deck (left) lifter fault
06 Cassette 3 lifter fault
07 Cassette 4 lifter fault
08 Side paper deck lifter fault

DF Feeder Alarms
• For details of each code, see the
Feeder Service Manual.
SORTER Finisher Alarms 00 00 00 00
• For details of each code, see the
Tray alarm
Finisher Service Manual.
Stack alarm
Stapler alarm (saddle stitcher)
Stapler alarm (finisher)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-173
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<HV-STS> COPIER>DISPLAY
Indicates the voltage/current levels of the high-voltage system.
Level 3 Description Remarks
PRIMARY Indicates the level of current (µA) applied to the primary Standard: 1000 (approx.)
charging wire.
PRI- Indicates the grid level of voltage (V) applied to the primary Reference: 550 to 850
GRID grid wire.
PRI-TR Indicates the level of current (µA) applied to the pre-transfer
charging wire.
TR Indicates the level of current (µA) applied to the transfer Reference: 300 to 500
charging wire.
SP Indicates the level of current (µA) applied to the separation Reference: 350 to 450
charging wire.
BIAS Indicates the level of voltage of the DC bias (V) applied to Reference: 280 (approx.)
the developing cylinder.

<DPOT>
Indicates the measurement of the surface potential of the photosensitive drum.
Level 3 Description Remarks
DPOT-K Indicates the surface potential (V) of the photosensitive
drum.
VL1M Indicates the light area surface potential (V) of the Reference: 62 to 82
photosensitive drum.
VDM Indicates the dark area surface potential (V) of the Reference: 432 to 452
photosensitive drum.

<SENSOR>
Indicates the output of the original size sensor.
Level 3 Description Remarks
DOC-SZ Indicates the size of an original detected by the original size Default sizes
sensor.
DOC-SZ1 Indicates the output of the original size sensor 1. 1: original present.
DOC-SZ2 Indicates the output of the original size sensor 2. 0: original absent.

DOC-SZ3 Indicates the output of the original size sensor 3.


DOC-SZ4 Indicates the output of the original size sensor 4.

13-174 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<MISC> COPIER>DISPLAY
Indicates other data.

Level 3 Description Remarks


FL-LIFE Indicates the activation duty ratio (%) of the scanning lamp. Indicates the duration of
activation in % needed to
obtain an optimum light
intensity; if new, about
50%. (Around 80%,
suspect that the end of life
is near.)

<FEEDER> FEEDER>DISPLAY
Indicates data related to the feeder.
Level 3 Description Remarks
FEEDSIZE Indicates the size of an original detected by the feeder.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-175
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. I/O Input/Output Display Mode


Figure 13-C801 shows the Level 2 Item screen and the items for I/O mode.

Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter

DC-CON Input/output port of the DC controller PCB

IP Input/output port for the IP PCB

FEEDER

SORTER Input/output port for the ADF controller PCB

MF-CON
Input/output port for the finisher controller PCB

Input/output port for the MFC PCB

Figure 13-C801 COPIER>I/O

13-176 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

1. DC-CON I/O>DC-CON

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P001 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Cassette 3 paper length sensor C3-LNG0 J513-B4
bit5 Cassette 3 paper length sensor C3-LNG1 J513-B5
bit6 Cassette 4 paper length sensor C4-LNG0 J514-A11
bit7 Cassette 4 paper length sensor C4-LNG1 J514-A12
P002 bit0 Primary wire cleaner home PRWC-HP J502-A10 0: HP
position
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Pre-transfer wire cleaner home PSTWC-HP J504-A4 0: HP
position
bit5 Not used
bit6 Transfer/separation wire TSWC-HP J509-A7 0: HP
cleaner home position
bit7 Not used
P003 bit0 Right deck lifter ON/OFF RDK-LFT-ON J514-A4 1: lifter ON
bit1 Left deck lifter ON/OFF LDK-LFT-ON J514-B1 1: lifter ON
bit2 Cassette 3 lifter ON/OFF C3-LFT-ON J516-A4 1: lifter ON
bit3 Cassette 4 lifter ON/OFF C4-LFT-ON J516-B1 1: lifter ON
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 SLAVE-PRDV ----- CPU 0: RDY
bit7 Not used
P004 bit0 Primary wire cleaner drive PRWC-RV J502-A7 1: to rear
bit1 Primary wire cleaner drive PRWC-FW J502-A8 1: to front
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Pre-transfer wire cleaner drive PSTWC-FW J504-A8 1: to front
bit5 Pre-transfer wire cleaner drive PSTWC-RV J504-A9 1: to rear
bit6 Transfer/separation wire TSWC-RV J509-B4 1: to rear
cleaner drive
bit7 Transfer/separation wire TSWC-FW J509-B5 1: to front
cleaner drive

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-177
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>DC-CON

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P005 bit0 Scanner motor drive data OPT-D0 J506-A3 -----
bit1 Scanner motor drive data OPT-D1 J506-A4 -----
bit2 Scanner motor drive data OPT-D2 J506-A5 -----
bit3 Scanner motor drive data OPT-D3 J506-A6 -----
bit4 Scanner motor current level OPT-CD0 J506-A9 -----
data
bit5 Scanner motor current level OPT-CD1 J506-A10 -----
data
bit6 Scanner motor current level OPT-CD2 J506-A11 -----
data
bit7 Not used
P006 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Scanner motor rotation direc- OPT-CCW J506-A8 1: scanner forward
tion
bit4 Scanner motor ON OPT-CLK J506-A12 1: ON
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P007 bit0 Right deck lifter sensor RDK-LFT-DT J511-A6 1: upper limit
bit1 Left deck lifter sensor LDK-LFT-DT J518-A2 1: upper limit
bit2 Cassette 3 lifter sensor C3-LFT-DT J515-A6 1: upper limit
bit3 Cassette 4 lifter sensor C4-LFT-DT J517-A6 1: upper limit
bit4 Right deck open RDK-OPN J511-B5 0: open
bit5 Left deck open LDK-OPN J518-B2 0: open
bit6 Cassette 3 open C3-OPN J515-B5 0: open
bit7 Cassette 4 open C4-OPN J517-B5 0: open
P008 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Right deck paper RDK-PDT J511-A9 1: paper present
bit5 Left deck paper LDK-PDT J518-A5 1: paper present
bit6 Cassette 3 paper C3-PDT J515-A9 1: paper present
bit7 Cassette 4 paper C4-PDT J517-A9 1: paper present

13-178 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>DC-CON
I/O>IP
Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks
P009 bit0 Not used
bit1 Right deck paper level data 1 RDK-PRM1 J513-B9 1: paper present
bit2 Right deck paper level data 2 RDK-PRM2 J513-B12 1: paper present
bit3 Right deck lifter limit RDK-LFT- J511-B8 1: upper limit
LMT
bit4 Not used
bit5 Left deck paper level data 1 LDK-PRM1 J514-B9 1: paper present
bit6 Left deck paper level data 2 LDK-PRM2 J514-B12 1: paper present
bit7 Left deck lifter limit RDK-LFT- J518-B5 1: upper limit
LMT

2. IP

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P001 bit0 Manual feed tray paper sensor MLT-PAPE- J510-B8 1: paper present
PS
bit1 Registration paper sensor PS5S J509-A2 1: paper present
bit2 Right deck pickup sensor PS20S J511-B2 1: paper present
bit3 Cassette 3 paper sensor PS39S J515-A9 1: paper present
bit4 Vertical path 3 paper sensor PS41S J515-B8 1: paper present
bit5 Cassette 4 paper sensor PS44S J517-A9 1: paper present
bit6 Vertical path 4 paper sensor PS46S J517-B8 1: paper present
bit7 Right deck paper sensor PS22S J511-A9 1: paper present
bit8 Pre-registration paper sensor PS47S J502-B5 1: paper present
bit9 Left deck paper sensor PS32S J518-A5 1: paper present
bit10 Vertical path 2 paper sensor PS49S J516-B9 1: paper present
bit11 External delivery sensor PS10S J508-A8 1: paper present
bit12 Internal delivery sensor PS9S J508-A2 1: paper present
bit13 Fixing/feeding outlet sensor PS11S J508-A11 1: paper present
bit14 Fixing claw jam sensor PS6S J508-B15 1: paper present
bit15 Left deck feed sensor PS26S J519-B10 1: paper present

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-179
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>IP

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P002 bit0 Cassette 3 pickup sensor PS37S J515-B2 1: paper present
bit1 Cassette 4 pickup sensor PS42S J517-B2 1: paper present
bit2 Left deck pickup sensor PS25S J518-A8 1: paper present
bit3 Duplexing reversal sensor PS12S J519-B6 1: paper present
bit4 U-turn sensor PS13S J519-B7 1: paper present
bit5 Pre-confluence sensor PS14S J519-B8 1: paper present
bit6 Post-confluence sensor PS15S J519-B9 1: paper present
bit7 Reversal sensor PS16S J508-A5 1: paper present
bit8 Waste toner case full sensor PS19S J514-A2 1: full
bit9 Hopper toner sensor 1 TS1S J504-B8 0: toner absent
bit10 Hopper toner sensor 2 TS2S J504-B11 0: toner absent
bit11 Developing assembly toner TS3S J504-B16 0: toner absent
sensor
bit12 Fixing cleaning belt sensor PS7S J508-B2 1: belt absent
bit13 Fixing cleaning belt warning PS8S J508-B5 1: warning
sensor
bit14 Cartridge detecting switch MSW1S J512-B7 0: cartridge present
bit15 Waste toner clog detecting MSW2S J512-B14 0: clogged
switch
P003 bit0 Original size sensor 1 SIZE1 J503-B2 0: original present
bit1 Original size sensor 2 SIZE2 J503-B5 0: original present
bit2 Original size sensor 3 SIZE3 J504-B2 0: original present
bit3 Original size sensor 4 SIZE4 J504-B5 0: original present
bit4 Copyboard cover open/closed PS4S J507-B9 1: closed
sensor
bit5 Pre-transfer charging wire MSW3S J504-A4 0: home position
cleaner detecting switch
bit6 Primary charging wire MSW4S J502-A10 0: home position
detecting switch
bit7 Transfer separation charging MSW6S J509-A7 0: home position
wire cleaner detecting switch
bit8 Cartridge door open/closed PS59S J512-B2 1: closed
sensor
bit9 Right cover (upper) open/ PS58S J502-B2 1: closed
closed sensor
bit10 Not used
bit11 Right door closed/open sensor PS23S J511-B5 1: closed
bit12 Left door closed/open sensor PS33S J518-B2 1: closed

13-180 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>IP

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P003 bit13 Right cover (lower) open/ PS48S J516-A2 1: closed
closed sensor
bit14 Manual feed cover open/closed PS56S J502-A2 1: closed
sensor
bit15 Front cover open/closed MSW7S J502-B17 0: closed
detecting switch
P004 bit0 Through path tray detection TPCNCT J519-B12 0: present
bit1 Fixing/feeding releasing lever PS28S J509-B9 1: released
sensor
bit2 Not used
bit3 Cassette 3 open/closed sensor PS40S J515-B5 1: closed
bit4 Cassette 4 open/closed sensor PS45S J517-B5 1: closed
bit5 Not used
bit6 Multifeeder de-curling sensor PS35S J510-B2 1: paper present
bit7 Not used
bit8 Fixing sub thermistor error ----- CPU 1: error (E001-2)
detection
bit9 Not used
bit10 Fixing main thermistor error ----- CPU 1: error (E001-1)
detection
bit11 Fluorescent lamp absent ----- CPU 1: error (E220)
detection
bit12 Not used
bit13 Main SSR error detection ----- CPU 1: short circuit
(E004-1)
bit14 Sub SSR error detection ----- CPU 1: short circuit
(E004-2)
bit15 Main switch shut-off open ----- CPU 0: normal
circuit detection
P005 bit0 Primary charging assembly FM1LCK J504-A13 1: stopped
cleaning fan stop detection
bit1 Fixing delivery fan stop detec- FM2LCK J503-A4 1: stopped
tion
bit2 Scanner cooling fan stop FM3LCK J504-A10 1: stopped
detection
bit3 Fan stop detection FM4LCK J502-A4 1: stopped
bit4 Laser driver cooling fan stop FM5LCK J503-A1 1: stopped
detection
bit5 De-curling fan stop detection FM6LCK J509-B11 1: stopped
bit6 Feeding fan stop detection FM7LCK J509-A8 1: stopped

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-181
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>IP

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P005 bit7 Drum fan stop detection FM8LCK J512-A8 1: stopped
bit8 Inverter cooling fan stop FM9LCK J507-A7 1: stopped
detection
bit9 Pre-transfer charging assembly FM10LCK J504-A5 1: stopped
fan stop detection
bit10 Power supply cooling fan 1 FM11LCK J505-B1 1: stopped
stop detection
bit11 Power supply cooling fan 2 FM12LCK J505-B4 1: stopped
stop detection
bit12 Separation fan stop detection FM13LCK J509-A11 1: stopped
bit13 Laser scanner fan stop detec- FM14LCK J504-A16 1: stopped
tion
bit14 Not used
bit15 Not used
P006 bit0 Drum motor lock detection M0LCK J512-B9 0: low-speed
bit1 Laser scanner motor lock M4LCK J503-A8 0: low-speed
detection
bit2 Fixing drive motor lock M3LCK J508-A17
detection
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Fluorescent lamp detection ----- CPU 1: ON
bit8 Not used
bit9 Scanner home position detec- PS1S J507-A1 1: home position
tion
bit10 Not used
bit11 Slave power ready detection ----- CPU 0: ready
bit12 Not used
bit13 CC-V connect signal CC5- J503-A14 0: CC-V present
CONNECT
bit14 Power supply control detection ----- CPU 0: power ON
bit15 Not used

13-182 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>IP

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P007 bit0 Overcurrent detection (24 V) 24ERR J505-B10 1: overcurrent
bit1 Overcurrent detection (38 V) 38ERR J505-B11 1: overcurrent
bit2 Primary charging error PR-ERR J510-A4 1: error
detection
bit3 Transfer charging error TR-ERR J510-A7 1: error
detection
bit4 Separation/pre-transfer POST-ERR J510-A13 1: error
charging error detection
bit5 Hopper motor error detection ----- CPU 1: error (E020)
bit6 Cartridge motor error detection ----- CPU 1: error (E025)
bit7 Not used
bit8 Options counter switch bit 0 OP-bit1 J503-B8 DIOSW0
bit9 Options counter switch bit 1 OP-bit2 J503-B9 DIOSW1
bit10 Counter open circuit detection ----- CPU 1: open circuit
1 (total) (E030)
bit11 Counter open circuit 2 (option) ----- CPU 1: open circuit
(E031)
bit12 Counter open circuit detection 3 ----- CPU 1: open circuit
bit13 Not used
bit14 Not used
bit15 Right deck feed sensor PS27S J511-B11 1: paper
P008 bit0 Manual feed tray pickup clutch CL7D J513-A9 1: ON
bit1 Cassette 3 pickup clutch CL12D J515-A2 1: ON
bit2 Vertical path 3 clutch CL13D J515-A4 1: ON
bit3 Cassette 4 pickup clutch CL14D J517-A2 1: ON
bit4 Vertical path 4 clutch CL15D J517-A4 1: ON
bit5 Right deck pickup clutch CL10D J511-A2 1: ON
bit6 Vertical path 1 clutch CL8D J511-A4 1: ON
bit7 Left deck pickup clutch CL11D J518-B8 1: ON
bit8 Vertical path 2 clutch CL9D J514-A7 1: ON
bit9 Pre-registration clutch CL5D J513-A12 1: ON
bit10 Lower feeding middle clutch CL16D J519-B4 1: ON
bit11 Lower feeding right clutch CL17D J519-B3 1: ON
bit12 Left deck feed clutch CL19D J519-B2 1: ON
bit13 Delivery speed switching CL21D J508-A14 1: high-speed
clutch 0: normal speed
bit14 Registration brake clutch CL3D J509-B7 1: ON
bit15 Multifeeder feed clutch CL18D J513-A7 1: ON

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-183
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>IP

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P009 bit0 Hopper clutch CL1D J504-B14 1: ON
bit1 Developing clutch CL4D J512-A12 1: ON
bit2 Not used
bit3 Right deck pickup solenoid SL7D J511-A12 1: ON
bit4 Left deck pickup solenoid SL8D J518-B10 1: ON
bit5 Cassette 3 pickup solenoid SL9D J515-B11 1: ON
bit6 Cassette 4 pickup solenoid SL10D J517-B11 1: ON
bit7 Multifeeder pickup latch SL6R J510-B12 1: ON
solenoid (return)
bit8 Multifeeder latch solenoid SL6P J510-B11 1: ON
(pull)
bit9 Delivery flapper solenoid SL3D J508-B18 1: ON
bit10 Reversing flapper solenoid SL11D J519-B5 1: ON
bit11 Fixing inlet guide solenoid SL1R J508-B13 1: ON
(return)
bit12 Fixing inlet guide solenoid SL1P J508-B12 1: ON
(pull)
bit13 Fixing cleaning belt solenoid SL2D J508-B20 1: ON
bit14 Fixing/feeding unit locking SL4R J509-B3 1: ON
solenoid (return)
bit15 Fixing/feeding unit locking SL4P J509-B2 1: ON
solenoid (pull)
P010 bit0 Inverter cooling fan (full speed) FM9D J507-A9 1: ON
bit1 Inverter cooling fan (full speed) FM9D J507-A9 1: ON
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Transfer guide bias ON/OFF FGD-ON J510-A15 0: ON
bit7 Transfer guide bias switch FGD-CNT J510-A16 0: 200V, 1: 600V
P011 bit0 Drum motor drive MOD J512-B10 0: ON
bit1 Main motor drive MM-ON J514-B5 0: ON
bit2 Pickup motor drive M2-ON J513-A3 0: ON
bit3 Fixing motor drive FXM-ON J508-A18 0: ON
bit4 Laser scanner motor drive LM-ON J503-A9 0: ON
bit5 Cartridge motor drive CRGM-ON J512-B4 1: ON
bit6 Hopper motor drive HM-ON J504-B18 1: ON
bit7 Laser scanner motor switch SP-SEL J503-A7 0: high-speed

13-184 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>IP

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P012 bit0 Waste toner case full detection ----- CPU 0: reset
reset
bit1 Cassette/drum heater ON/OFF CST-HTR- J505-A8 0: ON
ON
bit2 Fluorescent lamp pre-heater PRH-ON J506-B9 0: ON
ON/OFF
bit3 Fluorescent lamp heater ON/ HEAT-ON J506-B2 0: ON
OFF
bit4 Fixing main heater ON/OFF MH-ON J505-A10 1: ON
bit5 Fixing sub heater ON/OFF SH-ON J505-A11 1: ON
bit6 Drum heater full-wave/half- D-HTR-ON J505-A6 1: full-wave,
wave 0: half-wave
bit7 Not used
P013 bit0 Power supply fan 1/2 full-speed FM11D/12D J505-B3/B6 1: ON(24V)
bit1 Power supply fan 1/2 half-speed FM11D/12D J505-B3/B6 1: ON(12V)
bit2 Separation fan full-speed FM13D J509-A13 1: ON(24V)
bit3 Separation fan half-speed FM13D J509-A13 1: ON(12V)
bit4 Laser scanner fan full-speed FM14D J504-A18 1: ON(24V)
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P014 bit0 Feeding fan full-speed FM7D J509-A10 1: ON(24V)
bit1 Feeding fan half-speed FM7D J509-A10 1: ON(12V)
bit2 Drum fan full-speed FM8D J512-A10 1: ON(24V)
bit3 Drum fan half-speed FM8D J512-A10 1: ON(12V)
bit4 De-curling fan full-speed FM6D J509-B13 1: ON
bit5 Not used
bit6 Pre-transfer charging assembly FM10D J504-A7 1: ON(24V)
fan full-speed
bit7 Pre-transfer charging assembly FM10D J504-A7 1: ON(12V)
fan half-speed

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-185
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>IP

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P015 bit0 Primary charging assembly fan FM1D J504-A15 1: ON(24V)
full-speed
bit1 Primary charging assembly fan FM1D J504-A15 1: ON(12V)
half-speed
bit2 Fixing assembly heat discharge FM2D J503-A6 1: ON(24V)
fan full-speed
bit3 Fixing assembly heat discharge FM2D J503-A6 1: ON(18V)
fan half-speed
bit4 Scanner stream reading fan FM3D/4D J504-A12 1: ON(24V)
full-speed J502-A6
bit5 Scanner stream reading fan FM3D/4D J504-A12 1: ON(12V)
half-speed J502-A6
bit6 Laser driver cooling fan full- FM5D J503-A3 1: ON
speed
bit7 Not used
P016 bit0 Copier/ADF image leading ----- CPU 1: copier,
edge select 0: ADF-Y
bit1 Not used
bit2 Shut-off SW-OFF J512-A14 1: main switch
bit3 Power off ----- CPU 1: ON
bit4 Original size detection ON/OFF ----- CPU 1: ON
bit5 CCV count CC5-CNT J503-A15 1: count
bit6 CCX count CCX-CNT J521-6 1: count
bit7 Scan start ----- CPU 1: start
P017 bit0 Fluorescent lamp ON/OFF FLON J506-B11 0: ON
bit1 Counter 1 (total) CNT1D J503-B13 1: count
bit2 Counter 2 (options) CNT2D J503-B11 1: count
bit3 Counter 3 (print) CNT3D J503-B15 1: count
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Pre-exposure lamp ON/OFF PEX-ON J504-A1 1: ON
bit7 Not used

13-186 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>IP

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P018 bit0 Potential sensor ON/OFF POT-ON J502-A12 1: ON
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 HVT DC component ON/OFF HVDC-EN J510-A2 0: high-voltage
output ON
bit4 HVT developing AC DEV-AC-ON J510-A8 0: ON
component ON/OFF
bit5 Not used
bit6 HVT pre-transfer AC/ HVAC-EN J510-A10 0: ON
separation AC component ON/
OFF
bit7 Not used
P019 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P020 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P021 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-187
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>IP

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P022 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P023 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P024 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P025 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used

13-188 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

3. FEEDER I/O>FEEDER

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P001 bit0 Pre-reversing solenoid SL3D* J10-2 0: ON
bit1 Not used
bit2 Reversing solenoid SL1D* J9-2 1: ON
bit3 Delivery solenoid (position 1) SL4D1* J2-2 1: ON
bit4 Delivery solenoid (position 2) SL4D2* J2-3 1: ON
bit5 Stopper plate solenoid SL2D1* J9-4 1: ON
(position 1)
bit6 Stopper plate solenoid SL2D2* J9-5 1: ON
(position 2)
bit7 Solenoid timer SLTMR CPU 1: ON
P002 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Pickup roller home position PKHP J14-A5 1: home position
sensor
bit5 Pickup roller height sensor 2 PKH2 J14-A8 1: original present
bit6 Pickup roller height sensor 1 PKH1 J14-A11 1: original present
bit7 Pre-reversal sensor PRTR J12-12 1: original present
P003 bit0 Not used
bit1 Original sensor LED DTLED J5-15 0: ON
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
*Checks not possible because of data processing speed.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-189
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>FEEDER

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P004 bit0 Separation sensor SPS J13-10 0: original present
bit1 Separation sheet-to-sheet TRNA_X CPU alternately '0' and
distance clock '1' *
bit2 Belt motor encoder BTCLK J12-3 alternately '0' and
'1' *
bit3 Post-registration roller paper RGAS J13-6 0: original present
sensor
bit4 Manual feed registration roller MFRGS J2-6 0: original present
paper sensor
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P005 bit0 Tx (transmission) SERIAL_DO CPU 1: transmit
bit1 Da load DAC_LD CPU 1: transmit
bit2 Rx (reception) SERIAL_DI CPU 1: reception
bit3 EEPROM chip select EEP_CS CPU 0: EEPROM select
bit4 Serial reference clock SERIAL_CLK CPU alternately '0' and
'1' *
bit5 Separation motor encoder SPCLK J12-5 alternately '0' and
'1' *
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P006 bit0 Belt motor mode 1 BLTMO1 CPU '0' at all times

bit1 Belt motor mode 2 BLTMO2 CPU '0' at all times

bit2 Belt motor reference clock REF-CLK J7-1 alternately '0' and
'1' *
bit3 Belt motor CW/CCW CW/CCW J7-4 0: delivery
direction
bit4 Separation motor PWM SPPWM CPU alternately '0' and
'1' *
bit5 Reversal motor layer B TANB CPU alternately '0' and
'1' *
bit6 Delivery motor PWM EJPWM CPU alternately '0' and
'1' *
bit7 Reversal motor layer A TANA CPU alternately '0' and
'1' *
*Checks not possible because of data processing speed.

13-190 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>FEEDER

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P007 bit0 Image leading edge signal ITOP-F CPU 1: at edge
bit1 Pre-registration roller paper RGBS J13-4 1: original present
sensor
bit2 Separation motor reference SEPCLKPEF CPU alternately '0' and
clock '1' *
bit3 Delivery motor encoder EJCLK J13-2 alternately '0' and
'1' *
bit4 Pickup motor layer A PICKA CPU alternately '0' and
'1' *
bit5 Pickup motor layer B PICKB CPU alternately '0' and
'1' *
bit6 Pickup motor hold PICKHOLB CPU 1: output present
bit7 AD trigger ADTRG CPU 1: output present
P008 bit0 Not used
bit1 Separation clutch CLD J10-4
bit2 Skew sensor SKS J13-12 1: original present
bit3 Original delivery sensor EJJAM J2-15 1: original present
bit4 Manual feed cassette sensor MFST J2-10 1: original present
bit5 Not used
bit6 Reversal sensor TNS J14-B3 1: output present
bit7 Registration roller clock TRCLK J10-B10 alternately '0' and
'1' *
P009 bit0 DIP switch 1 DIPSW1 CPU 0: ON
bit1 DIP switch 2 DIPSW2 CPU 0: ON
bit2 DIP switch 3 DIPSW3 CPU 0: ON
bit3 DIP switch 4 DIPSW4 CPU 0: ON
bit4 DIP switch 5 DIPSW5 CPU 0: ON
bit5 DIP switch 6 DIPSW6 CPU 0: ON
bit6 Left cover sensor (front) LCVF J14-B7 1: closed
bit7 Left cover sensor (rear) LCVR J12-9 1: closed

*Checks not possible because of data processing speed.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-191
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>FEEDER

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P010 bit0 7-segment LED0 7SEG_D CPU 0: ON
bit1 7-segment LED1 7SEG_E CPU 0: ON
bit2 7-segment LED2 7SEG_C CPU 0: ON
bit3 7-segment LED3 7SEG_G CPU 0: ON
bit4 7-segment LED4 7SEG_B CPU 0: ON
bit5 7-segment LED5 7SEG_F CPU 0: ON
bit6 7-segment LED6 7SEG_A CPU 0: ON
bit7 ADF open/closed sensor RFOP J12-15 1: closed
P011 bit0 Slide switch 0 SSW-0 J51-5 1: ON
bit1 Slide switch 1 SSW-1 J51-4 1: ON
bit2 Slide switch 2 SSW-2 J51-3 1: ON
bit3 Slide switch 3 SSW-3 J51-2 1: ON
bit4 Slide switch 4 SSW-4 J51-6 1: ON
bit5 Push switch 1 PSHSW-1 CPU 0: ON
bit6 Push switch 2 PSHSW-2 CPU 0: ON
bit7 Push switch 3 PSHSW-3 CPU 0: ON
P012 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used

13-192 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

4. SORTER I/O>SORTER

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P001 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Upper path switching solenoid UPSCHG J119-2 0: ON
(SL2) ON
bit5 Inlet path paper sensor PCB ENTPCB J121-B3 1: paper present
(S1)
bit6 Delivery motor current switch ----- CPU 1: constant speed,
0: acceleration
bit7 Puncher feeding path detection ----- CP106
P002 bit0 Master CPU (IC101) busy ----- CPU 0: busy
signal
bit1 Slave CPU (IC121) reset ----- CPU 0: reset
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P003 bit0 Not used
bit1 Lower path paper sensor (S3) LWRPPCB J120-B8 1: paper absent,
detection 0: paper present
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Shutter home position J107-3 0: HP
detection
bit5 Rear jogging plate home RJOGHP J104-B9 1: HP
position (PI7) detection
bit6 Front jogging plate home FJOGHP J104-B3 1: HP
position (PI9) detection
bit7 Tray auxiliary plate retraction SPTTRYIN J105-B6 1: HP
detection

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-193
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>SORTER

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P004 bit0 Swing motor FG ----- CP104
bit1 Buffer path rear sensor (PI3) ----- CP120A-7 0: paper present
bit2 Inserter drive motor FG ----- IC145-2
bit3 Not used
bit4 Sort delivery sensor (PI4) STDLV J120-B3 1: paper present
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P005 bit0 EEROM serial output ----- IC102-3 -----
bit1 EEROM load signal ----- IC102-1 0: CS
bit2 EEROM serial input ----- IC102-4 -----
bit3 24 VR down detection ----- J101-1 1: down
bit4 Not used
bit5 Delivery motor FG IC128-9
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P006 bit0 Buffer motor (M2) A BUFMA J122-A5 alternately '0' and
'1'
bit1 Buffer motor (M2) B BUFMB J122-A4 alternately '0' and
'1'
bit2 Buffer motor (M2) A* BUFMA* J122-A3 alternately '0' and
'1'
bit3 Buffer motor B* BUFMB* J122-A2 alternately '0' and
'1'
bit4 Delivery motor (M3) A/A* EJCMA J122-B5 alternately '0' and
'1'
bit5 Delivery motor (M3) B/B* EJCMB J122-B4 alternately '0' and
'1'
bit6 Inlet motor (M1) clock INPASSMCLK J124-4 alternately '0' and
'1'
bit7 Delivery motor (M3) ON* EJCMHLD J122-B6 1: OFF, 0: ON
*Checks not possible because of data processing speed.

13-194 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>SORTER

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P007 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Stack delivery motor (M7) ----- ----- 1: OFF, 0: ON
PMW*
bit3 Stack delivery motor (M7) ----- ----- 1: CW, 0: CCW
CCW*
bit4 Stack delivery motor (M7) ----- ----- 1: CCW, 0: CW
CW*
bit5 Inlet motor (M1) ON INPASSMON* J124-7 0: ON
bit6 Inlet motor (M1) CW*/CCW INPASSMCW* J124-6 1: CCW, 0: CW
bit7 Inlet motor (M1) brake INPASSMBRK J124-5 1: braked
P008 bit0 Buffer path switching solenoid BFPSSCHG* J120-A2 1: wrapped,
(SL1) ON 0: released
bit1 Not used
bit2 Inlet motor (M1) lock signal INPASSMLOCK J124-3 0: lock
bit3 Non-sort delivery sensor (PI6) NSTDLV J119-5 1: paper present
detection
bit4 Stack delivery motor (M7) lock ----- ----- 0: lock
detection
bit5 Lower path paper sensor BFPSSXIT J120-A9 1: paper present
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P009 bit0 Staple detecting switch HOOKEMP J111-9 1: staple absent
(MSW3) detection
bit1 Cartridge switch (MSW4) CRTSET J111-10 1: absent,
detection 0: present
bit2 Staple edging (PI18) detection SLFPRIM J111-13 0: edging
bit3 Stacking tray proximity J116-3 0: ON
detection
bit4 Folding feeding path 1 J125-A3 1: paper present
detection
bit5 Folding feeding path 2 J125-A2 1: paper present
detection
bit6 Folding feeding path 3 J125-B9 1: paper present
detection
bit7 Folding feeding path 4 J125-B8 1: paper present
detection
*Checks not possible because of data processing speed.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-195
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>SORTER

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P010 bit0 Inserter cover open/closed J117-A1 1: open
detection
bit1 Tray safety switch (front, ----- J114-1 1: OFF
MSW6)/tray safety switch
(rear, MSW7) detection
bit2 Inserter unit detection ----- J117-A8 0: present
bit3 Punching unit detection ----- J118-B3 0: present
bit4 Z-folding unit detection ----- J125-A1 0: present
bit5 Saddle unit detection ----- J102-B7 0: Present
bit6 Stapler safety switch (front, ----- J113-1 0: OFF
MSW8)/stapler safety switch
(rear, MSW9)/swing guide
safety switch (MSW2)
bit7 Fan (FM1) rotation error FANSTP J103-7 1: error,
detection 0: normal
P011 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Swing (M8) motor ON ----- CPU 1: OFF, 0: ON
bit4 Power supply fan (FM1) ON FANON J103-8 1: ON, 0: OFF
signal
bit5 Buffer motor (M2) ON signal BUFMHLD J122-A6 1: OFF, 0: ON
bit6 Buffer motor (M2) current ----- CPU 1: constant speed,
switching 0: acceleration
bit7 Not used
P012 bit0 Front jogging plate motor (M4) FJOGMA/ J104-A5/- alternately '0' and
A FJOGMA* A3 '1'
bit1 Front jogging plate motor (M4) FJOGMB/ J104-A4/- alternately '0' and
B FJOGMB* A2 '1'
bit2 Front jogging plate motor (M4) ----- CPU 1: stop
hold
bit3 Knurled belt solenoid (SL3) FDBLT* J120-B5 0: wait

bit4 Rear jogging plate motor (M5) RJOGMA/ J104-A10/- alternately '0' and
A RJOGMA* A8 '1'
bit5 Rear jogging plate motor (M5) RJOGMB/ J104-A9/- alternately '0' and
B RJOGMB* A7 '1'
bit6 Rear jogging plate motor (M5) ----- CPU 1: stop
hold
bit7 Not used
*Checks not possible because of data processing speed.
13-196 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>SORTER

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P013 bit0 Tray auxiliary plate motor SPTTRYMA/ J105-A9/- alternately '0' and
(M6) A SPTTRYMA* A7 '1'
bit1 Tray auxiliary plate motor SPTTRYMB/ J105-A8/- alternately '0' and
(M6) B SPTTRYMB* A6 '1'
bit2 Tray auxiliary plate ----- CPU 1: stop
motor (M6) hold
bit3 Not used

bit4 Paddle motor (M9) A STPMVMA/ J108-A5/- alternately '0' and


STPMVMA* A3 '1'
bit5 Paddle motor (M9) B STPMVMB/ J108-A4/- alternately '0' and
STPMVMB* A2 '1'
bit6 Paddle motor (M9) ON signal* ----- CPU 1: stop

bit7 Paddle motor (M9) current ----- CPU 1: low-speed,


switching 0: acceleration
P014 bit0 Paddle home position (PI14) PDLHP J108-A8 0: HP
detection
bit1 Z-folding unit upper cover ----- J125-B3 1: closed
detection
bit2 Inserter open detection ----- J117-A9 1: closed
bit3 Front cover open sensor (PI1) FDROPN J121-B6 1: closed
detection
bit4 Upper cover open sensor (PI5) UPCVROPN J119-8 1: closed
detection
bit5 Z-folding path set detection ----- J125-B6 1: present
bit6 Z-folding path 1 paper level ----- J125-B7 1: paper present
detection
bit7 Saddle inlet front path sensor ----- J123-5 1: paper present
P015 bit0 Puncher waste paper feeder ----- J118-B10 1: ON
motor ON
bit1 Stacker sub tray solenoid ON J110-B12
J110-B13
bit2 Not used
bit3 Inlet motor (M10) gain M1ADJ J124-1 1: high-speed,
adjustment 0: low-speed
bit4 Not used
bit5 Saddle path flapper solenoid J123-2 0: ON
ON
bit6 Inserter drive motor ON J117-B9 1: ON
bit7 Not used

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-197
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>SORTER

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P016 bit0 Inserter feeding path 1 J117-A6 1: paper present
detection
bit1 Inserter feeding path 2 J117-A7 1: paper present
detection
bit2 Inserter feeding path 3 J117-A8 1: paper present
detection
bit3 Tray B paper detection (PI22) STTRYPA J110-B7 1: paper present
bit4 Sample tray paper detection J115-B10 1: paper present
bit5 Swing guide closed detection SWDGDCL J108-B3 0: close
(PI15)
bit6 Swing guide open detection SWORN J108-B6 1: open
(PI16)
bit7 Stack delivery sensor (PI8) BNDLDELV J104-B6 1: paper present
detection
P017 bit0 DUST-BOX-SET 1: set
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Sample tray detection 1: present,
0: absent
P018 bit0 SW103-1 ----- SW103-1 0: ON
bit1 SW103-2 ----- SW103-2 0: ON
bit2 SW103-3 ----- SW103-3 0: ON
bit3 SW103-4 ----- SW103-4 0: ON
bit4 SW103-5 ----- SW103-5 0: ON
bit5 SW103-6 ----- SW103-6 0: ON
bit6 SW103-7 ----- SW103-7 0: ON
bit7 SW103-8 ----- SW103-8 0: ON

13-198 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>SORTER

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P019 bit0 SW104 input PSW-104 0: ON
bit1 SW106 input PSW-106 0: ON
bit2 SW105 input PSW-105 0: ON
bit3 Punch hole number set SW107-1 1: 2 holes,
0: 3 holes
bit4 For adjustment 0 SW107-2 0: ON
bit5 For adjustment 1 SW107-3 0: ON
bit6 For adjustment 2 SW107-4 0: ON
bit7 For adjustment 3 SW107-5 0: ON
P020 bit0 Segment a LED101 1: ON
bit1 Segment b LED101 1: ON
bit2 Segment c LED101 1: ON
bit3 Segment d LED101 1: ON
bit4 Segment e LED101 1: ON
bit5 Segment f LED101 1: ON
bit6 Segment g LED101 1: ON
bit7 Segment dot LED101 1: ON
P021 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P022 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-199
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>SORTER

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P023 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P024 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P025 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P026 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used

13-200 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>SORTER

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P027 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P028 bit0 Tray B upper position sensor STTRYUPPO J110-B4 1: blocked
(PI20) detection
bit1 Tray B lower position sensor STTRLWPPO J110-B3 1: blocked
(PI21) detection
bit2 Stapler shift home position STPLHP J112-8 1: HP
detection (PI17)
bit3 Stapling home position STPDRHP J111-11 1: HP
detection (PI19)
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P029 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P030 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-201
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>SORTER

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P031 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Tray B lock detection (PI23) STTRYDL J110-B10
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P032 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P033 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used
P034 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used

13-202 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

I/O>SORTER

Address bit Description Signal Connector Remarks


P035 bit0 Not used
bit1 Not used
bit2 Not used
bit3 Not used
bit4 Not used
bit5 Not used
bit6 Not used
bit7 Not used

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-203
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

D. ADJUST Adjustment Mode


Figure 13-D801 shows the screen under COPIER>AJDUST and its Level 3 items.

Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter

LAMP BLANK

AE V-CONT

ADJ-XY

CCD FEED-ADJ
LASER HV-PRI CST-ADJ

HV-TR

DEVELOP HV-SP MISC


DENS

Figure 13-D801 Level 2 Items under COPIER>ADJUST

13-204 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Items under COPIER>ADJUST


Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Range Description
ADJUST LAMP L-DATA 0 to 255 Use it to adjust the scanning lamp intensity data.

AE AE-TBL 1 to 9 Use it to adjust the text density for AE mode with priority
on speed.

ADJ-XY ADJ-X 0 to 2970 Use it to adjust the image leading edge position.
ADJ-Y 360 to 1360 Use it to adjust the CCD image read start position
(main scanning direction).
ADJ-S 0 to 4 Use it to adjust the scanner home position.

CCD GAIN-E 80 to 160 Use it to adjust the CCD even-number photocell gain.
GAIN-O 80 to 160 Use it to adjust the CCD odd-number photocell gain.
OFST-E 1 to 254 Use it to adjust the CCD even-number photocell offset.
OFST-O 1 to 254 Use it to adjust the CCD odd-number photocell offset.
SH-TRGT 1 to 511 Use it to set the white level target value for shading
correction.

LASER PVE-OFST -300 to 300 Use it to adjust the offset from the center of the laser.
LA-DELAY 450 to 550 Use it to enter the laser delay value for the laser unit.
LA-PWR-A 48 to 432 Use it to set the laser A power adjustment value.
LA-PWR-B 48 to 432 Use it to set the laser B power adjustment value.
IP-DELAY 5 to 25 Use it to set the laser delay value for the IP PCB.

DEVELOP DE-DC 0 to 500 Use it to set the developing DC output adjustment value
for image exposure.
DE-NO-DC 0 to 500 Use it to set the developing DC output adjustment value
for image exposure.
DE-OFST -50 to 50 Use it to adjust the offset for the image bias DC component.

DENS DENS-ADJ 1 to 9 Use it to adjust copy density.

BLANK BLANK-T 0 to 2362 Use it to set the leading edge non-image width.
BLANK-B 0 to 2362 Use it to set the trailing edge non-image width.

V-CONT EPTOTOFST 0 to 255 Use it to set the potential sensor offset.


VL-OFST -5 to 5 Use it to set the light area potential target value offset.
VD-OFST -5 to 5 Use it to set the dark area potential target value offset.

HV-PRI GRID 400 to 900 Use it to set the primary charging assembly grid bias
output adjustment value.

HV-TR TR-N1 -650 to -150 Use it to set the transfer charging output adjustment value
(1st side).
TR-N2 -650 to -150 Use it to set the transfer charging output adjustment value
(2nd side).
PRE-TR 0 to 300 Use it to set the output adjustment value for the
pre-transfer charging assembly.

HV-SP SP-N1 0 to 500 Use it to set the separation charging output adjustment
value (1st side).
SP-N2 0 to 500 Use it to set the separation charging output adjustment
value (2nd side).

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-205
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Items under COPIER>ADJUST


Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Range Description
ADJUST FEED- REGIST -50 to 50 Use it to adjust the activation timing for the registration
ADJ clutch.
ADJ-REFE -101 to 100 Use it to adjust the re-pickup horizontal registration.

CST-ADJ C3-STMTR Use it to adjust the paper width sensor for the cassette 3
(STMTR).
C3-A4R Use it to adjust the paper width sensor for the cassette 3
(A4R).
C4-STMTR Use it to adjust the paper width sensor for the cassette 4
(STMTR).
C4-A4R Use it to adjust the paper width sensor for the cassette 4
(A4R).
MF-A4R Use it to adjust the paper width sensor for the manual
feed cassette (A4R).
MF-A6R Use it to adjust the paper width sensor for the manual
feed tray (A6R).
MF-A4 Use it to adjust the paper width sensor for the manual
feed tray (A4).
C3-LVOL Use it to set the stacking limit for the cassette 3
(50 sheets).
C3-HVOL Use it to set the stacking limit for the cassette 3
(275 sheets).
C4-LVOL Use it to se the stacking limit for the cassette 4
(50 sheets).
C4-HVOL Use it to set the stacking limit for the cassette 4
(275 sheets).

Items under FEEDER>ADJUST


Level 1 Level 3 Range Description
ADJUST DOCST -50 to 50 Use it to adjust the original stop position.

DOCST-M -50 to 50 Use it to adjust the original stop position (for manual feed).

LA-SPEED -54 to 54 Use it to adjust the original feeding speed for stream
reading mode.

STRD-S -25 to 25 Use it to adjust the original stop position for stream
reading mode (for small-size).

STRD-L -25 to 25 Use it to adjust the original stop position for stream
reading mode (for large-size).

RVM-SPD -30 to 30 Use it to adjust the reversal motor speed.

Items under SORTER>ADJUST


Level 1 Level 3 Range Description
ADJUST PNCH-HLE Use it to adjust the offset of punch holes.

13-206 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<LAMP> COPIER>ADJUST
Adjusting the Activation Voltage of the Scanning Lamp

Level 3 Description Remarks


L-DATA Entering Scanning Lamp Intensity Data Range : 0 to 255
• If faulty images are generated after execution of
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ, enter the
value recorded on the service label.
• This will determine FL-PWM.
Higher setting
Lower intensity Higher intensity
Lower setting

<AE>
AE Adjustment

Level 3 Description Remarks


AE-TBL Adjusting Text Density for Real-Time AE Mode Range : 0 to 9 (default at 3)
• Enter a value to adjust the density correction curve
for real-time AE mode (10 settings).
Copy density

White

White
Original density
A higher setting makes the text darker

A lower setting makes the text lighter.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-207
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<ADJ-XY> COPIER>ADJUST
Adjusting the Image Read Start Position

Level 3 Description Remarks


ADJ-X Adjusting the Scanner Image Leading Position Range : 0 to 2970 ('12'
• Enter a value to adjust the image leading edge causes a shift of 1 mm)
position. • Be sure to execute this
Vertical Image leading edge sensor mode before adjusting
size plate the margin.
Copyboard glass
• Do not create a margin
using this mode.
Standard whit plate
Lower Higher
setting setting

ADJ-Y Adjusting the CCD Read Start Position Range : 360 to 1360 (each
• Enter a value to adjust the read start position. '12' causes a shift of 1
mm)
Lower value

Higher value Read start position

Original

Vertical size plate

ADJ-S Adjusting the Scanner Home Position Range : 0 to 4


• Enter a value to adjust the home position (standard • If dirt exists on the
white plate read position). standard white plate, use
this mode to avoid
Vertical Home position sensor reading the area.
size plate
Copyboard glass

Standard white plate


Lower Higher
setting setting

13-208 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<CCD> COPIER>ADJUST
Adjusting CCD/Shading-Related items

Level 3 Description Remarks


GAIN-E Use it to enter a gain adjustment value for the CCD Execute COPIER>FUNC-
output for even-number pixels. TION>CCD>CCD-ADJ;
GAIN-O Use it to enter a gain adjustment value for the CCD then, if a faulty image is
output for odd-number pixels. generated, enter the value
recorded on the service
OFST-E Use it to enter an offset adjustment value for the CCD label.
output for even-number pixels.
OFST-O Use it to enter an offset adjustment value for the CCD
output for odd-number pixels.
SH- Use it to enter a white level target value for shading
TRGT correction.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-209
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<LASER> COPIER>ADJUST
Adjusting the Laser Output

Level 3 Description Remarks


PVE- Use it to adjust the position of laser exposure. Range : -300 to 300
OFST • If you have replaced the
Lower setting Higher setting IP PCB or initialized the
Front Rear RAM on the IP PCB,
enter the value recorded
Laser B
on the label on the PCB.
• Note that laser A shifts
in sync with laser B.
IP- Use it to enter a delay value for the image processor If you have replaced the
DELAY PCB. IP PCB or initialized the
RAM on the IP PCB,
enter the value recorded
on the PCB.
LA- Use it to enter a laser power adjustment value for laser If you have replaced the
PWR-A A. laser unit or initialized the
RAM on the IP PCB,
LA- Use it to enter a laser power adjustment value for laser enter the value recorded
PWR-B B. on the label attached to
the laser unit.
LA- Use it to enter a delay value for the laser unit. If you have replaced the
DELAY laser unit or initialized the
RAM on the IP PCB,
enter the value recorded
on the label attached to
the laser unit.

13-210 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<DEVELOP> COPIER>ADJUST
Adjusting the Developing Bias Output

Level 3 Description Remarks


DE-DC Use it to enter a DC bias output value for the image Range: 0 to 500
area. • If you have replaced the
IP PCB or initialized the
DE-NO- Use it to enter a developing bias output value for RAM on the IP PCB,
DC sheet-to-sheet distance. enter the value recorded
on the service label.
DE- Use it to adjust the offset value of the developing DC Range : -50 to 50
OFST bias. • If you have replaced the
IP PCB or initialized the
Higher value RAM on the IP PCB,
Lighter image Darker image
Lower value enter the value recorded
on the service label.

<DENS>
Fine-Adjusting Copy Density Auto Correction

Level 3 Description Remarks


DENS- Correcting Copy Density Range : 0 to 9 (default at 3)
ADJ • Use it to correct the f-value table if the copy image is
foggy or the high-density area is blurred.

White
F9 F1
Copy density

Black Original density White

A lower setting A higher setting


decreases fogging. decreases blurring.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-211
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<BLANK> COPIER>ADJUST
Adjusting the Non-Image Width

Level 3 Description Remarks


BLANK- Use it to enter a non-image width adjustment value for • If you have replaced the
T the image leading edge. IP PCB or initialized the
RAM on the IP PCB,
BLANK- Use it to enter a non-image width adjustment value for enter the value recorded
B the image trailing edge. on the service label.

<V-CONT>
Adjusting the Potential Control System

Level 3 Description Remarks


EPOTOFST Use it to enter an offset value for the potential sensor. • If you have replaced the
IP PCB or initialized the
VL- Use it to enter an offset value for the VL target RAM on the IP PCB,
OFST potential. enter the value recorded
on the service label.
VD- Use it to enter an offset value for the VD target
OFST potential.

13-212 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<HV-PRI> COPIER>ADJUST
Adjusting the Output of the Primary Charging Assembly

Level 3 Description Remarks


GRID Use it to enter an output adjustment value for the grid • If you have replaced the
bias. IP PCB or initialized the
RAM on the IP PCB,
enter the value recorded
on the service label.

<HV-TR>
Adjusting the Output of the Transfer Charging Assembly/Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly

Level 3 Description Remarks


TR-N1 Use it to enter an output adjustment value for the • If you have replaced the
transfer charging current (for plain paper; single-sheet IP PCB or initialized the
or 1st side of double-sided sheet). RAM on the IP PCB,
TR-N2 Use it to enter an output adjustment value for the enter the value recorded
transfer charging current (for plain paper; 2nd side of on the service label.
double-sided sheet).
PRE-TR Use it to enter an output adjustment value for the pre-
transfer charging current.

<HV-SP>
Adjusting the Output of the Separation Charging Assembly

Level 3 Description Remarks


SP-N1 Use it to enter an output adjustment value for • If you have replaced the
separation charging current (for plain paper; single- IP PCB or initialized the
sided sheet or 1st side of double-sided sheet). RAM on the IP PCB,
SP-N2 Use it to enter an output value for the separation enter the value on the
charging current (for plain paper; 2nd side of double- service label.
sided sheet).

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-213
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<FEED-ADJ> COPIER>ADJUST
Adjusting the Feeding System

Level 3 Description Remarks


REGIST Adjusting the Activation Timing for the Registration Range : -50 to 5 (each '23'
Clutch causes a shift of 1 mm)
• A higher setting delays the timing, decreasing the
leading edge margin.
ADJ- Adjusting the Horizontal Registration for Re-Pickup Range : -101 to 100 (each
REFE • If the image is displaced to the rear, enter a lower '23' causes a shift of 1
setting. mm)
• If the image is displaced to the front, enter a higher
setting.

<CST-ADJ>
Adjusting the Cassette/Manual Feed Tray-Related Items

Level 3 Description Remarks


C3- Use it to enter a paper width basic value for the • If you have replaced the
STMTR cassette 3 (STMTR). IP PCB or initialized the
C3-A4R Use it to enter a paper width basic value for the RAM on the IP PCB,
cassette 3 (A4R). enter the value recorded
on the service label.
C4- Use it to enter a paper width basic value for the • Be sure to execute
STMTR cassette 4 (STMTR). FUNCTION>CST if you
C4-A4R Use it to enter a paper width basic value for the have replaced the paper
cassette 4 (A4R). width sensor.
MF-A4R Use it to enter a paper width basic value for the
manual feed tray (A4R).
MF-A6R Use it to enter a paper width basic value for the
manual feed tray (A6R).
MF-A4 Use it to enter a paper width basic value for the
manual feed tray (A4).
C3- Use it to set the stacking limit for the cassette 3 (50 • If you have replaced the
LVOL sheets). IP PCB or initialized the
C3- Use it to set the stacking limit for the cassette 3 (250 RAM on the IP PCB,
HVOL sheets). enter the value recorded
on the service label.
C4- Use it to set the stacking limit for the cassette 4 (50
LVOL sheets).
C4- Use it to set the stacking limit for the cassette 4 (250
HVOL sheets).

13-214 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<FEEDER> FEEDER>ADJUST

Level 3 Description Remarks


DOCST Adjusting the Original Stop Position for Pickup from Range : -50 to 50 (Each '1'
the Feeder (original tray pickup) causes a shift of 0.5 mm)
Operation • The data is retained by
1) Select DOCST. the ADF controller PCB
2) Place paper on the tray (A3/11"x17"). on the feeder side.
3) Enter a setting using the keypad.

Original stop position

Higher setting Lower setting

Original

Standard:
11 ±1 mm

4) Press the OK key.


• The paper on the original tray will be picked up and
stopped on the copyboard glass.
5) Open the feeder slowly, and check the position of
the paper.
6) Close the feeder slowly without removing the paper.
7) Press the OK key.
• The paper on the copyboard glass will be delivered to
the original tray.
8) If the stop position is not as indicated, go back to
step 3), and make adjustments once again.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-215
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<FEEDER> FEEDER>ADJUST

Level 3 Description Remarks


DOCST- Adjusting the Original Stop Position for Pickup for the Range : -50 to 50 (Each '1'
M Feeder (manual tray pickup) causes a shift of 0.5 mm)
Operation • The data is retained by
1) Select DOCST-M. the ADF controller PCB
2) Place paper on the manual feed tray (A3/11"×17"). on the feeder side.
3) Enter a setting using the keypad.

Original stop position

Higher setting Lower setting

Original

Standard:
11 ±1 mm

4) Press the OK key.


• The paper on the manual feed tray will be picked up
and stopped on the copyboard glass.
5) Open the feeder slowly, and check the position of
the paper.
6) Close the feeder slowly without removing the paper.
7) Press the OK key.
• The paper on the copyboard board glass will be
delivered to the manual feed tray.
8) If the stop position is not as indicated, go back to
step 3), and make adjustments once gain.

13-216 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<FEEDER-Related Items> FEEDER>ADJUST

Level 3 Description Remarks


LA- Adjusting the Original Feeding Speed for Stream Range : -54 to 54 (a
SPEED Reading Mode higher setting will
increase the speed)
• The data is retained by
the controller PBC of
the ADF on the feeder
STRD-S Adjusting the Scanner Stop Position for Stream side.
Reading Mode (small-size) Range : -25 to 25 (each '1'
causes a shift of 0.1 mm)
Stream reading scanner stop position • The data is retained by
the IP PCB on the
Lower setting Higher setting copier.
Copyboard glass • If you have replaced the
IP PCB or initialized the
RAM on the IP PCB,
enter the value recorded
STRD-L Adjusting the Scanner Stop Position for Stream on the service label.
Reading (large-size)
Stream reading scanner stop position

Lower setting Higher setting

Copyboard glass

RVM- Adjusting the speed of Reversal Motor Range : -30 to 30 (each '1'
SPD • For details, see the Feeder Service Manual. increases the speed by
0.1%)
• The data is retained by
the controller PBC of the
ADF on the feeder side.

<SORTER-Related Items>

Level 3 Description Remarks


PNCH- Adjusting the offset for Punch Hole Position (feeding Range : 6 to 24mm (12mm
HLE direction) at default)
• For details, see the Finisher Service Manual. • The data is retained by
the finisher controller
PCB on the finisher side.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-217
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

E. FUNCTION Operation/Inspection Mode


Figure 13-E801 shows the screen under COPIER>FUNCTION and its items.

Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter

INSTALL FIXING

CCD PANEL

LASER PART-CHK

CLEAR

MISC-R

DPC

CST HRD-DISK

Figure 13-E801 Items under COPIER>FUNCTION

13-218 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Items under COPIER>FUNCTION


Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Description
FUNCTION INSTALL TONER-S Use it to supply or stir toner.

CCD CCD-ADJ Use it to execute auto adjustment of shading.

LASER POWER-A Use it to turn on laser A.


POWER-B Use it to turn on laser B.

DPC OFST Use it to adjust the offset for the potential sensor.

CST C3STMTR Use it to execute auto registration of a paper width basic value for the
cassette 3 (STMTR).
C3-A4R Use it to execute auto registration of a paper width basic value for the
cassette 3 (A4R).
C4-STMTR Use it to execute auto registration of a paper width basic value for the
cassette 4 (STMTR).
C4-A4R Use it to execute auto registration of a paper width basic value for the
cassette 4 (A4R).
MF-A4R Use it to execute auto registration of a paper width basic value for the
manual feed tray (A4R).
MF-A6R Use it to execute auto registration of a paper width basic value for the
manual feed tray (A6R).
MF-A4 Use it to execute auto registration of a paper width basic value for the
manual feed tray (A4).

FIXING NIP-CHK Use it to generate a nip width check image output for the fixing roller.

PANEL LCD-CHK Use it to check missing dots on the touch panel.


LED-CHK Use it to check the activation of the LEDs on the control panel.
LED-OFF Use it to check the de-activation of the LEDs on the control panel.
KEY-CHK Use it to check the inputs of the keys on the control panel.
TOUCHCHK Use it to adjust the coordinates for the touch panel.

PART- CL Use it to select a clutch that turns on at CL-ON.


CHK CL-ON Use it to check the operation of a clutch.
MTR Use it to check the operation of a motor.
MTR-ON Use it to check the operation of a motor.
SL Use it to select a solenoid that turns on at SL-ON.
SL-ON Use it to check the operation of a solenoid.

CLEAR ERR Use it to clear error codes.


IP Use it to initialize the RAM on the image processor PCB.
JAM-HIST Use it to clear the jam history.
ERR-HIST Use it to initialize the error code history.
MF-CON Use it to initialize the RAM on the MFC PCB.

MISC-R SCANLAMP Use it to check the activation of the scanning lamp.


PRE-EXP Use it to check the activation of the pre-exposure LEDs.

HRD- SCANDISK Use it to scan the hard disk.


DISK FORMAT Use it to format the hard disk.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-219
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

The state of the machine is indicated in the upper right corner of the screen. Pay attention to the
indications while executing service mode; they include the following:
READY: The machine is ready for servicing/copying operation.
SERVICE: The machine is performing servicing operations. (This indication is used while
in inspection/operation mode of service mode.)

Items under FEEDER>FUNCTION


Level 1 Level 3 Description
FUNCTION SENS-INT Use it to adjust the sensitivity of each sensor of the feeder.

BLT-CLN Use it to clean the separation belt of the feeder.

REG-CLN Use it to clean the registration roller of the feeder.

13-220 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<INSTALL> COPIER>FUNCTION
Operations for Installation

Level 3 Description Remarks


TONER- Supplying Toner from the Toner Cartridge to the • A count-down number is
S Hopper/Developing Assembly and Stirring the Toner indicated to the right of
Inside the Developing Assembly TONER-S during
Operation operation.
Select TONER-S to highlight, and press the OK key. • No key except the Stop
(The operation ends in about 10 min.) key is enabled during
operation.
Caution:
1. Before pressing the OK key, check to be sure
that the developing assembly is fitted securely.
2. Do not turn off the power while the machine is
in operation.

<CCD>
Executing Auto Adjustment for CCD/Shading-Related Items

Level 3 Description Remarks


CCD- Executing Auto Adjustment for Shading If you have replaced the
ADJ Operation CCD unit, scanning lamp,
1) Place standard white paper* (10 sheets or more) on image processor PCB, or
the copyboard glass. standard white plate,
execute this mode.

Standard white paper

2) Select CCD-ADJ to highlight, and press the Ok key.


3) See that the machine has entered auto adjustment
mode. (The adjustment ends in about 1 min.)
4) Record all items under COPIER>ADJUST>CCD and
the data under COPIER>ADJUST>LAMP>L-DATA
on the service label when they have been updated.
* Whitest of all papar used by the user (except paper
for a color copier).

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-221
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<LASER> COPIER>FUNCTION
Laser-Related Operations

Level 3 Description Remarks


POWER- Turning On the Laser
A Operation
1) Select POWER-A or POWER-B to highlight, and
press the OK key.
2) See that the selected laser turns on and SERVICE is
POWER- indicated in the upper right of the screen.
B 3) See that the laser turns off automatically in about 30
sec.
To turn off the laser before that, press the Stop key.

<DPC>
Executing Automatic Adjustment of Photosensitive Drum Potential-Related Items

Level 3 Description Remarks


OFST Adjusting the Potential Sensor Offset • This item is one of series
Operation of procedures executed
1) Select OFST to highlight, and press the OK key. after replacing the
potential sensor. Do not
use it on its own. For
details, See II.C. "Image
Formation."

<CST>
Storing the Cassette/Manual Feed Tray Paper Width

Level 3 Description Remarks


C3- Registering the Paper Width Basic Value for the STMTR width : 139.5 mm
STMTR Cassette 3/4 A4R width : 210 mm
C3-A4R Operation • For fine-adjustment, use
C4- 1) Set paper of the STMTR size in the cassette, and the following: ADJUST
STMTR adjust the side guide plate to its width. >CST-ADJ>C3-STM-
C4-A4R 2) Select C3-STMTR (C4-STMTR) to highlight, and TR (C4-STMTR), C3-
press the OK key. A4R (C4-A4R).
• The new setting will be stored under C3-STMTR
(C4-STMTR).
3) Repeat steps 1) and 2) for A4R size.
MF-A4R Registering the Paper Width Basic Value for the A4R width:210 mm
MF-A6R Manual Feed Tray A6R width:105 mm
MF-A4 Operation A4 width: 297 mm
1) Place A4R paper on the manual feed tray, and adjust • For fine-adjustment, use
the side guide to its width. the following:
2) Select MF-A4R to highlight, and press the OK key. ADJUST>CST-
The new setting will be stored under MF-A4R. ADJ>MF-A4R, MF-
3) Repeat steps 1) and 2) for A6R and A4 sizes. A6R, MF-A4.

13-222 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)





CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<FIXING> COPIER>FUNCTION
Executing Auto Adjustment for Fixing Assembly-Related Items

Level 3 Description Remarks


NIP- Generating a Fixing Nip Width Measurement Print
CHK Operation
1) Make about 20 copies of the Test Sheet in A4.
2) Set A3 paper on the manual feed tray.
3) Select NPP-CHK to highlight, and press the OK key.
• The paper will be picked up and stopped between the
fixing rollers; then, it will be discharged in about 20
sec.
4) Measure the width as indicated.

c Standard:
7.3±0.5 mm

Feeding
A3 paper

direction b
Middle of
Standard:
copy
|a-c| = 0.5 mm or less
paper

Caution:
a and c are points 10 mm from both ends of paper.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-223
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<PANEL> COPIER>FUNCTION
Activating the LEDs on the Control Panel

Level 3 Description Remarks


LCD- Checking the Touch Panel for Missing Dots
CHK Operation
1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key.
• The entire face of the touch panel will turn on white
and then blue repeatedly.
2) Press the Stop key to end the operation.
LED- Checking LEDs on the Control Panel
CHK Operation
1) Select item to highlight, and press the OK key.
• The LEDs will turn on in sequence. To stop, select
LED-OFF.
LED- Ending a Check on the LEDs of the Control Panel
OFF Operation
1) Select the item to highlight, ending the operation.
KEY- Checking the Key Inputs See Table 13-E801.
CHK Operation
1) Select the item to highlight.
2) Press any key to check. If normal, the corresponding
characters will be indicated on the touch panel.
3) Select KEY-CHK to end the operation.
TOUCHKEY Adjusting the Coordinates for the Touch Panel • The point of a press on
Operation the touch panel and the
1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. coordinates of the LCD
2) Press "+" indicated on the touch panel in sequence are matched.
(9 points). • Execute this mode if you
3) When the adjustment is over, select TOUCHKEY to have replaced the LCD
end the operation. assembly.

Screen
Screen display Screen display
indication

Copy A COPY A ID ID INTERRUPT

Copy B COPY B C CLEAR STOP

Mail Box PB RESET I START

Extension OTHER ? ? STAND BY

0 ~ 9 0~9 M

Table 13-E801 KEY-CHK Screen


13-224 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<PART-CHK> COPIER>FUNCTION
Checking the Operation of Loads

Level 3 Description Remarks


CL Selecting the Clutch to Check
Operation
1) Select CL.
2) Using the keypad, enter the code of the clutch. (See
the code table that follows.)
3) Press the OK key.
CL-ON Checking the Operation of the Clutch. ON à 10 sec OFF à ON
Operation à 10 sec OFF à ON à
1) Select CL-ON, and press the OK key. OFF
MTR Selecting the Motor to Check
Operation
1) Select MTR.
2) Using the keypad, enter the code of the motor to
check. (See the code table that follows.)
3) Press the OK key.
MTR-ON Checking the Motor 10 sec ON à OFF
Operation
1) Select MTR-ON, and press the OK key.
SL Selecting the Solenoid to Check
Operation
1) Select SL.
2) Using the keypad, enter the code of the solenoid.
(See the code table that follows.)
3) Press the OK key.
SL-ON Checking the Solenoid ON à 10 sec OFF à ON
Operation à 10 sec OFF à ON
1) Select SL-ON, and press the OK key. àOFF

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-225
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Code Code

1 Manual tray pickup clutch (CL7) 1 Drum motor (M0)

2 Cassette 3 pickup clutch (CL12) 2 Main motor (M1)

3 Vertical path 3 roller drive clutch (CL13) 3 Pickup motor (M2)

4 Cassette 4 pickup clutch (CL14) 4 Fixing motor (M3)

5 Vertical path 4 roll drive clutch (CL15) 5 Laser scanner motor (M4)

6 Front deck (right) pickup clutch (CL10) 6 Cartridge motor (M6)

7 Vertical path 1 roller drive clutch (CL8) 7 Hopper motor (M18)

8 Front deck (left) pickup clutch (CL11) 8 Horizontal registration motor (M15)

9 Vertical path 2 roller drive clutch (CL9) 9 Duplexing reversal motor (M11)

10 Pre-registration roller drive clutch (CL5) 10 Duplexing feeding motor (M12)

Lower feeding middle roller drive clutch 11 Side paper deck main motor (M101)
11
(CL16)

Lower feeding right roller drive clutch Code


12
(CL17)
1 Front deck (right) pickup solenoid (SL7)
13 Front deck (left) feeding clutch (CL19)
2 Front deck (left) pickup solenoid (SL8)
14 Delivery speed switching clutch (CL21)
3 Cassette 3 pickup solenoid (SL9)
15 Registration roller brake drive clutch (CL3)
4 Cassette 4 pickup solenoid (SL10)
16 Manual feed tray feeding clutch (CL18)
Manual feed tray pickup clutch solenoid
5
17 Hopper drive clutch (CL1) (SL6; push)

18 Developing cylinder drive clutch (CL4) Manual feed tray pickup clutch solenoid
6
(SL6; pull)
19 Registration roller drive clutch (CL2)
7 Delivery flapper drive solenoid (SL3)
20 Side paper deck feeding clutch (CL101)
8 Reversing flapper drive solenoid (SL11)
21 Side paper deck pickup clutch (CL102)
Fixing inlet guide drive solenoid
9
(SL1; push)

10 Fixing inlet guide drive solenoid (SL1; pull)

11 Fixing cleaning belt drive solenoid (SL2)

Fixing feeding unit locking solenoid


12
(SL4; push)

Fixing feeding unit locking solenoid


13
(SL4; pull)

13-226 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<CLEAR> COPIER>FUNCTION
Clearing RAM/Error Code Histories

Level 3 Description Remarks


ERR Clearing Error Codes • The code is cleared only
Operation when the main power
1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. switch is turned off and
2) Turn off and then on the main power. then on. Be sure to turn
it off and then on.
IP Initializing the RAM on the Image Processor • The RAM is initialized
Operation only when the main
1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. power switch is turned
2) Turn off and then on the main power. off and then on. Be sure
to turn it off and then on.
JAM- Clearing the Jam History • The history is cleared
HIST Operation only when the main
1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. power switch is turned
2) Turn off and then on the main power. off and then on. Be sure
to turn it off and then on.
ERR- Clearing the Error Code History • The history is cleared
HIST Operation only when the main
1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. power switch is turned
2) Turn off and then on the main power. off and then on. Be sure
to turn it off and then on.
MF-CON Initializing the RAM on the MFC PCB • The RAM is initialized
Operation only when the main
1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. power switch is turned
2) Turn off and then on the main power. off and then on. Be sure
to turn it off and then on.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-227
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<MISC-R> COPIER>FUNCTION
Checking the Scanning System

Level 3 Description Remarks


SCANLAMP Checking the Activation of the Scanning Lamp
Operation
1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key.
• The scanning lamp will turn on for about 3 sec and
then will turn off.
PRE- Checking the Activation of the Pre-exposure Lamp
EXP Operation
1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key.
• The scanning lamp will turn on for about 3 sec and
then will turn off.

<HRD-DISK>
Checking the Operation of the Hard Disk

Level 3 Description Remarks


SCANDISK Detecting an Error on/Initializing the Hard Disk • Execute this mode if the
• The operation starts, and the count is made starting at hard disk has some kind
0%; the operation ends at 100% (in about 25 min). of problem.
FORMAT Initializing the Hard Disk (ends in about 1 sec). • Execute this mode for a
normal hard disk.
• Execute this mode at
time of shipment from
the factory or after
replacing the hard disk.

13-228 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<FEEDER-Related Items> FEEDER>FUNCTION

Level 3 Description Remarks


SENS- Adjusting the Sensitivity of Sensors of the Feeder
INT • For details, see the Feeder Service Manual
(B. "Making Adjustment after Replacing the Major
Parts").
• The operation is identical to when the push switch
(SW2) is turned on.
BLT- Cleaning the Feeder Separation Belt (See chapter 5 E.
CLN "Cleaning.")
• For Details, see the Feeder Service Manual.
• The operation is identical to when the push switch
(SW2) is turned on.
REG- Cleaning the Feeder Registration Roller (See E.
CLN "Cleaning.")
• For details, see the feeder Service Manual.
• The operation is identical to when the push switch
(SW2) is turned on.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-229
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

F. OPTION Settings Mode


Figure 13-F801 shows the screen under COPIER>OPTION and its items.

Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter

BODY

USER

CST

ACC

Figure 13-F801 Screen under Items COPIER>OPTION

13-230 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Items under COPIER>OPTION


Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Description
OPTION BODY PO-CONT Use it to turn on/off potential control.
MODEL-SZ Use it to select the site (country) of installation.
TRNSG-SW Use it to select transfer guide bias control mode.
FIX-TMP Use it to select operation temperature for thick paper copy down sequence.
CPMKP-SW Use it to turn on/off thick paper copy down sequence.
IDL-MODE Use it to select developing assembly idle rotation mode.
FUZZY Use it to turn on/off fuzzy control.
SCANSLCT Use it to turn on/off original size detection by the ADF.
OHP-TEMP Use it to select fixing roller control temperature for copying on
transparencies.
PM-RD-MD Use it to turn on/off potential control for transparencies.
OHP-CNT Use it to turn on/off potential control for transparency mode.
CNT-W/HM Use it to select potential control for high humidity environment mode.
PR-SEL Use it to select uneven potential reduction mode.
CNT-W/PR Use it to turn on/off density variation mode for printing operation.
FIX-TMP1 Use it to select operating temperature for down sequence.
TRSW-P-B Use it to turn on/off transfer current output correction control along
edges of paper.
SP-MODE Use it to turn on/off separation current output correction.
FTMP-DWN Use it to select stacking enhancement mode.
DRUM-CLN Use it to select drum cleaning enhancement mode.
F-GD-CNT Use it to select fixing inlet guide color mode.
DRM-IDL Use it to select drum idle rotation mode.

USER COPY-LIM Use it to change the upper copy limit.


SLEEP Use it to turn on/off the sleep function.
WEB-DISP Use it to turn on/off the fixing cleaning belt level warning indication.
SIZE-DET Use it to turn on/off the original size detection function.
DATE-DSP Use it to switch data/time notation.
MB-CCV Use it to restrict users of the mail box by control cards.
PM-DENS Use it to turn off/on density variation mode for during printing
(scanner input).
PR-D-SEL Use it to set density for printing (PDL input).

CST U1-NAME Use it to turn on/off paper notation in terms of paper size group U1
U2-NAME Use it to turn on/off paper notation in terms of paper size group U2
U3-NAME Use it to turn on/off paper notation in terms of paper size group U3
U4-NAME Use it to turn on/off paper notation in terms of paper size group U4
CST-U1 Use it to select paper notation for paper size group U1.
CST-U2 Use it to select paper notation for paper size group U2.
CST-U3 Use it to select paper notation for paper size group U3.
CST-U4 Use it to select paper notation for paper size group U4.
P-SZ-C1 Use it to select a paper size for the front deck (right).
P-SZ-C2 Use it to select a paper size for the for deck (left).
C1-DWSW Use it to turn on/off the thick paper control sequence for the front deck
(right).
C2-DWSW Use it to turn on/off the thick paper control sequence for the front deck
(left).
DK-DWSW Use it to turn on/off the thick paper control sequence for the option deck.
C3-DWSW Use it to turn on/off the thick paper control sequence for the cassette 3.
C4-DWSW Use it to turn on/off the thick paper control sequence for the cassette 4.

ACC DK-P Use it to select the paper size for the side paper deck.
COIN Use it to turn on/off the coin vender notation.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-231
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Items under FEEDER>OPTION


Level 1 Level 3 Description
OPTION DOC-F-SW Use it to turn on/off stream reading mode

SIZE-SW

Items under SORTER>OPTOIN


Level 1 Level 3 Description
OPTION BLNK-SW Use it to set a margin for the saddle stitcher.

Items under BOARD>OPTION


Level 1 Level 3 Description
OPTION LIPS-HL Use it to select menu display mode for the LIPS board.

13-232 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<BODY> COPIER>OPTION
Selecting Copier-Related Machine Settings

Level 3 Description Remarks


PO-CNT Use it to turn on/off potential control. 0: off
1: on (default)
MODEL- Use it to select the site (country) of installation for the 0: AB (6R5E)
SZ feeder. 1: Inch (5R4E)
• This changes the way the default ratios are displayed 2: A (3R3E)
and how the feeder identifies the size of originals. 3: AB/Inch (6R5E)
TRNSG- Use it to select transfer guide bias control mode. 0: for extremely high
SW • If transfer faults occur in images, increase the humidity, +200 V
settings. 1: fixed at +600 V
2: fixed at +200 V
3: for extremely high
humidity, +200 V
(default)
4: if not low humidity,
+200 V
FIX- Use it to select a down sequence operating temperature 0: 170°C
TMP for thick paper. 1: 175°C
• This is effective if CPMKP-SW is set to ON. 2: 180°C
3: 185°C
4: 190°C
5: 195°C
CPMKP- Use it to turn on/off the down sequence for thick paper. 0: off (default)
SW Use it to select idle rotation mode for the developing 1: on
IDL- assembly. 0: auto control by the
MODE • If the images are distorted or the density is too low environment sensor
(light), select '1' or '2'. (default)
Low humidity: idle
rotation.
normal/high humidity:
start idle rotation when
the control panel soft
switch is turned on
1: start idle rogation when
temperature of fixing
roller reaches 100°C
2: start idle rotation when
control panel soft
switch is turned on

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-233
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

COPIER>OPTION

Level 3 Description Remarks


FUZZY Use it to turn on/off fuzzy control. 0: turn on fuzzy control
• This affects the pre-transfer, transfer, and separation (default)
charging current levels. 1: low humidity mode
• Selecting '1' through '3' will free the mode from the (current level is lower
environment sensor. than standard)
2: normal humidity mode
3: high humidity mode
(current level higher
than standard)
SCANSLCT Use it to turn on/off the original size detection 0: off (default)
mechanism for the ADF. 1: on
OHP- Use it to switch control temperature settings for 0: no temperature control
TEMP transparency mode. for transparency mode
(normal temperature
control only)
1: use temperature control
for transparency mode
at "normal control
temperature -5°C"
2: use temperature control
for transparency mode
at "normal control
temperature -10°C"
3: use temperature control
for transparency mode
at "normal control
temperature -15°C"
PM-RD- Use it to turn on/off page memory read control. 1: read while writing to
MD page memory (default)
0: read after writing to
page memory
equivalent of 1 page,
thereby preventing jams
in memory in response
to jams in feeder
OHP- Use it to turn on/off potential control for transparency 0: use target value
CNT mode. obtained by potential
control for transparency
mode while
transparency mode is
under way (default)
1: no potential control
during transparency
mode

13-234 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

COPIER>OPTION

Level 3 Description Remarks


CNT-W/ Use it to select potential control mode for a high 1: correct laser power/
HM humidity environment. developing bias to suit
• Use it to prevent decreases in density caused by a environment
reduced transfer efficiency because of moist paper or 0: no correction of target
a low development efficiency because of moist toner. value (default)
• Between '2' and '6', the higher the setting, the darker 2: extremely low humidity
the images. 3: low humidity
4: normal humidity
5: high humidity
6: extremely high
humidity
PR-SEL Use it to select uneven potential reduction mode. 0: standard mode (default)
• Use it to reduce uneven density occurring as a result 1: reduction 1
of primary charging. 2: reduction 2
CNT-W/ Use it to turn on/off density variation mode during 0: correct target value to
PR printing (PDL input). enable variation of
density during printing
(default)
1: no variation of density
during printing
FIX- Use it to select a down sequence start temperature for 0: 170°C
TMP1 plain paper. 1: 175°C
• Select a higher temperature for users preferring 2: 180°C
image quality, while selecting a lower temperature 3: 185°C
for users preferring copying speed. 4: 190°C
5: 195°C
TRSW- Use it to turn on/off the transfer current output 1: no variation of transfer
P-B correction control mechanism for the trailing edge of current level (if transfer
paper. faults occur along
trailing edge)
0: correct transfer current
level for trailing edge
(default)
SP- Use it to turn on/of separation current output 0: standard mode (AC
MODE correction control. output is 10.5 kvpp;
default)
1: low voltage mode (AC
output is 9.8 kvpp; if
error occurs frequently
because of leakage)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-235
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

COPIER>OPTION

Level 3 Description Remarks


FTMP- Use it to select stacking enhancement mode. 0: no reduction in fixing
DWM • Select a timing at which the fixing temperature is temperature
reduced to ensure proper stacking in the finisher. 1: reduce after passing
1000 sheets or more
2: reduce after passing
1000 sheets or more in
high humidity
environment
3: reduce after passing
1000 sheets of AB
paper (default)
DRUM- Use it to select drum cleaning enhancement mode. 0: after passing 1000
CLN • Change the setting if faults occur in drum cleaning. A single-sided copies or
higher setting increases performance. 500 double-sided
• During copying, the drum is stopped for about 1 sec copies (default)
after a specific number of sheets have been 1: after passing 1000
processed, thereby allowing the cleaning blade to single-sided copies or
recover its cleaning performance. 250 double-sided copies
2: after passing 250 single-
sided copies or 250
double-sided copies
3: auto control to suit
environment; under high
humidity, same as '0';
under low humidity,
after passing 250 single-
sided copies or 500
double-sided copies
F-GD- Use it to select fixing inlet guide control mode. 0: normal control (default)
CNT • If the images are uneven because of fixing or the 1: for paper 350 mm or
images are too light, select '1'. larger, fixing inlet guide
is lowered when 1st
side is passing; for
others, same as normal
control.

13-236 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

COPIER>OPTION

Level 3 Description Remarks


DRM- Use it to select idle rotation mode for the 0: no idle rotation (default)
IDL photosensitive drum. 1: for high humidity,
• If the images are distorted or the density is too low initiate idle rotation for
(light), select '1' through '4'. 30 sec when control
panel soft switch is
turned on
2: for high humidity,
initiate idle rotation for
2 min when control
panel soft switch is
turned on
3: independently of
environment, initiate
idle rotation for 30 sec
when control panel soft
switch is turned on
4: independently of
environment, initiate
idle rotation for 2 min
when control panel soft
switch is turned on

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-237
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<USER> COPIER>OPTION
Selecting User-Mode Related Machine Settings

Level 3 Description Remarks


COPY- Use it to change the upper limit for copy counts. Range : 1 through 999
LIM (default at 999)
SLEEP Use it to turn on/off the sleep mechanism. 0: off
1: on (default)
WEB- Use it to turn on/off the fixing cleaning belt length 0: disable warning
DISP warning message. 1: enable warning
• Use it to enable or disable indication of a warning on • A warning is indicated
the touch panel when the fixing cleaning belt starts to when starting service
run out. mode after passing
145,000 sheets (A4).
SIZE- Use it to turn on/off the original size detecting 0: off
DET mechanism. 1: on (default)
DATE- Use it to switch date/time notation. 0: 'YY (MM/DD (default)
DSP 1: DD/MM 'YY
2: MM/DD/YY
MB-CCV Use it to restrict the user of the mail box (by control 0: disable restriction
card). (default)
1: enable restriction
PM- Use it to turn on/off density variation mode during 0: off
DENS printing (scanner input). 1: on (default)
PR-D- Use it to set a density for printing (PDL input). Range : 0 through 8
SEL (default at 4)

13-238 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<CST> COPIER>OPTION
Selecting Cassette-Related Settings

Level 3 Description Remarks


U1-NAME Use it to turn on/off paper notation upon detection of 0: off ('U1' to 'U4' on the
U2-NAME paper size in terms of paper size group (U1 through touch panel)
U3-NAME U4). 1: on (paper names
U4-NAME selected under CST-U1
through -U4)
CST-U1 Use it to select paper notation for paper size group U1. 31: G-LTR (default)
22: K-LGL
CST-U2 Use it to select paper notation used by paper size 24: FOOLSCAP (default)
group U2. 26: OFFICIO
27: E-OFFI
33: A-LGL
36: A-OFFL
CST-U3 Use it to select paper notation used by paper size 34: G-LGL (default)
group U3. 35: FOLIO
25: A-FLS
CST-U4 Use it to select paper notation used by paper size 18: LTR (default)
group U4. 29: A-LTR
P-SZ-C1 Use it t select paper size for the front deck. 6: A4
P-SZ-C2 15: B5
18: LTR
C1-DWSW Use it to turn on/off control sequence for thick paper. 0: off (default)
C2-DWSW C1 : front deck (right) 1: on
DK-DWSW C2 : front deck (left)
C3-DWSW DK: side paper deck
C4-DWSW C3 : cassette 3
C4 : cassette 4

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-239
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

COPIER>OPTION

Code Abbreviation Paper name Code Abbreviation Paper notation


01 A1 A1 21 LGL LEGAL
02 A2 A2 22 K-LGL Korean Government
03 A3R A3R 23 K-LGLR Korean Government R
04 A3 A3 24 FLSC Foolscap
05 A4R A4R 25 A-FLS Australian Foolscap
06 A4 A4 26 OFI OFFICIO
07 A5 A5 27 E-OFI Ecuadorian Officio
08 A5R A5R 28 B-OFI Bolivian Officio
09 B1 B1 29 A-LTR Argentine Letter
10 B2 B2 30 A-LTRR Argentine Letter-R
11 B3 B3 31 G-LTR Government Letter
12 B4R B4R 32 G-LTRR Government Letter-R
13 B4 B4 33 A-LGL Argentine Legal
14 B5R B5R 34 G-LGL Government Legal
15 B5 B5 35 FOLI FOLIO
16 11×17 11×17 36 A-OFI Argentine Officio
17 LTRR LETTER-R 37
18 LTR LETTER 38
19 STMT STATEMENT 39
20 STMTR STATEMENT-R 40 ALL

Table 13-F801 Cassette Paper Size Codes

<ACC>
Selecting Accessory-Related Settings

Level 3 Description Remarks


COIN Use it to turn on/off coin vender notation. 0: for control card
• Use it to change the Control Card Set to notation for (default)
a coin vender. 1: for coin vender
DK-P Use it to select a paper size for the side paper deck. 0: A4
1: B5
2: LTR

13-240 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

<FEEDER-Related items> FEEDER>OPTION


SORTER>OPTION
BOARD>OPTION

Level 3 Description Remarks


DOC-F- Use it to turn on/off stream reading mode. 0: enable stream reading
SW (default)
1: enable stream reading
for large-size only
2: disable stream reading
SIZE-SW Use it to turn on/off the size mix mechanism (AB and 0: disable detection of mix
Inch papers). (default)
1: enable detection of mix

<SORTER-Related items>

Level 3 Description Remarks


BLNK- Use it to set the margin (W) on both sides of the fold 0: normal width (5 mm)
SW (for the saddle stitcher). 1: larger width (10 mm)

<BOARD-Relate Items>

Level 3 Description Remarks


LIPS-HL Use it to select menu display mode for the LIPS board. 0: disable display (default)
• For details, see the Service Manual for each 1: display mode 1
respective board. 2: display mode 2

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-241
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

G. PG Test Print

Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter

PG

Figure 13-G801

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Description


TEST PG TYPE Use it to generate test prints.

Level 3 Description Remarks


TYPE Use it to select and generate a test print (1 thorough 8). • The machine will
Operation automatically be in
1) Place A3/11×17 or A4/LTR paper in the cassette 3. copying mode when it is
2) Select PG, and enter the number of the item using reset to leave the PG
the keypad. screen.
3) Press the OK key. • For test printing, the
• A test print will be generated. source of paper is the
cassette 3.

13-242 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

1. Grid (PG-TYPE 1)
Checking Straight Lines (right angles)
• displaced laser beam

2. Vertical Lines (PG-TYPE 2)

Checking Straight Lines


Feeding direction

(sub scanning direction)


• faulty BD

3. Horizontal Lines (PG-TYPE 3)

Straight Lines
Feeding direction

(main scanning direction)


• displaced laser beam

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-243
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

4. Halftone (PG-TYPE 4)
nThis print consists of halftone created without passing the paper through the density correc-
tion block (image processing). The result depends entirely on the performance of the image
formation system.

5. 17-Gradation (PG-TYPE 5)

Gradation
• faulty laser system

Uneven Density
• Faulty primary charging assembly
• Faulty developing system

6. Blank (PG-TYPE 6)

Fogging
• faulty photosensitive drum
• faulty developing assembly
• faulty laser system

13-244 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

7. Halftone (PG-TYPE 7)
nThe print consists of halftone created by passing the paper through the density correction
block. The result is dependent on AE and other density correction mechanisms in addition to
the performance of the image formation system.

[1] Black Lines


• scratches on drum
• dirt on primary charging wire
[2] Verti cal White Spots
• transfer faulty
[3] Uneven Left/Right Density
• primary charging assembly faults
• developing system faults

8. Solid Black (PG-TYPE 8)

[1] White Spots


• transfer faults
[2] White Lines
• shading faults
(i.e., dirt on standard white plate)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-245
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

H. Counter Mode
Figure 13-H801 shows the Level 2 items screen and the items for COUNTER mode.

Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter

TOTAL
TOTAL

SCANNER

PICK-UP
PICK-UP

FEEDE
FEEDER

MISC

JOB

Figure 13-H801

• In this mode, each number represents the number of times the machine has operated.
• To Clear the Counter Readings,
1) Select an item to highlight.
2) Press the Clear key on the control panel.
The counter will be cleared to return to '00000000'.
• The terms "large" and "small" as used in reference to sizes mean the following:
Large-size paper is paper whose length is 300 mm or more or paper of a non-default size.
(e.g., B4 or larger)
Small-size paper is paper whose length is less than 300 mm. (e.g., A4 or smaller)

13-246 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Items under COUNTER


Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Description
COUNTER TOTAL SERVECE1 total counter 1 for servicing
SERVECE2 total counter 2 for servicing
TTL total counter
L-TTL large-size total counter
S-TTL small-size total counter
COPY total counter (scanner input)
L-COPY large-size counter (scanner input)
S-COYP small-size counter (scanner input)
PRNT total counter (PDL input)
L-PRNT large-size total counter (PDL input)
S-PRNT small-size total print counter (PDL input)

SCANNER SC-TTL total scan counter for scanner


SC-STRM stream reading scan counter for scanner
SC-NRM fixed reading scan counter for scanner

PICKUP L-C1 front deck (right) pickup counter (large-size)


S-C1 front deck (right) pickup counter (small-size)
L-C2 front deck (left) pickup counter (large-size)
S-C2 front deck (left) pickup counter (small-size)
L-C3 cassette 3 pickup counter (large-size)
S-C3 cassette 3 pickup counter (small -size)
L-C4 cassette 4 pickup counter (large-size)
S-C4 cassette 4 pickup counter (small-size)
L-MF manual feed tray pickup total counter (large-size)
S-DK manual feed tray pickup total counter (small-size)
L-DK side paper deck pickup total counter (large-size)
S-DK side paper deck pickup total counter (small-size)
L-2-SIDE double-sided 2nd side pickup total counter (large-size)
S-2-SIDE double-sided 2nd side pickup total counter (small-size)

FEEDER L-FEED feeder pickup total counter (large-size original)


S-FEED feeder pickup total counter (small-size original)
TTL-MF feeder pickup (manual feed) total counter

MISC FIX-WEB fixing cleaning belt counter


WST-TNR waste toner counter

JOB COPY copy job operations


MAIL-BOX mail box output job operations
SGNL-CPY single copy operations
INTRPT interrupt copy operations
OVR10CPY copy operations for 10 copies or more
PRINT print job operations

PER10DEC FIX-TH1 main thermistor (TH1) operation time (in sec)


FIX-TH2 main thermistor (TH2) operation time (in sec)
FX-TSW thermal switch (TP1) operation time (in sec)
PRM-WIRE primary charging wire high-voltage activation time (in sec)
PRM-GRID primary grid wire high-voltage activation time (sin sec)
TR-WIRE transfer charging wire high-voltage activation time (in sec)
PO-WIRE pre-transfer charging wire high-voltage activation time (sec)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-247
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Items under COUNTER


Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Description
COUNTER DURABLE PT-DRM photosensitive drum rotation time (in sec)
SCN-LMP scanning lamp activation time (in sec)
DVG-CYL developing cylinder rotation time (in sec)
DVG-ROLL developing assembly roll rotation time (in sec)
SP-CLAW cleaner separation claw use time (in sec)
CLN-BLD cleaning blade use time (in sec)
PRM-UNIT primary charging assembly high-voltage activation time (in sec)
TR-UNIT transfer charging assembly high-voltage activation time (in sec)
PO-UNIT pre-transfer charging assembly high-voltage activation time (in sec)
PRI-CLN primary charging cleaning operations (in number of times)
TR-CLN transfer charging cleaning operations (in number of times)
PO-CLN pre-transfer charging cleaning operations (in number of times)
PO-SCRPR pre-transfer charging scraper use time (in sec)
FX-UP-RL upper fixing roller paper passage (in number of sheets)
FX-LW-RL lower fixing roller paper passage (in number of sheets)
DLV-UCLW delivery upper separation claw paper passage (in number of sheets)
DLV-LCLW delivery lower separating claw paper passage (in number of sheets)
RD-PU-RL front deck (right) pickup roller paper passage (in number of sheets)
RD-SP-RL front deck (right) feeding roller paper passage (in number of sheets)
LD-PU-RL front deck (left) pickup roll paper passage (in number of sheet)
LD-SP-RL front deck (left) feeding roller paper passage (in number of sheets)
C3-PU-RL cassette 3 pickup roller paper passage (in number of sheets)
C3-SP-RL cassette 3 feeding roller paper passage (in number of sheets)
C4-PU-RL cassette 4 pickup roller paper passage (in number of sheets)
C4-SP-RL cassette 4 pickup roller paper passage (in number of sheets)
M-PU-RL manual feed tray pickup roller paper passage (in number of sheets)
M-SP-RL manual feed tray feeding roller paper passage (in number of sheets)
PD-PU-RL side paper deck pick up roller paper passage (in number of sheets)
PD-SP-RL side paper deck feeding roller paper passage (in number of sheets)
RD-PU-CL front deck (right) pickup clutch operations (in number of times)
RD-SP-CL front deck (right) feeding clutch operations (in number of times)
LD-PU-CL front deck (left) pickup clutch operations (in number of times)
LD-PL-CL front deck (left) feeding clutch operations (in number of times)
C3-PU-CL cassette 3 pickup clutch (CL12) operations (in number of times)
C3-PL-CL cassette 3 feeding clutch (CL13) operations (in number o times)
C4-PU-CL cassette 4 pickup clutch (CL14) operations (in number of times)
C4-PL-CL cassette 4 feeding clutch (CL15) operations (in number of times)
M-PU-CL manual feed tray pickup clutch (CL7) operations (in number o times)
M-PL-CL side paper deck pickup clutch (CL102) operations (in number of times)
PD-PU-CL side paper deck feeding clutch (CL 102) operations (in number of times)
PD-PL-CL side paper deck feeding clutch (CL 101) operations (in number of times)
VP1-CL vertical path 1 clutch (CL8) operations (in number of times)
VP2-CL vertical path 2 clutch (CL9) operations (in number of ties)
REG-CL registration clutch (CL2) operations (in number of times)
DUP-C-CL lower feeding middle clutch (CL16) operations (in number of times)
DUP-R-CL lower feeding right clutch (CL17) operation (in number of times)
INV-FAN inverter cooling fan (FM9) drive time (in sec)
PWS-FAN power supply fan (FM11) operation time (in sec)
SP-FAN separation fan (FM13) operation time (in sec)
LSR-FAN laser scanner fan (FM14) operation time (in sec)
FEED-FAN feeding fan (FM7) operation time (in sec)
DRM-FAN drum fan (FM8) operation time (in sec)
CURL-FAN de-curling fan (FM6) operation time (in sec)
POST-FAN pre-transfer charging assembly fan (FM10) operation time (in sec)

13-248 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Items under COUNTR


Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Description
COUNTER DURABLE PRM-FAN primary charging assembly fan (FM1) operation item (in sec)
FX-FAN fixing heat discharge fan (FM2) operation time (in sec)
SCN-FAN scanner cooling fan (FM3) operation time (sin sec)
LSR-FAN laser driver cooling fan (FM5) operation time (in sec)
DRM-MTR drum motor (M0) operation time (in sec)
FX-MTR fixing motor (M3) operation time (in sec)
PICK-MTR pickup motor (M2) operation time (in sec)
FEED-MTR main motor (M1) operation time (in sec)
LSR-MTR laser scanner motor (M4) operation time (in sec)
HD-DRV hard disk operation time (in sec)
LSR-DRV laser operation time (in sec)
FHTR-M fixing main heater (H1) operation time (in sec)
FHTR-S fixing sub heater (H2) operation time (in sec)
B-LIGHT control panel back light activation time (in sec)
NON-SORT non-sort path paper passage (in number of sheets)
SORT sort path paper passage (in number of sheets)
INSERTER inserter paper passage (in number of sheets)
FOLD folding unit path paper passage (in number of sheets)
SADDLE saddle paper passage (in number of sheets)
SDL-STPL saddle stapling operations (in number of times)
PUNCH punching operations (in number of operations)
FIN-STPR finisher stapler operations (in number of times)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-249
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

IX . SELF DIAGNOSIS
The microprocessor on the copier’s DC controller PCB is equipped with a mechanism that
checks the state of the copier (especially its sensors). It runs a check as needed and, upon detection
of a fault, indicates a code on the control panel.

A. Copier Self Diagnosis


Code Cause Description
• The main thermistor (TH1) has poor • The temperature of the upper fixing
contact or an open circuit. roller does not reach 70°C within 3 min
• The fixing heater (H1, H2) has an open 30 sec after power-on.
circuit.
E000 • The thermal switch (TS1) has an open
circuit.
(NOTE 1) • The SSR is faulty.
• The DC control PCB is faulty.
• The sub thermistor (TH2) has poor
contact or an open circuit.
After indicating E000, the power switch
turns off in about 5 sec.
• The main thermistor (TH1) has a short • The temperature of the upper fixing
circuit. roller exceeds 230°C for 2 sec or more.
E001 • The SSR is faulty. • The difference in detection temperature
• The DC controller PCB is faulty. between the main thermistor (TH1) and
(NOTE 1)
• The sub thermistor (TH2) has detected the sub thermistor (TH2) is 50°C for 1
overheating. sec or more.
• The main thermistor (TH1) has poor • The temperature of the upper fixing
contact or an open circuit. roller does not reach 100°C within 2.5
E002 • The fixing heater (H1, H2) has an open min after it has exceeded 70°C.
circuit. • The temperature of the upper fixing
(NOTE 1) • The thermal switch (TS1) has an open roller does not reach 150°C within 2.5
circuit. min after it has exceeded 100°C.
• The SSR is faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The main thermistor (TH1) has poor • The temperature of the upper fixing
contact or an open circuit. roller drops to 70°C or less for 2 sec
• The fixing heater (H1, H2) has an open after it has reached 100°C.
E003 circuit.
• The thermal switch (TS1) has an open
(NOTE 1)
circuit.
• The SSR is faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
E004 • The SSR is faulty. • The SSR used to drive the fixing heater
(NOTE 1) • The DC controller PCB is faulty. has a short circuit.
• The cleaning belt inside the fixing • The cleaning belt inside the fixing
assembly has been taken up. assembly has been taken up more than a
E005 • The fixing cleaning belt length sensor specific length.
(PS7) is faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.

13-250 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Code Cause Description


• The main motor (M1) is faulty. • No clock pulse arrives for 2 sec or more
E010 • The DC controller PCB is faulty. after the output of the main motor drive
signal.
• The drum motor (M0) is faulty. • No PLL lock signal (MOLCK) arrives
E012 • The DC controller PCB is faulty. for 2 sec or more after the output of the
drum motor drive signal.
• The waste toner feed screw has a fault. • The waste toner feed screw cannot
• The DC controller PCB is faulty. rotate, and the detecting switch (MSW2)
E013 has been pressed multiple times within a
specific period of time.
• The fixing motor (M3) is faulty. • No PLL lock signal (M1-FG) arrive for 2
E014 • The DC controller PCB is faulty. sec or more after the output of the fixing
motor drive signal.
• The pickup motor (M2) is faulty. • No clock pulse arrives for 2 sec or more
E015 • The DC controller PCB is faulty. after the output of the pickup motor drive
signal.
• The waste toner case is full. • As many as about 50,000 pages worth of
images have been formed (in terms of
E019 A4) without disposing of the waste toner
after a waste toner case full condition
(message indicated) has been identified.
• The hopper inside toner feeder motor • The absence of toner inside the
(M18) is faulty. developing assembly has been detected
• The magnet roller drive clutch (CL1) is for 2 min or more after supplying the
faulty. developing assembly with toner.
E020 • The developing assembly inside toner
sensor (TS3) is faulty.
• The DC control PCB is faulty.
• The hopper connector is disconnected.
• The cartridge inside toner feeder motor • An overcurrent to the cartridge inside
(M6) is faulty. toner feeder motor (M6) has been
• DC controller PCB is faulty. detected twice for 10 sec each by the DC
E025 controller PCB. (In response to the first
detection, the copier will indicate "Shake
the Toner Case.")
• The toner copy counter has an open • The total copy counter is identified as
E030 circuit. having an open circuit when it is driven.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The option counter has an open circuit. • The options counter is identified as
E031 • The DC controller PCB is faulty. having an open circuit when it is driven.
• The Copy Data Controller-A1 or the • The Copy Data Counter-A1 or the
Remoto Diagnostic Device II is faulty. Remoto Diagnostic Device II counter
E032 • The DC controller PCB is faulty. function fails to operate.
• The Copy Data Controller-A1 or the
Remoto Diagnostic Device II is
disconnected.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-251
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Code Cause Description


• The deck main motor (M101) is faulty. • No PLL lock signal (DMPLK) arrives
E043 • The side deck driver PCB is faulty. for 2 sec or more after the input of the
• The DC controller PCB is faulty. PLL lock signal (DMPLK).
• The horizontal registration sensor • The home position signal is not detected
(PS18) is faulty. in 5 sec while the horizontal registration
E051 • The horizontal registration motor (M15) motor (M15) drive signal is being
is faulty. generated.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The primary charging wire cleaner • The home position is not detected within
motor (M8) is faulty. 60 sec after wire cleaning has been
• The primary charging wire cleaner started.
E060 home position detecting switch
(MSW4) is faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The transfer/separation charging wire • The home position is not detected within
cleaner motor (M9) is faulty. 60 sec after wire cleaning has been
• The transfer/separation charging wire started.
E063 cleaner home position detecting switch
(MSW6) is faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The primary charging assembly is faulty. • The high-voltage to the primary charging
• The HV-DC PCB is faulty. assembly is faulty (leakage).
E065 • The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open
circuit).
• The pre-transfer charging wire cleaner • The home position cannot be detected
motor (M7) is faulty. within 60 sec after wire cleaning has
• The pre-transfer charging wire cleaner been started.
E066 home position detecting switch
(MSW3) is faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The HV-DC PCB is faulty. • Of the primary high-voltage, pre-transfer
• The HV-AC PCB is faulty. high-voltage, transfer high-voltage, and
E067 • The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open separation high-voltage, a fault is found
circuit). in two or more at the same time.
• The HV-DC PCB is faulty. • The high-voltage output to the separation
• The HV-AC PCB is faulty. charging assembly has a fault (leakage).
• The separation charging assembly is
E068 faulty.
• The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open
circuit).
• The HV-DC PCB is faulty. • The high-voltage to the transfer charging
E069 • The transfer charging assembly is faulty. assembly has a fault (leakage).
• The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open
circuit).

13-252 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Code Cause Description


• The BD PCB is faulty. • The BD signal does not arrive within 1
E100 • The image processor PCB is faulty. sec after the output of the laser drive
• The DC controller PCB is faulty. signal.
• The laser unit is faulty. • The BD signal does not arrive for 1 sec
• The laser driver PCB 1 is faulty. or more while the laser is on.
• The laser driver PCB 2 is faulty.
• The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open
circuit).
• The image processor PCB is faulty. • The laser power data cannot be written to
• The laser driver PCB 1 is faulty. the laser driver PCB 1 when starting
E102 • The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open copying or printing operation.
circuit).
• The laser scanner motor (M4) is faulty. • The constant speed rotation signal (LM-
• The laser scanner driver is faulty. RDY) does not arrive for 15 sec or more
E110 • The DC controller PCB is faulty. after the output of the laser scanner
• The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open motor (M4) drive signal.
circuit).
• The laser scanner motor (M4) is faulty. • The lock signal (FM14LCK) is detected
• The DC controller PCB is faulty for 5 sec or more while the laser scanner
E111 • The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open fan (FM14) is being driven.
circuit).
• The laser driver cooling fan (FM5) is • The lock signal (FM5LCK) is detected
faulty. for 5 sec or more while the laser driver
E121 • The DC controller PCB is faulty. cooling fan (FM5) is being driven.
• The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open
circuit).
• The scanner motor (M5) is faulty. • The scanner home position is not
(E202) • The scanner home position sensor (PS1) detected within a specific period of time
No code. Keys
disabled. is faulty. when the power switch or the Copy Start
(Note 2) • The DC controller PCB is faulty. key is pressed.
• The scanner motor (M5) is faulty. • No image signal is detected while the
• The image leading edge sensor (PS3) is scanner is moving forward in fixed
(E204) faulty. reading mode or when the home position
No code. Keys • The DC controller PCB is faulty. is being detected.
disabled.
(Note 2) • No image signal arrives from the ADF
while in stream reading mode.
• The fluorescent lamp heater inside • The temperature around the fluorescent
thermistor is faulty. lamp does not exceed 10°C 2 sec after
• The light intensity control PCB is faulty. the fluorescent lamp heater has turned on
E211 • The DC controller PCB is faulty. at power-on.
• The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open • The temperature around the fluorescent
circuit). lamp is 0°C or less at power-on.
• The fluorescent lamp heater inside • The temperature around the fluorescent
thermistor is faulty. amp is 170°C or more when the
• The light intensity control PCB is faulty. fluorescent lamp is off.
E215 • The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open
circuit).

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-253
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Code Cause Description


• The fluorescent lamp is mounted • The absence of the fluorescent lamp is
E218 wrongly. detected at power-on.
• The fluorescent lamp is faulty. • The temperature around the fluorescent
E219 • The fluorescent lamp heater inside lamp is 170°C or more while the
thermistor is faulty. fluorescent lamp is on.
• The fluorescent lamp is faulty. • The light intensity does not reach a
• The light intensity sensor is faulty. specific level within 10 sec after the
• The intensity control PCB is faulty. fluorescent lamp has been turned on.
• The inverter PCB is faulty. • The activation detection signal (FL-
E220 • The DC controller PCB is faulty. DTCT) arrives within 5 sec after the
fluorescent lamp has been turned off.
• The activation detection signal (FL-
DTCT) does not arrive within 60 se after
the fluorescent lamp has been turned on
during shading adjustment.
• The fluorescent lamp is faulty. • The light intensity does not reach a
• The light intensity control PCB is faulty. specific level within 10 sec after the
• The DC controller PCB is faulty. fluorescent lamp has been turned on.
• The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open (However, within 60 sec if the room
circuit). temperature is 10°C or less.)
• The activation signal is not turned off 5
E222 sec after the fluorescent lamp has been
turned off.
• The activation signal does not arrive with
60 sec after the fluorescent lamp has
been turned on during shading
adjustment.
• The scanner cooling fan (FM3) is faulty. • The lock signal (FM3LCK) is detected
• The DC controller PCB is faulty. for 5 sec or more while the scanner
E226 • The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open cooling fan (FM3) is being driven.
circuit).
• The DC controller PCB is faulty. • An error in communication occurs in the
E240 microprocessor on the DC controller
PCB.
• The image processor PCB is faulty. • The orientation of the original is not
• The original orientation detection PCB identified when the second or subsequent
is faulty. original must be read.
E241 • The orientation of the last original is not
detected 5 sec or more after the last
original has been read.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty. • A communication error has occurred
• The control panel PCB is faulty. between the microprocessor on the DC
E243 controller PCB and the microprocessor
on the control panel PCB.
• The inverter cooling fan (FM9) is faulty. • The lock detection signal (FM9LCK) is
• The DC controller PCB is faulty. generated 5 sec or more while the
E251 • The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open inverter cooling fan (FM9) is being
circuit). driven.

13-254 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Code Cause Description


• The CCD PCB is faulty. • The shading end signal from the CCD
• The image processor PCB is faulty. PCB does not reach the image processor
E302 • The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open PCB during shading operation.
circuit).
• The CCD PCB is faulty. • The image read end signal from the CCD
• The image processor PCB is faulty. PCB does not reach the image processor
E320 • The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open PCB within 60 sec during image reading
circuit). operation.
• The image processor PCB is faulty. • The MFC PCB has detected an error in
• The MFC PCB is faulty. control data during image transfer
• The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open between the MFC PCB and the image
E601 circuit). server.
• The image server (hard disk) is faulty. • The image processor PCB has detected an
error in image transfer between the MFC
PCB and the image processor PCB.
• The image processor PCB is faulty. • An error has been detected in the image
• The MFC PCB is faulty. data when the image processor PCB
E602 • The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open writes to or reads from the image server.
circuit).
• The image server (hard disk) is faulty.
• A printer board (accessory) is faulty. • An error has occurred in the
E677 • The MFC PCB is faulty. communication between a printer board
• The system motherboard is faulty. (accessory) and the MFC PCB.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty. • The IPC (IC12) on the DC controller
E710 • The ADF controller PCB is faulty. PCB cannot be initialized at power-on.
• The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty. • The IPC (IC12) on the DC controller
E711 • The ADF controller PCB is faulty. PCB is out of order at power-on.
• The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
• The ADF controller PCB is faulty. • The communication control IC on the
• The connector has poor contact. ADF controller PCB is out of order.
E712 • The 24-V power supply is faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The finisher controller PCB is faulty. • The communication control IC on the
• The connector has poor contact. finisher controller PCB is out of order.
E713 • The 24-V power supply is faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The Copy Data Controller-A1 or the • The PC of the Copy Data Controller-A1
E717 Remoto Diagnostic Device II is faulty. or the Remoto Diagnostic Device II is
• The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open out of order.
circuit).

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-255
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Code Cause Description


• The auto power-off circuit has an open • The auto power-off circuit has an open
circuit. circuit.
E800 • The DC controller PCB is faulty. • The auto power-off signal has been
detected twice or more within 2 sec.
• The power supply cooling fan (1/2) is • The lock signal (FM1LCK, FM2LCK) is
faulty. detected for 5 sec or more while the
E804 • The DC controller PCB is faulty. power supply cooling fan (1/2) is being
• The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open driven.
circuit).
• The fixing assembly heat discharge fan • The lock signal (FM2LCK) has been
(FM2) is faulty. detected 5 sec or more while the fixing
E805 • The DC controller PCB is faulty. assembly heat discharge fan (FM2) is
• The wiring is faulty (shorting, open being driven.
circuit).
• The drum fan (FM8) is faulty. • The lock signal (FM8LCK) has been
• The DC controller PCB is faulty. detected for 5 sec or more while the
E820 • The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open drum fan (FM8) is being driven.
circuit).
• The pre-transfer charging assembly fan • The lock signal (FM10LCK) is detected
(FM10) is faulty. for 5 sec or more while the pre-transfer
E823 • The DC controller PCB is faulty. charging assembly fan (FM10) is being
• The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open driven.
circuit).
• The primary charging fan (FM1) is • The lock signal (FM1LCK) is detected
faulty. for 5 sec or more while the primary
E824 • The DC controller PCB is faulty. charging assembly fan (FM1) is being
• The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open driven.
circuit).
• The separation fan (FM13) is faulty. • The lock signal (FM13LCK) is detected
• The DC controller PCB is faulty. for 5 sec or more while the separation
E830 • The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open fan (FM13) is being driven.
circuit).

13-256 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Notes:
1. When the self diagnostic mechanism has turned on, you can reset the copier by turning on
its power switch once. This, however, is not true of E000, E001, E002, E003, E004, E005,
E013, or E020. (Otherwise, the user could reset the copier while a thermistor may have an
open circuit, causing the fixing roller to suffer thermal damage or toner inside the hopper
to overflow.)
If the error is E000 through E003, the power switch will turn off automatically in about 20
sec if you turn it on without resetting. In the case of E004, on the other hand, the power
switch will turn off in about 5 sec after E000 is indicated if you turn on the power switch
without resetting.
You will have to initialize the RAM on the DC controller PCB if E000, E001, E002, E003,
E004, E005, E013, or E020 is indicated.
Resetting the Copier
1) Execute COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR in service mode.
2) Press the Reset key twice to return to the Copy Mode screen.
3) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
2. For E202, and E204, you can check codes in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>
ERR).
In the case of E202 or E204, the control panel will show the following:

Please wait a moment. Glows orange

Copying Error Copying Error Data Error Data Error


COPY A COPY B MAIL BOX OPTIONS ON/OFF

Please wait a moment.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

ID 0 C

Each switch will be dimmed Glows red


(not accepting input).

Figure 13-901

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-257
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

B. ADF Self Diagnosis


Code Cause Description
• The communication cable between the • The communication between the machine
machine and the copier is faulty. and the copier is disrupted for 5 sec or
• The ADF controller PCB is faulty. more while the machine is in standby.
E400 • The communication between the machine
and the copier is disrupted for 0.5 sec or
more while the ADF is in operation.
• The belt motor (M2) is faulty. • No clock signal is generated for 100
• The belt motor clock sensor (PI1) is msec while the belt motor drive signal is
E402 faulty. being generated.
• The ADF controller PCB is faulty.
• The delivery motor (M5) is faulty. • No clock signal is generated for 200
• The delivery motor clock sensor (PI11) msec while the delivery motor drive
E404 is faulty. signal is being generated.
• The ADF controller PCB is faulty.
• The separation motor (M4) is faulty. • No lock signal is generated for 200 msec
• The separation motor clock sensor (PI2) while the separation motor drive signal is
E405 is faulty. being generated.
• The ADF controller PCB is faulty.
• The pickup motor (M3) is faulty. • The pickup roller height sensor 1 (PI8)
• The pickup roller height sensor 1 (PI8) or 2 (PI9) does not generate a signal
is faulty. within 2 sec after the pickup motor has
• The pickup roller height sensor 2 (PI9) been driven.
E410 is faulty. • The pickup roller home position sensor
• The pickup roller home position sensor (PI7) does not generate a signal within 2
(PI7) is faulty. sec after the pickup motor has been
• The ADF controller PCB is faulty. driven.
• The back-up data cannot be read, or the • The back-up data cannot be read (twice)
E420 data which has been read has an error. when the copier is turned on, or the data
which has been read contains an error.

Caution:
If the self-diagnosis mechanism has turned on, you can reset the copier by turning off the
power switch once.
You may continue to make copies when the ADF is out of order: disconnect the lattice con-
nector on the ADF side, open the ADF, and place an original on the copyboard glass.

13-258 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

C. Finisher Self Diagnosis


Code Cause Description
• The data communication has an error. • The communication between the copier
and the machine has been interrupted and,
in addition, is not corrected after 5 sec
E500 during which re-transmission was tried.
• After the above condition, a recovery
attempt has been tried three times in 5
sec.
• The communication between the master
CPU (IC101) and the slave CPU (IC121)
E501 has been disrupted.
E505 • The backup RAM (EEPROM) is faulty. • The check sum has an error at power-on.
• The inlet motor (M1) is faulty. • The clock pulses from the inlet motor are
E510 50 mm/sec or less for 1 sec or more
while the motor is in operation.
• The stack delivery motor (M7) is faulty. • The clock pulses from the stack delivery
• The stack delivery motor clock sensor motor clock sensor are 50 mm/sec or less
E514 (PI12) is faulty. for 1 sec or more while the motor is in
operation.
• The front jogging plate motor (M4) is • The front jogging plate does not leave
faulty. the front jogging plate home position
• The front jogging plate home position sensor when the front jogging plate
E537 sensor (PI7) is faulty. motor has been driven for 4 sec.
• The front jogging plate does not return to
the front jogging plate home position
sensor after the front jogging plate motor
has been driven for 4 sec.
• The rear jogging plate motor (M5) is • The rear jogging plate does not leave the
faulty. rear jogging plate home position sensor
• The rear jogging plate home position when the rear jogging plate motor has
sensor (PI9) is faulty. been driven for 4 sec.
E530 • The rear jogging plate does not return to
the rear jogging plate home position
sensor after the rear jogging plate motor
has been driven for 4 sec.
• The stapler motor (M11) is faulty. • The stapler does not leave the stapler
• The stapler home position detecting home position after the stapler motor has
sensor (PI9) is faulty. been driven for 0.5 sec.
• The swing guide safety switch (MSW2) • The stapler does not return to the stapler
E531 is faulty home position when the stapler motor
• The stapler safety switch (front; MSW8) has been driven for 0.5 sec.
is faulty.
• The stapler safety switch (rear; MSW9)
is faulty.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 13-259
CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING

Code Cause Description


• The stapler shift motor (M10) is faulty. • The stapler shift home position sensor
• The stapler shift home position sensor does not turn off when the stapler shift
(PI7) is faulty. motor has been driven for 4 sec.
• The swing guide safety switch (MSW2) • The stapler shift home position is not
E532 is faulty detected when the stapler shift motor has
• The stapler safety switch (front; been driven for 4 sec.
MSW8) is faulty.
• The stapler safety switch (rear; MSW9)
is faulty.
• The swing motor (M8) is faulty. • The swing guide closed sensor does not
• The swing guide open sensor (PI16) is detect the swing guide when the swing
faulty. motor has been driven for 2 sec. (detail
code FF)
E535
• The swing motor (M8) is faulty. • The swing guide closed sensor does not
• The swing guide closed sensor (P15) is detect the swing guide when the swing
faulty. motor has been driven for 2 sec. (detail
code 01)
• The tray B lift motor (M12) is faulty. • The lifter operation does not end within
• The tray B lock sensor (PI23) is faulty. 25 sec after the tray lift motor has been
• The tray B lower limit sensor (PI24) is driven.
faulty. • The clock pulses from the tray idle
E542 • The tray B upper position sensor (PI20) rotation sensor are absent for 250 msec
is faulty. or more while the motor is rotating.
• The tray lower position sensor (PI21) is • The input from the tray B upper position
faulty. sensor (PI20) is '0' at power-on (i.e., the
tray B is above the tray paper sensor
PCB).
E551 • The power supply fan (FM1) is faulty. • The power supply fan is at rest for 2 sec.
• The paddle motor (M9) is faulty. • The paddle home position sensor does
E577 • The paddle home position sensor (PI14) not detect the paddle for 5 sec after the
is faulty. motor has been started.
• The tray auxiliary plate motor (M6) is • The tray auxiliary plate retraction sensor
faulty. does not turn on within 2 sec after the
E583 • The tray auxiliary plate retraction motor has been started when the tray
sensor (PI11) is faulty. auxiliary plate is being retracted.

n Resetting the Machine


• If the copier is making copies,
[1] The copier indicates an error code and the message "Turn On the Power Once Again."
[2] After the jam reset mechanism has been activated, the copier runs a self check: if the result is
good, the machine is reset; if not good, the machine enters down state* (indicated on the
copier's control panel as "E5XX").
• If the copier is not making copies,
[1] The copier indicates an error code and the message "Turn On the Power Once Again."
[2] When the power has been turned off and then on, the copier runs a self check: if the result is
good, the machine is reset; if not good, the machine enters down state* (indicated on the
copier's control panel as "E5XX").
*State in which "E" is indicated.

13-260 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
APPENDIX

A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ....... A-1 D. SPECIAL TOOLS TABLE ........ A-17
B. LIST OF SIGNALS/ E. SOLVENTS/OILS ..................... A-19
ABBREVIATIONS ...................... A-3
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
................................................... A-9

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A . GENERAL TIMING CHART

A4, 2 Originals, Single-Sided Copy


Setting original in ADF
Copy Start key ON
Picking up 1st sheet
Picking up 2nd sheet /Forming 1st sheet image
Forming 2nd sheet image

Scanner home
position sensor (PS1)
Image leading edge sensor
(PS3)

Scanning lamp (FL1)

Laser scanner motor (M4)

Laser

Scanner motor (M5)

Pre-exposure lamp

Primary charging

Grid bias

Developing bias (DC)

Developing bias (AC)

Pre-transfer charging (DC)

Pre-transfer charging (AC)

Transfer charging

Separation charging

Fixing main heater (H1)

Fixing sub heater (H2)

Pickup motor (M2)


Right deck pickup clutch
(CL10)
Right deck pickup solenoid
(SL7)
Right deck paper sensor
(PS22)
Vertical path 1 paper sensor
(PS47)
Registration paper sensor
(PS5)
Internal delivery sensor
(PS9)
External delivery sensor
(PS10)
Delivery speed
switching clutch (CL21)
Fixing inlet guide solenoid
(SL1)
Registration brake clutch
(CL3)

Developing clutch (CL4)

Registration clutch (CL2)

Pre-registration clutch (CL5)


Pre-registration brake clutch
(CL 6)

Vertical path 1 clutch (CL8)

Drum motor (M0)

Main motor (M1)

Fixing motor (M3)


Delivery flapper solenoid
(SL3)

Fixing web solenoid (SL2)


Reversing flapper solenoid
(SL11)
Duplexing reversal motor
(M11)
Duplexing feeder motor
(M12)
Horizontal registration motor
(M15)
Duplexing reversal sensor
(PS12)
Lower feeding middle clutch
(CL16)
Lower feeding right clutch
(CL17)

Total copy counter (CNT1)

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-1
A4, 4 Originals, Double-Sided Copy
Setting original in ADF
Copy Start key ON Copying on 2nd sheet back

Picking 1st sheet Picking up 2nd sheet Copying on 1st sheet face Copying on 2nd sheet face Copying on 1st sheet back

Scanner home
position sensor (PS1)
Image leading edge sensor
(PS3)

Scanning lamp (FL1)

Laser scanner motor (M4)

Laser

Scanner motor (M5)

Pre-exposure lamp

Primary charging

Grid bias

Developing bias (DC)

Developing bias (AC)

Pre-transfer charging (DC)

Pre-transfer charging (AC)

Transfer charging

Separation charging

Fixing main heater (H1)

Fixing sub heater (H2)

Pickup motor (M2)


Right deck pickup clutch
(CL10)
Right deck pickup solenoid
(SL7)
Right deck paper sensor
(PS22)
Vertical path 1 paper sensor
(PS47)
Registration paper sensor
(PS5)
Internal delivery sensor
(PS9)
External delivery sensor
(PS10)
Delivery speed
switching clutch (CL21)
Fixing inlet guide solenoid
(SL1)
Registration brake clutch
(CL3)

Developing clutch (CL4)

Registration clutch (CL2)

Pre-registration clutch (CL5)


Pre-registration brake clutch
(CL 6)

Vertical path 1 clutch (CL8)

Drum motor (M0)

Main motor (M1)

Fixing motor (M3)


Delivery flapper solenoid
(SL3)

Fixing web solenoid (SL2)


Reversing flapper solenoid
(SL11)
Duplexing reversal motor
(M11)
Duplexing feeder motor
(M12)
Horizontal registration motor
(M15)
Duplexing reversal sensor
(PS12)
Lower feeding middle clutch
(CL16)
Lower feeding right clutch
(CL17)

Total copy counter (CNT1)

A-2 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
APPENDIX

B. LIST OF SIGNALS/ABBREVIATIONS
The following is a list of the signals and abbreviations used in this chapter and the circuit
diagrams.

Reference:
The abbreviations in parentheses are electrical signals, but are analog signals, which cannot
be expressed in terms of '1' or '0'. Others are digital signals, which may be expressed in terms
of '1' or '0'.

CL1-ON hopper inside magnet roll clutch drive command


CL2-ON registration roller clutch drive command
CL3-ON registration roller brake clutch drive command
CL4-ON developing clutch drive command
CL5-ON pre-registration roller clutch drive command
CL6-ON pre-registration roller brake clutch command
CL7-ON multifeeder pickup clutch drive command
CL8-ON vertical path 1 roller clutch drive command
CL9-ON vertical path 2 roller clutch drive command
CL10-ON deck (right) pickup clutch drive command
CL11-ON deck (left) pickup clutch drive command
CL12-ON cassette 3 pickup clutch drive command
CL13-ON vertical path 3 roller clutch drive command
CL14-ON cassette 4 pickup clutch drive command
CL15-ON vertical path 4 roller clutch drive command
CL16-ON lower feeding middle roller clutch drive command
CL17-ON lower feeding right roller clutch drive command
CL18-ON multifeeder feeding roller clutch drive command
CL19-ON deck (left) feeding roller drive command
CL21-ON delivery speed switching clutch drive command
CNT1D total copy counter drive command
CNT2D options counter drive command
CNT2-B0 count selection signal 0
CNT2-B1 count selection signal 1
CNT3D print counter drive command
DUPF-A duplexing feeder motor phase-A excitation signal
DUPF-B duplexing feeder motor phase-B excitation signal
DUPF-OFF duplexing feeder motor drive command

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-3
APPENDIX

DUPI-A duplexing reversal motor phase-A excitation signal


DUPI-B duplexing reversal motor phase-B excitation signal
DUPI-OFF duplexing reversal motor drive command
FL-GAIN scanning lamp light intensity correction signal
FL-REF scanning lamp light intensity reference signal
FL-TH fluorescent lamp heater temperature detection signal
FM1LCK primary charging assembly fan constant speed rotation detection signal
FM1-ON primary charging assembly fan drive command
FM2LCK fixing assembly heat discharge fan constant speed rotation detection signal
FM2-ON fixing assembly heat discharge fan drive command
FM3LCK scanner cooling fan constant speed rotation detection signal
FM3-ON scanner cooling fan drive command
FM4LCK stream reading fan constant speed rotation detection signal
FM4-ON stream reading fan drive command
FM5LCK laser driver cooling fan constant speed rotation detection signal
FM5-ON laser driver cooling fan drive command
FM6LCK de-curling fan constant speed rotation detection signal
FM6-ON de-curling fan drive command
FM7LCK feeding fan constant speed rotation detection signal
FM7-ON feeding fan drive command
FM8LCK drum fan constant speed rotation detection signal
FM8-ON drum fan drive command
FM9LCK inverter cooling fan constant speed rotation detection signal
FM9-ON inverter cooling fan drive command
FM10LCK pre-transfer charging assembly fan constant speed rotation detection signal
FM10-ON pre-transfer charging assembly fan drive command
FM11LCK power supply cooling fan 1 constant speed rotation detection signal
FM11-ON power supply cooling fan 1 drive command
FM12LCK power supply cooling fan 2 constant speed rotation detection signal
FM12-ON power supply cooling fan 2 drive command
FM13LCK separation fan contestant rotation detection signal
FM13-ON separation fan drive command
FM14LCK laser scanner fan constant speed rotation detection signal
FM14-ON laser scanner fan drive command
HEAT-ON fluorescent lamp heater drive command
MO-LCK drum motor constant speed rotation detection signal

A-4 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
APPENDIX

MO-ON drum motor drive command


M1-FG main motor rotation detection signal
M1-ON main motor drive command
M2-FG pickup motor rotation detection signal
M2-ON pickup motor drive command
M3LCK fixing motor constant speed rotation detection signal
M3-ON fixing motor drive command
M4F/H laser scanner motor high-speed rotation control signal
M4LCK laser scanner motor constant speed rotation detection signal
M4-ON laser scanner motor drive command
M6+ cartridge inside toner feeder motor power signal
M6- cartridge inside toner feeder motor power signal
M7FW pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor CW rotation control signal
M7RV pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor CCW rotation control signal
M8FW primary charging wire cleaning motor CW rotation control signal
M8RV primary charging wire cleaning motor CCW rotation control signal
M9FW transfer/separation charging wire cleaning motor CW rotation control signal
M9RV transfer/separation charging wire cleaning motor CCW rotation control signal
M13-ON deck (right) lifter motor drive command
M14-ON deck (left) lifter motor drive command
M16-ON cassette 3 lifter motor drive command
M17-ON cassette 4 lifter motor drive command
M18+ hopper inside toner feeder motor power signal
M18- hopper inside toner feeder motor power signal
MHDTC fixing main heater power detection signal
MH-ON fixing main heater drive command
MSW1S toner cartridge detection signal
MSW2S waste toner clogging detection signal
MSW3S pre-transfer charging wire cleaning home position detection signal
MSW4S primary charging wire cleaner home position detection signal
MSW5S multifeeder cover open/closed detection signal
MSW6S transfer/separation charging wire cleaner home position detection signal
MSW7S front cover open/closed detection signal
M-TEMP fixing main thermistor temperature detection signal
PEXP pre-expose lamp drive command
POT-ON drum potential control drive command

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-5
APPENDIX

POT-SG drum potential signal


PS1S scanner home position detection signal
PS3S image leading edge detection signal
PS4S copyboard cover open/closed detection signal
PS5S registration roller paper detection signal
PS6S fixing claw jam detection signal
PS7S fixing cleaning belt length detection signal
PS8S fixing cleaning belt length warning detection signal
PS9S internal delivery assembly paper detection signal
PS10S external delivery assembly paper detection signal
PS11S fixing/feeding unit outlet paper detection signal
PS12S duplexing reversal paper detecting signal
PS13S U-turn paper detection signal
PS14S pre-confluence paper detection signal
PS15S post-confluence paper detection signal
PS16S reversal paper detection signal
PS17S multifeeder paper detection signal
PS18S horizontal registration paper detection signal
PS19S waste toner case full detection signal
PS20S deck (right) pickup detection signal
PS21S deck (right) lifter detection signal
PS22S deck (right) paper detection signal
PS23S deck (right) open/closed detection signal
PS24S deck (right) limit detection signal
PS25S deck (left) pickup detection signal
PS26S deck (left) feeding paper detection signal
PS27S deck (right) feeding paper detection signal
PS28S fixing/feeding unit releasing lever detection signal
PS31S deck (left) lifter detection signal
PS32S deck (left) paper detection signal
PS33S deck (left) open/closed detection signal
PS34S deck (left) limit detection signal
PS35S manual feed paper detection signal
PS37S cassette 3 pickup detection signal
PS38S cassette 3 lifter detection signal
PS39S cassette 3 paper detection signal

A-6 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
APPENDIX

PS40S cassette 3 open/closed detection signal


PS41S vertical path 3 roller paper detection signal
PS42S cassette 4 pickup detection signal
PS43S cassette 4 lifter detection signal
PS44S cassette 4 paper detection signal
PS45S cassette 4 open/closed detection signal
PS46S vertical path 4 roller paper detection signal
PS47S vertical path 1 roller paper detection signal
PS48S lower right cover open/closed detection signal
PS49S vertical path 2 roller paper detection signal
PS51S deck (right) paper level medium detection signal
PS52S deck (right) paper level upper detection signal
PS54S deck (left) paper level medium detection signal
PS55S deck (left) paper level upper detection signal
PS56S multifeeder cover open/closed detection signal
PS57S copyboard glass detection signal
PS58S upper right cover open/closed detection signal
PS59S toner cartridge cover open/closed detection signal
SHDTC fixing sub heater power detection signal
SH-ON fixing sub heater drive signal
SHUT_OFF main power switch OFF signal
SIZE1 original size detection signal 1
SIZE2 original size detection signal 2
SIZE3 original size detection signal 3
SIZE4 original size detection signal 4
SL1-ON fixing inlet guide solenoid drive command
SL2-ON fixing cleaning belt solenoid drive command
SL3-ON delivery flapper solenoid drive command
SL4-ON fixing/feeding unit locking solenoid drive command
SL6-ON multifeeder pickup latch solenoid drive command
SL7-ON deck (right) pickup solenoid drive command
SL8-ON deck (left) pickup solenoid drive command
SL9-ON cassette 3 pickup solenoid drive command
SL10-ON cassette 4 pickup solenoid drive command
SL11-ON reversing flapper solenoid drive command
SREGI-A horizontal registration motor phase-A excitation signal

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-7
APPENDIX

SREGI-B horizontal registration motor phase-B excitation signal


SREGI-HOLD horizontal registration motor position retention signal
S-TEMP fixing sub thermistor temperature detection signal
SV1-0 cassette 3 paper length detection signal 0
SV1-1 cassette 3 paper length detection signal 1
SV2-0 cassette 4 paper length detection signal 0
SV2-1 cassette 4 paper length detection signal 1
SVR1 multifeeder paper width detection signal
SVR2 cassette 3 paper width detection signal
SVR3 cassette 4 paper width detection signal
TS1S hopper inside toner detection signal
TS2S hopper inside toner lower limit detection signal
TS3S developing assembly inside toner detection signal

A-8 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

General Circuit Diagram (1/7)


Drum heater switch
SW3

5
4 6 J25F J25M J8M J8F
OUTLET2 1 3 1 1 1 1

Power supply for finisher 2 2 2 2

2
120/220-V model
3 3 3 3 Front cover
4 4
switch 1 2 3 4 J9
SW2

MT6 1 2

FT53 3 4
FT51 J29F
1 5 6
24VU
2
From relay PCB FT41 FT42
0V
FT1 FT3 FT5 FL6 FT7 FT8 FT13 FT14 FT15 FT16
LF1 J21F
1 3
FT52 From relay PCB 1
FT54 ( FROM J1723)
2
RL2

Power AC relay 2
ELCB COB3 COB1
plug FT4 AC POWER UNIT2 1 2 J10M

2 4 RL1 100V:J2601-1
1 2 J10F To DC From
FT17 FT18 FT19 FT20
AC relay 120V:J2601-1 controller relay PCB
FT2 FT9 FT10 FT11 FT12 J26F J26M J11M J11F 230V:J2601-3 (J206) (J1722)
FT43 6 8 FT46
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 J2605 J2604
2 4 1 2 3 4 5 J2601
FT44 FT47

0 1

FT45
24VU
FT48 Heater driver PCB
0V
J22F
From relay PCB 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 J2602
2
FT21 FT22 FT23 FT24 (J1723)

COB2

FT29 FT30 FT31

7 8 6
FT25 FT26 FT27 FT28

SSR1
J12F 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 J13F

J4F 1 2 3 4 AC POWER UNIT1 1 2 3 4 J27F J12M 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 J13M

J4M 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 J27M J154


From DC controller

From DC controller
1 2 J20M
1 2 3 4 J5M
3 2 1 1 2 3
1 2 J20F
J14F J16F
1 2 3 4 J5F 1 2 3 J18F
J14M 3 2 1 J16M 1 2 3
1 2 3 J18M
J28F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 J17F
J28M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 J6F 1 2 3 4 J17M
1 2 3 J19F
J24L 2 1 1 2 3 4 J6M
FT39 FT41
1 2 3 J19M
SHUT-OFF-SW

J15F MT5
24V

FT40 FT42
J15M
4 3 2 1
SOL2 SOL1
Power supply for
paper deck heater
Drum heater

H4
FT32 FT34 control PCB
J701 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FT33 FT35 FT36
J7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Main heater

Thermal
Sub heater

T P

1 2 switch FT37

HEATER
DC power
3 4 Cassette heater
supply PCB FT38

TH
H2

H1

(standard with 100-V model)


5 6 H3
Drum heater
SW1
Main Switch Fixing unit

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-9
General Circuit Diagram (2/7) Image processor
Fluorescent Laser scanner
Light adjustment PCB Laser driver motor driver
lamp inverter Scanner motor
control PCB

GND(3.3V)

GND(3.3V)
CCD PCB driver PCB PCB 1 PCB MFC PCB

GND(5V)
PCB

3.3V-FA
Control panel

12V-FA
5V-FA
24VU

38VU

38VU

38VU

38VU
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
-12V
3.3V

3.3V

3.3V
N.C.

N.C.
15V

12V

12V
-8V

-8V
5V
0V

8V

5V

5V

5V

5V

8V

5V
J1307 1 2 J1501 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J851 1 2 3 4 J1001 1 2 J801 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J1101 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1301 1 2 3 4 5 6 J761 1 2 3 J1451 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1452 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

DC controller PCB

24VU
GND

GND

GND
12V
5V
J32M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J501 1 2 3 4 5 6

J32F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

N.C.
J31F 1 2 J38M 1 2 3 4 5 6 J39M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2
(to ADF)
J31M 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J23F J38F J39F
J33M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 N.C.

J33F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J34M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 J37M 1 2

1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 J37F
J34F

To DC controller

AWG22 1007
AWG22 1007

TO J505-B14
TO J505-B13
TO J505-B12
TO J505-B11
TO J505-B10
TO J505-B9
TO J505-B8
TO J505-B7

N.C.
J1711 1 2 3 J1712 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J1713 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 J1714 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 J1715 1 2 3 J1716 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 J1719 J1718 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

GND(+8V)
GND(15V)

GND(24VU)

GND(24VU)

GND(38VU)

GND(38VU)

GND(38VU)

GND(24VU)
GND(5V)

GND(8V)

GND(5V)

GND(5V)

GND(5V)

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

A-REMOTE
GND(3.3V)

GND(12V)

GND(38VU)

GND(18V)

GND(12V)
GND(5V)

GND(5V)
GND(-8V)

GND(-8V)
GND(3.3V)

18V
12V-FA
5V-FA

GND(5V-FA)

GND(5V-FA)
24ERR
38ERR
15V

12V
8V

5V

5V
N.C.

3.3V

3.3V-FA

24VU
5V

5V

5V

8V

-8V

3.3V
24VU

24VU

38VU

38VU

38VU

12V
5V
-8V
3.3V

38VU
12V

5V

5V-FA
N.C.
-12V

Relay PCB

GND(24V38V)
DOOR OPEN

GND(38V-1L)

GND(38V-IL)

GND(38V-IL)
GND(38VIL)
GND(38VU)

GND(24VU)
GND(24VU)
GND(24VU)

GND(24VU)

GND(24VU)

GND(24VH)
GND(24VH)

GND(24VH)

GND(24VU)
GND(24VU)
GND(-8VU)
GND(3.3V)

GND(+8V)
GND(12V)

GND(15V)
24V_OCP
RMT_ON

GND(5V)
GND(5V)

GND(5V)
5V_OCP

24VRLY
24V_RL

38V-IL

38V-IL

38V-IL

38V-IL
38VU

24VU
24VU
24VU

24VU

24VU
38VU

24VH
24VH

24VH

24VU
24VU
GND

3.3V
N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.
+8V
12V

15V
-8V

5V
5V

5V
J1701 1 2 3 4 5 J1702 1 2 3 J1703 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1704 1 2 3 4 J1705 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1706 1 2 3 4 J1723 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J1717 1 2 J1721 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 J1720 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1722 1 2 3 4

TO J180D-2
TO J180D-1 To fixing motor(M3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 J41M

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 J41F 1 2 3 4 5 6
To side J45M
1 GND(24V38V)
J40M

paper deck 2 24VU


J40F 1 2 3 4 5 6

(J152) 3 38VU

J46F 1 2
4

1 2
J46M
J29M 1 2

To heater
driver PCB

J322D-1
J322D-2
J322D-3
J322D-4
J43F J43M J42M J42F
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 J322D 1 2 3 4 J2604 1 2 3

(to duplexing

GND(24VU)
J721 1 2 3 4 J601 1 2 J621 1 2 J611 1 2

24VU
assembly)
GND
GND
24VH
24VH

J48
Drum motor Pickup motor Main motor
(M0) (M2) (M1)
To finisher HV-DC PCB Heater driver PCB

J22M
1
To AC relay(RL1)
2
1
2
3
4
5

1
2
3

1
2
3
4
5

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4
5

1
2
3
4
6

(J1701) (J1702) (J1703) (J1704) (J1705) (J1706)


J21M MSW5
1
To front cover Manual feed cover open/closed
DC power supply PCB 2
switch(SW2) detecting switch
1 2 3

J47

A-10 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
General Circuit Diagram (3/7)
Original size
sensor 2
Laser scanner motor No. 1 Mirror
SIZE2
Original size M4 12 1 From relay PCB
11 2
M
sensor 1 10 3 J852 J851 Copyboard glass sensor
From relay PCB 3 3 FL-TH 9 4 FL-TH 6
J764 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 · 2 2 GND
38V
8 5 GND
38V
5 Light PS57
SIZE1 1 1 7 6 4

J166H J166F
6 7
GND
FL-S
3 intensity J159 1 2 3
Scanner motor

OUT-C
5

OUT-B
OUT-A
8 2
24V control PCB

GND
4 9 1

VCC

HC+
HA+
HB+

N.C.
J120L 3 2 1

HC-

38V
HA-
HB-
M5
MT16 J166H 3

0V
J120H MT14 10 1 2 3 4 5 J853
2 11
J120D 1 2 3 1
FL1 12 M

GLS-DT
J763 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 J761 J163 J162
Options counter MT15 MT13

5V

0V
3 2 1 J119L

D(GN)
C(OR)
E(BK)
Laser scanner driver PCB

A(BL)
J119H GND

B(R)
CNT2 1 1 1

CNT
1 2 3 J119D Light intensity 2
3
FL-S
24V
2
3
2
3 From relay PCB
J762 1 2 3 4
sensor PCB 4 J801
Printer Total copy Laser driver cooling fan 5
J164H J164F
From relay PCB
3 2 1 J804 5 4 3 2 1 J803
J165
counter counter FM5 J1003 1 2 3 4 5

CNT3 CNT1
J63 2 1
Control J1001 Scanner motor driver PCB
CNT CNT
Options panel Fixing Fluorescent lamp
J63 2 1 counter 6 5 4 3 2 1 J118L
power assembly inverter PCB J802 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

J118H
PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6
J118D switch J116L 4 3 2 1
fan 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J1002
J116H J113L
J65 1 2 3 4 5
SW4 J116D 1 2 3 4 FM2 J113H Power supply To finisher J152A
1 2 3 J113D cooling fan 1 J152C J152B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FM11

FIN-RxD
FT51 FT50 FT49

FIN-TxD
6 5 4 3 2 1

<24VU>
J117L
Power supply N.C. N.C.

<0VU>
J117H J115 1 2 3

24VU
SSR1
1 2 3 4 5 6
J117D Control panel cooling fan 2

0V
0V
From

2
J48H
CPU PCB FM12 1 2 3 J156 J154 5 4 3 2 1
J158LA
relay

1
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J158LB 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5
J121L J1008 PCB

J48L
J158H
1
J121H
2 3 4
3 2 1 J114L
Relay PCB J157 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
J158DB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
J121D J158DA
J114H

OPT-CDWN2
OPT-CDWN1
OPT-CDWN0
1 2 3 J114D J1719 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OPT-HOFF
PRH-PWM
5 4 3 2 1

OPT-CCW
J148L

HEAT-ON
FLCOMP

OPT-CW
FL-PWM

PRH-ON

FL-GAIN
J148H

OPT-D3
OPT-D2
OPT-D1
OPT-D0
No USE
FL-ERR
FL-CLK
J151L 5 4 3 2 1

FL-ON

FL-TH
1 2 3 4 5
J148D J151H

0V

0V

0V

0V
13 N.C.
J151D 1 2 3 4 5
6 5 4 3 2 1 J155L 6 5 4 3 2 1 J153L
J155H J153H
Heater driver
CC5-CONNECT

13
12
11
10

12
11
10
9
8

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 J155D 1 2 3 4 5 6
J153D
PCB

A-REMOTE

FM12LCK

FM11LCK
CC5-CNT

FM12-ON

FM11-ON
CNT2-B1
CNT2-B0

SIZE-ON

SIZE-ON

FM2LCK

FM5LCK
FM2-ON

FM5-ON
1 2 3

FIN-Rx0
MHDTC

FIN-Tx0
SHDTC

MH-ON
CNT1D
CNT3D

CNT2D

M4LCK
5VRTN

M4-ON

24ERR
38ERR

SH-ON
M4F/H
5V-FA

5V-FA
SIZE2

SIZE1

24VU
24V

24V

24V

18V

24V
0V

5V

5V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V
15
14
13
12

11
10

15
14
13
12
11

10

14
13
12
11
10

14
13
12
11
10
9
8

6
5
4
3
2
1

9
8

9
8

8
7

6
5
4

3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1

7
6

5
4
3
2
1
B15 A15 B14 A14 B13 A13

J503
J502 DC controller PCB J505
J504
J506
A17 B17 A19 B19
10

11
12
13
14
N.C. 15
N.C. 16
N.C. 17

10
11
12
13
14
15

16
17

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
N.C. 19

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1
2
3

4
5
6

7
8

1
2
3

4
5
6

7
8
9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
2
3
4
5
6

7
8
9
FM10LCK

FM14LCK
FM10-ON

FM14-ON
POF-SIG

SIZE-ON

SIZE-ON
FM4LCK

FM3LCK

FM1LCK
POF-ON
FM4-ON

FM3-ON

FM1-ON
MSW4S

MSW7S

MSW3S

CL1-ON
PTR1N
PTR2N
PS56S

PS58S

PS47S
M8FW

M7FW
RCPN
RDPN
M8RV

M7RV

SIZE3

SIZE4
CLSN

PEXP

M18+
24VU

TS1S

TS2S

24VU

TS3S

M18-
N.C.
0V

5V

0V

0V

0V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V
0V

0V

0V
0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

5V

5V

5V

0V
5V

0V

5V

0V
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J124D 6 5 4 3 2 1 J135D
J124H J135H
J104D 2 1 J144D 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6
J124L J135L
J104H J144H 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J131D J138D 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J104L 1 2 J3 4 3 2 1 J144L 1 2 3 J131H J138H
J101D 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
J131L J138L
J101H
J101L 1 2 3
J106H
2 1 J106D Potential control 2
J111H
1 J111D

1 2 J106L PCB 1 2 J111L


J103D 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 J129D 2 1
J103H J2 J1
1 2 3 J129H
J103L 1 2
J129L J132 3 2 1
J110
2
1
3
4
6
5

J105D 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1
3 2 1 4 3 2 1 J126D
J102 J105H J146D J126H
3 2 1 J134
1 2 6 J108D
1
J146H
2 3 4
Card reader 2 1
1 2 J126L FM3
PS56 J105L J146L J125D J143D
FM4 J108H (accessory) 1 2 3 J112 J125H J136D 3 2 1 3 2 1 J137D J139D 3 2 1 J140D 3 2 1 J141D 2 1 3 2 1 J142D 2 1

Multifeeder J125L 1 2 Scanner FM14


J136H J137H J139H J140H J141H J142H J143H
Stream 6 J108L J136L 1 2 3 1 2 3 J137L J139L 1 2 3 J140L 1 2 3 J141L 1 2 1 2 3 J142L 1 2 J143L
cover M J145 3 2 1 coolingfan Laser
reading J147 3 2 1 MSW7 J128D 3 2 1
2 1
open/closed J130D scanner
2

6
1
3
4
5

J128H
fan 1 2 3 J107
PS47
Front cover open/closed 1 2 3
J130H 3 2 1
sensor M8 PS58
Vertical path 1
J128L 1 2 J130L
J133 fan
Primary charging J109 1 2 3 4 5
detecting switch LED1
Upper paper sensor
wire cleaning motor MSW4 Potential sensor right cover Pre-exposure lamp FM1
FM10 SIZE3 SIZE4 TS1 TS2 CL TS3 M
Primary charging open/closed sensor Pre-transfer Primary charging
CL1 M18
wire cleaner charging M assembly fan Original Original Hopper Hopper Developing
HP detecting switch assembly fan size size inside inside toner assembly Hopper
M7
1 2 J127 sensor 3 sensor 4 toner sensor lower limit inside toner inside
Pre-transfer charging wire sensor toner
cleaning motor sensor Hopper
cleaning
MSW3 inside magnet
motor
Pre-transfer cleaner HP roller drive
detecting switch clutch

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-11
General Circuit Diagram (4/7)

Transfer charging assembly


Developing cylinder

Drum separation
Dust-collecting roller
Transfer guide
Transfer/separation charging wire cleaner

Pre-transfer

Fixing roller
Separation
home position detecting switch

Primary charging
assembly

assembly
Transfer/

charging

charging
MSW6
separation Registration clutch

claw
charging wire CL2 Multifeeder pickup Manual feed tray

assembly
cleaning motor Separation fan Feeding fan
FM13 FM7 CL Registration latch solenoid paper width volume MT58 FT191 MT72
Registration Fixing/ paper sensor SL6
SVR1
MT55 MT54
10K 10K

S9

S8

S7
braking feeding unit J200L 2 1 PS5 SL
J200H
clutch locking J203L 3 2 1 3 2 1 J202L 2 1 L200D 1 2 1 2 3 J199
Manual feed MT57 FT190 FT175
J272M 4 3 2 1
MT53MT52 MT51 MT50 MT47 MT46 MT71
De-curling fan J203H J202H J201
J272F 4 3 2 1
solenoid J203D 1 2 3 1 2 3 J202D tray paper
FM6 Fixing/feeding CL3 M9 SL4
sensor 10K 10K HV block
S P
unit releasing CL M SL PS17 FT166 FT165
MT56
FT189 2 1
J271F
lever sensor 1 2 3 J226 J271M 2 1
PS28
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J198L 3 2 1 3 2 1
J198H J227H
J227L
J225H
J225L HV-AC transformer
J209L 3 2 1 1 2 3 J207L 2 1 J206L 2 1 3 2 1 J205L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J198D 1 2 3 J227D 1 2 3 J225D
J209H J208 J207H J206H J205H FT188 FT186 FT185 FT182 FT181 FT174
J209D 1 2 3 J207D 1 2 J206D 1 2 1 2 3 J205D FT187 HV connector
4 3 2 1 terminal mount
J742

J204L 4 3 2 1 HV-AC PCB

PS17S

SVR1
SL6R
J204H

SL6P
5 4 3 2 1 J741

24V
1 2 3 4

POST(DC)
5V

0V

5V

0V
J204D

FM13LCK

SEP(DC)
FM13-ON

HVAC-CTL
Manual feed sensor

HVAC-ON
FM6LCK

FM7LCK
FM6-ON

FM7-ON
CL3-ON

MSW6S

CL2-ON
PS28S

M9FW

24VP
M9RV

GND
GND
PS5S
SL4R
SL4P

PS35
From relay PCB
24V

24V

24V
0V

5V

0V

0V

0V

0V

5V

0V
1 2 3 J223
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 T701 T601 3 2 1
J721
J711 J734 J733 J732 J731

PS35S
13
12
11

10

13
12
11

10
9
8

5
4

3
2
1

9
8
7

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
HV-DC PCB 2

N.C.
N.C.
N.C.

5V

0V
1
J723 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 J737
J197L 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
J224L J222L
J224H J222H
4 B13 A13

PFEED_GUIDE_ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 J224D 1 2 3 J222D

FEED_GUIDE_CNTR

TRANSFER_CNTR
TRANSFER_ERR
POST_DC_CNTR
SEP_AMP_CNTR
SEP_AMP_CNTL

PRIMARY_CNTR
POST/SEP_ERR

HVDC_REMOTE
DEV_DC_CNTR
10
11
12
13

10
11
12
13

PRIMARY_ERR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

4 B13 A13

DEV_AC_ON

GRID_CNTR
FM13CLK

HVAC_ON
FM13-ON

J197D
FM6CLK

FM7LCK
FM6-ON

FM7-ON
CL3-ON

MSW6S

CL2-ON
PS28S

M9FW
M9RV

PS5S
SL4R
SL4P

N.C.
24V

24V

24V
0V

5V

0V

0V

0V

0V

5V

0V

OV
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4

3
2
1

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

1
13
12
11
10

13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

B13 A13 B16 A16

J510
DC controller PCB J508 J507
10 A20 B20 A10 B10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
3
0V 2
38V 1

4 A20 B20 J180D

M-TEMP

S-TEMP
CL2-ON

SL3-ON

SL2-ON
M3LCK
M3-ON
PS16S

PS10S

PS11S

SL11R
SL11P

10

10
PS9S

PS7S

PS8S

PS6S
24VU

24VU

24VU

24VU
A20 B20

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
9
4

N.C.
J180L
0V

5V
0V

5V
0V

5V
0V

5V

0V
0V

5V
0V

0V

5V
0V

5V

0V

0V

0V

5V

FM9LCK

FM9-ON

DF-RxD
DF-TxD
PS1S

PS3S

PS4S
24VU

DP
0V
5V

0V
5V

0V

0V

0V

0V
0V

5V
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10

20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
10
11
12

13
14

15
16
17
18
19
20

10

11
12
13
14
15
16

17
18

19
20
1
2
3

4
5
6

7
8
9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S-TEMP

S-TEMP
CL2-ON

SL3-ON

SL2-ON
M3LCK
M3-ON
PS16S

PS10S

PS11S
PS9S

PS7S

PS8S

PS6S
24VU

24VU

SL1R

24VU

24VU
SL1P
0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V
0V

5V

0V
0V

5V
0V

0V

5V
0V

5V

0V

0V

0V

5V

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J167DA J167DB 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J210D 3 2 1 J167H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J210H J167LA J167LB
J192D 6 5 4 3 2 1
J210L 1 2 3
J652 6 5 4 3 2 1
J192H
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J187D 1 2 3 4 5 6
J192L
J187H
3 2 1
M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J183 J187L
M3 J195D 2 1 2 1 J196D
PS16 2 1 J651 J195H J196H 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J168D J175D J172D
Reversal J184 3 2 1 J195L 1 2 1 2 J196L J168H J175H J172H
Fixing J211D 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 J191D 3 2 1 J194 J168L 1 2 3 4 5 6 J175L 1 2 3
3 2 1 J174
sensor J211H J191H J172L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
M3-38V

motor
M3-0V

PS10 2 1 J190D 3 2 1
J211L 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 J191L J193D PS4
J185 3 2 1 J190H J193H PS6
External delivery 2 1 J186D
1 2 J190L Copyboard cover
J182 3 2 1 J186H J193L 1 2 3
Fixing claw 3 2 1 J170
sensor PS11 1 2 J186L 3 2 1
J23M open/closed sensor
BACK

J171 GND 2
jam sensor
24VU

PULL

SL SL
PS9 Fixing/feeding unit TH2 PS3
24V 1
From relay PCB
Internal delivery sensor outlet sensor Fixing sub thermistor SL
TH1 SL3 SL2 Image
J188 3 2 1
Delivery Fixing leading edge FM9

DF-RxD
Fixing main

DF-TxD
SL1
sensor Inverter

24VU
flapper cleaning

GND
GND

GND
PS7
thermistor

DP
3 2 1 J169
Fixing cleaning belt Fixing inlet solenoid belt solenoid cooling fan
CL 3 2 1 J189
length sensor guide solenoid PS1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J240B 4 3 2 1 POWER CORD MOUNT
CL2 PS8
Scanner home J240A J240C
Fixing cleaning belt position sensor To ADF
Registration clutch
length warning sensor

A-12 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
General Circuit Diagram (5/7) Pre-registration
brake clutch
CL6

CL Manual feed Manual feed


Deck (right) Pre-registration tray pickup tray pull-out
paper middle clutch clutch clutch
level sensor CL5 J271L 2 1 CL7 CL18 Deck (right)
J271H
Waste toner Cartridge inside pickup clutch
Deck (right) Cassette 3 paper CL J271D 1 2 CL To side paper deck
CL
clog detecting feeder motor J152C J152B CL10
upper paper length sensor Cartridge motor 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J152A
Vertical path
switch From relay PCB M6
Deck (right) Deck (right)

24VU
level sensor 1 clutch CL

CL
SV1 M drive switch N.C.
pickup solenoid

M2-38V
open/closed

M2-0V
S13 S12 S11 S10 MSW2 MSW8
PS52 PS51 J255L 2 1 J254L 2 1 J253L 2 1 J252L 2 1 CL8
J255H J254H J253H J252H From relay
J247 2 1 1 0V sensor SL7
J260 1 2 3 1 2 3
J259
J255D 1 2 J254D 1 2 J253D 1 2 J252D 1 2
J247D 2 1 PCB 2 24VU PS23 Deck (right) CL 2 1 J230L
1 2 J601 Drum motor 3 38V SL J230H
3 2 1 J246
4 3 2 1 J257L M0
Developing 4 1 2 3 J236 paper sensor 1 2 L230D
J257H Cartridge clutch J45F
PS22 2 1
1 2 3 4 J257D M Drum fan J231L
detecting CL4 Deck (right) J233 J231H
J251L 2 1 FM8 Deck (right) Deck (right) pickup
1 2 3 J231D 1 2
Cassette J251H 1 2 3 4 5
J502 switch Toner cartridge CL
J251D 1 2 MSW1 feed sensor limit sensor sensor J234L J234H
2 1 Deck
3 paper width cover open/ PS27

24VU
PS24 (right)

CL
detecting closed sensor PS20 J234D 1 2

From relay PCB 2 1 3 2 1 J242L J241L J238 1 2 3


1 2 3 lifter
volume J248
2 1
J254L 2 1 PS59 J242H J241H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J239L
J237 1 2 3 J235
sensor

M2-38V
J242D 1 2 J241D 1 2 3
J254H

M2-0V
J239H
SVR2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PS21
J254D 1 2 3 J244 J239D
J232
1 2 3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J250L

CL10-ON
1 2 J621 J250H

CL8-ON
SL7-ON

PS22S

PS21S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J250D
3 2 1 J256L
Pickup

24V

24V

24V
5V

0V
5V

0V
J256H
1 2 3
To main
J256D M motor 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 switch
J258L 6 5 4 3 2 1 J249L J243L
J258H M2 J249H J243H J24H J229LB 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J229LA
J249D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J243D J24D 1 2
J258D 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5
J622 J229H
CL18-ON

FM8LCK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

MOFF-SW

FM8-ON
J229DB J229DA
CL5-ON

CL6-ON

CL7-ON

MSW2S

MSW1S

CL4-ON
M0LCK
M0-ON
PS52S

PS51S

PS59S
M2-FG
M2-0V
SV1-1
SV1-0

SVR2

PS27S

PS24S

PS23S

PS20S
M6+
24V

24V

24V

24V

24V

24V
M6-
5V

0V
5V

0V

5V
0V

5V

0V

0V
5V

0V

0V
0V
5V

0V

0V

5V

0V

0V

5V

0V
5V

0V
5V

0V
5V

0V
13
12
11
10

13
12
11
10

12
11
10

12
11
10
14
13
12
11
10

14
13
12
11
10
9
8

6
5
4
3
2
1

9
8

9
8

9
8
7

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

9
8

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
B13 A13 B14 A14 B12 A12

J513 J512 J511


DC controller PCB
J515 J516 J514
A11 B11 A12 B12 A14 B14
10
11

10
11

10
11
12

10
11

10

11
12
13
14

10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
9

1
2
3

4
5
6
7

8
9

1
2

3
4
5
6
7

8
9
N.C.

N.C.
N.C.

N.C.
N.C
CL12-ON

CL13-ON

M16-ON

M17-ON

M13-ON

M14-ON
CL9-ON
SL9-ON

M1-ON
PS38S

PS39S

PS37S

PS40S

PS41S

PS48S

PS49S

PS19S

M1-FG

PS55S
SV1-0
SV1-1
SVR3

PS4S
24V

24V

24V

24V
N.C.
0V

5V
0V

5V

0V

5V
0V

5V
0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

0V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

0V

5V

0V
5V

0V

5V
0V
0V

0V

5V
0V

5V
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J290DA J290DB 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 L268D 6 5 4 3 2 1
N.C

J290H 3 2 1 J261D J268H


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 J261H 1 2 3 4 5 6
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J281DA J281DB 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J290LA J290LB J268L
1 2 3 J261L
J281H

N.C.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
J281LA J281LB
N.C

J263D 2 1 J267D 2 1

M M
J286 3 2 31 3 2 1
J265D
J294D 3 2 1 3 2 1 J342D 3 2 1 J303D
4 3 2 1 M13 J265H M14
PS37 J291D J294H J342 J303H J265L 1 2 3
J291H J294L 1 2 3 1 2 3 J342L 1 2 3 J303L Deck Deck (left)
Cassette 3 J291L 1 2 3 4
(right) lifter motor
pickup sensor
lifter
J287 3 2 1 2 1 J362D
J282D 2 1 J283D 2 1
J362H
motor
J282H J283H 1 2 J363D 3 2 1 3 2 1 J364D J264D 2 1 4 3 2 1 J266D J612 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 1 2 PS40 J362L
J282L J283L J363H J364H J264H J266H
Cassette 3 J293D 2 1
J363L 1 2 3 1 2 3 J364L 2 1 L301D J264L 1 2 1 2 3 4 J266L M J269 3 2 1 3 2 1 J270
J293H J301H
open/closed 2 1 J289D J293L 1 2 J301L 1 2
M1 PS54 PS55
3 2 1 J284 3 2 1 J285 J289H
sensor 1 2 J289L
3 2 1 J262
2 1 J611 Deck (left) Deck (left)
PS38 PS39 Main middle paper upper paper

M1-38V
3 2 1
J295 3 2 1 3 2 1 J296 J302 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 J304 PS19 CL SVR3

M1-0V
Cassette 3 Cassette 3 J288
3 2 1 J292 motor level sensor level sensor
Environment Waste toner S14 S15 S16 S17
Cassette 4 paper level
Cassette 3 paper level

CL CL M CL9 SV2
lifter sensor paper sensor PS41 PS49
PS48 sensor PCB case full sensor Vertical path Cassette 4 paper From relay PCB
CL12 CL13 Vertical path 3 Lower right cover M17

paper sensor Cassette 4 Vertical path 2 2 clutch length sensor


Cassette 3 Vertical path 3 open/closed paper sensor
detection PCB
detection PCB

pickup clutch lifter motor Cassette 4 paper


sensor
SL M
clutch width detecting
SL9 M16 volume
Cassette 3 Cassette 3
pickup solenoid lifter motor

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-13
Lower feeding
middle clutch Horizontal Pre-confluence
General Circuit Diagram (6/7) Deck (left) Lower feeding registration sensor Duplexing Duplexing
feeding clutch right clutch motor PS14 reversal motor feeder motor
CL19 CL16 CL17 M15 Deck (left) 1 2 3 J327 M11 M12
Horizontal M M M
CL CL CL feed sensor
registration PS26

[OR]

[GN]
[BR]

[BR]
[OR]
[BR]

[BL]

[BL]
[BK]
sensor

[W]
[R]

[R]
[Y]

[Y]
[R]
[R]

[Y]
1 2 3
U-turn sensor Post-confluence PS18 J328
Duplexing PS13 sensor 1 2 3
J333L 2 1 J332L 2 1 J331L 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 J329L J325L 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 J324L
J335 J333H J332H J331H J329H J325H J324H
reversal PS15 J333T 1 2 J332T 1 2 J331T 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
J329T J325T 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5
J324T
Cassette 4 1 2 3 J339
sensor 1 2 3
pickup solenoid Cassette 4 PS12
J337

SL10 lifter sensor 1 2 3 J341 Reversing J334L 3


J334H
2 1 J366L 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 J326L 11 10 9 8 7
J323H
6 5 4 3 2 1 J323L
Vertical path 4 PS43 flapper J334T 1 2 3 L366T 1
J366H
2 2
3 4 1
J326H
2 3 J326T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
J323T
SL
paper sensor 1 2 3 J308 solenoid
PS46
3 2 1 3 2 1 SL11 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J340L J338L J336L J330L
J312 1 2 3
Cassette 4

SIDE_REGI_M_Vcc
SIDE_REGI_M_Vcc
J340H J338H J336H J330H
Cassette 4

SIDE_REGI_M_A*

SIDE_REGI_M_B*
Cassette 4 Vertical 4

SIDE_REGI_M_A

SIDE_REGI_M_B
J340T 1 2 3 J338T 1 2 3 SL J336T 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
open/closed J330T

DUPF_M_Vcc
paper sensor clutch pickup clutch

DUPI_M_Vcc
DUPI_M_Vcc

DUPF_M_A*

DUPF_M_B*
DUPI_M_A*

DUPI_M_B*

DUPF_M_A

DUPF_M_B
sensor

DUPI_M_A

DUPI_M_B
CL19-ON

CL16-ON

CL17-ON
SL11-ON
PS44 CL15 CL14

PS12S

PS13S

PS15S

PS18S

PS26S

PS14S
PS45

24V

24V

24V

24V
J309 1 2 3
CL CL

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V
5V

0V
1 2 3 J311

N.C.
Cassette 4

18
17
16

15
14
13
12
11
10

18
17
16
15
14
13
12

11
10
2 1

9
8

9
8
7

6
5
4
3
2
1

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J313L 2 1 2 1
J307L J306L
J313H
J313D 1 2 pickup sensor J307H
1 2
J306H
1 2
J307D J306D
PS42 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1
J3606 J3605 J3604
2 1
1 2 3 J310 No-stacking feeder driver PCB B18 A18
J365L
J3602
J365H J3601 J3603
J365D 1 2
B12 A12
1 2 3 4

10
11
12

10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
N.C.

B12 A12 4 J322D


J305LB 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J305LA

24V
0V

0V
5V
J305
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
J305DB J305DA

10
11
12

10
11
12

24VH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

SREG1-HOLD 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
N.C.

0V

0V
5V
CL15-ON

CL14-ON
SL10-ON

12
11
10

12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

DUPF-OFF
PS46S

PS45S

PS42S

PS44S

PS43S

DUPI-OFF
DUP-CNN

SREG1-B
SREG1-A
1
2
3
4

CL11-ON
CL16-ON
CL17-ON
CL18-ON

DUPF-B
DUPF-A
24V

24V

24V

DUPI-B
DUPI-A
PS18S
PS26S
PS15S
PS14S
PS13S
PS12S
5V

0V
5V

0V
5V

0V

5V

0V
5V

0V
N.C.

0V

0V

0V

0V
B12 A12 4

J322L From relay PCB


11
10

11
10
9
8

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

12
11
10

12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
B12 A12
B11 A11 J519
J517
J518 DC controller PCB
A10 B10 J520 J521 J522 J523 J524
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CCX-CNT

POTENTIAL__SENSOR
PTR2N
PTR1N
RDPN
RCPN
CL5N

24VU
N.C.

RxD
TxD
0V
5V

0V

0V

0V

5V
0V
10

10

SRxD
STxD

RES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
9

HD2
RxD
TxD
0V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V
N.C.

CL11-ON

SL8-ON
PS31S

PS32S

PS25S

PS33S

PS34S

24VU

24VU
0V

5V
0V

5V
0V

5V

0V

5V
0V

5V
N.C.

J314DA 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J314DB
For RS-232C For downloading
J314H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J314LA J314LB
N.C.

Control Card V Copy Data Controller


(accessory) (accessory)
3 2 1 J317

PS25

3 2 1
Deck (left) 2 1 J320D 2 1 J321D
J316 J320H J321H
pickup 1 2 J320L 1 2 J321L
PS32
sensor 3 2 1 J319
Deck (left)
PS34
paper sensor
3 2 1 J318 3 2 1
Deck (left)
J315 CL SL
limit sensor
PS31 PS33 CL11 SL8
Deck (left) Deck (left) Deck (left) Deck (left)
lifter sensor open/closed sensor pickup clutch pickup solenoid

A-14 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
50 GND 1 40 GND 40
49 AN6 2 39 AN6 39
48 AN4 3 38 AN4 38
47 AN2 4 37 ROOM_HUM(AN2) 37
46 AN0 5 36 FUSER_TEMP(AN0) 36
45 GND 6 35 GND 35

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.


44 N.C. 7 34 FEED_ MOTOR_FG 34
43 GND 8 33 MINT5 33
42 GND 9 32 N.C. 32
41 DACLK1 10 31 WAKE UP 31
40 DALD1* 11 30 MCS46* 30
39 DUP INV START 12 29 MCS4A* 29
50 3.3V 1 38 FEED MOTOR FG 13 28 GND 28
49 3.3V 2 37 DUMMY ITOP 14 27 MCS42* 27
48 PABUS<0> 3 36 MASTER_POWER_READY 15 26 MCSC0* 26
47 PABUS<1> 4 35 GND 16 25 MRD* 25
46 PABUS<2> 5 34 MCS4A* 17 24 MLWR* 24
45 PABUS<3> 6 33 MCS46* 18 23 GND 23
44 GND 7 32 MCS42* 19 22 DADATA2 22
43 BRD* 8 31 MCSE0* 20 21 DACLK1 21
42 BHWR* 9 30 GND 21 20 DALD1* 20
General Circuit Diagram (7/7)

41 CS8C* 10 29 LZREO 22 19 MABUS<1> 19


40 BRESET* 11 28 HDDACK* 23 18 MABUS<3> 18
1 SGND 1 39 DPRAM INT (HPORT2(6))
12 27 LZ_END 24 17 GND 17
2 GND 2 38 RSYNC* 13 26 GND 25 16 MABUS<5> 16
3 VEVEN<7> 3 37 GND 14 25 MRESET* 26 15 MABUS<7> 15
4 VEVEN<6> 4 36 RCLK 15 24 MMI POWER IN 27 14 MABUS<9> 14
5 GND 5 35 GND 16 23 DCEN* 28 13 DUPLEX_INV_A 13

J1105
6 VEVEN<5> 6 34 BRAOUTA<0> 17 22 IS DPRAM INT* 29 12 GND 12

J1501

1:15V 5:5V
7 VEVEN<4> 7 33 BRAOUTA<1> 18 21 CSB0* 30 11 MDBUS<1> 11

3:8V 7:3.3V
4:GND 8:GND
2:GND 6:GND
8 GND 8 32 BRAOUTA<2> 19 20 MHWR* 31 10 MDBUS<3> 10

50
50
9 VEVEN<3> 9 31 BRAOUTA<3> 20 19 CS68*(MMI DPRAM CS*) 32 9 GND 9
10 VEVEN<2> 10 30 BRAOUTA<4> 21 18 GND 33 8 MDBUS<5> 8
11 GND 11 29 BRAOUTA<5> 22 17 MABUS<0> 34 7 MDBUS<7> 7

J1
12 VEVEN<1> 12 28 BRAOUTA<6> 23 16 MABUS<2> 35 6 MDBUS<9> 6

J1502
13 VEVEN<0> 13 27 BRAOUTA<7> 24 15 MABUS<4> 36 5 GND 5

50
50
J1112
14 GND 14 26 GND 25 14 MABUS<6> 37 4 MDBUS<11> 4
15 SGND 15 25 GND 26 13 MABUS<8> 38 3 MDBUS<13> 3
16 GND 16 24 GND 27 12 MABUS<10> 39 2 MDBUS<15> 2
17 VODD<7> 17 23 BDBUS<8> 28 11 GND 40 1 CCDRSYNC* 1
18 VODD<6> 18 22 BDBUS<9> 29 10 MDBUS<1> 41
A40

B40

19 GND 19 21 BDBUS<10> 30 9 MDBUS<3> 42


J525

20 VODD<5> 20 20 BDBUS<11> 31 8 MDBUS<5> 43


J1407

21 VODD<4> 21 19 BDBUS<12> 32 7 MDBUS<7> 44


B40

A40

22 GND 22 18 BDBUS<13> 33 6 GND 45 40 GND 40


23 VODD<3> 23 17 BDBUS<14> 34 5 MDBUS<9> 46 39 FUSERTEMP(AN7) 39
24 VODD<2> 24 16 BDBUS<15> 35 4 MDBUS<11> 47 38 AN5 38
25 GND 25 15 DOC PWR RDY 36 3 MDBUS<13> 48 37 DRUM_VOLT(AN3) 37
26 VODD<1> 26 14 DOC ERROR 37 2 MDBUS<15> 49 36 ROOM_TEMP(AN1) 36

50
27 VODD<0> 27 13 DOC BUSY 38 1 GND 50 35 GND 35

J1113

CCD PCB

CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)


28 GND 28 12 DOC VE* 39 34 MAIN_MOTOR_FG 34

Original orientation detection PCB


A50
A50

29 GND 29 11 DOC HE* 40 33 RITOP 33


30 RCLK-P 30 10 GND 41 32 DUMMY_ITOP 32

J1102
J1402

31 RCLK-N 31 9 BRAOUTB<0> 42 31 MASTER_POWER_READY 31

B50
B50

32 GND 32 8 BRAOUTB<1> 43 1 GND 50 30 REG_ON 30


DC controller PCB

33 GND 33 7 BRAOUTB<2> 44 2 MDBUS<14> 49 29 MCSE0* 29


34 CCDRSYNC* 34 6 BRAOUTB<3> 45 3 MDBUS<12> 48 28 MCS48* 28
35 DACLKR 35 5 BRAOUTB<4> 46 4 MDBUS<10> 47 27 GND 27

BOARD to BOARD CONNECTOR


BOARD to BOARD CONNECTOR
36 SGND 36 4 BRAOUTB<5> 47 5 MDBUS<8> 46 26 MCS40* 26

J2 2P
37 GND 37 3 BRAOUTB<6> 48 6 GND 45 25 MCS44* 25
38 DALDR 38 2 BRAOUTB<7> 49 7 MDBUS<6> 44 24 MRESET* 24

1:3.3V 2:GND
39 DADATAR 39 1 GND 50 8 MDBUS<4> 43 23 MHWR* 23
40 CCD KILL 40 9 MDBUS<2> 42 22 GND 22
41 GND 41 10 MDBUS<0> 41 21 DACLK2 21
42 PAPER_LENGTH 42 11 GND 40 20 DALD2* 20
1 GND 1
43 PAPER_WIDTH 43 12 MABUS<9> 39 19 DADATA1 19
2 SGND 2
44 GND 44 13 MABUS<7> 38 18 MABUS<0> 18
3 GND 3
45 ABC_ON 45 14 MABUS<5> 37 17 MABUS<2> 17
4 VIDEO<0>-B+ 4
46 NWR_LD 46 15 MABUS<3> 36 16 GND 16
5 VIDEO<0>-B- 5
47 A6_DIN 47 16 MABUS<1> 35 15 MABUS<4> 15
6 GND 6
48 A5_DCK 48 17 GND 34 14 MABUS<6> 14
7 VIDEO<1>-B+ 7
49 GND 49 18 CSD0* IS DPRAM CS* 33 13 MABUS<8> 13
8 VIDEO<1>-B- 8
50 50 19 MRD* 32 12 GND 12
9 GND 9
20 MLWR* 31 11 MDBUS<0> 11
10 VIDEO<2>-B+ 10
21 MMI DPRAM INT 30 10 MDBUS<2> 10
11 VIDEO<2>-B- 11
22 MMI POWER UP 29 9 GND 9
12 GND 12
23 MF CEN* 28 8 MDBUS<4> 8
13 SGND 13
24 IS POWER IN 27 7 MDBUS<6> 7
14 GND 14
Image processor PCB

25 GND 26 6 MDBUS<8> 6
15 VUDEO<3>-B+ 15
26 BOOT RDY 25 5 GND 5
16 VIDEO<3>-B- 16
27 HDDREO 24 4 MDBUS<10> 4
17 GND 17
28 HDDBWR* 23 3 MDBUS<12> 3
18 SCLK-B+ 18
29 GND 22 2 MDBUS<14> 2
19 SCLK-B- 19
30 CSC0* DCON DPRAM CS* 21 1 DUP_INV_START 1
20 GND 20
31 MCS40* 20
21 GND 21
32 MCS44* 19
22 SCLK-A+ 22 5V
33 MCS48* 18
23 SCLK-A- 23 GND
34 GND 17
24 GND 24 GND
40
40

35 REG_ON 16
J354

KRTN2
J1106

J1353

25 VIDEO<0>-A+ 25 12V

11
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1

36 RITOP 15
J1405

26 VIDEO<0>-A- 26
KRTN1 37 SLAVE DPRAM INT 14
27 GND 27

J1010
J1015
2

10
38 MAIN MOTOR FG 13
28 SGND 28
KRTN0 39 DUP MOTOR FG 12
29 GND 29

9
3
40 DADATA1 11
30 VIDEO<1>-A+ 30
41 GND 10
MFC PCB

KDGT7 31 VIDEO<1>-A- 31

8
4
42 CCDRSYNC* 9
32 GND 32
KDGT6 43 GND 8
33 VIDEO<2>-A+ 33

7
5
44 N.C. 7
34 VIDEO<2>-A- 34

1
3
KDGT5 45 GND 6 1 GND 40
35 GND 35

6
6
VLCD 46 AN1 5 2 N.C. 39

J1019
J1012
36 VIDEO<3>-A+ 36

2
2
KDGT4 47 AN3 4 3 CSHD1* 38
37 VIDEO<3>-A- 37

5
7
VEE 48 AN5 3 4 CSHD0* 37
38 GND 38

3
1
KDGT3 49 AN7 2 5 DA2 36
39 SGND 39

4
8
50 GND 1 6 DA0 35
40 GND 40

Contrast volume
KDGT2 7 N.C. 34
9

3
40 GND 1 8 DA1 33
KDGT1 39 SCAN VEN+ 2 9 IOCS16* 32
Image server (HD)

2
10

1 GND 1 38 SCAN VEN- 3 10 INTRQ 31


Laser driver PCB 1

KDGT0 2 GND 2 37 GND 4 11 GND 30

1
11

3 F3-B 3 36 CDATA<0> 5 12 DMACK* 29


Keys, LEDs

4 M6-B 4 35 GND 6 13 CSEL 28


GND 5 NHD-B 5 34 CDATA<1> 7 14 IORDY 27

7
1

6 LDDVE 6 33 GND 8 15 GND 26


5V 7 F3-A 7 32 CDATA<2> 9 16 DIOR* 25

J1009
J1014

6
2

8 M6-A 8 31 GND 10 17 GND 24


30
30

9 NHD-A 9 30 CDATA<3> 11 18 DIOW* 23


J1107

J1354

LRTN2

1
2
5
3

10 GND 10 29 GND 12 19 GND 22


5V LRTN0 11 DI 11 28 CDATA<4> 13 20 DMARQ 21

J1018
J1013

2
1
4
4

12 DO 12 27 GND 14 21 N.C. 20
40
J355

LDGT0 13 SK 13 26 CDATA<5> 15 22 GND 19


3
5

14 PWR-CS* 14 25 GND 16 23 DATA15 18


LDGT1 15 GND 15 24 CDATA<6> 17 24 DATA0 17
40 J1406

2
6

16 GND 16 23 GND 18 25 DATA14 16


LDGT2 17 READY-B 17 22 CDATA<7> 19 26 DATA1 15
1
7

Control panel power switch


18 READY-A 18 21 GND 20 27 DATA13 14
19 GND 19 20 CDATA<8> 21 28 DATA2 13
20 LD-KILL-B 20 19 GND 22 29 DATA12 12
VLCD GND 21 LD-KILL-A 21 18 CDATA<9> 23 30 DATA3 11
1
1
1

20
20
20

VEE 22 LD-OFF-B 22 17 GND 24 31 DATA11 10

LCD
D3 GND 23 LD-OFF-A 23 16 CDATA<10> 25 32 DATA4 9
2
2
2

19
19
19

J1004

D2 24 LD-LIFE 24 15 GND 26 33 DATA10 8


25 B-S/H-B 25 14 CDATA<11> 27 34 DATA5 7
J1110(140Pins)

D1 LCDD3
3
3
3

18
18
18

D0 26 B-S/H-A 26 13 GND 28 35 DATA9 6


VEE LCDD2 27 T-S/H-B 27 12 CDATA<12> 29 36 DATA6 5
4
4
4

17
17
17

GND 28 T-S/H-A 28 11 GND 30 37 DATA8 4


29 GND 29 10 CDATA<13> 31 38 DATA7 3
Page memory PCB

5V LCDD1
5
5
5

16
16
16

XSEL 30 GND 30 9 GND 32 39 GND 2


LP LCDD0 8 CDATA<14> 33 40 RESET* 1
6
6
6

15
15
15

7 GND 34
Control panel CPU PCB

YD
DF LCDCP 6 CDATA<15> 35
7
7
7

14
14
14

Back light DOFF 5 GND 36


GND
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

LCD panel
4
1
4
1

4 CDARTADIR 37
Touch panel

LCDLP
8
8
8

13
13
13

3 CONNECT 38 1 GND 20
LEFT RD
J1114

2
3
2
3
2

LOWER LCDVD 2 CDATAEN 39 ACK 19


9
9
9

12
12
12

1 GND 40 3 GND 18
RIGHT
B40
B40

PC I/F

TD
J1002
J359H
J353H

4
2
3
2
3

UPPER LCDDF D7 17
J1103
J1403

4 3 2 1
10
11
10
11
10
11

40 GND 1 5 GND 16
5V
6
1
4
1
4

N.C. 39 SCAN ITOP+ 2 D6 15


A40
A40

11
10
11
10
11
10

38 SCAN ITOP- 3 7 GND 14


37 SCAN HEN- 4 8 D5 13
J360H

N.C.
J0024H
9
9
9

12
12
12

36 SCAN HEN+ 5 9 GND 12


J353L

J359D
J353D

35 SCAN IMGEN- 6 10 D4 11
N.C.
8
8
8

BLON*
13
13
13

34 SCAN IMGEN+ 7 11 GND 10


1
2

33 SCAN HSYNCN+ 8 12 D3 9
LCDEN
J956
J955

BDIN(BK)
7
7
7

5V
14
14
14

13
1
5

32 SCAN HSYNCN- 9 GND 8


J1005

2 1
2
1

31 GND 10 14 D2 7
J3701

GND GND
J1108

6
6
6

15
15
15

15
2
4

30 SCAN CLK+ 11 GND 6


29 SCAN CLK- 12 16 D1 5
Shielding wire
Shielding wire

PNLRESE 5V
5
5
5

16
16
16

17
3
3

28 GND 13 GND 4 1 20 1 20
27 SCAN VIDEO1- 14 18 D0 3
BLON GND
4
4
4

J1006
17
17
17

19
4
2

26 SCAN VIDEO1+ 15 GND 2


4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1

25 GND 16 20 STB 1 20 1 20 1
GND
System motherboard

-5V
3
3
3

18
18
18
5
1

24 SCAN VIDEO0- 17
PNLRxD* 23 SCAN VIDEO0+ 18
A20
A20
A20
A20
A20

J361
A20

2
2
2

19
19
19

22 GND 19
J1006

PNLTxD* 21 PDL VEN+ 20


J356H
J358H

BD detection PCB

1
1
1

20
20
20

20 PDL VEN- 21
19 PDL ITOP+ 22 1 BUSY* 20 1 20 1 20
J1008

18 PDL ITOP- 23 2 GND 19


17 PDL HEN- 24 3 PE* 18
J1003
J360L
J1455

4
J360D

16 PDL HEN+ 25 GND 17 20 1 20 1


B20 J1409
B20 J356L
B20 J358L
B20 J1461

J0024L
B20 J356D
B20 J358D

J0024D

15 GND 26 5 SELECT* 16
TRST*
Downloading PCB

6
6

14 PDL IMGEN- 27 GND 15


13 PDL IMGEN+ 28 7 FAULT 14
TCAOUT
1:5V

8
5

12 PDL HSYNCN+ 29 GND 13


2:GND
J1001

11 PDL HSYNCN- 30 9 5V 12
TDI
10
4

10 GND 31 GND 11
9 PDL CLK+ 32 11 AUTFD 10
TMS
JTAG I/F

J1452

12
3

8 PDL CLK- 33 GND 9


5:12V 6:GND
3:5.0V 4:GND
1:3.3V 2:GND

7 GND 34 13 INIT 8
FOR PDL
Shielding wire
Shielding wire

TCK
14
2

6 PDL VIDEO1- 35 GND 7


5 PDL VIDEO1+ 36 15 SELIN* 6
GND
16
1

4 GND 37 GND 5
3 PDL VIDEO0- 38 17 CMODESK 4
18
7:N.C.

2 PDL VIDEO0+ 39 GND 3


1 GND 40 19 N.C. 2
J1111

20 N.C. 1
J1451
5:12V 6:GND
3:5.0V 4:GND
1:3.3V 2:GND

FOR SYSTEM

12V
1

PCO1 GND
1
5
1
5
1
5

2
J1410

GND RD
2
4
2
4
2
4

FAN I/F
3

TD
3
3
3
3
3
3

J351H

5V
J352H

J357H

J1456
4
2
4
2
4
2

J1454
1
5
1
5
1
RS232C I/F

J1453
J1401

A32 B32 C32


J351L
J357L

J351D
J357D
J352D

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

5V
5V
5V
5V
5V
12V

12V
12V

RD*

N.C.
N.C.
N.C.

3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V

GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

LWE*
HWR*
BUSY*

CSA80*

RESET*
MIXINT*
SPRDY*
CSACO*

MPRDY*
PDL CLK
MAXINT*

WAKEUP

ABUS<1>
ABUS<3>
ABUS<6>
ABUS<4>
ABUS<7>
ABUS<9>
ABUS<2>
ABUS<5>
ABUS<8>

DBUS<0>
DBUS<3>
DBUS<7>
DBUS<9>
DBUS<1>
DBUS<4>
DBUS<5>
DBUS<2>
DBUS<5>
DBUS<8>

ABUS<10>
ABUS<12>
SCAN CLK

DBUS<12>

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
10
11
DBUS<10> 12
DBUS<13> 13
DBUS<15> 14
15
16
17
18
19
ABUS<13> 20
21
SCAN VIDEO0 22
SCAN VSYNC* 23
24
PDL VIDEO0 25
PDL VSYNC* 26
27
28
29
30
31
32
10
11
DBUS<11> 12
DBUS<14> 13
14
15
16
17
18
ABUS<11> 19
ABUS<14> 20
21
SCAN VIDEO1 22
SCAN HSYNC* 23
VIDEO1RDY* 24
PDL VIDEO1 25
PDL HSYNC* 26
PDL VIDEOEN* 27
28
29
30
31
32

Printer PCB
(accessory)
A-15
APPENDIX

D. SPECIAL TOOLS TABLE


You will need the following tools in addition to the standard tools set to service the copier.
No. Tool name Tool No. Shape Rank* Remarks
1 Digital FY9-2002 A For adjusting the laser
multimeter intensity together with
the laser power checker
(for electrical checks).

2 Laser power FY9-4013 A For adjusting the light


checker intensity together with
the digital multimeter.

3 Door switch TKN-0093 A

4 Mirror FY9-3040 B For adjusting the


positioning distance between No. 1
tool and No. 2 mirrors.
(front, rear)

5 NA-3 test sheet FY9-9196 A For adjusting images


and making checks.

6 Potential FY9-3041 B For checking the zero


sensor tester level of the surface
electrode potential sensor.

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-17
APPENDIX

No. Tool name Tool No. Shape Rank* Remarks


7 Environment FY9-3014 B For checking the
sensor meter environment sensor.
sensor

8 Tester FY9-3038 A For making electrical


extension pin checks (attachment to
the meter).

9 Tester FY9-3039 A For making electrical


extension Pin checks (attachment to
(L-tipped) the meter).

*Rank:
A: Each service person is expected to carry one.
B: Each five or so service persons is expected to carry one.
C: Each workshop is expected to carry one.

A-18 COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
APPENDIX

E. SOLVENTS/OILS
No. Name Uses Composition Remarks
1 Alcohol Cleaning; Hydrocarbon of • Do not bring near fire.
e.g., glass, plastic, the fluorine • Procure locally.
rubber (external family, alcohol, • IPA (isopropyl alcohol)
covers) surface activating
agent, water
2 Solvent Cleaning; Hydrocarbon of • Do not bring near fire.
e.g., metal areas; fluorine family, • Procure locally.
removing oil or hydrocarbon of
toner. chlorine family,
alcohol
3 Heat-resisting Lubricating; Lithium soap of • CK-0427 (500 g/can)
grease e.g., fixing drive mineral family,
parts. molybdenum
disulfide
4 Lubricant Mineral oil • CK-0524 (100 cc)
(paraffin family)
5 Lubricant Lubricating; Silicone oil • CK-0551 (20 g)
e.g., friction parts.

6 Drum cleaning Cleaning; Selenium oxide • CK-0429


powder e/g., photosensitive
drum.
7 Lubricant Lubricating; Silicone oil • FY9-6011 (50 cc)
e.g., scanner rail.

8 Conducting Drum heater Fluorine poly • FY9-6008 (10 g)


grease contact ethyl, Poly tetra
fluorine ethylene

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-19
Prepared by
Office Imaging Products Technical Support Department 3
Office Imaging Products Technical Support Division
CANON INC
Printed in Japan

REVISION 0 (JAN. 1999) (20801, 23715, 30359)

5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride, Ibaraki, 302-8501 Japan

COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC. CANON GP605/GP605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
The Publication is printed on
70%reprocessed paper.

COPYRIGHT
PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME © 1999 CANON INC.
AU JAPON) CANON0199M1.71-1
GP605/GP605V REV.0 JAN. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Você também pode gostar